Mazda6 J61S PDF

MAZDA
MAZDA 66 J61S
J61S
BODY & ACCESSORIES 09

SECTION
PAGE 1 OF 2
Toc of SCT
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYMPTOM
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY TROUBLESHOOTING
AND PUSH BUTTON START [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
ON-BOARD FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B
DIAGNOSTIC[IMMOBILIZER SYMPTOM
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS TROUBLESHOOTING
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . 09-02B (WITHOUT EXTERIOR
ON-BOARD OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]. . 09-03C
DIAGNOSTIC[IMMOBILIZER SYMPTOM
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY TROUBLESHOOTING
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC AND PUSH BUTTON
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D
LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . 09-02D SYMPTOM
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING
[AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E [KEYLESS ENTRY
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYMPTOM
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F TROUBLESHOOTING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] . . . 09-03F
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYMPTOM
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G TROUBLESHOOTING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
[Bluetooth SYSTEM SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE SYMPTOM
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02H TROUBLESHOOTING
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . 09-02I LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-03H
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYMPTOM
[REAR VEHICLE MONITORING TROUBLESHOOTING
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL SYSTEM) ] . . . . . . . . 09-03I
[BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K SYMPTOM
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLESHOOTING
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . 09-03J
SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT SYMPTOM
MZR-CD 2.2, TROUBLESHOOTING
MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K
SYMPTOM SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . 09-03L
(EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM]
PAGE 2 OF 2
SYMPTOM BODY PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-10
TROUBLESHOOTING DOORS AND LIFTGATE . . . . . .09-11
[CAR-NAVIGATION GLASS/WINDOWS/
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03M MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-12
SYMPTOM SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-13
TROUBLESHOOTING SECURITY AND LOCKS. . . . . .09-14
[Bluetooth SYSTEM SUNROOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-15
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE EXTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . .09-16
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]. . . . . . . . 09-03N INTERIOR TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . .09-17
SYMPTOM LIGHTING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . .09-18
TROUBLESHOOTING WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM . . . .09-19
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . 09-03O ENTERTAINMENT . . . . . . . . . . .09-20
SYMPTOM POWER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .09-21
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUMENTATION/
[REAR VEHICLE MONITORING DRIVER INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-22
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .09-03P CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . .09-40
SYMPTOM TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . .09-50
TROUBLESHOOTING SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . .09-60
[PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . .09-03Q
START SYSTEM]
PAGE
Toc of 1SCT
OF 2
09-02A ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC DTC B108C:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–39
START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–5 DTC B10A5:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
FOREWORD [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–41
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–6 DTC B10C1:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–43
START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–6 DTC B10C1:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
DTC B100B:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–12 DTC B10C6:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS
DTC B100C:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
DTC B100C:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
DTC B1026:08 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–21 DTC B10D1:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–22 DTC B10D3:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–23 DTC B10E7:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START S SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–70
YSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–33 DTC B112A:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–35 DTC B112A:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–35 DTC B112A:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–37
START SYSTEM]
PAGE 2 OF 2
DTC B112A:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC P1794:16, P1794:17 [ADVANCED
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–77 START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–127
DTC B113E:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U0028:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–79 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–129
DTC B11FD:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U0401:68 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–81 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–131
DTC B1210:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U201F:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–84 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–132
DTC B11C4:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U201F:13 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–86 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–134
DTC B11E8:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U2100:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–88 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–135
DTC B11E8:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U3000:41 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–90 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–136
DTC C0040:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U3000:49 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–93 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–137
DTC P0560:16, P0560:17 [ADVANCED DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–97 START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–138
DTC P0615:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS DTC U3004:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–99 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–141
ATX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–99 DTC U3004:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
MTX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–102 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
DTC P0615:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–142
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START DTC U3004:16 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–105 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
DTC P0615:13 [ADVANCED KEYLESS SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–144
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START DTC U3004:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–108 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
ATX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–108 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–146
MTX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–110 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
DTC P081C:62 [ADVANCED KEYLESS [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND P
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START USH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-02A–147
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–113 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED
DTC P081D:62 [ADVANCED KEYLESS KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–148
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–115 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES
DTC P0830:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START S
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–117 YSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–149
DTC P0850:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–118 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02A–149
DTC P1708:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02A–121
START SYSTEM]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
B+ ROOM 15 A
FUSE BCM
1D 1C
B+
EGI 5 A FUSE
1E 1A B+
B+ STEERING LOCK STEERING LOCK UNIT

10 A FUSE 2L STOP 5 A FUSE
1B
B+ ACC MIRROR 5 A FUSE BRAKE
RELAY
4A
2A SWITCH
4F 3S
B+
ENGINE IG
B+ IG1 15 A FUSE
RELAY 2C 4B
STARTER RELAY
STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH (MTX)/
4E M TRANSAXLE RANGE SWITCH (ATX)
WIPER 20 A
FUSE 4AA
B+ 4X
4K
WINDSHIELD
WIPER RELAY
3E
4H BRAKE SWITCH2 MTX
IG2 RELAY
3B PCM
BCM
CPP SWITCH
DSC HU/CM 4S 3T
P POSITION
SWITCH NEUTRAL SWITCH
3M
4J ATX
3G
4W B+
TRUNK LID/LIFT GATE
OPENNER SWITCH BCM
PUSH 4Y 2F
BUTTON
START 4T
2J KEYLESS 3P TPMS
CONTROL
2K MODULE
DOOR LOCK LINK SWITCH
2G INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
A 2I
B 4Q
3H C
C 2D F TOUCH SENSOR (RF)
3U D
D 2B REQUEST SWITCH (RF)
A
3O B KEYLESS ANTENNA
E 4R
F 3AD E (EXTERIOR, RF)
COIL ANTENNA 3N
3Q C
4L TOUCH SENSOR (LF)
F
KEYLESS BEEPER 1F 3X D
REQUEST SWITCH (LF)
A
A 3K
3F B KEYLESS ANTENNA
B
(EXTERIOR, LF)
3AB E
REQUEST SWITCH
A 3D 3R C
KEYLESS ANTENNA
B 3AA D (INTERIOR, FRONT)
WGN
B+ 3I C KEYLESS ANTENNA
ILLUMI 7.5 A FUSE 3Z D (INTERIOR, REAR)
4U 3L
B+
C KEYLESS ANTENNA
(INTERIOR, CENTER)
KEYLESS RECEIVER ROOM 15 A 3Y D
FUSE
D 3C C
KEYLESS ANTENNA
C 2H
3AC D (EXTERIOR, REAR)
B
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
FOREWORD [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
WM: BODY AND ELECTRICAL
x The OBD (on-board diagnostic) system has the following functions:

— Malfunction detection function: Detects malfunctions in the advanced keyless entry and push button start
system and outputs DTCs.
— PID/data monitor function: Reads out specific input/output signals and the system status.
x Diagnostic DTCs can be read/cleared using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
1. Connect the M-MDS (IDS) to the DLC-2.
2. After the vehicle is identified, select the following
items from the initialization screen of the IDS.
(1) Select “Self Test”.
(2) Select “Modules”.
(3) Select “RKE”.
3. Verify the DTC according to the directions on the
screen.
x If any DTCs are displayed, perform
troubleshooting according to the
corresponding DTC inspection. DLC-2
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored
in the keyless control module. (See 09-02A-6
CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
screen.
4. Press the clear button on the DTC screen to clear
the DTC.
5. Switch the ignition to off. DLC-2
6. Switch the ignition to ON and wait for 5 s or
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-6 DTC
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
8. Verify that no DTCs are displayed.
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DTC No. Description Reference

(See 09-02A-12 DTC B100B:11
B100B:11 Short to ground in steering lock unit ground circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02A-14 DTC B100B:15
Open circuit or short to power supply in steering lock unit ground
B100B:15 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
circuit
(See 09-02A-17 DTC B100C:11
B100C:11 Short to ground in steering lock unit power supply circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-18 DTC B100C:12
B100C:12 Short to power supply in steering lock unit power supply circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-21 DTC B1026:08
B1026:08 Signal error from steering lock unit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-22 DTC B1026:51
B1026:51 Steering lock unit programming error [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
(See 09-02A-23 DTC B1026:62
B1026:62 Error signal of steering lock unit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-27 DTC B1026:71
B1026:71 Steering lock unit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-29 DTC B1026:87
B1026:87 Communication error to steering lock unit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-32 DTC B1026:92
B1026:92 Steering lock unit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-33 DTC B1026:96
B1026:96 Steering lock unit internal malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-35 DTC B102B:51
B102B:51 Programming error of advanced key [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-35 DTC B108B:23
B108B:23 Short to ground in push button start 1 circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-37 DTC B108B:29
B108B:29 Error signal of push button start [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-39 DTC B108C:23
B108C:23 Short to ground in push button start 2 circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-41 DTC B10A5:12
B10A5:12 Open circuit or short to power supply in keyless beeper circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-43 DTC B10C1:11
B10C1:11 Short to ground in touch sensor (LF) circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-45 DTC B10C1:12
B10C1:12 Short to power supply in touch sensor (LF) circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-47 DTC B10C3:11
B10C3:11 Short to ground in touch sensor (RF) circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-49 DTC B10C3:12
B10C3:12 Short to power supply in touch sensor (RF) circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-51 DTC B10C6:1F
B10C6:1F Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-53 DTC B10C7:1F
B10C7:1F Keyless antenna (interior, rear) circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-56 DTC B10C8:1F
B10C8:1F Keyless antenna (interior, center) circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-58 DTC B10C9:1F
B10C9:1F Keyless antenna (interior, front) circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-61 DTC B10D1:23
B10D1:23 Short to ground in request switch (LF) circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-63 DTC B10D3:23
B10D3:23 Short to ground in request switch (RF) circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-64 DTC B10E7:11
B10E7:11 Short to ground in IG1 relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
(See 09-02A-66 DTC B10E7:12
B10E7:12 Short to power supply in IG1 relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-68 DTC B10E7:16
B10E7:16 IG1 relay circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-70 DTC B10E7:17
B10E7:17 IG1 relay circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-72 DTC B112A:11
B112A:11 Short to ground in IG2 relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-73 DTC B112A:12
B112A:12 Short to power supply in IG2 relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-75 DTC B112A:16
B112A:16 IG2 relay circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-77 DTC B112A:17
B112A:17 IG2 relay circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-79 DTC B113E:11
Short to ground in trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch
B113E:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(5HB, WAGON) circuit
(See 09-02A-86 DTC B11C4:23
B11C4:23*3 Short to ground in request switch circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-88 DTC B11E8:11
Short to ground in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/
B11E8:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
CM and keyless control module
(See 09-02A-90 DTC B11E8:12
Short to power supply in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM or DSC
B11E8:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
HU/CM and keyless control module
(See 09-02A-81 DTC B11FD:1F
B11FD:1F Keyless antenna (exterior, LF) circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-84 DTC B1210:1F
B1210:1F Keyless antenna (exterior, RF) circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-93 DTC C0040:29
C0040:29*1 Error signal of brake switch [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
P0560:16 (See 09-02A-97 DTC P0560:16,
P0560:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
Keyless control module power supply circuit malfunction (+B3)
P0560:17 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02A-99 DTC P0615:11
P0615:11 Short to ground in starter relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-105 DTC P0615:12
P0615:12*2 Short to power supply in starter relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-108 DTC P0615:13
P0615:13 Open circuit in starter relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-113 DTC P081C:62
P081C:62*1 Error signal of P position switch [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-115 DTC P081D:62
P081D:62*2 Error signal of neutral switch [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-117 DTC P0830:23
P0830:23*2 Short to ground in CPP switch circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
(See 09-02A-118 DTC P0850:29
P0850:29*1 Error signal of TR switch [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-121 DTC P1708:29
P1708:29*2 Error signal of CPP switch or starter interlock switch [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
P1794:16 (See 09-02A-127 DTC P1794:16,
P1794:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
P1794:17 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM].)
U0001:88 CAN system communication error

(See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
(See 09-02A-129 DTC U0028:87

U0028:87 Communication error to BCM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
U0100:00 Communication error to PCM
U0101:00*1 Communication error to TCM

U0121:00 Communication error to ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
(See 09-02A-131 DTC U0401:68

U0401:68 Signal error from PCM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-132 DTC U201F:00
U201F:00 Communication error to keyless receiver [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-134 DTC U201F:13
U201F:13 Open circuit in keyless receiver circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-135 DTC U2100:00
U2100:00 Keyless control module configuration error [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
START SYSTEM]
(See 09-02A-136 DTC U3000:41
U3000:41 Keyless control module internal malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-137 DTC U3000:49
U3000:49 Keyless control module internal malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
U3003:16 (See 09-02A-138 DTC U3003:16,
U3003:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
U3003:17 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02A-141 DTC U3004:11
U3004:11 Short to ground in ACC relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-142 DTC U3004:12
U3004:12 Short to power supply in ACC relay circuit [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-144 DTC U3004:16
U3004:16 ACC relay circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02A-146 DTC U3004:17
U3004:17 ACC relay circuit malfunction [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
*1
: ATX
*2
: MTX
*3 : WAGON
START SYSTEM]
Immobilizer system DTC
DTC
M-MDS Description Reference
Security light flashing pattern
display
(See 09-02B-9 SECURITY LIGHT:
12, DTC: B10D5:13/P1260:00
B10D5:13 Coil antenna malfunction [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
13, DTC: B10D7:05/P1260:00
B10D7:05 Key ID number error [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
15, DTC: B10D7:51/P1260:00
14, DTC: B10D7:81/P1260:00
13, DTC: B10D7:94/P1260:00
21, DTC: B10D8:00/P1260:00
B10D8:00 Shortage of programmed key [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00
B10D9:87 Communication error to coil antenna [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00
Communication error to PCM (Data
B10DA:51 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
transfer failure)
23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00
Communication error to PCM (Data
B10DA:62 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
mis-match)
NOT ILLUMINATED, DTC B10E6:11/-
Coil antenna power supply circuit
B10E6:11 Not illuminated [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
malfunction
NOT ILLUMINATED, DTC B10E6:12/-
Coil antenna power supply circuit
B10E6:12 Not illuminated [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
malfunction
16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00
Communication error to PCM (No
U0100:87 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
response)
End Of Sie
WM: ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND START SYSTEM
START SYSTEM]
DTC B100B:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
Warning
x If this DTC is detected, the system will enter the fail-safe function to ensure safety. If the vehicle is
left as it is for a specified time limit or more, or the ignition is operated a specified number of times
or more while the fail-safe function is operating, the ignition will remain stuck in off and it is
possible that the engine cannot be started. Therefore, perform the malfunction diagnosis while the
engine can be started. In addition, after having performed the malfunction diagnosis, verify that
this DTC is not detected with the steering wheel locked. If the DTC is not detected, the system
returns to normal from the fail-safe function.
Note
x When the system enters the fail-safe function, the keyless warning light and the push button start indicator
light illuminate as follows:
— When the clutch pedal (MTX) or the brake pedal (ATX) is depressed while the ignition is switched off,
both lights illuminate (red).
— When the ignition is switched to ACC or ON, both lights illuminate (red) constantly.
KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT (RED)
PUSH BUTTON START

INDICATOR LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in steering lock unit ground circuit

DETECTION x Steering lock unit ground circuit voltage less than threshold is detected for 0.2 s, while the circuit is not
CONDITION active.
x Steering lock unit connector or terminals malfunction
x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal B and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 1A
x Steering lock unit malfunction
x Keyless control module malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in steering lock unit ground circuit
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
1E 1C 1A 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
H F D B
1F 1D 1B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
Diagnostic Procedure
Step Inspection Action
1 INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONNECTOR CONDITION Step 5.
x Switch the ignition to off. No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the negative battery cable.
x Disconnect the steering lock unit connector.
x Inspect the connector and terminals
(corrosion, damage, pin disconnection).
x Is there any malfunction?
2 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the keyless control module No Go to the next step.
connector.
3 INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to Step 5.
GROUND No Go to the next step.
x Steering lock unit and keyless control module
connectors are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between steering lock
unit terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
x Is there continuity?
START SYSTEM]
4 INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT Yes Replace the steering lock unit and perform the steering
x Inspect the steering lock unit. lock unit programming.
(See 09-21-8 STEERING LOCK UNIT (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE
x Is there any malfunction? REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
Go to the next step.
No Go to the next step.
5 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Repeat the inspection from Step 1.
COMPLETED If the malfunction recurs, replace the keyless control
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected module, then go to the next step.
connectors. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Perform the following procedure within 5 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
min. No Go to the next step.
1. Clear the DTC from the keyless control
module using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
2. Switch the ignition to off, then open the
door to lock the steering.
3. Perform the advanced keyless entry and
push button start system DTC inspection
using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02A-6 DTC INSPECTION
x Is the same DTC present?
6 VERIFY THAT NO OTHER DTCs ARE Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
PRESENT (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Are any DTCs present? ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
No DTC troubleshooting completed.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Open circuit or short to power supply in steering lock unit ground circuit
DETECTION
x Steering lock unit ground circuit voltage higher than threshold is detected for 0.2 s.
CONDITION
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal B and keyless control
POSSIBLE module terminal 1A
CAUSE x Open circuit in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal B and keyless control module
terminal 1A
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Open circuit or short to power supply in steering lock unit ground circuit
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
H F D B
connector.
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to power supply, then go to Step 6.
POWER SUPPLY No Go to the next step.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable.
x Switch the ignition to ON.
x Measure the voltage at the steering lock unit
terminal B (wiring harness-side).
x Is there any voltage?
START SYSTEM]
4 INSPECT STEERING LOCK UNIT Yes Go to the next step.
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
CIRCUIT circuit, then go to Step 6.
x Switch the ignition to off.
unit terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 1A (wiring
harness-side).
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
module using the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Switch the ignition to off, then open the door
to lock the steering.
x Perform the advanced keyless entry and
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC B100C:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in steering lock unit power supply circuit

DETECTION x Steering lock unit power supply circuit voltage less than threshold is detected for 0.2 s, while the circuit
CONDITION is active.
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal F and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 1C
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
H F D B
connector.
START SYSTEM]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 5.
SHORT TO GROUND No Go to the next step.
unit terminal F (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
Warning
Note
START SYSTEM]
PUSH BUTTON START

INDICATOR LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in steering lock unit power supply circuit
DETECTION x Steering lock unit power supply circuit voltage higher than threshold is detected for 0.2 s, while the
CONDITION circuit is not active.
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal F and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 1C
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
H F D B
START SYSTEM]
connector.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 5.
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY No Go to the next step.
terminal F (wiring harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC B1026:08 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Signal error from steering lock unit

DETECTION
x Keyless control module receives the error ID signal from the steering lock unit.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
x Steering lock unit programming error
CAUSE
connector.
3 PERFORM STEERING LOCK UNIT Yes Go to the next step.
PROGRAMMING No Go to Step 6.
x Perform the steering lock unit programming.
(See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID
CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM].)
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit programming error

DETECTION
x Keyless control module detects the steering lock unit programming error.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
x Programming is not performed after replace steering lock unit
CAUSE
connector.
START SYSTEM]
3 PERFORM STEERING LOCK UNIT Yes Go to the next step.
PROGRAMMING No Go to Step 6.
x Perform the steering lock unit programming.
(See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID
CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED
START SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
Warning
START SYSTEM]
Note
PUSH BUTTON START

INDICATOR LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION Error signal of steering lock unit

DETECTION x Keyless control module receives the mismatch signal between unlock signal and communication signal
CONDITION from the steering lock unit.
x Short to ground in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal E and keyless control module
terminal 4A
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal E and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 4A
x Open circuit in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal E and keyless control module
terminal 4A
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Error signal of steering lock unit
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
H F D B
connector.
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
unit terminal E (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
START SYSTEM]
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
terminal E (wiring harness-side).
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
OPEN CIRCUIT circuit, then go to Step 7.
unit terminal E (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 4A (wiring
harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit malfunction

DETECTION
x Unable to lock the steering column.
CONDITION
x Short to ground in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal F and keyless control module
terminal 1C
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal B and keyless control
POSSIBLE
module terminal 1A
CAUSE
x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— Steering lock unit terminal F—Keyless control module terminal 1C
— Steering lock unit terminal B—Keyless control module terminal 1A
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
H F D B
START SYSTEM]
connector.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
unit terminal F (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to power supply, then go to Step 7.
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Steering lock unit and keyless control module circuit, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect for continuity between the following
terminals (wiring harness-side):
— Steering lock unit terminal F—Keyless
control module terminal 1C
— Steering lock unit terminal B—Keyless
control module terminal 1A
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Communication error to steering lock unit

DETECTION
x Communication error between keyless control module and steering lock unit.
CONDITION
x Short to ground in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal C and keyless control module
terminal 2L
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal C and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 2L
x Open circuit in wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal C and keyless control module
terminal 2L
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Communication error to steering lock unit
BATTERY
1C F
1A B
2L C
4A E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
G E C A
H F D B
connector.
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
unit terminal C (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
START SYSTEM]
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
terminal C (wiring harness-side).
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
unit terminal C (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 2L (wiring
harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
Warning
Note
PUSH BUTTON START

INDICATOR LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit malfunction

DETECTION x Keyless control module receives the position signal indicating a serious malfunction from the steering
CONDITION lock unit.
POSSIBLE x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction
CAUSE x Steering lock unit malfunction
START SYSTEM]
connector.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
Warning
START SYSTEM]
Note
PUSH BUTTON START

INDICATOR LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit internal malfunction

DETECTION
x Keyless control module receives the signal of steering lock unit internal fault.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Steering lock unit malfunction
CAUSE x Keyless control module malfunction
2 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
COMPLETED step.
x Perform the following procedure within 5 (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
min. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
1. Clear the DTC from the keyless control ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Programming error of advanced key

x There is no record that an advanced key was programed (programming is never performed in past).
DETECTION Note
CONDITION
x If the advanced key has never been programmed, DTC B102B:51 cannot be detected even if the
advanced key is cleared.
POSSIBLE x Advanced key is not programmed.
1 VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED Yes Go to the next step.
ADVANCED KEYS No Program a new advanced key, then go to the next step.
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS: (See 09-14-116 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE
(See 09-02A-147 PID/DATA MONITOR REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM].)
— NUMCARD
(See 09-02A-148 PID/DATA MONITOR
TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
x Is there a programmed advanced key?
COMPLETED step.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
module using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in push button start 1 circuit

DETECTION
x 120 s have elapsed since the push button start 1 signal was detected.
CONDITION
x Push button start connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between push button start terminal A and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 2J
x Push button start malfunction
START SYSTEM]
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE PUSH BUTTON START
AUTO RETURN
2J A
2K B
AUTO RETURN

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A K I G E C A
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B L J H F D B
1 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the push button start connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND to ground, then go to Step 5.
x Push button start and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between push button
start terminal A (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
4 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Replace the push button start, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the push button start. (See 09-21-8 PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/
(See 09-21-9 PUSH BUTTON START INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START No Go to the next step.
SYSTEM].)
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Error signal of push button start

DETECTION
x A combination of the push button start 1 and 2 signals is abnormal.
CONDITION
x Short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— Push button start terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 2J
— Push button start terminal B—Keyless control module terminal 2K
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between the following terminals:
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
AUTO RETURN
2J A
2K B
AUTO RETURN

START SYSTEM]
connector.
terminals (wiring harness-side) and body
ground:
— Push button start terminal A
— Push button start terminal B
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER to power supply, then go to Step 7.
SUPPLY No Go to the next step.
x Push button start and keyless control module
x Measure the voltage at the following
— Push button start terminal A
— Push button start terminal B
5 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Replace the push button start, then go to Step 7.
x Switch the ignition to off. (See 09-21-8 PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
x Inspect the push button start. AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-21-9 PUSH BUTTON START No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM].)
6 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Go to the next step.
x Push button start and keyless control module circuit, then go to the next step.
— Push button start terminal A—Keyless
control module terminal 2J
— Push button start terminal B—Keyless
control module terminal 2K
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie

DETECTION
x 120 s have elapsed since the push button start 2 signal was detected.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between push button start terminal B and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 2K
AUTO RETURN
2J A
2K B
AUTO RETURN

START SYSTEM]
connector.
x Inspect for continuity between push button
start terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
4 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Replace the push button start, then go to the next step.
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC B10A5:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Open circuit or short to power supply in keyless beeper circuit

DETECTION
x Keyless beeper circuit voltage is higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V), while the circuit is not active.
CONDITION
x Keyless beeper connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless beeper terminal B and body ground
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between keyless beeper terminal A and keyless control
POSSIBLE
module terminal 3K
CAUSE
x Keyless beeper malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless beeper terminal A and keyless control module terminal
3K
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
KEYLESS BEEPER
3K A B
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS BEEPER

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
B A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the keyless beeper connector.
2 INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x Keyless beeper connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect for continuity between keyless
beeper terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
connector.
4 INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY to power supply, then go to Step 7.
x Keyless beeper and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage at the keyless beeper
terminal A (wiring harness-side).
5 INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER Yes Replace the keyless beeper, then go to Step 7.
x Switch the ignition to off. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
x Inspect the keyless beeper. PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-109 KEYLESS BEEPER No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM].)
6 INSPECT KEYLESS BEEPER CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Keyless beeper and keyless control module circuit, then go to the next step.
beeper terminal A (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 3K (wiring
harness-side).
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10C1:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in touch sensor (LF) circuit

DETECTION x Touch sensor (LF) circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s while the circuit is
CONDITION active.
x Front outer handle (LH) connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between front outer handle (LH) terminal C and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 3Q
x Touch sensor (LF) malfunction
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FRONT OUTER HANDLE (LH)
TOUCH SENSOR (LF)
3Q C

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT FRONT OUTER HANDLE (LH) Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the front outer handle (LH)
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT TOUCH SENSOR (LF) CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
FOR SHORT TO GROUND to ground, then go to Step 5.
x Front outer handle (LH) and keyless control No Go to the next step.
module connectors are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between front outer
handle (LH) terminal C (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
4 VERIFY TOUCH SENSOR (LF) Yes Replace the touch sensor (LF), then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION (See 09-14-111 TOUCH SENSOR REMOVAL/
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
connectors. PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. No Go to Step 6.
using the M-MDS.
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in touch sensor (LF) circuit

DETECTION x Touch sensor (LF) circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s while the circuit
CONDITION is not active.
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between front outer handle (LH) terminal C and keyless
CAUSE control module terminal 3Q
x Touch sensor (LF) malfunction
TOUCH SENSOR (LF)

3Q C

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT TOUCH SENSOR (LF) CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Measure the voltage at the front outer handle
(LH) terminal C (wiring harness-side).
4 VERIFY TOUCH SENSOR (LF) Yes Replace the touch sensor (LF), then go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in touch sensor (RF) circuit

DETECTION x Touch sensor (RF) circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s while the circuit is
CONDITION active.
x Front outer handle (RH) connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between front outer handle (RH) terminal C and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 3H
x Touch sensor (RF) malfunction
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FRONT OUTER HANDLE (RH)
TOUCH SENSOR (RF)

3H C

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT FRONT OUTER HANDLE (RH) Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the front outer handle (RH)
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT TOUCH SENSOR (RF) CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Front outer handle (RH) and keyless control No Go to the next step.
handle (RH) terminal C (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
4 VERIFY TOUCH SENSOR (RF) Yes Replace the touch sensor (RF), then go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in touch sensor (RF) circuit

DETECTION x Touch sensor (RF) circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s while the circuit
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between front outer handle (RH) terminal C and keyless
CAUSE control module terminal 3H
x Touch sensor (RF) malfunction
TOUCH SENSOR (RF)
3H C

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT TOUCH SENSOR (RF) CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Measure the voltage at the front outer handle
(RH) terminal C (wiring harness-side).
4 VERIFY TOUCH SENSOR (RF) Yes Replace the touch sensor (RF), then go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC B10C6:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Cannot receive the signal correctly from the keyless antenna (exterior, rear).
CONDITION
x Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) connector or terminals malfunction
— Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 3C
— Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 3AC
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) malfunction
KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE (EXTERIOR, REAR)
LF-DRIVER IC
3C C
3AC D
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR)

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B D C B A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
1 INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
(EXTERIOR, REAR) CONNECTOR Step 7.
CONDITION No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the keyless antenna (exterior,
rear) connector.
connector.
START SYSTEM]
3 INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
(EXTERIOR, REAR) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) and keyless
control module connectors are disconnected.
ground:
— Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) terminal
C
D
(EXTERIOR, REAR) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
C
D
5 INSPECT KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Go to the next step.
(EXTERIOR, REAR) CIRCUIT FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
C—Keyless control module terminal 3C
D—Keyless control module terminal 3AC
6 VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Replace the keyless antenna (exterior, rear), then go to
(EXTERIOR, REAR) MALFUNCTION the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected (See 09-14-106 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/
connectors. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control No Go to Step 8.
x Open any door or trunk/liftgate, then close all
doors or the trunk/liftgate with the ignition
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, rear) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Cannot receive the signal correctly from the keyless antenna (interior, rear).
CONDITION
x Keyless antenna (interior, rear) connector or terminals malfunction
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 3I
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 3Z
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Keyless antenna (interior, rear) malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, rear) circuit malfunction
KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE (INTERIOR, REAR)
LF-DRIVER IC
3I C
3Z D
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR)

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
(INTERIOR, REAR) CONNECTOR Step 7.
x Disconnect the keyless antenna (interior,
rear) connector.
connector.
(INTERIOR, REAR) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Keyless antenna (interior, rear) and keyless
ground:
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal C
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal D
START SYSTEM]
(INTERIOR, REAR) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal C
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal D
(INTERIOR, REAR) CIRCUIT FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal
C—Keyless control module terminal 3I
— Keyless antenna (interior, rear) terminal
D—Keyless control module terminal 3Z
6 VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Replace the keyless antenna (interior, rear), then go to the
(INTERIOR, REAR) MALFUNCTION next step.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, center) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Cannot receive the signal correctly from the keyless antenna (interior, center).
CONDITION
x Keyless antenna (interior, center) connector or terminals malfunction
— Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 3L
— Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 3Y
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Keyless antenna (interior, center) malfunction
KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE (INTERIOR, CENTER)
LF-DRIVER IC
3L C
3Y D
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER)

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
(INTERIOR, CENTER) CONNECTOR Step 7.
center) connector.
connector.
(INTERIOR, CENTER) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Keyless antenna (interior, center) and
keyless control module connectors are
disconnected.
ground:
— Keyless antenna (interior, center) terminal
C
D
(INTERIOR, CENTER) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
disconnected.
C
D
(INTERIOR, CENTER) CIRCUIT FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
disconnected.
C—Keyless control module terminal 3L
D—Keyless control module terminal 3Y
START SYSTEM]
6 VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Replace the keyless antenna (interior, center), then go to
(INTERIOR, CENTER) MALFUNCTION the next step.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, front) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Cannot receive the signal correctly from the keyless antenna (interior, front).
CONDITION
x Keyless antenna (interior, front) connector or terminals malfunction
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 3R
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 3AA
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Keyless antenna (interior, front) malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, front) circuit malfunction
KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE (INTERIOR, FRONT)
LF-DRIVER IC
3R C
3AA D
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, FRONT)

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
(INTERIOR, FRONT) CONNECTOR Step 7.
front) connector.
connector.
(INTERIOR, FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Keyless antenna (interior, front) and keyless
ground:
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal C
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal D
START SYSTEM]
(INTERIOR, FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal C
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal D
(INTERIOR, FRONT) CIRCUIT FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal
C—Keyless control module terminal 3R
— Keyless antenna (interior, front) terminal
D—Keyless control module terminal 3AA
6 VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Replace the keyless antenna (interior, front), then go to
(INTERIOR, FRONT) MALFUNCTION the next step.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
End Of Sie
DTC B10D1:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in request switch (LF) circuit

DETECTION
x Keyless control module detects the request switch (LF) ON signal while driving.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between front outer handle (LH) terminal D and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 3X
x Request switch (LF) malfunction
REQUEST SWITCH (LF)

3X D

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH (LF) Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
handle (LH) terminal D (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
4 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH (LF) Yes Replace the request switch (LF), then go to the next step.
x Inspect the request switch (LF). (See 09-14-110 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-14-111 REQUEST SWITCH INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC B10D3:23 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in request switch (RF) circuit

DETECTION
x Keyless control module detects the request switch (RF) ON signal while driving.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between front outer handle (RH) terminal D and keyless control
CAUSE module terminal 3U
x Request switch (RF) malfunction
REQUEST SWITCH (RF)

3U D

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH (RF) Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
handle (RH) terminal D (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
START SYSTEM]
4 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH (RF) Yes Replace the request switch (RF), then go to the next step.
x Inspect the request switch (RF). (See 09-14-110 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10E7:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in IG1 relay circuit

DETECTION x IG1 relay output circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.1 s, while the circuit is
CONDITION active.
x Relay block connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2G and keyless control module terminal
CAUSE 4E
x Relay block malfunction
BATTERY RELAY BLOCK FUSE BLOCK KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
IG1 RELAY
ENGINE IG 15A
1B 2C
2G 4E
RELAY BLOCK KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A 2G 2E 2C 2A
2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
1F 1D 1B 2H 2F 2D 2B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT RELAY BLOCK CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 5.
x Disconnect the relay block connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT IG1 RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Relay block and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between relay block
terminal 2G (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
4 INSPECT RELAY BLOCK Yes Replace the relay block, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the relay block. (See 09-21-10 RELAY BLOCK REMOVAL/
(See 09-21-11 RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in IG1 relay circuit

DETECTION x IG1 relay output circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.1 s, while the circuit
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2G and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 4E
IG1 RELAY
ENGINE IG 15A
1B 2C
2G 4E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A 2G 2E 2C 2A
1F 1D 1B 2H 2F 2D 2B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
x Measure the voltage at the relay block
terminal 2G (wiring harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION IG1 relay circuit malfunction

DETECTION x IG1 monitor input circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while IG1 relay
CONDITION output circuit is active.
x Open circuit or short to ground in IG1 monitor input circuit
POSSIBLE — Short to ground in wiring harness between ENGINE IG 15 A fuse and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 2C
— ENGINE IG 15 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 1B and keyless control module terminal
2C
IG1 RELAY
ENGINE IG 15A
1B 2C
2G 4E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A 2G 2E 2C 2A
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 5.
2 INSPECT RELAY BLOCK Yes Replace the relay block, then go to Step 5.
connector.
4 INSPECT IG1 MONITOR INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO No Inspect the ENGINE IG 15 A fuse.
GROUND x If the fuse is melt:
x Relay block and keyless control module — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
connectors are disconnected. short to ground.
x Reconnect the relay block connector. — Replace the fuse.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. x If the fuse is deterioration:
x Switch the ignition to ON. — Replace the fuse.
x Measure the voltage at the keyless control x If the fuse is normal:
module terminal 2C (wiring harness-side). — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
x Is the voltage B+? open circuit.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]

DETECTION x IG1 monitor input circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while IG1 relay
CONDITION output circuit is not active.
x Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2C and body ground
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block terminal 1B and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 2C
x Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2G and keyless control module terminal 4E
IG1 RELAY
ENGINE IG 15A
1B 2C
2C 2G 4E

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A 2G 2E 2C 2A
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 7.
2 INSPECT IG1 RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Relay block connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 7.
terminal 2C (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
connector.
4 INSPECT IG1 MONITOR INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
terminal 1B (wiring harness-side).
6 INSPECT IG1 RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Relay block and keyless control module circuit, then go to the next step.
terminal 2G (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 4E (wiring
harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
End Of Sie
DTC B112A:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in IG2 relay circuit

DETECTION x IG2 relay output circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.1 s, while the circuit is
CONDITION active.
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2A and keyless control module terminal
CAUSE 4H
WINDSHIELD WIPER RELAY

WIPER 20A
1C 4X
2C 2A 4H
IG2 RELAY
1F

2G 2E 2C 2A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A
2H 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
1F 1D 1B 2F 2D 2B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
terminal 2A (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
id09021c404700

DETECTION x IG2 relay output circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.1 s, while the circuit
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2A and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 4H
START SYSTEM]

WIPER 20A
1C 4X
2C 2A 4H
IG2 RELAY
1F

2G 2E 2C 2A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A
2H 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
1F 1D 1B 2F 2D 2B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
terminal 2A (wiring harness-side).
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie

DETECTION x IG2 monitor input circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while IG2 relay
x Open circuit or short to ground in IG2 monitor input circuit
POSSIBLE — Short to ground in wiring harness between WIPER 20 A fuse and keyless control module terminal
CAUSE 4X
— WIPER 20 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 1C and keyless control module terminal
4X
START SYSTEM]

WIPER 20A
1C 4X
2C 2A 4H
IG2 RELAY
1F

2G 2E 2C 2A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A
2H 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
1F 1D 1B 2F 2D 2B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
START SYSTEM]
4 INSPECT IG1 MONITOR INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO No Inspect the WIPER 20 A fuse.
module terminal 4X (wiring harness-side). — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie

DETECTION x IG2 monitor input circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while IG2 relay
CONDITION output circuit is not active.
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block terminal 1C and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 4X
x Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2A and keyless control module terminal 4H
START SYSTEM]

WIPER 20A
1C 4X
2C 2A 4H
IG2 RELAY
1F

2G 2E 2C 2A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
1E 1C 1A
2H 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
1F 1D 1B 2F 2D 2B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
CONDITION Step 7.
2 INSPECT IG2 RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
ground.
connector.
4 INSPECT IG2 MONITOR INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
terminal 1C (wiring harness-side).
START SYSTEM]
6 INSPECT IG2 RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
terminal 2A (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 4H (wiring
harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B113E:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit
DETECTION x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit voltage less than 1 V is
CONDITION detected for 1 s, while ignition switch is ON.
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) connector or terminals
malfunction
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) malfunction
x BCM connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
— Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal B—Keyless control
module terminal 3G
— Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal B—BCM terminal 6E
x BCM malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE BCM
6E
5V
3G B A 6A
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD)/

LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (5HB, WAGON)
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD)/ BCM

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (5HB, WAGON) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B A B 6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
1 INSPECT TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
(4SD)/LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH Step 7.
(5HB, WAGON) CONNECTOR No Go to the next step.
CONDITION
x Disconnect the trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/
liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON)
connector.
2 INSPECT TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH Yes Replace the trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener
(4SD)/LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH switch (5HB, WAGON), then go to Step 7.
(See 09-14-120 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
(5HB, WAGON)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/ (See 09-14-118 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON). REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-120 TRUNK LID OPENER
SWITCH INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
(See 09-14-119 LIFTGATE OPENER
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
3 INSPECT BCM CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 7.
x Disconnect the BCM connector. No Go to the next step.
connector.
START SYSTEM]
5 INSPECT TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
(4SD)/LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH to ground, then go to Step 7.
(5HB, WAGON) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT No Go to the next step.
TO GROUND
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener
switch (5HB, WAGON), BCM and keyless
x Inspect for continuity between trunk lid
opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch
(5HB, WAGON) terminal B (wiring harness-
side) and body ground.
6 INSPECT BCM Yes Go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected No Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
connectors. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 6E
(wiring harness-side).
x Is the voltage normal?
(See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B11FD:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (exterior, LF) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Cannot receive the signal correctly from the keyless antenna (exterior, LF).
CONDITION
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal B—Keyless control module terminal 3F
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 3AB
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Keyless antenna (exterior, LF) malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (exterior, LF) circuit malfunction
LF-DRIVER IC KEYLESS ANTENNA

(EXTERIOR, LF)
3F B
3AB E

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
connector.
connector.
(EXTERIOR, LF) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Front outer handle (LH) and keyless control
ground:
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal B
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal E
(EXTERIOR, LF) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal B
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal E
START SYSTEM]
(EXTERIOR, LF) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal B—
Keyless control module terminal 3F
— Front outer handle (LH) terminal E—
Keyless control module terminal 3AB
6 VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Replace the keyless antenna (exterior, LF), then go to the
(EXTERIOR, LF) MALFUNCTION next step.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC B1210:1F [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (exterior, RF) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Cannot receive the signal correctly from the keyless antenna (exterior, RF).
CONDITION
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal B—Keyless control module terminal 3O
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 3AD
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Keyless antenna (exterior, RF) malfunction
LF-DRIVER IC KEYLESS ANTENNA

(EXTERIOR, RF)
3O B
3AD E

D A
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
E B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
F C
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
connector.
connector.
START SYSTEM]
(EXTERIOR, RF) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Front outer handle (RH) and keyless control
ground:
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal B
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal E
(EXTERIOR, RF) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to Step 7.
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal B
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal E
(EXTERIOR, RF) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal B—
Keyless control module terminal 3O
— Front outer handle (RH) terminal E—
Keyless control module terminal 3AD
6 VERIFY KEYLESS ANTENNA Yes Replace the keyless antenna (exterior, RF), then go to the
(EXTERIOR, RF) MALFUNCTION next step.
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
switched off.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in request switch circuit

DETECTION
x Keyless control module detects the request switch signal while driving.
CONDITION
x Request switch connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between request switch terminal A and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 3D
x Request switch malfunction
REQUEST SWITCH
3D A B
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REQUEST SWITCH

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B A B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the request switch connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Request switch and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between request switch
terminal A (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
4 INSPECT REQUEST SWITCH Yes Replace the request switch, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the request switch. (See 09-14-110 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM and keyless control module
DETECTION x ABS driver circuit voltage lower than the specification (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.1 s with the ABS
CONDITION driver operating.
x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
— ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM terminal AF—BCM terminal 1E
CAUSE
— BCM terminal 6K—Keyless control module terminal 4S
x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM malfunction
x BCM malfunction
ABS HU/CM/
DSC HU/CM
AF
1E
4S 6K IG1
ABS HU/CM/ BCM

DSC HU/CM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A
A C F I L O R AG 1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B
B D G J M P S AH
E N T AF
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B

4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
connector.
CONDITION Step 7.
connector.
4 INSPECT ABS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SHORT TO GROUND to ground, then go to Step 7.
x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, BCM and No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
ground:
— BCM terminal 1E
— BCM terminal 6K
5 INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM Yes Go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected No Replace the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, then go to Step
connectors. 7.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. (See 04-13-2 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Measure the voltage at the ABS HU/CM or (See 04-15-2 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DSC HU/CM terminal AF (wiring harness-
side).
(See 04-13-5 ABS HU/CM INSPECTION.)
(See 04-15-6 DSC HU/CM INSPECTION.)
x Measure the voltage at the following No Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
terminals (wiring harness-side): (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
— BCM terminal 1E REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— BCM terminal 6K
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
Short to power supply in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM and keyless control
DESCRIPTION
module
DETECTION x ABS driver voltage higher than the specification (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.1 s with the ABS driver
CONDITION not operating.
x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE
— ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM terminal AF—BCM terminal 1E
CAUSE
— BCM terminal 6K—Keyless control module terminal 4S
x BCM malfunction
START SYSTEM]
Short to power supply in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM and keyless control
DESCRIPTION
module
ABS HU/CM/
DSC HU/CM
AF
1E
4S 6K IG1
ABS HU/CM/ BCM

DSC HU/CM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A
A C F I L O R AG 1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B
B D G J M P S AH
E N T AF
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B

4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
1 INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
connector.
CONDITION Step 7.
START SYSTEM]
connector.
4 INSPECT ABS DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY to power supply, then go to Step 7.
x ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, BCM and No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
— BCM terminal 1E
— BCM terminal 6K
5 INSPECT ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM Yes Go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected No Replace the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, then go to Step
connectors. 7.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. (See 04-13-2 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Measure the voltage at the ABS HU/CM or (See 04-15-2 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DSC HU/CM terminal AF (wiring harness-
side).
(See 04-13-5 ABS HU/CM INSPECTION.)
(See 04-15-6 DSC HU/CM INSPECTION.)
x Measure the voltage at the following No Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
terminals (wiring harness-side): (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
— BCM terminal 1E REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— BCM terminal 6K
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC C0040:29 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Error signal of brake switch

DETECTION
x A combination of the brake switch 1 and 2 signals is abnormal.
CONDITION
x Brake switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal B and body ground
x Open circuit or short to ground in brake switch power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between brake switch terminal A and STOP 10 A fuse
— STOP 10 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch terminal A and battery positive terminal
x PCM connector or terminals malfunction
— Brake switch terminal C—PCM terminal 1AF
— Brake switch terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 3E
POSSIBLE
— Brake switch terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 3S
CAUSE
x Brake switch malfunction
x PCM malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Error signal of brake switch
BATTERY MAIN FUSE BLOCK PCM
STOP 10 A
1AF
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE BRAKE SWITCH
A
BRAKE SWITCH2
3E C
BRAKE SWITCH
3S D
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE BRAKE SWITCH

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
PCM
1BE 1BA 1AW 1AS 1AO 1AK 1AG 1AC 1Y 1U 1Q 1M 1I 1E 1A

1BF 1BB 1AX 1AT 1AP 1AL 1AH 1AD 1Z 1V 1R 1N 1J 1F 1B
1BG 1BC 1AY 1AU 1AQ 1AM 1AI 1AE 1AA 1W 1S 1O 1K 1G 1C

1BH 1BD 1AZ 1AV 1AR 1AN 1AJ 1AF 1AB 1X 1T 1P 1L 1H 1D
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 10.
x Disconnect the brake switch connector.
2 INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x Brake switch connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 10.
x Inspect for continuity between brake switch
terminal B (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
3 INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH POWER Yes Go to the next step.
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Inspect the STOP 10 A fuse.
CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO GROUND x If the fuse is melt:
x Brake switch connector is disconnected. — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. short to ground.
x Measure the voltage at the brake switch — Replace the fuse.
terminal A (wiring harness-side). x If the fuse is deterioration:
x Is the voltage B+? — Replace the fuse.
x If the fuse is normal:
— Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
open circuit.
Go to Step 10.
4 INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 10.
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the PCM connector.
connector.
6 INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Brake switch, PCM and keyless control No Go to the next step.
ground:
— Brake switch terminal C
— Brake switch terminal D
7 INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Brake switch, PCM and keyless control No Go to the next step.
— Brake switch terminal C
— Brake switch terminal D
START SYSTEM]
8 INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
OPEN CIRCUIT No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Brake switch, PCM and keyless control circuit, then go to Step 10.
— Brake switch terminal C—PCM terminal
1AF
— Brake switch terminal C—Keyless control
module terminal 3E
— Brake switch terminal D—Keyless control
module terminal 3S
9 INSPECT PCM Yes Replace the brake switch, then go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected (See 04-11-9 BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/
connectors. INSTALLATION.)
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. Caution
x Measure the voltage at the PCM terminal x Inspect the brake switch with it installed to the
1AF (wiring harness-side). brake pedal, otherwise the brake switch may
x Is the voltage normal? not operate normally. If the brake switch is
(See 01-40A-9 PCM INSPECTION [MZR removed from the brake pedal, replace the
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].) brake switch with a new one.
No Replace the PCM, then go to the next step.
(See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC P0560:16, P0560:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Keyless control module power supply circuit malfunction (+B3)

x Keyless control module power supply circuit (+B3) voltage less than 9 V is detected for
P0560:16
DETECTION 10 s.
CONDITION x Keyless control module power supply circuit (+B3) voltage higher than 16 V is detected
P0560:17
for 0.5 s while the engine is running.
x Battery malfunction
x Generator malfunction
x Open circuit or short to ground in keyless control module power supply circuit (+B3)
POSSIBLE — Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 1B and STEERING
CAUSE LOCK 10 A fuse
— STEERING LOCK 10 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 1B and battery positive
terminal
BATTERY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
STEERING LOCK 10 A
1B

1E 1C 1A
1F 1D 1B
1 INSPECT PCM DTC Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Perform the PCM DTC inspection using the (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
M-MDS. 2.5].)
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Are any DTCs present?

2 INSPECT BATTERY Yes Recharge or replace the battery, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZR 1.8, MZR
(See 01-17A-2 BATTERY INSPECTION 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Is there any malfunction? [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

START SYSTEM]
3 INSPECT GENERATOR Yes Replace the generator, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the generator. (See 01-17A-4 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See 01-17A-8 GENERATOR INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Disconnect the keyless control module
connector.
5 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Yes Go to the next step.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (+B3) FOR No Inspect the STEERING LOCK 10 A fuse.
OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO x If the fuse is melt:
GROUND — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
short to ground.
x Keyless control module connector is
— Replace the fuse.
disconnected.
x If the fuse is deterioration:
x Measure the voltage at the keyless control
module terminal 1B (wiring harness-side).
x Is the voltage B+?
open circuit.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC P0615:11 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
ATX
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in starter relay circuit
x Keyless control module detect that the voltage of starter relay circuit is lower than the specification
DETECTION under the following conditions:
CONDITION — IG1 relay output circuit is not active.
— Selector lever in P position
x Starter relay malfunction
— Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4B
— Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 4AA
— Starter relay terminal E—TR switch terminal A
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
— TR switch terminal F—Keyless control module terminal 4K
— TR switch terminal F—PCM terminal 1BB (MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5)
— TR switch terminal F—PCM terminal 1B (MZR 2.0 DISI)
x PCM malfunction
START SYSTEM]
MAIN FUSE BLOCK KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
BATTERY
4B
STARTER RELAY
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
TR SWITCH
P OR N POSITION : ON
A F 4K
PCM
MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5 1BB
MZR 2.0 DISI 1B
STARTER RELAY TR SWITCH KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

(MAIN FUSE BLOCK) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
A E
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
C
FRONT F E D C B A 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
D
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
PCM


START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT STARTER RELAY Yes Replace the starter relay, then go to Step 8.
x Switch the ignition to off. No Install the starter relay, then go to the next step.
x Remove the starter relay.
x Inspect the starter relay.
(See 09-21-13 RELAY INSPECTION.)
connector.
3 INSPECT STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Keyless control module connector is No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
ground:
— Starter relay terminal E
— Starter relay terminal A
CONDITION Step 8.
x Disconnect the PCM connector. No Go to the next step.
x Keyless control module and PCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between TR switch
terminal F (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
6 INSPECT PCM Yes Go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected No Replace the PCM, then go to Step 8.
connectors. (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
— PCM terminal 1BB (MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5)
— PCM terminal 1B (MZR 2.0 DISI)
(See 01-40A-9 PCM INSPECTION [MZR
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

x Switch the ignition to off. No Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. step.
x Disconnect the PCM connector. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Measure the voltage at the keyless control ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
module terminal 4AA (wiring harness-side)
with the selector lever in P or N position.
x Is the voltage more than 4 V?
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
MTX
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in starter relay circuit
x Keyless control module detect that the voltage of starter relay circuit is lower than the specification
— Clutch is depressed.
— Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4B (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR
2.0 DISI)
— Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 4AA (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR
2.0 DISI)
— Starter relay terminal E—Starter interlock switch terminal A (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0
DISI)
POSSIBLE — Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 4B (MZR-CD 2.2)
CAUSE — Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4AA (MZR-CD 2.2)
— Starter relay terminal A—Starter interlock switch terminal A (MZR-CD 2.2)
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—Keyless control module terminal 4K
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—PCM terminal 1BB (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5)
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—PCM terminal 1B (MZR 2.0 DISI)
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—PCM terminal 1CB (MZR-CD 2.2)
x PCM malfunction
START SYSTEM]
(MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI)
BATTERY
4B
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
PCM CLUTCH DEPRESS : ON
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5 1BB
MZR 2.0 DISI 1B
(MZR-CD 2.2)
BATTERY
4B
E A 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
1CB
PCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
WIRING HARNESS-SIDE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
1BE 1BA 1AW 1AS 1AO 1AK 1AG 1AC 1Y 1U 1Q 1M 1I 1E 1A CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
1BG 1BC 1AY 1AU 1AQ 1AM 1AI 1AE 1AA 1W 1S 1O 1K 1G 1C 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A

1BH 1BD 1AZ 1AV 1AR 1AN 1AJ 1AF 1AB 1X 1T 1P 1L 1H 1D B A 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
PCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR STARTER RELAY

(MAIN FUSE BLOCK)
A E
1CO 1CK 1CG1CC 1BY 1BU 1BQ 1BM 1BI 1BE 1BA 1AW 1AS 1AO 1AK 1AG 1AC 1Y 1U 1Q 1M 1I 1E 1A
1CP 1CL 1CH1CD 1BZ 1BV 1BR 1BN 1BJ 1BF 1BB 1AX 1AT 1AP 1AL 1AH 1AD 1Z 1V 1R 1N 1J 1F 1B C
FRONT D
1CQ 1CM 1CI 1CE 1CA 1BW 1BS 1BO 1BK 1BG 1BC 1AY 1AU 1AQ1AM 1AI 1AE 1AA 1W 1S 1O 1K 1G 1C
1CR 1CN 1CJ 1CF 1CB 1BX 1BT 1BP 1BL 1BH 1BD 1AZ 1AV 1AR 1AN 1AJ 1AF 1AB 1X 1T 1P 1L 1H 1D
(MZR-CD 2.2)
START SYSTEM]
connector.
x Keyless control module connector is No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
ground:
CONDITION Step 8.
x Keyless control module and PCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between starter
interlock switch terminal B (wiring harness-
— PCM terminal 1BB (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
MZR 2.5)
— PCM terminal 1B (MZR 2.0 DISI)
— PCM terminal 1CB (MZR-CD 2.2)
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

x Disconnect the PCM connector. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
with the clutch depressed.
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in starter relay circuit

x Keyless control module detects that the voltage of starter relay circuit is higher than the specification
— Clutch is not depressed.
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI
POSSIBLE — Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 4AA
CAUSE — Starter relay terminal E—Starter interlock switch terminal A
MZR-CD 2.2
— Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 4B
— Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4AA
— Starter relay terminal A—Starter interlock switch terminal A
START SYSTEM]
BATTERY
4B
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5 1BB
MZR 2.0 DISI 1B
(MZR-CD 2.2)
BATTERY
4B
E A 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
1CB

4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C

(MAIN FUSE BLOCK)
A E
FRONT D
(MZR-CD 2.2)
START SYSTEM]
connector.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. No Go to the next step.
4 INSPECT KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Yes Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
x Switch the ignition to off. step.
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
connectors. ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Remove the starter relay. No Go to the next step.
module terminal 4B (wiring harness-side)
with the clutch not depressed.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
ATX
DESCRIPTION Open circuit in starter relay circuit
x Keyless control module detects the mismatch voltage between starter relay and starter monitor under
DETECTION the following conditions:
— Selector lever in P position
x TR switch malfunction
POSSIBLE x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
CAUSE — Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4B
— TR switch terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4AA
— TR switch terminal F—Keyless control module terminal 4K
BATTERY
4B
STARTER RELAY
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
TR SWITCH
A F 4K
PCM
MZR 2.0 DISI 1B

CONNECTOR
A E
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
C
D
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
PCM


START SYSTEM]
2 INSPECT TR SWITCH Yes Replace the TR switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the TR switch. (See 05-17-22 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
(See 05-17-19 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) REMOVAL [FS5A-EL].)
SWITCH INSPECTION [FS5A-EL].) (See 05-17-20 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
x Is there any malfunction? INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
connector.
4 INSPECT STARTER RELAY CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Keyless control module connector is circuit, then go to Step 6.
disconnected.
— Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control
module terminal 4B
— TR switch terminal A—Keyless control
module terminal 4AA
— TR switch terminal F—Keyless control
module terminal 4K
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected No Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
connectors. step.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Bring the valid key into the vehicle. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Measure the voltage at the following ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
terminals (wiring harness-side) with the
selector lever in P position:
— Keyless control module terminal 4B
— Keyless control module terminal 4AA
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
MTX
DESCRIPTION Open circuit in starter relay circuit
x Keyless control module detects the mismatch voltage between starter relay and starter monitor under
DETECTION the following conditions:
x Starter interlock switch malfunction
POSSIBLE — Starter relay terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4B (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR
CAUSE 2.0 DISI)
— Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control module terminal 4B (MZR-CD 2.2)
— Starter interlock switch terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4AA
START SYSTEM]
BATTERY
4B
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5 1BB
MZR 2.0 DISI 1B
(MZR-CD 2.2)
BATTERY
4B
E A 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
1CB

4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C

(MAIN FUSE BLOCK)
A E
FRONT D
(MZR-CD 2.2)
START SYSTEM]
2 INSPECT STARTER INTERLOCK Yes Replace the starter interlock switch, then go to Step 6.
SWITCH No Go to the next step.
x Inspect the starter interlock switch.
(See 01-19A-8 STARTER INTERLOCK
SWITCH INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
MZR 2.5].)
connector.
x Keyless control module connector is circuit, then go to Step 6.
disconnected.
module terminal 4B (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI)
— Starter relay terminal E—Keyless control
module terminal 4B (MZR-CD 2.2)
— Starter interlock switch terminal A—
Keyless control module terminal 4AA
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—
Keyless control module terminal 4K
connectors. step.
x Measure the voltage at the following ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
terminals (wiring harness-side) with the
clutch depressed:
— Keyless control module terminal 4B
— Keyless control module terminal 4AA
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC P081C:62 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Error signal of P position switch

DETECTION
x CAN and P position switch signals do not correspond, while ignition switch is ON.
CONDITION
x Selector lever component connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal G and keyless control
module terminal 3M
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal G and keyless
CAUSE control module terminal 3M
x Selector lever component malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between selector lever component terminal G and keyless control
module terminal 3M
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT
3M G
P POSITION : OFF
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE SELECTOR LEVER COMPONENT

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H
K I G E C A
3E 3B
L J H F D B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT SELECTOR LEVER Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
COMPONENT CONNECTOR Step 7.
x Disconnect the selector lever component
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT P POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Selector lever component and keyless No Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between selector lever
component terminal G (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
4 INSPECT P POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Selector lever component and keyless No Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage at the selector lever
component terminal G (wiring harness-side).
5 INSPECT SELECTOR LEVER Yes Replace the selector lever component, then go to Step 7.
COMPONENT (See 05-18-3 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT
x Inspect the selector lever component. MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 05-18-7 SELECTOR LEVER No Go to the next step.
COMPONENT INSPECTION.)
6 INSPECT P POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Selector lever component and keyless circuit, then go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between selector lever
component terminal G (wiring harness-side)
and keyless control module terminal 3M
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC P081D:62 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Error signal of neutral switch

x Neutral switch is detected as continuously ON in spite of vehicle speed increasing from 0 km/h {0
DETECTION
mph} to 10 km/h {6.2 mph}.
CONDITION
x CAN and neutral switch signals do not correspond, while the ignition switch is ON.
x Neutral switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal A and body ground
x Neutral switch malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal B and keyless control module
POSSIBLE
terminal 3T
CAUSE
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal B and keyless control module
terminal 3T
x Open circuit in wiring harness between neutral switch terminal B and keyless control module terminal
3T
NEUTRAL SWITCH
3T B A
TO PCM
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE NEUTRAL SWITCH

CONNECTOR
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B A B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
2 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x Neutral switch connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 8.
x Inspect for continuity between neutral switch
ground.
3 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH Yes Replace the neutral switch, then go to Step 8.
x Inspect the neutral switch. (See 05-15A-2 NEUTRAL SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 01-40A-23 NEUTRAL SWITCH INSTALLATION [G35M-R].)
INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
2.5].)
connector.
5 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH POWER Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to Step 8.
x Neutral switch and keyless control module
ground.
6 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH POWER Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to power supply, then go to Step 8.
x Measure the voltage at the neutral switch
7 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH POWER Yes Go to the next step.
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
CIRCUIT circuit, then go to the next step.
terminal B (wiring harness-side) and keyless
control module terminal 3T (wiring harness-
side).
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in CPP switch circuit

DETECTION
x CPP switch signal is detected for 600 s.
CONDITION
x CPP switch connector or terminals malfunction
x CPP switch malfunction
POSSIBLE x Keyless control module connector or terminals malfunction
CAUSE x Short to ground in the wiring harness between CPP switch terminal A and keyless control module
terminal 3B
CPP SWITCH
3B A B
TO PCM
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CPP SWITCH

CONNECTOR
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
B A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT CPP SWITCH CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 5.
x Disconnect the CPP switch connector.
2 INSPECT CPP SWITCH Yes Replace the CPP switch, then go to Step 5.
x Inspect the CPP switch. (See 05-10A-7 CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/
(See 01-40A-22 CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION INSTALLATION [G35M-R].)
(CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION [MZR 1.8,
MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
connector.
4 INSPECT CPP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND to ground, then go to the next step.
x CPP switch and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between CPP switch
ground.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Error signal of TR switch

x CAN and TR switch signals do not correspond, while the ignition switch is ON.
DETECTION — IG1 relay output circuit is active.
CONDITION — Selector lever in P or N position
— Engine is not running.
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Error signal of TR switch
x TR switch connector or terminals malfunction
x TR switch malfunction
POSSIBLE — Starter relay terminal E—TR switch terminal A
CAUSE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between TR switch terminal F and keyless control module
terminal 4K
— Starter relay terminal E—TR switch terminal A
BATTERY
4B
STARTER RELAY
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
TR SWITCH
A F 4K
PCM
MZR 2.0 DISI 1B

CONNECTOR
A E
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
C
D
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
PCM


START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT TR SWITCH CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 8.
x Disconnect the TR switch connector.
2 INSPECT TR SWITCH Yes Replace the TR switch, then go to Step 8.
x Inspect the TR switch. (See 05-17-22 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
(See 05-17-19 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) REMOVAL [FS5A-EL].)
SWITCH INSPECTION [FS5A-EL].) (See 05-17-20 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
x Is there any malfunction? INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
connector.
4 INSPECT TR SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x TR switch and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between starter relay
terminal E (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
5 INSPECT TR SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x TR switch and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Switch the ignition to ON (engine off).
x Measure the voltage at the TR switch
terminal F (wiring harness-side).
6 INSPECT TR SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
x TR switch and keyless control module circuit, then go to Step 8.
module terminal 4AA
— Starter relay terminal E—TR switch
terminal A
connectors. step.
x Switch the ignition to ON (engine off). ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
with the selector lever in P or N position.
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Error signal of CPP switch or starter interlock switch

x Keyless control module detects the mismatch between CPP switch and starter interlock switch under
DETECTION
the following conditions:
CONDITION
x CPP switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between CPP switch terminal B and body ground
x CPP switch malfunction
x Starter interlock switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Starter interlock switch malfunction
— Starter relay terminal E—Starter interlock switch terminal A
MZR-CD 2.2
POSSIBLE — Starter relay terminal A—Starter interlock switch terminal A
CAUSE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—PCM terminal 1BB (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5)
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—PCM terminal 1B (MZR 2.0 DISI)
— Starter interlock switch terminal B—PCM terminal 1CB (MZR-CD 2.2)
— Starter relay terminal E—Starter interlock switch terminal A
MZR-CD 2.2
— Starter relay terminal A—Starter interlock switch terminal A
x PCM malfunction
START SYSTEM]
BATTERY
4B
A E 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
1BB
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5
1BD
1B
MZR 2.0 DISI
1D 3B
CPP SWITCH
B A
PCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
1BE 1BA 1AW 1AS 1AO 1AK 1AG 1AC 1Y 1U 1Q 1M 1I 1E 1A CONNECTOR

B A
STARTER RELAY CPP SWITCH KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

CONNECTOR
A E
3AB3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
C 3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
FRONT D B A 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
(MZR-CD 2.2)
BATTERY
4B
E A 4AA
TO STARTER
STARTER RELAY
A B 4K
1CB
2AL 3B
CPP SWITCH
B A
PCM WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR STARTER INTERLOCK SWITCH

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
CONNECTOR
1CP 1CL 1CH1CD 1BZ 1BV 1BR 1BN 1BJ 1BF 1BB 1AX 1AT 1AP 1AL 1AH 1AD 1Z 1V 1R 1N 1J 1F 1B
1CQ 1CM 1CI 1CE 1CA 1BW 1BS 1BO 1BK 1BG 1BC 1AY 1AU 1AQ1AM 1AI 1AE 1AA 1W 1S 1O 1K 1G 1C B A
2BC 2AY 2AU 2AQ 2AM 2AI 2AE 2AA 2W

CPP SWITCH
2S 2O 2K 2G 2D 2A
2BD 2AZ 2AV 2AR 2AN 2AJ 2AF 2AB 2X 2T 2P 2L 2H WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
2E 2B CONNECTOR
2BE 2BA 2AW 2AS 2AO 2AK 2AG 2AC 2Y 2U 2Q 2M 2I
2BF 2BB 2AX 2AT 2AP 2AL 2AH 2AD 2Z 2V 2R 2N 2J 2F 2C
B A
STARTER RELAY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

(MAIN FUSE BLOCK) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
A E
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
C 3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
FRONT D 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT CPP SWITCH CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 13.
x Disconnect the CPP switch connector.
2 INSPECT CPP SWITCH GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x CPP switch connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 13.
x Inspect for continuity between CPP switch
ground.
3 INSPECT CPP SWITCH Yes Replace the CPP switch, then go to Step 13.
x Inspect the CPP switch. (See 05-10A-7 CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/
(See 01-40A-22 CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION INSTALLATION [G35M-R].)
(CPP) SWITCH INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, (See 05-10B-7 CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/
MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].) INSTALLATION [G66M-R].)
(See 05-10C-6 CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [A26M-R].)
4 INSPECT STARTER INTERLOCK Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
SWITCH CONNECTOR CONDITION Step 13.
x Disconnect the starter interlock switch No Go to the next step.
connector.
5 INSPECT STARTER INTERLOCK Yes Replace the starter interlock switch, then go to Step 13.
SWITCH No Go to the next step.
x Inspect the starter interlock switch.
(See 01-19A-8 STARTER INTERLOCK
SWITCH INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
MZR 2.5].)
CONDITION Step 13.
connector.
START SYSTEM]
x CPP switch, starter interlock switch, PCM No Go to the next step.
and keyless control module connectors are
disconnected.
ground:
x CPP switch, starter interlock switch, PCM No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the starter interlock
switch terminal B (wiring harness-side).
x CPP switch, starter interlock switch, PCM circuit, then go to Step 13.
disconnected.
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0
DISI
module terminal 4B
module terminal 4AA
— Starter relay terminal E—Starter interlock
switch terminal A
MZR-CD 2.2
module terminal 4B
module terminal 4AA
— Starter relay terminal A—Starter interlock
switch terminal A
START SYSTEM]
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5
— PCM terminal 1BB
— PCM terminal 1BD
MZR 2.0 DISI
— PCM terminal 1B
— PCM terminal 1D
MZR-CD 2.2
— PCM terminal 1CB
— PCM terminal 2AL
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
0

x Remove the starter relay. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
with the clutch depressed.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DTC P1794:16, P1794:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]

x Keyless control module power supply circuit (+B2) voltage less than 9 V is detected for
P1794:16
DETECTION 10 s.
P1794:17
POSSIBLE
— Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 1E and EGI 5 A fuse
CAUSE
— EGI 5 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 1E and battery positive
terminal
EGI 5 A
1E

1E 1C 1A
1F 1D 1B
START SYSTEM]
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

connector.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (+B2) FOR No Inspect the EGI 5 A fuse.
OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO x If the fuse is melt:
GROUND — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
short to ground.
disconnected.
module terminal 1E (wiring harness-side).
open circuit.
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U0028:87 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Communication error to BCM

DETECTION
x No communication with BCM.
CONDITION
x Short to ground in wiring harness between BCM terminal 6J and keyless control module terminal 2F
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between BCM terminal 6J and keyless control module terminal
CAUSE 2F
x Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM terminal 6J and keyless control module terminal 2F
x BCM malfunction
BCM KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
WAKE 6J 2F
UP

6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 7.
x Disconnect the BCM connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x BCM and keyless control module connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal
6J (wiring harness-side) and body ground.
x BCM and keyless control module connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 6J
5 INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x BCM and keyless control module connectors circuit, then go to Step 7.
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between BCM terminal
6J (wiring harness-side) and keyless control
module terminal 2F (wiring harness-side).
x Reconnect the disconnected connectors. No Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 6J REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from PCM

DETECTION
x Keyless control module receive engine state or engine speed data from PCM, while steering is locked.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x PCM malfunction
1 VERIFY ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM (See 09-02A-66 DTC B10E7:12 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
DTC
(See 09-02A-70 DTC B10E7:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
x Are the following DTCs present?
— B10E7:12
— B10E7:17
2 VERIFY PCM DTC Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

START SYSTEM]
3 VERIFY PCM MALFUNCTION Yes Replace the PCM, then go to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
module using the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
to lock the steering. No Go to Step 5.
using the M-MDS.
x Is the DTC U0401:68 present?
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module, then go to the next step.
module using the M-MDS. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
BUTTON START SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U201F:00 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Communication error to keyless receiver

DETECTION
x Communication error between keyless control module and keyless receiver.
CONDITION
x Keyless receiver connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between keyless receiver terminal C and keyless control module
POSSIBLE terminal 2H
CAUSE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between keyless receiver terminal C and keyless control
module terminal 2H
x Keyless receiver malfunction
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Communication error to keyless receiver
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS RECEIVER
2H C

2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A D C B A
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
1 INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the keyless receiver connector.
connector.
x Keyless receiver and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
receiver terminal C (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
x Keyless receiver and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage at the keyless receiver
START SYSTEM]
5 INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER Yes Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-78 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/
(See 09-14-80 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS No Go to the next step.
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U201F:13 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Open circuit in keyless receiver circuit

DETECTION
x No communication with keyless receiver.
CONDITION
x Keyless receiver connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless receiver terminal C and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 2H
x Keyless receiver malfunction
2H C

2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A D C B A
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
START SYSTEM]
1 INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the keyless receiver connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Keyless receiver and keyless control module circuit, then go to Step 5.
receiver terminal C (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 2H (wiring
harness-side).
4 INSPECT KEYLESS RECEIVER Yes Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the keyless receiver. (See 09-14-78 KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/
(See 09-14-80 KEYLESS RECEIVER INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS No Go to the next step.
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Keyless control module configuration error

DETECTION
x Configuration is not completed.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Keyless control module configuration not implemented
START SYSTEM]
1 PERFORM KEYLESS CONTROL Yes Perform the keyless control module configuration again,
MODULE CONFIGURATION then go to the next step.
x Perform the keyless control module (See 09-14-73 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
configuration using the M-MDS. CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-14-73 KEYLESS CONTROL PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED No Go to Step 3.
START SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
COMPLETED step.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
module using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Keyless control module internal malfunction

DETECTION
x Keyless control module internal malfunction.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
START SYSTEM]
1 PERFORM DTC INSPECTION Yes Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control step.
module using the M-MDS. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
BUTTON START SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
Warning
Note
PUSH BUTTON START

INDICATOR LIGHT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION Keyless control module internal malfunction

DETECTION
x Keyless control module internal malfunction.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
START SYSTEM]
1 PERFORM DTC INSPECTION Yes Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
x Perform the following procedure within 5 step.
min. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
1. Clear the DTC from the keyless control REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
module using the M-MDS. ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02A-6 CLEARING DTC No Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]

U3003:16 x Keyless control module power supply circuit (+B1) voltage 4 V—9 V is detected for 10 s.
DETECTION
U3003:17
— Short to ground in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and BCM terminal 4B
— MAIN 125 A fuse malfunction
— BTN 40 A fuse malfunction
POSSIBLE — ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction
CAUSE — Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and BCM terminal 4B
x BCM malfunction
— Short to ground in wiring harness between BCM terminal 7N and keyless control module terminal
1D
— Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM terminal 7N and keyless control module terminal 1D
START SYSTEM]
MAIN FUSE BLOCK
MAIN 125A
BTN 40A
FUSE BLOCK BCM

ROOM 15A
4B 7N 1D

4E 4C 4A 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A 1E 1C 1A
4F 4D 4B 7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B 1F 1D 1B
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 9.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (+B1) FOR No Inspect the MAIN 125 A, BTN 40 A and ROOM 15 A
OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO fuses.
x BCM connector is disconnected.
short to ground.
— Replace the malfunctioning fuse.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 4B
— Replace the malfunctioning fuse.
open circuit.
Go to Step 9.
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Replace the BCM, then go to Step 9.
x Reconnect the BCM connector. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 7N
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
connector.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (+B1) FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO circuit or short to ground, then go to the next step.
GROUND
disconnected.
module terminal 1D (wiring harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
START SYSTEM]
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Short to ground in ACC relay circuit

DETECTION x ACC relay output circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while the circuit is
CONDITION active.
POSSIBLE x Short to ground in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2E and keyless control module terminal
CAUSE 4F
ACC RELAY
MIRROR 5A
2B 2A
2E 4F

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
2G 2E 2C 2A
2H 2F 2D 2B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
3 INSPECT ACC RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
terminal 2E (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in ACC relay circuit

DETECTION x ACC relay output circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while the circuit
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2E and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 4F
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in ACC relay circuit
ACC RELAY
MIRROR 5A
2B 2A
2E 4F

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
2G 2E 2C 2A
2H 2F 2D 2B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
3 INSPECT ACC RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
terminal 2E (wiring harness-side).
START SYSTEM]
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION ACC relay circuit malfunction

DETECTION x ACC monitor input circuit voltage less than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while ACC relay
x Open circuit or short to ground in ACC monitor input circuit
POSSIBLE — Short to ground in wiring harness between MIRROR 5 A fuse and keyless control module terminal
CAUSE 2A
— MIRROR 5 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2B and keyless control module terminal
2A
ACC RELAY
MIRROR 5A
2B 2A
2E 4F

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
2G 2E 2C 2A
START SYSTEM]
CONDITION Step 5.
connector.
4 INSPECT ACC MONITOR INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO No Inspect the MIRROR 5 A fuse.
module terminal 2A (wiring harness-side). — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
START SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION ACC relay circuit malfunction

DETECTION x ACC monitor input circuit voltage higher than threshold (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 1 s, while ACC
CONDITION relay output circuit is not active.
POSSIBLE x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2B and keyless control module
CAUSE terminal 2A
x Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminal 2E and keyless control module terminal 4F
ACC RELAY
MIRROR 5A
2B 2A
2C 2E 4F

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
2G 2E 2C 2A
CONDITION Step 7.
2 INSPECT ACC RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
ground.
connector.
START SYSTEM]
4 INSPECT ACC MONITOR INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
terminal 2B (wiring harness-side).
6 INSPECT ACC RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
terminal 2E (wiring harness-side) and
keyless control module terminal 4F (wiring
harness-side).
using the M-MDS.
e
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
OR)

(1) Select “DataLogger”.
3. Select the applicable PID from the PID table.
4. Verify the PID data according to the directions on
the screen.
DLC-2
START SYSTEM]
Note
x The PID data screen function is used for monitoring the calculated value of input/output signals in the
module. Therefore, if the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary
to inspect the monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In
addition, because the system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the
monitored value, it is necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
PID name
Unit/Operation Data contents Inspection item (s)
(definition)
BRAKE_SW1 x Brake pedal depressed: On
Off/On Brake switch
(Brake switch status) x Brake pedal not depressed: Off
BRAKE_SW2
x Brake pedal depressed: On
(Brake switch2 Off/On Brake switch2
x Brake pedal not depressed: Off
status)
BZR_OUT
x Keyless beeper sound: On
(Keyless beeper Off/On Keyless beeper
x Keyless beeper not sound: Off
status)
CLUTCH_SW x Clutch pedal pressed: On
Off/On Clutch switch
(Clutch switch status) x Clutch pedal released: Off
IMMOBI
x Immobilizer function present: On
(Immobilizer function Off/On* x Immobilizer function not present: Off
Keyless control module
present/not present)
LOCK_SW_D
x Driver's door: LOCK: Lock
(Door lock-link switch Lock/Unlock Door lock-link switch
x Driver's door: UNLOCK: Unlock
status)
MON_ACC x Switch the ignition to ACC: On
Off/On ACC relay
(ACC relay monitor) x Switch the ignition to off: Off
MON_IG1 x Switch the ignition to ON: On
Off/On IG1 relay
(IG1 relay monitor) x Switch the ignition to ACC or off: Off
MON_IG2 x Switch the ignition to ON: On
Off/On IG2 relay
(IG2 relay monitor) x Switch the ignition to ACC or off: Off
NUMCARD
x Number of programmed advanced keys:
(Number of Keyless control module
0—6
advanced keys)
NUMKEY*
(Number of key x Number of programmed key codes: 0—8 Keyless control module
codes)
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate
PULL_SW_BK
opener switch (5HB, WAGON) pressed:
(Trunk lid opener Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/
On
switch (4SD)/Liftgate Off/On Liftgate opener switch (5HB,
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate
opener switch (5HB, WAGON)
opener switch (5HB, WAGON) released:
WAGON) status)
Off
PULL_SW_LF
x Switch the ignition to off: On
(Touch sensor (LF) Off/On Touch sensor (LF)
x Other than these conditions: Off
power supply status)
PULL_SW_RF
x Switch the ignition to off: On
(Touch sensor (RF) Off/On Touch sensor (RF)
power supply status)
PUSH_ST1
x Push button start pressed: On
(Push button start1 Off/On Push button start
status)
PUSH_ST2
x Push button start pressed: On
(Push button start2 Off/On Push button start
status)
REQ_SW_L
x Request switch (LF) pressed: On
(Request switch (LF) Off/On Request switch (LF) inspection
x Request switch (LF) released: Off
status)
REQ_SW_R
x Request switch (RF) pressed: On
(Request switch (RF) Off/On Request switch (RF)
x Request switch (RF) released: Off
status)
START SYSTEM]
PID name
Unit/Operation Data contents Inspection item (s)
(definition)
Note
REQ_SW_BK Off/On x Cannot be used in the inspection, and
Off is normally displayed.
RLY_ACC x Switch the ignition to ACC: On
Off/On ACC relay
(ACC relay status) x Switch the ignition to off: Off
RLY_IG1 x Switch the ignition to ON: On
Off/On IG1 relay
(IG1 relay status) x Switch the ignition to ACC or off: Off
RLY_IG2 x Switch the ignition to ON: On
Off/On IG2 relay
(IG2 relay status) x Switch the ignition to ACC or off: Off
x Switch the ignition to START (starter relay
RLY_ST
Off/On on): On Starter relay
(Starter relay status)
SHIFT_N x Shift lever in neutral position: N
Not_N/N Neutral switch
(Shift lever position) x Other than these conditions: Not_N
VPWR1
(Keyless control
V x Continuous: Approx. 12 V Battery
module power supply
voltage1)
VPWR2
(Keyless control
module power supply
voltage2)
VPWR3
(Keyless control
module power supply
voltage3)
*
: With immobilizer system
ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
3. Select the simulation items from the PID table.
4. Perform the active command modes function,
inspect the operations for each parts.
x If the operation of output parts cannot be
verified after the active command mode DLC-2
inspection is performed, this could indicate
the possibility of an open or short circuit,
sticking, or operation malfunction in the output
parts.
End Of Sie
ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
Command name Operation condition Output part name Unit/Operation

BZR_OUT On: Keyless beeper sounds Keyless beeper On/Off
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)]
09-02B ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–1 (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–17
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–17
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–2 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Security light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–2 (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–3 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–18
CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–19
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–3 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–20
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–3 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–20
SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–7 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–21
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–7 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–21
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–8 SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/
SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–9 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–23
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–9 SECURITY LIGHT: NOT ILLUMINATED,
SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/ DTC B10E6:11/- [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–11 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–24
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–11 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–25
SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:94/ SECURITY LIGHT: NOT ILLUMINATED,
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM DTC B10E6:12/- [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–12 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02B–26
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–13 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–26
SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/ Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–27
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)] . . . 09-02B–15 KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–15 START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–28
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED
START SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02B–28
d of Toc
FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)]
x The DTCs are recorded in the PCM and keyless control module when a malfunction is detected. The stored
DTCs can be verified using the flashing pattern of the security light and M-MDS. There are some DTCs which
cannot be verified using the security light. Verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to
beginning the servicing. (See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
x If more than one DTC is detected, the security light only displays the DTC with the lowest number. Begin
repairs based on the DTC displayed by the security light. All DTCs can be read by the M-MDS.
x It is possible for several DTCs to be displayed for a one malfunction cause. Erase the DTCs after one repair and
then re-inspect the DTCs.
x If immobilizer system DTCs are not recorded even if the engine cannot be started, perform symptom
troubleshooting. (See 01-03A-25 NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x The PID/data monitor function can be used to verify the number of key ID numbers programmed for a single
vehicle. (See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
Note
x Due to the possibility that the engine cannot be started because transmission between the key and the
vehicle is obstructed, do not allow the following items to contact the key ring.
— Any metallic object
— Spare keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system
— Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips
End Of Sie
EXAMPLES:
METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD
METAL PART OF ANOTHER

KEY TOUCHING KEY HEAD
KEY IS NEAR OR TOUCHING

ANOTHER IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEY
DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM)]
Security light
1. Switch the ignition to ON.
2. Verify the security light status.
x If a malfunction is detected, the DTC pattern begins flashing after the security light flashes or illuminates for
approx. 1 min according to the DTC. However, because there are DTCs which cannot be confirmed using
the security light, verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the servicing.
— DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times.
— DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times.
— If more than one DTC is detected, only the DTC with the lowest number is displayed.
x If there is no malfunction, the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
3. If there is a malfunction, verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. When several DTCs are detected, repair the
malfunctioning location based on the DTC displayed by the security light.
Note
x Because of the possibility that one malfunction cause could result in several DTCs being detected, erase
the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then re-inspect the DTCs.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the keyless control module. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING
DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
M-MDS
screen.
corresponding DTC inspection. When several DLC-2
DTCs are detected, repair the malfunctioning
location based on the DTC displayed by the
security light.
Note
the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then check for DTCs again.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the keyless control module. (See 09-02B-3 CLEARING
DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM)]
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02B-2 DTC
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)]
Note
x The security light flashes or illuminates under the following conditions when the ignition is switched to off
or ACC.
x There is a malfunction:
— DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table
below repeats 10 times.
— DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table
x There is no malfunction:
— The security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and then turns off.
—: Not applicable
DTC
M-MDS display*
Keyless Description Reference
Security light flashing pattern warning Keyless
light control PCM
module
(See 09-02B-7
SECURITY LIGHT: 11,
DTC: B10D9:87/
P1260:00
Communication error to
11 Illuminated B10D9:87 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
coil antenna
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-9
SECURITY LIGHT: 12,
DTC: B10D5:13/
P1260:00
12 Illuminated B10D5:13 P1260:00 Coil antenna malfunction [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-11
SECURITY LIGHT: 13,
DTC: B10D7:05/
P1260:00
Not
B10D7:05 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
13 Key ID number error
(See 09-02B-12
SECURITY LIGHT: 13,
DTC: B10D7:94/
P1260:00
Not
B10D7:94 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-15
SECURITY LIGHT: 14,
DTC: B10D7:81/
P1260:00
Not
14 B10D7:81 P1260:00 Key ID number error [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-17
SECURITY LIGHT: 15,
DTC: B10D7:51/
P1260:00
Not
15 B10D7:51 P1260:00 Key ID number error [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-18
SECURITY LIGHT: 16,
DTC: U0100:87/
P1260:00
Not Communication error to
16 U0100:87 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated PCM (No response)
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
DTC
M-MDS display*
light control PCM
module
(See 09-02B-20
SECURITY LIGHT: 21,
DTC: B10D8:00/
P1260:00
Shortage of programmed
21 Illuminated B10D8:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
key
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-21
SECURITY LIGHT: 22,
DTC: B10DA:51/
Communication error to P1260:00
Not
22 B10DA:51 P1260:00 PCM (Data transfer [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated
failure) SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-22
SECURITY LIGHT: 23,
DTC: B10DA:62/
P1260:00
Not Communication error to
23 B10DA:62 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
illuminated PCM (Data mis-match)
SYSTEM (ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
DTC
M-MDS display*
light control PCM
module
(See 09-02B-24
SECURITY LIGHT:
Illuminated NOT ILLUMINATED,
(Push button DTC B10E6:11/-
Coil antenna power
start B10E6:11 — [IMMOBILIZER
supply circuit malfunction
warning light SYSTEM (ADVANCED
illuminated) KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02B-26
SECURITY LIGHT:
Illuminated NOT ILLUMINATED,
(Push button DTC B10E6:12/-
Coil antenna power
start B10E6:12 — [IMMOBILIZER
supply circuit malfunction
warning light SYSTEM (ADVANCED
illuminated) KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
CAN system
Illuminated U0001:88 U0073:00 communication error
(HS-CAN)
(See 09-02O-1
FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D.
Not illuminated (EXCEPT MZR-CD
2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
Illuminated U0100:00 —
PCM
(See 09-02A-136 DTC

U3000:41 [ADVANCED
Keyless control module
Illuminated U3000:41 — KEYLESS ENTRY
internal malfunction
AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM].)
* : The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the M-MDS, and refer to the following:
B= Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network communication system.
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
WM: IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Security light flashing

11
pattern
Keyless
DTC Communication error to coil antenna
M-MDS control B10D9:87
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x No detected communication with coil antenna.
x Coil antenna connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between coil antenna terminal F and body
ground
— Coil antenna terminal B—Keyless control module terminal 4Q
— Coil antenna terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 2D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Coil antenna terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 2B
— Coil antenna terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 2D
— Coil antenna terminal D—Keyless control module terminal 2B
x Coil antenna malfunction
System Wiring Diagram
COIL ANTENNA KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
B 4Q
F C 2D
D 2B
E 4R

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
F E D C B A
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
STEP INSPECTION ACTION
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes Perform the DTC B10E6:11 inspection.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module (See 09-02B-24 SECURITY LIGHT: NOT
using the M-MDS. ILLUMINATED, DTC B10E6:11/- [IMMOBILIZER
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) No Go to the next step.
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M-
MDS.
(See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM)].)
x Is the DTC B10E6:11 present?
2 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
AND TERMINALS Step 8.
x Disconnect the coil antenna connector.
x Inspect the connector and terminals (corrosion,
damage, pin disconnection).
3 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x Coil antenna connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 8.
x Inspect for continuity between coil antenna
ground.
CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS Step 8.
connector.
5 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
SHORT TO GROUND short to ground, then go to Step 8.
x Coil antenna and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
ground:
— Coil antenna terminal B
— Coil antenna terminal C
— Coil antenna terminal D
6 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Coil antenna and keyless control module circuit, then go to Step 8.
— Coil antenna terminal B—Keyless control
module terminal 4Q
— Coil antenna terminal C—Keyless control
module terminal 2D
— Coil antenna terminal D—Keyless control
module terminal 2B
7 VERIFY COIL ANTENNA MALFUNCTION Yes Replace the coil antenna, then go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected (See 09-14-115 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module No Go to Step 9.
using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
8 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED Yes Replace the keyless control module and program the
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected immobilizer system-related parts.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS. (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) Go to the next step.
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- No Go to the next step.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
PRESENT (See 09-02B-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
x Are any DTCs present? (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

12
pattern
Keyless
DTC Coil antenna malfunction
display module
PCM P1260:00
x Coil antenna malfunction.
DETECTION CONDITION
x PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Coil antenna malfunction
x PCM malfunction
connector.
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
4 VERIFY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Yes Replace the keyless control module and program the
MALFUNCTION immobilizer system-related parts.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
MDS. Go to the next step.
(See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION No Go to Step 6.
SYSTEM)].)
5 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED Yes Replace the PCM, then go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
connectors. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module
using the M-MDS.
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND No Go to the next step.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/P1260:00 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)]
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS

13
pattern
Keyless
DTC Key ID number error
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Key ID number program error.
x Errors during key ID number program procedure
x PCM malfunction
x If any of the following items are touching or near key head, signal
communication between key and vehicle is negatively affected, resulting in
engine not starting.
— Spare keys
— Keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system
— Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic
EXAMPLES:

POSSIBLE CAUSE


strips
1 VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS Yes Go to the next step.
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS and No Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer
verify the programmed keys. system-related parts programming, then go to the next
(See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR step.
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— NUMKEY
(See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
START SYSTEM)].)
x Are two or more keys programmed?
(See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED key if necessary, then go to Step 4.
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
SYSTEM)].) PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Is the same DTC present? ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
Note
x To start the engine, two or more programmed
keys are necessary.
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
using the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS. No Go to the next step.
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
Note
x If the BCM configuration and DTC inspection for the following modules are performed, the keyless control
module will be temporarily unable to read the key code due to the signal from the M-MDS. As a result,
DTC B10D7:94 is stored in the keyless control module.
— KOEO/KOER self test (PCM)
— ABS (ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM)
— BCM
— EPS (EPS control module)
— RCM (SAS control module)
— RKE (keyless control module)
— FFH (water heater unit)
13
pattern
Keyless
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Key ID number data cannot be read.
x Using the M-MDS, perform specific module configuration, module
programming, DTC inspection, or Mazda Vehicle Check-up.
x Transponder malfunction
— There is no transponder in the key.
— Key code is not output.
x PCM malfunction
the engine not starting.
— Spare keys
— Keys for other vehicles equipped with immobilizer system
EXAMPLES:
POSSIBLE CAUSE


strips
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes Perform the security light: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module P1260:00 inspection.
using the M-MDS. (See 09-02B-11 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC:
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER B10D7:05/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) START SYSTEM)].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
x Is the following DTC present?
— Keyless control module: B10D7:05
— PCM: P1260:00
2 VERIFY WHETHER THERE IS A VALID KEY Yes Go to the next step.
x Are there any valid keys which can start the No Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer
engine other than the cause of the displayed system-related parts programming, then go to the next
DTC? step.
(See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Switch the ignition to ON using the valid key (See 09-14-115 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/
other than the cause of the displayed DTC. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS. No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER key if necessary, then go to Step 6.
MDS.
(See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION Note
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED x To start the engine, two or more programmed
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START keys are necessary.
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

14
pattern
Keyless
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Keyless control module cannot read key ID number data normally.
x Transponder (key) malfunction
x PCM malfunction
— Spare keys
EXAMPLES:
POSSIBLE CAUSE METAL RING LYING ON KEY HEAD


strips
connector.
DTC? step.
other than the cause of the displayed DTC. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
x Clear the DTC from the keyless control module PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS. No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER key if necessary, then go to Step 7.
MDS.
(See 09-02B-2 DTC INSPECTION Note
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START keys are necessary.
SYSTEM)].)
SYSTEM)].)
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

15
pattern
Keyless
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Keyless control module has detected unprogrammed key ID number.
x Key malfunction
— No keys have been programmed after replacing keyless control module.
— Unprogrammed key used.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Attempt made to program a ninth key.
x PCM malfunction
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS and No Go to Step 3.
verify the programmed keys.
(See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
— NUMKEY
START SYSTEM)].)
x Are one or more keys programmed?
2 VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS Yes Erase the key ID number, then go to the next step.
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS and (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
verify the programmed keys. PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM No Go to the next step.
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
— NUMKEY
START SYSTEM)].)
x Are eight keys programmed?
x Program an additional key referring to the (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
immobilizer system-related parts programming. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
BUTTON START SYSTEM].) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
Note No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
x To start the engine, two or more key if necessary, then go to Step 5.
programmed keys are necessary. (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02B-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER Note
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND x To start the engine, two or more programmed
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) keys are necessary.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY

16
pattern
Keyless
DTC Communication error to PCM (No response)
M-MDS control U0100:87
display module
PCM P1260:00
x Communication error between keyless control module and PCM (No
DETECTION CONDITION
response).
x Wiring harness between keyless control module and PCM malfunction
(CAN line)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x PCM malfunction
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes
using the M-MDS. Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88

SYSTEM)].)
— Keyless control module: U0100:87
— PCM: P1260:00
SYSTEM)].)
— Keyless control module: U0100:87
— PCM: P1260:00
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

21
pattern
Keyless
DTC Shortage of programmed key
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Only one key or no key has been programmed.
x Only one key or no key has been programmed.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Keyless control module malfunction
x PCM malfunction
x Access the following PID and verify the No Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer
programmed keys. system-related parts programming.
(See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
BUTTON START SYSTEM)].) Go to the next step.
— NUMKEY
(See 09-02B-28 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE Note
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON keys are necessary.
START SYSTEM)].)
x Switch the ignition to ON using the valid key (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
other than the cause of the displayed DTC. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- No Go to Step 4.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY

22
pattern
Keyless
DTC Communication error to PCM (Data transfer failure)
M-MDS control B10DA:51
display module
PCM P1260:00
x Communication error between keyless control module and PCM (Data
DETECTION CONDITION
transfer failure).
x Wiring harness between keyless control module and PCM (CAN line)
x Immobilizer system-related parts have not been programmed after replacing
keyless control module.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Immobilizer system-related parts have not been programmed after replacing
PCM.
x PCM malfunction
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88

2 VERIFY WHETHER PROGRAMMING OF Yes Go to the next step.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED No Perform the programming of immobilizer system-related
PARTS HAS BEEN PERFORMED AFTER parts after replacing the keyless control module only,
REPLACING KEYLESS CONTROL then go to Step 5.
MODULE PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x After replacing the keyless control module, has ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
the programming of immobilizer system-related
parts been performed?
PARTS HAS BEEN PERFORMED AFTER parts after replacing the PCM only, then go to Step 5.
REPLACING PCM (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
x After replacing the PCM, has the programming of
immobilizer system-related parts been
performed?
SYSTEM)].)
— Keyless control module: B10DA:51
— PCM: P1260:00
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY

23
pattern
Keyless
DTC Communication error to PCM (Data mis-match)
M-MDS control B10DA:62
display module
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x ID number data in keyless control module and PCM do not match.
x Wiring harness between keyless control module and PCM (CAN line)
PCM.
x PCM malfunction
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88

PARTS HAS BEEN PERFORMED AFTER parts after replacing the keyless control module only,
REPLACING KEYLESS CONTROL then go to Step 5.
MODULE PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x After replacing the keyless control module, has ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
the programming of immobilizer system-related
performed?
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: NOT ILLUMINATED, DTC B10E6:11/- [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)]

—
pattern
Keyless
DTC Coil antenna power supply circuit malfunction
M-MDS control B10E6:11
display module
PCM —
x Voltage less than the specification (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.5 s with the
DETECTION CONDITION
coil antenna power supply voltage operating.
POSSIBLE CAUSE — Coil antenna terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4Q
B 4Q
F C 2D
D 2B
E 4R

CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
F E D C B A
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
connector.
3 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND short to ground, then go to Step 5.
x Coil antenna and keyless control module No Go to the next step.
ground:
— Coil antenna terminal A
— Coil antenna terminal B
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: NOT ILLUMINATED, DTC B10E6:12/- [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)]

—
pattern
Keyless
DTC Coil antenna power supply circuit malfunction
M-MDS control B10E6:12
display module
PCM —
x Voltage higher than the specification (2.2—6.5 V) is detected for 0.05 s
DETECTION CONDITION
while the coil antenna power supply circuit is not active.
— Push button start terminal C—Keyless control module terminal 4Q
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Coil antenna terminal A—Keyless control module terminal 4Q
PUSH BUTTON START KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
COIL ANTENNA
B 4Q
F C 2D
D 2B
E 4R
PUSH BUTTON START COIL ANTENNA KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
K I G E C A 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
F E D C B A
L J H F D B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L4I 4F 4C
x Disconnect the push button start connector. No Go to the next step.
connector.
4 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER short to power supply, then go to Step 7.
x Coil antenna, push button start and keyless
module terminal 4Q (wiring harness-side).
x Is the voltage 2.2 V or more?
5 INSPECT PUSH BUTTON START Yes Replace the push button start, then go to Step 7.
SYSTEM].)
using the M-MDS.
Note
x The keyless control module performs on-
board self-diagnostics while the negative
battery cable is connected.

MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
Note
x The keyless control module performs on-
board self-diagnostics while the negative
battery cable is connected.

MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
START SYSTEM)].)
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
BUTTON START SYSTEM)]
the screen.
Note DLC-2
x The PID data screen function is used for
monitoring the calculated value of input/
output signals in the module. Therefore, if
the monitored value of the output parts is not within the specification, it is necessary to inspect the
monitored value of input parts corresponding to the applicable output part control. In addition, because the
system does not display an output part malfunction as an abnormality in the monitored value, it is
necessary to inspect the output parts individually.
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM)]
PID name (Definition) Unit/Status

NUMKEY
0—8
(Number of key ID numbers programmed in the keyless control module)
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
09-02C ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM SECURITY LIGHT: 14, DTC: B10D7:81/
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02C–1 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–13
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02C–2 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–13
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–2 SECURITY LIGHT: 15, DTC: B10D7:51/
M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–2 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–14
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02C–3 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–15
DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/
SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/ (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–16
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–16
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02C–6 SECURITY LIGHT: 21, DTC: B10D8:00/
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–6 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–6 (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . 09-02C–17
SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC: B10D5:13/ Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–17
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/
P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02C–11 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–12 ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–20
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02C–21
End of Toc DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
ON-BOARD
FOREWORD [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
x The DTCs are recorded in the PCM and instrument cluster when a malfunction is detected. The stored DTCs
can be verified using the flashing pattern of the security light and M-MDS. There are some DTCs which cannot
be verified using the security light. Verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the
servicing. (See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
x If more than one DTC is detected, the security light only displays the DTC with the lowest number. Begin
repairs based on the DTC displayed by the security light. All DTCs can be read by the M-MDS.
x It is possible for several DTCs to be displayed for one malfunction cause. Erase the DTCs after one repair and
then re-inspect the DTCs.
x If immobilizer system DTCs are not recorded even if the engine cannot be started, perform symptom
troubleshooting. (See 01-03A-25 NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x The PID/data monitor function can be used to verify the number of key ID numbers programmed for a single
vehicle. (See 09-02C-20 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02C-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM)].)
Note
x Due to the possibility that the engine cannot be started because transmission between the key and the
vehicle is obstructed, do not allow the following items to contact the key ring.
— Spare keys or keys for other vehicles equipped with an immobilizer system
— Any electronic device, or any credit or other card with magnetic strips
EXAMPLES:
End Of Sie


DTC INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

Security Light
2. Verify the security light status.
x If a malfunction is detected, the DTC pattern begins flashing after the security light flashes or illuminates for
approx. 1 min according to the DTC. However, because there are DTCs which cannot be confirmed using
the security light, verify the DTCs that were detected using the M-MDS prior to beginning the servicing.
— DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times.
— DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern repeats 10 times.
x If there is no malfunction, the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
3. If there is a malfunction, verify the DTCs using the M-MDS. When several DTCs are detected, repair the
malfunctioning location based on the DTC displayed by the security light.
Note
the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then re-inspect the DTCs.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the Instrument cluster. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
M-MDS
(3) Select “IC”.
screen.
corresponding DTC inspection. When several DLC-2
DTCs are detected, repair the malfunctioning
location based on the DTC displayed by the
security light.
Note
the DTCs after the repair is completed, and then check for DTCs again.
4. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the instrument cluster. (See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02C-2 DTC
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
Note
x The security light flashes or illuminates under the following conditions when the ignition is switched to off
or ACC.
x There is a malfunction:
— DTC 16 or below: Flashes for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table
— DTC 21 or higher: Illuminates for approx. 1 min and the DTC flash pattern indicated in the table
x There is no malfunction:
— The security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and then turns off.
—: Not applicable
DTC
M-MDS display* Description Reference
Security light flashing pattern Instrument
PCM
cluster
(See 09-02C-6 SECURITY
LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/
Communication error to coil
11 B10D9:87 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
antenna
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM)].)
12 B10D5:13 P1260:00 Coil antenna malfunction P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM)].)
B10D7:05 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM)].)
13 Key ID number error
B10D7:94 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM)].)
14 B10D7:81 P1260:00 Key ID number error P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM)].)
DTC
PCM
cluster
15 B10D7:51 P1260:00 Key ID number error P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM)].)
LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/
16 U0100:87 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
PCM (No response)
SYSTEM)].)
Shortage of programmed
21 B10D8:00 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
key
SYSTEM)].)
LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/
22 B10DA:51 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
PCM (Data transfer failure)
SYSTEM)].)
LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/
23 B10DA:62 P1260:00 P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
PCM (Data mis-match)
SYSTEM)].)
DTC
PCM
cluster

[MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
CAN system communication
U0001:88 U0073:00
error (HS-CAN)
Not illuminated
[MULTIPLEX
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
x Communication error to
U0100:00 P0602:00 PCM
x PCM programming error
(See 01-02A-158 DTC

P0602:00 [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
MZR 2.5].)
Instrument cluster internal (See 09-02I-21 DTC U3000:41

U3000:41 —
malfunction [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
* : The letters at the beginning of each DTC are only displayed when using the M-MDS, and refer to the following:
B= Body system, P= Powertrain system, U= Network communication system.
SECURITY LIGHT: 11, DTC: B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

11
pattern
DTC Instrument Communication error to coil antenna
M-MDS B10D9:87
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x No detected communication with coil antenna.
x Short to ground or open circuit in coil antenna power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and coil
antenna terminal B
— METER IG 15 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and coil
antenna terminal B
x Open circuit in wiring harness between coil antenna terminal F and body
ground
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Instrument cluster connector or terminals malfunction
— Coil antenna terminal C—Instrument cluster terminal 2G
— Coil antenna terminal D—Instrument cluster terminal 2E
— Coil antenna terminal C—Instrument cluster terminal 2G
— Coil antenna terminal D—Instrument cluster terminal 2E
x Instrument cluster malfunction

IGNITION SWITCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
(IG1) COIL ANTENNA
METER IG 15 A
B C 2G
F D 2E
COIL ANTENNA INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
F E D C B A
2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
2 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA POWER SUPPLY Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR No Inspect the METER IG 15 A fuse.
OPEN CIRCUIT x If the fuse is melt:
x Coil antenna connector is disconnected. — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. possible short to ground.
x Measure the voltage at the coil antenna terminal — Replace the fuse.
B (wiring harness-side). x If the fuse is deterioration:
x Is the voltage 8 V or more? — Replace the fuse.
— Repair or replace the wiring harness for a
possible open circuit.
Go to Step 8.
3 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x Coil antenna connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 8.
x Inspect for continuity between coil antenna
ground.
4 INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. No Go to the next step.
5 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
SHORT TO GROUND short to ground, then go to Step 8.
x Coil antenna and instrument cluster connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
ground:
— Coil antenna terminal C
— Coil antenna terminal D
6 INSPECT COIL ANTENNA CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Coil antenna and instrument cluster connectors circuit, then go to Step 8.
are disconnected.
— Coil antenna terminal C—Instrument cluster
terminal 2G
— Coil antenna terminal D—Instrument cluster
terminal 2E
connectors. INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using
the M-MDS.
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
MDS.
(See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM)].)
8 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED Yes Replace the instrument cluster and program the
connectors. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
the M-MDS. PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) Go to the next step.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
PRESENT (See 09-02C-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
x Are any DTCs present? (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

12
pattern
DTC Instrument Coil antenna malfunction
M-MDS B10D5:13
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
x Coil antenna malfunction.
DETECTION CONDITION
x PCM determined a malfunction in the coil antenna even though it is normal.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Coil antenna malfunction
x PCM malfunction
connectors. INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
the M-MDS.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
4 VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Replace the instrument cluster and program the
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
the M-MDS. INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION No Go to Step 6.
SYSTEM)].)
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
connectors. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
the M-MDS.
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) No Go to the next step.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

13
pattern
DTC Instrument Key ID number error
M-MDS B10D7:05
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Key ID number program error.
x Errors during key ID number program procedure
x PCM malfunction
— Spare keys
EXAMPLES:

POSSIBLE CAUSE


strips
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS and No Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer
verify the programmed keys. system-related parts programming, then go to the next
(See 09-02C-20 PID/DATA MONITOR step.
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
— NUMKEYS SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02C-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY key if necessary, then go to Step 4.
SYSTEM)].) (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
x Is the same DTC present? PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
Note
x To start the engine, two or more programmed
keys are necessary.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
(See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION No Go to the next step.
SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

13
pattern
M-MDS B10D7:94
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Key ID number data cannot be read.
x Transponder malfunction
— There is no transponder in the key.
— Key code is not output.
x PCM malfunction
the engine not starting.
— Spare keys
— Keys for other vehicles equipped with immobilizer system
EXAMPLES:
POSSIBLE CAUSE


strips
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes Perform the security light: 13, DTC: B10D7:05/
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using P1260:00 inspection.
the M-MDS. (See 09-02C-10 SECURITY LIGHT: 13, DTC:
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER B10D7:05/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— Instrument cluster: B10D7:05
— PCM: P1260:00
DTC? step.
PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
other than the cause of the displayed DTC. INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
the M-MDS. key if necessary, then go to Step 6.
MDS.
(See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION Note
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY x To start the engine, two or more programmed
SYSTEM)].) keys are necessary.
— PCM: P1260:00
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
End Of Sie

14
pattern
M-MDS B10D7:81
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Instrument cluster cannot read key ID number data normally.
x Transponder (key) malfunction
x PCM malfunction
— Spare keys
EXAMPLES:
POSSIBLE CAUSE


strips
DTC? step.
SYSTEM].)
other than the cause of the displayed DTC. INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
the M-MDS. key if necessary, then go to Step 7.
MDS.
(See 09-02C-2 DTC INSPECTION Note
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY x To start the engine, two or more programmed
SYSTEM)].) keys are necessary.
SYSTEM)].)
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

15
pattern
M-MDS B10D7:51
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Instrument cluster has detected unprogrammed key ID number.
x Key malfunction
— No keys have been programmed after replacing instrument cluster.
— Unprogrammed key used.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Attempt made to program a ninth key.
x PCM malfunction
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS and No Go to Step 3.
verify the programmed keys.
(See 09-02C-20 PID/DATA MONITOR
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
— NUMKEYS
SYSTEM)].)
x Are one or more keys programmed?
2 VERIFY NUMBER OF PROGRAMMED KEYS Yes Erase the key ID number, then go to the next step.
x Access the following PID using the M-MDS and (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
verify the programmed keys. PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
(See 09-02C-20 PID/DATA MONITOR SYSTEM].)
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM No Go to the next step.
— NUMKEYS
SYSTEM)].)
x Are eight keys programmed?
x Program an additional key referring to the (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
immobilizer system-related parts programming. INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM- (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
ENTRY SYSTEM].) SYSTEM].)
Note No Dispose of the malfunctioning key and program a new
x To start the engine, two or more key if necessary, then go to Step 5.
programmed keys are necessary. (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using SYSTEM].)
the M-MDS.
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER Note
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) x To start the engine, two or more programmed
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- keys are necessary.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 16, DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

16
pattern
DTC Instrument Communication error to PCM (No response)
M-MDS U0100:87
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Communication error between instrument cluster and PCM (No response).
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster and PCM malfunction (CAN line)
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Instrument cluster malfunction
x PCM malfunction
1 VERIFY DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
the M-MDS.
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-
MDS. CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88

SYSTEM)].)
— Instrument cluster: U0100:87
— PCM: P1260:00
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— Instrument cluster: U0100:87
— PCM: P1260:00
End Of Sie

21
pattern
DTC Instrument Shortage of programmed key
M-MDS B10D8:00
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x Only one key or no key has been programmed.
x Only one key or no key has been programmed.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Instrument cluster malfunction
x PCM malfunction
x Access the following PID and verify the No Program an additional key referring to the immobilizer
programmed keys. system-related parts programming.
(See 09-02C-20 PID/DATA MONITOR (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
(KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) SYSTEM].)
— NUMKEYS Go to the next step.
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY Note
SYSTEM)].) x To start the engine, two or more programmed
x Are two or more keys programmed? keys are necessary.
x Switch the ignition to ON using the valid key (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
other than the cause of the displayed DTC. INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster using (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED
the M-MDS. PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) Go to the next step.
x Verify the immobilizer system DTC using the M- No Go to Step 4.
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 22, DTC: B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

22
pattern
DTC Instrument Communication error to PCM (Data transfer failure)
M-MDS B10DA:51
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
x Communication error between instrument cluster and PCM (Data transfer
DETECTION CONDITION
failure).
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster and PCM (CAN line)
instrument cluster.
PCM.
x PCM malfunction
the M-MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88

PARTS HAS BEEN PERFORMED AFTER parts after replacing the instrument cluster only, then go
REPLACING INSTRUMENT CLUSTER to Step 5.
x After replacing the instrument cluster, has the
programming of immobilizer system-related
SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM].)
performed?
SYSTEM)].)
— Instrument cluster: B10DA:51
— PCM: P1260:00
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
End Of Sie
SECURITY LIGHT: 23, DTC: B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

23
pattern
DTC Instrument Communication error to PCM (Data mis-match)
M-MDS B10DA:62
cluster
display
PCM P1260:00
DETECTION CONDITION x ID number data in instrument cluster and PCM do not match.
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster and PCM (CAN line)
instrument cluster.
PCM.
x PCM malfunction
the M-MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88

PARTS HAS BEEN PERFORMED AFTER parts after replacing the instrument cluster only, then go
REPLACING INSTRUMENT CLUSTER to Step 5.
x After replacing the instrument cluster, has the
programming of immobilizer system-related
SYSTEM].)
SYSTEM].)
performed?
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
the M-MDS. 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 09-02C-3 CLEARING DTC [IMMOBILIZER (See 01-40B-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].) 2.0 DISI].)
MDS.
SYSTEM)].)
— PCM: P1260:00
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]

the screen.
Note DLC-2
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)]
PID name (Definition) Unit/Status

NUMKEYS
0—8
(Number of key ID numbers programmed in the instrument cluster)
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
09-02D ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT

LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DTC B10A3:87 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
DIAGRAM [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–11
LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–2 DTC B10A4:86 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
FOREWORD [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–13
LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–2 DTC B10A4:87 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–2 LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–14
DTC INSPECTION [AFS (ADAPTIVE DTC C1B00:54 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02D–2 LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–16
Without M-MDS (Reading by AFS OFF DTC U0401:00 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
light flashing pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–2 LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–16
With M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–3 DTC U0422:00 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
CLEARING DTC [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–17
LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–4 DTC U3000:49 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
DTC TABLE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–18
LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–4 DTC U3003:16 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
DTC 3/DTC B1044:01 [AFS (ADAPTIVE LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–18
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02D–6 DTC U3003:17 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
DTC 4/DTC B1043:01 [AFS (ADAPTIVE LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–20
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02D–8 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
DTC 6/DTC B1041:54 [AFS (ADAPTIVE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-02D–10 SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–21
DTC B10A3:86 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
LIGHTING SYSTEM)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–11 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02D–21
End of Toc
WM: ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DTC)
09-02D–1
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
B+ IG1 IG1
METER IG 15 A AFS 10 A
FUSE FUSE
G
H SWIVEL
X J ACTUATOR
RH
R K FRONT
COMBINATION
O LIGHT RH
J I HEAD LIGHT
LEVELING
HEADLIGHT LOW RELAY
L L
ACTUATOR
I F RH
BCM
G
SWIVEL
[INPUT] U J ACTUATOR
· STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SIGNAL LH
· VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL T K FRONT
· ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL B COMBINATION
· REVERSE GEAR SWITCH STATUS I HEAD LIGHT LIGHT LH
A AFS
· TNS SWITCH STATUS LEVELING
CONTROL MODULE L
[OUTPUT] ACTUATOR
· INDICATOR STATUS K F LH
DLC-2 Q
G B
M C FRONT AUTO
LEVELING SENSOR
D A
AFS OFF SWITCH
P
E B
F REAR AUTO
C
LEVELING SENSOR
A
End Of Sie
FOREWORD [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
OUTLINE
— Malfunction diagnostic function: Monitors the AFS and outputs DTCs if a malfunction is detected.
— PID/data monitor function: Reads out specific input/output signals and the system status.
x The DTCs can be read by the AFS OFF light flashing pattern and using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC INSPECTION [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
Without M-MDS (Reading by AFS OFF light flashing pattern)
1. Switch the ignition to off.
09-02D–2
2. Set a jumper wire to the DLC-2 B terminal.
4. Turn the light switch to the LO position.
5. Connect the DLC-2 terminal B to ground using a
jumper wire.
Caution
x If the terminals are mistakenly
connected, vehicle damage or fire could
occur. When connecting with the jumper
wire, thoroughly verify what terminals are DLC-2
being connected to prevent a miss-
connection.
* * * * * * * *
6. Verify that the motor inside the headlight leveling B * * * * * * *
actuator operates and the headlight optical axis
lowers from its current position and returns to its
original position.
Note
x If the motor inside the headlight leveling actuator does not operate, the headlight optical axis may be at
the bottommost position, or the procedure may have been performed incorrectly. Therefore, park the
vehicle on level ground and resume the procedure from Step 1.
7. Read the DTCs by the flashing pattern of the AFS

AFS OFF LIGHT
OFF light.
8. After verifying the DTCs, pull out the jumper wire
from DLC-2.
With M-MDS
(3) Select “AFS”.
screen.
in the AFS control module. (See 09-02D-4
CLEARING DTC [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
09-02D–3
CLEARING DTC [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02D-2 DTC
INSPECTION [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
Note
x The AFS OFF light flashes in the following pattern when the AFS is normal.
t1
t1
ILLUMINATE
AFS OFF LIGHT
OFF
t2 t1: 0.5 s
t2: 1.0 s
x If the AFS has a malfunction, the AFS OFF light flashes in the following pattern and a DTC is output.
FLASHING PATTERN
DTC㧤3 t1
t1 t2
ILLUMINATE
AFS OFF LIGHT
OFF
DTC㧤4
t2
ILLUMINATE
AFS OFF LIGHT
OFF
DTC㧤6 t2
ILLUMINATE
AFS OFF LIGHT
OFF t1: 0.5 s
t2: 1.0 s
x All the detected DTCs are output repeatedly during DTC inspection.
x If multiple DTCs are detected, the DTCs are output in the order from the lowest number.
—: Not applicable
DTC
Flashing pattern M-MDS Description Reference
(AFS OFF light) display
(See 09-02D-10 DTC 6/
DTC B1041:54 [AFS
6 B1041:54 Auto leveling system initialization error
(ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-8 DTC 4/
Front auto leveling sensor circuit DTC B1043:01 [AFS
4 B1043:01
malfunction (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
09-02D–4
DTC
(See 09-02D-6 DTC 3/
Rear auto leveling sensor circuit DTC B1044:01 [AFS
3 B1044:01
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-11 DTC
Swivel actuator (LH) signal B10A3:86 [AFS
— B10A3:86
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-11 DTC
Communication error to swivel B10A3:87 [AFS
— B10A3:87
actuator (LH) (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-13 DTC
Swivel actuator (RH) signal B10A4:86 [AFS
— B10A4:86
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-14 DTC
Communication error to swivel B10A4:87 [AFS
— B10A4:87
actuator (RH) (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-16 DTC
Communication error to steering angle C1B00:54 [AFS
— C1B00:54
sensor (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
— U0001:88 CAN system communication error
— U0100:00 Communication error to PCM
— U0140:00 Communication error to BCM
(See 09-02O-1
FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D.
(EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
Communication error to instrument

— U0155:00
cluster
(See 09-02D-16 DTC

U0401:00 [AFS
— U0401:00 Signal error from PCM
(ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-17 DTC
U0422:00 [AFS
— U0422:00 Signal error from BCM
(ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
09-02D–5
DTC
(See 09-02D-18 DTC
AFS control module internal U3000:49 [AFS
— U3000:49
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-18 DTC
U3003:16 [AFS
— U3003:16 Low power supply circuit voltage
(ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-20 DTC
U3003:17 [AFS
— U3003:17 High power supply circuit voltage
(ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DTC 3/DTC B1044:01 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
WM: AFS
DESCRIPTION Rear auto leveling sensor circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Rear auto leveling sensor circuit voltage is out of range for 10 s or more, while the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
x Rear auto leveling sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x AFS control module connector or terminals malfunction
— AFS control module terminal D—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
— AFS control module terminal E—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
— AFS control module terminal M—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal C
POSSIBLE — AFS control module terminal D—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
CAUSE — AFS control module terminal E—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
x Rear auto leveling sensor malfunction
— AFS control module terminal D—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
— AFS control module terminal E—Rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
x AFS control module malfunction
AFS CONTROL MODULE REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
D A
E B
M C
AFS CONTROL MODULE REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

W U S Q O M K I G E C A C B A
X V T R P N L J H F D B
09-02D–6
1 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
SENSOR CONNECTOR AND Step 7.
TERMINALS No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the rear auto leveling sensor
connector.
2 INSPECT AFS CONTROL MODULE Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the AFS control module No Go to the next step.
connector.
3 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to Step 7.
x Rear auto leveling sensor and AFS control
ground:
— Rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Rear auto leveling sensor terminal C
SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to power supply, then go to Step 7.
5 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Replace the rear auto leveling sensor, then go to Step 7.
SENSOR (See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
x Switch the ignition to off. INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the rear auto leveling sensor. No Go to the next step.
(See 09-18-53 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
6 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the next step.
SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
— AFS control module terminal D—Rear
auto leveling sensor terminal A
— AFS control module terminal E—Rear
auto leveling sensor terminal B
— AFS control module terminal M—Rear
auto leveling sensor terminal C
09-02D–7
7 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the AFS control module, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
x Clear the DTC from the AFS control module
using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02D-4 CLEARING DTC [AFS
(ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
x Perform the DTC inspection.
(See 09-02D-2 DTC INSPECTION [AFS
PRESENT (See 09-02D-4 DTC TABLE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
x Are any DTCs present? LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Front auto leveling sensor circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Front auto leveling sensor circuit voltage is out of range for 10 s or more, while the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
x Front auto leveling sensor connector or terminals malfunction
— AFS control module terminal D—Front auto leveling sensor terminal A
— AFS control module terminal G—Front auto leveling sensor terminal B
— AFS control module terminal M—Front auto leveling sensor terminal C
POSSIBLE — AFS control module terminal D—Front auto leveling sensor terminal A
CAUSE — AFS control module terminal G—Front auto leveling sensor terminal B
x Front auto leveling sensor malfunction
— AFS control module terminal D—Front auto leveling sensor terminal A
— AFS control module terminal G—Front auto leveling sensor terminal B
AFS CONTROL MODULE FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
D A
G B
M C
AFS CONTROL MODULE FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

09-02D–8
1 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the front auto leveling sensor
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Front auto leveling sensor and AFS control
ground:
— Front auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Front auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Front auto leveling sensor terminal C
5 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Replace the front auto leveling sensor, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the front auto leveling sensor. No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION.)
6 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the next step.
— AFS control module terminal D—Front
— AFS control module terminal G—Front
auto leveling sensor terminal B
— AFS control module terminal M—Front
auto leveling sensor terminal C
09-02D–9
using the M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Auto leveling system initialization error

DETECTION x AFS control module detects the auto leveling system initialization error.
CONDITION x Auto leveling system initialization has not been completed. (DTC B1041:54)
POSSIBLE x Auto leveling system initialization error
CAUSE x AFS control module malfunction
1 PERFORM AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM Yes Perform the “AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION INITIALIZATION” again, then go to the next step.
x Perform the “AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION”. INITIALIZATION.)
(See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM No Go to Step 3.
INITIALIZATION.)
using the M-MDS.
x Clear the DTC from the AFS control module SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
using the M-MDS. INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02D-4 CLEARING DTC [AFS No Go to the next step.
End Of Sie
09-02D–10
DTC B10A3:86 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
DESCRIPTION Swivel actuator (LH) signal malfunction

DETECTION
x AFS control module detects the swivel actuator (LH) signal malfunction when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Swivel actuator (LH) malfunction
1 VERIFY SWIVEL ACTUATOR (LH) Yes Replace the front combination light (LH), then go to the
MALFUNCTION next step.
x Clear the DTC from the AFS control module (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
(See 09-02D-4 CLEARING DTC [AFS No Go to Step 3.
x Perform the DTC inspection using the M-
MDS.
MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Communication error to swivel actuator (LH)

DETECTION
x Communication between AFS control module and swivel actuator (LH) is lost when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
x Front combination light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction
— AFS control module terminal T—Front combination light (LH) terminal K
POSSIBLE — AFS control module terminal U—Front combination light (LH) terminal J
CAUSE x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— AFS control module terminal T—Front combination light (LH) terminal K
— AFS control module terminal U—Front combination light (LH) terminal J
x Swivel actuator (LH) malfunction
09-02D–11
DESCRIPTION Communication error to swivel actuator (LH)
AFS CONTROL MODULE SWIVEL ACTUATOR (LH)
T K
U J
AFS CONTROL MODULE FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT (LH)

A D G J M
W U S Q O M K I G E C A B E K N
X V T R P N L J H F D B C F I L O
1 INSPECT FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
(LH) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS Step 6.
x Disconnect the front combination light (LH)
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT SWIVEL ACTUATOR (LH) Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Front combination light (LH) and AFS control No Go to the next step.
ground:
— Front combination light (LH) terminal K
— Front combination light (LH) terminal J
4 INSPECT SWIVEL ACTUATOR (LH) Yes Go to the next step.
x Front combination light (LH) and AFS control circuit, then go to Step 6.
— AFS control module terminal T—Front
combination light (LH) terminal K
— AFS control module terminal U—Front
combination light (LH) terminal J
09-02D–12
5 VERIFY SWIVEL ACTUATOR (LH) Yes Replace the front combination light (LH), then go to the
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Swivel actuator (RH) signal malfunction

DETECTION
x AFS control module detects the swivel actuator (RH) signal malfunction when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Swivel actuator (RH) malfunction
1 VERIFY SWIVEL ACTUATOR (RH) Yes Replace the front combination light (RH), then go to the
x Clear the DTC from the AFS control module (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
MDS.
MDS.
09-02D–13
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Communication error to swivel actuator (RH)

DETECTION
x Communication between AFS control module and swivel actuator (RH) is lost when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
x Front combination light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction
— AFS control module terminal R—Front combination light (RH) terminal K
POSSIBLE — AFS control module terminal X—Front combination light (RH) terminal J
CAUSE x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— AFS control module terminal R—Front combination light (RH) terminal K
— AFS control module terminal X—Front combination light (RH) terminal J
x Swivel actuator (RH) malfunction
AFS CONTROL MODULE SWIVEL ACTUATOR (RH)
R K
X J
AFS CONTROL MODULE FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT (RH)

A D G J M
W U S Q O M K I G E C A B E K N
X V T R P N L J H F D B C F I L O
09-02D–14
1 INSPECT FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
(RH) CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS Step 6.
x Disconnect the front combination light (RH)
connector.
connector.
3 INSPECT SWIVEL ACTUATOR (RH) Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Front combination light (RH) and AFS control No Go to the next step.
ground:
— Front combination light (RH) terminal K
— Front combination light (RH) terminal J
4 INSPECT SWIVEL ACTUATOR (RH) Yes Go to the next step.
x Front combination light (RH) and AFS control circuit, then go to Step 6.
— AFS control module terminal R—Front
combination light (RH) terminal K
— AFS control module terminal X—Front
combination light (RH) terminal J
5 VERIFY SWIVEL ACTUATOR (RH) Yes Replace the front combination light (RH), then go to the
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
09-02D–15
End Of Sie
DTC C1B00:54 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
DESCRIPTION Communication error to steering angle sensor

DETECTION x AFS control module receives the invalid signal of steering angle sensor from the BCM when the
CONDITION ignition is ON.
x BCM DTC is stored.
POSSIBLE
x Steering angle sensor malfunction
CAUSE
1 CONFIRM BCM DTC Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the (See 09-02K-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)
M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
(See 09-02K-3 DTC INSPECTION [BCM].)
2 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Replace the steering angle sensor, then go to the next
x Inspect the steering angle sensor. step.
(See 09-18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (See 09-18-29 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION.)
x Is there any malfunction? No Go to the next step.
MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U0401:00 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]

DETECTION
x AFS control module receives the invalid data from PCM when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
x PCM DTC is stored.
POSSIBLE
x PCM malfunction
CAUSE
09-02D–16
1 CONFIRM PCM DTC Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

x Clear the DTC from the AFS control module (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
MDS.
(See 09-02D-2 DTC INSPECTION [AFS No Go to Step 4.
MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from BCM

DETECTION
x AFS control module receives the invalid data from BCM when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
x BCM DTC is stored.
POSSIBLE
x BCM malfunction
CAUSE
1 CONFIRM BCM DTC Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the (See 09-02K-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)
2 VERIFY BCM MALFUNCTION Yes Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the AFS control module (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
MDS.
09-02D–17
MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION AFS control module internal malfunction

DETECTION
x AFS control module detects the internal failure when the ignition is ON.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
x AFS control module internal malfunction
CAUSE
MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Low power supply circuit voltage

DETECTION x AFS control module power supply circuit voltage is lower than 9 V for 10 s or more, while the ignition
CONDITION is ON.
POSSIBLE x Short to ground or open circuit in AFS control module power supply circuit:
CAUSE — Short to ground in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and AFS control module terminal H
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1)*1/IG1 relay*2 and AFS control module
terminal H
09-02D–18
DESCRIPTION Low power supply circuit voltage
IGNITION SWITCH (IG1)*1/ AFS CONTROL MODULE

IG1 RELAY*2 FUSE BLOCK
METER IG 15 A
H
AFS CONTROL MODULE

W U S Q O M K I G E C A
*1
: Vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system
*2 : Vehicles with advanced keyless entry and push button start system
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 01-17C-3 BATTERY RECHARGING [MZR-CD 2.2].)
(See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

x Disconnect the AFS control module
connector.
09-02D–19
5 INSPECT AFS CONTROL MODULE Yes Go to the next step.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR No Inspect the METER IG 15 A fuse.
SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN If the fuse is melt:
CIRCUIT x Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
short to ground.
x AFS control module connector is
x Replace the fuse.
disconnected.
If the fuse is deterioration:
x Replace the fuse.
If the fuse is normal:
x Measure the voltage at the AFS control
x Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
module terminal H (wiring harness-side).
open circuit.
using the M-MDS.
MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION High power supply circuit voltage

DETECTION x AFS control module power supply circuit voltage is higher than 16 V for 10 s or more, while the
CONDITION ignition is ON.
POSSIBLE x Battery malfunction
CAUSE x Generator malfunction
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

2 INSPECT BATTERY Yes Replace the battery, then go to Step 4.
x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See 01-17A-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
09-02D–20
3 INSPECT GENERATOR Yes Replace the generator, then go to the next step.
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
MDS.
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]

the screen.
Note DLC-2
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
—: Not applicable
PID name Unit/Status Description Inspection item Terminal
x AFS OFF switch in off position: On
AFS_SW On/Off AFS OFF switch P
x AFS OFF switch in on position: Off
x Indicate the front auto leveling sensor
F_CAL V Front auto leveling sensor —
calibration voltage.
x Indicate the front auto leveling sensor
F_LEVEL V Front auto leveling sensor G
voltage.
x Light switch at LO position: On
LBEAMSW On/Off Light switch O
x Light switch not at LO position: Off
x Indicate the rear auto leveling sensor
R_CAL V Rear auto leveling sensor —
calibration voltage.
x Shift the selector lever to R position: R TR switch (ATX)/
R_GEAR_SW R/Not_R A, B
x Other than these conditions: Not_R Back-up light switch (MTX)
09-02D–21
PID name Unit/Status Description Inspection item Terminal
x Indicate the rear auto leveling sensor
R_LEVEL V Rear auto leveling sensor E
voltage.
RPM RPM x Indicate the engine speed. AFS control module A, B
STEER_ANGL q x Indicate the steering wheel angle. AFS control module A, B
x Indicate the AFS control module power
VPWR V Battery H
supply voltage.
VSPD KPH, MPH x Indicate the vehicle speed. AFS control module A, B
End Of Sie
09-02D–22
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
09-02E ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]

FOREWORD [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–1 DTC: B1D19:96 [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–8
DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–1 DTC: U3000:09, 09:Er21 [AUDIO] . . . . . . 09-02E–8
With M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–2 Without Bose® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–8
Without M-MDS (On-board Diagnostic With Bose® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–10
Test Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–2 DTC: U3003:16, 09:Er20 [AUDIO] . . . . . . 09-02E–12
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION
PROCEDURE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–2 [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–14
Identification Using the Label or Switch Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–14
Inscribed Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–2 Speaker Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–15
Verify Using the Diagnostic Radio Reception Condition
Assist Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–3 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–16
CLEARING DTC [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–4 Antenna Control Condition
With M-MDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–4 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–17
Without M-MDS Audio Amplifier Control Condition
(On-board Diagnostic Test Mode) . . . 09-02E–4 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–18
DTC TABLE [AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–5 Audio Amplifier Specification
DTC: B1188:64, 10:Er07, 22:Er07 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–19
[AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–6 Dial Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–20
DTC: B1D19:71, 10:ER02, 22:Er02 Audio Amplifier (With Bose®)
[AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–7 Identify Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–21
DTC: B1D19:79, 10:Er01, 22:Er01
[AUDIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02E–7
End of T c
FOREWORD [AUDIO]
x The audio system has an on-board diagnostic function and diagnostic assist function to facilitate audio system
diagnosis.
On-board diagnostic function
x The on-board diagnostic function consists of the following functions: A malfunction detection function,
which detects overall malfunctions in the audio system-related parts; a memory function, which stores
detected DTCs; and a display function, which indicates system malfunctions via a DTC display.
x If the audio unit detects a malfunction in the audio system, a maximum of 3 DTCs are recorded in the audio
unit. If three DTCs have already been stored and an additional malfunction is detected, the oldest DTC of
the 3 already stored is cleared and it is replaced with the DTC for the most current malfunction.
x DTCs stored in the audio unit are cleared if the negative battery cable is disconnected (if backup power is
interrupted). (Using the M-MDS)
x There are two methods for reading and clearing DTCs. They include activation of the on-board diagnostic
test mode of the on-board diagnostic function, which is operated using the audio unit, and the M-MDS. The
displayed DTCs differ depending on whether the on-board diagnostic test mode or the M-MDS method is
used. Additionally, because some DTCs are not displayed in the on-board diagnostic test mode, use the M-
MDS before performing the procedure.
On-board diagnostic test mode
— To display DTCs on the information display that have been recorded in the memory function, activate
the on-board diagnostic function by operating the audio unit.
Using the M-MDS
— When a DTC inspection is performed using the M-MDS, the malfunction diagnostics for the audio
system, Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone (HF/TEL system) is initiated. A maximum of 10 DTCs
detected by the malfunction diagnostics are displayed.
Diagnostic assist function
x The diagnostic assist function is a function for forcibly operating audio system related parts to verify their
connection condition and operation status. In addition, the specifications for the audio system related parts
are displayed in the multi information display to enable their verification.
End Of Sie
DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO]
Note
x All DTCs displayed in the DTC inspection should be entered in the Audio Repair Order Form.
With M-MDS
1. Connect the M-MDS(IDS) to the DLC-2.
(3) Select “ACU”.
screen.
in the audio unit. (See 09-02E-4 CLEARING DTC
[AUDIO].)
Without M-MDS (On-board Diagnostic Test Mode)

1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the AUX switch and the RPT/PRESET 1
switch for 2 s or more.
With RDS (radio data system)
RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH
TRACK/SEEK
SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME AUX SWITCH

SWITCH
Without RDS (radio data system)
Note RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH

x If several DTCs are in the memory, they can
be displayed using the TRACK/SEEK switch TRACK/SEEK
(up or down). SWITCH
3. To stop the DTC inspection, ignition is switched to

off. POWER/VOLUME
End Of Sie SWITCH
AUX SWITCH
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [AUDIO]
Note
x The supplier can vary with the unit. When asking the supplier (service center) for repair or replacement,
identify the supplier and fill in the Audio Repair Order Form with the following procedures.
Identification Using the Label or Inscribed Lettering

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the following parts:
(1) Upper panel (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Shift knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[G35M-R].) (See 05-16B-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[G66M-R].) (See 05-16C-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A26M-R].)
(4) Shift panel (See 09-17-44 SHIFT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Center panel lower (See 09-17-33 CENTER PANEL LOWER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Center panel upper (See 09-17-31 CENTER PANEL UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Climate control unit (See 07-40A-29 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-25 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(8) Audio unit (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the supplier by referring to the label
attached to each unit.
LABEL
Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist Function

2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the PRESET 5 switch for 3 s or more.
PRESET 5 SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
PRESET 5 SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
3. Identify the supplier code by referring to the
information display.
Supplier
Supplier name
code
01 SANYO Automedia
02 Panasonic
03 Clarion
04 Pioneer
05 VISTEON
Note
x The supplier code can also be identified

from the DTC displays screen.
4. To stop the diagnostic assist function, ignition is

switched to off. SUPPLIER CODE
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [AUDIO]
Caution
x Before clearing the DTCs, be sure to enter all of the DTCs displayed in the DTC inspection in the
Audio Repair Order Form.
With M-MDS
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02E-1 DTC
INSPECTION [AUDIO].)
Without M-MDS (On-board Diagnostic Test Mode)

1. Launch the on-board diagnostic test mode. (See 09-02E-1 DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO].)
2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the AUDIO CONT switch for 2 s or more.
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH AUDIO CONT SWITCH

3. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode,
ignition is switched to off.
End Of Sie
AUDIO CONT SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
DTC TABLE [AUDIO]
DTC
Information
display Detection Reference
M-MDS display (On-board
diagnostic test
mode)
(See 09-02H-6 DTC: B1134:23,
26:Er85, DEVICE CORD 26/
ERROR CORD 85 [Bluetooth
B1134:23 26:Er85 Steering switch circuit malfunction
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-8 DTC: B116A:12,
B116A:12 26:Er82 Microphone circuit malfunction
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-10 DTC: B116A:13,
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-11 DTC: B116A:16,
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-13 DTC: B116A:44,
B116A:44 26:Er86 Bluetooth unit internal malfunction
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
DTC
Information
display Detection Reference
M-MDS display (On-board
diagnostic test
mode)
(See 09-02E-6 DTC: B1188:64,
B1188:64 10:Er07, 22:Er07 Audio unit internal malfunction
10:Er07, 22:Er07 [AUDIO].)
(See 09-02E-7 DTC: B1D19:71,
B1D19:71 10:ER02, 22:Er02 Audio unit internal malfunction
10:ER02, 22:Er02 [AUDIO].)
(See 09-02E-7 DTC: B1D19:79,
B1D19:79 10:Er01, 22:Er01 Audio unit internal malfunction
10:Er01, 22:Er01 [AUDIO].)
(See 09-02E-8 DTC: B1D19:96
B1D19:96 — Audio unit internal malfunction
[AUDIO].)
U0010:88 16:Er12 CAN system communication error
U0155:00 — Communication error to instrument cluster
U0156:00 — Communication error to information display
U0197:00 — Communication error to Bluetooth unit (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-
CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
U0498:68 26:Er81 CAN system communication error
x Audio unit internal malfunction

(See 09-02E-8 DTC: U3000:09,
U3000:09 09:Er21 x Speaker and speaker wiring harness
09:Er21 [AUDIO].)
malfunction
(See 09-02E-12 DTC: U3003:16,
U3003:16 09:Er20 Audio unit power supply voltage is low
09:Er20 [AUDIO].)
Refer to the following for a playable
CD.
— 10:Er09, 22:Er09 Non-recordable CD insertion
(See 09-03L-13 REFERENCE [CD
PLAYER/CHANGER].)
— NO Err DTC is not recorded. —
End Of Sie
DTC: B1188:64, 10:Er07, 22:Er07 [AUDIO]
DESCRIPTION Audio unit internal malfunction

DETECTION
Audio unit detects CD reading error
CONDITION
x CD is inserted upside down
x CDs with scratches or deformity
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Incompatible CDs
x Audio unit malfunction
1 INSPECT THE CD Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the audio unit memory. (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02E-4 CLEARING DTC [AUDIO].) No Go to the next step.
x Insert a playable CD with the title surface
facing upward.
Note
x Refer to the following for a playable
CD.
PLAYER/CHANGER].)
x Play the CD for 12 s or more.

x Perform the audio unit DTC inspection.
(See 09-02E-1 DTC INSPECTION [AUDIO].)
RECORDED (See 09-02E-5 DTC TABLE [AUDIO].)
x Are any DTCs present? No DTC troubleshooting completed.
End Of Sie
DTC: B1D19:71, 10:ER02, 22:Er02 [AUDIO]

DETECTION
CD drive servo malfunction
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Incompatible CDs
facing upward.
Note
CD.
PLAYER/CHANGER].)

End Of Sie
DTC: B1D19:79, 10:Er01, 22:Er01 [AUDIO]

DETECTION
CD drive mechanical malfunction
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Incompatible CDs
1 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTC from the audio unit memory. No Go to the next step.
(See 09-02E-4 CLEARING DTC [AUDIO].)
facing upward.
Note
CD.
PLAYER/CHANGER].)

End Of Sie
DTC: B1D19:96 [AUDIO]

DETECTION
Communication error between the audio control circuit and CD drive
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Incompatible CDs
facing upward.
Note
CD.
PLAYER/CHANGER].)

End Of Sie
DTC: U3000:09, 09:Er21 [AUDIO]
Without Bose®
x Audio unit internal ECU (Power amplifier peripheral circuit) is faulted.
DETECTION
x Audio unit protection function operates due to short to ground in speaker wiring harness and
CONDITION
speaker lead wire
x Audio unit connector or terminals malfunction
x Speaker connector or terminals malfunction
— Audio unit terminal 1A—Front door speaker (LH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1C—Front door speaker (LH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1D—Front door speaker (RH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1F—Front door speaker (RH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1S—Rear door speaker (LH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1U—Rear door speaker (LH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1V—Rear door speaker (RH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1X—Rear door speaker (RH) terminal B
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Audio unit terminal 1A—Front door speaker (LH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1C—Front door speaker (LH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1D—Front door speaker (RH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1F—Front door speaker (RH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1S—Rear door speaker (LH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1U—Rear door speaker (LH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1V—Rear door speaker (RH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1X—Rear door speaker (RH) terminal B
x Speaker malfunction
AUDIO UNIT
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (LH)
1A C
1C B
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (RH)
1D C
1F B
REAR DOOR SPEAKER (LH)
1S C
1U B
REAR DOOR SPEAKER (RH)
1V C
1X B
AUDIO UNIT SPEAKER

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING
HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
1X 1V 1U 1S 1F 1D 1C 1A
1P 1N 1L 1J 1H D C B A
1W 1T 1B
1R 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E
1 INSPECT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the audio unit connector.
2 INSPECT SPEAKER CONNECTOR AND Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
TERMINALS Step 6.
x Disconnect the speaker connector. No Go to the next step.
3 INSPECT SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Audio unit and speaker connector is circuit, then go to Step 6.
disconnected.
— Audio unit terminal 1A—Front door
speaker (LH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1C—Front door
speaker (LH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1D—Front door
speaker (RH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1F—Front door
speaker (RH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1S—Rear door
speaker (LH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1U—Rear door
speaker (LH) terminal B
— Audio unit terminal 1V—Rear door
speaker (RH) terminal C
— Audio unit terminal 1X—Rear door
speaker (RH) terminal B
4 INSPECT SPEAKER CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
SHORT TO GROUND ground, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect for continuity between the following No Go to the next step.
ground:
— Speaker terminal C
— Speaker terminal B
5 INSPECT SPEAKER Yes Replace the speaker, then go to the next step.
x Switch the ignition to off. (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
x Inspect the speaker. INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-10 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-12 REAR DOOR SPEAKER No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION.)
6 CONFIRM AUDIO UNIT DTC Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to the next step.
With Bose®
x Audio unit internal ECU (Power amplifier peripheral circuit) is faulted.
DETECTION
x Audio unit protection function operates due to short to ground in speaker wiring harness and
CONDITION
speaker lead wire
x Audio amplifier connector or terminals malfunction
— Audio unit terminal 1A—Audio amplifier terminal 1D (L.H.D.)/1F (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1C—Audio amplifier terminal 1C (L.H.D.)/1E (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1D—Audio amplifier terminal 1F (L.H.D.)/1D (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1F—Audio amplifier terminal 1E (L.H.D.)/1C (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1S—Audio amplifier terminal 1H (L.H.D.)/1J (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1U—Audio amplifier terminal 1G (L.H.D.)/1I (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1V—Audio amplifier terminal 1J (L.H.D.)/1H (R.H.D.)
POSSIBLE CAUSE — Audio unit terminal 1X—Audio amplifier terminal 1I (L.H.D.)/1G (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1A—Audio amplifier terminal 1D (L.H.D.)/1F (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1C—Audio amplifier terminal 1C (L.H.D.)/1E (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1D—Audio amplifier terminal 1F (L.H.D.)/1D (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1F—Audio amplifier terminal 1E(L.H.D.)/1C (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1S—Audio amplifier terminal 1H (L.H.D.)/1J (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1U—Audio amplifier terminal 1G (L.H.D.)/1I (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1V—Audio amplifier terminal 1J (L.H.D.)/1H (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1X—Audio amplifier terminal 1I(L.H.D.)/1G (R.H.D.)
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO AMPLIFIER
1A 1D 1F
1C 1C 1E
1D 1F 1D
1F 1E 1C
1S 1H 1J
1U 1G 1I
1V 1J 1H
1X 1I 1G
L.H.D. R.H.D.
AUDIO UNIT AUDIO AMPLIFIER
1X
1V 1U 1S 1F 1D 1C 1A
1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A
1P 1N 1L 1J 1H
1W 1T 1B 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B
1R 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E
1 INSPECT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
2 INSPECT AUDIO AMPLIFIER Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector. No Go to the next step.
3 INSPECT AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Audio unit and audio amplifier connector is circuit, then go to Step 5.
disconnected.
— Audio unit terminal 1A—Audio amplifier
terminal 1D (L.H.D.)/1F (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1C—Audio amplifier
terminal 1C (L.H.D.)/1E (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1D—Audio amplifier
terminal 1F (L.H.D.)/1D (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1F—Audio amplifier
terminal 1E (L.H.D.)/1C (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1S—Audio amplifier
terminal 1H (L.H.D.)/1J (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1U—Audio amplifier
terminal 1G (L.H.D.)/1I (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1V—Audio amplifier
terminal 1J (L.H.D.)/1H (R.H.D.)
— Audio unit terminal 1X—Audio amplifier
terminal 1I (L.H.D.)/1G (R.H.D.)
4 INSPECT AUDIO AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
FOR SHORT TO GROUND ground, then go to the next step.
ground:
— Audio amplifier terminal 1D
— Audio amplifier terminal 1C
— Audio amplifier terminal 1F
— Audio amplifier terminal 1E
— Audio amplifier terminal 1H
— Audio amplifier terminal 1G
— Audio amplifier terminal 1J
— Audio amplifier terminal 1I
5 CONFIRM AUDIO UNIT DTC Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to the next step.
End Of Sie
DTC: U3003:16, 09:Er20 [AUDIO]
DESCRIPTION Audio unit power supply voltage is low

DETECTION
Audio unit power supply voltage of less than 10 V is detected continuously for 10 s.
CONDITION
DESCRIPTION Audio unit power supply voltage is low
x PCM DTC is stored
x Open circuit or short to ground in audio unit power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminal:
x Audio unit terminal 1R—Ignition switch (ACC)*1/ACC relay*2
x Audio unit terminal 1B—Battery positive terminal
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— MIRROR 5 A fuse malfunction
— MAIN 125 A fuse malfunction
— BTN 40 A fuse malfunction
— ROOM 15 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between the following terminal:
x Audio unit terminal 1R— Ignition switch (ACC)*1/ACC relay*2
x Audio unit terminal 1B—Battery positive terminal
IGNITION SWITCH (ACC) *1
ACC RELAY (ACC) *2
BATTERY
FUSE BLOCK AUDIO UNIT
MIRROR 5 A
MAIN FUSE BLOCK FUSE
1R
MAIN 125 A BTN 40 A ROOM 15 A
FUSE FUSE FUSE
1B
AUDIO UNIT
1X 1V 1U 1S 1F 1D 1C 1A
1P 1N 1L 1J 1H
1W 1T 1B
1R 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E
*1
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

4 INSPECT AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminal, then go to Step
CONDITION 6.
x Inspect the connector for poor connection
(such as damaged/pulled-out pins, and
corrosion).
5 INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO No If the audio unit terminal 1B or 1R voltage is not B+:
GROUND x Inspect the MAIN 125 A fuse or BTN 40A fuse or ROOM
x Audio unit connector is disconnected. 15 A fuse or MIRROR 5 A fuse.
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. — If the fuse is melt:
x Switch the ignition to ACC. x Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
x Measure the voltage at the following short to ground.
terminals (wiring harness-side): x Replace the malfunctioning fuse.
— Audio unit terminal 1B — If the fuse is deterioration:
— Audio unit terminal 1R x Replace the malfunctioning fuse.
x Is the voltage B+? — If the fuse is normal:
x Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
open circuit.
Go to the next Step.
6 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the audio unit, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Make sure reconnect the disconnected
connectors.
x Clear the DTC from the audio unit memory.
(See 09-02E-4 CLEARING DTC [AUDIO].)
End Of Sie
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [AUDIO]
Switch Inspection
2. Turn the audio unit power to ON.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the PRESET 3 switch for 0.2 s or more.
PRESET 3 SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH

4. Inspect according to the following table:
PRESET 3 SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
INSPECTION DISPLAY ACTION

x Launch the switch inspection Yes The switch is normal.
mode. Verify the switch.
x Operate all of the switches (See 09-03J-4
(press). CONFIRMATION STEP
x Does the buzzer sound? 1: AUDIO PANEL
No
SWITCH
CONFIRMATION
[ENTIRE AUDIO
SYSTEM].)
5. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either turning off the audio unit power or by switch the ignition to off.
Speaker Inspection
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the AUTO-M switch for 0.2 s or more.
AUTO-M SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH

x Launch the speaker inspection The speakers and the wiring harness
mode. Yes between the audio unit and speakers
x Does each speaker output are normal.
sound in the following order?: x If no sound is produced from all of
Without Bose® the speakers.
1. Front door speaker (LH) and (See 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND
tweeter (LH) (with 6 speaker FROM ALL SPEAKERS [ENTIRE
type) AUDIO SYSTEM].)
2. Front door speaker (RH) and x If no sound is produced from
tweeter (RH) (with 6 speaker some of the speakers.
type) (See 09-03J-11 NO.4 NO SOUND
3. Rear door speaker (RH) FROM SOME SPEAKERS
4. Rear door speaker (LH) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)

With Bose®
1. Front door speaker (LH) and No
tweeter (LH) and center
speaker
2. Front door speaker (RH) and
tweeter (RH) and center
speaker
3. Rear door speaker (RH) and
rear speaker (4SD) /bass-box
(5HB/WGN)
4. Rear door speaker (LH) and
(5HB/WGN)
Radio Reception Condition Inspection

3. Tune in the radio.
PRESET 2 SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
PRESET 2 SWITCH
Caution
x Even if the system is normal, radio
reception may be difficult depending on
where the system is inspected (indoors/
outdoors, or conditions at the location).
Before inspecting the system, verify that
radio reception is adequate.
x When performing the inspection, select
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
the best area for receiving radio
frequencies.

Launch the radio reception condition Antenna feeder, glass antenna, and audio unit are
LEV 10 — LEV 5
inspection mode. normal.
LEV 4 — LEV 3 Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.
Inspect the antenna feeder, and glass antenna.
(See 09-20-32 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.) (WGN only)
(See 09-20-24 GLASS ANTENNA
INSPECTION.)
x If either the antenna feeder, and glass antenna
is not normal, replace the malfunctioning part.
LEV 2 — LEV 0
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (WGN only)
(See 09-12-50 FILAMENT REPAIR.)
x If the antenna feeder, and glass antenna are
normal, replace the audio unit.
(See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Antenna Control Condition Inspection

3. Tune in the radio.
4. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the AM switch for 0.2 s or more.
AM SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
AM SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH

Launch the antenna control Sound quality good. System is okay.
condition inspection mode. Inspect the antenna feeder, and glass
antenna.
(See 09-20-32 ANTENNA FEEDER
NO.1 INSPECTION.)
NO.2 INSPECTION.)
NO.3 INSPECTION.)
NO.4 INSPECTION.) (WGN only)
INSPECTION.)
x If either the antenna feeder, and
glass antenna is not normal,
replace the malfunctioning part.
(See 09-20-29 ANTENNA
ANT — ON FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/
Sound quality poor.
INSTALLATION.)
FEEDER NO.2 REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.) (WGN only)
(See 09-12-50 FILAMENT
REPAIR.)
x If the antenna feeder, and glass
antenna are normal, replace the
audio unit.
(See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT
Replace the audio unit.
ANT — OFF
(See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Audio Amplifier Control Condition Inspection

3. While pressing the AUTO-M switch, simultaneously press the CD switch for 0.2 s or more.
CD SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH

CD SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH

Launch the audio amplifier control condition AMP — ON System is okay.
inspection mode. Replace the audio unit.
AMP — OFF
Audio Amplifier Specification Inspection

2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TRACK/SEEK down switch for 3 s or
more.
TRACK/SEEK DOWN SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH

x Launch the audio amplifier Yes System is okay.
specification inspection mode. Without Bose®
x Verify the audio amplifier xN (Normal) Replace the audio unit.
specification. With Bose® No (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/
x Dose the audio amplifier INSTALLATION.)
xL (Line out)
specification correspond.
Dial Inspection
3. While pressing the AUTO-M switch, simultaneously press the RPT/PRESET 1 switch for 0.2 s or more.
RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH

RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH

x Launch the dial inspection mode. Yes The switch is normal.
x Operate all of the dial. Verify the switch.
x Does the dial rotation direction o (See 09-03J-4 CONFIRMATION
correspond with the direction m No STEP 1: AUDIO PANEL SWITCH
displayed in information display? CONFIRMATION [ENTIRE AUDIO
SYSTEM].)
Audio Amplifier (With Bose®) Identify Inspection

3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch or AUDIO CONT switch, simultaneously press the RPT/PRESET
1 switch and MUTE switch for 3 s or more.
RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH
MUTE SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH AUDIO CONT SWITCH

RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH
MUTE SWITCH
AUDIO CONT SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
INSPECTION — ACTION
x Launch the audio amplifier (With With normal seat Yes System is okay.
Bose®) identify inspection mode. xThe rear door speaker
x Dose the audio amplifier sounds. Replace the audio unit.
specification correspond. With leather seat No (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/
xThe front door speaker INSTALLATION.)
sounds.
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
09-02F ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO

LEVELING SYSTEM]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO
DIAGRAM [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–2
LEVELING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–1 DTC 3 [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
FOREWORD [HEADLIGHT AUTO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–3
LEVELING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–1 DTC 4 [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–1 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–6
DTC INSPECTION [HEADLIGHT AUTO DTC 6 [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
LEVELING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–1 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02F–8
End of Toc
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
B+ IG1
METER IG 15 A
FUSE
H J I HEAD LIGHT FRONT

LEVELING
L L COMBINATION
ACTUATOR LIGHT RH
I F RH
O
HEADLIGHT LOW RELAY

I HEAD LIGHT
FRONT
LEVELING
L COMBINATION
ACTUATOR
BCM LIGHT LH
K F LH
AUTO LEVELING
CONTROL MODULE
[INPUT] G B
· VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL B
[OUTPUT] M C FRONT AUTO
A LEVELING SENSOR
· INDICATOR STATUS
D A
DLC-2 Q
E B
C REAR AUTO
F LEVELING SENSOR
A
End Of Sie
FOREWORD [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Outline
— Malfunction diagnostic function: Monitors the headlight auto leveling system and outputs DTCs if a
malfunction is detected.
x The DTCs can be read by the headlight auto leveling warning light flashing pattern.
End Of Sie
DTC INSPECTION [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
09-02F–1
4. Turn the light switch to the LO position.
jumper wire.
Caution
x If the terminals are mistakenly
connected, vehicle damage or fire could
occur. When connecting with the jumper
wire, thoroughly verify what terminals are DLC-2
being connected to prevent a miss-
connection.
* * * * * * * *
original position.
Note
x If the motor inside the headlight leveling actuator does not operate, the headlight optical axis may be at
the bottommost position, or the procedure may have been performed incorrectly. Therefore, park the
vehicle on level ground and resume the procedure from Step 1.
7. Read the DTCs by the flashing pattern of the

HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING WARNING LIGHT
headlight auto leveling warning light.
8. After verifying the DTCs. pull out the jumper wire
from DLC-2.
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Note
x The headlight auto leveling warning light flashes in the following pattern when the headlight auto leveling
system is normal.
t1
t1
HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING ILLUMINATE
WARNING LIGHT OFF
t1: 0.5 s
t2 t2: 1 s
09-02F–2
x If the headlight auto leveling system has a malfunction, the headlight auto leveling warning light flashes in
the following pattern and a DTC is output.
FLASHING PATTERN
t1 t2
DTC㧤3
t1
WARNING LIGHT
OFF
DTC㧤4 t2

WARNING LIGHT OFF
DTC㧤6 t2
WARNING LIGHT OFF t1: 0.5 s
t2: 1 s
x All the detected DTCs are output repeatedly during DTC inspection.
x If multiple DTCs are detected, the DTCs are output in the order from the lowest number.
DTC
Flashing pattern DESCRIPTION Reference
(Auto leveling system
warning light)
(See 09-02F-3 DTC 3
3 Rear auto leveling sensor signals [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02F-6 DTC 4
4 Front auto leveling sensor signals [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02F-8 DTC 6
Auto leveling control module initial
6 [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
setting
SYSTEM].)
DTC 3 [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]

DETECTION
x Rear auto leveling sensor signal voltage is less than 0.4 V or 4.6 V or more.
CONDITION
x Rear auto leveling sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Auto leveling control module connector or terminals malfunction
— Auto leveling control module terminal D—rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Auto leveling control module terminal E—rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Auto leveling control module terminal M—rear auto leveling sensor terminal C
POSSIBLE — Auto leveling control module terminal D—rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
CAUSE — Auto leveling control module terminal E—rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Auto leveling control module terminal D—rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Auto leveling control module terminal E—rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
x Auto leveling control module malfunction
09-02F–3
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
D A
E B
M C
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

1 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the rear auto leveling sensor
connector.
2 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
MODULE CONNECTOR AND Step 7.
x Disconnect the auto leveling control module
connector.
x Rear auto leveling sensor and auto leveling
ground:
09-02F–4
5 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Replace the rear auto leveling sensor, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the rear auto leveling sensor. No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION.)
6 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the next step.
— Auto leveling control module terminal D—
rear auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Auto leveling control module terminal E—
rear auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Auto leveling control module terminal M—
rear auto leveling sensor terminal C
7 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the auto leveling control module, then go to the
COMPLETED next step.
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
connectors. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Perform the “DTC INSPECTION”.
(See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM].)
PRESENT (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO
x Are any DTCs present? LEVELING SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
09-02F–5
DESCRIPTION Front auto leveling sensor circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Front auto leveling sensor signal voltage is less than 0.4 V or 4.6 V or more.
CONDITION
x Front auto leveling sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Auto leveling control module connector or terminals malfunction
— Auto leveling control module terminal D—front auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Auto leveling control module terminal G—front auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Auto leveling control module terminal M—front auto leveling sensor terminal C
POSSIBLE — Auto leveling control module terminal D—front auto leveling sensor terminal A
CAUSE — Auto leveling control module terminal G—front auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Auto leveling control module terminal D—front auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Auto leveling control module terminal G—front auto leveling sensor terminal B
x Auto leveling control module malfunction
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
D A
G B
M C
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

1 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the front auto leveling sensor
connector.
2 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
MODULE CONNECTOR AND Step 7.
connector.
09-02F–6
x Front auto leveling sensor and auto leveling
ground:
5 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Replace the front auto leveling sensor, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the front auto leveling sensor. No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION.)
6 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the next step.
— Auto leveling control module terminal D—
front auto leveling sensor terminal A
— Auto leveling control module terminal G—
front auto leveling sensor terminal B
— Auto leveling control module terminal M—
front auto leveling sensor terminal C
x Make sure to reconnect the disconnected (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
End Of Sie
09-02F–7
DESCRIPTION Auto leveling system initialization error

DETECTION
x Auto leveling system initialization has not been completed.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE x Auto leveling system initialization error
CAUSE x Auto leveling control module malfunction
1 PERFORM AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM Yes Perform the “AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION INITIALIZATION” again, then go to the next step.
x Perform the “AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION”. INITIALIZATION.)
(See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM No Go to Step 3.
INITIALIZATION.)
x Switch the ignition to ON. (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
x Perform the “DTC INSPECTION”. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION No Go to the next step.
End Of Sie
09-02F–8
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
09-02G ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CAR-NAVIGATION

SYSTEM]
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION
DIAGNOSTIC MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-02G–11
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–1 Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–11
DIAGNOSTIC CHECK Diagnostic assist code table . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–12
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–3 Diagnostic assist code “01” display
Vehicle Signal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–3 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–12
Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–4 Diagnostic assist code “02” switch
Products Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–4 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–12
NAVIGATION CHECK Diagnostic assist code “03” speaker
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–5 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–12
GPS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–5 Diagnostic assist code “04” radio
Vehicle Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–6 reception condition inspection. . . . . . . 09-02G–13
History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–6 Diagnostic assist code “05” antenna
Microphone Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–7 control output condition inspection . . . 09-02G–14
DTC INSPECTION Diagnostic assist code “06” supplier
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–7 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–14
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION Diagnostic assist code “07” audio
PROCEDURE amplifier specification inspection. . . . . 09-02G–15
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–8 Diagnostic assist code “08” display
Identification Using the Label or Inscribed open/close inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–15
Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–8 Diagnostic assist code “09” radio SEEK
Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–15
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–9 Diagnostic assist code “10” software
CLEARING DTC version verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–16
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–9 Diagnostic assist code “11” DVD/CD
DTC TABLE drive inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02G–16
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-02G–10
End of Toc
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC MODE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]

2. Press the MENU switch.
MENU SWITCH
3. Select “Navigation Setup”.
Address Book
Navigation Setup
4. Select “Calibration”.
User Settings
Quick POI Selection
Language
Map Configuration
Calibration
Restore System Defaults
5. Select “Map Version”.
Adjusts the current position

Position/Direction
Select after tyre change.

Distance
Map Version
6. Press the A portion of the MAP VERSION screen

two times.
7. Press the B portion of the MAP VERSION screen
9999
two times. A
2008 Ver. 1
10 10 03 05
B
8. Select “Menu”.
9. Select the items to be inspected from the Menu
diagnosis menu. (See 09-02G-3 DIAGNOSTIC
CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].) PKB ON TNS ON
10. To stop the on-board diagnostic mode, ignition is
switched to off. REV OFF GPS Antenna OK
Microphone NCON Traffic System TMC
SPEED Kph 150

mph 100
DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]

Inspection item list
1
2
3
4
5
No. Name Content/function

1 09-02G-3 Vehicle Signal Check Perform the vehicle signal check.
2 Navigation Check Go to the Navigation Check Menu. (See 09-02G-5 NAVIGATION CHECK
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
3 09-02G-4 Switch Check Perform the switch inspection.
4 09-02G-4 Products Version Verify the products version.
5 Error Code Caution
x This item does not operate because it is a manufacturer
exclusive item.
6 All Def. Caution
x This item does not operate because it is a manufacturer
exclusive item.
Vehicle Signal Check

2. Launch the diagnostic mode. (See 09-02G-1 STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIAGNOSTIC MODE [CAR-
NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
3. Select “Vehicle Signal Check”.
4. Verify the condition of the vehicle signal input to the display.
Menu 5
6
1 PKB ON TNS ON
7
2 REV OFF GPS Antenna OK
8
3 Microphone NCON Traffic System TMC
4 SPEED Kph 150

mph 100

1 PKB Display the PKB signal condition.
2 REV Display the REV signal condition.
3 Microphone Verify the microphone condition.
4 SPEED Display the vehicle speed.
5 Menu Return to the Diagnosis Menu.
6 TNS Display the TNS signal condition.
7 GPS Antenna Display the GPS Antenna condition.
8 Traffic System Display the Traffic System condition.
5. To stop the on-board diagnostic mode, ignition is switched to off.
Switch Check
3. Select “Switch Check”.
4. Operate the panel switches and verify that they operate correctly.
Push Switch Check

2
SW Name is being pushed
At a push of SW beep sounds.
Rotary Switch Check

4 3
The SW is being turned .

2 Name of press-type switch The name of the operated press-type switch is displayed.
3 Turn direction of switch The operation condition (Left/Right) is displayed.
4 Name of dial-type switch The name of the operated dial-type switch is displayed.
Products Version
3. Select “Products Version”.
4. Verify each version.
Menu 6
1 Country Code : ****

2 Hardware ID : MJ 00
3 Software Ver : OB62
4 Loader Ver : 0013
5 Map Ver : ****
: V 02.01.31

1 Country Code Display the country code.
2 Hardware ID Display the hardware ID.
3 Software Ver Display the software version.
4 Leader Ver Display the leader version.
5 Map Ver Display the map version.

End Of Sie
NAVIGATION CHECK [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Inspection item list
1 7
2
3
4
5

1 09-02G-5 GPS Information Display the GPS information.
2 09-02G-6 Vehicle Sensors Display the vehicle sensors.
3 09-02G-6 History Display the history.
4 09-02G-7 Microphone Check Verify the microphone condition.
5 RDS-TMC information Caution
(With RDS (radio data system)) x This item does not operate because it is a manufacturer
exclusive item.
7 RDS-TMC Setting Caution
(With RDS (radio data system)) x This item does not operate because it is a manufacturer
exclusive item.
GPS Information
3. Select “Navigation Check”.
4. Select “GPS Information”.
5. Verify the GPS information.
Note
x The GPS reception signal is updated every 1 s.
4
Navi Menu
5
No EIV /Azm LVL STS No EIV /Azm LVL STS
3 73 °/0 21 ° 12 P 5 80 °/2 79 ° 12 P
8 52 °/1 83 ° 58 P 9 27 °/1 21 ° 58 -
1 10 32 °/2 19 ° 39 P 13 19 °/3 30 ° 39 -
10 49 °/0 97 ° 20 T 18 22 °/3 00 ° 20 -
20 61 °/0 45 ° 39 T 21 40 °/0 45 ° 39 T
23 72 °/2 78 ° 57 P 24 17 °/3 50 ° 57 -
6
2 Measurement Date(GMT) 98/0 5/ 27 09 : 46 : 00
Status : 3D N 39° 59. 8' W 137° 00.1 2'
3
am6zzw0000536
.
1 Satellite information Display “No (satellite number)”, “elevation angle”, “azimuth”, “signal level”
for the satellite.
2 Positioning condition Display any one of the following:
x [2D]: During two-dimensional positioning
x [3D]: During three-dimensional positioning
x [NG]: When positioning data is unavailable
x [error]: During reception error occurrence
x [—]: Other than the above
3 Position Display the latitude and longitude of the current position.
4 GPS reception condition Display any one of the following:
x [P]: If the applicable satellite is being used in the vehicle’s current
position.
x [T]: If receiving but not being used in the vehicle’s current position
x [—]: If reception is not possible from applicable satellite
5 Navi Menu Return to the Navigation Check Menu.
6 Day and time Display the day/time information
Vehicle Sensors
4. Select “Vehicle Sensors”.
5. Verify the sensor output condition of the sensor being input to the car navigation unit.
Note
x The vehicle signal is updated every 1s.
Navi Menu 1
Sensor Signal
Gyro Voltage : 2.500 V 2

Relative bearing : 359.9° 3
Reset 4

2 Gyro Voltage Display the gyro sensor voltage
3 Relative bearing Display the gyro sensor relative bearing
4 Reset Reset the following display items, and the display content to 0.
x Gyro sensor voltage
x Gyro sensor relative bearing
History
4. Select “History”.
5. Verify the displayed content.
Navi Menu 4
1 Use Start Date : 2002/01/31
2 Use Accumulation Time : 258h 14min

3 Accumulation Mileage : 12345km

1 Use Start Date Display the date for the start of use.
2 Use Accumulation Time Display the accumulated use time.
3 Accumulation Mileage Display the accumulated travel distance.
Microphone Check
4. Select “Microphone Check”.
5. Verify the microphone input condition.
Navi Menu 1
PTT switch status : <Please Push switch> 2

Please Speak at a Normal Level into the Microphone
Microphoneinput level judging 3
Microphone level : 4

2 Voice switch status Display the voice switch condition.
3 Microphone inspection results indicator Display the microphone inspection results
4 Microphone input level gauge Display the volume at 8 levels.

ie
DTC INSPECTION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Note
x All DTCs displayed in the on-board diagnostic test mode should be entered in the Audio Repair Order
Form.

2. Turn the audio power to OFF.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TUNE/AUDIO switch and the DISP
switch for 0.2 s or more.
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH TUNE/AUDIO SWITCH
ERROR RECODE
UP 1/20
SWITCH DEVICE 10: ERROR 10
CD-DRIVE COMMUNICATION Err

DOWN
SWITCH DATE:17/JUN TIME 15:33
DISP SWITCH

TUNE/AUDIO SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
Note
be displayed using the UP/DOWN switch. ERROR RECODE
UP 1/20
SWITCH DEVICE 10: ERROR 10
4. To stop the DTC inspection, ignition is switched to CD-DRIVE COMMUNICATION Err
DOWN
off.
SWITCH DATE:17/JUN TIME 15:33
End Of Sie
DISP SWITCH
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Note
x The supplier can vary with the unit. When asking the supplier (service center) for repair or replacement,
identify the supplier and fill in the Audio Repair Order Form with the following procedures.
Identification Using the Label or Inscribed Lettering

[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(8) Car-navigation unit (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the supplier by referring to the label
attached to each unit.
LABEL
Verify Using the Diagnostic Assist Function
1. Launch the diagnostic assist function. (See 09-02G-11 DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM].)
2. Press the “Diagnostic assist code input switch”,
and input the diagnostic assist code “06”.
3. Select “ENTER”.
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST CODE INPUT SWITCH ENTER
4. Identify the supplier code by referring to the

display.
Supplier
Supplier name
code
01 SANYO Automedia
02 Panasonic
03 Clarion
04 Pioneer
05 VISTEON
5. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to return to

the diagnostic assist code input screen.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to release the
diagnostic assist function.
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Caution
x Before clearing the memory, be sure to enter all of the DTCs displayed in the on-board diagnostic
test mode in the Audio Repair Order Form.
1. Launch the DTC inspection. (See 09-02G-7 DTC INSPECTION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the DISP switch for 0.2 s or more.
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
ERROR RECODE
1/20
DEVICE 10: ERROR 10
DATE:17/JUN TIME 15:33
DISP SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
off.
End Of Sie
ERROR RECODE
1/20
DEVICE 10: ERROR 10
DATE:17/JUN TIME 15:33
DISP SWITCH
DTC TABLE [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Screen display
Device Error Malfunction description Inferred cause/verified content
code code
20 Car-navigation does not function Battery voltage malfunction
x Verify the symptoms described by the customer
(such as occurrence frequency and mode).
x Short to ground in the wiring harness between the
car-navigation unit and speakers
09 Note
21 Audio unclear or no audio from radio and CD
x If there is a malfunction between the speaker
harness or speaker lead wire, the protector circuit
inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound.
x Car-navigation unit malfunction
16 12 CAN system communication error
(See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-
17 11 Communication error to instrument cluster CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
x Panel switch malfunction

21 19 Panel switch does not operate
x Defective CD (curved, broken or foreign material
MP3 applicable CD changer cannot
stuck/attached, etc.)
01 implement insert, eject, and disc change
x Car-navigation unit malfunction (MP3 applicable CD
commands.
changer malfunction)
x Defective CD (curved, broken or foreign material
stuck/attached, etc.)
02 Cannot change tracks or disc.
22 x CD incompatible (CD used by customer)
x Recurs no matter the type of CD (no non-compatible
07 CD cannot playback (cannot operate) CD)
x Malfunction of connectors between car-navigation
MP3 applicable CD changer (Car-navigation unit and MP3 applicable CD changer drive.
10
unit) does not operate. x Car-navigation unit malfunction (MP3 applicable CD
24 33 Display panel does not operate. Car-navigation unit malfunction
Screen display
Device Error Malfunction description Inferred cause/verified content
code code
Communication error between car-navigation unit and
25 32 Switch does not operate.
panel switch
No Error — DTC is not recorded.
End Of Sie
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Starting Procedure
2. Turn the audio power to ON.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TUNE/AUDIO switch for 0.2 s or more.

and input the diagnostic assist code. TUNE/AUDIO SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
Diagnostic assist code input screen
1 4
5
3

1 Diagnostic assist code Display the diagnostic assist code.
2 Diagnostic assist code input switch Input the diagnostic assist code.
3 DEL Clear the diagnostic assist code.
4 Diagnostic content Display the diagnostic content.
5 ENTER Go to the diagnostic assist function.
6. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to return to the diagnostic assist code input screen.
7. Press the POWER/VOLUME switch to release the diagnostic assist function.
Diagnostic assist code table

No. Content/function
01 09-02G-12 Diagnostic assist code “01” display inspection
02 09-02G-12 Diagnostic assist code “02” switch inspection
03 09-02G-12 Diagnostic assist code “03” speaker inspection
04 09-02G-13 Diagnostic assist code “04” radio reception condition inspection
05 09-02G-14 Diagnostic assist code “05” antenna control output condition inspection
06 09-02G-14 Diagnostic assist code “06” supplier identification
07 09-02G-15 Diagnostic assist code “07” audio amplifier specification inspection
08 09-02G-15 Diagnostic assist code “08” display open/close inspection
09 09-02G-15 Diagnostic assist code “09” radio SEEK inspection
10 09-02G-16 Diagnostic assist code “10” software version verification
11 09-02G-16 Diagnostic assist code “11” DVD/CD drive inspection
Diagnostic assist code “01” display inspection

1. Press the “Diagnostic assist code input switch”, and input the diagnostic assist code “01”.
Inspection Display Action
x Launch the display inspection The display displays The display is normal.
mode. normally.
x Verify the display.
RedoGreenoBlueoWhiteoBl The display does not Replace the car-
ackoColor baroGrey display normally. navigation unit.
baroPosition adjustment screen (See 09-20-5 CAR-
NAVIGATION UNIT
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code “02” switch inspection

x Launch the switch inspection Yes The switch is normal.
mode. Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Operate all of the switches — (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION
(press). No
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Does the buzzer sound?
Diagnostic assist code “03” speaker inspection


x Launch the speaker inspection The speakers and the wiring harness
mode. Yes between the car-navigation unit and
x Does each speaker output speakers are normal.
sound in the following order?: x If no sound is produced from all of
Without Bose® the speakers.
1. Front door speaker (LH) and (See 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND
tweeter (LH) (with 6 speaker FROM ALL SPEAKERS [ENTIRE
type) AUDIO SYSTEM].)
2. Front door speaker (RH) and x If no sound is produced from
tweeter (RH) (with 6 speaker some of the speakers.
type) (See 09-03J-11 NO.4 NO SOUND
3. Rear door speaker (RH) FROM SOME SPEAKERS
4. Rear door speaker (LH) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)
—
With Bose®
1. Front door speaker (LH) and No
tweeter (LH) and center
speaker
2. Front door speaker (RH) and
tweeter (RH) and center
speaker
3. Rear door speaker (RH) and
(5HB/WGN)
4. Rear door speaker (LH) and
(5HB/WGN)
Diagnostic assist code “04” radio reception condition inspection

1. Launch the diagnostic assist function with the radio power on and the radio receiving broadcasts. (See 09-02G-
11 Starting Procedure.)
Caution
x Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where the system is
inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before inspecting the system, verify
that radio reception is adequate.
x When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio frequencies.
Display (AM 522 kHz

Inspection Action
reception)
Antenna feeder, glass antenna, and car-navigation
LEV-10 522—LEV 5 522
unit are normal.
LEV-4 522—LEV 3 522 Change frequencies and re-perform the inspection.
Inspect the antenna feeder, and glass antenna.
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.) (WGN only)
Start the radio reception condition INSPECTION.)
inspection mode. x If either the antenna feeder, and glass antenna
is not normal, replace the malfunctioning part.
LEV-2 522—LEV 0 522
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (WGN only)
x If the antenna feeder, and glass antenna are
normal, replace the car-navigation unit.
(See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
Diagnostic assist code “05” antenna control output condition inspection

Caution
x Even if the system is normal, radio reception may be difficult depending on where the system is
inspected (indoors/outdoors, or conditions at the location). Before inspecting the system, verify
that radio reception is adequate.
x When performing the inspection, select the best area for receiving radio frequencies.

Sound quality
System is okay.
good.
ANT-On (See 09-03K-3 NO.1 NO RADIO
Sound quality
Start antenna control condition RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW
poor.
inspection mode. VOLUME [RADIO].)
Replace the car-navigation unit.
ANT-OF (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code “06” supplier identification

1. Refer to the supplier identification procedure. (See 09-02G-8 SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM].)
Diagnostic assist code “07” audio amplifier specification inspection
x Launch the audio amplifier Yes System is okay.
specification inspection mode. Without Bose® Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Verify the audio amplifier xN (Normal) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION
specification. With Bose® No UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Does the audio amplifier
xL (Line out)
specification correspond?
Diagnostic assist code “08” display open/close inspection

x Launch the audio display open/ Yes System is okay.
close inspection mode. Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Does the display open/close in (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION
—
the following order? No UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— closeotilt 1otilt 2otilt 3otilt
4otilt 5otilt 6oopenoclose
Diagnostic assist code “09” radio SEEK inspection

Yes System is okay.
Inspect the antenna feeder, and glass
antenna.
NO.1 INSPECTION.)
NO.2 INSPECTION.)
NO.3 INSPECTION.)
NO.4 INSPECTION.) (WGN only)
INSPECTION.)
x Launch the radio SEEK x If either the antenna feeder, and glass
inspection mode. antenna is not normal, replace the
x Verify the SEEK inspection to the —ch RECEIVED malfunctioning part.
directions on the screen. No
x Is the inspection result normal? NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(WGN only)
x If the antenna feeder, and glass
antenna are normal, replace the car-
navigation unit.
(See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code “10” software version verification

3. Verify the software version.
x Launch the software version
verification mode. Display the software version. —
x Verify the software version.
Diagnostic assist code “11” DVD/CD drive inspection

x Launch the DVD/CD drive USER DISC DEFECT Yes System is okay.
inspection mode. Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Insert the CD. CD-DRIVE MALFUNCTION No (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION
x Is the inspection result normal? UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/
TEL) SYSTEM)]
09-02H ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [Bluetooth SYSTEM

(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [Bluetooth SYSTEM DTC: B116A:12, 26:Er82,
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 82
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–1 [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
DTC INSPECTION [Bluetooth SYSTEM TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02H–8
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) DTC: B116A:13, 26:Er84,
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–1 DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 84
Audio Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–2 [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
Car-navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–3 TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02H–10
CLEARING DTC [Bluetooth SYSTEM DTC: B116A:16, 26:Er83,
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 83
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–4 [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
Audio Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–4 TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02H–11
With Car-navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–4 DTC: B116A:44, 26:Er86,
DTC TABLE [Bluetooth SYSTEM DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 86
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–5 TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02H–13
DTC: B1134:23, 26:Er85, DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION
DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 85 [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
[Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02H–13
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] . . . . 09-02H–6 Audio Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–13
With Car-navigation Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02H–16
End of Toc TEL) SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
WM: AUDIO UNIT
x The Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone (HF/TEL) system) has an on-board diagnostic function and
diagnostic assist function to facilitate Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone (HF/TEL) system) diagnosis.
On-board diagnostic function
x The on-board diagnostic function consists of the following functions: A malfunction detection function,
which detects overall malfunctions in the audio system-related parts; a memory function, which stores
detected DTCs; and a display function, which indicates system malfunctions via a DTC display.
x The memory function converts a malfunction detected by the malfunction detection function to a DTC and
stores it. The error currently occurring is stored as a present malfunction. Up to five DTCs can be stored as
a present malfunction.
x There are two methods for reading and clearing DTCs. They include activation of the on-board diagnostic
test mode of the on-board diagnostic function, which is operated using the audio/car-navigation unit, and
the M-MDS. The displayed DTCs differ depending on whether the on-board diagnostic test mode or the M-
MDS method is used. Additionally, because some DTCs are not displayed in the on-board diagnostic test
mode, use the M-MDS before performing the procedure.
On-board diagnostic test mode
— To display DTCs on the information display that have been recorded in the memory function, activate
the on-board diagnostic function by operating the audio/car-navigation unit.
Using the M-MDS
— When a DTC inspection is performed using the M-MDS, the malfunction diagnostics for the audio
system, Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone (HF/TEL system) is initiated. A maximum of 10 DTCs
detected by the malfunction diagnostics are displayed.
Diagnostic assist function
x The diagnostic assist function enables verification of the connection condition of the Bluetooth system
(hands-free telephone (HF/TEL) system related parts and their specification. The password for the
Bluetooth system (hands-free telephone (HF/TEL) system), which is set by the user, can also be reset.
End Of Sie
DTC INSPECTION [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Note
x All DTCs displayed in the DTC inspection should be entered in the Audio Repair Order Form.
09-02H–1
TEL) SYSTEM)]
Audio Unit
With M-MDS
screen.
in the Bluetooth unit. (See 09-02H-4 CLEARING
DTC [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)].)
Without M-MDS (on-board diagnostic test mode)

2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the RPT/PRESET 1 switch and the
PRESET 6 switch for 3 s or more.
RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH PRESET 6 SWITCH
TRACK/SEEK
SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
RPT/PRESET 1 SWITCH PRESET 6 SWITCH
TRACK/SEEK
SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
Note
be displayed using the TRACK/SEEK switch
(up or down).
CURRENT (DISPLAYS CURRENT MALFUNCTIONS)
off.
DEVICE CODE ERROR CODE
09-02H–2
TEL) SYSTEM)]
Car-navigation Unit
2. Turn the audio power to OFF.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the DISP switch for 0.2 s or more.
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH DISP SWITCH
‫ ع‬HF ERROR RECODE

Current Historic
CAN BUS No Error No Error Detail
MIC Short No Error No Error Detail
MIC P Fail No Error No Error Detail
MIC Off No Error No Error Detail
SWITCH stack No Error No Error Detail
Self Test No Error No Error Detail
CURRENT MALFUNCTION DETAIL SWITCH
NUMBER OF ERROR OCCURRING IN THE PAST
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
DISP SWITCH

Current Historic
CURRENT MALFUNCTION DETAIL SWITCH
NUMBER OF ERROR OCCURRING IN THE PAST
4. While pressing the detail switch.

5. To stop the DTC inspection, ignition is switched to CHECK CONTENT
off.
End Of Sie
‫ع‬ERROR RECODE RETURN
DEVICE CODE ERROR CODE
DEVICE 26: ERROR 81
CHECK HF/TEL UNIT AND WIRE
CURRENT/HISTORY:0/0
CURRENT PAST ERROR DETECTION

MALFUNCTION MALFUNCTIONS QUANTITY
09-02H–3
TEL) SYSTEM)]
CLEARING DTC [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Caution
x Before clearing the DTCs, be sure to enter all of the DTCs displayed in the DTC inspection in the
Audio Repair Order Form.
Audio Unit
With M-MDS
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 DTC
INSPECTION [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)].)
Without M-MDS (on-board diagnostic test mode)

1. Launch the DTC inspection. (See 09-02H-1 DTC INSPECTION [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
2. While pressing the AUTO-M switch, simultaneously press the PRESET 4 switch for 2 s or more.
PRESET 4 SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH

off. PRESET 4 SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH
With Car-navigation Unit

2. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the DISP switch for 2 s or more.
09-02H–4
TEL) SYSTEM)]
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH

Current Historic
DISP SWITCH

POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
off.
End Of Sie
Current Historic
DISP SWITCH
DTC TABLE [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
DTC
Audio unit Car-navigation unit
Information Display
display (On-board diagnostic Description Reference
M-MDS test mode)
(On-board
display
diagnostic test Device
mode) Error code
code
(See 09-02H-6 DTC:
B1134:23, 26:Er85, DEVICE
CORD 26/ERROR CORD 85
B1134:23 26:Er85 26 85 Steering switch circuit malfunction [Bluetooth SYSTEM
(HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-8 DTC:
B116A:12, 26:Er82, DEVICE
B116A:12 26:Er82 26 82 Microphone circuit malfunction [Bluetooth SYSTEM
(HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-10 DTC:
(HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02H-11 DTC:
(HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)
09-02H–5
TEL) SYSTEM)]
DTC
Audio unit Car-navigation unit
Information Display
display (On-board diagnostic Description Reference
M-MDS test mode)
(On-board
display
diagnostic test Device
mode) Error code
code
(See 09-02H-13 DTC:
B116A:44 26:Er86 26 86 Bluetooth unit internal malfunction [Bluetooth SYSTEM
(HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)].)

[MULTIPLEX
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
U0498:68 26:Er81 26 81 CAN system communication error
— NO Err No Error DTC is not recorded. —
End Of Sie
DTC: B1134:23, 26:Er85, DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 85 [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
DESCRIPTION Steering switch circuit malfunction

DETECTION
Steering switch input signal is detected continuously for 2 min or more
CONDITION
x Connector or terminal malfunction
x Steering switch malfunction
x Clock spring malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Clock spring terminal 4M and Bluetooth unit terminal F
x Bluetooth unit malfunction
09-02H–6
TEL) SYSTEM)]
DESCRIPTION Steering switch circuit malfunction
STEERING SWITCH CLOCK SPRING Bluetooth UNIT
4M 2L F
Bluetooth UNIT
AA Y V U S Q O M K I G E C A
AB Z X L T R P N L J H F D B
CLOCK SPRING CLOCK SPRING

STEERING SWITCH-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
4O 4M 4K 4I 4G 4E 4C 4A 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
4P 4N 4L 4J 4H 4F 4D 4B 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
1 INSPECT STEERING SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminal, then go to Step
CONNECTOR CONDITION 7.
x Disconnect the steering switch connector.
corrosion).
2 INSPECT CLOCK SPRING CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminal, then go to Step
CONDITION 7.
x Disconnect the clock spring connector. No Go to the next step.
corrosion).
3 INSPECT Bluetooth UNIT CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminal, then go to Step
CONDITION 7.
x Disconnect the Bluetooth unit connector. No Go to the next step.
corrosion).
4 INSPECT STEERING SWITCH Yes Replace the steering switch, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the steering switch. (See 09-20-52 STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-56 STEERING SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
09-02H–7
TEL) SYSTEM)]
5 INSPECT CLOCK SPRING Yes Replace the crock spring, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the crock spring. (See 08-10-16 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/
(See 08-10-18 CLOCK SPRING INSTALLATION.)
6 INSPECT STEERING SWITCH INPUT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND ground, then go to the next step.
x Make sure reconnect the disconnected No Go to the next step.
connectors.
ground:
— Bluetooth unit terminal F
7 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTC from the Bluetooth unit
memory.
(See 09-02H-4 CLEARING DTC [Bluetooth
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
x Perform the Bluetooth unit DTC inspection.
(See 09-02H-1 DTC INSPECTION
[Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
RECORDED (See 09-02H-5 DTC TABLE [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-
x Are any DTCs present? FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DTC: B116A:12, 26:Er82, DEVICE CORD 26/ERROR CORD 82 [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE
DESCRIPTION Microphone circuit malfunction

DETECTION
Short to power supply in the microphone input circuit
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE — Bluetooth unit terminal A and microphone terminal A
x Microphone malfunction
MICROPHONE Bluetooth UNIT
A A

F E D C B A AA Y V U S Q O M K I G E C A
09-02H–8
TEL) SYSTEM)]
1 INSPECT MICROPHONE CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminal, then go to Step
CONDITION 4.
x Disconnect the microphone connector.
corrosion).
CONDITION 4.
corrosion).
3 INSPECT MICROPHONE INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY power supply, then go to the next step.
connectors.
— Bluetooth unit terminal A
4 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the microphone, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTC from the Bluetooth unit No Go to the step 6.
memory.
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
x Clear the DTC from the Bluetooth unit No Go to the next step.
memory.
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
09-02H–9
TEL) SYSTEM)]

DETECTION
Microphone non-connection signal detected continuously
CONDITION
— Bluetooth unit terminal E and microphone terminal E (L.H.D.)/F (R.H.D.)
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— Bluetooth unit terminal A and microphone terminal A
A A
L.H.D. E E
R.H.D. F E

CONDITION 5.
corrosion).
CONDITION 5.
corrosion).
3 INSPECT MICROPHONE CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect for continuity between the following circuit, then go to Step 5.
— Bluetooth unit terminal E and microphone
terminal E (L.H.D.)/F (R.H.D.)
09-02H–10
TEL) SYSTEM)]
4 INSPECT MICROPHONE INPUT CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
FOR SHORT TO GROUND ground, then go to the next step.
ground:
— Bluetooth unit terminal A and body ground
5 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the microphone then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Make sure reconnect the disconnected No Go to Step 7.
connectors.
x Clear the DTC from the Bluetooth unit
memory.
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
memory.
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie

DETECTION
Short to ground in microphone power supply circuit
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE — Bluetooth unit terminal C and microphone terminal C
09-02H–11
TEL) SYSTEM)]
C C

CONDITION 5.
corrosion).
CONDITION 5.
corrosion).
3 INSPECT MICROPHONE POWER Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO ground, then go to Step 5.
ground:
— Microphone terminal C
4 INSPECT Bluetooth UNIT POWER Yes Replace the microphone, then go to the next step.
SUPPLY CIRCUIT (See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
connectors.
x Measure the voltage at the following terminal
(wiring harness-side):
— Bluetooth unit terminal C
09-02H–12
TEL) SYSTEM)]
memory.
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Bluetooth unit internal malfunction

DETECTION
Bluetooth unit detects the internal malfunction.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Bluetooth unit malfunction
1 CONFIRM Bluetooth UNIT DTC Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit, then go to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the Bluetooth unit (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
memory. No Go to the next step.
TEL) SYSTEM)].)
End Of Sie
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Audio Unit
Software version verification
2. Press the TRACK/SEEK down switch to display the oldest error code of the error codes that have been
recorded.
Note
x If an error code has not been recorded, No Err is displayed.
09-02H–13
TEL) SYSTEM)]

3. Press the TRACK/SEEK down switch.
4. Verify the software version.

off.
Connection condition verification

2. Press TRACK/SEEK down switch to display the software version.
09-02H–14
TEL) SYSTEM)]
3. Press the TRACK/SEEK down switch.
4. Verify the connected unit.

off. WITHOUT Bose R
WITH Bose R
Password reset
2. Press the PRESET 2 switch while pressing the AUTO-M switch until the password reset verification beep sound
is heard.
PRESET 2 SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH
PRESET 2 SWITCH
AUTO-M SWITCH
09-02H–15
TEL) SYSTEM)]
3. Verify the “Clear” is displayed in the information
display.
4. Cancel the diagnostic assist function by either
turning off the audio unit power or by switch the
ignition to off.
With Car-navigation Unit

Starting procedure
2. Turn the audio power to ON.
3. While pressing the POWER/VOLUME switch, simultaneously press the TUNE/AUDIO switch for 0.2 s or more.

and input the diagnostic assist code. TUNE/AUDIO SWITCH POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
Diagnostic assist code input screen
1 4
5
3

1 Diagnostic assist code Display the diagnostic assist code.
2 Diagnostic assist code input switch Input the diagnostic assist code.
09-02H–16
TEL) SYSTEM)]
3 DEL switch Diagnostic assist code clear
4 Diagnostic content Display the diagnostic content.
5 ENTER switch Go to the diagnostic assist function.
Diagnostic assist code “37”connection condition verification

Inspection Display Measures
x Launch the connection condition The Bluetooth unit connection condition is
AVN CONNECT
mode. normal.
x Verify the connection condition. Verify the Bluetooth unit connection condition.
AVN CON ERR (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Diagnostic assist code “38” software version verification

x Launch the software version
verification mode. Ver.0110 —
x Software version verification.
Diagnostic assist code “39” password reset

x Launch the password reset
PASSWD CLEAR —
mode.
End Of Sie
09-02H–17
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
09-02I ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC DTC U0452:92
WIRING DIAGRAM [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–15
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–2 DTC U0483:68
DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–15
CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–16
DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–17
DTC P0070:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–18
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–7 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–19
DTC U0300:00 DTC U2005:86
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–9 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–20
DTC U0401:68 DTC U2100:00
DTC U0401:92 DTC U3000:41
DTC U0402:68 DTC U3003:16
DTC U0402:92 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–22
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–12 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
DTC U0415:68 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–24
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–12 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–13 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–14 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02I–25
End of Toc
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
WATER ILLUMINATION TACHOMETER
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE FUEL GAUGE SPEEDOMETER
2K BCM
TO CAN SYSTEM- 2S
RELATED MODULE
(MS-CAN) 2T TNS INDICATOR LIGHT
TO CAN SYSTEM- 2X
RELATED MODULE
(HS-CAN) 2W
PANEL
LIGHT
CONTROL LCD
VEHICLE SPEED ODOMETER/TRIPMETER
2O
SIGNAL OUTPUT
ILLUMINATION 2I BZ
LIGHT
2B
KEYLESS DIMMER MICRO- B+
CONTROL SWITCH COMPUTER
MODULE 2H
BCM 2N IG1
1B 2V
AMBIENT
TEMPUTER B+
SENSOR 1C
WITHOUT ADVANCED
FUEL GAUGE 2M 2E
COIL KEYLESS ENTRY AND
SENDER UNIT ANTENNA PUSH BUTTON START
2D
2G SYSTEM
2F
TRIPMETER
FUEL-LEVEL
SWITCH
WARNING LIGHT
GLOW INDICATOR
LIGHT MZR-CD 2.2
GENERATOR
WARNING LIGHT
MIL
HEADLIGHT WASHER FLUID-LEVEL

CLEANER CONTROL WARNING LIGHT
MODULE 1D
WITH WASHER FLUID- DOOR AJAR
LEVEL SENSOR WARNING LIGHT
SEAT BELT
WARNING LIGHT
TIRE PRESSURE
WITH TPMS
WARNING LIGHT
AT WARNING LIGHT
ATX
HIGH-BEAM
INDICATOR LIGHT
RVM INDICATOR LIGHT

(GREEN) WITH REAR
RVM WARNING LIGHT VEHICLE
(AMBER) MONITORING
SYSTEM
a b c
: TO MICROCOMPUTER
a b c
WITH HEADLIGHT AUTO
DISCHARGE LEVELING
HEADLIGHT WARNING LIGHT
120 km/h WARNING

LIGHT
AIR BAG
SYSTEM
WARNING
CIRCUIT LIGHT
FAILURE
DETECTION
TURN INDICATOR
LIGHT (LH)
TURN INDICATOR
LIGHT (RH)
KEYLESS INDICATOR
LIGHT (GREEN)
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
KEYLESS WARNING ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
LIGHT (RED) START SYSTEM
SECURITY LIGHT
OIL PRESSURE
WARNING LIGHT
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 1M
DSC INDICATOR
LIGHT WITH DSC
DSC OFF LIGHT
DIESEL PARTICULATE
FILTER WARNING LIGHT
MZR-CD 2.2
SEDIMENT WARNING
LIGHT
WITH REAR REAR FOG LIGHT

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR LIGHT
FRONT FOG LIGHT

INDICATOR LIGHT FRONT FOG WITH FRONT
2L LIGHT RELAY FOG LIGHT
ABS WARNING
LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT
P
ATX
R
SELECTOR
INDICATOR N
D AND GEAR POSITION
DRIVE
CIRCUIT
M
WITH ADVANCED
STEERING LOCK FAIL KEYLESS ENTRY AND
WARNING LIGHT PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM
AFS OFF LIGHT
WITH AFS
ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING (EPS)
WARNING LIGHT
CRUISE MAIN
INDICATOR LIGHT WITH CRUISE
CRUISE SET CONTROL SYSTEM
INDICATOR LIGHT
: TO MICROCOMPUTER
DTC INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
screen.
in the instrument cluster. (See 09-02I-4
CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02I-4 DTC
INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

(See 09-02C-8 SECURITY LIGHT: 12, DTC:
B10D5:13*1 Coil antenna malfunction B10D5:13/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
B10D7:05*1 Key ID number error B10D7:05/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
B10D8:00*1 Shortage of programmed key B10D8:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
B10D9:87*1 Communication error to coil antenna B10D9:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
B10DA:51*1 Communication error to PCM (Data transfer failure) B10DA:51/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
B10DA:62*1 Communication error to PCM (Data mis-match) B10DA:62/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
*2 Low tire pressure (See 02-02-5 DTC C0077:00.)
C0077:00
C2011:49*2 Wheel unit No.1 internal malfunction
C2012:49*2 Wheel unit No.2 internal malfunction (See 02-02-6 DTC C2011:49/C2012:49/C2013:49/
C2013:49*2 Wheel unit No.3 internal malfunction C2014:49.)
C2014:49*2 Wheel unit No.4 internal malfunction

C2011:87*2 Wheel unit No.1 (No response)
C2012:87*2 Wheel unit No.2 (No response) (See 02-02-6 DTC C2011:87/C2012:87/C2013:87/
C2013:87*2 Wheel unit No.3 (No response) C2014:87.)
C2014:87*2 Wheel unit No.4 (No response)

(See 09-02I-7 DTC P0070:14 [INSTRUMENT
P0070:14 Ambient temperature sensor circuit malfunction
CLUSTER].)
U0001:88 CAN system communication error (HS-CAN)
U0010:88 CAN system communication error (MS-CAN)
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT
MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)

U0100:87*1 Communication error to PCM (No response) U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT
U0121:00 Communication error to ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
Communication failure between instrument cluster and

U0127:00*2 keyless receiver (See 02-02-7 DTC U0127:00.)
U0140:00 Communication error to BCM
U0151:00 Communication error to SAS control module
U0164:00*4 Communication error to climate control unit (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
U0166:00*5 Communication error to water heater unit COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT
Communication error to AFS control module/auto
U0182:00*6 leveling control module
U0214:00*7 Communication error to keyless control module
Communication error to rear vehicle monitoring control

U0232:00*8 module
(See 09-02I-9 DTC U0300:00 [INSTRUMENT

U0300:00 Configuration error
CLUSTER].)
U0401:68 Signal error from PCM
CLUSTER].)
U0401:92 On request from PCM
CLUSTER].)
U0402:68*3 Signal error from TCM CLUSTER].)
U0402:92*3 On request from TCM CLUSTER].)
U0415:68 Signal error from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
CLUSTER].)
U0415:92 On request from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
CLUSTER].)
U0425:68*5 Signal error from water heater unit CLUSTER].)
U0452:92 On request from SAS control module
CLUSTER].)
Signal error from AFS control module/auto leveling (See 09-02I-15 DTC U0483:68 [INSTRUMENT
U0483:68*6 control module CLUSTER].)
On request from AFS control module/auto leveling (See 09-02I-16 DTC U0483:92 [INSTRUMENT
U0483:92*6 control module CLUSTER].)
U0515:68*7 Signal error from keyless control module CLUSTER].)
U0515:92*7 On request from keyless control module CLUSTER].)
U0533:68*8 Signal error from rear vehicle monitoring control module CLUSTER].)
CLUSTER].)
x Configuration error (See 09-02I-20 DTC U2100:00 [INSTRUMENT
U2100:00
x Configuration has not been performed CLUSTER].)
U3000:41 Instrument cluster internal malfunction
CLUSTER].)
U3000:42*2 Instrument cluster general memory failure (See 02-02-11 DTC U3000:42.)
U3003:16 Instrument cluster power supply circuit malfunction
CLUSTER].)
*1
: Vehicles with keyless entry system
*2 : Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
*3
: ATX
*4
: Full-auto air conditioner
*5 : Vehicles with water heater system
*6
: Vehicles with AFS or headlight auto leveling system
*7
: Vehicles with advanced keyless entry and push button start system
*8 : Vehicles with rear vehicle monitoring system
End Of Sie
DTC P0070:14 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

WM: INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION
Ambient temperature sensor circuit malfunction
x Short to ground or open circuit in wiring harness between ambient temperature sensor and
DETECTION
CONDITIONinstrument cluster.
x Ambient temperature sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Ambient temperature sensor malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between ambient temperature sensor terminal B and instrument
POSSIBLE CAUSE cluster terminal 1B
— Ambient temperature sensor terminal B—Instrument cluster terminal 1B
— Ambient temperature sensor terminal A—Instrument cluster terminal 1C

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
B 1B
A 1C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

CONNECTOR
1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A
B A
1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B
1 INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor
connector.
2 INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Yes Replace the ambient temperature sensor, then go to Step
SENSOR 6.
x Inspect the ambient temperature sensor. (See 07-40B-21 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(See 07-40B-22 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
SENSOR INSPECTION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40A-24 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(See 07-40A-25 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR
SENSOR INSPECTION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
CONDITIONER].) No Go to the next step.
4 INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Ambient temperature sensor and instrument
cluster connectors are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between ambient
temperature sensor terminal B (wiring
harness-side) and body ground.
5 INSPECT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Yes Go to the next step.
x Ambient temperature sensor and instrument
cluster connectors are disconnected.
— Ambient temperature sensor terminal B—
Instrument cluster terminal 1B
— Ambient temperature sensor terminal A—
Instrument cluster terminal 1C
6 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the instrument cluster, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected INSTALLATION.)
connectors. No Go to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster
using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02I-4 CLEARING DTC
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
x Verify the instrument cluster DTC using the
M-MDS.
(See 09-02I-4 DTC INSPECTION
PRESENT (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
DTC U0300:00 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
DESCRIPTION Configuration error

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster detects the configuration error.
CONDITION
x Configuration was not done correctly for some reason.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 PERFORM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Perform the instrument cluster configuration again, then go
CONFIGURATION to the next step.
x Perform the instrument cluster configuration (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
using the M-MDS. CONFIGURATION.)
(See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER No Go to Step 3.
CONFIGURATION.)
using the M-MDS.
M-MDS.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster INSTALLATION.)
using the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the PCM.
CONDITION
x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY PCM DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Verify the PCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Are any DTCs present? No Go to the next step.

x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8,
using the M-MDS. MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Switch the ignition to ON and wait for 20 s or
more.
x Verify the instrument cluster DTC using the No Go to Step 4.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION On request from PCM

DETECTION x Instrument cluster detects the illumination command signal from the PCM continues for 20 s or
CONDITION more.
x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

more.
x Drive the vehicle with 500 rpm or more. No Go to Step 4.
M-MDS.
more.
x Drive the vehicle with 500 rpm or more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from TCM

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the TCM.
CONDITION
x TCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY TCM DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Verify the TCM DTC using the M-MDS. (See 05-02-4 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC
(See 05-02-3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TABLE [FS5A-EL].)
SYSTEM DTC INSPECTION [FS5A-EL].) No Go to the next step.
2 VERIFY TCM MALFUNCTION Yes Replace the TCM, then go to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 05-17-46 TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
using the M-MDS. No Go to Step 4.
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION On request from TCM

DETECTION x Instrument cluster detects the illumination command signal from the TCM continues for 20 s or
CONDITION more.
x TCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Verify the TCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 05-02-4 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 05-17-46 TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
DTCs (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
x Verify the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM DTCs (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC
using the M-MDS. STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
(See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS No Go to the next step.
[ABS].)
(See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
2 VERIFY ABS HU/CM OR DSC HU/CM Yes Replace the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM, then go to the
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 04-13-2 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
using the M-MDS. (See 04-15-2 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02I-4 CLEARING DTC No Go to Step 4.
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION On request from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM

DETECTION x Instrument cluster detects the illumination command signal from the ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
CONDITION continues for 20 s or more.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
[ABS].)
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 04-13-2 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
using the M-MDS. (See 04-15-2 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from water heater unit

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the water heater unit.
CONDITION
x Water heater unit malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY WATER HEATER SYSTEM DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Verify the water heater system DTCs using (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
2 VERIFY WATER HEATER UNIT Yes Replace the water heater unit, then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION (See 07-40A-32 WATER HEATER UNIT REMOVAL/
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
DESCRIPTION On request from SAS control module

DETECTION x Instrument cluster detects the illumination command signal from the SAS control module continues
CONDITION for 20 s or more.
x SAS control module malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY SAS CONTROL MODULE DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Verify the SAS control module DTCs using (See 08-02-6 DTC TABLE.)
the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
(See 08-02-6 DTC DISPLAY.)
2 VERIFY SAS CONTROL MODULE Yes Replace the SAS control module, then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION (See 08-10-14 SAS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from AFS control module or auto leveling control module
DETECTION x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the AFS control module or auto leveling
CONDITION control module.
x AFS control module or auto leveling control module malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
SYSTEM OR AFS DTCs (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
x Verify the headlight auto leveling system or SYSTEM].)
AFS DTCs. (See 09-02D-4 DTC TABLE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
(See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
2 VERIFY AFS CONTROL MODULE OR Yes Replace the AFS control module or auto leveling control
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE module, then go to the next step.
(See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
MALFUNCTION
SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
using the M-MDS. (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
(See 09-02I-4 CLEARING DTC REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Switch the ignition to ON and wait for 20 s or No Go to Step 4.
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION On request from AFS control module or auto leveling control module
DETECTION x Instrument cluster detects the illumination command signal from the AFS control module or auto
CONDITION leveling control module continues for 20 s or more.
x AFS control module or auto leveling control module malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
SYSTEM OR AFS DTCs (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
x Verify the headlight auto leveling system or SYSTEM].)
AFS DTCs. (See 09-02D-4 DTC TABLE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
(See 09-02F-1 DTC INSPECTION LIGHTING SYSTEM)].)
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
2 VERIFY AFS CONTROL MODULE OR Yes Replace the AFS control module or auto leveling control
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE module, then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION
using the M-MDS. (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
(See 09-02I-4 CLEARING DTC REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Switch the ignition to ON and wait for 20 s or No Go to Step 4.
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from keyless control module

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the keyless control module.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
DTCs
x Verify the advanced keyless entry and push No Go to the next step.
button start system DTCs using the M-MDS.
2 VERIFY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Yes Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
MALFUNCTION step.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
using the M-MDS. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02I-4 CLEARING DTC PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) No Go to Step 4.
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION On request from keyless control module

DETECTION x Instrument cluster detects the illumination command signal from the keyless control module
CONDITION continues for 20 s or more.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
DTCs
x Verify the advanced keyless entry and push No Go to the next step.
button start system DTCs using the M-MDS.
2 VERIFY KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Yes Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
MALFUNCTION step.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
using the M-MDS. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-02I-4 CLEARING DTC PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) No Go to Step 4.
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from rear vehicle monitoring control module

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster cannot receive the correct data from the rear vehicle monitoring control module.
CONDITION
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 VERIFY REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
SYSTEM DTCs (See 09-02J-3 DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Verify the rear vehicle monitoring system SYSTEM].)
DTCs using the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
(See 09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
2 VERIFY REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module, then go
CONTROL MODULE MALFUNCTION to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the instrument cluster (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
using the M-MDS. MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
more.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION
Signal error from PCM
x Instrument cluster detects the invalid vehicle speed from the PCM under the following conditions:
— Passed 20 s after switch the ignition to ON.
DETECTION
— Odometer is normal and more than 30 km {19 mile}.
CONDITION
— Battery voltage is more than 10 V.
— Received the invalid data from the PCM for 1 s.
x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
more.
x Verify the instrument cluster DTC using the No Go to Step 4.
M-MDS.
more.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
x Configuration error
DESCRIPTION
x Configuration has not been performed
DETECTION
x Configuration setting has not been performed.
CONDITION
x Instrument cluster configuration not implemented.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 PERFORM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Perform the instrument cluster configuration again, then go
CONFIGURATION to the next step.
x Perform the instrument cluster configuration (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
using the M-MDS. CONFIGURATION.)
(See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER No Go to Step 3.
CONFIGURATION.)
using the M-MDS.
M-MDS.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Instrument cluster internal malfunction

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster detects the internal malfunction.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Instrument cluster internal malfunction
1 VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Replace the instrument cluster, then go to the next step.
MALFUNCTION (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Instrument cluster power supply circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Instrument cluster power supply circuit voltage is less than 10 V.
CONDITION
x Short to ground or open circuit in instrument cluster power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and instrument cluster terminal
2V
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and instrument cluster terminal 2V
(vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between IG1 relay and instrument cluster terminal 2V (vehicles
with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
IGNITION SWITCH (IG1)*1/

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
IG1 RELAY*2
METER IG 15 A
2V
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
*1 : Vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system
*2
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector.
5 INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Go to the next step.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR No Inspect the METER IG 15 A fuse.
SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN x If the fuse is melt:
CIRCUIT — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
short to ground.
x Instrument cluster connector is
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the instrument cluster
terminal 2V (wiring harness-side).
open circuit.
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected INSTALLATION.)
using the M-MDS.
M-MDS.
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

the screen.
Note DLC-2
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
—: Not applicable
PID name (definition) Unit/status Operation Condition Inspection item (s)
ECT_GAUGE qC Engine coolant temperature ECT sensor
Ambient temperature
EX_TEMP qC Ambient temperature
sensor
FUEL_INPT_1 ohm Resistance value of fuel gauge sender unit Fuel gauge sender unit
Number of key ID numbers programmed with the
NUMKEYS *
vehicle
Displays odometer data.
Note
ODO_CNT km
x Distance is displayed within a range of 0 to
51 m {0 to 167 ft} repeatedly. Data is reset to
0 m {0 ft} by switch the ignition to off.
ODOMETER km Indicates the odometer data.
SPDMTR KPH Vehicle driven: Displays vehicle speed. ABS wheel-speed sensor
When the engine is running: Indicate the engine
TACHOMTR RPM CKP sensor
speed
VPWR V Indicate the battery voltage. Battery
*
: Vehicles with keyless entry system
ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
parts.
End Of Sie
ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
Command name Operation condition Output part name Unit/Operation

Warning alarm
ALARM On: Warning alarm sounds. On / Off
(Instrument cluster)
MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.0 DISI, MZR
2.5
x C (50 DegC): Engine coolant temperature
gauge needle moves to C. MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
x H (128 DegC): Engine coolant temperature 2.0 DISI, MZR 2.5
gauge needle moves to H. C (50 DegC) /
x Off: Engine coolant temperature gauge Engine coolant H (128 DegC) /
ECT_GAUGE needle moves to lower area. temperature gauge Off
MZR-CD 2.2 (Instrument cluster) MZR-CD 2.2
x C (35 DegC): Engine coolant temperature C (35 DegC) /
gauge needle moves to C. H (128 DegC) /
x H (128 DegC): Engine coolant temperature Off
gauge needle moves to H.
x Off: Engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to lower area.
x E: The fuel gauge needle moves E.
Fuel gauge
FUEL_GAUGE x 1/2: The fuel gauge needle moves 1/2. E / 1/2 / F
x F: The fuel gauge needle moves F.
LCD segment
LCD_SEG On: LCD segment displayed On / Off
x 60 km/h: Speedometer gauge needle
moves to approx. 65 km/h {40 mph}.
60 Km/h /
x 120 km/h: Speedometer gauge needle Speedometer
SPDMTR 120 Km/h /
moves to approx. 128 km/h {79.5 mph}. (Instrument cluster)
Off
x Off: Speedometer gauge needle moves to
0 km/h {0 mph}.
x 3,000 RPM: Tachometer gauge needle
moves to approx. 3,100 rpm.
3000 RPM /
x 6,000 RPM: Tachometer gauge needle Tachometer
TACHOMTR 6000 RPM /
moves to approx. 6,200 rpm. (Instrument cluster)
Off
x Off: Tachometer gauge needle moves to 0
rpm.
Warning light,
WL+IL On: Warning/indicator lights illuminate. indicator light On / Off
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
09-02J ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [REAR VEHICLE

MONITORING SYSTEM]
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DTC U1A4B:16, U1A4B:17 [REAR
DIAGRAM [REAR VEHICLE VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02J–19
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–2 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–20
DTC INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE DTC U1A4B:43, U1A4B:44, U1A4B:45,
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–2 U1A4B:46, U1A4B:47, U1A4B:48,
CLEARING DTC [REAR VEHICLE U1A4B:49, U1A4B:96 [REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–3 MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–22
DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE DTC U1A4B:54 [REAR VEHICLE
DTC B11CB:11 [REAR VEHICLE DTC U2100:00 [REAR VEHICLE
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–5 DTC U3000:43, U3000:44, U3000:45,
DTC B11CB:15 [REAR VEHICLE U3000:46, U3000:47, U3000:48,
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–7 U3000:49, U3000:96 [REAR VEHICLE
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–7 MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–24
DTC B11D3:11 [REAR VEHICLE DTC U3000:4B [REAR VEHICLE
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–9 DTC U3000:54 [REAR VEHICLE
DTC B11D3:15 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–25
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–11 DTC U3000:97 [REAR VEHICLE
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–11 MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–26
DTC B11F2:23 [REAR VEHICLE DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [REAR
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–13 VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02J–27
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–13 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–28
DTC U0028:87 [REAR VEHICLE PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–15 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–15 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–30
DTC U0401:68 [REAR VEHICLE PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [REAR
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–17 VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . 09-02J–30
DTC U0402:68 [REAR VEHICLE ACTIVE COMMAND MODES
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–18 INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE
DTC U0415:68 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–31
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–19 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE
[REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02J–31
End of Toc
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC WIRING DIAGRAM [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
RVM
IG1 SWITCH
METER IG 15A
SHORT
SHORT CORD
CORD
IG1 D J D
G H F
INNER IG1 F H F
GARNISH (LH)
RVM WARNING REAR VEHICLE CAN2_H REAR VEHICLE
INDICTOR LIGHT L B J J I C
MONITORING MONITORING
(LH) A A K
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE (LH) CAN2_L
I C L L G A MODULE (RH)
B E G
C J D
M
RVM CAN_H
WARNING D I C N B L
INDICTOR
LIGHT (RH)
INNER O
GARNISH (RH) CAN_L
P C I
H F H
GND GND
H F H
PCM
DLC-2
TCM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DSC HU/CM
RVM INDICTOR
LIGHT (GREEN)
RVM WARNING
BCM LIGHT (AMBER)
REAR VEHICLE WARNING
:REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR (LH) CHIME
(TERMINAL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CONNECTOR POSITION)
:REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR (RH)
e
DTC INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
(3) Select “RVM”.
screen.
in the rear vehicle monitoring control module.
(See 09-02J-3 CLEARING DTC [REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02J-2 DTC
INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]

(See 09-02J-5 DTC B11CB:11 [REAR
B11CB:11 RVM warning indicator light (RH) circuit malfunction
(See 09-02J-7 DTC B11CB:15 [REAR
B11CB:15 RVM warning indicator light (RH) circuit malfunction
(See 09-02J-9 DTC B11D3:11 [REAR
B11D3:11 RVM warning indicator light (LH) circuit malfunction
(See 09-02J-11 DTC B11D3:15 [REAR
B11D3:15 RVM warning indicator light (LH) circuit malfunction
(See 09-02J-13 DTC B11F2:23 [REAR
B11F2:23 RVM switch circuit malfunction

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
(EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control (See 09-02J-15 DTC U0028:87 [REAR
U0028:87
module (RH) and (LH) VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
U0121:00 Communication error to ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
U0140:00 Communication error to BCM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster
(See 09-02J-17 DTC U0401:68 [REAR

(See 09-02J-18 DTC U0402:68 [REAR
U0402:68*1 Signal error from TCM
(See 09-02J-19 DTC U0415:68 [REAR
U0415:68 Signal error from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) power supply
U1A4B:16
circuit malfunction (See 09-02J-19 DTC U1A4B:16, U1A4B:17
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) power supply [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
U1A4B:17
circuit malfunction
U1A4B:43
U1A4B:44
U1A4B:45 (See 09-02J-22 DTC U1A4B:43, U1A4B:44,
U1A4B:45, U1A4B:46, U1A4B:47,
U1A4B:46 Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction
U1A4B:48, U1A4B:49, U1A4B:96 [REAR
U1A4B:47 VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
U1A4B:48
U1A4B:49
Radar aiming is not performed or radar sensor axis is (See 09-02J-22 DTC U1A4B:54 [REAR
U1A4B:54
deviated (Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)) VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02J-22 DTC U1A4B:43, U1A4B:44,
U1A4B:45, U1A4B:46, U1A4B:47,
U1A4B:96 Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction
U1A4B:48, U1A4B:49, U1A4B:96 [REAR
(See 09-02J-23 DTC U2100:00 [REAR
U2100:00 Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction
U3000:43
U3000:44
U3000:45 (See 09-02J-24 DTC U3000:43, U3000:44,
U3000:45, U3000:46, U3000:47, U3000:48,
U3000:46 Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction
U3000:49, U3000:96 [REAR VEHICLE
U3000:47 MONITORING SYSTEM].)
U3000:48
U3000:49
Temperature temporarily increases depending on various
(See 09-02J-25 DTC U3000:4B [REAR
U3000:4B external and environmental factors (rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH/LH))
Radar aiming is not performed or radar sensor axis is (See 09-02J-25 DTC U3000:54 [REAR
U3000:54
deviated (Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)) VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02J-24 DTC U3000:43, U3000:44,
U3000:45, U3000:46, U3000:47, U3000:48,
U3000:96 Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
U3000:49, U3000:96 [REAR VEHICLE
Radar sensor sensitivity temporarily decreases depending on
(See 09-02J-26 DTC U3000:97 [REAR
U3000:97 various external and environmental factors (rear vehicle
monitoring control module (RH/LH))
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) power supply
U3003:16
circuit malfunction (See 09-02J-27 DTC U3003:16, U3003:17
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) power supply [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
U3003:17
circuit malfunction
Sie
DTC B11CB:11 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION RVM warning indicator light (RH) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Short to ground in RVM warning indicator light (RH) circuit.
CONDITION
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) malfunction
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE — RVM warning indicator light (RH) terminal A—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal D
— RVM warning indicator light (RH) terminal B—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal C
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction

REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
CONTROL MODULE (LH)
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (RH)
A D
B C
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (RH) REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONTROL MODULE (LH)
CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
A C E G I K
B A B D F H J L
1 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR AND Step 5.
x Disconnect the RVM warning indicator light
(RH) connector.
2 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Replace the RVM warning indicator light (RH), then go to
LIGHT (RH) Step 5.
x Inspect the RVM warning indicator light (RH). (See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
(See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHT INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
3 INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONTROL MODULE (LH) Step 5.
CONNECTOR AND TERMINALS No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the rear vehicle monitoring
control module (LH) connector.
4 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
LIGHT (RH) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to the next step.
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) and rear
vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
ground:
— RVM warning indicator light (RH) terminal
A
B
5 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH),
COMPLETED then go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
connectors. CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTC from the rear vehicle
monitoring control module using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02J-3 CLEARING DTC [REAR
x Verify the rear vehicle monitoring system
DTC using the M-MDS.
PRESENT (See 09-02J-3 DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE
x Are any DTCs present? MONITORING SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
DTC B11CB:15 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION RVM warning indicator light (RH) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Short to power supply or open circuit in RVM warning indicator light (RH) circuit.
CONDITION
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) connector or terminals malfunction
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) malfunction
— RVM warning indicator light (RH) terminal A—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
terminal C
— RVM warning indicator light (RH) terminal A—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal D
terminal C

CONTROL MODULE (LH)
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (RH)
A D
B C
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (RH) REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

A C E G I K
B A B D F H J L
LIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR AND Step 6.
(RH) connector.
2 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Replace the RVM warning indicator light (RH), then go to
LIGHT (RH) Step 6.
x Inspect the RVM warning indicator light (RH). (See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
LIGHT (RH) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to power supply, then go to Step 6.
A
B
5 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Go to the next step.
LIGHT (RH) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
A—Rear vehicle monitoring control
module (LH) terminal D
B—Rear vehicle monitoring control
module (LH) terminal C
End Of Sie
DTC B11D3:11 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION RVM warning indicator light (LH) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Short to ground in RVM warning indicator light (LH) circuit.
CONDITION
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE — RVM warning indicator light (LH) terminal A—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal K
— RVM warning indicator light (LH) terminal B—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal G

CONTROL MODULE (LH)
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (LH)
A K
B G
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (LH) REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

A C E G I K
B A B D F H J L
LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR AND Step 5.
(LH) connector.
2 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Replace the RVM warning indicator light (LH), then go to
LIGHT (LH) Step 5.
x Inspect the RVM warning indicator light (LH). (See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
LIGHT (LH) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to the next step.
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) and rear
ground:
— RVM warning indicator light (LH) terminal
A
B
End Of Sie
DTC B11D3:15 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION RVM warning indicator light (LH) circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Short to power supply or open circuit in RVM warning indicator light (LH) circuit.
CONDITION
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) connector or terminals malfunction
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) malfunction
— RVM warning indicator light (LH) terminal A—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal K
POSSIBLE CAUSE
terminal G
— RVM warning indicator light (LH) terminal A—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal K
terminal G

CONTROL MODULE (LH)
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (LH)
A K
B G
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (LH) REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

A C E G I K
B A B D F H J L
LIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR AND Step 6.
(LH) connector.
2 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Replace the RVM warning indicator light (LH), then go to
LIGHT (LH) Step 6.
x Inspect the RVM warning indicator light (LH). (See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
LIGHT (LH) CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to power supply, then go to Step 6.
A
B
5 INSPECT RVM WARNING INDICATOR Yes Go to the next step.
LIGHT (LH) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
A—Rear vehicle monitoring control
module (LH) terminal K
B—Rear vehicle monitoring control
module (LH) terminal G
End Of Sie
DTC B11F2:23 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION RVM switch circuit malfunction

DETECTION
x Short to ground in RVM switch circuit for 120 s or more.
CONDITION
x RVM switch connector or terminals malfunction
x RVM switch malfunction
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) connector or terminals malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Short to ground in wiring harness between the following terminals:
— RVM switch terminal I—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal D (L.H.D.)
— RVM switch terminal C—Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal D (R.H.D.)
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction

(L.H.D.)
CONTROL MODULE (RH)
RVM SWITCH
K I D
(R.H.D.)
CONTROL MODULE (RH)
RVM SWITCH
K C D
RVM SWITCH REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONTROL MODULE (RH)
K I G E C A A C E G I K
L J H F D B B D F H J L
1 INSPECT RVM SWITCH CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the RVM switch connector.
2 INSPECT RVM SWITCH Yes Replace the RVM switch, then go to Step 5.
x Inspect the RVM switch. (See 09-22-38 RVM SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-22-39 RVM SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
CONTROL MODULE (RH) Step 5.
control module (RH) connector.
4 INSPECT RVM SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SHORT TO GROUND to ground, then go to the next step.
x RVM switch and rear vehicle monitoring No Go to the next step.
control module (RH) connectors are
disconnected.
ground:
— RVM switch terminal I (L.H.D.)
— RVM switch terminal C (R.H.D.)
5 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH),
End Of Sie
DTC U0028:87 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) and (LH)
DETECTION
x Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) and (LH).
CONDITION
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)/(RH) connector or terminals malfunction
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal I—Rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal A
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal L—Rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal C
(RH) terminal A
POSSIBLE CAUSE — Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal L—Rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal C
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module circuits are shorted to each other.
(RH) terminal A
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal L—Rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal C

REAR VEHICLE MONITORING REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
CONTROL MODULE (LH) CONTROL MODULE (RH)
I A
L C

CONTROL MODULE (LH) AND (RH)
A C E G I K
B D F H J L
CONTROL MODULE (LH) AND (RH) Step 7.
CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS No Go to the next step.
control module (LH) and (RH) connectors.
x Inspect the connectors and terminals
2 INSPECT CAN BUS CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) No Go to the next step.
and (RH) connectors are disconnected.
ground:
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module
(LH) terminal I
(LH) terminal L
(LH) terminal I
(LH) terminal L
SHORT TO EACH OTHER to each other, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect for continuity between rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal I
and L (wiring harness-side).
5 INSPECT CAN BUS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) circuit, then go to Step 7.
(LH) terminal I—Rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH) terminal A
(LH) terminal L—Rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH) terminal C
6 VERIFY REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH),
CONTROL MODULE (LH) then go to the next step.
(See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
MALFUNCTION
CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors. No Go to Step 8.
End Of Sie

DETECTION
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module cannot receive the correct data from the PCM.
CONDITION
x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Clear the DTC from the rear vehicle (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8,
monitoring control module using the M-MDS. MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR No Go to Step 4.
3 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module, then go
COMPLETED to the next step.
x Clear the DTC from the rear vehicle (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
monitoring control module using the M-MDS. MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02J-3 CLEARING DTC [REAR No Go to the next step.
PRESENT (See 09-02J-3 DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Are any DTCs present? SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from TCM

DETECTION
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module cannot receive the correct data from the TCM.
CONDITION
x TCM malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Verify the TCM DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 05-02-4 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC
x Clear the DTC from the rear vehicle (See 05-17-46 TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
monitoring control module using the M-MDS. No Go to Step 4.
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Signal error from ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM

DETECTION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module cannot receive the correct data from the ABS HU/CM or
CONDITION DSC HU/CM.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
[ABS].)
x Clear the DTC from the rear vehicle (See 04-13-2 ABS HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
monitoring control module using the M-MDS. (See 04-15-2 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02J-3 CLEARING DTC [REAR No Go to Step 4.
End Of Sie
DTC U1A4B:16, U1A4B:17 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) power supply circuit malfunction
U1A4B:16
DETECTION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) power supply voltage is less than 9 V.
CONDITION U1A4B:17
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) power supply voltage is 16 V or more.
x Short to ground or open circuit in rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and rear vehicle monitoring
control module (LH) terminal F
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and rear vehicle monitoring control
module (LH) terminal F (vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between IG1 relay and rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal F (vehicles with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
IGNITION SWITCH (IG1)*1/ REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

IG1 RELAY*2 CONTROL MODULE (LH)
METER IG 15 A
F

CONTROL MODULE (RH)

A C E G I K
B D F H J L
*1
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

5 INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE (LH) CIRCUIT No Inspect the METER IG 15 A fuse.
FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN x If the fuse is melt:
short to ground.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
connector is disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal F
open circuit.
End Of Sie
DTC U1A4B:43, U1A4B:44, U1A4B:45, U1A4B:46, U1A4B:47, U1A4B:48, U1A4B:49, U1A4B:96 [REAR
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction

U1A4B:43
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) external RAM malfunction is detected.
U1A4B:44
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) internal RAM malfunction is detected.
U1A4B:45
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) ROM malfunction is detected.
U1A4B:46
DETECTION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) EEPROM malfunction is detected.
CONDITION U1A4B:47
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) check system malfunction is detected.
U1A4B:48
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) communication circuit malfunction is detected.
U1A4B:49
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) voltage control circuit malfunction is detected.
U1A4B:96
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) internal circuit malfunction is detected.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction
x Clear the DTC from the rear vehicle (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
monitoring control module using the M-MDS. CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
DTC U1A4B:54 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Radar aiming is not performed or radar sensor axis is deviated (Rear vehicle monitoring control
DESCRIPTION
module (LH))
DETECTION
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) radar aiming is out of range for 1 s or more.
CONDITION
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) radar aiming is not performed
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) radar sensor axis is deviated
1 PERFORM REAR VEHICLE Yes Perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming (LH) again
MONITORING CONTROL MODULE using the M-MDS, then go to the next step.
(See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING RADAR
(LH) RADAR AIMING
AIMING.)
x Perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar
aiming (LH) using the M-MDS. No Go to Step 3.
(See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING RADAR AIMING.)
End Of Sie
DESCRIPTION Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction

DETECTION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) configuration is not completed.
CONDITION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) configuration is not performed.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) configuration error
POSSIBLE CAUSE
1 PERFORM REAR VEHICLE Yes Perform the rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
MONITORING CONTROL MODULE configuration again using the M-MDS, then go to the next
step.
(RH) CONFIGURATION
(See 09-22-30 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
x Perform the rear vehicle monitoring control MODULE CONFIGURATION.)
module (RH) configuration using the M-MDS.
(See 09-22-30 REAR VEHICLE No Go to Step 3.
MONITORING CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION.)
End Of Sie
DTC U3000:43, U3000:44, U3000:45, U3000:46, U3000:47, U3000:48, U3000:49, U3000:96 [REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction

U3000:43
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) external RAM malfunction is detected.
U3000:44
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) internal RAM malfunction is detected.
U3000:45
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) ROM malfunction is detected.
U3000:46
DETECTION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) EEPROM malfunction is detected.
CONDITION U3000:47
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) check system malfunction is detected.
U3000:48
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) communication circuit malfunction is detected.
U3000:49
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) voltage control circuit malfunction is detected.
U3000:96
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) internal circuit malfunction is detected.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction
End Of Sie
DTC U3000:4B [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Temperature temporarily increases depending on various external and environmental factors

DESCRIPTION
(rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH/LH))
DETECTION
Temperature around rear vehicle monitoring control module is 85 qC {185 qF} or more.
CONDITION
x Temperature temporarily increases depending on various external and environmental factors (rear
vehicle monitoring control module (RH/LH))
POSSIBLE CAUSE
MALFUNCTION
End Of Sie
Radar aiming is not performed or radar sensor axis is deviated (Rear vehicle monitoring control
DESCRIPTION
module (RH))
DETECTION
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) radar aiming is out of range for 1 s or more.
CONDITION
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) radar aiming is not performed
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) radar sensor axis is deviated
1 PERFORM REAR VEHICLE Yes Perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming (RH) again
MONITORING CONTROL MODULE using the M-MDS, then go to the next step.
(See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING RADAR
(RH) RADAR AIMING
AIMING.)
x Perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar
aiming (RH) using the M-MDS. No Go to Step 3.
(See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING RADAR AIMING.)
End Of Sie
Radar sensor sensitivity temporarily decreases depending on various external and

DESCRIPTION
environmental factors (rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH/LH))
DETECTION
Radar sensor sensitivity in rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH/LH) temporarily decreases
CONDITION
x Dirt or foreign material (reflective object) on the surface of rear bumper
x Dirt or foreign material (reflective object) on rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH/LH)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Concavity and convexity on the surface of the repaired rear bumper
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) or (RH) malfunction
1 VISUALLY INSPECT REAR BUMPER Yes Remove dirt or foreign material (reflective object), then go
SURFACE to Step 5.
x Visually inspect the rear bumper surface. No Go to the next step.
x Is any foreign material (reflective object)
adhered to the rear bumper?
2 VISUALLY INSPECT AREA AROUND Yes Remove dirt or foreign material (reflective object), then go
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING to Step 5.
CONTROL MODULE (LH) AND (RH) No Go to the next step.
x Visually inspect the area around the rear
vehicle monitoring control module (LH) and
(RH).
x Is any foreign material (reflective object)
adhered to the area around the rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) or (RH)?
3 VERIFY REAR BUMPER REPAIR Yes Replace the rear bumper, then go to Step 5.
HISTORY (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/
x Verify if the rear bumper had been repaired INSTALLATION.)
or repainted before. No Go to the next step.
x Was non-Mazda genuine paint used?
MALFUNCTION
x Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h [25 mph] or
more.
x Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h [25 mph] or
more.
End Of Sie
DTC U3003:16, U3003:17 [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
DESCRIPTION Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) power supply circuit malfunction
U3003:16
DETECTION x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) power supply voltage is less than 9 V.
CONDITION U3003:17
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) power supply voltage is 16 V or more.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground or open circuit in rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH) terminal F
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH) terminal F (vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between IG1 relay and rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal F (vehicles with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
IGNITION SWITCH (IG1)*1/ REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

IG1 RELAY*2 CONTROL MODULE (LH)
METER IG 15 A
F

CONTROL MODULE (RH)

A C E G I K
B D F H J L
*1
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

CONTROL MODULE (RH) Step 6.
control module (RH) connector.
5 INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE (RH) CIRCUIT No Inspect the METER IG 15 A fuse.
FOR SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN x If the fuse is melt:
short to ground.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
connector is disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the rear vehicle
monitoring control module (RH) terminal F
open circuit.
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
the screen.
Note DLC-2
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
—: Not applicable
PID name Unit/
Data contents Inspection item (s)
(definition) Operation
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) aiming angle Rear vehicle monitoring
AIM_ANGL_L q
display control module (LH)
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) aiming angle Rear vehicle monitoring
AIM_ANGL_R q
display control module (RH)
x Rear vehicle monitoring warning beeper operating: On
BUZZER On/Off Instrument cluster
x Rear vehicle monitoring warning beeper not operating: Off
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) internal Rear vehicle monitoring
INTNL_TMP_L qC
temperature display control module (LH)
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) internal Rear vehicle monitoring
INTNL_TMP_R qC
temperature display control module (RH)
x RVM switch pressed: On
MAIN_SW On/Off RVM switch
x RVM switch not pressed: Off
RVM warning indicator
OP_BRT_L — x RVM warning indicator light (LH) brightness
light (LH)
RVM warning indicator
OP_BRT_R — x RVM warning indicator light (RH) brightness
light (RH)
Off/ x Rear vehicle monitoring system stop: Off
Passive_On/ x Rear vehicle monitoring system stand-by: Passive_On Rear vehicle monitoring
RVM_SYS_ST
Active_On/ x Rear vehicle monitoring system operating: Active_On system related parts
Failure x Rear vehicle monitoring system malfunction: Failure
x Turn switch is in left turn position: On
TURN_SW_L On/Off Turn switch (light switch)
x Turn switch is in off position: Off
x Turn switch is in right turn position: On
TURN_SW_R On/Off Turn switch (light switch)
x Turn switch is in off position: Off
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) battery Rear vehicle monitoring
VPWR_L V
voltage display control module (LH)
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) battery Rear vehicle monitoring
VPWR_R V
voltage display control module (RH)
x Vehicle stopped: 0 KPH
VSPD KPH
x Vehicle driven: Displays vehicle speed
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) illuminated: On RVM warning indicator
WRN_IND_L On/Off
x RVM warning indicator light (LH) not illuminated: Off light (LH) LED
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) illuminated: On RVM warning indicator
WRN_IND_R On/Off
x RVM warning indicator light (RH) not illuminated: Off light (RH) LED
x Vehicle stopped or driving straight:
YAW_RATE q/s x Cornering to left: 0 q /s —changes to plus direction Combined sensor
x Cornering to right: 0 q /s —changes to minus direction
ACTIVE COMMAND MODES INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
parts.
End Of Sie
ACTIVE COMMAND MODES TABLE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Command Unit/
Operation condition Output part name
name Operation
Warning alarm
BUZZER On: Warning alarm sounds On/Off
(Instrumnet cluster)
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM]
PAGE 1 OF 2
09-02K ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [BCM]
DTC INSPECTION [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–3 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–27
CLEARING DTC [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–3 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–28
DTC TABLE [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–3 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–28
DTC B1C45:12 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–7 DTC B1047:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–29
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–7 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–29
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–7 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–29
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–7 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–29
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–8 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–30
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–8 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–30
DTC B1D35:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–9 DTC B1048:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–31
DTC B1D36:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–11 DTC B1051:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–32
DTC B10AD:49 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–13 DTC B1052:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–34
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–14 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–35
DTC B10AD:87 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–14 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–35
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–14 DTC B1079:13 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–36
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–14 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–36
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–14 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–36
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–15 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–36
DTC B10A5:49 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–16 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–16 DTC B109F:49 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–38
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–16 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–38
DTC B10D0:11 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–20 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–41
Vehicles Without Advanced Keyless Entry DTC B11C0:13 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–42
And Push Button Start System . . . . . 09-02K–20 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–42
Vehicles With Advanced Keyless Entry Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–42
And Push Button Start System . . . . . 09-02K–22 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–42
DTC B1008:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–24 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–43
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–24 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–43
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–24 DTC B11C1:13 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–44
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–25 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–44
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–25 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–44
DTC B1046:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–27 System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–45
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–27 DTC B11DA:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–47
PAGE 2 OF 2
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–47 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–76
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–47 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–77
Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–47 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–77
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–47 DTC C1126:13 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–79
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–47 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–79
DTC B11DC:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–48 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–79
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–49 DTC C1137:12 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–81
DTC B1130:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–50 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–81
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–52 DTC P1536:13 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–85
Vehicles Without Advanced Keyless Entry Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–85
And Push Button Start System . . . . . 09-02K–54 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–85
Vehicles With Advanced Keyless Entry Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–86
And Push Button Start System . . . . . 09-02K–55 DTC U0300:00 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–86
DTC B1172:13 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–59 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–86
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–59 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–86
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–59 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–87
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–60 DTC U0401:68 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–87
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–61 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–87
Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–61 DTC U0402:68 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–88
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–63 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–88
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–64 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–88
DTC B1175:13 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–65 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–88
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–65 DTC U2100:00 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–88
Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–65 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–88
System Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–66 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–89
DTC B1176:13 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–67 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–89
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–67 DTC U3000:04 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–89
Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–67 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–89
DTC B1178:11 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–70 DTC U3003:16 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–90
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–70 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–90
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–71 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–90
WAGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–73 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–90
DTC C0051:04 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–75 System Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–90
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–75 DTC U3003:17 [BCM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–91
Possible Causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–75 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–91
Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–75 Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–91
DTC C0051:2F/C0052:11/C0052:13/ Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–92
C0053:11/C0053:13/C0054:11/C0054:13/ Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–92
C0055:11/C0055:13 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–76 PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–76 [BCM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–93
Detection Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02K–76 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [BCM] . . . . 09-02K–93
DTC INSPECTION [BCM]
2. Verify the following vehicle conditions:
x All the switches are turned off (except the
ignition switch).
x All the doors, bonnet, and liftgate are closed.
x All the doors, and liftgate are unlocked.
x All the seat belts are unbuckled.
x Parking brake lever is pulled.
(1) Select “Self Test”. DLC-2
(3) Select “BCM/GEM”.
screen.
x If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection.
5. After completion of repairs, clear all DTCs stored in the BCM. (See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].)
End Of Sie
CLEARING DTC [BCM]
screen.
the DTC.
more.
7. Perform DTC inspection. (See 09-02K-3 DTC
INSPECTION [BCM].)
End Of Sie
DTC TABLE [BCM]
DTC No. Description Detection condition Reference

x Short to power supply in wiring
(See 09-02K-7 DTC
B1C45:12 Autostop switch circuit malfunction harness between windshield wiper
B1C45:12 [BCM].)
motor and BCM.
x Short to ground in hazard warning
Hazard warning switch circuit (See 09-02K-9 DTC
B1D35:11 switch circuit with the hazard warning
malfunction B1D35:11 [BCM].)
switch off.
x Short to ground in turn switch LH or RH (See 09-02K-11 DTC
B1D36:11 Turn switch circuit malfunction
circuit with the turn switch off. B1D36:11 [BCM].)
Theft-deterrent siren internal x Theft-deterrent siren internal (See 09-02K-16 DTC
B10A5:49*1 malfunction malfunction. B10A5:49 [BCM].)
(See 09-02K-17 DTC
B10A5:86*1 Signal error from theft-deterrent siren x Signal error from theft-deterrent siren.
B10A5:86 [BCM].)
Communication error between theft- x Communication error between theft- (See 09-02K-19 DTC
B10A5:87*1 deterrent siren and BCM deterrent siren and BCM. B10A5:87 [BCM].)
x BCM detects the rain sensor internal (See 09-02K-13 DTC
B10AD:49*2 Rain sensor malfunction malfunction continuously for 10 times. B10AD:49 [BCM].)
x BCM detects the communication
Communication error between rain (See 09-02K-14 DTC
B10AD:87*2 sensor and BCM missing with the rain sensor
B10AD:87 [BCM].)
continuously for 10 times.
Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate x Short to ground in trunk lid opener
(See 09-02K-20 DTC
B10D0:11 opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch
B10D0:11 [BCM].)
malfunction (5HB, WAGON) circuit.
x Short to ground in windshield wiper
Windshield wiper switch circuit (See 09-02K-24 DTC
B1008:11 switch circuit with the windshield wiper
malfunction B1008:11 [BCM].)
switch off.
Front fog light switch circuit x Short to ground in front fog light switch (See 09-02K-27 DTC
B1046:11*3 malfunction circuit with the front fog light switch off. B1046:11 [BCM].)
Rear fog light switch circuit x Short to ground in rear fog light switch (See 09-02K-29 DTC
B1047:11*4 malfunction circuit with the rear fog light switch off. B1047:11 [BCM].)
x Short to ground in brake fluid level
Brake fluid level sensor circuit sensor circuit with the brake fluid (See 09-02K-31 DTC
B1048:11
malfunction amount below the lower side of the B1048:11 [BCM].)
minimum.
x Short to ground in windshield washer
Windshield washer switch circuit (See 09-02K-32 DTC
B1051:11 switch circuit with the windshield
washer switch off.
x Short to ground in rear washer switch (See 09-02K-34 DTC
B1052:11 Rear washer switch circuit malfunction
circuit with the rear washer switch off. B1052:11 [BCM].)
x Open circuit in bonnet latch switch
(See 09-02K-36 DTC
B1079:13*5 Bonnet latch switch circuit malfunction circuit with the bonnet closed (bonnet
B1079:13 [BCM].)
latch switch on).
(See 09-02K-38 DTC
B109F:49*1 Intruder sensor internal malfunction x Intruder sensor internal malfunction.
B109F:49 [BCM].)
(See 09-02K-38 DTC
B109F:86*1 Signal error from intruder sensor x Signal error from intruder sensor.
B109F:86 [BCM].)
Communication error between intruder x Communication error between intruder (See 09-02K-40 DTC
B109F:87*1 sensor and BCM sensor and BCM. B109F:87 [BCM].)
x Open circuit in rear door latch switch
Rear door latch switch (driver’s side) (driver’s side) circuit with the rear door (See 09-02K-42 DTC
B11C0:13
circuit malfunction (driver’s side) closed (rear door latch B11C0:13 [BCM].)
switch (driver’s side) on).
x Open circuit in rear door latch switch
(passenger’s side) circuit with the rear
Rear door latch switch (passenger’s (See 09-02K-44 DTC
B11C1:13 door (passenger’s side) closed (rear
side) circuit malfunction B11C1:13 [BCM].)
door latch (passenger’s side) switch
on).
x Short to ground in front door key
Front door key cylinder switch (driver’s cylinder switch (driver’s side) circuit (See 09-02K-47 DTC
B11DA:11
side) circuit malfunction with the front door key cylinder switch B11DA:11 [BCM].)
(driver’s side) off.
x Short to ground in rear wiper switch (See 09-02K-48 DTC
B11DC:11 Rear wiper switch circuit malfunction
circuit with the rear wiper switch off. B11DC:11 [BCM].)
x Short to ground in light switch circuit (See 09-02K-50 DTC
B1130:11 Light switch circuit malfunction
with the light switch off. B1130:11 [BCM].)
x Short to ground in door lock-link switch
Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) (driver’s side) lock-side circuit with the (See 09-02K-54 DTC
B1172:11
lock-side circuit malfunction door lock-link switch (driver’s side) B1172:11 [BCM].)
unlocked.
x Open circuit in door lock-link switch
Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) (driver’s side) unlock-side circuit with (See 09-02K-59 DTC
B1172:13
unlock-side circuit malfunction the door lock-link switch (driver’s side) B1172:13 [BCM].)
unlocked.
x Open circuit in door lock-link switch
Door lock-link switch circuit (See 09-02K-61 DTC
B1174:13 circuit with the door lock-link switch
unlocked.
x Open circuit in front door latch switch
Front door latch switch (driver’s side) (driver’s side) circuit with the front door (See 09-02K-65 DTC
B1175:13
circuit malfunction (driver’s side) closed (front door latch B1175:13 [BCM].)
switch (driver’s side) on).
x Open circuit in front door latch switch
(passenger’s side) circuit with the front
Front door latch switch (passenger’s (See 09-02K-67 DTC
B1176:13 door (passenger’s side) closed (front
side) circuit malfunction B1176:13 [BCM].)
door latch switch (passenger’s side)
on).
4SD
x Short to ground in trunk lid latch switch
4SD circuit with the trunk closed (trunk lid
x Trunk lid latch switch circuit latch switch off).
malfunction 5HB
5HB x Short to ground in liftgate latch switch (See 09-02K-70 DTC
B1178:11 x Liftgate latch switch circuit circuit with the liftgate closed (liftgate B1178:11 [BCM].)
malfunction latch switch off).
WAGON WAGON
x Cargo compartment light switch x Short to ground in cargo compartment
circuit malfunction light switch circuit with the liftgate
closed (cargo compartment light switch
off).
x Z-signal does not change.
(See 09-02K-75 DTC
C0051:04 Steering angle sensor malfunction x BCM detects that steering angle
C0051:04 [BCM].)
exceeds the specified value.
x Errors detected in a combination of
C0051:2F Steering angle signal error
signals from each sensor (A, B, C, Z).
x Short to ground in steering angle
C0052:11
Steering angle sensor A signal input sensor A signal input circuit.
circuit malfunction x Open circuit in steering angle sensor A
C0052:13
signal input circuit.
x Short to ground in steering angle (See 09-02K-76 DTC
C0053:11
Steering angle sensor B signal input sensor B signal input circuit. C0051:2F/C0052:11/
circuit malfunction x Open circuit in steering angle sensor B C0052:13/C0053:11/
C0053:13
signal input circuit. C0053:13/C0054:11/
x Short to ground in steering angle C0054:13/C0055:11/
C0054:11 C0055:13 [BCM].)
Steering angle sensor C signal input sensor C signal input circuit.
circuit malfunction x Open circuit in steering angle sensor C
C0054:13
x Short to ground in steering angle
C0055:11
Steering angle sensor Z signal input sensor Z signal input circuit.
circuit malfunction x Open circuit in steering angle sensor Z
C0055:13
x Open circuit in light switch (TNS) circuit (See 09-02K-79 DTC
C1126:13 Light switch (TNS) circuit malfunction
with the light switch at TNS position. C1126:13 [BCM].)
ATX
x Short to power supply in TR switch
circuit with the selector lever not in R
TR switch (ATX)/Back-up light switch position. (See 09-02K-81 DTC
C1137:12
(MTX) circuit malfunction MTX C1137:12 [BCM].)
x Short to power supply in back-up light
switch circuit with the shift lever not in
R position (back-up light switch off).
x Open circuit in parking brake switch
Parking brake switch circuit (See 09-02K-85 DTC
P1536:13 circuit with the parking brake lever
malfunction P1536:13 [BCM].)
applied (parking brake switch on).
U0121:00*7 Communication error to ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
U0151:00 Communication error to SAS control module (See 09-02O-1
FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D.
(EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
U0214:00*8 Communication error to keyless control module
Warning
x Detection conditions are for
understanding the DTC outline
before performing an inspection.
Performing an inspection
according to only the detection
conditions may cause injury due (See 09-02K-86 DTC
U0300:00 BCM configuration setting invalid
to an operating error, or damage U0300:00 [BCM].)
the system. When performing an
inspection, always follow the
inspection procedure.
x BCM configuration setting not done

correctly.
x Correct data cannot be received from (See 09-02K-87 DTC
PCM. U0401:68 [BCM].)
x Correct data cannot be received from (See 09-02K-88 DTC
U0402:68*6 Signal error from TCM TCM. U0402:68 [BCM].)
Warning
x Detection conditions are for
understanding the DTC outline
before performing an inspection.
Performing an inspection
according to only the detection
conditions may cause injury due (See 09-02K-88 DTC
U2100:00 BCM configuration not set
to an operating error, or damage U2100:00 [BCM].)
the system. When performing an
inspection, always follow the
x BCM configuration setting not done

correctly.
(See 09-02K-89 DTC
U3000:04 BCM internal malfunction x BCM internal malfunction.
U3000:04 [BCM].)
BCM power supply voltage (See 09-02K-90 DTC
U3003:16 x BCM power supply voltage is low.
malfunction U3003:16 [BCM].)
BCM power supply voltage (See 09-02K-91 DTC
U3003:17 x BCM power supply voltage is high.
malfunction U3003:17 [BCM].)
*1
: Vehicles with theft-deterrent system
*2
: Vehicles with rain sensor
*3 : Vehicles with front fog light
*4
: Vehicles with rear fog light
*5
: Vehicles with bonnet latch switch
*6 : ATX
*7
: Vehicles with ESS (emergency stop signal system)
*8
Sie
DTC B1C45:12 [BCM]
Description
x Autostop switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between windshield wiper motor and BCM.
Possible Causes
x Windshield wiper motor connector or terminals malfunction
x Windshield wiper motor malfunction
— Windshield wiper motor terminal E—BCM terminal 7J (L.H.D.)
— Windshield wiper motor terminal A—BCM terminal 7J (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM IG2 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
IG2 AUTOSTOP SWITCH
7J E
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TO WINDSHIELD WIPER
AND WASHER SWITCH M
(R.H.D.)
BCM IG2 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
IG2 AUTOSTOP SWITCH
7J A
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
TO WINDSHIELD WIPER
AND WASHER SWITCH M
BCM WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR

7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A E C A
7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B D B
1 PERFORM DTC INSPECTION Yes Go to the next step.
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. No DTC troubleshooting completed.
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].)
x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B1C45:12 present?
2 INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the windshield wiper motor
connector.
3 INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR Yes Replace the windshield wiper motor, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the windshield wiper motor. (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/
(See 09-19-10 WINDSHIELD WIPER INSTALLATION.)
MOTOR INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT AUTOSTOP SWITCH CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY to power supply, then go to the next step.
x Windshield wiper motor and BCM No Go to the next step.
(wiring harness-side):
— Windshield wiper motor terminal E
(L.H.D.)
— Windshield wiper motor terminal A
(R.H.D.)
x Can the voltage be measured?
COMPLETED x If the malfunction recurs, replace the BCM.
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. Go to the next step.
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
M-MDS.
PRESENT (See 09-02K-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)
End Of Sie
DTC B1D35:11 [BCM]
Description
x Hazard warning switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in hazard warning switch circuit with the hazard warning switch off.
Possible Causes
x Hazard warning switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Hazard warning switch malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between hazard warning switch terminal B and BCM terminal 3W
x BCM malfunction
BCM
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
3W B A
BCM HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B1D35:11 present?
2 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the hazard warning switch
connector.
3 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING SWITCH Yes Replace the hazard warning switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the hazard warning switch. (See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Hazard warning switch and BCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between hazard
warning switch terminal B (wiring harness-
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1D36:11 [BCM]
Description
x Turn switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in turn switch LH or RH circuit with the turn switch off.
Possible Causes
x Light switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Turn switch malfunction
— Light switch terminal G—BCM terminal 3H
— Light switch terminal E—BCM terminal 3E (Vehicles with light switch on left side)
— Light switch terminal I—BCM terminal 3E (Vehicles with light switch on right side)
x BCM malfunction
(VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE)
BCM TURN SWITCH
3H G RH
3E E LH
(VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE)

BCM TURN SWITCH
3H G RH
3E I LH
BCM
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
LIGHT SWITCH WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
K I G E C A O M K I G E C A
L J H F D B P N L J H F D B
(VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE) (VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE)
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 6.
x Disconnect the light switch connector.
3 INSPECT TURN SWITCH Yes Replace the light switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the turn switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-63 LIGHT SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT TURN SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Light switch and BCM connectors are No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
ground:
— Light switch terminal G
— Light switch terminal E (Vehicles with light
switch on left side)
— Light switch terminal I (Vehicles with light
switch on right side)
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10AD:49 [BCM]
Description
x Rain sensor malfunction
Detection Condition
x BCM detects the rain sensor internal malfunction continuously for 10 times.
Possible Causes
x BCM malfunction
1 VERIFY RAIN SENSOR MALFUNCTION Yes Replace the rain sensor, then go to the next step.
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) INSTALLATION.)
x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the No Go to Step 3.
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B10AD:49 present?
2 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING Yes Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
COMPLETED (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) No Go to the next step.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10AD:87 [BCM]
Description
x Communication error between rain sensor and BCM
Detection Condition
x BCM detects the communication missing with the rain sensor continuously for 10 times.
Possible Causes
x Rain sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 7H
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 7H
x Open circuit in wiring harness between rain sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 7H
x BCM malfunction
BCM IG1 RAIN SENSOR
LIN
7H C
DRIVER
7J D
BCM RAIN SENSOR

CONNECTOR
A
B
7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A
C
7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B
D
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT RAIN SENSOR CONNECTOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONDITION Step 8.
x Disconnect the rain sensor connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
4 INSPECT RAIN SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Rain sensor and BCM connectors are No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between rain sensor
terminal C (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
5 INSPECT RAIN SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Rain sensor and BCM connectors are No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the rain sensor
6 INSPECT RAIN SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Rain sensor and BCM connectors are circuit, then go to Step 8.
disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between rain sensor
terminal C (wiring harness-side) and BCM
terminal 7H (wiring harness-side).
7 VERIFY RAIN SENSOR MALFUNCTION Yes Replace the rain sensor, then go to the next step.
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS.
M-MDS.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10A5:49 [BCM]
Description
x Theft-deterrent siren internal malfunction
Detection Condition
x Theft-deterrent siren internal malfunction.
Possible Causes
x Theft-deterrent siren malfunction
x BCM malfunction
1 INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN Yes Replace the theft-deterrent siren, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the theft-deterrent siren. (See 09-14-74 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND TILT
(See 09-14-76 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
AND TILT SENSOR INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B10A5:49 present?
End Of Sie
DTC B10A5:86 [BCM]
Description
x Signal error from theft-deterrent siren
Detection Condition
x Signal error from theft-deterrent siren.
Possible Causes
x Theft-deterrent siren connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren terminal B and BCM terminal 6H
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren terminal B and BCM terminal 6H
x BCM malfunction
BCM B+ THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN
4B
7N A
6H B
BCM THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

4E 4C 4A 6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A C B A
4F 4D 4B 6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B 7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the theft-deterrent siren
connector.
CONDITION Step 7.
4 INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Theft-deterrent siren and BCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between theft-deterrent
siren terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
x Theft-deterrent siren and BCM connectors
are disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the theft-deterrent
siren terminal B (wiring harness-side).
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10A5:87 [BCM]
Description
x Communication error between theft-deterrent siren and BCM
Detection Condition
x Communication error between theft-deterrent siren and BCM.
Possible Causes
x Theft-deterrent siren connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren terminal B and BCM terminal 6H
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren terminal B and BCM terminal 6H
x Open circuit in wiring harness between theft-deterrent siren terminal B and BCM terminal 6H
x BCM malfunction
BCM B+ THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN
4B
7N A
6H B
BCM THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN

4E 4C 4A 6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A C B A
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the theft-deterrent siren
connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
x Theft-deterrent siren and BCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
body ground.
x Theft-deterrent siren and BCM connectors
are disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the theft-deterrent
siren terminal B (wiring harness-side).
6 INSPECT THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN Yes Go to the next step.
x Theft-deterrent siren and BCM connectors circuit, then go to Step 8.
are disconnected.
BCM terminal 6H (wiring harness-side).
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B10D0:11 [BCM]
Vehicles Without Advanced Keyless Entry And Push Button Start System
Description
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit.
Possible Causes
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) connector or terminals malfunction
— Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal A—BCM terminal 6A
x BCM malfunction

BCM
6E
6A A B
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) /

BCM TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) /

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (5HB, WAGON)
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B A B
M-MDS.
CONDITION
connector.
(5HB, WAGON)
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
(4SD)/LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH to ground, then go to the next step.
TO GROUND
switch (5HB, WAGON) and BCM connectors
are disconnected.
ground:
— Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate
opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal B
opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal A
M-MDS.
Vehicles With Advanced Keyless Entry And Push Button Start System
Description
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) circuit.
Possible Causes
x Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) connector or terminals malfunction
— Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal B—Keyless control module
terminal 3G
— Trunk lid opener switch (4SD)/Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal A—BCM terminal 6A
x BCM malfunction

6E
6A A B 3G
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) /

BCM TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH (4SD) / KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH (5HB, WAGON) WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
A B 3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
M-MDS.
CONDITION
connector.
(5HB, WAGON)
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
(4SD)/LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH to ground, then go to Step 8.
TO GROUND
switch (5HB, WAGON), keyless control
module and BCM connectors are
disconnected.
ground:
opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal B
opener switch (5HB, WAGON) terminal A
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected No Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
connectors. step.
x Measure the voltage at the keyless control REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
module terminal 3G (wiring harness-side). ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-69 KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED
START SYSTEM].)
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1008:11 [BCM]
Description
x Windshield wiper switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in windshield wiper switch circuit with the windshield wiper switch off.
Possible Causes
x Wiper and washer switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Windshield wiper switch malfunction
Vehicles With Wiper And Washer Switch On Right Side
— Wiper and washer switch terminal I—BCM terminal 3J
— Wiper and washer switch terminal C—BCM terminal 3A
— Wiper and washer switch terminal L—BCM terminal 3D
Vehicles With Wiper And Washer Switch On Left Side
— Wiper and washer switch terminal E—BCM terminal 3J
— Wiper and washer switch terminal K—BCM terminal 3A
— Wiper and washer switch terminal D—BCM terminal 3D
x BCM malfunction
(VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE)

BCM WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
3J I
OFF MIST
3A C INT K
AUTO
LO HI
3D L
(VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE)

BCM WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
3J E
OFF MIST
3A INT K
K
AUTO
LO HI
3D D
BCM WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
O M K I G E C A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
P N L J H F D B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
K I G E C A
L J H F D B

M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B1008:11 present?
2 INSPECT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the wiper and washer switch
connector.
3 INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH Yes Replace the wiper and washer switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the windshield wiper switch. (See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
(See 09-19-30 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Wiper and washer switch and BCM No Go to the next step.
ground:
Vehicles With Wiper And Washer
Switch On Right Side
— Wiper and washer switch terminal I
— Wiper and washer switch terminal C
— Wiper and washer switch terminal L
Vehicles With Wiper And Washer
Switch On Left Side
— Wiper and washer switch terminal E
— Wiper and washer switch terminal K
— Wiper and washer switch terminal D
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1046:11 [BCM]
Description
x Front fog light switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in front fog light switch circuit with the front fog light switch off.
Possible Causes
x Front fog light switch malfunction
— Light switch terminal A—BCM terminal 3N (Vehicles with light switch on left side)
— Light switch terminal M—BCM terminal 3N (Vehicles with light switch on right side)
x BCM malfunction
BCM
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
OFF
3N A
F.FOG

BCM
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
OFF
3N M
F.FOG
BCM
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
M-MDS.
CONDITION Step 6.
3 INSPECT FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH Yes Replace the light switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the front fog light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-67 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
disconnected.
terminal (wiring harness-side) and body
ground:
— Light switch terminal A (Vehicles with light
— Light switch terminal M (Vehicles with light
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1047:11 [BCM]
Description
x Rear fog light switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in rear fog light switch circuit with the rear fog light switch off.
Possible Causes
x Rear fog light switch malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between light switch terminal C and BCM terminal 3F
x BCM malfunction
BCM
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH
OFF
3F C
R.FOG
BCM LIGHT SWITCH

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
K I G E C A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
L J H F D B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
M-MDS.
CONDITION Step 6.
3 INSPECT REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH Yes Replace the light switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the rear fog light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-68 REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between light switch
terminal C (wiring harness-side) and body
ground.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1048:11 [BCM]
Description
x Brake fluid level sensor circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in brake fluid level sensor circuit with the brake fluid amount below the lower side of the
minimum.
Possible Causes
x Brake fluid level sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Brake fluid level sensor malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between brake fluid level sensor terminal A and BCM terminal 1Q
x BCM malfunction

BCM
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR
1Q A B
BCM BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR

CONNECTOR
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A A
1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B B
M-MDS with the brake fluid amount below
the lower side of the minimum.
2 INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
SENSOR CONNECTOR CONDITION Step 6.
x Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor
connector.
3 INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Yes Replace the brake fluid level sensor, then go to Step 6.
SENSOR
x Inspect the brake fluid level sensor.
(See 04-11-15 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL (See 04-11-14 MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/
SENSOR INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION [R.H.D.].)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to the next step.
x Brake fluid level sensor and BCM connectors
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between brake fluid
level sensor terminal A (wiring harness-side)
and body ground.
M-MDS with the brake fluid amount below
the lower side of the minimum.
End Of Sie
DTC B1051:11 [BCM]
Description
x Windshield washer switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in windshield washer switch circuit with the windshield washer switch off.
Possible Causes
x Windshield washer switch malfunction
— Wiper and washer switch terminal J—BCM terminal 3G (Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right
side)
— Wiper and washer switch terminal F—BCM terminal 3G (Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side)
x BCM malfunction

BCM
WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH
3G J

BCM
WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH
3G F

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
O M K I G E C A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
P N L J H F D B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
K I G E C A
L J H F D B
M-MDS.
connector.
3 INSPECT WINDSHIELD WASHER Yes Replace the wiper and washer switch, then go to Step 6.
SWITCH (See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
x Inspect the windshield washer switch. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-19-30 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND No Go to the next step.
WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT WINDSHIELD WASHER Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO to ground, then go to the next step.
x Wiper and washer switch and BCM
ground:
— Wiper and washer switch terminal J
(Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on
right side)
— Wiper and washer switch terminal F
left side)
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1052:11 [BCM]
Description
x Rear washer switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in rear washer switch circuit with the rear washer switch off.
Possible Causes
x Rear washer switch malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between wiper and washer switch terminal G and BCM terminal 3B
x BCM malfunction

BCM REAR WASHER SWITCH
R.WASH
ON
OFF
R.WASH
3B G

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A O M K I G E C A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
P N L J H F D B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
K I G E C A
L J H F D B
M-MDS.
connector.
3 INSPECT REAR WASHER SWITCH Yes Replace the wiper and washer switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the rear washer switch. (See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
(See 09-19-32 REAR WIPER AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT REAR WASHER SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Inspect for continuity between wiper and
washer switch terminal G (wiring harness-
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1079:13 [BCM]
Description
x Bonnet latch switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in bonnet latch switch circuit with the bonnet closed (bonnet latch switch on).
Possible Causes
x Bonnet latch switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between bonnet latch switch terminal B and body ground
x Bonnet latch switch malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between bonnet latch switch terminal A and BCM terminal 1S
x BCM malfunction
BCM
BONNET LATCH SWITCH
1S A B
BCM BONNET LATCH SWITCH

1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A B A
1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the bonnet latch switch
connector.
3 INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Bonnet latch switch connector is
disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between bonnet latch
switch terminal B (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
4 INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the bonnet latch switch, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the bonnet latch switch. (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER
(See 09-14-23 BONNET LATCH SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT BONNET LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN circuit, then go to the next step.
CIRCUIT No Go to the next step.
connectors.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 1S
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B109F:49 [BCM]
Description
x Intruder sensor internal malfunction
Detection Condition
x Intruder sensor internal malfunction.
Possible Causes
x Intruder sensor malfunction
x BCM malfunction
1 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR Yes Replace the Intruder sensor, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the Intruder sensor. (See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/
(See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR INSTALLATION.)
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B109F:49 present?
End Of Sie
DTC B109F:86 [BCM]
Description
x Signal error from intruder sensor
Detection Condition
x Signal error from intruder sensor.
Possible Causes
x Intruder sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between intruder sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 6F
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between intruder sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 6F
x BCM malfunction
BCM B+ INTRUDER SENSOR
4B
7N D
6F C
BCM INTRUDER SENSOR

CONNECTOR
4E 4C 4A 6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A
D C B A
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the intruder sensor connector.
CONDITION Step 7.
4 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR CIRCUIT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Intruder sensor and BCM connectors are No Go to the next step.
disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between intruder
sensor terminal C (wiring harness-side) and
body ground.
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the intruder sensor
6 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR Yes Replace the intruder sensor, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B109F:87 [BCM]
Description
x Communication error between intruder sensor and BCM
Detection Condition
x Communication error between intruder sensor and BCM.
Possible Causes
x Intruder sensor connector or terminals malfunction
x Short to ground in wiring harness between intruder sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 6F
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between intruder sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 6F
x Open circuit in wiring harness between intruder sensor terminal C and BCM terminal 6F
x BCM malfunction
BCM B+ INTRUDER SENSOR
4B
7N D
6F C
BCM INTRUDER SENSOR

CONNECTOR
4E 4C 4A 6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A
D C B A
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the intruder sensor connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
disconnected.
body ground.
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the intruder sensor
6 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Intruder sensor and BCM connectors are circuit, then go to Step 8.
disconnected.
BCM terminal 6F (wiring harness-side).
7 INSPECT INTRUDER SENSOR Yes Replace the intruder sensor, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the intruder sensor. (See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B11C0:13 [BCM]
Description
x Rear door latch switch (driver’s side) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in rear door latch switch (driver’s side) circuit with the rear door (driver’s side) closed (rear door
latch switch (driver’s side) on).
Possible Causes
x Rear door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) connector or terminals malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between the following:
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground (L.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground (R.H.D.)
x Rear door latch switch (driver’s side) malfunction
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8H (L.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8F (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM
REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH)
8H L J
DOOR CLOSE ON
(R.H.D.)
BCM
REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH)
8F B D
DOOR CLOSE ON
BCM REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (DRIVER'S SIDE)
8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH AND Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER’S SIDE) Step 7.
CONNECTOR CONDITION No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the rear door latch and lock
actuator (driver's side) connector.
3 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
(DRIVER’S SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT circuit, then go to Step 7.
x Rear door latch and lock actuator (driver's
side) connector is disconnected.
ground:
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH)
terminal J (L.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH)
terminal D (R.H.D.)
4 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator (driver's
(DRIVER’S SIDE) side), then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the rear door latch switch (driver's (See 09-14-47 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
side). ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH No Go to the next step.
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
(DRIVER’S SIDE) POWER SUPPLY circuit, then go to the next step.
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT No Go to the next step.
connectors.
— BCM terminal 8H (L.H.D.)
— BCM terminal 8F (R.H.D.)
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B11C1:13 [BCM]
Description
x Rear door latch switch (passenger’s side) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in rear door latch switch (passenger’s side) circuit with the rear door (passenger’s side) closed
(rear door latch switch (passenger’s side) on).
Possible Causes
x Rear door latch and lock actuator (passenger’s side) connector or terminals malfunction
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground (L.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground (R.H.D.)
x Rear door latch switch (passenger’s side) malfunction
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8F (L.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8H (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM
REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH)
8F B D
DOOR CLOSE ON
(R.H.D.)
BCM
REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH)
8H L J
DOOR CLOSE ON
BCM REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (PASSENGER'S SIDE)
8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH AND Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER’S Step 7.
SIDE) CONNECTOR CONDITION No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the rear door latch and lock
actuator (passenger's side) connector.
3 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
(PASSENGER’S SIDE) GROUND No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT circuit, then go to Step 7.
x Rear door latch and lock actuator
(passenger's side) connector is
disconnected.
ground:
terminal D (L.H.D.)
terminal J (R.H.D.)
4 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the rear door latch and lock actuator
(PASSENGER’S SIDE) (passenger's side), then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the rear door latch switch (See 09-14-47 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
(passenger's side). ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH No Go to the next step.
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
(PASSENGER’S SIDE) POWER circuit, then go to the next step.
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT
connectors.
— BCM terminal 8F (L.H.D.)
— BCM terminal 8H (R.H.D.)
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B11DA:11 [BCM]
Description
x Front door key cylinder switch (driver’s side) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in front door key cylinder switch (driver’s side) circuit with the front door key cylinder switch
(driver’s side) off.
Possible Causes
x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver’s side) connector or terminals malfunction
x Front door key cylinder switch (driver’s side) malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal H—BCM terminal 6L (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal F—BCM terminal 6L (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LH)
UNLOCK
6L H
LOCK
(R.H.D.)
BCM FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (RH)
UNLOCK
6L F
LOCK
BCM FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A K I G E C A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B L J H F D B
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B11DA:11 present?
2 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH AND Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
LOCK ACTUATOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) Step 6.
x Disconnect the front door latch and lock
3 INSPECT FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER Yes Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driver's
SWITCH (DRIVER'S SIDE) side), then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the front door key cylinder switch (See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
(driver's side). ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-34 FRONT DOOR KEY No Go to the next step.
CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
SWITCH (DRIVER'S SIDE) CIRCUIT to ground, then go to the next step.
FOR SHORT TO GROUND No Go to the next step.
x Front door latch and lock actuator (driver's
side) and BCM connectors are disconnected.
ground:
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH)
terminal H (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH)
terminal F (R.H.D.)
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B11DA:11 present?
End Of Sie
DTC B11DC:11 [BCM]
Description
x Rear wiper switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in rear wiper switch circuit with the rear wiper switch off.
Possible Causes
x Rear wiper switch malfunction
— Wiper and washer switch terminal E—BCM terminal 3C (Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on right
side)
— Wiper and washer switch terminal I—BCM terminal 3C (Vehicles with wiper and washer switch on left side)
x BCM malfunction

BCM REAR WIPER SWITCH
3C E
R.WASH
ON
OFF
R.WASH

BCM REAR WIPER SWITCH
3C I
R.WASH
ON
OFF
R.WASH

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H
O M K I G E C A
3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C P N L J H F D B
K I G E C A
L J H F D B

M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B11DC:11 present?
connector.
3 INSPECT REAR WIPER SWITCH Yes Replace the wiper and washer switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the rear wiper switch. (See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
(See 09-19-32 REAR WIPER AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT REAR WIPER SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
ground:
— Wiper and washer switch terminal E
right side)
— Wiper and washer switch terminal I
left side)
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC B11DC:11 present?
End Of Sie
DTC B1130:11 [BCM]
Description
x Light switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in light switch circuit with the light switch off.
Possible Causes
x Light switch malfunction
Vehicles With Light Switch On Left side
— Light switch terminal H—BCM terminal 3Q
— Light switch terminal F—BCM terminal 1K
— Light switch terminal K—BCM terminal 3T
Vehicles With Light Switch On Right side
— Light switch terminal H—BCM terminal 3Q
— Light switch terminal J—BCM terminal 1K
— Light switch terminal C—BCM terminal 3T
x BCM malfunction
BCM LIGHT SWITCH
LO
HI
3Q H
FLASH-TO-PASS
1K F
HEADLIGHT
TNS
3T K
AUTO
OFF

BCM LIGHT SWITCH
LO
HI
3Q H
FLASH-TO-PASS
1K J
HEADLIGHT
TNS
3T C
AUTO
OFF
BCM
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A 3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
M-MDS.
CONDITION Step 6.
3 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH Yes Replace the light switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
disconnected.
ground:
Vehicles With Light Switch On Left
side
— Light switch terminal H
— Light switch terminal F
— Light switch terminal K
Vehicles With Light Switch On Right
side
— Light switch terminal H
— Light switch terminal J
— Light switch terminal C
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1172:11 [BCM]
Vehicles Without Advanced Keyless Entry And Push Button Start System
Description
x Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) lock-side circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in door lock-link switch (driver’s side) lock-side circuit with the door lock-link switch (driver’s
side) unlocked.
Possible Causes
x Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal D—BCM terminal 8G (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal J—BCM terminal 8G (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LF)
LOCK
8G D
8E B
UNLOCK
(R.H.D.)
BCM DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RF)
LOCK
8G J
8E L
UNLOCK

8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B
M-MDS with the door lock-link switch
(driver's side) unlocked.
3 INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH Yes Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driver's
x Inspect the door lock-link switch (driver's (See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
(See 09-14-44 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH No Go to the next step.
INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
(DRIVER’S SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to the next step.
ground:
terminal D (L.H.D.)
terminal J (R.H.D.)
Vehicles With Advanced Keyless Entry And Push Button Start System
Description
x Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) lock-side circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in door lock-link switch (driver’s side) lock-side circuit with the door lock-link switch (driver’s
side) unlocked.
Possible Causes
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal D—BCM terminal 8G (L.H.D.)
— Keyless control module terminal 3P—BCM terminal 8G
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal J—BCM terminal 8G (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
LOCK
8G D
8E B
UNLOCK
3P
(R.H.D.)
LOCK
8G J
8E L
UNLOCK
3P

8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B

3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
INSPECTION.)
connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
6 INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
(DRIVER’S SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR to ground, then go to Step 8.
side), keyless control module and BCM
ground:
terminal D (L.H.D.)
terminal J (R.H.D.)
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected No Replace the keyless control module, then go to the next
connectors. step.
x Measure the voltage at the keyless control REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
module terminal 3P (wiring harness-side). ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-69 KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED
START SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
DTC B1172:13 [BCM]
Description
x Door lock-link switch (driver’s side) unlock-side circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in door lock-link switch (driver’s side) unlock-side circuit with the door lock-link switch (driver’s side)
unlocked.
Possible Causes
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground (R.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8E (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8E (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
LOCK
8G D
8E B
UNLOCK
(R.H.D.)
LOCK
8G J
8E L
UNLOCK

8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B
3 INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
ground:
terminal J (L.H.D.)
terminal D (R.H.D.)
INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
connectors.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 8E
End Of Sie
DTC B1174:13 [BCM]
Description
x Door lock-link switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in door lock-link switch circuit with the door lock-link switch unlocked.
Possible Causes
x Door latch and lock actuator connector or terminals malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground (R.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground
x Door lock-link switch malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8C (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8C (R.H.D.)
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8C
— Rear door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8C
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
UNLOCK
L
D
LOCK
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LR)
UNLOCK
8C B
J
LOCK
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RR)
UNLOCK
L
D
LOCK
(R.H.D.)
UNLOCK
B
J
LOCK
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (LR)
UNLOCK
8C B
J
LOCK
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (RR)
UNLOCK
L
D
LOCK
BCM DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR

8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B L J H F D B
unlocked.
2 INSPECT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
ACTUATOR CONNECTORS Step 7.
actuator (driver's side), rear door latch and
lock actuator (LH) and rear door latch and
lock actuator (RH) connectors.
x Inspect the connectors and terminals
GROUND CIRCUITS FOR OPEN No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
side), rear door latch and lock actuator (LH)
and rear door latch and lock actuator (RH)
ground:
terminal D (L.H.D.)
terminal J (R.H.D.)
terminal J
terminal D
4 INSPECT DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCHES Yes Replace the malfunctioning door latch and lock actuator,
x Inspect the door lock-link switch (driver's then go to Step 7.
side), door lock-link switch (LR) and door (See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
lock-link switch (RR). ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-44 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH (See 09-14-47 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
INSPECTION.) ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
OPEN CIRCUIT circuit, then go to the next step.
connectors.
terminal L (L.H.D.)
terminal B (R.H.D.)
terminal B
terminal L
unlocked.
End Of Sie
DTC B1175:13 [BCM]
Description
x Front door latch switch (driver’s side) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in front door latch switch (driver’s side) circuit with the front door (driver’s side) closed (front door
latch switch (driver’s side) on).
Possible Causes
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground (R.H.D.)
x Front door latch switch (driver’s side) malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8B (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8B (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM
FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH)
8B L J
DOOR CLOSE ON
(R.H.D.)
BCM
FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH)
8B B D
DOOR CLOSE ON

8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B
M-MDS.
3 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
ground:
terminal J (L.H.D.)
terminal D (R.H.D.)
4 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the front door latch and lock actuator (driver's
x Inspect the front door latch switch (driver's (See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
(See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH No Go to the next step.
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 8B
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1176:13 [BCM]
Description
x Front door latch switch (passenger’s side) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in front door latch switch (passenger’s side) circuit with the front door (passenger’s side) closed
(front door latch switch (passenger’s side) on).
Possible Causes
x Front door latch and lock actuator (passenger’s side) connector or terminals malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal D—Body ground (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal J—Body ground (R.H.D.)
x Front door latch switch (passenger’s side) malfunction
— Front door latch and lock actuator (RH) terminal B—BCM terminal 8D (L.H.D.)
— Front door latch and lock actuator (LH) terminal L—BCM terminal 8D (R.H.D.)
x BCM malfunction
(L.H.D.)
BCM
FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (RH)
8D B D
DOOR CLOSE ON
(R.H.D.)
BCM
FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH (LH)
8D L J
DOOR CLOSE ON

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR (PASSENGER'S SIDE)
8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
K I G E C A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
L J H F D B
M-MDS.
LOCK ACTUATOR (PASSENGER’S Step 7.
SIDE) CONNECTOR CONDITION No Go to the next step.
actuator (passenger's side) connector.
3 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
(PASSENGER’S SIDE) GROUND No Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT circuit, then go to Step 7.
x Front door latch and lock actuator
(passenger's side) connector is
disconnected.
ground:
terminal D (L.H.D.)
terminal J (R.H.D.)
4 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the front door latch and lock actuator
(PASSENGER’S SIDE) (passenger's side), then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the front door latch switch (See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
(passenger's side). ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH No Go to the next step.
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
(PASSENGER’S SIDE) POWER circuit, then go to the next step.
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN No Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT
x Front door latch and lock actuator
(passenger's side) and BCM connectors are
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 8D
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC B1178:11 [BCM]
4SD
Description
x Trunk lid latch switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in trunk lid latch switch circuit with the trunk closed (trunk lid latch switch off).
Possible Causes
x Trunk lid latch switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Trunk lid latch switch malfunction
— Trunk lid latch switch terminal C—BCM terminal 6C
— Trunk compartment light terminal B—BCM terminal 6C
x BCM malfunction
BCM
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT
A B
TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH
6C C B
BCM TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
B A C B A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the trunk lid latch switch
connector.
3 INSPECT TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the trunk lid latch switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the trunk lid latch switch. (See 09-14-66 TRUNK LID LATCH AND LOCK
(See 09-14-67 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Trunk lid latch switch and BCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
ground:
— Trunk lid latch switch terminal C
— Trunk compartment light terminal B
M-MDS.
5HB
Description
x Liftgate latch switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in liftgate latch switch circuit with the liftgate closed (liftgate latch switch off).
Possible Causes
x Liftgate latch switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Liftgate latch switch malfunction
x Liftgate auto closure control module connector or terminals malfunction
— Liftgate latch switch terminal A—BCM terminal 6C
— Liftgate auto closure control module terminal 2B—BCM terminal 6C
— Cargo compartment light terminal B—BCM terminal 6C
x Liftgate auto closure control module malfunction
x BCM malfunction
BCM LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL MODULE
2B
LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH
6C A C
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
BCM LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL MODULE

6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A 2G 2E 2C 2A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B 2H 2F 2D 2B
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH

E C A
B A
F D B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the liftgate latch switch
connector.
3 INSPECT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH Yes Replace the liftgate latch and lock actuator, then go to
x Inspect the liftgate latch switch. Step 8.
(See 09-14-54 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH (See 09-14-52 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 INSPECT LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR Step 8.
x Disconnect the liftgate auto closure control
module connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
6 INSPECT LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Liftgate latch switch, liftgate auto closure No Go to the next step.
control module and BCM connectors are
disconnected.
ground:
— Liftgate latch switch terminal A
— Liftgate auto closure control module
terminal 2B
— Cargo compartment light terminal B
7 INSPECT LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE Yes Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE No Replace the liftgate auto closure control module, then go
x Make sure to reconnect all disconnected to the next step.
connectors. (See 09-14-57 LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Measure the voltage at the liftgate auto
closure control module terminal 2B (wiring
harness-side).
(See 09-14-57 LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE
CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
M-MDS.
WAGON
Description
x Cargo compartment light switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Short to ground in cargo compartment light switch circuit with the liftgate closed (cargo compartment light
switch off).
Possible Causes
x Cargo compartment light switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Cargo compartment light switch malfunction
— Cargo compartment light switch terminal C—BCM terminal 6C
— Cargo compartment light terminal C—BCM terminal 6C
x BCM malfunction
BCM
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH
6C C A
BCM CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT CARGO COMPARTMENT

WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE
CONNECTOR
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
C A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B D C B A
D B
M-MDS.
2 INSPECT CARGO COMPARTMENT Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
LIGHT SWITCH CONNECTOR Step 6.
x Disconnect the cargo compartment light
switch connector.
3 INSPECT CARGO COMPARTMENT Yes Replace the cargo compartment light switch, then go to
LIGHT SWITCH Step 6.
x Inspect the cargo compartment light switch. (See 09-14-52 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
(See 09-14-53 LIFTGATE LATCH AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.) No Go to the next step.
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT CARGO COMPARTMENT Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR SHORT to ground, then go to the next step.
TO GROUND No Go to the next step.
x Cargo compartment light switch and BCM
ground:
— Cargo compartment light switch terminal
C
— Cargo compartment light terminal C
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC C0051:04 [BCM]
Description
Detection Condition
x Z-signal does not change.
x BCM detects that steering angle exceeds the specified value.
Possible Causes
x Steering wheel is off-center.
x Improper installation or positioning of the steering angle sensor
x BCM malfunction
Diagnostic procedure
x Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 10
km/h {6.2 mph} or more.
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC C0051:04 present?
2 INSPECT STEERING WHEEL FOR OFF- Yes Inspect and adjust the front wheel alignment to correct the
CENTER steering wheel alignment, then go to Step 5.
x Drive the vehicle and inspect the steering (See 02-11-4 FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT [Australian
wheel position while driving in a straight line. Specs. and General (L.H.D., R.H.D.) Specs.].)
x Is the steering wheel off-center?

3 INSPECT FOR IMPROPER Yes Go to the next step.
INSTALLATION OF STEERING No Repair installation or replace the steering angle sensor, then
ANGLE SENSOR go to Step 5.
x Inspect for installation of steering angle (See 09-18-29 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/
sensor. INSTALLATION.)
x Is the installation normal?
4 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Replace the steering angle sensor, then go to the next step.
x Inspect the steering angle sensor. (See 09-18-29 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSTALLATION.)
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Start the engine and drive the vehicle at 10 Go to the next step.
km/h {6.2 mph} or more. No Go to the next step.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC C0051:2F/C0052:11/C0052:13/C0053:11/C0053:13/C0054:11/C0054:13/C0055:11/C0055:13 [BCM]
Description
C0051:2F
x Steering angle signal error
C0052:11, C0052:13
x Steering angle sensor A signal input circuit malfunction
C0053:11, C0053:13
x Steering angle sensor B signal input circuit malfunction
C0054:11, C0054:13
x Steering angle sensor C signal input circuit malfunction
C0055:11, C0055:13
x Steering angle sensor Z signal input circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
C0051:2F
x Errors detected in a combination of signals from each sensor (A, B, C, Z).
C0052:11
x Short to ground in steering angle sensor A signal input circuit.
C0052:13
x Open circuit in steering angle sensor A signal input circuit.
C0053:11
x Short to ground in steering angle sensor B signal input circuit.
C0053:13
x Open circuit in steering angle sensor B signal input circuit.
C0054:11
x Short to ground in steering angle sensor C signal input circuit.
C0054:13
x Open circuit in steering angle sensor C signal input circuit.
C0055:11
x Short to ground in steering angle sensor Z signal input circuit.
C0055:13
x Open circuit in steering angle sensor Z signal input circuit.
Possible Causes
x Steering angle sensor connector or terminals malfunction
— Steering angle sensor terminal B—BCM terminal 5E
— Steering angle sensor terminal C—BCM terminal 5D
— Steering angle sensor terminal D—BCM terminal 5C
— Steering angle sensor terminal E—BCM terminal 5B
x Steering angle sensor circuits are shorted to each other.
— Steering angle sensor terminal B—BCM terminal 5E
— Steering angle sensor terminal C—BCM terminal 5D
— Steering angle sensor terminal D—BCM terminal 5C
— Steering angle sensor terminal E—BCM terminal 5B
x BCM malfunction

BCM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
5F F
5E B
5D C
5C D
5B E
5A A
BCM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A F E D C B A
M-MDS.
x Are any of the following DTC present?
— C0051:2F/C0052:11/C0052:13/
C0053:11/C0053:13/C0054:11/C0054:13/
C0055:11/C0055:13
2 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the steering angle sensor
connector.
CONDITION Step 8.
x Disconnect the BCM connector. No C0051:2F/C0052:11/ C0053:11/C0054:11/C0055:11
x Inspect the connector and terminals x Go to the next step.
(corrosion, damage, pin disconnection). C0052:13/C0053:13/C0054:13/C0055:13
x Is there any malfunction? x Go to Step 6.
4 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
x Steering angle sensor and BCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
ground:
— Steering angle sensor terminal B
— Steering angle sensor terminal C
— Steering angle sensor terminal D
— Steering angle sensor terminal E
5 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO EACH to each other, then go to Step 8.
OTHER No Go to the next step.
x Steering angle sensor and BCM connectors
are disconnected.
x Inspect for continuity between steering angle
sensor terminals A, B, C, D, E, and F (wiring
harness-side).
6 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Steering angle sensor and BCM connectors circuit, then go to Step 8.
are disconnected.
— Steering angle sensor terminal B—BCM
terminal 5E
— Steering angle sensor terminal C—BCM
terminal 5D
— Steering angle sensor terminal D—BCM
terminal 5C
— Steering angle sensor terminal E—BCM
terminal 5B
7 INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Yes Replace the steering angle sensor, then go to the next
x Inspect the steering angle sensor. step.
(See 09-18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (See 09-18-29 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/
M-MDS.
x Are any of the following DTC present?
— C0051:2F/C0052:11/C0052:13/
C0053:11/C0053:13/C0054:11/C0054:13/
C0055:11/C0055:13
End Of Sie
DTC C1126:13 [BCM]
Description
x Light switch (TNS) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in light switch (TNS) circuit with the light switch at TNS position.
Possible Causes
— Light switch terminal B—Body ground (Vehicles with light switch on left side)
— Light switch terminal N—Body ground (Vehicles with light switch on right side)
x Light switch malfunction
— Light switch terminal D—BCM terminal 3O (Vehicles with light switch on left side)
— Light switch terminal L—BCM terminal 3O (Vehicles with light switch on right side)
x BCM malfunction
BCM LIGHT SWITCH
HEADLIGHT
TNS
3O D B
AUTO
OFF

BCM LIGHT SWITCH
HEADLIGHT
TNS
3O L N
AUTO
OFF
BCM
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
M-MDS.
CONDITION Step 7.
3 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
x Light switch connector is disconnected. circuit, then go to Step 7.
ground:
— Light switch terminal B (Vehicles with light
— Light switch terminal N (Vehicles with light
4 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH Yes Replace the light switch, then go to Step 7.
x Inspect the light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH POWER Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN circuit, then go to the next step.
CIRCUIT No Go to the next step.
connectors.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 3O
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC C1137:12 [BCM]
Description
x TR switch (ATX)/Back-up light switch (MTX) circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
ATX
x Short to power supply in TR switch circuit with the selector lever not in R position.
MTX
x Short to power supply in back-up light switch circuit with the shift lever not in R position (back-up light switch
off).
Possible Causes
x TR switch (ATX)/Back-up light switch (MTX) connector or terminals malfunction
x TR switch (ATX)/Back-up light switch (MTX) malfunction
— TR switch terminal D—BCM terminal 2H (ATX)
— Back-up light switch terminal B—BCM terminal 2H (MTX)
— Back-up light (LH)/(RH) terminal A—BCM terminal 7A
x BCM malfunction
(ATX)
BCM TR SWITCH
IG1 D
R POSITION
2H
BACK-UP LIGHT (LH)
A B
BACK-UP LIGHT (RH)
7A
A B
(MTX)
BCM BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
IG1 B
2H
BACK-UP LIGHT (LH)
A B
BACK-UP LIGHT (RH)
7A
A B
BCM BACK-UP LIGHT (LH)/(RH)

2I 2G 2A 7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A B A B A
2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B
(4SD, 5HB) (WAGON)
TR SWITCH BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH

F E D C B A A B
M-MDS under the following condition:
— Selector lever not in R position (ATX)
— Shift lever not in R position (back-up light
switch off) (MTX)
2 INSPECT TR SWITCH (ATX)/BACK-UP Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
LIGHT SWITCH (MTX) CONNECTOR Step 6.
x Disconnect the TR switch (ATX)/back-up light
switch (MTX) connector.
3 INSPECT TR SWITCH (ATX)/BACK-UP Yes Replace the TR switch (ATX)/back-up light switch (MTX),
LIGHT SWITCH (MTX) then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the TR switch (ATX)/back-up light (See 05-17-22 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
switch (MTX). REMOVAL [FS5A-EL].)
(See 05-17-19 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) (See 05-17-20 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
SWITCH INSPECTION [FS5A-EL].) INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
(See 09-18-59 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH (See 05-15A-2 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION [G35M-R].)
x Is there any malfunction? (See 05-15B-2 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [G66M-R].)
(See 05-15C-2 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT TR SWITCH (ATX)/BACK-UP Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short
LIGHT SWITCH (MTX) CIRCUIT FOR to power supply, then go to the next step.
x TR switch (ATX)/back-up light switch (MTX)
and BCM connectors are disconnected.
— TR switch terminal D (ATX)
— Back-up light switch terminal B (MTX)
— Back-up light (LH)/(RH) terminal A
M-MDS under the following condition:
— Selector lever not in R position (ATX)
— Shift lever not in R position (back-up light
switch off) (MTX)
End Of Sie
DTC P1536:13 [BCM]
Description
x Parking brake switch circuit malfunction
Detection Condition
x Open circuit in parking brake switch circuit with the parking brake lever applied (parking brake switch on).
Possible Causes
x Parking brake switch connector or terminals malfunction
x Parking brake switch malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between parking brake switch terminal A and BCM terminal 8A
x BCM malfunction
BCM
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
8A A
BCM PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC P1536:13 present?
2 INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the connector or terminals, then go to
x Disconnect the parking brake switch
connector.
3 INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Yes Replace the parking brake switch, then go to Step 6.
x Inspect the parking brake switch. (See 04-12-2 PARKING BRAKE LEVER REMOVAL/
(See 04-12-7 PARKING BRAKE SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
CONDITION Step 6.
5 INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible open
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT circuit, then go to the next step.
x Parking brake switch and BCM connectors No Go to the next step.
are disconnected.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 8A
M-MDS.
x Is the DTC P1536:13 present?
End Of Sie
DTC U0300:00 [BCM]
Description
x BCM configuration setting invalid
Detection Condition
Warning
x Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before performing an inspection.
Performing an inspection according to only the detection conditions may cause injury due to an
operating error, or damage the system. When performing an inspection, always follow the
x BCM configuration setting not done correctly.
Possible Causes
x BCM configuration setting invalid
x BCM malfunction
1 PERFORM BCM CONFIGURATION Yes Perform the BCM configuration again, then go to the next
x Perform the BCM configuration using the M- step.
MDS. (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
(See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION.)
(BCM) CONFIGURATION.) No Go to Step 3.
M-MDS.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U0401:68 [BCM]
Description
x Signal error from PCM
Detection Condition
x Correct data cannot be received from PCM.
Possible Causes
x PCM malfunction
x BCM malfunction
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
M-MDS.
No Go to Step 4.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U0402:68 [BCM]
Description
x Signal error from TCM
Detection Condition
x Correct data cannot be received from TCM.
Possible Causes
x TCM malfunction
x BCM malfunction
1 INSPECT TCM DTC Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x Perform the TCM DTC inspection using the (See 05-02-4 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DTC
M-MDS. TABLE [FS5A-EL].)
(See 05-02-3 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC No Go to the next step.
SYSTEM DTC INSPECTION [FS5A-EL].)
x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 05-17-46 TCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FS5A-
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) EL].)
x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the No Go to Step 4.
M-MDS.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U2100:00 [BCM]
Description
x BCM configuration not set
Detection Condition
Warning
x Detection conditions are for understanding the DTC outline before performing an inspection.
Performing an inspection according to only the detection conditions may cause injury due to an
operating error, or damage the system. When performing an inspection, always follow the
x BCM configuration setting not done correctly.
Possible Causes
x BCM configuration not implemented.
x BCM malfunction
1 PERFORM BCM CONFIGURATION Yes Perform the BCM configuration again, then go to the next
x Perform the BCM configuration using the M- step.
MDS. (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
(See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION.)
(BCM) CONFIGURATION.) No Go to Step 3.
M-MDS.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U3000:04 [BCM]
Description
x BCM internal malfunction
Detection Condition
x BCM internal malfunction.
Possible Causes
x BCM malfunction
M-MDS.
DTC U3003:16 [BCM]
Description
x BCM power supply voltage malfunction
Detection Condition
x BCM power supply voltage is low.
Possible Causes
x Open or short to ground in wiring harness in BCM power supply circuit
— Short to ground in wiring harness between HAZARD 10 A fuse and BCM terminal 2J
— HAZARD 10 A fuse malfunction
— Open circuit in wiring harness between battery positive terminal and BCM terminal 2J
x BCM malfunction

BATTERY MAIN FUSE BLOCK BCM
HAZARD 10 A
2J
BCM
2I 2G 2A
2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
M-MDS.
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

CONDITION Step 7.
6 INSPECT BCM POWER SUPPLY Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR No Inspect the HAZARD 10 A fuse.
SHORT TO GROUND x If the fuse is melt:
x BCM connector is disconnected. — Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible
x Reconnect the negative battery cable. short to ground.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminal 2J — Replace the fuse.
(wiring harness-side). x If the fuse is deterioration:
x Is the voltage B+? — Replace the fuse.
open circuit.
M-MDS.
End Of Sie
DTC U3003:17 [BCM]
Description
x BCM power supply voltage malfunction
Detection Condition
x BCM power supply voltage is high.
Possible Causes
x BCM malfunction
M-MDS.
M-MDS. 2.5].)
TEST [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

3 INSPECT BATTERY Yes Replace the battery, then go to Step 5.
x Inspect the battery. (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See 01-17A-2 BATTERY INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

4 INSPECT GENERATOR Yes Replace the generator, then go to the next step.
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

x Clear the DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
(See 09-02K-3 CLEARING DTC [BCM].) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Perform the BCM DTC inspection using the Go to the next step.
End Of Sie
WM: ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (PID/DATA MONITOR)
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION [BCM]
the screen.
Note DLC-2
End Of Sie
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE [BCM]
Unit/Condition
PID/data
(Tester Operation Condition Inspection item (s)
monitor item
display)
x Light switch at AUTO position: On
AUTO_L_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch at TNS or off position: Off
x Brake fluid level above MIN: NORMAL
BRK_FLUID NORMAL/LOW Brake fluid level sensor
x Brake fluid level less than MIN: LOW
x Driver's front door opened: OPEN Front door latch switch
DRSW_D Close/OPEN
x Driver's front door closed: Close (driver's side)
x Rear door (LH) opened: OPEN
DRSW_LR Close/OPEN Rear door latch switch (LH)
x Rear door (LH) closed: Close
x Passenger's front door opened: OPEN Front door latch switch
DRSW_P Close/OPEN
x Passenger's front door closed: Close (passenger's side)
x Rear door (RH) opened: OPEN
DRSW_RR Close/OPEN Rear door latch switch (RH)
x Rear door (RH) closed: Close
x Front fog light switch in on position: On
FOG_F_SW Off/On Light switch
x Front fog light switch in off position: Off
x Light switch at TNS or ON and rear fog light switch in on
FOG_R_SW Off/On position: On Light switch
x Rear fog light switch in off position: Off
x Hazard warning switch in on position: On
HAZARD Off/On Hazard warning switch
x Hazard warning switch in off position: Off
x Light switch at AUTO or headlight position and HI beam:
On
H/L_HI_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch at pass position: On
x Light switch at headlight position and HI beam: On
H/L_LO_SW Off/On Light switch
x Bonnet opened: OPEN
HOOD_SW* Close/OPEN
x Bonnet closed: Close
Bonnet latch switch
KEY_LOCK_ x Door key cylinder at LOCK: Lock
Off/Lock Front door key cylinder switch
SW x Door key cylinder not at LOCK: Off
KEY_UNLK_S x Door key cylinder at LOCK: Off
Off/Unlock Front door key cylinder switch
W x Door key cylinder not at LOCK: Unlock
x Parking brake depressed (parking brake switch in the on
position): On
PRK_BRK Off/On Parking brake switch
x Parking brake not depressed (parking brake switch in
the off position): Off
x Shift the selector lever to R position: R
R_GEAR_SW Not_R/R TR switch
x Other than these conditions: Not_R
Unit/Condition
PID/data
(Tester Operation Condition Inspection item (s)
monitor item
display)
x Light switch at TNS position: On
TNS_SW Off/On Light switch
x Light switch at off position: Off
x Trunk lid/Liftgate opened: OPEN Trunk lid/Liftgate latch and lock
TR/LG_SW Close/OPEN
x Trunk lid/Liftgate closed: Close actuator
x Turn switch at left position: On
TURN_SW_L Off/On Turn switch (light switch)
x Turn switch in off position: Off
x Turn switch at right position: On
TURN_SW_R Off/On Turn switch (light switch)
x Turn switch in off position: Off
VPWR V Indicate the battery voltage. Battery
x Windshield washer switch on: On
WASHER_F Off/On Windshield washer switch
x Windshield washer switch off: Off
x Rear washer switch on: On
WASHER_R Off/On Rear washer switch
x Rear washer switch off: Off
x Windshield wiper switch at HI position: On
WIP_F_HI Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper switch not at HI position: Off
x Windshield wiper switch at INT position: On
WIP_F_INT Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper switch not at INT position: Off
x Windshield wiper switch at LO position: On
WIP_F_LO Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper switch not at LO position: Off
x Windshield wiper not operating: On
WIP_F_PPOS Off/On Windshield wiper switch
x Windshield wiper operating: Off
x Rear wiper switch at ON: On
WIP_R_ON Off/On Rear wiper switch
x Rear wiper switch at OFF: Off
* : With theft-deterrent system
End Of Sie
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
(EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
09-02O ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
MZR 2.0 DISI))]
FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (MS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–1 (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–2 MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–47
DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–47
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–48
MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–3 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–48
DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–49
(HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–50
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–50
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–51
MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–8 M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT
DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX
Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–8 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–10 (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–12 MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–52
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–14 Detection Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–52
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–15 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–52
E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–17 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–54
F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–18 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–55
G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–20 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–25 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–27 (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–30 MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–57
K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–32 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–58
L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–34 DTC U0010:88, U0498:68, 16:Er12,
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–36 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–39 SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2,
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–41 MZR 2.0 DISI))] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–60
P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–43 Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–60
Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-02O–45
End of Toc
FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
x If the CAN system is considered to be the cause of the malfunction based on the repair order form and the
malfunctioning symptom, follow the 09-02O-2 Troubleshooting Procedure.
x DTCs are also output due to a control module or sensor malfunction, or incorrect power supply. Verify the
output DTCs and first inspect the DTCs not shown in 09-02O-3 DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].
x If there is an open circuit in the communication lines, it is possible that signal error DTCs may be output in
addition to communication error DTCs. Perform 09-02O-8 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-
CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))], 09-02O-47
DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
(EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))] if the communication error and signal error DTCs are output
simultaneously.
09-02O–1
Troubleshooting Procedure
Vehicle in repair shop
Verify repair order

form and symptom
When CAN system is thought to be malfunctioning based on repair order form and symptom,
perform on-board diagnosis using the following procedure.
Perform vehicle identification using M-MDS.
Yes No
Is vehicle identified?
Verify communication condition

Verify DTCs of all modules. between M-MDS and vehicle. *5
No
Are any DTCs Perform symptom troubleshooting.
output?
Yes
Perform troubleshooting according

Yes
Are DTCs not shown in to corresponding DTC inspection.
DTC table*1 output? After repair, verify DTCs of all
control modules.
No
Are DTCs U0001:88, Yes Inspect DTCs U0001:88, U0073:00. *2

U0073:00, U0010:88, or
U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 Inspect DTCs U0010:88, U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81. *3
displayed?
No
There could be open circuit in CAN lines.
Determine the open circuit location using DTC output pattern. *4
*1 : 09-02O-3 DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
DISI))]
*2 : 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
*3 : 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88, U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
*4 : 09-02O-8 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))] / 09-02O-47 DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-
CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
*5 : 09-02O-52 M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
End Of Sie
09-02O–2
DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
HS-CAN
DTC output
module (M-MDS DTC Malfunction location Reference for inspection procedure
display)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
*1 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
DISI))].)
U0101:00 Communication error to TCM
Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with
DSC)
U0121:00
PCM (PCM) Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with (See 09-02O-8 DETERMINING
ABS) MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN)
Communication error to EPS control [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
U0131:00
module (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
U0140:00 Communication error to BCM DISI))].)
Communication error to SAS control
U0151:00
module
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error
DISI))].)
(See 09-02O-8 DETERMINING
MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN)
U0100:00 Communication error to PCM [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
EPS control module (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
(EPS) DISI))].)
(See 06-02-12 DTC U0300:00/U2100:00/
U0300:00*1 Signal error from PCM
U3000:85.)
U0401:00*1 Signal error from PCM (See 06-02-12 DTC U0401:00.)
*1 Signal error from PCM
U2100:00 (See 06-02-12 DTC U0300:00/U2100:00/
U3000:85*1 Signal error from PCM U3000:85.)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
U0100:00 Communication error to PCM (See 09-02O-8 DETERMINING
Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN)
TCM*3 (TCM) DSC) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
U0121:00 (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with
ABS) DISI))].)
U0401:00*1 Signal error from PCM (See 05-02-85 DTC U0401:00 [FS5A-EL].)
Signal error from DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
U0415:00*1 Signal error from ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
(See 05-02-85 DTC U0415:00 [FS5A-EL].)
U0001:88*1 CAN system communication error [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DISI))].)
DSC HU/CM*4 U0140:00 Communication error to BCM
(ABS) U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster
Communication error to keyless control
U0214:00
module
U0401:00*1 Signal error from PCM (See 04-02B-25 DTC U0401:00/U0401:68
U0401:68*1 Signal error from PCM [DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
x Signal error from TCM (ATX) (See 04-02B-25 DTC U0402:00 [DYNAMIC
U0402:00*1 x Signal error from PCM (MTX) STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
09-02O–3
DTC output
display)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
ABS HU/CM*5
(ABS)
U0214:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
module
DISI))].)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
Keyless control U0100:00 Communication error to PCM
module*6 (RKE) U0101:00 Communication error to TCM
Communication error to DSC HU/CM (with [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DSC) (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
U0121:00
Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with DISI))].)
ABS)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
Rear vehicle DSC)
monitoring control Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with
module (RH)*7 ABS)
DISI))].)
(RVM) U0140:00 Communication error to BCM
(See 09-02J-17 DTC U0401:68 [REAR
(See 09-02J-18 DTC U0402:68 [REAR
Signal error from DSC HU/CM (with DSC) (See 09-02J-19 DTC U0415:68 [REAR
U0415:68*1 Signal error from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
DSC)
BCM (BCM/GEM) U0121:00*2 Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with
ABS)
Communication error to SAS control DISI))].)
U0151:00
module
U0214:00
module
U0401:68*1 Signal error from PCM (See 09-02K-87 DTC U0401:68 [BCM].)
*1 Signal error from TCM (See 09-02K-88 DTC U0402:68 [BCM].)
U0402:68
09-02O–4
DTC output
display)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
U0100:00 Communication error to PCM (See 09-02O-8 DETERMINING
U0140:00 Communication error to BCM MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN)
AFS control
U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
module*8 (AFS) DISI))].)
(See 09-02D-16 DTC U0401:00 [AFS
U0401:00*1 Signal error from PCM (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02D-17 DTC U0422:00 [AFS
U0422:00*1 Signal error from BCM (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
SAS control module
(RCM) (See 09-02O-8 DETERMINING
U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DISI))].)
09-02O–5
DTC output
display)
(See 09-02O-57 DTC U0001:88, U0073:00
DISI))].)
U0100:00 Communication error to PCM [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DISI))].)
(See 09-02B-18 SECURITY LIGHT: 16,
DTC: U0100:87/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
Communication error to PCM (no
U0100:87*1 response)
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM)].)
(See 09-02C-17 SECURITY LIGHT: 21,
DTC: B10D8:00/P1260:00 [IMMOBILIZER
DSC)
U0121:00
Communication error to ABS HU/CM (with
ABS)
U0140:00 Communication error to BCM (See 09-02O-8 DETERMINING
Communication error to SAS control
module
Communication error to AFS control DISI))].)
U0182:00
module
U0214:00
module
Instrument cluster Communication error to rear vehicle
(IC) U0232:00
monitoring control module (RH)
(See 09-02I-9 DTC U0401:68
(See 09-02I-10 DTC U0401:92
U0401:92*1 On request from PCM
(See 09-02I-11 DTC U0402:68
(See 09-02I-12 DTC U0402:92
U0402:92*1 On request from TCM
Signal error from DSC HU/CM (with DSC) (See 09-02I-12 DTC U0415:68
U0415:68*1 Signal error from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
On request from DSC HU/CM (with DSC) (See 09-02I-13 DTC U0415:92
U0415:92*1 On request from ABS HU/CM (with ABS) [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
(See 09-02I-15 DTC U0452:92
U0452:92*1 Erratic signal from SAS control module
(See 09-02I-15 DTC U0483:68
U0483:68*1 Signal error from AFS control module
(See 09-02I-16 DTC U0483:92
U0483:92*1 On request from AFS control module
(See 09-02I-17 DTC U0515:68
U0515:68*1 Signal error from keyless control module
(See 09-02I-18 DTC U0515:92
U0515:92*1 On request from keyless control module
Signal error from rear vehicle monitoring (See 09-02I-19 DTC U0533:68
U0533:68*1 control module (RH) [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
(See 09-02I-20 DTC U2005:86
*1 : If only the target DTCs are displayed, perform the corresponding DTC inspection without determining the open
circuit location.
*2 : With ESS (Emergency stop signal system)
*3 : ATX
09-02O–6
*4 : With DSC
*5 : With ABS
*6 : With advanced keyless entry and push button start system
*7 : With rear vehicle monitoring system
*8 : With AFS (adaptive front lighting system)
MS-CAN
DTC output
display)
(See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
*1 U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
U001088 CAN system communication error
Information display U015500HEC Communication error to instrument cluster (See 09-02O-47 DETERMINING
U016400EAT MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN)
Communication error to climate control unit [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
C
U018400ACU Communication error to audio unit DISI))].)
(See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
U0010:88*1 U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
CAN system communication error
(16:Er12*1) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
Audio unit*3
U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster (See 09-02O-47 DETERMINING
(ACU)
U0156:00 Communication error to information display MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN)
U0197:00 Communication error to Bluetooth unit (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
DISI))].)
Device code (See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
16/Error code CAN system communication error U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
12*1 (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
Car-navigation
unit*4
Device code MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN)
17/Error code Communication error to instrument cluster [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
11 (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
DISI))].)
(See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
U0010:88*1 CAN system communication error COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
Climate control (See 09-02O-47 DETERMINING
MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN)
unit*5 (EATC) U0155:00 Communication error to instrument cluster [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DISI))].)
*1 Invalid date received from Instrument (See 07-02A-17 DTC U0423:68 [FULL-
U0423:68 cluster AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].)
(See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
U0498:68*1 U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
Bluetooth unit*2,*3 CAN system communication error
(26:Er81*1)
Device code (See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
26/Error code CAN system communication error U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
Bluetooth unit*2, *4 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
81 *1
(See 09-02O-60 DTC U0010:88,
U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX
U0010:88*1 CAN system communication error COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
Instrument cluster
(IC) (See 09-02O-47 DETERMINING
MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN)
U0164:00 Communication error to climate control unit [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
DISI))].)
09-02O–7
*1 : If only the target DTCs are displayed, perform the corresponding DTC inspection without determining the open
circuit location.
*2 : With Bluetooth system
*3 : With audio system
*4 : With car-navigation system
*5 : With full-auto air conditioner
End Of Sie
DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
Caution
x If the malfunctioning part is detected in the communication line, before disconnecting the related
connector for inspection, press the connector in the connection direction to verify that there is no
looseness or disconnection.
x When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no damage, deformation, or corrosion of
the connector terminals.
1. Verify the CAN system-related module DTCs and the failed module using the (M-MDS).
2. Look for a DTC display pattern and failed module display pattern in tandem which match.
Note
x A hyphen (-) in the DTC output pattern table indicates that the DTC may be displayed depending on the
malfunction detection conditions. If only an (u) is indicated, it means the DTC will not be displayed.
x If any of the following DTCs is displayed alone, perform the applicable DTC inspection. (See 09-02O-3
DTC TABLE [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
DISI))].)
— EPS control module: U0300:00, U0401:00, U2100:00, U3000:85
— TCM: U0401:00, U0415:00
— DSC HU/CM: U0401:00, U0401:68, U0402:00
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH): U0401:68, U0402:68, U0415:68
— BCM: U0401:68, U0402:68
— AFS control module: U0401:00, U0422:00
— Instrument cluster: U0100:87, U0401:68, U0401:92, U0402:68, U0402:92U, 0415:68, U0415:92,
U0452:92, U0483:68, U0483:92, U0515:68, U0515:92, U0533:68, U2005:86
3. Refer to the matching tandem diagnostic results (A to Q) and inspect the possible cause and inspection item.
4. Perform the DTC inspection after the repair procedure.
x If any DTC is displayed, return to 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].
DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning Part
Cross (u): Displayed

Hyphen (-): May or may not be displayed
M-MDS display
DTC output DTC display pattern
DTC
module
U0101:00 u
U0121:00 u
PCM U0131:00 u
(PCM) U0140:00 u
U0151:00 u
U0155:00 u
U0100:00 u
EPS U0300:00 -
(EHPAS control U0401:00 -
module) U2100:00 -
U3000:85 -
09-02O–8
M-MDS display
DTC
module
U0100:00 u
TCM *1 U0121:00 u
(TCM) U0401:00 -
U0415:00 -
U0100:00 u u u
U0101:00 u u
U0140:00 u
ABS *2 U0155:00 u
(DSC HU/CM) U0214:00 u
U0401:00 - - -
U0401:68 - - -
U0402:00 -*7 - - -
*3
ABS U0214:00 u
(ABS HU/CM)
RKE*4 U0100:00 u u u u
(Keyless U0101:00 u u u
control module) U0121:00 u u
U0100:00 u u u u u
U0101:00 u u u u
RVM*5 U0121:00 u u u
(Rear vehicle U0140:00 u
monitoring
U0155:00 u
control module
(RH)) U0401:68 - - - - -
U0402:68 - - - -
U0415:68 - - -
U0100:00 u u u u u u
U0101:00 u u u u u
U0121:00 u u u u
GEM
U0151:00 u
(BCM)
U0214:00 u u u
U0401:68 - - - - - -
U0402:68 - - - - -
U0100:00 u u u u u u u
AFS *6 U0140:00 u u
(AFS control U0155:00 u
module) U0401:00 - - - - - - -
U0422:00 - -
RCM
(SAS control U0155:00 u
module)
09-02O–9
M-MDS display
DTC
module
U0100:00 u u u u u u u u
U0100:87 - - - - - - - -
U0101:00 u u u u u u u
U0121:00 u u u u u u
U0140:00 u u u
U0151:00 u
U0182:00 u u
U0214:00 u u u u u
U0232:00 u u u u
U0401:68 - - - - - - - -
IC U0401:92 - - - - - - - -
(Instrument
cluster) U0402:68 - - - - - - -
U0402:92 - - - - - - -
U0415:68 - - - - - -
U0415:92 - - - - - -
U0452:92 -
U0483:68 - -
U0483:92 - -
U0515:68 - - - - -
U0515:92 - - - - -
U0533:68 - - - -
U2005:86 - - - - - - - -
M-MDS display module “Fail” display pattern
PCM u u u u u u u u
EPS u u u u u u u u
TCM*1 u u u u u u u
ABS*2, *3 u u u u u u
RKE*4 u u u u u
*5 u u u u
RVM
BCM/GEM u u u
AFS*6 u u
RCM u
IC u
Item Diagnostic result
Possible cause and
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
inspection item
09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09- 09-
09- 09-
02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02
02 02
Reference page O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O- O-
O- O-
10 12 14 15 17 18 20 25 32 34 36 39 41 43 45
27 I 30 J
A B C D E F G H K L M N O P Q
*1 : ATX
*2 : with DSC
*3 : with ABS
*4 : with advanced keyless entry and push button start system
*5 : with rear vehicle monitoring system
*6 : With AFS (adaptive front lighting system)
*7 : MTX
A
Possible cause
x Connector terminal disconnection, poor contact, damage, deformation, corrosion
x Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and branch A
x PCM malfunction
09-02O–10
System wiring diagram
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON %100'%614
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
2X 2W : DASHBOARD HARNESS
INSTRUMENT : REAR HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x PCM connector
x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1AM and branch A
x Wiring harness between PCM terminal 1AI and branch A
09-02O–11
x PCM
B
ATX
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module and connector C-09
x Connector C-09 malfunction
x EPS control module malfunction
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
A HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
B CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
09-02O–12
Inspection item
x EPS control module connector
x Connector C-09
x Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 2B and connector C-09
x Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 2C and connector C-09
x EPS control module
MTX
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between EPS control module and branch A
09-02O–13
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
%100'%614
C-09 WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x EPS control module connector
x Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 2B and branch A
x Wiring harness between EPS control module terminal 2C and branch A
x EPS control module
C
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between branch A and connector C-09
x Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-09 and branch B
09-02O–14
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
%100'%614
C-09 WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Connector C-09
x Wiring harness between branch A and connector C-09
x Wiring harness between connector C-09 and branch B
D
Possible cause
09-02O–15
x Open circuit in wiring harness between TCM and connector C-09
x TCM malfunction
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
%100'%614
2B C-09 TCM
EPS 2W
CONTROL
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
A HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
B CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x TCM connector
x Connector C-09
x Wiring harness between TCM terminal 2W and connector C-09
x Wiring harness between TCM terminal 2X and connector C-09
x TCM
09-02O–16
E
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-09 and branch A
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
%100'%614
EPS 2B C-09
2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
A HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
B CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Connector C-09
x Wiring harness between connector C-09 and branch A
09-02O–17
F
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between DSC HU/CM and branch B (with DSC)
x Open circuit in wiring harness between ABS HU/CM and branch B (with ABS)
x DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC)
x ABS HU/CM malfunction (with ABS)
09-02O–18
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x DSC HU/CM connector (with DSC)
x ABS HU/CM connector (with ABS)
x Wiring harness between DSC HU/CM terminal E and branch B (with DSC)
09-02O–19
x Wiring harness between DSC HU/CM terminal D and branch B (with DSC)
x Wiring harness between ABS HU/CM terminal E and branch B (with ABS)
x Wiring harness between ABS HU/CM terminal D and branch B (with ABS)
x DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
x ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
G
With advanced keyless entry and push button start system
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between branch B and connector C-06
x Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-06 and connector C-33
09-02O–20
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
C-06
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Connector C-06
x Connector C-33
x Wiring harness between branch B and connector C-06
x Wiring harness between connector C-06 and connector C-33
09-02O–21
Without advanced keyless entry and push button start system
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-27 and connector branch C
09-02O–22
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
C-06
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Connector C-06
x Connector C-27
09-02O–23
x Wiring harness between connector C-27 and branch C
Without advanced keyless entry and push button start system and rear vehicle monitoring system
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-06 and BCM
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
C-06
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x BCM connector
x Connector C-06
09-02O–24
x Wiring harness between connector C-06 and BCM terminal 6D
x Wiring harness between connector C-06 and BCM terminal 6B
H
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and connector C-33
09-02O–25
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
C-06
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Keyless control module connector
x Connector C-33
x Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2G and connector C-33
09-02O–26
x Wiring harness between keyless control module terminal 2I and connector C-33
x Keyless control module
I
With rear vehicle monitoring system
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between connector C-27 and branch C
09-02O–27
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
C-06
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Connector C-33
x Connector C-27
x Wiring harness between connector C-27 and branch C
09-02O–28
Without rear vehicle monitoring system
Possible cause
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
C-06
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x BCM connector
x Connector C-33
09-02O–29
J
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) and branch C
09-02O–30
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) connector
x Wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal L and branch C
x Wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal I and branch C
09-02O–31
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
K
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between branch C and connector C-27
09-02O–32
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x BCM connector
x Connector C-27
09-02O–33
x Wiring harness between branch C and connector C-27
L
Possible cause
x BCM malfunction
09-02O–34
PCM
1AM 1AI
MTX CAN_H CAN_L
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
CAN
DRIVER BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x BCM
09-02O–35
M
With AFS system
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM and connector C-19
09-02O–36
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x BCM connector
x Connector C-19
x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 3S and connector C-19
x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 3P and connector C-19
09-02O–37
Without AFS system
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM and connector C-18
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x BCM connector
x Connector C-18
09-02O–38
x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 3S and connector C-18
x Wiring harness between BCM terminal 3P and connector C-18
N
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between AFS control module and connector C-19
09-02O–39
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x AFS control module connector
x Connector C-19
09-02O–40
x Wiring harness between AFS control module terminal B and connector C-19
x Wiring harness between AFS control module terminal A and connector C-19
x AFS control module
O
Possible cause
09-02O–41
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
3C F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D %100'%614 E
C-18
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Connector C-19
x Connector C-18
09-02O–42
P
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between SAS control module and connector C-18
09-02O–43
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
SAS CONTROL %100'%614

MODULE
3C C-18 F
DLC-2
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
CLUSTER
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x SAS control module connector
x Connector C-18
09-02O–44
x Wiring harness between SAS control module terminal 3C and connector C-18
x Wiring harness between SAS control module terminal 3D and connector C-18
x SAS control module
Q
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and connector C-18
09-02O–45
PCM
1AM 1AI
CAN_H CAN_L
MTX
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
2B C-09
EPS 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
2X 2W
: FRONT HARNESS
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER : DASHBOARD HARNESS
: REAR HARNESS
: REAR HARNESS No.4
Inspection item
x Instrument cluster connector
09-02O–46
x Connector C-18
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2X and connector C-18
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2W and connector C-18
x Instrument cluster
End Of Sie
DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN) [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
Caution
x If the malfunctioning part is detected in the communication line, before disconnecting the related
connector for inspection, press the connector in the connection direction to verify that there is no
looseness or disconnection.
x When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no damage, deformation, or corrosion of
the connector terminals.
1. Verify the following for the modules related to the CAN system.
x Communication error DTCs
x Malfunctioning module
x Display status of the air conditioner/audio control on the information display when the climate control unit,
or either the audio unit/car-navigation unit is operated.
x The operation condition of the Bluetooth system.
2. Look for a DTC display pattern and system operation status in tandem which match.
Note
x A hyphen (-) in the DTC output pattern cell indicates that the DTC may or may not be displayed depending
on the malfunction detection conditions. If it is not displayed, the malfunctioning location can be
determined by checking the crosses (u) and asterisks (*).
3. Refer to the matching tandem diagnostic results (A to F) and inspect the possible cause and inspection item.
4. Perform the DTC inspection after the repair procedure.
x If any DTC is displayed, return to 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
(R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].
DTC Output Pattern and Malfunctioning Part
Cross (u): Displayed

Hyphen (-): May or may not be displayed
Asterisk (*): No operation
DTC display
DTC display pattern
DTC output module DTC
U015500HEC u u u
Information display*2 U016400EATC u u
U018400ACU u u
U0155:00 u u
ACU*1, *6 U0156:00
(Audio unit)
U0197:00 u u
Device code 17/error code
Car-navigation unit*3, *7 11
u u
EATC*1 U0155:00 u u
(Climate control unit) U0423:68 - -
IC*1 U0164:00 u
M-MDS display module “Fail” display pattern
ACU u
EATC u
IC u u
Information display display Display pattern on information display
None ACU*4 - -
*5 - -
None EATC
Audio control display u u u u
Air conditioning control display u u u u
09-02O–47
System operation System operation pattern
Bluetooth system * * *
Item Diagnostic result
Possible cause and inspection item A B C D E F
09-02O- 09-02O- 09-02O- 09-02O- 09-02O- 09-02O-
Reference page
48 A 48 B 49 C 50 D 50 E 51 F
*1 : The DTC is displayed on M-MDS.

*2 : The DTC is displayed on the information display.
*3 : The DTC is displayed on the car-navigation unit.
*4 : If “None ACU” is displayed on the information display, no DTC is displayed.
*5 : If “None EATC” is displayed on the information display, no DTC is displayed.
*6 : With audio unit
*7 : With car-navigation unit
A
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between information display and connector C-17
x Information display malfunction

WITH Bluetooth SYSTEM
WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER
AUDIO UNIT / Bluetooth
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
UNIT CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q Y Z
1A 1B
CAN_H
INFORMATION J 2T
DISPLAY CONNECTOR CONNECTOR INSTRUMENT
C-17 C-20 CLUSTER
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
Inspection item
x Information display connector
x Connector C-17
x Wiring harness between information display terminal J and connector C-17
x Wiring harness between information display terminal L and connector C-17
x Information display
B
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between audio unit or car-navigation unit and connector C-17
x Audio unit or car-navigation unit malfunction
09-02O–48
AUDIO UNIT / WITH Bluetooth SYSTEM

WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CAR-NAVIGATION CONDITIONER
UNIT
Bluetooth
UNIT
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q Y Z
1A 1B
CAN_H
J 2T
INFORMATION CONNECTOR CONNECTOR INSTRUMENT
DISPLAY C-17 C-20 CLUSTER
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
Inspection item
x Audio unit or car-navigation unit connector
x Connector C-17
x Wiring harness between audio unit or car-navigation unit terminal 1O and connector C-17
x Wiring harness between audio unit or car-navigation unit terminal 1Q and connector C-17
x Audio unit or car-navigation unit
C
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between climate control unit and connector C-17
x Climate control unit malfunction

WITH Bluetooth SYSTEM
WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER
AUDIO UNIT /
Bluetooth
CAR-NAVIGATION CLIMATE UNIT
UNIT CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q Y Z
1A 1B
CAN_H
J 2T
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
09-02O–49
Inspection item
x Climate control unit connector
x Connector C-17
x Wiring harness between climate control unit terminal 1A and connector C-17
x Wiring harness between climate control unit terminal 1B and connector C-17
x Climate control unit
D
Possible cause

WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
CLIMATE
UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q Y Z
1A 1B
CAN_H
J 2T
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
Inspection item
x Connector C-17
x Connector C-20
E
Possible cause
x Open circuit in wiring harness between Bluetooth unit and connector C-20
09-02O–50
WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
CLIMATE
UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q Y Z
1A 1B
CAN_H
J 2T
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
Inspection item
x Bluetooth unit connector
x Connector C-20
x Wiring harness between Bluetooth unit terminal Y and connector C-20
x Wiring harness between Bluetooth unit terminal Z and connector C-20
x Bluetooth unit
F
With Bluetooth system
Possible cause
WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
CLIMATE
UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q Y Z
1A 1B
CAN_H
J 2T INSTRUMENT
INFORMATION CONNECTOR CLUSTER
CONNECTOR
DISPLAY C-17 C-20
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
09-02O–51
Inspection item
x Connector C-20
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2T and connector C-20
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2S and connector C-20
Without Bluetooth system

Possible cause
WITH FULL-AUTO AIR
CONDITIONER
AUDIO UNIT /
CAR-NAVIGATION
CLIMATE
UNIT
CONTROL UNIT
1O 1Q
1A 1B
CAN_H
J 2T INSTRUMENT
INFORMATION CLUSTER
CONNECTOR
DISPLAY C-17
L 2S
CAN_L
: DASHBOARD HARNESS
L K
DLC-2
Inspection item
x Connector C-17
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2T and connector C-17
x Wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2S and connector C-17
End Of Sie
M-MDS AND VEHICLE NOT COMMUNICATING [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT
MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
Caution
x Perform the following on-board diagnosis according to 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))] troubleshooting
procedure.
Detection Condition
x Possible causes of communication errors between the M-MDS and vehicle include communication circuit
interruption due to an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness, or poor contact of connector
terminals, or a BUS OFF condition due to a short circuit in the CAN communication wiring harness.
Possible Causes
x Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and data link connector-2
x Open circuit in BCM CAN line
x Improper insertion, connector terminal damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection of PCM, BCM,
connector C-09, connector C-06, connector C-33, connector C-27, connector C-19, or connector C-18
x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN system-related module CAN_L and CAN_H lines
x Short circuit to power supply in wiring harness between CAN system-related module
09-02O–52
x Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between CAN system-related module
x Short circuit to power supply in CAN system-related module internal CAN lines
x Short circuit to ground in CAN system-related module internal CAN lines
x Damage, deformation, corrosion, or disconnection of data link connector-2
x PCM power supply is not normal
x PCM ground is not normal
x PCM internal resistance is not normal
x CAN system-related module malfunction
09-02O–53
Wiring Diagram
PCM
1AM 1AI
MTX
CAN_H CAN_L
EPS 2B
BRANCH
CONTROL A
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
EPS 2B C-09 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE
2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
BRANCH DSC ABS
B HU/CM HU/CM
D D
C-06
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
BRANCH MONITORING
C CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
3S 3P
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE
A
%100'%614
3C C-18 F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
: FRONT HARNESS
: REAR HARNESS
INSTRUMENT : REAR HARNESS No.4
CLUSTER
09-02O–54
Caution
x When disconnecting the connector, verify that there is no looseness, damage, deformation,
corrosion, or poor connection of the connector terminals.

1 VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING Yes Go to the next step.
x Is there communication between the M-MDS No Go back to FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
and vehicle? SYSTEM.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
2 VERIFY THAT M-MDS AND DLC-2 ARE Yes Go to the next step.
CONNECTED No Correct the connection condition, then go to Step 13.
x Verify the connection condition between the
M-MDS and DLC-2.
x Are the connector terminals normal without
damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection?
3 VERIFY PCM POWER SUPPLY CONDITION Yes Go to the next step.
x Refer to the PCM terminal voltage table and No Repair or replace the fuse or wiring harness, then go to Step
inspect the terminal voltage and fuse 13.
condition.
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Is the power supply condition normal?
4 VERIFY PCM BODY GROUND CONDITION Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the PCM body ground wiring harness No Repair or replace the wiring harness, then go to Step 13.
and ground point.
x Are the ground and ground point normal?
5 INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR TERMINAL Yes Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the negative battery cable. No Repair the connector terminal if necessary, then go to Step
x Disconnect the PCM connector. 13.
x Are the PCM connector terminal normal
without damage, deformation, corrosion, or
disconnection?
x Disconnect the PCM connector. No Replace the PCM, then go to the next step.
x Measure the resistance between the (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8,
following PCM connector terminals: MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
— Between terminal 1AM and terminal 1AI
(part side)
x Is the resistance 118—130 ohms?
7 VERIFY THAT THERE IS NO OPEN CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
IN CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS No There is an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring
Caution harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13.
x When inspecting the DLC-2, touch it
with a paper clip or similar thin pin
without directly inserting a tester into
the terminals.
x Verify the continuity between the following

terminals:
— Between PCM terminal 1AM and BCM
terminal 6D
— Between PCM terminal 1AI and BCM
terminal 6B
— Between DLC-2 terminal F and BCM
terminal 3S
— Between DLC-2 terminal E and BCM
terminal 3P
09-02O–55
8 INSPECT CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING Yes Go to the next step.
HARNESS IN BCM FOR OPEN CIRCUIT No Replace the BCM which has an open circuit in the CAN
x Verify the continuity between the following communication wiring harness in the BCM, then go to Step
terminals: 13.
— Between BCM terminal 6D and BCM (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
terminal 3S REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— Between BCM terminal 6B and BCM
terminal 3P
9 VERIFY THAT THERE IS NO SHORT CIRCUIT Yes There is an open circuit in the CAN communication wiring
IN CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13.
Caution No Go to the next step.
the terminals.
x Measure the resistance between the

terminals.
— Between DLC-2 terminal F and DLC-2
terminal E
x Is the resistance 60 ohms or less?
10 VERIFY NO SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND IN Yes There is a short circuit to ground in the CAN communication
CAN COMMUNICATION WIRING HARNESS wiring harness. Repair or replace it, then go to Step 13.
the terminals.

terminals:
— Between DLC-2 terminal F and ground
— Between DLC-2 terminal E and ground
— Between PCM terminal 1AM and ground
— Between PCM terminal 1AI and ground
11 VERIFY NO SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER Yes There is a short circuit to the power supply system in the
SUPPLY SYSTEM IN CAN COMMUNICATION CAN communication wiring harness. Repair or replace it,
WIRING HARNESS then go to Step 13.
the terminals.

terminals:
— Between DLC-2 terminal F and DLC-2
terminal A
— Between DLC-2 terminal E and DLC-2
terminal A
— Between PCM terminal 1AM and PCM
terminal 1C
— Between PCM terminal 1AI and PCM
terminal 1C
12 INSPECT CAN-RELATED MODULES OTHER Yes Replace the removed module.
THAN PCM and BCM No Inspect all of the CAN-related modules other than those
x Remove only one of the CAN-related related to the PCM and BCM using the same procedure.
modules other than those related to the PCM After inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step.
and BCM.
x Connect the negative battery cable.
x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2.
x Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle?
09-02O–56
13 PERFORM VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Yes DTC troubleshooting completed.
x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. No Replace the PCM, then go to the next step.
x Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle? (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8,
MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
14 PERFORM VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Yes DTC troubleshooting completed.
x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2. No Replace the BCM.
x Does the M-MDS recognize the vehicle? (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
End Of Sie
DTC U0001:88, U0073:00 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0
DISI))]
U0001:88
DTC CAN system communication error
U0073:00
Warning
DETECTION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))] troubleshooting
CONDITION procedure.
x CAN system-related harness malfunction

x Open or short circuit in wiring harness
x Malfunction of connectors between PCM, EPS control module, TCM, DSC HU/CM (with DSC), ABS
HU/CM (with ABS), keyless control module, rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH), BCM, AFS
control module, SAS control module and instrument cluster
x PCM malfunction
x TCM malfunction
POSSIBLE
x DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC)
CAUSE
x ABS HU/CM malfunction (with ABS)
x BCM malfunction
09-02O–57
U0001:88
U0073:00
PCM
1AM 1AI
MTX
EPS 2B
CONTROL
MODULE
2C
ATX ATX
%100'%614
C-09
EPS 2B 2W
CONTROL TCM
MODULE 2C 2X
WITH DSC WITH ABS
E E
DSC ABS
HU/CM HU/CM
D D
%100'%614
WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS C-06
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM
KEYLESS 2G
%100'%614
CONTROL C-33
MODULE 2I
WITH REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM
%100'%614
C-27
L REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING
CONTROL
I MODULE (RH)
%100'%614
C-27
6D 6B
BCM
WITH AFS (ADAPTIVE 3S 3P
AFS B
CONTROL %100'%614
C-19
MODULE A
%100'%614
C-18
3C F
SAS CONTROL
DLC-2
MODULE
3D E
2X 2W
: CAN_H
INSTRUMENT : CAN_L
CLUSTER
Caution
09-02O–58
1 VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING Yes Determine the open circuit location referring to 09-02O-8
x Are any DTCs, except the following, DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (HS-CAN)
displayed? [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
— U0001:88 (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].
— U0073:00 No Go to the next step.
2 INSPECTION OF CONTROL MODULE Yes Go to the next step.
CONNECTOR OUTPUTTING DTCs No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
x Inspect the terminal condition of the control
module connector outputting DTCs and the
mid-connector.
disconnection?
3 INSPECTION OF POWER SUPPLY OF Yes Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE OUTPUTTING No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
DTCs
x Refer to the terminal voltage table of the
control module outputting DTCs or use the
PID/data monitoring function to inspect the
terminal voltage and fuse condition.
x Is the power supply voltage normal?
4 INSPECTION OF BODY GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
CONDITION OF CONTROL MODULE No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
OUTPUTTING DTCs
x Inspect the body ground wires and ground
point of the control module outputting DTCs.
5 CAN SYSTEM RELATED WIRING Yes Go to the next step.
HARNESS INSPECTION No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
x CAN system related wiring harness
inspection:
— Short to ground
— Short to power supply
— Short between twisted pair wiring harness
— Open circuit
x Is the wiring harness normal?
x Disconnect the PCM connector. No Replace the PCM, then go to Step 9.
x Measure the resistance between the (See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR
following PCM connector terminals: 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
— Between terminal 1AM and terminal 1AI
(part side)
x Is the resistance 118-130 ohms?
x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. No Replace the instrument cluster, then go to Step 9.
x Measure the resistance between the (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
following instrument cluster connector INSTALLATION.)
terminals:
— Between terminal 2X and terminal 2W
(part side)
x Is the resistance 118-130 ohms?
8 CAN RELATED MODULE VERIFICATION Yes Reinstall the removed module, remove another module
x Remove only one of the CAN-related and perform the same inspection. Inspect all of the CAN-
modules. related modules using the same procedure. After
x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step.
x Inspect the DTCs of all modules using the M- No Replace the removed module.
MDS.
x Are DTCs U0001:88, U0073:00 displayed?
9 AFTER REPAIR VERIFICATION Yes Perform the CAN system on-board diagnosis again
x Connect all of the modules. according to the troubleshooting procedure
x Clear DTCs using the M-MDS. (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
x Inspect the DTCs using the M-MDS. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
x Are DTCs displayed? 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
09-02O–59
DTC U0010:88, U0498:68, 16:Er12, 26:Er81 [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-
CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))]
U0010:88
(16:Er12)
U0498:68
(26:Er81)
Warning
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))] troubleshooting
DETECTION
procedure.
CONDITION
x CAN system-related harness malfunction
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness
x Malfunction of connectors between information display, audio unit or car-navigation unit, climate control
unit, Bluetooth unit and instrument cluster
POSSIBLE x Information display malfunction
CAUSE x Audio unit or car-navigation unit malfunction
x Climate control unit malfunction
WITH MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
1W 1X
AUDIO UNIT / WITH FULL-AUTO AIR

CAR-NAVIGATION CONDITIONER WITH Bluetooth SYSTEM
UNIT
1Q 1O CLIMATE Bluetooth
CONTROL UNIT UNIT
1A 1B Y Z
CONNECTOR
CAN_H C-17
J 2T
INFORMATION INSTRUMENT
DISPLAY CLUSTER
L 2S
CAN_L CONNECTOR
C-20
L K
DLC-2
Caution

1 VERIFICATION BEFORE SERVICING Yes Determine the open circuit location referring to 09-02O-47
x Are any DTCs, except the following, DETERMINING MALFUNCTIONING PART (MS-CAN)
displayed? [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D.
— U0010:88 (EXCEPT MZR-CD 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].
— U0498:68 No Go to the next step.
— 16:Er12
— 26:Er81
09-02O–60
2 INSPECTION OF CONTROL MODULE Yes Go to the next step.
CONNECTOR OUTPUTTING DTCs No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
x Inspect the terminal condition of the control
module connector outputting DTCs and the
mid-connector.
disconnection?
3 INSPECTION OF POWER SUPPLY OF Yes Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE OUTPUTTING No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
DTCs
x Refer to the terminal voltage table of the
control module outputting DTCs to inspect
the terminal voltage and fuse condition.
x Is the power supply voltage normal?
4 INSPECTION OF BODY GROUND Yes Go to the next step.
CONDITION OF CONTROL MODULE No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
OUTPUTTING DTCs
x Inspect the body ground wires and ground
point of the control module outputting DTCs.
5 CAN SYSTEM RELATED WIRING Yes Go to the next step.
HARNESS INSPECTION No Repair or replace the connector, then go to Step 9.
x CAN system related wiring harness
inspection:
— Short to ground
— Short between twisted pair wiring harness
— Open circuit
6 INSPECT INFORMATION DISPLAY Yes Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the information display No Replace the information display, then go to Step 9.
connector. (See 09-22-11 INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/
x Measure the resistance between the INSTALLATION.)
following information display connector
terminals:
— Between terminal J and terminal L (part
side)
x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. No Replace the instrument cluster, then go to Step 9.
x Measure the resistance between the (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
following instrument cluster connector INSTALLATION.)
terminals:
— Between terminal 2T and terminal 2S
(part side)
8 CAN RELATED MODULE VERIFICATION Yes Reinstall the removed module, remove another module
x Remove only one of the CAN-related and perform the same inspection. Inspect all of the CAN-
modules. related modules using the same procedure. After
x Clear DTCs. inspecting all of the modules, go to the next step.
x Inspect the DTCs of all modules. No Replace the removed module.
x Are DTCs U0010:88, U0498:68, 16:Er12,
26:Er81 displayed?
9 AFTER REPAIR VERIFICATION Yes Perform the CAN system on-board diagnosis again
x Connect all of the modules. according to the troubleshooting procedure
x Clear DTCs. (See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD [MULTIPLEX
x Inspect the DTCs. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (R.H.D. (EXCEPT MZR-CD
x Are DTCs displayed? 2.2, MZR 2.0 DISI))].)
End Of Sie
09-02O–61
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
09-03A SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER

WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART No.4 SOME DOOR GLASS DO NOT
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS OPERATE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
(EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–1 FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–5
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [POWER No.5 DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE
WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR FULLY OPENING/CLOSING [POWER
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–2 WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]. . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–5
OPERATE EVEN THOUGH VARIOUS No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES
OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED BEFORE IT FULLY CLOSES [POWER
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
(EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]. . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–6
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–3 No.7 ALL DOOR GLASS OPERATE
No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT ACCIDENTALLY [POWER WINDOW
OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
TRANSMITTER [POWER WINDOW FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–7
SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE No.8 PART OF DOOR GLASS
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–3 OPERATES ACCIDENTALLY [POWER
No.3 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
OPERATE USING THE REQUEST OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]. . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–8
SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
(EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03A–4
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
oc
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
No. TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM

1 09-03A-3 No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN THOUGH VARIOUS OPERATIONS ARE
PERFORMED [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
2 09-03A-3 No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS TRANSMITTER [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
3 09-03A-4 No.3 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE REQUEST SWITCH [POWER WINDOW
4 09-03A-5 No.4 SOME DOOR GLASS DO NOT OPERATE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
5 09-03A-5 No.5 DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE FULLY OPENING/CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
(EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
6 09-03A-6 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES BEFORE IT FULLY CLOSES [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
7 09-03A-7 No.7 ALL DOOR GLASS OPERATE ACCIDENTALLY [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
8 09-03A-8 No.8 PART OF DOOR GLASS OPERATES ACCIDENTALLY [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
End Of Sie
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
X: Applied
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Door glass does not operate even though
Door glass reverses before it fully closes
Part of door glass operates accidentally

Possible factor
Door glass does not operate using the
Door glass does not operate using the
All door glasses operate accidentally

various operations are performed
Some door glass do not operate
Door glass stops before fully

keyless transmitter
opening/closing
request switch
Troubleshooting item
Power window main switch malfunction X X X

Power window subswitch malfunction X X X X
Power window motor malfunction X X X X
Battery malfunction (low voltage) X X X X
Power window system initial setting error X X X
Open circuit in wiring harness between
power window main switch and BCM X
BCM malfunction X X X X X
Keyless control module malfunction X X X
Open circuit in wiring harness between X X X
keyless receiver and BCM
Any door or trunk lid/liftgate is open. X X
Key is inserted in steering lock. X X
Open circuit in wiring harness between request
switch and keyless control module. X X
The key is inserted in the steering lock
(Keyless entry system)
The ignition is switched to position other than off X X
(Advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
Open circuit in wiring harness between
power window main switch and power window subswitch X X
Improper installation of door glass X X

Keyless entry system signal reception error
(outside operation area, radio signal interference)
X
Transmitter malfunction X
Request switch malfunction X
Caution
x If any of the following conditions continues indefinitely, the power window motor will heat up
causing the protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) to operate. If this occurs, the
operation of the power window motor protection circuit temporarily disables the power windows.
— Continuous up and down operation of the power window.
— Continuously pulling up the power window switch while the window glass is fully closed.
— Continuously pressing the power window switch while the window glass is fully opened.
x A malfunction in the power window system will be determined and the system will shift to
malfunction mode if the power windows are operated up or down using the power window switch
while the power window protection circuit is operating.
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
x While the power window system is in malfunction mode, the door glass can be moved up and
down normally using the manual open/close function, but they do not operate using the auto open
function and exterior open/close function.
x The power window system reverts to normal operation after performing the Power Window
Initialization Procedure.
Note
x The exterior open/close function does not operate when the following conditions are met.
— Any door or trunk lid/liftgate is open.
— The key is inserted in the steering lock. (Keyless entry system)
— The ignition is switched to position other than off. (Advanced keyless entry and push button start
system)
x The auto-open/close function (the exterior open/close function) does not operate if the power window
initialization procedure has been reset.
x Depending on the temperature and battery conditions, the window may reverse on rare occasions.
End Of Sie
No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE EVEN THOUGH VARIOUS OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
1 Door glass does not operate even though various operations are performed
x Battery malfunction (low voltage)
x Power window initialization procedure error
x Power window main switch malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Power window motor malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and BCM
x BCM malfunction
1 x Inspect the operation of the door glass by Yes Go to the next step.
operating the power window main switch. No Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
x Is the manual operation normal? x Power window main switch
(See 09-12-38 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
x Power window motor (See 09-12-35 FRONT
POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.) (See
09-12-37 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
x Battery (Low voltage)
2 x Inspect the operation of the door glass by Yes Go to the next step.
operating the power window main switch. No Perform the power window initialization procedure.
x Does the door glass operate in auto? (See 09-12-56 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
3 x Does the door lock/unlock normally? Yes Inspect the wiring harness between the power window
main switch and the BCM.
If there is any malfunction, repair or replace the
applicable part.
No Replace the BCM.
(See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
End Of Sie
No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE KEYLESS TRANSMITTER [POWER WINDOW
2 Door glass does not operate using the keyless transmitter

x Any door or liftgate is open
x The key is inserted in the steering lock (Keyless entry system)
x The ignition is switched to position other than off (Advanced keyless entry and push button start
POSSIBLE CAUSE system)
x Keyless control module malfunction (Advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
x BCM malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and BCM
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
1 x Inspect the door lock/unlock operation using the Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
transmitter. x BCM (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE
x Does it operate normally? (BCM) INSPECTION.)
x Keyless control module (Vehicles with advanced
keyless entry and push button start system) (See
09-14-69 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
2 x Inspect the open/close condition of the doors Yes System is normal. (Does not operate when a door or
and the liftgate. the liftgate is open)
x Is the reason why they do not lock/unlock No Go to the next step.
because a door or the trunk lid/liftgate is open?
3 x Verify whether the key is in the steering lock. Yes System is normal (Does not operate when the key is
(Keyless entry system) inserted in the steering wheel lock. (Keyless entry
x Verify that the ignition is switched to a position system) (Does not operation when the ignition is
other than off. (Advanced keyless entry and push switched to position other than off. (Advanced keyless
button start system) entry and push button start system))
x Can the doors be locked/unlocked? No Go to the next step.
4 x When the lock/unlock operation does not operate Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
for reasons other than the above Steps 2 and 3. x Keyless control module (See 09-14-69 KEYLESS
CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED
SYSTEM].)
x Wiring harness between keyless control module and
BCM.
No Reinspect for malfunction recurrence. If the malfunction
is not corrected, repeat the procedure from Step 1.
End Of Sie
No.3 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE REQUEST SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
3 Door glass does not operate using the request switch

x Any door or liftgate is open.
x The key is inserted in the steering lock (Keyless entry system)
x The ignition is switched to position other than off (Advanced keyless entry and push button start
POSSIBLE CAUSE system)
x Keyless control module malfunction (Advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
x BCM malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between request switch and keyless control module.
1 x Verify the door lock/unlock operation by Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
operating the request switch. x Keyless control module
x Does it operate normally? (See 09-14-69 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x BCM (See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
2 x Verify the open/close condition of the doors and Yes The system is normal. (When any door or the liftgate is
the liftgate. open, the system does not operate)
x Is the reason why they do not lock/unlock No Go to the next step.
because a door or the liftgate is open?
3 x Verify whether the key is in the steering lock. Yes System is normal (Does not operate when the key is
(Keyless entry system) inserted in the steering wheel lock. (Keyless entry
x Verify that the ignition is switched to a position system) (Does not operation when the ignition is
other than off.(Advanced keyless entry and push switched to position other than off. (Advanced keyless
button start system) entry and push button start system))
x Can the doors be locked/unlocked? No Go to the next step.
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
4 x The door lock/unlock does not operate for Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
reasons other than Steps 2 and 3 above. x Keyless control module (Advanced keyless entry
and push button start system)
(See 09-14-69 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Wiring harness between the request switch and the
End Of Sie
No.4 SOME DOOR GLASS DO NOT OPERATE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
4 Some door glass do not operate

x Power window subswitch malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Battery malfunction (low voltage)
x Open circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window subswitch
1 x Inspect the door glass operation by operating the Yes Go to the next step.
power window subswitch. No Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
x Does it operate normally? x Power window subswitch
(See 09-12-41 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
2 x Inspect the door glass operation by operating the Yes Inspect the wiring harness between the power window
power window subswitch. main switch and the power window subswitch.
x Does it operate in auto? If there is any malfunction, repair or replace the
applicable part.
No Perform the power window initialization procedure.
(See 09-12-56 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
End Of Sie
No.5 DOOR GLASS STOPS BEFORE FULLY OPENING/CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
5 Door glass stops before fully opening/closing

x Battery malfunction (low voltage)
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Door glass improper installation
x Keyless control module malfunction (Keyless entry system)
x BCM malfunction
x Keyless entry system signal reception error (outside operation area, radio signal interference)
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
1 x Operate the door glass in auto/manual by Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
operating the power window main switch/power x Power window main switch
window subswitch. (See 09-12-38 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
x Does the door glass stop before fully opening/ INSPECTION.)
closing using either operation? x Power window subswitch
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
x Door glass (Installation condition)
2 x Inspect the operation of the door glass by Yes Perform the power window initialization procedure.
repeating Step 1 above. (See 09-12-56 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
x Does the door glass stop before fully opening/ INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
closing while in auto operation? No Go to the next step.
3 x Open the door glass by operating the transmitter. Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
x Does the door glass stop before fully opening? x Keyless control module (Vehicles with advanced
keyless entry and push button start system)
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
x Keyless entry system signal reception error
(Outside operation area, radio signal interference.)
4 x Close the door glass by operating the Yes Inspect the following parts, and repair or replace.
transmitter. x Keyless control module (Vehicle with advanced
x Does the door glass stop before fully closing? keyless entry and push button start system)
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
x Keyless entry system signal reception (the system is
in outside operation area and/or influenced radio
signal interference intermittently)
End Of Sie
No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES BEFORE IT FULLY CLOSES [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR
6 Door glass reverses before it fully closes

x Malfunction in power window motor
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Malfunction in battery
x Improper installation of door glass
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
1 x By operating a power window main switch / Yes Inspect the power window motor and repair or replace
power window subswitch, operate the door glass. it. (See 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
x Does the door glass mis-reverse? INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-37 REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION.)
No Inspect the following parts and repair or replace them.
INSPECTION.)
x Battery (brownout)
x Door glass (improper installation)
Note
x Depending on the temperature, battery, and
voltage condition, the door glass may mis-
reverse.
End Of Sie
No.7 ALL DOOR GLASS OPERATE ACCIDENTALLY [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
7 All door glasses operate accidentally

x Transmitter malfunction
x Request switch malfunction
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between request switch (each door) and keyless control
module.
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Power window main switch malfunction
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window
subswitch
x BCM malfunction
1 x Inspect if malfunction is in operating by Yes Inspect the transmitter.
transmitter. No With keyless entry system
x Does it operate normally?
x Go to Step 3.
With advanced keyless entry and push button
start system
x Go to the next step.
2 x Inspect if malfunction is in operating by request Yes Inspect the following parts and repair or replace.
switch. x Request switch
x Does it operate normally? (See 09-14-111 REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION
x Wiring harness between request switch and keyless
control module
3 x Inspect if malfunction is in operating power Yes Inspect power window main switch
window main switch. (See 09-12-38 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
x Does it operate normally? INSPECTION.)
4 x Inspect if malfunction is in without operating Yes Inspect the following parts and repair or replace
Step1to 3. x Power window subswitch
INSPECTION.)
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
x Wiring harness between power window subswitch
and power window main switch
End Of Sie
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
No.8 PART OF DOOR GLASS OPERATES ACCIDENTALLY [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
8 Part of door glass operates accidentally

POSSIBLE CAUSE x Power window subswitch malfunction
Action
Inspect the power window subswitch of the door glass and repair or replace.
(See 09-12-41 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION.)
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR
09-03B SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER

WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING Manual Mode Function Inspection . . . . 09-03B–7
DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS Automatic Mode Function Inspection . . 09-03B–8
(WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE Automatic Door Glass Return Function
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–8
Power Window Main Switch . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–2 IG OFF Timer Function Inspection . . . . 09-03B–9
Power Window Subswitch . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–3 No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP
FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE
SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–3 EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
Power Window System Initialization FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–10
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–4 No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT REVERSE,
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH FOREIGN OBJECT IN ITS PATH [POWER
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–5 OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]. . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–13
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM No.3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN
TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONNAIRE THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–6 MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
INTERMITTENT CONCERN (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–13
WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR No.4 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–6 DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR
Vibration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–6 CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
Connector Terminal Check Method . . . 09-03B–7 (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
BASIC POWER WINDOW SYSTEM FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–15
INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03B–7
End of Toc
WM: POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Power Window Main Switch
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

TO POWER
IG1 1F WINDOW SUB
SWITCH A
B+ 1N
1I a
1B
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
CLOSE
POWER-
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
CUT
SWITCH
BCM
CONJUNCTION
1K 1L b
CIRCUIT
1J CPU TO POWER
WINDOW SUB
1D SWITCH B
1H
1E CLOSE OPEN
RELAY RELAY
1A 1M
POWER WINDOW
MOTOR
(DRIVER`S SIDE)
E F
CLOSE
D
B *2 M
C OPEN *1: HALL EFFECT SWITCH 2
A *1 *2: HALL EFFECT SWITCH 1
Power Window Subswitch
B+
POWER WINDOW
SUBSWITCH
K
AUTO
OPEN
P/W CM CLOSE
a A
b B
CLOSE OPEN
RELAY RELAY
D LI F J H I
E F
CLOSE
D
B *2
C OPEN
A *1
POWER WINDOW
MOTOR
*1: HALL EFFECT SWITCH 2
*2: HALL EFFECT SWITCH 1
End Of Sie
FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
x Always perform basic power window system inspection before troubleshooting.
x Troubleshooting procedures provide information unique to malfunctions of the automatic window return
function.
START
(Customer arrives)
Confirm customer's Confirm to the customer using the "Power Window System
concern Troubleshooting Questionnaire "
Can you duplicate the NO

symptom?
YES
Confirm the symptom Confirm the symptom on-vehicle
NO Carry-out the
Is there same symptom in the
Symptom Troubleshooting preliminary inspection
Chart?
YES
Follow the appropriate
diagnostic procedure
Repair the problem
Complete
x Slightly shake the wiring harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor
contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions.
Caution
x If any of the following conditions continues indefinitely, the power window motor will heat up
causing the protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) to operate. If this occurs, the
operation of the power window motor protection circuit temporarily disables the power windows.
— Continuous up and down operation of the power window.
— Continuously pulling up the power window switch while the window glass is fully closed.
— Continuously pressing the power window switch while the window glass is fully opened.
x A malfunction in the power window system will be determined and the system will shift to
down normally using the manual open/close function, but they do not operate using the auto
open/close function.
x The power window system reverts to normal operation after performing the Power Window
Note
x Initial setting must be performed for the switch of each seat.
x If the following operations have been performed, initial setting is reset, and auto up/down and two-step
down operation are disabled. Therefore, performing initial setting is necessary.
— Negative battery cable disconnected or power window system power supply fuse removed. (perform
initial setting for each door glasses.)
— Power window switch connector disconnected. (perform initial setting for the switch connected with the
connector)
Power Window System Initialization Procedure

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Press the power window switch and fully open the suspect door glass.
3. Pull up the power window main switch/sub switch to the manual-up position to fully close the suspect door
glass, and keep holding the switch up at the position for approx.2 s.
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
No. TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM PAGE

1 Door glass does not move up and down in automatic (See 09-03B-10 No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP
mode AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)].)
2 Door glass does not reverse, even when encountering a (See 09-03B-13 No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT
foreign object in its path REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A FOREIGN
OBJECT IN ITS PATH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)].)
3 Door glass reverses even though the glass does not (See 09-03B-13 No.3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN
encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A
automatic mode FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN
AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)].)
4 Abnormal noise during the power window operation (See 09-03B-15 No.4 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE
DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER
WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)].)
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONNAIRE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Date :
When did the malfunction first occur ?

Outside
Weather conditions Fair weather Cloudy Rain Snow Other ( ) temperature
Driving conditions Driving Stopped (Engine is : Running Stopped)
Duplicate symptom? YES NO Frequency Always Sometimes ( times/month)
Road conditions City Outer city Freeway Other ( )/ Paved Dirt road
*Follow the appropriate diagnostic procedures shown below or perform the basic troubleshooting flow.
(No.1) Door glass does not move up and down in automatic mode.
(No.2) Door glass does no reverse, when encountering a foreigh object in its path.
(No.3) Door glass reverses, even through the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in
automatic mode.
(No.4) Abnormal noise during the power window operation.
Other (Describe the symptom below if the symptom does not appear in the above list.)
Please describe the conditions when the malfunction occurs.

(Example) : When the outer mirrors are operated
Please describe the conditions under which the system returns to normal operation after malfunctioning.
(Example) : The ignition switch is turned to the ON position after inserting the ignition key into the key cylinder
End Of Sie
INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Vibration Method
x If a malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when the engine is vibrating,
perform following the steps:
Note
x There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical malfunction. Some of
the things to inspect for:
— Connectors not fully seated.
— Wiring harnesses not having full play.
— Wires laying across brackets or moving parts.
— Wires routed too close to hot parts.
x An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose wiring harness can cause wiring to become pinched
between parts.
x The connector joints, points of vibration, and
places where wiring harnesses pass through
the firewall, body panels are the major areas
to be inspected.
Connector Terminal Check Method

1. Inspect the connection condition of each female terminal.
2. Insert the male terminal into the female terminal
to inspect for looseness.
End Of Sie
BASIC POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Manual Mode Function Inspection
1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the power-cut switch to UNLOCK. No x Inspect the following items:
x Does each door glass move up and down in — Power window main switch (power-cut switch system
manual mode using the power window malfunction)
subswitch? — Power window subswitch power supply fuses
— Power window subswitch ground wiring harness
— Power window subswitch power supply wiring
harnesses
— Wiring harness between power window subswitch
and power window motor
— Power window subswitch
— Power window motor
x Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, then go to the
next step.
2 x Does the driver-side door glass move up and Yes Go to the next step.
down in manual mode using the power No x Inspect the following items:
window main switch? — Power window main switch power supply fuses
— Power window main switch ground wiring harness
— Power window main switch power supply wiring
harnesses
— Wiring harness between power window main switch
and power window motor
— Power window main switch
next step.
3 x Does each other door glass other than the Yes Go to the next step.
driver-side door glass move up and down in No x Perform the power window initialization procedure for
manual mode using the power window main any door glass that does not move up and down, and
switch? reinspect. (See 09-12-56 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
x If it does not move up and down upon reinspection,
inspect the following:
— Wiring harness between power window main switch
and subswitch
next step.
4 x Turn the power-cut switch to LOCK. Yes x Manual mode function is normal.
x Push/pull the power window main switch x Go to the automatic mode function inspection.
(switches for all windows in manual mode). No Replace the power window main switch, then go to the
x Does only driver-side front door glass move automatic mode function inspection. (power-cut switch
up and down? system malfunction)
Automatic Mode Function Inspection
Note
x Perform the following inspection for the power window main switch and the power window subswitches for
each window.

x Operate the each power window switch in No x Door glass does not move up and down in automatic
automatic mode. mode:
x Does the each door glass move up and down — Go to Step 1 of NO. 1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT
in automatic mode? MOVE UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE.
x Door glass moves up and down in automatic mode, but
door glass reverses:
— Go to Step 1 of NO. 3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES
EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS
MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE.
2 x Gently pull the each power window switch Yes Go to the next step.
while the door glass is moving down in No Replace the suspected power window switch, then go to the
automatic mode. automatic door glass return function inspection.
x Does the glass stop?
3 x Gently press the each power window switch Yes x Automatic mode function is normal.
while the door glass is moving up in x Go to the automatic door glass return function
automatic mode. inspection.
x Does the glass stop? No Replace the suspected power window switch, then go to the
automatic door glass return function inspection.
Automatic Door Glass Return Function Inspection
Note
x Perform the following inspection for the power window main switch and the power window subswitches for
each window.
x With the switch held at auto-up, the door glass does not automatically reverse even when a foreign object
is encountered.

1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes Go to Step 1 of NO. 3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN
x Lower the door glass completely. THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A
x Use the power window switch to close the FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN
door glass in automatic mode. AUTOMATIC MODE.
x Does the door glass automatically reverse No Go to the next step.
even though the glass does not encounter a
foreign object while it is moving up in
automatic mode?
2 x Lower the door glass completely. Yes x Automatic door glass return function inspection is
x Take a hammer and hold it against the inside normal.
of the top of the window frame so that the x Go to the IG OFF timer function inspection.
door glass will hit its handle when it is closed. No Go to Step 1 of NO. 2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT
x Raise the door glass using automatic mode. REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A FOREIGN
x When the door glass hits the hammer OBJECT IN ITS PATH.
handle, does it immediately reverse and
move down to approx.200 mm {7.87 in}
from the completely closed position?
IG OFF Timer Function Inspection

1 x Close all doors. Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. No x Perform the driver-side power window initialization
x In automatic mode, push down the power procedure, and reinspect. (See 09-12-56 POWER
window main switch for the driver-side front WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
door glass. The door glass should move x If it does not move up and down upon reinspection,
down within approx. 43 s after ignition inspect the following:
switch off. — Wiring harness for the door open/close signal system
x In manual mode (finger continuously — Latch switch
depressing the power window main switch), x Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, and reinspect.
the door glass should move down within — If operation is not normal, replace the power window
approx. 43 s after ignition switch off. main switch, and then go to the next step.
x Does the driver-side front door glass move
down?
2 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes x Perform the suspect power window initialization
x In automatic mode, pull up the power window procedure, and reinspect. (See 09-12-56 POWER
main switch and subswitch for the all doors WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
glass. The door glass does not move up — If operation is not normal, replace the suspect power
within approx. 43 s after ignition switch off. window switch, then go to the next step.
x Verify that driver-side all doors glass does No Go to the next step.
not operate.
x Does the driver-side all doors glass move
up?
x Perform the following for all doors. No x Perform the suspect power window initialization
— Lower the driver-side front door glass procedure, and reinspect. (See 09-12-56 POWER
completely. WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
— Take a hammer and hold it against the — If operation is not normal, replace the suspect power
inside of the top of the door glass frame window switch, then go to the next step.
so that the door glass will hit its handle
when it is closing.
— Raise the door glass using manual mode.
x When the door glass hits the hammer
handle, does it immediately reverse and
move down to approx. 200 mm {7.87 in}
from the completely closed position?
4 x Open any door. Yes x Inspect the suspect door switch and related wiring
x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. harness.
x Push/pull the power window main switch or x If above parts are normal, replace the suspect power
subswitch for all door glass within approx. window switch, then go to the next step.
43 s after ignition switch off. x If the above parts have any malfunction, repair or
x Verify that the door glass does not move up replace the malfunction part, then go to the next step.
or down. No Go to the next step.
x Does the door glass move up or down?
5 x Close all doors. Yes x Perform the suspect power window initialization
x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. procedure, and reinspect. (See 09-12-56 POWER
x Push/pull the power window main switch or WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
subswitch for all door glass after approx. 60 — If operation is not normal, replace the suspect power
s after ignition switch off. window switch, then go to the two-step down function
x Verify that the door glass does not move up inspection.
or down. No x The IG OFF timer function is normal.
x Does the door glass move up or down? x Go to the two-step down function inspection.
End Of Sie
No.1 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
(WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Note
x Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of windows where the
door glass cannot be operated automatically.
1 Door glass does not move up and down in automatic mode

x Open circuit or short to power supply in sensor 1 signal, ground signal from wiring harness (between
power window switch and power window motor), inner power window switch, or inner motor: Steps 4–7
x Open circuit or short to power supply/ground in sensor 2 signal from wiring harness (between power
window switch and power window motor), inner power window switch, or inner motor: Steps 8–12
Note
x The automatic function and the IG OFF timer function do not operate while the power window switch
is in fail-safe mode. The fail-safe operates when sensor 1, and/or sensor 2, and/or the sensor power
POSSIBLE
supply malfunctions.
CAUSE
x Sensor 1 and/or 2 malfunction
— When the door glass is moving up and down, the power window switch cannot sense a pulse
signal from sensor 1 during the time it senses 5 pulses (2.5 cycles) from sensor 2.
— When the door glass is moving up and down, the switch cannot sense a pulse signal from sensor
2 during the time it senses 5 pulses (2.5 cycles) from sensor 1.
— There are three abnormal pulses in a pulse signal while the door glass is moving up or down.
— There are 20 cycle pulses from a closed position while the door glass is moving up.
— There is no pulse signal for 1 s after the door glass is moved down.
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH POWER WINDOW MOTOR
WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
M K I G E C A K I G E C A E C A
N L J H F D B L J H F D B F D B
1 INSPECT WHETHER POWER WINDOW Yes System is normal.
SWITCH ENTERS FAIL-SAFE MODE The power window system auto open/close function does
not operate temporarily for any of the following reasons:
OR NOT
x The power window switch is operated while the power
x Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position for window motor protection circuit (integrated in power
3 minutes. window motor) is operating.
x Turn the ignition switch to ON position. x The power window main switch power supply is cut off
x Initialize the power window system. by disconnection of the negative battery cable or
x Operate the auto open/close function. removing the fuse.
x Does the power window operate properly?
2 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to step 7.
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN No Go to the next step.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND
POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
x Inspect the voltage at the following power
window switch terminals (sensor 1 signal):
— Driver’s side (at power window main
switch): H
— Except driver’s side (at suspected door’s
power window subswitch): F
x Is the voltage approx.12 V when the door
glass is moving up and down?
3 VERIFY SENSOR 1 OUTPUT SIGNAL Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. No Replace the power window motor, then go to Step 12.
window motor terminals B (sensor 1 signal):
glass is moving up and down in manual
mode?
4 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN Yes Go to the next step.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND No Repair the wiring harness between the power window switch
POWER WINDOW MOTOR FOR and power window motor, then go to Step 12.
CONTINUITY
x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
x Disconnect the power window switch
connector.
x Is there continuity between the following
power window switch terminals (for driver’s
door at power window main switch, for except
driver’s door at suspected door’s power
window subswitch) and power window motor
terminals?
— Driver’s side:
x H–B (sensor 1 signal)
x E–D (sensor power supply)
x D–C (ground signal)
— Except driver’s side:
x F–B (sensor 1 signal)
x J–D (sensor power supply)
x L–C (ground signal)
5 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Repair the wiring harness between the power window switch
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN and power window motor, then go to Step 11.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND No Replace the power window switch (open circuit or short to
POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR power supply in power window switch).
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
window switch terminals (for driver’s door at
power window main switch, for except
window subswitch):
— Driver’s side
x H (sensor 1 signal)
x D (ground signal)
— Except driver’s side
x F (sensor 1 signal)
x L (ground signal)
x Is the voltage approx.12 V?
6 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the wiring harness between the power window
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN switch and power window motor, then go to Step 12.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND No Go to the next step.
ELSEWHERE
power window switch terminals (wiring
harness-side) (for driver’s door at power
window main switch, for except driver’s door
at suspected door’s power window
subswitch) and ground?
— Driver’s side
x H (sensor 1 signal)
x E (sensor power supply)
— Except driver’s side
x F (sensor 1 signal)
x J (sensor power supply)
7 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the power window switch (malfunction in power
POWER WINDOW SWITCH OR window switch automatic mode control), then go to Step 11.
ELSEWHERE No Go to the next step.
window switch terminals (sensor 2 signal)
(for driver’s door at power window main
switch, for except driver’s door at suspected
door’s power window subswitch):
— Driver’s side: J
— Except driver’s side: D
glass is moving up and down?
8 VERIFY SENSOR 2 OUTPUT SIGNAL Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. No Replace the power window motor, then go to Step 12.
x Inspect the voltage at power window motor
terminal A (sensor 2 signal).
x Is the voltage approx.12 V when door glass
is moving up and down?
9 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN No Repair the wiring harness between the power window switch
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND and power window motor, then go to Step 12.
ELSEWHERE
x Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
x Disconnect the power window switch
connector and power window motor
connector.
power window switch terminals (for driver’s
door at power window main switch, for except
window subswitch) and power window motor
terminals?
— Driver’s side: J and A (sensor 2 signal)
— Except driver’s side: D and A (sensor 2
signal)
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN and power window motor, then go to Step 12.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND No Go to the next step.
ELSEWHERE
power window switch terminals (sensor 2
signal) (for driver’s door at power window
main switch, for except driver’s door at
suspected door’s power window subswitch)
and ground?
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN and front driver-side power window motor, then go to the
next step.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH AND
POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR No Replace the power window switch (open circuit or short to
power supply/ground in power window switch), then go to
POWER WINDOW SWITCH the next step.
x Measure the voltage at the following power
window switch terminals (sensor 2 signal)
(for driver’s door at power window main
switch, for except driver’s door at suspected
door’s power window subswitch):
x Is the voltage approx. 12 V?
12 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes x Troubleshooting completed.
AFTER REPAIR x Explain repairs to the customer.
x Is malfunction no longer present? No Reinspect malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.
End Of Sie
No.2 DOOR GLASS DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A FOREIGN OBJECT IN ITS PATH
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Note
x Perform the following inspection for the power window system component parts of the windows where the
door glass does not reverse, even when encountering a foreign object in its path.
2 Door glass does not reverse, even when encountering a foreign object in its path.
POSSIBLE x Automatic window return range did not reset after battery disconnection: Step 2
CAUSE
1 VERIFY CUSTOMER COMPLAINT Yes x The system is normal.
x Did the customer complain that the door x Explain to the customer that automatic window return
glass did not reverse when near complete power window system does not operate when near
closed position? complete closed position.
2 RESET REVERSE AREA STORED IN Yes x Troubleshooting completed.
DOOR GLASS MOTOR x Explain to the customer that misadjustment of automatic
x Perform the power window system initial window return range was the problem.
setting procedure. No Replace the power window switch.
x Did malfunction disappear? x Verify auto-up/down operation and if the automatic
function does not operate, go to Step 1 of NO. 1 DOOR
GLASS DOES NOT MOVE UP AND DOWN IN
AUTOMATIC MODE.
x If the automatic function operates, replace the power
window switch.
End Of Sie
No.3 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT
WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Note
door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in
automatic mode.
Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving
3
up in automatic mode.
x Extreme change in the sliding resistance of the glass while the door glass is closing.
— Improper installation of the acrylic door visor.
— Power window motor malfunction
— Object caught between the glass run channel and the door glass.
— Insufficient tightening of the door glass to the carrier plate.
— Glass run channel malfunction.
— Glass guide related malfunction.
POSSIBLE Note
CAUSE x The auto-reverse pinch protection function is a mechanism that automatically reverses (opens) the
door glass while it is closing when the power window main switch detects the signal from the power
window motor indicating that an object is obstructing the door glass movement.
x The auto-reverse pinch protection function may operate if the sliding resistance of the door glass
increases causing the closing speed to decrease.
x If the door glass closing speed has changed, concentrate the inspection on the following locations:
(Slip occurrence)
— If the door glass is slipping forward, inspect the front side of the glass guide or glass run channel.
— If the door glass is slipping rearward, inspect the rear side of the glass guide or glass run channel.
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH POWER WINDOW MOTOR
WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
M K I G E C A K I G E C A E C A
N L J H F D B L J H F D B F D B
1 INSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes The system is normal
x Does the malfunction symptom occur only (Explain to the customer that this does not indicate a
under the following special conditions?: malfunction because the system is designed to reverse the
— Driving over railroad tracks. door glass while it is closing if it receives vibration when the
— Driving on bumpy roads. vehicle is crossing railroad tracks, driving on a bumpy road,
— Opening/closing the door. or when the door is opened/closed.)
2 INSPECT ACRYLIC DOOR VISOR Yes Go to the next step.
INSTALLATION CONDITION No Install the side visor properly, then go to the next step.
x Is the acrylic door visor normal?
3 INSPECT DOOR GLASS CLOSING Yes Mark the point where the door glass closing speed changed,
SPEED then go to Step 5.
x Affix tape to the rear edge of the door glass No Go to the next step.
as shown in the figure for placing marks (to
facilitate seeing the door glass movement)
x Start the engine and idle it (to ensure a
stabilized operational voltage).
x Does the door glass hesitate only once while
its closing?
4 REINSPECT DOOR GLASS CLOSING Yes Replace the power window motor, then go to Step 8. (See
SPEED 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/
x Does the door glass hesitate periodically INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW
(5—6 times) while it is closing? MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to Step 8.
5 INSPECT GLASS RUN CHANNEL AND Yes Object is caught between glass run channel and
DOOR GLASS SLIDING SURFACE door glass:
x Is there an object caught between the glass x Remove the object.
run channel and the door glass, or is there Roughness on the sliding surface (rubber
roughness on the sliding surface (rubber surface):
surface)? x Replace the glass run channel.
After performing one of the above actions, reinspect.
If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3.
6 INSPECT TIGHTENING OF DOOR Yes Go to the next step.
GLASS TO CARRIER PLATE No After tightening correctly, reinspect.
x Is it normal? If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3.
7 INSPECT CONDITION OF GLASS RUN Yes Go to the next step.
CHANNEL AND DOOR GLASS No Assemble the glass run channel and door glass securely,
x Is it normal? and reinspect.
8 INSPECT DOOR GLASS CLOSING Yes Repeat the inspection from Step 3.
SPEED No Troubleshooting completed.
x Does the door glass hesitate at any location?
If door glass slips rearward slightly

If door glass slips forward slightly
Affx tape to rear edge
Speed change position
End Of Sie
No.4 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (WITH EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
4 Abnormal noise while the door glass is opening or closing

x Installation screw is loose between the door glass and carrier plate.
x Deformity in the power window regulator plastic part due to use.
— Scratching, wear marks to the power window regulator resin part due to twisting of the cable.
POSSIBLE — Gear deformity in the power window motor.
CAUSE
Note
x Identify the location of the noise using a stethoscope or similar device.
Time of
Noise type Possible cause Location of noise Action
occurrence
Clanking noise Door glass Insufficiently tightened installation Between door glass Securely tighten the
begins to move
screw between the door glass and lower edge and carrier installation screw.
carrier plate. plate.
Groaning noise While door glass Vibration caused by wear on the Power window regulator Replace the power
(Sound is operating resin part from cable twisting due window regulator
increases due to to use of the power window (See 09-12-31 FRONT
use) regulator. POWER WINDOW
REGULATOR REMOVAL/
Note INSTALLATION.)
x Noise does not occur if a (See 09-12-32 REAR
roller is equipped to power POWER WINDOW
window regulator resin part. REGULATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Whining noise Gear inside power window motor is Gear in power window Replace the power
Clicking noise deformed due to use. motor window motor
(Periodic noise) (See 09-12-35 FRONT
POWER WINDOW
MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-
12-36 REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie RESIN PART
POWER WINDOW
MOTOR POEWR WINDOW
REGULATOR
CARRIER PLATE
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
09-03C SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER

WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER
DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER
(WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–2 EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
Power Window Main Switch . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–2 FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–8
FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER
SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–3 OPERATE USING THE POWER
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–3 WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZA WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–4 EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–10
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–4 OPERATE USING THE POWER
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER
TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONNAIRE WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–10
FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–5 No.5 ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW
INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR
SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]. . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–10
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–6 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN
Manual Open/close Function THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–6 ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT
Auto Open/close Function (Driver’s Side) WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC
Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–6 MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
IG-OFF Timer Function Inspection . . . 09-03C–6 (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
Auto Reverse Pinch Protection Function FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–12
Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–7 No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE
No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR
ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW CLOSING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–14
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)] . . . . . . . . . 09-03C–7
End of Toc
WM: POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Power Window Main Switch
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
IG1
1M
B+ MANUAL MANUAL POWER-CUT
CLOSE OPEN SWITCH CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE
1N
1B
AUTO
OPEN OPEN OPEN

1K
1E
1D
P/W
BCM 1A CM
1H
CLOSE OPEN
RELAY RELAY
1J 1L *1 *2 1C 1E 1I 1G
HALL EFFECT SWITCH 2

E F
D B D J B D J B D J
A
C POWER
B WINDOW
HALL EFFECT SWITCH 1 SUBSWITCH
F L F L F L
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
(DRIVER'S SIDE)
POWER WINDOW POWER WINDOW POWER WINDOW
MOTOR MOTOR (RR) MOTOR (LR)
(PASSENGER'S SIDE)
TERMINAL
*1: 2L (L.H.D.), 2B (R.H.D.)
*2: 2K (L.H.D.), 2D (R.H.D.)
End Of Sie
FOREWORD [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
START
(Customer arrives)
Confirm customer's Confirm to the customer using the "Power Window System
concern Troubleshooting Questionnaire "
Can you duplicate the NO

symptom?
YES
Confirm the symptom Confirm the symptom on-vehicle
NO Carry-out the
Is there same symptom in the
Symptom Troubleshooting preliminary inspection
Chart?
YES
Follow the appropriate
diagnostic procedure
Repair the problem
Complete
x Slightly shake the wiring harness and connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor
contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunctions.
Caution
x If of the following conditions indefinitely, the power window motor will heat up causing the
protection circuit (integrated in power window motor) to operate. If this occurs, the operation of
the power window motor protection circuit temporarily disables the power windows.
— continuous up and down operation of the power window.
— continuously pulling up the power window switch while the window glass is fully closed.
— continuously pressing the power window switch while the window glass is fully closed.
x A maifunction in the power window system will be determined and the system will shift to
down normally using the manual open/close function, but they do not operate using the auto
open/close function.
x The power window system reverts to normal operation after pertorming the Power Window
Note
— Negative battery cable disconnected
— Power window main switch connector disconnected
— Power window system power supply fuse removed
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZA PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Press the driver side power window main switch and fully open the driver side front door glass.
3. Pull up the driver side power window main switch to the manual-up position to fully close the driver side front
door glass, and keep holding the switch up at the position for approx. 2 s.
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
No. Malfunction symptom

1 09-03C-7 No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS
INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
2 09-03C-8 No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
(WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
3 09-03C-10 No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
4 09-03C-10 No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)]
5 09-03C-10 No.5 ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
6 09-03C-12 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A
FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
7 09-03C-14 No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING QUESTIONNAIRE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS
(WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Date :
When did the malfunction first occur ?

Outside
Wheather conditions Fair weather Cloudy Rain Snow Other ( ) temperature
Driving conditons Driving Stopped (Engine is : Running Stopped)
Duplicate symtom? YES NO Frequency Always Sometimes ( times/month)
Road conditions City Outer city Freeway Other ( )/ Paved Dirt road
*Follow the appropriate diagnostic procedures shown below or perform the basic troubleshooting flow.
(No.1) The auto open/close function on the driver's side power window inoperative.
(No.2) The driver's side power window is inoperative.
(No.3) All power windows other than driver's side do not operate using the power window subswitch.
(No.4) All power windows other than driver's side do not operate using the power window main switch.
(No.5) All power windows are inoperative.
(No.6) Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in automatic mode.
Please clarify the position where the driver side front door glass opens automatically. Completely closed position
Approx. ( )mm lower than completely closed position Approx. ( )mm upper than the completely open position.
(No.7) Abnormal noise while the door glass is opening or closing.
Other (Describe the symptom below if the symptom does not appear in the above list.)
Please describe the conditions when the malfunction occurs.

(Example) : When the outer mirrors are operated
Please describe the conditions under which the system returns to normal operation after malfunctioning.
(Example) : The ignition switch is turned to the ON position after inserting the ignition key into the key cylinder
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
Manual Open/close Function Inspection
x Operate the power window using the manual No x Inspect the power window main switch and the
open/close function on the power window main wiring harness.
switch. x Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2 x Set the power cut switch to the UNLOCK Yes Go to the next step.
position. No x Inspect the power window subswitch and the wiring
x Operate the power window using the power harness.
window subswitch. x Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3 x Set the power cut switch to the LOCK position. Yes x Inspect the power cut switch and the wiring harness.
x Operate all power windows other than the driver x Replace the power window main switch.
side. No x Manual open/close function is normal.
x Does the power window operate properly? x Perform the auto open/close function inspection.
Auto Open/close Function (Driver’s Side) Inspection

x Operate the power window using the auto open / No If the power window automatically opens
close function on the power window main switch.
x Does the power window operate properly? during the closing operation:
x Go to 09-03C-12 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES
EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER
WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)].
Others:
x Go to 09-03C-7 No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER
WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE
FUNCTION)].
2 x Operate the power window main switch to the Yes Go to the next step.
close position while the power window is No x Replace the power window main switch (power
opening. window control unit is malfunctioning.)
x Does the power window operation stop?
3 x Operate the power window main switch to the Yes x Auto open/close function is normal.
open position while the power window is closing. x Perform the IG-OFF timer function inspection.
x Does the power window operation stop? No x Replace the power window main switch (power
window control unit is malfunctioning.)
IG-OFF Timer Function Inspection

1 x Close all doors. Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the LOCK No x Inspect the door switches and related wiring
position. harness.
x Operate the power window main switch within 43 x If above parts are okay, replace the power window
seconds after turning the ignition switch to the main switch, then go to the next step.
LOCK position. x If above parts are incorrect repair or replace
x Does the power window operate? malfunction part(s), then go to the next step.
2 x Open any door. Yes x Inspect the door switches and related wiring
x Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the LOCK harness.
position. x If above parts are okay, replace the power window
x Operate the power window main switch within 43 main switch, then go to the next step.
seconds after turning the ignition switch to the x If above parts are incorrect repair or replace
LOCK position. malfunction part(s), then go to the next step.
x Does the power window operate? No x Go to the next step.
3 x Close all doors. Yes x Replace the power window main switch (power
x Turn the ignition switch from the ON to the LOCK window control unit is malfunctioning.)
position. No x IG-OFF timer function operation is normal.
x Operate the power window main switch within 60 x Perform the auto reverse pinch protection function
seconds after turning the ignition switch to the inspection.
LOCK position.
x Does the power window operate?
Auto Reverse Pinch Protection Function Inspection

1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes x Auto reverse pinch protection function is normal.
x Fully open the driver’s side power window. No Go to the next step.
x Set the hammer (thickness: 10 mm {0.39 in} or
more) as shown below. Then, close the power
window.
x Verify that the power window opens 200 mm
{2.87 in} after contacting the hammer and the
operation stops.
x Does auto reverse pinch protection function
operate properly?
2 x Does power window open before contacting the Yes x Go to 09-03C-12 No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES
hammer? EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER
WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR
OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)].
No x Initialize the power window main switch.
Note
x Before initializing the power window main switch,
cut off the power supply to the power window
main switch for 60 seconds. Then, reconnect it
again after 60 seconds:
— Disconnect the negative battery cable.
— Disconnect the power window main switch
connector.
— Remove the fuse for the power window
system.
HAMMER
End Of Sie
No.1 THE AUTO OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION ON THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
1 The auto open/close function on the driver’s side power window is inoperative
x No power supply to power window main switch
x Power window main switch malfunction (power window control unit malfunction, auto switch
POSSIBLE
malfunction)
CAUSE
x Power window motor malfunction (Sensor inside motor malfunction)
x Malfunction in wiring harness between power window motor (sensor) and power window main switch
1 x Trun the ignition switch to LOCK position for Yes System is nomal.
3 minutes. The power window system auto open/close function dose
x Trun the ignition switch to ON position. not operate temporarily for any of the following reasons:
x Initialize the power window system. x The power window switch is operated while the power
x Operate the auto open/close function. window motor protection circuit (integrated in power
x Dose the power window operate properly? window motor) is operating.
x The power window main switch power supply is cut off
by disconnection of the negative battery cable or
removing the fuse.
2 x Does the sensor built into the power window Yes Go to the next step.
motor send pulse signals while the power No Replace the power window motor. (See 09-12-35 FRONT
window motor is operating? POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the voltage at the following power (See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
window motor terminals: REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— A (sensor 1 signal)
— B (sensor 2 signal)
3 x Does the sensor built into the power window Yes Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-37
motor send pulse signals while the power POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/
window motor is operating? INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the voltage at the following power No Inspect for an open or short circuit in wiring between the
window main switch (14-pin connector) power window motor (sensor) and the power window main
terminals: switch.
— 1D (sensor 1 signal) Inspect the connection of the power window motor and
— 1H (sensor 2 signal) power window main switch connectors. (damage/pulled-out
x Is the voltage approx. 6 V? pins, corrosion)
Repair or replace if necessary.
End Of Sie
No.2 THE DRIVER'S SIDE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT
2 The driver’s side power window is inoperative.

x Power supply circuit or ground circuit malfunction
— Burnt fuse (B+)
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between fuse (B+) and power window main switch
POSSIBLE — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window motor
CAUSE — Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and ground
x Power window regulator malfunction
1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes Go to Step 6.
x Does the LED on the power window main No Go to the next step.
switch illuminate?
2 x Operate all power windows other than the Yes Go to the next step.
driver’s side window using the power window No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the following wiring
main switch. harnesses. Inspect the connector connections (damage/
x Does the power window operate properly? pulled-out pins, corrosion):
x P.WIND 30 A fuse—Power window main switch terminal
1N(14-pin)
x Power window main switch terminal 1B(14-pin)—ground.
3 x Is the P.WIND 30 A fuse (MAIN FUSE Yes Go to Step 5.
BLOCK) normal? No Inspect the following:
x Short circuit in B+ power supply wiring harness
x Short circuit in power window motor
Replace with the appropriate standard fuse.
Then, go to the next step.
4 x Initialize the power window system. Yes Troubleshooting is completed.
x Operate the power window system. No Re-confirm the symptom and go to Step 1.
x Do the power windows operate properly?
5 x Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-37
main switch terminal 1N(14-pin). POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/
x Is the voltage B+? INSTALLATION.)
No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window
main switch wiring harness (battery power supply).
Inspect the power window main switch connector
connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
6 x Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Go to the next step.
main switch. (power window motor output No Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-37
terminal) while operating the power window POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/
using the power window main switch. INSTALLATION.)
(Open: terminal L (14-pin)/ close: terminal J
(14-pin))
7 x Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Go to the next step.
motor. (battery power supply terminal) while No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness
operating the power window using the power between the power window main switch and the power
window motor. window motor.
x Is the voltage B+? Inspect the power window main switch and power window
(Open: terminal F(14-pin)/ close: terminal motor connector connections. (damage/pulled-out pins,
E(14-pin)) corrosion)
8 x Operate the driver’s side power window Yes Go to the next step.
using the power window main switch. No Replace the power window motor. (See 09-12-35 FRONT
x Does the power window motor operate POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(rotate)? (See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Caution REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x If the power window motor temperature
is high, the motor may not rotate due to
the motor internal bimetal function.
Leave it untouched for about 3 min to
cool it down, then reinspect.
9 x Remove the door glass from the carrier plate. Yes Replace the power window regulator. (See 09-12-31
x Make sure that the door glass moves FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/
smoothly using your hand. INSTALLATION.)(See 09-12-32 REAR POWER WINDOW
x Does the door glass move smoothly? REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Inspect for a bent regulator guide or other possible
malfunction. If normal, replace the door glass run-channel.
End Of Sie
No.3 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER
WINDOW SUBSWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
3 All power windows other than driver’s side do not operate using the power window subswitch.
POSSIBLE x Open or short circuit in power window subswitch wiring harness (battery power supply circuit).
CAUSE x Power window subswitch malfunction
1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes Replace the power window subswitch. (See 09-12-41
x Set the power cut-switch to the UNLOCK POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/
position. INSTALLATION.)
x Measure the voltage at the power window No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness
subswitch terminal D(R.H.D.(12-pin)), between the power window main switch and the power
2K(L.H.D.(12-pin)). window subswitch.
x Is the voltage B+? Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection.
(damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
End Of Sie
No.4 ALL POWER WINDOWS OTHER THAN DRIVER'S SIDE DO NOT OPERATE USING THE POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
4 All power windows other than driver’s side do not operate using the power window main switch
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and power window main switch
(IG1).(Without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
POSSIBLE
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between relay block and power window main switch. (With
CAUSE
advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-37
x Set the power cut-switch to the UNLOCK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/
position. INSTALLATION.)
x Operate all power windows other than the No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window
driver’s side using the power window main main switch wiring harness (battery power supply).
switch. Inspect the power window main switch connector
x Do any power windows operate? connection. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
End Of Sie
No.5 ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR
5 All power windows are inoperative.

x Power supply circuit or ground circuit malfunction
— Burnt fuse (1G1)
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch (IG1) and power window main switch.
(Without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between relay block and power window main switch. (With
advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
POSSIBLE
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window
CAUSE
subswitch
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and power window motor
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between power window main switch and ground
x Power window main switch malfunction (power cut-off switch malfunction, switch malfunction)
1 x Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Yes System is now normal (power cut-off switch is not set
x Set the power cut-off switch to the UNLOCK properly.)
position. No Go to the next step.
x Inspect the power window system operation
again.
x Does the system operate properly?
2 x Operate all power windows other than Yes Go to Step 6.
driver’s side window using the power window No Go to the next step.
main switch.
x Does any power window operate?
3 x Operate the driver’s side power window Yes Go to the next step.
using the power window main switch. No Inspect for an open circuit in the wiring harness between the
x Does the power window operate? power window main switch and the body ground.
Repair or replace if necessary
4 x Is the P.WIND 30 A fuse (FUSE BLOCK) Yes Go to the next step.
normal? No Replace with the appropriate standard fuse.
If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for a short to
ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then replace
the fuse.
5 x Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Replace the power window main switch.
main switch terminal 1M(14-pin). (See 09-12-37 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
x Is the voltage B+? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
main switch wiring harness (1G1).
6 x Identify the inoperative power window. Yes Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage at the suspect power No Go to Step 9.
window motor (battery power supply) while
operating the power window motor using the
suspect power window subswitch
(Open: terminal F/ close: terminal E)
7 x Operate the power window using the power Yes Go to the next step.
window subswitch No Replace the power window motor. (See 09-12-35 FRONT
x Does the power window motor operate POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(rotate)? (See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Caution REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x If the power window motor temperature
is high, the motor may not rotate due to
the motor internal bimetal function.
Leave it untouched for about 3 min to
cool it down, then reinspect.
8 x Remove the door glass from the carrier plate. Yes Replace the power window regulator guide.
x Make sure that the door glass moves No Inspect for a bent regulator guide or other possible
smoothly using your hand. malfunction. If normal, replace the glass run channel
x Does the door glass move smoothly?
9 x Measure the voltage at the power window Yes Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness
subswitch (power window motor output) between the power window subswitch and power window
while operating the power window subswitch. motor
x Is the voltage B+? Inspect the power window subswitch and power window
(Open: terminal L(12-pin)/ close: terminal motor connector connections. (damage/pulled-out pins,
F(12-pin)) corrosion)
10 Note Yes Go to the next step.
x Do not operate the power window No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the power window
subswitch during the following inspection. subswitch wiring harness.
Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection.
x Inspect the continuity between power (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
window subswitch terminal D (vehicle Repair or replace if necessary.
harness-side) and ground. Then go to Step 12.
11 Note Yes Replace the power window subswitch. (See 09-12-41
x Do not operate the power window POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/
subswitch during the following inspection. INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the continuity between power subswitch wiring harness.
window subswitch terminal F (vehicle Inspect the power window subswitch connector connection.
harness-side) and ground. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
x Is there continuity? Repair or replace if necessary.
Then go to Step 13.
12 Note Yes Go to the next step.
x Do not operate the power window main No Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-37
switch during the following inspection. POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the continuity between power
window main switch terminal (up-side 1I, 1C,
2L(L.H.D.), 2B(R.H.D.)) and ground.
13 Note Yes Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring harness
x Do not operate the power window main between the power window main switch and power window
switch during the following inspection. subswitch.
Inspect the power window main switch and subswitch
x Inspect the continuity between power connector connections. (damage/pulled-out pins, corrosion)
window main switch terminal (down-side 1G, Repair or replace if necessary.
1E, 2K(L.H.D.), 2D(R.H.D.)) and ground. No Replace the power window main switch. (See 09-12-37
x Is there continuity? POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
No.6 DOOR GLASS REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT
WHILE IT IS MOVING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE [POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/
CLOSE FUNCTION)]
Note
door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving up in
automatic mode.
Door glass reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is moving
6
up in automatic mode.
x Extreme change in the sliding resistance of the glass while the door glass is closing.
— Improper installation of the acrylic door visor.
— Power window motor malfunction
— Object caught between the glass run channel and the door glass.
— Insufficient tightening of the door glass to the carrier plate.
— Glass run channel malfunction.
— Glass guide related malfunction.
POSSIBLE Note
CAUSE x The auto-reverse pinch protection function is a mechanism that automatically reverses (opens) the
door glass while it is closing when the power window main switch detects the signal from the power
window motor indicating that an object is obstructing the door glass movement.
x The auto-reverse pinch protection function may operate if the sliding resistance of the door glass
increases causing the closing speed to decrease.
x If the door glass closing speed has changed, concentrate the inspection on the following locations:
(Slip occurrence)
— If the door glass is slipping forward, inspect the front side of the glass guide or glass run channel.
— If the door glass is slipping rearward, inspect the rear side of the glass guide or glass run channel.
1 x Inspect malfunction symptom. Yes The system is normal
x Does the malfunction symptom occur only (Explain to the customer that this does not indicate a
under the following special conditions?: malfunction because the system is designed to reverse the
— Driving over railroad tracks door glass while it is closing if it receives vibration when the
— Driving on bumpy roads. vehicle is crossing railroad tracks, driving on a bumpy road,
— Opening/closing the door. or when the door is opened/closed.)
2 x Inspect acrylic door visor installation Yes Go to the next step.
condition. No Install the side visor properly, then go to the next step.
x Is the acrylic door visor normal?
3 x Inspect door glass closing speed. Yes Mark the point where the door glass closing speed changed,
x Affix tape to the rear edge of the door glass then go to Step 5.
as shown in the figure for placing marks (to No Go to the next step.
facilitate seeing the door glass movement)
x Start the engine and idle it (to ensure a
stabilized operational voltage).
x Does the door glass hesitate only once while
its closing?
4 x Reinspect door glass closing speed. Yes Replace the power window motor, then go to Step 8 (See
x Does the door glass hesitate periodically (5-6 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/
times) while it is closing? INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW
MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to Step 8.
5 x Inspect glass run channel and door glass Yes Object is caught between glass run channel and
sliding surface. door glass:
x Is there an object caught between the glass x Remove the object.
run channel and the door glass, or is there
Roughness on the sliding surface (rubber
roughness on the sliding surface (rubber
surface)? surface):
x Replace the glass run channel.
After performing one of the above actions, reinspect.
6 x Inspect tightening of door glass to carrier Yes Go to the next step.
plate. No After tightening correctly, reinspect.
x Is it normal? If the malfunction is not corrected, go to Step 3.
7 x Inspect condition of glass run channel and Yes Go to the next step.
door glass. No Assemble the glass run channel and door glass securely,
x Is it normal? and reinspect.
8 x Inspect door glass closing speed. Yes Repeat the inspection from Step 3.
x Does the door glass hesitate at any location? No Troubleshooting completed.
If door glass slips rearward slightly

If door glass slips forward slightly
Affix tape to rear edge
Speed change position
End Of Sie
No.7 ABNORMAL NOISE WHILE THE DOOR GLASS IS OPENING OR CLOSING [POWER WINDOW
SYSTEMS (WITHOUT EXTERIOR OPEN/CLOSE FUNCTION)]
7 Abnormal noise while the door glass is opening or closing

x Installation screw is loose between the door glass and carrier plate.
x Deformity in the power window regulator plastic part due to use.
— Scratching, wear marks to the power window regulator resin part due to twisting of the cable.
POSSIBLE — Gear deformity in the power window motor.
CAUSE
Note
x Identify the location of the noise using a stethoscope or similar device.
Time of
Noise type Possible cause Location of noise Action
occurrence
Clanking noise Door glass Insufficiently tightened installation Between door glass Securely tighten the
begins to move
screw between the door glass and lower edge and carrier installation screw.
carrier plate. plate.
Groaning noise While door glass Vibration caused by wear on the Power window regulator Replace the power
(Sound is operating resin part from cable twisting due window regulator
increases due to to use of the power window (See 09-12-31 FRONT
use) regulator. POWER WINDOW
REGULATOR REMOVAL/
Note INSTALLATION.) (See 09-
x Noise does not occur if a 12-32 REAR POWER
roller is equipped to power WINDOW REGULATOR
window regulator resin part. REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Whining noise Gear inside power window motor is Gear in power window Replace the power
Clicking noise deformed due to use. motor window motor
(Periodic noise) (See 09-12-35 FRONT
POWER WINDOW
MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-
12-36 REAR POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
RESIN PART
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
CARRIER PLATE
POWER WINDOW
REGULATOR
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
BUTTON START SYSTEM]
09-03D SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ADVANCED

KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART NO.2 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-03D–1 KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–9
DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS NO.3 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START DOES NOT OPERATE [ADVANCED
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–3 KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–13
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND NO.4 AFTER ENGINE START,
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-03D–4 ELECTRICAL DEVICES DO NOT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK OPERATE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SHEET [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–16
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–4 NO.5 ELECTRONIC STEERING
NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE MECHANISM DOES NOT OPERATE
LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY ADVANCED [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]. . . . . 09-03D–17
AND PUSH BUTTON START NO.6 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03D–5 DOES NOT TURN OFF (IG OFF)
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]. . . . . 09-03D–20
oc
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
No. Troubleshooting item Description Page

1 Door cannot be locked/unlocked x Cannot door lock and/or unlock with (See 09-03D-5 NO.1 DOOR
by advanced key advanced key CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED
BY ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
2 Advanced keyless entry and push x Cannot door lock with door lock request (See 09-03D-9 NO.2 ADVANCED
button start system function switch KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
inoperative x Cannot door unlock with door unlock touch INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED
sensor KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
x Cannot liftgate/trunk lid open with liftgate/ BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
trunk lid opener switch
3 Push button start system does (See 09-03D-13 NO.3 PUSH
not operate BUTTON START SYSTEM DOES
x Cannot switch to ACC or IG ON
NOT OPERATE [ADVANCED
x Engine does not start
4 After engine start, electrical (See 09-03D-16 NO.4 AFTER
devices do not operate x Possible cause related to non-operation of ENGINE START, ELECTRICAL
electrical devices (such as blower motor, DEVICES DO NOT OPERATE
rear wiper) with ignition is switched to ON [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
(IG2), after engine start AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM].)
5 Electronic steering mechanism (See 09-03D-17 NO.5 ELECTRONIC
does not operate STEERING MECHANISM DOES
x Steering does not lock during system IG
NOT OPERATE [ADVANCED
OFF, door lock, door open/close
6 Push button start system does x Engine does not turn off even if engine (See 09-03D-20 NO.6 PUSH
not turn off (IG OFF) shut off operation is performed BUTTON START SYSTEM DOES
x Electrical devices continue to operate after NOT TURN OFF (IG OFF)
engine is turned off [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
x Dead battery AND PUSH BUTTON START
x Engine does not turn off even if the SYSTEM].)
emergency engine stop (continuously
pressing the push button start or quickly
pressing it any number of times) is
performed
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
B+ ROOM 15 A
FUSE
BCM 1D 1C
B+
EGI 5 A FUSE
1E 1A B+
B+ STEERING LOCK STEERING LOCK UNIT

10 A FUSE 2L STOP 5 A FUSE
B+ 1B
ACC MIRROR 5 A FUSE BRAKE
RELAY
4A SWITCH
2A
4F 3S
B+
ENG IG
B+ IG1 TRANSAXLE RANGE
15 A FUSE 4B
RELAY 2C STARTER SWITCH(ATX)
RELAY
STARTER INTERLOCK
M SWITCH(MTX)
4E
WINDSHIELD 4AA
WIPER
RELAY WIPER 20 A
FUSE 4K
BRAKE
B+ 4X SWITCH2
3E
MTX
PCM
4H 3B
IG2
RELAY CPP SWITCH
3T
ATX
NEUTRAL
3M SWITCH
DSC HU/CM BCM 4S P POSITION
SWITCH
3G
4J B+
KEYLESS TRUNK LID/LIFTGATE
CONTROL OPENNER SWITCH BCM
4W MODULE 2F
PUSH 4Y
BUTTON 3P
START 4T
DOOR LOCK LINK SWITCH
2J 2G INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
2I
2K
3H C
F TOUCH SENSOR (RF)
3U D
A REQUEST SWITCH (RF)
A
B 4Q
3O B KEYLESS ANTENNA
C 2D (EXTERIOR, RF)
3AD E
D 2B
3Q C TOUCH SENSOR (LF)
E 4R F
F 3X D
REQUEST SWITCH (LF)
3N A
COIL ANTENNA
3F B KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS BEEPER
4L (EXTERIOR, LF)
3AB E
A 1F
B
3K 3R C
KEYLESS ANTENNA
A 3AA D (INTERIOR, FRONT)
REQUEST 3D
SWITCH B
B+ 3I C
KEYLESS ANTENNA
WGN ILLUMI 7.5 A 3Z D (INTERIOR, REAR)
FUSE
4U 3L C
B+ KEYLESS ANTENNA
KEYLESS RECEIVER 3Y D (INTERIOR, CENTER)
ROOM 15 A
FUSE
D 3C C
KEYLESS ANTENNA
C 2H
3AC D (EXTERIOR, REAR)
B
End Of Sie
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
x The advanced keyless system is controlled by the keyless control module.
x “All locks” includes the liftgate/trunk lid.
x Go to troubleshooting after identifying the specific malfunction by doing a advanced keyless entry and push-
button start system preliminary inspection.
End Of Sie
START
Interviwe customer using

keyless entry system check
Keyless entry system prelimiinary
Troubleshooting
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK SHEET [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
x Use the sheet below as a customer interview sheet when accepting a vehicle for service.
x If the symptom is "Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter at all," find out how the customer
uses the keyless entry system by following the check sheet below.
Perform the following inspection with customer.

Q1. What's the customer's complaint?
Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter (door does not lock/unlock).
Other
Q2. Is system factory-installed or after-market?

Factory-installed system
GO to Q3.
After-market system
Perform troubleshooting according to after-market keyless entry system manual.
Q3. Operate transmitter with customer from 2.5 m {8.2 ft} away from center of vehicle. (Make sure the ignition
key is either in the LOCK position or removed.)
Does keyless entry system work?
Yes
Explain the following to the customer.
Keyless entry system does not work when ignition switch is in except for off.
Keyless entry system does not work form excessive distances (more than 2.5 m {8.2 ft} away from
center of vehicle).
The auxiliary key is inserted into the key slot.
No
Go to Q4.
Q4. Check location where customer uses keyless entry system.

Does a particular area, such as being near TV towers, power plants, power lines, or factories, have an
effect on malfunction?
Yes Place
Area of operation is bad. Explain effect of outside interference on transmitter to customer.
No
Go to Q5.
Q5. Make sure there are no after-market electrical parts installed on vehicle.
Are there any of the following present?
Cellular phone
Radio-wave equipment
Remote engine starter
TV, etc.
Yes Pa ts
No
Perform the keyless entry system preliminary inspection.
End Of Sie
NO.1 DOOR CANNOT BE LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
1 Door cannot be locked/unlocked by advanced key

DESCRIPTION x Cannot door lock and/or unlock with advanced key
x Malfunction in advanced key battery or advanced key
x Malfunction in keyless control module
x Malfunction in keyless receiver
x Open or short circuit in wiring between push button start and keyless control module
x Malfunction in BCM
x Malfunction indoor latch switch or trunk lid/liftgate opener switch
POSSIBLE x Open or short circuit in wiring between trunk lid/liftgate latch switch and BCM
CAUSE x Open or short circuit in wiring harness door latch switch and BCM
x Malfunction in door lock actuator
x Open or short circuit in wiring between door lock actuator and BCM
x Open or short circuit in wiring between keyless control module and BCM
x Poor connection of connector, terminal damage
x Wrong usage
x The after-market electrical parts are interfering with the keyless entry system
KEYLESS RECEIVER KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
BR B
D CB B A 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
1E 1C 1A
1F 1D 1B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J
3G 3D 3A 4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
3E 3B
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C 4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
BCM
8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
1 x Attempt to lock/unlock the door with the Yes Go to the next step.
advanced key. No Go to Step 9.
x Does the advanced key LED illuminate?
2 x Did the customer activate the keyless entry Yes Go to the next step.
system within operative area (2.5 m {8.2 ft} No The system is normal.
from vehicle)? Explain to the customer that the system does not work
without the system operative area.
3 x Did the customer use the keyless entry Yes The system is normal.
system in particular area, such as being near Area of operation is subject.
TV towers, power plants, power lines, or Explain effect of outside interference on the advanced key to
factories? the customer.
4 x Did the customer activate the advanced Yes Go to the next step.
keyless entry system with all following No The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
conditions satisfied? system does not work without these conditions satisfied.
— All doors and trunk lid/liftgate closed
— Switch the ignition to off. (without ACC
and IG ON position)
5 x Are any of the following after-market Yes Go to the next step.
electrical parts on the vehicle? No Go to Step 7.
— Cellular phone
— Parts with built-in microcomputer
— Remote engine starter
— TV
— Other
6 x Disconnect the after-market electrical parts Yes The system is normal. The after-market electrical parts are
connectors and attempt to lock/unlock the interfering with the keyless entry system.
doors with the advanced key. No Go to the next step.
x Does the keyless entry system work only
near the receiver?
7 x Attempt to lock/unlock the doors with the Yes Go to the next step.
advanced key. No Go to Step 9.
x Does the door lock system work?
8 x Replace with a advanced key battery known Yes Replace the advanced key battery, and then go to Step 21.
to be good. No Go to the next step.
x Does the keyless entry system operate
properly?
9 x Visually inspect the advanced key battery. Yes Go to the next step.
x Are the below items correct? No Install the advanced key battery properly or replace with the
— advanced key battery installation (correct specified advanced key battery (CR2025), then go to Step
polarity) 21.
— Battery type (CR2025)
10 x Visually inspect the advanced key. Yes Replace the advanced key or repair the advanced key
— Is there rust on the advanced key battery battery terminal, then go to Step 21.
terminals (positive or negative)? No Go to the next step.
— Is there poor connection between the
terminals and battery?
11 x Inspect advanced key battery. Yes Go to Step 13.
x Is the battery voltage normal? No Go to the next step.
12 x Replace with a advanced key battery known Yes Replace the advanced key battery, and then go to Step 21.
to be good. No Replace the advanced key, and then go to Step 21.
properly?
13 x Inspect for the keyless receiver installation. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the bracket securely installed on the No Install the bracket securely, and then go to the next step.
keyless receiver?
14 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage at keyless receiver No x Inspect ROOM 15 A fuse.
terminal D? x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the fuse
x Is the voltage B+? block and the keyless receiver as necessary.
x Then go to Step 21.
15 x Measure the voltage at keyless receiver Yes Go to the next step.
terminal B? No x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the
x Is the voltage 1.0 V or less? ground wire and the keyless receiver as necessary.
x Re-tighten the ground wire as necessary.
16 x Disconnect the keyless receiver connector Yes Go to the next step.
(4-pin) and keyless control module connector No Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the keyless
(12-pin). control module and the keyless receiver, then go to the next
x Is there continuity between the following step.
terminals?
— Keyless receiver connector terminal C—
keyless control module connector terminal
2H
17 x Measure the voltage at the keyless control Yes Go to the next step.
module terminals 1B and 1E. No x Inspect for fuse.
— Terminal 1B:B+ x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the
— Terminal 1E: B+ keyless control module and the fuse block as necessary.
x Is the voltage as above? x Then go to the Step 21.
18 x Measure the voltage at keyless control Yes Go to the next step.
module terminal 1F, 3N, 4L? No x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the
x Is the voltage 1.0 V or less? ground wire and the keyless control module as
necessary.
x Then go to the Step 21.
19 x Measure the following BCM terminal voltage. Yes x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring harness
(See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE between keyless control module terminal 2F terminal
(BCM) INSPECTION.) and BCM terminal 6J.
x Are terminal voltages normal? — If the wiring harness is not normal, repair or replace
— Driver’s door closed: 1.0 V or less malfunctioning part. Then go to Step 21.
(Terminal 8B) — If the wiring harness is normal, go to the next step.
— Driver’s door opened: Wave pattern x Then go to Step 21.
(Terminal 8B) No x Inspect suspect door latch switch or liftgate/trunk lid.
— Passenger’s door closed: 1.0 V or less x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring harness
(Terminal 8D) between suspect switch and BCM.
— Passenger’s door opened: Wave pattern x Then go to Step 21.
(Terminal 8D)
— Left rear door closed: 1.0 V or less
(Terminal 8H)
— Left rear door opened: Wave pattern
(Terminal 8H)
— Right rear door closed: 1.0 V or less
(Terminal 8F)
— Right rear door opened: Wave pattern
(Terminal 8F)
— Liftgate/trunk lid closed: B+ (Terminal 6C)
— Liftgate/trunk lid opened: 1.0 V or less
(Terminal 6C)
— The auxiliary key is inserted in the ignition
switch: B+ (Terminal 3U)
— The auxiliary key is not inserted in the
ignition switch: 1.0 V or less (Terminal
3U)
20 x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminals Yes x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the BCM
7K, 7I and 7M while operating the and the door lock actuator.
transmitter. x Inspect for door lock actuator.
— Lock all doors with the advanced key: 1.0 x Then go to the next step.
V or less o B+ o 1.0 V or less (terminal No x Replace the BCM.
7I) (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
— Double lock all doors with the advanced REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
key: 1.0 V or less o B+ o 1.0 V or less x Then go to the next step.
(terminal 7M)
— Unlock all doors and liftgate with the
advanced key: 1.0 V or less o B+ o 1.0
V or less (terminal 7K)
x Is the voltage as above?
21 x Does the keyless entry system operate Yes Troubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to the
properly? customers.
No Re-inspect the malfunction symptoms, then repeat form
Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
End Of Sie
NO.2 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
2 Advanced keyless entry function inoperative

x Cannot door lock with door lock request switch
DESCRIPTION x Cannot door unlock with door unlock touch sensor
x Cannot liftgate/trunk lid open with liftgate/trunk lid opener switch
x Malfunction in advanced key battery or advanced key
x Malfunction in the keyless control module
x Malfunction in the door lock request switch
x Open or short circuit in wiring between lock request switch and keyless control module
x Malfunction in the door unlock touch sensor
x Open or short circuit in wiring between unlock touch sensor and keyless control module
x Malfunction in the keyless receiver
x Open or short circuit in wiring between keyless receiver and keyless control module
x Malfunction in the keyless antenna
x Malfunction in the lock link switch
x Open circuit in wiring between lock link switch and keyless control module
POSSIBLE
x Malfunction in door latch switch or trunk lid/liftgate latch switch
CAUSE
x Open or short circuit in wiring between trunk lid/liftgate opener switch and BCM
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between door latch switch and BCM
x Malfunction in liftgate/trunk lid opener switch
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between liftgate/trunk lid opener switch and BCM
x Keyless antenna (exterior) malfunction
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless antenna (exterior) and keyless control module
x Malfunction in door lock actuator
x Open or short circuit in wiring between door lock actuator and BCM
x Malfunction in the BCM
x Poor connection of connector, terminal damage
x Wrong usage
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
BCM
7O 7M 7K 7I 7G 7E 7C 7A
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
7P 7N 7L 7J 7H 7F 7D 7B
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B
1 x Retrieve the advanced keyless entry and Yes Go to the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedures.
push button start system DTC using the M- (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
MDS. AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Are there DTC displayed? No Go to the next step.
2 x Did the customer attempt to operate each Yes Go to the next step.
front doors and liftgate/trunk lid using the No x Inspect the advanced keyless system operations using
touch sensor? the request switch.
x If the advanced keyless system is inoperative, then go to
the next step.
3 x Prepare the followings: Yes The system is normal.
— All doors and trunk lid/liftgate closed Explain the advanced keyless system operation.
— Switch the ignition to off. (without ACC No Go to the next step.
and IG ON position)
— Make sure that the advanced key is within
the advanced keyless system operative
area (within 80 cm {2.6 ft} from front
door)
— The auxiliary key is inserted in the ignition
switch.
x Does the advanced keyless system operate
properly?
4 x Confirm the problem using another electrical Yes Go to Step 6.
key. No Go to the next step.
x Is the same problem remained?
5 x Lock and unlock operation using advanced Yes Replace the electrical key.
key button that has problem. (internal malfunction)
x Are the lock and unlock operations properly? No Replace the electrical key battery, then go to Step 29.
6 x Verify that the trouble occurred condition. Yes Go to Step 8
x Is the problem occurred lock operation only? No Go to the next step.
7 x Verify that the trouble occurred condition. Yes Go to Step 15.
x Is the problem occurred unlock operation No Go to Step 21.
only?
8 x Monitor the following keyless control module Yes Go to the next step.(WGN)
PIDs using the M-MDS. Go to Step 13.(5HB, 4SD)
— REQ_SW_R (RF lock request switch) No Go to Step 10.
— REQ_SW_L (LF lock request switch)
x Are PIDs indicated properly?
Specification
Switch pushed: ON
Other: OFF
9 x Measure the voltage at the keyless control Yes Go to Step 13.
module terminal 3D. No Go to the next step.
Specification
Liftgate request switch is pushed: 1.0 V or
less
Others: B+
10 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes x Repair or replace wiring harness for short to GND
x Disconnect the keyless control module (30- circuit.
pin) door handle (incorrect PID value at Step x Then go to Step 29.
8 and request switch (liftgate)(incorrect No Go to the next step.
voltage at Step 9) connectors.
x Verify continuity between suspect door
handle harness-side connector terminal D
and GND.
x Verify continuity between request switch
(liftgate) terminal B and GND.
11 x Keyless control module and handle switch Yes Go to the next step.
and request switch (liftgate) disconnected. No x Repair or replace for open circuit.
x Verify continuity between door handle x Then go to Step 29.
connector terminal D and following keyless
control module terminal at each harness-
side connector.
— Terminal 3U for right-side door handle
— Terminal 3X for left-side door handle
x Verify continuity between request switch
(liftgate) terminal B and keyless control
module terminal 3D.(WGN)
12 x Handle switch disconnected. Yes x Replace suspect door handle.
x Verify continuity between suspect door (See 09-14-10 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
handle harness-side connector terminal A INSTALLATION)
and GND. x Then go to Step 29.
x Is there continuity? No x Repair or replace wiring harness for open circuit.
13 x Monitor the following BCM PIDs using the M- Yes x Go to the next step.
MDS. No x Inspect suspect door latch switch and wiring harness.
— TR/LG—SW (Liftgate latch switch) (See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH
— DRSW—RR (Right rear door latch switch) INSPECTION.)
— DRSW—LR (Left rear door latch switch) (See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH
— DRSW—P (Passenger’s door latch INSPECTION.)
switch) (See 09-14-54 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH
— DRSW—D (Driver’s door latch switch) INSPECTION.)
x Are PIDs indicated properly? (See 09-14-67 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
x Repair or replace as necessary.
14 x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminals 7I Yes x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the BCM
and 7M while the lock door using the lock and the door lock actuator.
request switch. x Inspect for door lock actuator.
— Lock all doors with the advanced key: 1.0 x Then go to Step 29.
V or less o B+ o 1.0 V or less (terminal No x Replace the BCM.
7I) (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
— Double lock all doors with the advanced REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
key: 1.0 V or less o B+ o 1.0 V or less x Then go to Step 29.
(terminal 7M)
15 x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminals Yes x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the BCM
7K and 7M while the unlock door using the and the door lock actuator.
unlock request switch. x Inspect for door lock actuator.
— Unlock all doors and liftgate with the x Then go to Step 29.
advanced key:1.0 V or less o B+ o 1.0 No Go to the next Step.
V or less
16 x Monitor the following keyless control module Yes Go to the next Step.
PIDs using the M-MDS. No Inspect the door lock link switch, replace it as necessary.
— LOCK_SW_D (door lock link switch) x Door lock link switch
x Are PIDs indicated properly? x Verify continuity between door lock link switch connector
Specification terminal J and keyless control module terminal 3P at
Driver's door: LOCK: Lock each harness-side connector
Driver's door: UNLOCK: Unlock
x Disconnect the door handle connector of the circuit.
malfunctioning door from the keyless control x Then go to Step 29.
module (30-pin) connector. No Go to the next step.
x Verify continuity between suspect door
handle harness-side connector terminal C
and GND.
18 x Keyless control module and handle switch Yes Go to the next step.
disconnected. No x Repair or replace for open circuit.
x Verify continuity between door handle x Then go to Step 29.
connector terminal C and following keyless
control module terminal at each harness-
side connector.
— Terminal 3H for right-side door handle
— Terminal 3Q for left-side door handle
19 x Handle switch disconnected. Yes Go to the next step.
x Verify continuity between suspect door No x Repair or replace wiring harness for open circuit.
handle harness-side connector terminal F x Re-tighten the ground wire as necessary.
and GND. x Then go to Step 29.
20 x Switch the outer handle of the malfunctioning Yes x Replace suspect door handle.
door with the outer handle of the door on the (See 09-14-10 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
opposite side (or a normal outer handle): INSTALLATION.)
Connecting only the connectors is sufficient. x Then go to Step 29.
x Verify the malfunction symptom. No x Replace the BCM.
x Does the malfunction recur on the door on (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
the opposite side? (Is the source of the REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
malfunction determined?) x Then go to Step 29.
21 x Verify that the liftgate/trunk lid open function. Yes Go to Step 25.
x Is the liftgate/trunk lid open with liftgate/trunk No Go to the next step.
lid opener switch?
22 x Measure the voltage at the keyless control Yes Go to Step 27.
module terminal 3G. No Go to the next step.
Specification
Liftgate/trunk lid opener switch is
pushed: 3.0 V
Others: 4.7 V
x Disconnect the keyless control module (30- circuit.
pin) and liftgate/trunk lid opener switch x Then go to Step 29.
x Verify continuity between liftgate/trunk lid
opener switch harness-side connector
terminal A and GND.
24 x Keyless control module and opener switch Yes x Inspect the liftgate/trunk lid opener switch, replace it as
disconnected. necessary.
x Verify continuity between liftgate/trunk lid — If normal, inspect following parts and repair or replace
opener switch terminal A and following as necessary.
keyless control module terminal 3G at each x Liftgate latch and actuator
harness-side connector. x Trunk lid latch and actuator
x Is there continuity? x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between
liftgate/trunk lid latch and BCM.
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between
liftgate/trunk lid actuator and BCM.
No x Repair or replace for open circuit.
25 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace for short to GND, then go to Step 29.
x Disconnect the keyless control module and No Go to the next step.
suspect exterior keyless antenna connector.
x Verify continuity between following suspect
keyless antenna harness-side connector
terminal and GND.
— Door handle terminal B (exterior LH/RH)
— Door handle terminal E (exterior LH/RH)
— Keyless antenna (exterior rear) terminal C
— Keyless antenna (exterior rear) terminal D
26 x Replace the suspect exterior keyless Yes Replace the suspect exterior keyless antenna, then go to
antenna to other keyless antenna (interior Step 29.
rear, other side door handle) temporarily. (See 09-14-10 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
— If the symptom is occurring while the front INSTALLATION.)
outer handle switch operates, replace to (See 09-14-106 KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/
the other side front outer handle with INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
connector is connected. PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— If the symptom is occurring while the No Go to the next step.
liftgate request switch operates, replace to
the keyless antenna (interior rear) with
connector is connected.
x Verify the malfunction symptom.
x Is the symptom solved?
x Disconnect the BCM (16-pin) and keyless circuit.
control module (12-pin) connectors. x Then go to Step 29.
x Verify continuity between keyless control No Go to the next step.
module harness-side connector terminal 2F
and GND.
28 x BCM (16-pin) and keyless control module Yes x Replace the keyless control module.
(12-pin) connectors disconnected. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Verify continuity between BCM connector REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
terminal 6J and keyless control module ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
terminal 2F at each harness-side connector. x Then go to the next step.
x Is there continuity? No x Repair or replace wiring harness for open circuit.
x Then go to the next step.
29 x Does the keyless entry system operate Yes Troubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to the
properly? customers.
No Re-inspect the malfunction symptoms, then repeat form
Step 1 if malfunction recurs.
End Of Sie
NO.3 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
3 Push button start system does not operate

x Cannot switch to ACC or IG ON
DESCRIPTION
x Engine does not start
x Advanced key battery malfunction (battery power depleted)
x Advanced key malfunction
x Open or short circuit in keyless control module power supply
x EGI fuse, STEERING LOCK fuse or ROOM fuse malfunction
x Front keyless antenna malfunction
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between front keyless antenna and keyless control module
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between push button start switch and keyless control module
x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE
x Engine starting system malfunction
CAUSE
x Short to power supply in starter relay wiring harness
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and steering lock unit
x Relay block (ACC relay, IG1 relay, IG2 relay) malfunction
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between relay block (ACC relay, IG1 relay, IG2 relay) and keyless
control module
x CAN system malfunction
x Effect of after-market electronic device installation
x Mechanical catching of steering lock (system is normal)
WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR
2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
1E 1C 1A
1F 1D 1B 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
1 x Verify that the advanced keyless entry Yes Go to the next step.
system is operating. No Go to applicable malfunction diagnostic procedure.
x Is the advanced keyless entry system (See 09-03D-1 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
operating normally? [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM].)
2 x Move the steering wheel slightly while Yes System is normal.
pressing the push button start.
x Does the steering lock release and the push Note
button start operate? x Depending on the steering wheel position, the
steering lock mechanism could catch due to spring
force from the tires.
3 x Measure the voltage at keyless control Yes Go to the next step.
module terminal 1D and 1E. No Inspect the condition of the EGI fuse STEERING LOCK fuse
x Is the voltage B+? or ROOM fuse
If the fuse is broken:
x Replace the suspect fuse.
If the ROOM fuse is burnt out:
x After repairing for a short to ground in the wiring harness
between battery + terminal and keyless control module
terminal 1D, replace the ROOM fuse.
If the EGI fuse is burnt out:
x After repairing for a short to ground in the wiring harness
terminal 1E, replace the EGI fuse.
x Repair for an open circuit to the wiring harness between
the battery+ terminal and keyless control module
terminal 1B.
If the fuse is normal:
the battery + terminal and keyless control module
terminal 1D.
the battery + terminal and keyless control module
terminal 1E.
If the STEERING LOCK fuse is burnt out:
x After replacing for a short to ground in wiring harness
terminal 1B, replace the STEERING LOCK fuse.
After repair procedure, go to Step 14.
4 Note Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
x If the malfunction is the ignition not (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
switching to ACC or IG ON, switch to IG AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
ON using the M-MDS and the forced IG- No Go to the next step.
ON function. If the FAIL is displayed on the M-MDS, inspect for open
x If the M-MDS forced IG-ON function circuit between connector terminal 2G, 2I on the keyless
cannot be used, Inspect and repair for control module vehicle wiring harness and DLC-2.
keyless control module terminals 1B, 1C,
2L, 4A and 4E related harnesses. Reset
Step 4.
x Verify the keyless control module DTCs

using the M-MDS.
x Can DTCs be verified?
5 x Has a non-standard electronic device been Yes Go to the next step.
installed? No Go to Step 7.
— Cellular phone
— Part with built-in micro computer
— TV
6 x Disconnect all non-standard electronic Yes System is normal.
device connectors and start the engine. Explain to the customer that the effects of installed non-
x Does the engine start? standard electronic devices is the reason for the non-
operation.
7 x Press the push button start with brake pedal Yes x Inspect or repair the front keyless antenna and related
(ATX)/clutch pedal (MTX) is depressed. wiring harness connectors.
x Verify condition of push button start warning x Inspect or repair for open or short circuit in the wiring
light (red). harness between keyless control module terminal 2H
x Does the push button start system warning and keyless receiver terminal C.
light (red) flash? x After repair procedure, go to Step 14.
8 x Disconnect the keyless control module Yes Go to Step 11.
connector. No Go to the next step.
x Verify the continuity between following
keyless control module harness side
connector terminal and GND.
— Terminal 2J
— Terminal 2K
x Is the continuity changing according to the
push button start status?
— While push button start is pressed:
continuity
— While push button start is not pressed: not
continuity
x Disconnect the push button start connector. No x Inspect the following and repair or replace the
x Verify the continuity between connector malfunctioning location.
terminal I on the push start switch vehicle — Wiring harness between push button start and ground
wiring harness side and ground. (open circuit).
x Can continuity be verified? — Ground point (looseness, bad contact)
x If there is no malfunction, replace the push button start.
x After repair procedure, go to Step 14.
10 x Switch the ignition to off. (PUSH BUTTON Yes x Repair for a short to ground in the wiring harness
START CIRCUIT INSPECTION (SHORT TO between the push button start and the keyless control
GROUND CIRVIT)). module.
x Leave the push button start connector x After repair procedure, go to Step 14.
disconnected. No Go to the next step.
connector (12-pin).
connector terminals on the push button start
vehicle wiring harness side and ground.
— Terminal A
— Terminal B
x Can continuity be verified?
x Disconnect the steering lock unit connector. No x Inspect the following and repair or replace the
terminal H of the steering lock unit on the — Wiring harness between steering lock unit terminal H
vehicle wiring harness side and ground. and ground (open circuit)
12 x Perform engine starting procedure. Yes Go to the next step.
x Verify the system switching related to the No Perform engine control system symptom troubleshooting in
push button start operation. “No.3 Engine does not start”.
x Does the system switch as follows:
OFFoACCoIG1oOFF?
13 x Monitor the following keyless control module Yes x Replace the keyless control module
PIDs using the M-MDS: (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
MTX vehicles REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
— SHIFT_N (Neutral switch) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— CLUTCH_SW (Clutch switch) x After replacement, go to the next step.
ATX vehicles No x Inspect and repair parts and wiring harnesses which are
— SHIFT_P (P position signal) not correctly displayed.
— BRAKE_SW2 (Brake switch) x After repair, go to the next step.
x Are the PID values correctly indicated for
each switch operation?
14 x Does the push button start operate correctly? Yes Troubleshooting completed.
Explain the contents of the servicing to the customer.
No If the malfunction has not been resolved, repeat the
inspection from Step 1.
NO.4 AFTER ENGINE START, ELECTRICAL DEVICES DO NOT OPERATE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
4 After engine start, electrical devices do not operate

x Possible cause related to non-operation of electrical devices (such as blower motor, rear wiper) with
DESCRIPTION
ignition switched to IG ON (IG2), after engine start
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between battery and relay block (IG2 relay) and each part
x Fuse burnt out (short to ground in related wiring harness)
POSSILBLE
x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and relay block (IG2 relay)
CAUSES
x Block relay (IG2 relay) malfunction (stuck open)
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
1 x Do the electrical devices operate with the Yes Go to the next step.
ignition is switched to ACC, IG ON (IG1)? No Go to symptom troubleshooting procedure “No.3 Push
button start does not operate”.
2 x Disconnect the keyless control module Yes Replace the keyless control module.
connector. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
x Connect battery positive voltage to the INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
following connector terminal on the keyless PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
control module vehicle wiring harness side. After replacement, go to Step 7.
— Terminal 4H (IG2) No Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage of the following
connector terminal on the keyless control
module vehicle wiring harness side.
— Terminal 4X (IG2)
3 x Leave the keyless control module connector Yes Go to the next step.
disconnected. No After repairing for an open circuit in the wiring harness, go to
x Disconnect the relay block connector. Step 7.
connector terminals on the vehicle wiring
harness side:
— Between keyless control module terminal
4X and relay block terminal 1C (6-pin)
(IG2 monitor).
4H and relay block terminal 2A (8-pin)
(IG2 relay primary power supply).
4 x Leave the relay block connector Yes Go to the next step.
disconnected. No Repair for an open circuit in the wiring harness.
x Verify the continuity between connector Inspect and repair the ground point.
terminal 2C (8-pin) on the relay block vehicle After repair procedure, go to Step 7.
wiring harness side and ground.
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal Step 7.
1A (6-pin) and terminal 1E (6-pin) on the
relay block vehicle wiring harness side.
6 x Inspect the relay block. Yes x Replace the keyless control module.
(See 09-21-11 RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Is the relay block normal? x After replacement, go to the next step.
No Replace the relay block, then go to the next step.
7 x Do the electrical devices (such as blower Yes Troubleshooting completed.
motor, rear wiper) operate normally after Explain the contents of the servicing to the customer.
starting the engine? No If the malfunction has not been resolved, repeat the
End Of Sie
NO.5 ELECTRONIC STEERING MECHANISM DOES NOT OPERATE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
5 Electronic steering mechanism does not operate

DESCRIPTION x Steering does not lock during system IG OFF, door lock, door open/close
x EGI fuse STEERING LOCK fuse malfunction
x Open/short circuit in wiring harness between battery + terminal and keyless control module
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and steering lock unit
x Connector connection malfunction
POSSIBLE x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and ABS CM, DSC CM
CAUSES x Open circuit in wiring harness between door lock link switch and keyless control module
x Open circuit in wiring harness between keyless control module and ground
x Communication error between keyless control module and ABS CM, DSC CM
x ABS CM, DSC CM malfunction
2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
1E 1C 1A
1F 1D 1B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
BCM
1 x Verify that the advanced keyless entry and Yes Go to the next step.
push button start system is operating. No Go to applicable malfunction diagnostic procedure.
x Is the advanced keyless entry and push (See 09-03D-1 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
button start system operating normally? [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM].)
2 x Does the system switch to ACC and IG-ON Yes Go to the next step.
(IG1)? No Go to symptom troubleshooting procedure “No.3 Push
button start does not operate”.
3 x Verify the keyless control module DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
x Can DTCs be verified? AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
If the FAIL is displayed on the M-MDS, inspect for open
circuit between connector terminal 2G, 2I on the keyless
control module vehicle wiring harness and DLC-2.
x Disconnect the keyless control system No After repairing or replacing for an open circuit in the wiring
connector. harness, go to Step 18.
x Verify the continuity between connector
terminal 1F on the keyless control module
vehicle wiring harness side and ground.
disconnected. No After repairing or replacing for an open circuit in the wiring
x Switch the ignition to off. harness, go to Step 18.
x Disconnect the ABS CM, DSC CM
connector.
x Verify continuity at the following harness-side
connector terminals:
4S and BCM terminal 6K
— Between ABS CM, DSC CM terminal AF
and BCM terminal 1E
6 x Does the engine stop normally? Yes Go to the next step.
No Go to Step 9.
7 x Lock the doors using the advanced keyless Yes Go to the next step.
entry mechanism. No Go to Step 12.
x Does the steering lock mechanism lock?
8 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes After repairing or replacing for intermittent connection
x Change the door condition (OpenoClose, malfunctions of the following part connectors and
CloseoOpen) malfunction areas, go to Step 18.
x Does the steering lock mechanism lock? x Keyless control module
x BCM
x Electronic steering lock unit
No Go to Step 17.
9 x Monitor the instrument cluster PID SPDMTR Yes Go to Step 11.
using the M-MDS data monitor function. No Go to the next step.
x Is the monitor value when the vehicle is
stopped 0 km/h?
10 x Monitor the following PIDs concerning the Yes Go to the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
ABS (ABS equipped vehicles) and DSC “Speedometer indication malfunction”.
(DSC equipped vehicle) CM using the M- No Inspect the ABS wheel-speed sensor.
MDS data monitor function. (See 04-13-7 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
— WSPD_LF INSPECTION.)
— WSPD_LR (See 04-13-10 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
— WSPD_RF INSPECTION.)
— WSPD_RR After inspection and repair, go to Step 18.
x Does the monitor value agree with the
vehicle driving conditions?
11 x Verify the keyless control module PID Yes Replace the steering lock unit, then go to Step 18.
LOCK_SW_D (door lock signal) using the M- (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
MDS data monitor function. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Is the monitor value linked to the door lock ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
condition? No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the keyless control module, No After repairing or replacing for an open circuit in the wiring
BCM, and door lock link switch connectors. harness, go to Step 18.
harness side:
3P and door lock link switch terminal D.
— Between BCM terminal 8G and door lock
link switch terminal D
13 x Leave the keyless control module, BCM, Yes x After repairing or replacing for an open circuit in the
door lock link switch connectors wiring harness, go to Step 18.
disconnected. x Between keyless control module terminal 3P and door
x Verify the continuity between connector lock link switch terminal D.
terminal 3P of the keyless control module on x Between BCM terminal 8G and door lock link switch
the vehicle wiring harness side and ground. terminal D
x Is there continuity? No Go to the next step.
14 x Leave the keyless control module, BCM, Yes x After repairing or replacing for an open circuit in the
door lock link switch connectors wiring harness, go to Step 18.
disconnected. x Between keyless control module terminal 3P and door
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal lock link switch terminal D.
3P on the keyless control module vehicle x Between BCM terminal 8G and door lock link switch
wiring harness side. terminal D
x Is the voltage 1.0 V or more? No Go to the next step.
15 x Leave the door lock link switch connector Yes Go to the next step.
disconnected. No x Inspect the following and repair or replace the
terminal J on the door lock link switch vehicle — Wiring harness between connector terminal J of the
wiring harness side and ground. door lock link switch vehicle wiring harness side
x Is there continuity? (open circuit).
— Ground point (looseness, bad contact)
16 x Inspect the door lock-link switch. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-14-44 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH No Replace the door lock-link switch.
INSPECTION.) After replacement, go to Step 18.
x Is the door lock-link switch normal?
17 x Leave the keyless control module and BCM Yes After repairing or replacing for a short to the power supply
connectors disconnected. wiring harness, go to Step 16.
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal No Replace the keyless control module.
2F on the keyless control module vehicle (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
wiring harness side. INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
x Is the voltage 1.0 V or more? PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
18 x Is the electronic steering lock operating Yes Troubleshooting completed.
normally? Explain the contents of the servicing to the customer.
End Of Sie
NO.6 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM DOES NOT TURN OFF (IG OFF) [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
6 Push button start system does not turn off (IG OFF)
x Engine does not turn off even if engine shut off operation is perform
x Electrical devices continue to operate after engine is turned off
DESCRIPTION x Dead battery
x Engine does not turn off even if the emergency engine stop (continuously pressing the push button start
or quickly pressing it any number of items) is performed
x Communication error between keyless control module and ABS, DSC CM
x Relay block (ACC relay) malfunction
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block (ACC relay) and keyless control module
x Block relay (IG1 relay) malfunction
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block (IG1 relay) and keyless control module
POSSIBLE
x Block relay (IG2 relay) malfunction
CAUSES
x Short to power supply in wiring harness between relay block (IG2 relay) and keyless control module
x ABS, DSC CM malfunction
x Open circuit in wiring harness between push button start and keyless control module
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
1 x Verify the keyless control module DTCs Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
using the M-MDS. (See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
x Can DTCs be verified? AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
2 x Perform engine stop operation. Yes Go to Step 8.
x Does the engine stop normally? No Go to the next step.
3 x Connect the M-MDS to the DLC-2 connector. Yes Go to Step 6.
x Monitor the keyless control module PID No Go to the next step.
PUSH_ST1, and PUSH_ST2.
x Operate the push button start.
x Does the PID display change according to
the push button start status?
— While push button start is pressed: ON
— While push button start is not pressed:
OFF
x Disconnect the push button start connector. No x Inspect the following and repair or replace the
terminal I on the push start switch vehicle — Wiring harness between push button start and ground
wiring harness side and ground. (open circuit).
x If there is no malfunction, replace the push button start.
After repair procedure, go to Step 13.
5 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes x Repair for a short to ground in the wiring harness
x Leave the push button start connector between the push button start and the keyless control
disconnected. module.
x Disconnect the keyless control module x After repair procedure, go to Step 13.
connector (12-pin). No x Replace the push button start.
x Verify the continuity between the following (See 09-21-8 PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/
connector terminals on the push button start INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
vehicle wiring harness side and ground. AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— Terminal A x After replacement, go to Step 13.
— Terminal B
6 x Monitor the instrument cluster PID SPDMTR Yes Go to Step 8.
using the M-MDS data monitor function. No Go to the next step.
x Is the monitor value when the vehicle is
stopped 0 km/h?
7 x Monitor the following PIDs concerning the Yes Go to the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
ABS (ABS equipped vehicles) and DSC “Speedometer indication malfunction”.
(DSC equipped vehicle) CM using the M- No Inspect the ABS wheel-speed sensor.
MDS data monitor function. (See 04-13-7 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
— WSPD_LF INSPECTION.)
— WSPD_LR (See 04-13-10 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
— WSPD_RR After inspection and repair, go to Step 13.
x Does the monitor value agree with the
vehicle driving conditions?
8 x Disconnect the keyless control module Yes Replace the keyless control module.
connector. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
x Connect battery positive voltage to the INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
following connector terminals on the keyless PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
control module vehicle wiring harness side. After replacement, go to Step 13.
— Terminal 4F (ACC) No Go to the next step.
— Terminal 4E (IG1)
— Terminal 4H (IG2)
x Measure the voltage of the following
connector terminals on the keyless control
module vehicle wiring harness side.
— Terminal 2A (ACC)
— Terminal 2C (IG1)
— Terminal 4X (IG2)
x Disconnect the relay block connector. Step 13.
harness side:
4F and relay block terminal 2E (8-pin)
(ACC relay primary power supply).
4E and relay block terminal 2G (8-pin)
(IG1relay primary power supply).
4H and relay block terminal 2A (8-pin)
(IG2 relay primary power supply).
disconnected. No Repair the open circuit in the wiring harness.
x Verify the continuity between connector Inspect and repair the ground point.
terminal 2C on the relay block vehicle wiring After repair procedure, go to Step 13.
harness side and ground.
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal Step 13.
1A (6-pin) and terminal 1E (6-pin) on the
relay block vehicle wiring harness side.
13 x Inspect the relay block. Yes x Replace the keyless control module.
(See 09-21-11 RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Is the relay block normal? x After replacement, go to the next step.
No Replace the relay block, then go to the next step.
14 x Is the electronic steering lock operating Yes Troubleshooting completed.
normally? Explain the contents of the servicing to the customer.
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
09-03E SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03E–1 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [KEYLESS
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–5
DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY NO.1 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOES
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–2 NOT OPERATE NORMALLY [KEYLESS
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–6
ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–3 NO.2 ALL KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS
SHEET [KEYLESS ENTRY ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–8
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–3 NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS
INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–11
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03E–4
End of TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM Toc CHART [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

1 Keyless entry system does not x Malfunction in door lock linkage system, or (See 09-03E-6 NO.1 KEYLESS
operate normally BCM ENTRY SYSTEM DOES NOT
OPERATE NORMALLY [KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM].)
2 All keyless entry system functions (See 09-03E-8 NO.2 ALL KEYLESS
x Malfunction in BCM power supply circuit,
inoperative ENTRY SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
door latch switch circuit, BCM ground
INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY
circuit, or keyless receiver.
SYSTEM].)
3 Transmitter ID code cannot be x Malfunction in transmitter battery, (See 09-03E-11 NO.3
reprogrammed transmitter, keyless receive bracket, TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT
keyless receive bracket ground screw, or BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS
BCM circuit. keyless receive circuit. ENTRY SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
B+
D/L 30 A FUSE
8F
4C
WITHOUT DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM DOOR LATCH
SWITCH (RR)
DOOR 8H
M (DRIVER- M
DOOR LATCH
DOOR (RR) SIDE)
SWITCH (LR)
DOOR 8D
M (PASSEN
M
GER- DOOR LATCH SWITCH
DOOR (LR) (PASSENGER-SIDE)
SIDE)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR 8B

DOOR LATCH
WITH DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM SWITCH
(DRIVER-SIDE)
7K POSITION MEMORY
DOOR (RR) DOOR
M CONTROL MODULE
(DRIVER- M
SIDE)
DOOR B+ B+
M DOOR (LR) M
(PASSEN
STOP 5 A HORN 15 A
GER-
FUSE FUSE
SIDE)
7I
7M HORN RELAY
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
1G
HORN
7C
TRUNK LID LATCH
4SD M AND LOCK VEHICLES WITHOUT INTRUDER SENSOR
ACTUATOR
B+
B+
KEYLESS
6J
7C RECIEVER
LIFTGATE AUTO
LIFTGATE CLOSURE BCM
5HB LATCH M
CONTROL
AND LOCK
MOTOR MODULE 6L
7B
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH (DRIVER-SIDE)
8G
7C 8E
LIFTGATE
WGN LATCH AND
M
DRIVER-SIDE DOOR
LOCK
ACTUATOR
LOCK-LINK SWITCH
7B
8C
CAN H
6D
CAN H DOOR LOCK-LINK
3S SWITCH (RR)
CAN RELATED
MODULE
CAN L
3P
CAN L DOOR LOCK-LINK
6B
SWITCH (LR)
VEHICLES WITH INTRUDER SENSOR
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
B+ (PASSENGER-SIDE)
INTRUDER
1S
SENSOR
B+ 6F BONNET LATCH
SWITCH
6H WITH THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

THEFT-DETERRENT
SIREN
End Of Sie
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
x The keyless entry system is controlled by the BCM.
x “All locks” includes the trunk lid/liftgate.
x Go to troubleshooting after identifying the specific malfunction by doing a keyless entry system preliminary
inspection.
Flowchart
START
Interview customer using keyless

entry system check sheet
Keyless entry system

preliminary inspection
Troubleshooting
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK SHEET [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

x Use the sheet below as a customer interview sheet when accepting a vehicle for service.
x If the symptom is “Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter at all,” find out how the customer
uses the keyless entry system by following the check sheet below.
Perform the following inspection with customer.

Q1. What's the customer's complaint?
Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter (door does not lock/unlock).
Other
Q2. Is system factory-installed or after-market?

Factory-installed system
GO to Q3.
After-market system
Perform troubleshooting according to after-market keyless entry system manual.
Q3. Operate transmitter with customer from 2.5 m {8.2 ft} away from center of vehicle. (Make sure the ignition
key is either in the LOCK position or removed.)
Does keyless entry system work?
Yes
Explain the following to the customer.
Keyless entry system does not work when ignition key in key cylinder.
Keyless entry system does not work form excessive distances (more than 2.5 m {8.2 ft} away from
center of vehicle).
No
Go to Q4.
Q4. Check location where customer uses keyless entry system.

Does a particular area, such as being near TV towers, power plants, power lines, or factories, have an
effect on malfunction?
Yes Place
Area of operation is bad. Explain effect of outside interference on transmitter to customer.
No
Go to Q5.
Q5. Make sure there are no after-market electrical parts installed on vehicle.
Are there any of the following present?
Cellular phone
Radio-wave equipment
Remote engine starter
TV, etc.
Yes Parts
No
Perform the keyless entry system preliminary inspection.
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
Note
x “All doors” includes the trunk lid/liftgate.
START
Remove the key from the steering lock.

Close all doors.
Do all doors lock/unlock when the driver fs door lock knob is operated?
Yes No
No Do all doors lock/unlock when No

Was the procedure performed properly?
the transmitter is operated?
Yes Yes
No
Does the hazard warning light flash? Perform symptom troubleshooting No.1.
Yes
Perform symptom troubleshooting

No.2 or No.3.
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
x Perform the following preliminary inspection before troubleshooting.
1 x Is system an after-market one? Yes Perform troubleshooting according to after-market keyless
entry system manual.
No Go to next step.
2 x Did customer activate keyless entry system Yes Go to next step.
when ignition is switched to off? No x Explain to customer that system does not work when
ignition is key in key cylinder.
x Switch the ignition to off, then go to next step.
3 x Did customer use keyless entry system in Yes Attempt to lock/unlock doors with transmitter in
particular area, such as being near TV non-interference area.
towers, power plants, power lines, or If system operates:
factories? x Area of operation is bad. Explain effect of outside
interference on transmitter to customer.
If system does not operate:
x Go to next step.
No Go to next step.
4 x Are any of the following after-market Yes Disconnect after-market electrical part connectors and
electrical parts on the vehicle? attempt to lock/unlock doors with transmitter.
— Cellular phone If system operates:
— Radio-wave equipment x After-market electrical parts are interfering with keyless
— Remote engine starter entry system.
— TV, etc. If system does not operate:
x Go to next step.
No Go to next step.
5 x Reform the keyless entry system operation Yes Go to next step.
inspection. No x Go to Step 1 of NO. 1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD
(See 09-03E-4 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE.
OPERATION INSPECTION [KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM].)
x Does the keyless entry system function
work?
6 x Attempt to reprogram transmitter ID code. Yes System is normal now.
x Can transmitter ID code be reprogrammed? No Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting NO. 3 TRANSMITTER ID
CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED.
End Of Sie
NO.1 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
x When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, slightly shake the wiring harness and
connectors while performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any
intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, verify that the connectors, terminals and wiring harnesses are
connected correctly and undamaged.
1 Keyless entry system does not operate normally
DESCRIPTION x Malfunction in door lock linkage system, or BCM
x Malfunction in BCM power supply
— Open circuit in IG1 and/or B+ power supply circuit
— Open or short circuit in ground circuit
— BCM malfunction
x Malfunction in key reminder switch related circuit
— Key reminder switch malfunction
x Malfunction in door latch switch signal circuit
POSSIBLE
— Open or short circuit in wiring between BCM and door latch switch
CAUSE
— Door latch switch malfunction
x Malfunction in door lock/unlock signal circuit
— Door lock actuator malfunction
— Open or short circuit in wiring between BCM and door lock actuator
x Malfunction in turn light signal circuit
— BCM malfunction
— Open or short circuit wiring between BCM and each turn signal light
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A 2I 2G 2A
B
1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B 4E 4C 4A
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C 4F 4D 4B
1 INSPECT FOR MALFUNCTION IN BCM Yes Go to the next step.
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OR No Inspect the connection of the BCM connectors, and go to
ELSEWHERE Step 4.
x Did any of the following items operate during
the keyless entry system operation
inspection?
— All doors lock/unlock
— Hazard wiring light flashes
2 INSPECT FOR MALFUNCTION IN KEY Yes Go to the next step.
REMINDER SWITCH OR No Go to Step 9.
ELSEWHERE
x Did the following item operate during the
keyless entry system operation inspection?
— All doors lock/unlock
3 INSPECT FOR MALFUNCTION IN DOOR Yes Go to the next step.
LOCK ACTUATOR OR ELSEWHERE No Go to Step 11.
x Did the following item operate during the
keyless entry system operation inspection?
— Hazard warning light flashes
*4 INSPECT BCM POWER SUPPLY Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT No x Inspect for burnt fuse.
x Are the BCM power supply and voltage x Inspect the power supply system wiring harness for an
normal? open or short circuit.
— IG1 signal (terminal 3AB, 4A) x Then go to Step 14.
— B+ signal (terminal 2D, 2J, 4B, 4C)
*5 INSPECT BCM GROUND CIRCUIT Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the BCM ground voltage normal? No Inspect the ground system wiring harness for open circuit.
— 1.0V or less (terminal 1V, 2A) Then go to Step 14.
*6 INSPECT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
SIGNAL No x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring harness
x Monitor following BCM (door latch switch) between BCM and suspected door latch/trunk lid (4SD)/
PID using the M-MDS. liftgate (5HB) latch switch.
— TR/LG_SW (Trunk lid/liftgate latch switch) — If wiring harness is normal, inspect suspect door
— DRSW_P (Passenger’s door latch switch) latch/trunk lid (4SD)/liftgate (5HB) latch switch.
— DRSW_D (Driver’s door latch switch) (See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH
x Are monitored PID values normal? INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-67 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-54 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
— If wiring harness malfunction, repair or replace wiring
harness, then go to Step 14.
*7 INSPECT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
SIGNAL VOLTAGE No x Inspect the door latch switch.
x Are the wiring harness between the BCM x Inspect the door latch switch system wiring harness for a
and each door latch switch normal? (See 09- short circuit.
40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) x Then go to Step 14.
INSPECTION.)
— Inspect each terminal (8B, 8D, 8F, 8H)
under the following conditions.
x Door/trunk lid/liftgate closed: 1.0V or less
x Door/trunk lid/liftgate open: Wave pattern
8 INSPECT KEY REMINDER SWITCH Yes Replace the BCM.
x Is the key reminder switch normal? No Replace the key reminder switch, then go to Step 14.
ON: B+
OFF:1.0V or less
*9 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN DOOR Yes Go to the next step.
LOCK ACTUATOR, BCM GROUND No x Inspect the wiring harness between BCM and the door
CIRCUIT OR ELSEWHERE lock actuator for an open or short circuit.
x Measure the voltage at the BCM terminals x Inspect the door lock actuator.
7I, 7M and 7K while operating the x Then go to Step 14.
transmitter.
— All doors locked: 1.0 V or less o B+ o
1.0 V or less (Normal lock: 7I terminal)
(Double lock: 7M terminal)
— All doors unlocked: 1.0 V or less o B+ o
1.0 V or less (7K terminal)
10 INSPECT DOOR LOCK LINKAGE Yes Go to step 12.
x Operate the door lock knob and verify the No Inspect the door lock linkage then go to Step 14.
door locks and unlock manually.
x Does every door lock system work?
*11 INSPECT FOR MALFUNCTION IN THEFT- Yes Go to the next step.
DETERRENT SYSTEM OR No Go to step 13.
ELSEWHERE
x Is the theft-deterrent system equipped?
12 INSPECT BONNET SWITCH AND Yes Normal operation (Hazard warning light flashing on vehicles
TRUNK/LIFTGATE SIGNAL with theft-deterrent system operates in conjunction with
x Monitor following BCM PID using the M- theft-deterrent system).
— TR/LG_SW (Trunk lid/liftgate latch switch)
— HOOD_SW (Bonnet latch switch)
x Are monitored PID values ON (open)?
*13 INSPECT TURN LIGHT SIGNAL CIRCUIT Yes Verify the malfunction symptom again.
x Measure voltage at the BCM terminals 8I, 8J, No x Inspect the wiring harnesses between the BCM and
1P (right side turn signal), 8K, 8L and 1R (left each turn light for a short circuit.
side turn signal) while operating hazard and/ x Inspect each turn light.
or turn signal on. x If these items are normal, replace the BCM.
x Are the terminal voltages are alternated
between 1.0V or less and B+?
*14 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Troubleshooting completed.
AFTER REPAIR Explain repairs to the customer.
x Does the keyless entry system operate No Reinspect the malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step
properly? 1 if the malfunction recurs.
End Of Sie
NO.2 ALL KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
intermittent malfunctions. If there is a problem, verify that the connectors, terminals and wiring harnesses are
2 All on-board diagnostic functions inoperative
x Malfunction in BCM power supply circuit, door latch switch circuit, BCM ground circuit, or keyless
DESCRIPTION
receiver
x Malfunction in IG1 or power supply signal circuit of BCM
— BCM power supply fuse malfunction
— Malfunction in wiring harness between BCM power supply fuses and BCM
x Malfunction in door open/closed signal circuit of BCM
— Door latch switch system malfunction
POSSIBLE — BCM malfunction
CAUSE — Malfunction in wiring harness between BCM and door latch switch
x Malfunction in BCM GND signal circuit
— Malfunction in wiring harness between BCM and ground
x Malfunction in keyless receiver
— Keyless receiver malfunction
— Malfunction in wiring harness between keyless receiver and BCM
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A 2I 2G 2A 4E 4C 4A
1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 4F 4D 4B
KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
F E D C B A
1 INSPECT BCM POWER SUPPLY FUSES Yes Go to the next step.
x Are the BCM power supply fuses normal? No Install an appropriate amperage fuse.
2 INSPECT DOOR LATCH SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
INSTALLATION No Install the door latch switches securely, then go back to Step
x Are the door latch switches installed 5 of keyless entry system preliminary inspection.
securely?
*3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS (NO CONTINUITY No Repair the wiring harness between the fuse block and BCM,
BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND BCM) then go to Step 13.
OR ELSEWHERE
x Measure the voltage at the following BCM
terminals:
— IG1 signal (terminal 3AB, 4A)
— Power supply signal (terminal 2D, 2J, 4B,
4C)
*4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Repair the malfunctioning wiring harness, then go to Step
WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO 13.
POWER SUPPLY BETWEEN FUSE No Go to the next step.
BLOCK AND BCM, OR BETWEEN
BCM AND GROUND) OR
ELSEWHERE
x Measure the voltage at the following BCM
terminal (wiring harness-side):
— IG1 signal (terminal 3AB, 4A)
*5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS (NO CONTINUITY No Repair the wiring harness between the BCM and ground,
BETWEEN BCM AND GROUND) OR then go to Step 13.
ELSEWHERE
x Is there continuity between BCM terminal 1V,
2A and ground?
6 INSPECT DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL Yes Go to the next step.
x Monitor following BCM (door switch) PID No x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring harness
using the M-MDS. between BCM and suspected door latch/trunk lid (4SD)/
— TR/LG_SW (Trunk lid/liftgate latch switch) liftgate (5HB) latch switch.
— DRSW_P (Passenger’s door latch switch) — If wiring harness is normal, inspect suspect door
— DRSW_D (Driver’s door switch) latch/trunk lid (4SD)/liftgate (5HB) latch switch.
x Are monitored PID values normal? (See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
— If wiring harness malfunction, repair or replace wiring
harness, then go to Step 14.
7 INSPECT BCM OR WIRING HARNESS Yes Replace the BCM and reprogram the transmitter ID code,
(BETWEEN BCM AND DOOR LATCH then go to the next step.
SWITCHES FOR CONTINUITY) No Repair the wiring harness between the BCM and door latch
x Open all doors. switches, then go to the next step.
x Is there continuity between BCM terminals
8B, 8D, 8F, 8H and ground?
8 INSPECT POWER SUPPLY FUSE Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the keyless receiver power supply fuse No Inspect and repair short to GND in wiring harness at keyless
normal? receiver power supply circuit install an appropriate
amperage fuse, then go to step 13.
9 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS (NO CONTINUITY No Repair the wiring harness between the fuse block and
BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND keyless receiver, then go to Step 13.
KEYLESS RECEIVER) OR
ELSEWHERE
x Measure the voltage at the following keyless
receiver terminal:
— IG1 signal (terminal B)
WIRING HARNESS (NO CONTINUITY No Repair the wiring harness between the keyless receiver and
BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND ground, then go to Step 13.
GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
x Is there continuity between keyless receiver
terminal E and ground?
BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND BCM, then go to Step 13.
BCM) OR ELSEWHERE
x Disconnect the keyless receiver connector
and BCM connector.
terminals?
— 6J (BCM connector)—D (keyless receiver
connector)
12 INSPECT MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Troubleshooting completed.
KEYLESS RECEIVER OR BCM (Keyless receiver malfunction)
x Replace the keyless receiver. No Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
properly?
13 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Troubleshooting completed.
End Of Sie
NO.3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
3 Transmitter ID code cannot be reprogrammed

DESCRIPTION x Malfunction in transmitter battery, transmitter, BCM circuit, or keyless receiver circuit
POSSIBLE
x Malfunction in transmitter battery, transmitter, BCM, or keyless receiver
CAUSE
KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
F E D C B A
6O 6M 6K 6I 6G 6E 6C 6A
6P 6N 6L 6J 6H 6F 6D 6B
1 INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY Yes Go to the next step.
INSTALLATION AND TYPE No Properly install the battery or replace the battery with the
x Visually inspect the transmitter battery. specified battery (CR1620), and then go to Step 11.
x Are the below items correct?
— Transmitter battery installation (correct
polarity)
— Battery type: CR1620
2 INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY Yes Replace the transmitter battery or repair the transmitter
TERMINALS FOR RUST AND POOR battery terminal, then go to Step 11.
CONNECTION No Go to the next step.
x Visually inspect the transmitter.
— Is there rust on the transmitter battery
terminals (positive or negative)?
— Is there poor connection between the
terminals and battery?
3 INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the transmitter battery. No Replace the transmitter battery, then go to Step 11.
x Is the battery voltage normal?
4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the transmitter battery, then go to Step 11.
TRANSMITTER BATTERY OR No Go to the next step.
ELSEWHERE
x Replace with a transmitter battery known to
be good.
properly?
5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the transmitter and reprogram the transmitter ID
TRANSMITTER OR BCM code, then go to Step 11.
x Reprogram the transmitter ID code using No Go to the next step.
another known good transmitter.
properly?
6 INSPECT POWER SUPPLY FUSE Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the keyless receiver power supply fuse No Install an appropriate amperage fuse, then go to Step 11.
normal?
WIRING HARNESS (NO CONTINUITY No Repair the wiring harness between the fuse block and
BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND keyless receiver, then go to Step 11.
KEYLESS RECEIVER) OR
ELSEWHERE
x Measure the voltage at the following keyless
receiver terminal:
— Power supply signal (terminal B)
BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND ground, then go to Step 11.
GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
x Is there continuity between keyless receiver
terminal E and ground?
BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND BCM, then go to Step 11.
BCM) OR ELSEWHERE
x Disconnect the keyless receiver connector
and BCM connector.
terminals?
— 6J (BCM connector)—D (keyless receiver
connector)
10 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the BCM, then go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS (NO CONTINUITY No Replace the keyless receiver, then go to the next step.
BETWEEN KEYLESS RECEIVER AND
BCM) OR BCM
x Measure the voltage at keyless receiver
terminal D
— When transmitter operated:
x Any transmitter button is operated: 0.5
V
x Any transmitter button is operated: 3.5
V
11 REINSPECT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Troubleshooting completed.
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
09-03F SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART NO.1 SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03F–1 NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] . . . 09-03F–1
End of Toc SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]

1 The security light display is not normal 09-03F-1 NO.1 SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT
NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
End Of Sie
NO.1 SECURITY LIGHT DISPLAY IS NOT NORMAL [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
1 The security light display is not normal

x The security light remains illuminated 2 min or more after the ignition is switched to ON
x The security light does not illuminate when the ignition is switched to ON
DESCRIPTION
x The security light remains illuminated while the ignition is switched off
x The security light does not flash or the flashing interval is abnormal while the ignition is switched off
x Keyless control module malfunction (with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
Note
x If the security light remains illuminated for approx. 1 min after the ignition switch is turned to ON and
a DTC is displayed, perform the immobilizer system malfunction diagnosis according to that DTC.
(See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02C-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM)].)
x While performing the immobilizer system security access using the M-MDS, the security light does not
illuminate even if the ignition is switched to ON. Verify the illumination condition of the security light by
POSSIBLE
disconnecting the DLC-2 to release security access.
CAUSE
NOTE: SECURITY LIGHT FLASHING SEQUENCE
WHEN IGNITION IS SWITCHED TO OFF
(IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM IS NORMAL)
ILLUMINATED
APPROX.1.9 S APPROX.1.9 S
TURNS OFF
APPROX. 0.1 S
Note
x Normal operation of the security light is as follows. The light starts flashing every 2 s when the ignition is
switched from ON to ACC and the immobilizer system is armed. The light stops flashing when the ignition
is switched to ON with the correct ignition key. At this time, the immobilizer system is disarmed and the
security light illuminates for about 3 s and then goes out.
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
1 x Switch the ignition to ON. Yes Go to the next step.
x Do other warning lights in the instrument cluster No Inspect the instrument cluster.
illuminate normally? (See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION.)
x Do the warning lights illumination normal?
2 x Switch the ignition to ON. Yes Replace the instrument cluster.
x Verify that the security light illuminates. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the security light remain illuminates for 2 INSTALLATION.)
min or more? No Go to the next step.
3 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Replace the instrument cluster.
x Verify that the security light illuminates. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the security light remain illuminates for 2 INSTALLATION.)
min or more? No Go to the next step.
x Verify that the security light is flashing. No If the security light flashes with DTC patterns, perform
x Does the security light flash normally? the applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure.
(See 09-02A-6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-02C-3 DTC TABLE [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
If the security light does not flash, replace the
instrument cluster. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5 x Is the advanced keyless entry system equipped? Yes Go to the next step.
No Replace the instrument cluster.
(See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
6 x Disconnect the negative battery. Yes Replace the instrument cluster.
x Disconnect the keyless control module (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Connect the negative battery. No Replace the keyless control module.
x Switch the ignition to ON. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
x Verify that the security light illuminates. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
x Does the security light illuminate normally? ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
09-03G SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [HEADLIGHT

AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING WIRING No.1 AUTO LEVELING WARNING LIGHT
DIAGRAM [HEADLIGHT AUTO ILLUMINATES WHEN THE IGNITION IS
LEVELING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–1 SWITCHED TO ON [HEADLIGHT AUTO
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART LEVELING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–2
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING No.2 AUTO LEVELING DOES NOT
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–1 ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE
HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE POSTURE
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03G–3
End of Toc
HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING WIRING DIAGRAM [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
B+ IG1
METER IG 15 A
FUSE
H J I HEAD LIGHT FRONT

LEVELING
L L COMBINATION
ACTUATOR LIGHT RH
I F RH
O
HEADLIGHT LOW RELAY

I HEAD LIGHT
FRONT
LEVELING
L COMBINATION
ACTUATOR
BCM LIGHT LH
K F LH
AUTO LEVELING
CONTROL MODULE
[INPUT] G B
· VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL B
[OUTPUT] M C FRONT AUTO
A LEVELING SENSOR
· INDICATOR STATUS
D A
DLC-2 Q
E B
C REAR AUTO
F LEVELING SENSOR
A
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING CHART [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
NO. SYMPTOM DESCRIPTION

1 Auto leveling warning light illuminates when the ignition is The auto leveling warning light remains illuminated 3
switched to ON. seconds or more after the ignition is turned to ON.
2 Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the x Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the
headlights for vehicle posture. headlights for cargo and passenger weight conditions
when the vehicle speed above 30 km/h {19 mph}.
x Left or right side auto leveling does not operate.
End Of Sie
No.1 AUTO LEVELING WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED TO ON
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
1 Auto leveling warning light illuminates when the ignition is switched to ON

DESCRIPTION The auto leveling warning light remains illuminated 3 seconds or more after the ignition is turned to ON.
x Headlight auto leveling function related electrical part the malfunction
— Front and/or rear auto leveling sensor related part the malfunction (DTC 3 (rear auto leveling
sensor/DTC 4 (front auto leveling sensor))
x Front and/or rear auto leveling control module power supply voltage excessive low
x Front and/or rear auto leveling sensor signal voltage excessive high or low
x Front and/or rear auto leveling sensor the malfunction
— Auto leveling control module the malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— Auto leveling control module does not operate
x Auto leveling control module power supply circuit malfunction
x Auto leveling control module GND circuit malfunction
— Auto leveling control module power supply voltage is excessive high
x Auto leveling warning light control circuit the malfunction
— Instrument cluster the malfunction
x CAN signal wiring harness malfunction (does not receive vehicle speed signal)
1 CONFIRM HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
SYSTEM DTC (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
x Retrieve the headlight auto leveling system SYSTEM].)
DTCs. No Go to the next step.
2 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL Yes Go to the next step.
MODULE POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE No Repair or replace for open circuit between the ignition switch
x Switch the ignition to ON. and auto leveling control module terminal H.
x Measure the voltage between auto leveling
control module terminal H and GND.
3 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL Yes Connector the auto leveling control module connector, then
MODULE GND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN go to Step 5.
connector.
x Verify that continuity between auto leveling
control module terminal F and GND.
4 INSPECT GND POINT Yes Retighten the GND point.
x Verify that the GND point for auto leveling No Repair or replace for open circuit between auto leveling
control module. control module terminal F and GND.
x Is there loose or poor connection at GND
point?
5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Go to the next step.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OR No Replace the instrument cluster.
ELSEWHERE (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Turn on and off all the indicator lights and INSTALLATION.)
warning lights in the instrument cluster using
the M-MDS simulation function WL+IL.
x Does the auto leveling warning light turn on
and off according to simulation function?
6 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION IS NO Yes Go to the next step.
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL OR No Perform the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
ELSEWHERE “No.7 Speedometer indication is defective” procedure.
x Verify that the speedometer indication. (See 09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
x Does the speedometer indicate properly? DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
7 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION IS CAN Yes Go to the appropriate DTC inspection.
COMMUNICATION OR AUTO (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
LEVELING CONTROL MODULE No Replace the auto leveling control module.
x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
ON-BOARD DIACNOSTIC SYSTEM. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Have any CAN communication related DTCs
been recorded in memory?
End Of Sie
No.2 AUTO LEVELING DOES NOT ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE POSTURE
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
2 Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the headlights for vehicle posture
x Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of the headlights for cargo and passenger weight conditions
DESCRIPTION when the vehicle speed above 30 km/h {19 mph}.
x Left or right side auto leveling does not operate.
x Headlight leveling actuator the malfunction
x Auto leveling control module the malfunction
x Front and/or rear leveling sensor the malfunction (DTC 3 (rear auto leveling sensor/DTC 4 (front auto
POSSIBLE CAUSE
leveling sensor))
x Improper installation of front and/or rear auto leveling sensor
x CAN signal wiring harness malfunction (does not receive vehicle speed signal)
1 CONFIRM HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
SYSTEM DTC (See 09-02F-2 DTC TABLE [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
x Retrieve the headlight auto leveling system SYSTEM].)
DTCs. No Go to the next step.
2 INSPECT IF THE MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to the next step.
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR OR No Go to Step 5.
ELSEWHERE
x Turn on the head light in low position.
x Jump the DLC-2 terminal B to GND using a
jumper wire.
x Verify that the optical axis movement.
x Does the optical axis move up and down
both side?
3 INSPECT IF THE MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Repair or replace for open or short circuit.
WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN AUTO No Go to the next step.
LEVELING CONTROL MODULE AND
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR
x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring
harness at auto leveling function does not
operate.
Right-side:
— Auto leveling control module terminal J—
front combination light (RH) terminal I
— Auto leveling control module terminal I—
front combination light (RH) terminal F
— Auto leveling control module terminal L—
front combination light (RH) terminal L
Left-side:
front combination light (LH) terminal I
— Auto leveling control module terminal K—
front combination light (LH) terminal F
front combination light (LH) terminal L
x Is open or short circuit detected?
4 INSPECT IF THE MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Troubleshooting completed.
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR (The malfunction is in headlight leveling actuator.)
OR ELSEWHERE No Replace the auto leveling control module.
x Replace the suspected side front (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
combination light. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION
LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Does the auto leveling adjust optical axis of
the headlight for vehicle posture?
5 INSPECT IF THE MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Repair or replace for open or short circuit.
WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN AUTO No Go to the next step.
LEVELING CONTROL MODULE AND
HEADLIGHT LEVELING ACTUATOR
x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring
harness.
Right-side:
front combination light (RH) terminal I
front combination light (RH) terminal L
Left-side:
front combination light (LH) terminal I
front combination light (LH) terminal L
x Is open or short circuit detected?
6 INSPECT FRONT AND REAR AUTO Yes Go to the next step.
LEVELING SENSOR INSTALLATION No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, or install properly.
x Inspect front and rear auto leveling sensor
installation (bend or damaged of bracket, or
dislocated link).
x Are front and rear auto leveling sensor
installed properly?
7 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION IS NO Yes Replace the Auto leveling control module.
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL OR AUTO (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
x Verify that the speedometer indication. No Perform the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
x Does the speedometer indicate properly? “No.7 Speedometer indication is defective” procedure.
(See 09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
09-03H SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [AFS (ADAPTIVE

FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT No.3 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–1 LIGHTING SYSTEM) OPERATES
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN OPERATING AFS OFF
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SWITCH [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–1 LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–4
No.1 AFS OFF LIGHT ILLUMINATES No.4 AFS OFF LIGHT ILLUMINATES
CONTINUOUSLY [AFS (ADAPTIVE WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED TO
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . 09-03H–1 ON [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
No.2 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–5
SYSTEM) DOES NOT OPERATE IN THE No.5 AUTO LEVELING DOES NOT
LEFT AND RIGHT DIRECTIONS ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE POSTURE
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–2 [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03H–7
End of Toc
FOREWORD [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]

x The AFS control module does not activate the AFS until it detects the steering wheel neutral position. (See 09-
18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
End Of Sie
No. Troubleshooting item Description

1 09-03H-1 No.1 AFS OFF LIGHT x The AFS OFF light remains illuminated with the ignition switched ON
ILLUMINATES CONTINUOUSLY [AFS and the AFS does not operate.
(ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)]
2 09-03H-2 No.2 AFS (ADAPTIVE x The AFS OFF light is not illuminated while the vehicle speed is 2 km/h
FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) DOES {1 mph} or more and the AFS does not operated in the left or right
NOT OPERATE IN THE LEFT AND direction when the shift position is in the D or M range (ATX) or in a
RIGHT DIRECTIONS [AFS (ADAPTIVE position other than R (MTX).
3 09-03H-4 No.3 AFS (ADAPTIVE x The AFS operates while the AFS OFF switch is off.
OPERATES WHEN OPERATING AFS
OFF SWITCH [AFS (ADAPTIVE
4 09-03H-5 No.4 AFS OFF LIGHT x The AFS OFF light flashes when the ignition is switched ON.
ILLUMINATES WHEN THE IGNITION x The AFS OFF light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON.
IS SWITCHED TO ON [AFS
(ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)]
5 09-03H-7 No.5 AUTO LEVELING DOES x The auto leveling does not adjust the optical axis of the headlights
NOT ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE according to the cargo and passenger weight conditions.
HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE
POSTURE [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
End Of Sie
No.1 AFS OFF LIGHT ILLUMINATES CONTINUOUSLY [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
1 AFS OFF LIGHT illuminates continuously

DESCRIPTION The AFS OFF light remains illuminated with the ignition switched ON and the AFS does not operate.
x Constant AFS OFF signal malfunction to the AFS control module.
— AFS OFF switch malfunction (stuck on)
POSSIBLE CAUSE — Short in wiring harness ground between AFS OFF switch terminal H (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and AFS
control module terminal P
1 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN AFS OFF Yes Replace the AFS OFF switch.
SWITCH (See 09-18-27 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
x Switch the ignition off. SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
x Disconnect the AFS OFF switch connector. INSTALLATION.)
x Switch the ignition ON. No Go to the next step.
x Verify that the AFS OFF light illuminates.
x Does the AFS OFF switch illumination turn off
after illuminating for several seconds directly
after the ignition is switched ON?
2 INSPECT AFS OFF SWITCH SIGNAL Yes Repair for a short circuit to the wiring harness
WIRING HARNESS ground between AFS OFF switch terminal H
x Disconnect the AFS control module connector. (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and AFS control module
x Verify the continuity between AFS OFF switch terminal P.
terminal H (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and body No Go to the next step.
ground.
3 INSPECT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the related wiring harness.
SIGNAL CIRCUIT No Go to the next step.
x Verify the continuity between AFS control
module terminal E/G and body ground.
4 INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Yes Replace the AFS control module.
x Turn off the AFS OFF light using the instrument (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
cluster active command modes WL + IL and the SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
M-MDS. INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-02I-25 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES No Replace the instrument cluster.
TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the AFS OFF light turn off with the INSTALLATION.)
simulation operation?
End Of Sie
No.2 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) DOES NOT OPERATE IN THE LEFT AND RIGHT
DIRECTIONS [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
2 AFS (adaptive front lighting system) does not operate in the left and right directions
The AFS OFF light is not illuminated while the vehicle speed is 2 km/h {1 mph} or more and the AFS
DESCRIPTION does not operated in the left or right direction when the shift position is in the D or M range (ATX) or in a
position other than R (MTX).
x The necessary signal for controlling the AFS control module is not input.
— Steering angle signal error
x Communication error between BCM and AFS control modules
— Engine speed signal, vehicle speed signal error
x Communication error between PCM and AFS control modules
— Transaxle range signal error
x Communication error between TCM and BCM
x Communication error between BCM and AFS control modules
— Manual transmission back-up light switch signal error
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Back-up light switch malfunction (stuck on)
— Headlight left/right position signal error
x Hall sensor (swivel actuator) malfunction
x Vehicle steering conditions are not correctly input to AFS control module
— Steering angle sensor malfunction
— Wheel alignment adjustment malfunction (right run/left run)
x Swivel actuator which receives control signal from AFS control module does not operate
— Swivel actuator malfunction
— Malfunction in wiring harness between AFS control module and front combination light
x AFS OFF light malfunction
— Instrument cluster (AFS OFF light) malfunction
1 INSPECT DTCs FOR MODULES Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
COMPRISING SYSTEM No Go to the next step.
x Verify DTCs for the following modules using the
M-MDS.
— BCM
— PCM
— TCM
— AFS
x Can DTCs be verified?
2 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS SWIVEL Yes Go to the next step.
ACTUATOR No Go to Step 8.
x Do both the left and right headlights not move?
3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS AFS OFF Yes Go to Step 6.
LIGHT No Go to the next step.
x Start the engine.
x Turn on the headlights.
x Verify that the AFS OFF light illuminates by
operating the AFS OFF switch ON/OFF.
x Does the AFS OFF switch illuminate/turn off
according to the switch operation?
4 INSPECT AFS OFF SWITCH SIGNAL Yes Repair for a short circuit to the wiring harness
WIRING HARNESS ground between AFS OFF switch terminal H
x Disconnect the AFS control module connector. (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and AFS control module
x Verify the continuity between AFS OFF switch terminal P.
terminal H (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and body No Go to the next step.
ground.
5 INSPECT AFS OFF SWITCH Yes Turn off the AFS OFF light using the instrument
x Inspect the AFS OFF switch. cluster active command modes WL + IL and the M-
(See 09-18-28 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT MDS.
LIGHTING SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH (See 09-02I-25 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES
INSPECTION.) TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
x Is the AFS OFF switch normal? No Replace the AFS OFF switch.
SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
6 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the steering angle sensor. No Replace the steering angle sensor.
(See 09-18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR (See 09-18-29 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is the steering angle sensor normal?
7 VERIFY THAT VEHICLE TRAVELS Yes Inspect the wheel alignment and perform
STRAIGHT adjustments.
x Drive the vehicle on a flat, straight road. (See 02-11-4
x Is there frequent steering correction (right run/ FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT [Australian Specs.
left run) while on course? and General (L.H.D., R.H.D.) Specs.].)
(See 02-11-5 REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
No Inspect the following AFS control module PIDs.

If not within the specification, inspect related parts
and wiring harnesses.
x Engine speed (RPM)
x Vehicle speed (VSPD)
x Reverse gear switch (R_GEAR_SW)
(See 09-02D-21 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)].)
x Transaxle position (TR)
(See 05-02-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
[FS5A-EL].)
8 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
SWIVEL ACTUATOR AND AFS No Replace the AFS control module.
CONTROL MODULE (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
x Inspect the following wiring harnesses and SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
connectors: INSTALLATION.)
Swivel actuator (RH)
— Terminal F to AFS control module terminal I
— Terminal I to AFS control module terminal J
— Terminal J to AFS control module terminal X
— Terminal K to AFS control module terminal R
— Terminal L to AFS control module terminal L
Swivel actuator (LH)
— Terminal F to AFS control module terminal K
— Terminal I to AFS control module terminal J
— Terminal J to AFS control module terminal U
— Terminal K to AFS control module terminal T
— Terminal L to AFS control module terminal L
x Is there an open or short circuit, or poor
contact?
9 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION OCCURS IN Yes Troubleshooting completed.
SWIVEL ACTUATOR OR AFS CONTROL No Replace the front combination light.
MODULE (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
x Replace the AFS control module. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE
x Is the AFS operation normal?
End Of Sie
No.3 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) OPERATES WHEN OPERATING AFS OFF SWITCH [AFS
(ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
3 AFS (adaptive front lighting system) operates when operating AFS OFF switch
DESCRIPTION The AFS operates while the AFS OFF switch is off.
x AFS OFF signal error to AFS control module
— AFS OFF switch malfunction (stuck off)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between AFS OFF switch terminal H (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and AFS
POSSIBLE CAUSE
control module terminal P
— Open circuit in wiring harness between AFS OFF switch terminal K and ground.
1 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS AFS OFF Yes Go to the next step.
SWITCH No Turn off the AFS OFF light using the instrument
x Switch the ignition ON. cluster active command modes WL + IL and the M-
x Turn the AFS OFF switch on and off. MDS.
x Does the AFS OFF light illumination change in (See 09-02I-25 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES
accordance with the switch operation? TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
2 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS AFS Yes Inspect the AFS control module terminal P
CONTROL MODULE connection condition.
x Disconnect the AFS control module connector. If a malfunction is detected, repair or replace the
x Verify that there is continuity between the AFS terminal.
control module wiring harness-side terminal P If a malfunction is not detected, replace the AFS
and body ground. control module.
x Is there continuity when the AFS OFF switch is (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
on? SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3 INSPECT AFS OFF SWITCH SIGNAL Yes Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS No Repair or replace the malfunctioning location.
x Disconnect the AFS OFF switch connector.
x Verify the continuity between the AFS OFF
switch terminal H (L.H.D.)/B (R.H.D.) and AFS
control module terminal P.
4 INSPECT AFS OFF SWITCH Yes Inspect the following and repair or replace the
x Inspect the AFS OFF switch. malfunctioning location.
(See 09-18-28 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT x AFS OFF switch terminal K to body ground
LIGHTING SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH x Looseness, lifting at ground points
INSPECTION.) No Replace the AFS OFF switch.
x Is the AFS OFF switch normal? (See 09-18-27 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
No.4 AFS OFF LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN THE IGNITION IS SWITCHED TO ON [AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT
LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
4 AFS OFF light illuminates when the ignition is switched to ON

x The AFS OFF light flashes when the ignition is switched ON.
DESCRIPTION
x The AFS OFF light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON.
x Headlight auto leveling function related electrical part malfunction
— Front auto leveling sensor related part malfunction
x Output signal excessively high or low
— Rear auto leveling sensor related part malfunction
x Output signal excessively high or low
POSSIBLE CAUSE
— AFS control module malfunction
— AFS control module power supply voltage excessively high
x AFS OFF light illumination circuit malfunction
— Instrument cluster malfunction
— Communication error between AFS control module and Instrument cluster
1 INSPECT FRONT AND REAR AUTO Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
LEVELING SENSOR INSTALLATION No Go to the next step.
x Inspect the front and rear auto leveling sensor
installation.
x Is there any bending, damage or dislocated links
at the bracket?
2 INSPECT AFS CONTROL MODULE POWER Yes Go to the next step.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE No Inspect and repair or replace the malfunctioning part for
x Switch the ignition to ON. an open circuit between the ignition switch (push start)
x Measure the voltage between AFS control and AFS control module terminals H.
module terminals H and ground.
3 INSPECT AFS CONTROL MODULE Yes Connect the AFS control module connector, then go to
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT the next step.
x Switch the ignition to off. No Inspect and repair for a loose or poor connection in the
x Disconnect the AFS control module connector. AFS control module ground point.
x Verify the continuity between the AFS control
module wiring harness-side connector terminal F
and ground.
4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN FRONT Yes Go to the next step.
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR OR No Go to Step 8.
ELSEWHERE
x Turn the headlights on.
x Measure the voltage between AFS control
module terminal G and ground.
x Is the voltage 0.4—4.6V?
5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN REAR Yes Go to Step 10.
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR OR No Go to the next step.
ELSEWHERE
x Turn the headlights on.
x Measure the voltage between AFS control
module terminal E and ground.
x Is the voltage 0.4—4.6V?
6 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part for an open or
SIGNAL RELATED CIRCUIT short circuit.
x Inspect for an open or short t circuit in the wiring No Go to the next step.
harness between AFS control module terminal E
and rear auto leveling sensor terminal B.
x Is an open or short circuit detected?
7 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part for an open
x Inspect the rear auto leveling sensor. circuit in the following:
(See 09-18-53 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR x Between AFS control module terminal M and rear
INSPECTION.) leveling sensor terminal C
x Is the rear auto leveling sensor normal? x Between AFS control module terminal D and rear
No Replace the rear auto leveling sensor.
(See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
8 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN FRONT Yes Go to the next step.
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR POWER OR No Inspect for an open or short circuit in the following:
GROUND CIRCUIT OR ELSEWHERE x Between AFS control module terminal M and front
x Switch the ignition to off. auto leveling sensor terminal C
x Disconnect the front and rear auto leveling x Between AFS control module terminal M and rear
sensor connectors. auto leveling sensor terminal C
x Switch the ignition to ON. x Between AFS control module terminal D and front
x Turn the headlights on. auto leveling sensor terminal A
x Measure the voltage between front auto leveling x Between AFS control module terminal D and rear
sensor terminals A and C at the wiring harness- auto leveling sensor terminal A
side connector. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part for an open or
x Is the voltage 4.75—5.25V? short circuit.
9 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR Yes Repair or replace malfunctioning part for an open or
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT short circuit.
CIRCUIT No Inspect the front auto leveling sensor.
x Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring If it is malfunctioning, replace the front auto leveling
harness between AFS control module terminal G sensor.
and front auto leveling sensor terminal B. (See 09-18-53 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
x Is an open or short circuit detected? INSPECTION.)
(See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
10 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Go to the applicable DTC inspection.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN AFS No Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER OR ELSEWHERE
x Retrieve the DTCs for the AFS control module
and the instrument cluster using the M-MDS.
x Are the following DTCs displayed?
— AFS control module:U0001:88
— Instrument cluster:U0001:88, U0182:00
11 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the AFS control module.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OR AFS (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
CONTROL MODULE
INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the instrument cluster.
(See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER No Replace the instrument cluster.
INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Is the instrument cluster normal? INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
No.5 AUTO LEVELING DOES NOT ADJUST OPTICAL AXIS OF THE HEADLIGHTS FOR VEHICLE POSTURE
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM)]
5 Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of headlights according to vehicle attitude
x Auto leveling does not adjust optical axis of headlights according to cargo and passenger weight
DESCRIPTION
conditions
x Headlight auto leveling actuator malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Front auto leveling sensor is not installed properly
x Rear auto leveling sensor is not installed properly
1 INSPECT AFS OFF LIGHT ILLUMINATION Yes Go to symptom “No.4 AFS OFF light illuminates when
x Switch the ignition to ON. the ignition is switched to ON” troubleshooting
x Inspect the AFS OFF light indicator light procedure.
condition. No Go to the next step.
x Does the headlight AFS OFF light illuminate 3 s
after switching the ignition to ON?
2 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN AUTO Yes Go to the next step.
LEVELING SENSOR OR ELSEWHERE No Go to Step 5.
x Turn the headlights on at low beam.
x Jump DLC-2 terminal B to ground using a jumper
wire.
x Inspect the headlight optical axis movement.
x Does the optical axis move up and down on both
sides?
3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part for an open or
HARNESS BETWEEN HEADLIGHT AUTO short circuit.
LEVELING ACTUATOR AND AFS No Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE OR ELSEWHERE
x Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring
harness on the side where the auto leveling
function does not operate.
RH:
— AFS control module terminal J—front
combination light (RH) terminal (14-pin) I
— AFS control module terminal I—front
combination light (RH) terminal (14-pin) F
— AFS control module terminal L—front
combination light (RH) terminal (14-pin) L
LH:
combination light (LH) terminal (14-pin) I
— AFS control module terminal K—front
combination light (LH) terminal (14-pin) F
combination light (LH) terminal (14-pin) L
4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Troubleshooting is completed.
HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING (The malfunction is in headlight leveling actuator.)
ACTUATOR OR ELSEWHERE No Replace the AFS control module.
x Replace the front combination light on the (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
suspected side. SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT INSTALLATION.)
x Perform Step 2 inspection procedure again.
x Does the optical axis move up and down?
5 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION IS IN WIRING Yes Repair or replace for an open or short to the ground
HARNESS BETWEEN AFS CONTROL circuit.
MODULE AND HEADLIGHT AUTO No Go to the next step.
LEVELING ACTUATOR
x Inspect for an open or short circuit in the wiring
harness on the side where the auto leveling
function does not operate.
RH:
combination light (RH) terminal (14-pin) I
combination light (RH) terminal (14-pin) L
LH:
combination light (LH) terminal (14-pin) I
combination light (LH) terminal (14-pin) L
6 INSPECT FRONT AND REAR AUTO Yes Go to the next step.
LEVELING SENSOR INSTALLATION No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, then install
x Inspect the front and rear auto leveling sensor the auto leveling sensor properly.
installation (bent or damaged bracket, or (See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
dislocated link). INSTALLATION.)
x Are the front and rear auto leveling sensors
installed properly?
7 INSPECT FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the front auto leveling sensor. No Replace the front auto leveling sensor.
(See 09-18-53 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR (See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSPECTION) INSTALLATION.)
x Is the front auto leveling sensor normal?
8 INSPECT REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the rear auto leveling sensor. No Replace the rear auto leveling sensor.
(See 09-18-53 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR (See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSPECTION) INSTALLATION.)
x Is the rear auto leveling sensor normal?
9 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION IS NO VEHICLE Yes Replace the AFS control module.
SPEED SIGNAL OR AFS CONTROL No Perform the instrument cluster symptom
MODULE troubleshooting “No.7 Speedometer indication is
x Verify that the speedometer indication. defective” procedure.
x Does the speedometer indicate properly? (See 09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ]
09-03I SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ESS

(EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ]
FOREWORD [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP No.2 ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
SIGNAL SYSTEM) ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–1 SYSTEM) OPERATES WHILE NOT
No.1 ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL UNDER OPERATION CONDITIONS
SYSTEM) DOES NOT OPERATE [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
[ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–3
SYSTEM) ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–3
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–1 POSSIBLE CAUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–3
POSSIBLE CAUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–1 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–3
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03I–2
SYMPTOM
End of Toc
TROUBLESHOOTING [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ]
FOREWORD [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ]
Warning
x Do not attempt to reproduce an emergency stop signal system malfunction. Doing so will result in
a remarkable loss of vehicle stability which could cause an unexpected rear-end or other type of
collision and a serious accident.
x To prevent an accident, verify the M-MDS data monitor using two people while the vehicle is being
driven (One person drives vehicle and other operates the M-MDS).
x When performing an asterisked * troubleshooting inspection, first verify the damage and connection status of
the connectors and terminals, then perform the inspection while shaking the wiring harness to discover whether
poor contact points are the cause of an intermittent malfunction. If there is a malfunction in the connectors or
terminals, securely connect, repair, or perform replacement.
1 09-03I-1 No.1 ESS (EMERGENCY x The hazard warning lights do not flash even though the vehicle
STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) DOES NOT decelerates suddenly *1.
OPERATE [ESS (EMERGENCY x Hazard warning lights end flashing before vehicle stops (vehicle speed at
STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ] approx. 10 km/h {6.2 mph}) while the system operates.
2 09-03I-3 No.2 ESS (EMERGENCY
STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) OPERATES x The hazard warning lights flash while driving.
WHILE NOT UNDER OPERATION x Hazard warning lights flash even though deceleration is done without
CONDITIONS [ESS (EMERGENCY decelerating*1 rapidly.
STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ]
*1
: Deceleration of vehicle speed at 30 km/h {19 mph} or more for 1 s while vehicle speed is 60—70 km/h {38—43
mph} or more.
End Of Sie
No.1 ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) DOES NOT OPERATE [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
SYSTEM) ]
Description
x Hazard warning lights do not flash even though vehicle decelerates suddenly.
x Hazard warning lights end flashing before vehicle stops (emergency stop hazard warning mode, vehicle speed
at approx. 10 km/h {6.2 mph}) while system operates.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Hazard warning light flash malfunction
x BCM malfunction (flashing hazard warning light circuit malfunction)
ABS CM and DSC CM do not recognize vehicle speed.
x Malfunction in ABS wheel speed sensor related parts
— ABS wheel-speed sensor malfunction
— ABS wheel-speed sensor rotor malfunction
x ABS CM or DSC CM malfunction
BCM does not recognize sudden deceleration hazard warning mode request signal.
x ABS CM or DSC CM malfunction (signal is not output)
x BCM malfunction
x Communication error between ABS CM, DSC CM and BCM
BCM does not recognize emergency stop hazard warning mode request signal.
x Brake switch signal malfunction
— Brake switch malfunction
— Open or short circuit between brake switch and PCM 2AO (MZR-CD (2.2))/1AB (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
2.0DISI, MZR 2.5)
x Vehicle speed signal malfunction
— Communication error between PCM and ABS CM, DSC CM
x BCM malfunction
Road condition may be affected. (emergency braking warning system is normal)
x Grip level of tires is low
— Driving on a low-traction surface
— Tire wear (hydroplaning)
x Retrieve DTCs for the PCM, ABS CM, DSC CM,
and BCM. (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].) (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
(See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].) (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC
(See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
[DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].) (See 09-02K-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)
x Are any DTCs output? No Go to the next step.
2 VERIFY MALFUNCTION CONDITION Yes Go to the next step.

x Do the hazard warning lights flash in the No Go to Step 5.
emergency stop hazard warning mode while the
vehicle speed is 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or less?
3 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY Yes May be affected by driving conditions (emergency
PCM INPUT SIGNAL ERROR braking warning system is normal).
x Monitor the PCM PID “BOO” using the M-MDS. If a malfunction occurs, replace the BCM.
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x Are the monitoring values normal?
4* INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL FOR Yes Repair the malfunctioning part for an open or short
MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY OPEN OR circuit.
SHORT CIRCUIT No Replace the brake switch.
x Inspect the wiring harness between the brake (See 04-11-9 BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/
switch and PCM 2AO (MZR-CD (2.2))/1AB (MZR INSTALLATION.)
1.8, 2.0, 2.0DISI, 2.5) for an open or short circuit.
x Is there any open or short circuit?
5 INSPECT FLASHING HAZARD WARNING Yes Go to the next step.
LIGHT CIRCUIT FOR MALFUNCTION No Replace the BCM.
x Flashes the hazard warning lights using the (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
hazard warning switch. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Do the hazard warning lights flash?
6 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY ABS Yes System may be affected by road conditions (emergency
OPERATION MALFUNCTION braking warning system is normal).
x Inspect the ABS operation at 10—20 km/h {6.2— If the malfunction recurs, replace the BCM.
12.0 mph}. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
x Is the ABS operation normal? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No x Inspect the tires for the following:
— Tire air pressure (are all four tires at
recommended pressure?)
— Tire wear condition (is tire wear uniform on all
four tires, or is it different?)
— Tire size
Adjust the malfunctioning tire or replace it.
End Of Sie
No.2 ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) OPERATES WHILE NOT UNDER OPERATION
CONDITIONS [ESS (EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL SYSTEM) ]
Description
x Hazard warning lights flash while driving
x Hazard warning lights flash even though deceleration is done without decelerating rapidly.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Hazard warning light flash malfunction
x Hazard warning switch malfunction (temporary short circuit caused by vibration while vehicle is driven)
— Hazard warning switch malfunction
— Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between hazard warning switch and BCM terminal 3W
x BCM malfunction (hazard warning light flash circuit disabled)
BCM does not recognize sudden deceleration hazard warning mode request signal
x ABS CM or DSC CM malfunction (false signal is output)
x BCM malfunction
x Communication error between ABS CM, DSC CM and BCM
Sudden deceleration wheel speed is detected
x Grip level of tires is low
— Driving on a low-traction surface
— Tire wear (hydroplaning)
x Retrieve DTCs for the PCM, ABS CM, DSC CM,
and BCM. (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST 2.5].)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].) (See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
(See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC
(See 04-02A-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [ABS].)
STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
(See 09-02K-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)
x Are any DTCs output? No Go to the next step.
2* DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY Yes Go to Step 4.

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH SIGNAL No Go to the next step.
ERROR
x Monitor the BCM PIDs “HAZARD” using the M-
MDS:
(See 09-02K-93 PID/DATA MONITOR
INSPECTION [BCM].)
3 INSPECT HAZARD WARNING SWITCH FOR Yes Repair for a short to ground in the wiring harness
MALFUNCTION between the hazard warning switch and BCM terminal
x Inspect the hazard warning switch. 3W.
(See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH No Replace the hazard warning switch.
INSPECTION.) (See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
x Is the hazard warning switch normal? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 INSPECT TIRES FOR MALFUNCTION Yes System may be affected by road conditions (emergency
x Inspect the tires for the following: braking warning system is normal).
— Tire air pressure (are all four tires at If the malfunction recurs, replace the BCM.
recommended pressure?) (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
— Tire wear condition (is tire wear uniform on all REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
four tires, or is it different?) No Adjust the malfunctioning tire or replace the tire.
— Tire size
x Are the tires normal?
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
09-03J SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [ENTIRE AUDIO

SYSTEM]
FOREWORD NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–1 [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–9
Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–1 Without Bose® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–9
Quick Diagnostic Chart With Bose® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–9
(Entire Audio System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–3 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO PANEL [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–11
SWITCH CONFIRMATION Without Bose® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–11
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–4 With Bose® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–13
How to activate audio panel switch NO.5 SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND
confirmation mode QUALITY [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . 09-03J–16
(with audio system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–4 NO.6 VOLUME INCREASES/DECREASES
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: STEERING WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
SWITCH CONFIRMATION [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–17
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–4 NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE
AUDIO UNIT RESET PROCEDURE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–18
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–5 NO.8 AudioPilot®2 FUNCTION
NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL IS INOPERATIVE
SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–19
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–6 NO.9 NO AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION
NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–20
AUDIO SYSTEM NO.10 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–8 [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03J–21
oc
FOREWORD [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Note
x Record all radio programs set by customer prior to the repairs. Set all radio programs and adjust the time
after repairs.
Troubleshooting Index
Possible DTC
No. Symptom
With M-MDS Without M-MDS
1 09-03J-6 NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES U3000:09 Audio unit
(RADIO, CD) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] x 09:Er21
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 09/Error code 21
2 09-03J-8 NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM U3003:16 Audio unit
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] x 09:Er20
Car-navigation unit
3 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [ENTIRE U3003:16, Audio unit
AUDIO SYSTEM] U3000:09 x 09:Er20, 21
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 09/Error code
20, 21
4 09-03J-11 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [ENTIRE
— —
AUDIO SYSTEM]
5 09-03J-16 NO.5 SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND QUALITY U3000:09 Audio unit
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] x 09:Er21
Car-navigation unit
6 09-03J-17 NO.6 VOLUME INCREASES/DECREASES WHILE
— —
DRIVING THE VEHICLE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Possible DTC
No. Symptom
With M-MDS Without M-MDS
7 09-03J-18 NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [ENTIRE U0010:88, Audio unit
AUDIO SYSTEM] U0155:00 x 16:Er12
Car-navigation unit
8 09-03J-19 NO.8 AudioPilot®2 FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE U0155:00 Audio unit
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM] x —
Car-navigation unit
9 09-03J-20 NO.9 NO AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION [ENTIRE U3003:16 Audio unit
AUDIO SYSTEM] x 09:Er20
Car-navigation unit
10 09-03J-21 NO.10 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [ENTIRE U3003:16, Audio unit
AUDIO SYSTEM] U0010:88 x 09:Er20
x 16:Er12
Car-navigation unit
Quick Diagnostic Chart (Entire Audio System)
X: Applicable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Volume increases/decreases while driving the vehicle

AF noise or POP noise at all sources (Radio, CD)
Sound break-up or poor sound quality

No power to the entire audio system
AudioPilot R 2 function is inoperative

No sound from some speakers
No audio system illumination

No sound from all speakers
LCD does not display at all

ALC function is inoperative
Possible factor
Low vehicle battery voltage X

Jammed radio signals from after market equipment X
Speaker malfunction (e. g., any foreign material, broken) X X X X
Improper speaker installation X X
Poor connection of audio unit/car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage X X X X
Antenna malfunction (e.g., poor ground) X
Audio unit/car-navigation unit malfunction X X X X X X X X X
Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose R) X X X X X X
Burnt fuse (B+) X
Burnt fuse (ACC) X
Open or short circuit in power supply (B+) wiring harness X
Open or short circuit in power supply (ACC) wiring harness X
Short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker (without Bose R ) X X
Open circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker (without Bose R ) X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and ground (with Bose R ) X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and speaker (with Bose R ) X X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio unit (with Bose R ) X X
Poor connection of audio amplifier connector, terminal damage (with Bose R ) X X X X
Short circuit inside speaker X X
09
Vibration of door trim and/or package trim X
CAN signal wiring harness malfunction X
Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness (e.g., instrument cluster) X X
Burnt fuse (TNS signal) X
Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness X
Audio panel malfunction X
Information display malfunction X
R R
Open or short circuit in AudioPilot 2 microphone signal wiring harness (with Bose ) X
Open or short circuit in AudioPilot R 2 signal wiring harness (with Bose R ) X
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO PANEL SWITCH CONFIRMATION [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
x Verify the customer complaint and identify either the audio panel malfunction or audio unit malfunction.
How to activate audio panel switch confirmation mode (with audio system)
4. The switch inspection is now activated.
1 x Press each switch on the audio panel. Yes Verify the customer complaint and then go to the
x Does buzzer sound when pressing each appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
switch? No Go to the next step.
2 x Disassemble and reassemble the audio Yes Go to the next step.
panel and audio unit. No Replace the audio unit.
x Launch the switch inspection mode. (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Does buzzer sound when pressing each
switch?
3 Does the audio system operate properly? Yes The system is normal.
No Verify the customer complaint and then go to the
appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
End Of Sie
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: STEERING SWITCH CONFIRMATION [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
x Verify the customer complaint and identify either the steering switch malfunction or audio unit malfunction.
1 Is the symptom related to either the steering Yes Verify the customer complaint and then go to the
switch or audio panel/car-navigation unit appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
operation? No The symptom is related to the audio panel/car-
navigation unit operation:
x Follow the “Confirmation Step 1” (with audio system).
x Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
(See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
The symptom is related to the steering switch
operation:
2 x Disconnect the audio unit/car-navigation unit Yes Go to the next step.
connector (24-pin). No If the audio unit/car-navigation unit side
x Inspect both the audio unit/car-navigation
unit and wiring harness-side connectors for
connector is wrong:
poor connection (such as damaged/pulled- x Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
out pins, corrosion). (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— Terminal 1N (ST SW1) x Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
— Terminal 1P (ST SW2) system).
x Are all the pins normal? (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
If the wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector.
3 x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit/ Yes Verify the customer complaint and then go to the
car-navigation unit wiring harness-side appropriate symptom troubleshooting procedure.
connector terminal 1N and 1P while No Go to the next step.
operating the steering switch.
x Does the resistance change?
4 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Replace the steering switch.
x Remove the steering switch. No Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness.
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit/
car-navigation unit wiring harness-side
connector (24-pin) terminal and the steering
switch wiring harness-side connector (16-
pin) terminal.
— Terminal 1N (24-pin) — Terminal G (16-
pin)
— Terminal 1P (24-pin) — Terminal I (16-pin)
x Is there the continuity?
AUDIO UNIT RESET PROCEDURE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Caution
x If the audio unit reset procedure is performed, the audio will be reset to the manufacturer settings
and the preset memory set by the customers will be erased. Only perform the audio unit reset if
the all of the following conditions have been met.
— Malfunction cannot be verified or reproduced.
— DTC is not recorded.
— Audio unit reset has not been performed in the past.
— Received consent from the customer that preset memory and other settings set by the
customer are to be erased and that the audio system can continue to be used after the audio
unit reset is performed.
1. Switch the ignition to ACC.

2. Press and hold the switches in the order of POWER/VOLUME switch, FOLDER up switch, and TRACK/SEEK
down switch, and hold them simultaneously pressed for 3 s or more.
TRACK/SEEK DOWN SWITCH FOLDER UP SWITCH
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH

3. Verify that the preset memory is erased (audio
unit is reset). FOLDER UP SWITCH TRACK/SEEK DOWN SWITCH
Note
x If the preset memory is not erased (audio
unit is not reset), re-perform the procedure
from Step 1.
End Of Sie
POWER/VOLUME SWITCH
NO.1 AF NOISE OR POP NOISE AT ALL SOURCES (RADIO, CD) [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
1 AF noise or POP noise on all sources (Radio, CD)

With M-MDS U3000:09
Audio unit
Possible DTC x 09:Er21
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Low vehicle battery voltage.
x Jammed radio signals from after market equipment.
x Speaker malfunction (e.g., any foreign material, broken)
x Improper speaker installation
x Audio unit malfunction (with audio system)
x Car-navigation unit malfunction (with car-navigation system)
x Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage (with audio system)
x Poor connection of car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage (with car-navigation system)
x Poor connection of audio amplifier connector, terminal damage (with Bose®)
x Antenna malfunction (e.g., poor ground)
POSSIBLECAUSE
Note
x AF noise is a snapping noise that generally occurs during ON/OFF switching operations of
electrical equipment other than the audio unit, or a continual rasping noise that occurs when
electrical equipment is operated. This is caused by noise interference in the power supply wiring,
signal wiring, speaker cable or head of cassette deck. Therefore noise can be heard regardless
of radio wave conditions or the audio volume position. The noise will start after one click from the
minimum position of the volume button but normally does not change even when volume is
turned to a higher position.
x POP noise is snapping or popping noise that occurs during ON/OFF switching operation of the
audio unit, or when switching from radio to CD. Even a normal audio unit sometimes emits a little
noise depending on the conditions.
1 x Inspect the vehicle battery voltage. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the vehicle battery voltage normal? No Charge the battery, then go to the next step.
Specification:
Switch the ignition to ON.: 11.5 V or more
Idle: 12.5 V or more
2 x Turn the audio system to ON. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is there any noise? No The system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
vehicle battery voltage was low.
3 x Is any of the following after-market Yes Go to the next step.
equipment installed? (Inspect especially near No Go to Step 5.
the antenna.)
— Radar
— Anti-theft device
— Other
4 x Remove the after-market equipment. Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the audio system to ON. No The system is normal. The after-market electrical devices
x Is there any noise? might make a noise.
5 x Is there the noise from all speakers? Yes Go to Step 7.
6 x Inspect the suspect speaker. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the speaker normal? No If there is any foreign material on the speaker:
x Remove the foreign material from the speaker.
If the speaker is malfunctioning:
x Replace the speaker.
If the speaker is not installed properly:
x Install the speaker properly.
7 x Attempt to duplicate the symptom on the Yes Go to the next step.
other vehicle. No The system is normal. Explain the noise generation
x Is the noise better than the customer’s mechanism to the customer.
vehicle?
Note
x The noise may be heard depends on the operating
speed of audio power and/or mode switch.
x Remove the audio unit. No If poor connection of audio unit/car-navigation
x Inspect the connection of the audio unit/car-
navigation unit connector (24-pin) (for sound
unit connector:
signal line). x Securely connect the audio unit connector.
x Is the connector connected securely? If the audio unit/car-navigation unit side
connector is wrong:
x Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
system).
INSTALLATION)
After treating either the above-mentioned, then go to the
next step.
9 x Is there any noise? Yes Go to the next step.
No The system is normal.
10 x Inspect the ground condition of the antenna. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the ground condition normal? No Repair or replace the ground. Go to the next step.
11 x Is there any noise? Yes Without Bose®:
system).
INSTALLATION)
With Bose®:
x If noise occurs from the speaker of a specific channel, or
the volume is minimized and the noise occurs:
— Replace the audio amplifier.
(See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
x If noise occurs from the speaker of two or more channels
or the volume is minimized and the noise dose not
occurs:
— Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
INSTALLATION.)
— Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION)
End Of Sie
NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
2 No power on the entire audio system

With M-MDS U3003:16
Audio unit
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage
POSSIBLECAUSE x Burnt fuse (B+)
x Burnt fuse (ACC)
x Open or short circuit in power supply (B+) wiring harness
x Open or short circuit in power supply (ACC) wiring harness
x Inspect the following fuses: No Replace with the appropriate standard fuse.
— MIRROR 5 A x If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for short
— ROOM 15 A to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then
x Are the fuse normal? replace the fuse.
2 x Remove the audio unit (with audio system)/ Yes Go to the next step.
car-navigation unit (with car-navigation No If poor connection of audio unit/car-navigation
system).
x Inspect the connection of the audio unit/car- unit connector:
navigation unit connector (24-pin). x Securely connect the audio unit/car-navigation unit
x Disconnect the audio unit/car-navigation unit connector.
connector and inspect both the audio unit/ If the audio unit/car-navigation unit side
car-navigation unit and wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
connectors for poor connection (such as x Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion). (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— Terminal 1B (B+) x Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
— Terminal 1R (ACC) system).
— Terminal 1W (GND) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
x Are all the pins normal? INSTALLATION.)
3 x Connect the audio unit /car-navigation unit Yes Go to the next step.
connector. No Inspect and repair or replace the suspect wiring harness.
x Inspect the voltage for the power supply line Charge the battery, if necessary.
(B+, ACC).
Specification:
Switch the ignition to ON: 11.5 V or more
Idle: 12.5 V or more
4 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Remove the audio unit/car-navigation unit (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
connector (24-pin). Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit/ system).
car-navigation unit wiring harness-side (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
connector terminal 1W and the ground. INSTALLATION.)
x Is there the continuity? No Repair or replace the wiring harness.
End Of Sie
NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Without Bose®
3 No sound from all speakers
With M-MDS U3003:16, U3000:09
Audio unit
x 09:Er20
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit and speaker
x Short circuit inside speaker
POSSIBLECAUSE
x Audio unit/car-navigation unit malfunction
1 x Play the CD or Radio. Yes The system is normal.
x Adjust the volume between”10” to “15”. No Go to the next step.
x Is there sound?
2 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or speaker
x Remove the audio unit. unit.
x Disconnect the audio connector (24-pin).
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit Note
wiring harness-side connector terminal and x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness
ground: or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit
For front door speaker inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound.
— Terminal 1A (LH+)—GND No Go to the next step.
— Terminal 1C (LH-)—GND
— Terminal 1D (RH+)—GND
— Terminal 1F (RH-)—GND
For rear door speaker
— Terminal 1S (LH+)—GND
— Terminal 1U (LH-)—GND
— Terminal 1V (RH+)—GND
— Terminal 1X (RH-)—GND
3 x Remove the speaker. Yes Replace the speaker.
x Disconnect the speaker connector (4-pin). No Replace the audio unit/car-navigation unit
x Inspect the continuity between the speaker (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
wiring harness-side connector (4-pin) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
terminal and ground: INSTALLATION.)
For each speaker
— Terminal C — GND
— Terminal B — GND
With Bose®
3 No sound from all speakers
With M-MDS U3003:16, U3000:09
Audio unit
x 09:Er20
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Audio amplifier malfunction
POSSIBLECAUSE x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and speaker
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio unit/car-navigation unit
1 x Play CD or radio. Yes The system is normal.
x Adjust the volume between “10” and “15”. No Go to the next step.
x Is there sound?
2 x Measure the voltage at the audio amplifier Yes Go to Step 4.
terminal 3A (8-pin, vehicle harness-side) No Repair or replace wiring harness between the audio
x Is the voltage B+? amplifier and fuse.
INSTALLATION.)
3 x Is there any sound? Yes The system is normal.
x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector. No Repair or replace the repair related wiring harnesses.
x Inspect continuity between the following
terminals of the audio amplifier connector
and speaker connector.
For front door speaker
— Terminal 3D (LH+, L.H.D.)/3F (LH+,
R.H.D.)—Terminal C
— Terminal 3C (LH-, L.H.D.)/3E (LH-,
R.H.D.)—Terminal B
— Terminal 3F (RH+, L.H.D.)/3D (RH+,
— Terminal 3E (RH-, L.H.D.)/3C (RH-,
For tweeter
R.H.D.)—Terminal A
— Terminal 2D (LH+, L.H.D.)/2M (LH+,
— Terminal 2B (LH-, L.H.D.)/2O (LH-,
— Terminal 2M (RH+, L.H.D.)/2D (RH+,
— Terminal 2O (RH-, L.H.D.)/2B (RH-,
For rear speaker(4SD)
— Terminal 3H (LH+)—Terminal B
— Terminal 3G (LH-)—Terminal A
For bass-box(5HB/WGN)
— Terminal 3H (+)—Terminal B/F
— Terminal 3G (-)—Terminal C/D
For center speaker
— Terminal 2I (+)—Terminal B
— Terminal 2K (-)—Terminal A
5 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the related wiring harness or speaker unit.
x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector.
x Inspect the continuity between the audio Note
amplifier connector and ground: x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness
For front door speaker or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit
— Terminal 3D (LH+, L.H.D.)/3F (LH+, inside the audio unit/car-navigation unit operates to
R.H.D.)—GND cut the sound.
— Terminal 3C (LH-, L.H.D.)/3E (LH-, No Go to the next step.
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
For front speaker tweeter
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
— Terminal 2D (LH+, L.H.D.)/2M (LH+,
R.H.D.)—GND
— Terminal 2B (LH-, L.H.D.)/2O (LH-,
R.H.D.)—GND
— Terminal 2M (RH+, L.H.D.)/2D (RH+,
R.H.D.)—GND
— Terminal 2O (RH-, L.H.D.)/2B (RH-,
R.H.D.)—GND
For rear speaker(4SD)
— Terminal 3H (LH+)—GND
— Terminal 3G (LH-)—GND
— Terminal 3H—GND
— Terminal 3G—GND
For center speaker
— Terminal 2I (+)—GND
— Terminal 2K (-)—GND
6 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Replace the audio amplifier.
x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector No Repair or replace the wiring harness between the audio
and audio unit/car-navigation unit connector amplifier and audio unit/car-navigation unit.
(24-pin). Then go to the next step.
x Inspect the continuity between the audio
amplifier terminal 1A (16-pin, vehicle
harness-side) and audio unit/car-navigation
unit terminal 1J (24-pin, vehicle harness-
side).
7 x Is there any sound? Yes The system is normal.
No Replace the audio amplifier.
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME SPEAKERS [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
Without Bose®
4 No sound from certain speaker
Possible DTC —
POSSIBLECAUS x Speaker malfunction (e.g., any foreign material, broken)
E x Audio unit malfunction (with audio system)
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio unit/car-navigation unit and speaker
1 x Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Yes If no sound from some speaker:
x Turn the audio unit power to ON. x Go to the next step.
x While pressing the POWER/VOLUME If no sound at all:
switch, simultaneously press the AUTO-M x Go to the troubleshooting of “No.3 No sound from all
switch for 0.2 s or more. speakers”.
Is there any speaker with no sound? (See 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL
SPEAKERS [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)
Note
x The sounded speaker now changes in No The troubleshooting is completed.
the order of left — front speaker, right
— front speaker, right — rear speaker
and left — rear speaker.
x Is there any speaker with no sound?

x Disconnect the audio unit/car-navigation unit unit.
connector (24-pin).
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit/ Note
car-navigation unit wiring harness-side x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness
connector (24-pin) terminal and ground. or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit
x Is there continuity? inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound.
x Remove the audio unit or car-navigation unit. unit.
x Disconnect the audio unit or car-navigation No Go to the next Step.
unit connector (24-pin).
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit Note
or car-navigation unit wiring harness-side x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness
connector terminal and ground: or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit
For front door speaker inside the audio unit or car-navigation unit operates to
— Terminal 1A (LH+) — GND cut the sound.
— Terminal 1C (LH-) — GND
— Terminal 1D (RH+) — GND
— Terminal 1F (RH-) — GND
— Terminal 1S (LH+) — GND
— Terminal 1U (LH-) — GND
— Terminal 1V (RH+) — GND
— Terminal 1X (RH-) — GND
4 x Disconnect the speaker connector (4-pin) Yes Go to the next step.
and inspect the resistance of speaker. No Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness or speaker
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit unit.
or car-navigation unit wiring harness-side
connector terminal and speaker wiring
harness-side connector:
Audio unit/car-navigation unit—front
door speaker
— Terminal 1A (LH+) — terminal C
— Terminal 1C (LH-) — terminal B
— Terminal 1D (RH+) — terminal C
— Terminal 1F (RH-) — terminal B
Audio unit/car-navigation unit—rear
door speaker
— Terminal 1S (LH+) — terminal C
— Terminal 1U (LH-) — terminal B
— Terminal 1V (RH+) — terminal C
— Terminal 1X (RH-) — terminal B
5 x Inspect the suspect speaker. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Is the speaker normal? (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
Note system).
x If the speaker lead wire contacts to either (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
ground or vehicle frame, replace the INSTALLATION.)
speaker. No Go to the next step.
With Bose®
4 No sound from certain speaker
Possible DTC —
POSSIBLECAUS x Speaker malfunction (e.g., foreign material, broken)
E x Audio unit malfunction (with audio system)
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and speaker
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and audio unit/car-navigation unit
x Poor connection of audio unit connector, terminal damage
x Poor connection of audio amplifier connector
1 x Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Yes If no sound from some speaker:
x Turn the audio unit power to ON. x Go to the next step.
x While pressing the POWER/VOLUME If not sound at all:
switch, simultaneously press the AUTO-M x Go to the troubleshooting of “No.3 No sound from all
switch for 0.2 s or more. speakers”.
Is there any speaker with no sound? (See 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL
Note
x This function outputs sound to each No The troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.)
speaker sequentially to allow
determination of which speaker is not
emitting sound.
x Is there any speaker with no sound?

2 x Does the same speaker have no sound if Yes Go to the next step.
changing the sound source? (Radio, CD) No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
system).
INSTALLATION.)
Note
x If the different speaker has no sound now, the audio
unit is malfunctioning.
x Inspect the connection of the audio unit/car- No Connect the audio unit/car-navigation unit connector (24-
navigation unit connector (24-pin). (for sound pin) securely.
signal line)
x Is the connector connected securely?
x Remove the audio unit/car-navigation unit. No Go to Step 6.
x Disconnect the audio unit/car-navigation unit
connector (24-pin).
x Inspect the continuity between the audio unit/
car-navigation unit wiring harness-side
connector and ground.
— Terminal 1A (FL+)—GND
— Terminal 1C (FL-)—GND
— Terminal 1D (FR+)—GND
— Terminal 1F (FR-)—GND
— Terminal 1S (RL+)—GND
— Terminal 1U (RL-)—GND
— Terminal 1V (RR+)—GND
— Terminal 1X (RR-)—GND
5 x Inspect the continuity between the following Yes Go to the next step.
terminals of the audio amplifier wiring No Repair or replace the related wiring harness between the
harness-side connector and the audio unit/ audio amplifier and the audio unit.
car-navigation unit wiring harness-side Then go to the next step.
connector (24-pin).
— Terminal 1A (LH+)—Terminal 1D (L.H.D.)/
1F (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1C (LH-)—Terminal 1C(L.H.D.)/
1E (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1D (RH+)—Terminal 1F(L.H.D.)/
1D (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1F (RH-)—Terminal 1E(L.H.D.)/
1C (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1S (RL+)— Terminal 1H(L.H.D.)/
1J (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1U (RL-)— Terminal 1G(L.H.D.)/
1I (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1V (RR+)— Terminal 1J(L.H.D.)/
1H (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1X (RR-)— Terminal 1I(L.H.D.)/
1G (R.H.D.)
6 x Inspect the connection of the audio amplifier Yes Go to the next step.
connector. No Connect the audio amplifier securely.
x Is the connector connected securely?
x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector. No Repair or replace the repair related wiring harnesses.
x Inspect continuity between the following
terminals of the audio amplifier connector
and speaker connector.
— Terminal 3D (LH+, L.H.D)/3F (LH+,
— Terminal 3C (LH-, L.H.D)/3E (LH-,
— Terminal 3F (RH+, L.H.D)/3D (RH+,
— Terminal 3E (RH-, L.H.D)/3C (RH-,
For tweeter
R.H.D.)—Terminal D
— Terminal 2D (LH+, L.H.D)/2M (LH+,
— Terminal 2B (LH-, L.H.D)/2O (LH-,
— Terminal 2M (RH+, L.H.D)/2D (RH+,
— Terminal 2O (RH-, L.H.D)/2B (RH-,
For center speaker
For rear speaker (4SD)
— Terminal 3H (+)—Terminal B
— Terminal 3G (-)—Terminal D
8 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace the related wiring harness or speaker.
x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector. (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
x Inspect the continuity between the audio INSTALLATION.)
amplifier connector and ground: (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
For front door speaker INSTALLATION.)
— Terminal 3D (LH+, L.H.D)/3F (LH+, (See 09-20-13 CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/
R.H.D.)—GND INSTALLATION.)
— Terminal 3C (LH-, L.H.D)/3E (LH-, (See 09-20-15 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
R.H.D.)—GND (See 09-20-14 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
— Terminal 3F (RH+, L.H.D)/3D (RH+, INSTALLATION.)
R.H.D.)—GND (4SD)
— Terminal 3E (RH-, L.H.D)/3C (RH-, (See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
R.H.D.)—GND (5HB/WGN)
For tweeter
— Terminal 3D (LH+, L.H.D)/3F (LH+, Note
R.H.D.)—GND x If there is a short circuit between the speaker harness
— Terminal 3C (LH-, L.H.D)/3E (LH-, or speaker lead wire and ground, the protector circuit
R.H.D.)—GND inside the audio unit operates to cut the sound.
— Terminal 3F (RH+, L.H.D)/3D (RH+, No Go to the next step.
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
R.H.D.)—GND
For center speaker
— Terminal 2I (+)—GND
— Terminal 2K (-)—GND
— Terminal 3H (+)—GND
— Terminal 3G (-)—GND
For bass-box (5HB/WGN)
— Terminal 3H (+)—GND
— Terminal 3G (-)—GND
9 x Inspect the suspect speaker. Yes Replace the audio amplifier.
x Is the speaker normal? (See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Note No Replace the speaker.
x If the speaker lead wire contacts to (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
either ground or vehicle frame, replace INSTALLATION.)
the speaker. (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-13 CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-15 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-14 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)(4SD)
(See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)(5HB/WGN)
End Of Sie
NO.5 SOUND BREAK-UP OR POOR SOUND QUALITY [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
5 Broken sound or poor sound quality

With M-MDS U3000:09
Audio unit
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Speaker malfunction (e.g., any foreign material, broken)
x Improper speaker installation
POSSIBLECAUSE x Audio unit malfunction (with audio system)
x Vibration of door trim and/or package trim
1 x Is there broken sound or poor sound quality Yes Go to the next step.
from all speakers? No Go to Step 5.
2 x Inspect the sound while adjusting the sound Yes Go to the next step.
volume. No The system is normal.
x Is there broken sound or poor sound quality
between “30” and “40”?
3 x Inspect the BASS/TREB. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is there poor sound quality at “-3 — +3” of No If there is broken sound at “-6 — +6” of BASS/TREB with the
“BASS/TREB”? maximum volume, the system is normal.
Note
x When press the AUDIO CONT switch for a
few seconds, BASS/TREB is set at “0”.
4 x Attempt to duplicate the symptom on the Yes Without Bose®
other vehicle.
x Is the sound better than the customer’s
vehicle?
system).
INSTALLATION.)
With Bose®
INSTALLATION.)
or the volume is minimized and the noise does not
occurs:
INSTALLATION.)
system).
INSTALLATION.)
5 x Identify the speaker with broken sound by Yes Go to the next step.
adjusting BAL/FADE. No Install the speaker properly.
x Is the speaker installed properly?
6 x Remove the speaker. Yes Repair or replace the suspect speaker.
x Is there any foreign material or damage on No Go to the next step.
the speaker?
7 x Inspect the sound again. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is there broken sound? No Inspect the vibration from the door trim and/or package trim.
Repair or replace the suspect trim as necessary.
8 x Replace with the speaker known to be good. Yes Without Bose®:
(e.g., swap right and left speakers)
x Does the broken sound appear at the same
location?
system).
INSTALLATION.)
With Bose®:
INSTALLATION.)
or the volume is minimized and the noise dose not
occurs:
INSTALLATION.)
system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Replace the speaker.
(See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.) (4SD)
(See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5HB/WGN)
End Of Sie
NO.6 VOLUME INCREASES/DECREASES WHILE DRIVING THE VEHICLE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
6 Sound becomes loud or weak while driving the vehicle

Possible DTC —
POSSIBLECAUS x Audio unit/car-navigation unit malfunction (without Bose®)
E
x Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose®)
Note
x Inspect the ALC function (with Bose®)/Audio pilot function (with Bose®) while driving the vehicle
with playing the CD, etc.
1 ®
x Does the ALC (Without Bose )/Audio Pilot Yes Go to the next step.
function (With Bose®) turn on? No Without Bose®:
system).
INSTALLATION.)
With Bose®:
x Replace the audio amplifier.
INSTALLATION.)
2 x Turn the ALC (Without Bose®)/Audio Pilot Yes Without Bose®:
function (With Bose®). x Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Does the sound change while driving the (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
vehicle? x Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
With Bose®:
Replace the audio amplifier.
INSTALLATION.)
Explains the ALC (Without Bose®)/Audio Pilot function (with
Bose®) to the customer.
End Of Sie
NO.7 ALC FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
7 ALC function is inoperative

With M-MDS U0010:88, U0155:00
Audio unit
Without M-MDS Car-navigation unit
x Audio unit/car-navigation unit malfunction
x CAN signal wiring harness malfunction (does not receive vehicle speed signal) (with audio system
x Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness (e. g., instrument cluster) (with car-
POSSIBLECAUSE navigation system)
Note
x Inspect the ALC function while driving the vehicle with playing the CD, etc.
1 x Turn the ALC function to ON. Yes The system is normal. Explains the ALC function to the
x Inspect the ALC function operation when customer.
driving the vehicle at ALC level 3. No Go to the next step.
x Does the ALC system operate properly?
2 x Verify that the speedometer indication. Yes Go to the next step (with audio system).
x Is there the following DTC displayed? Go to Step 4 (with car-navigation system).
No Perform the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
procedure.
(See 09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
3 x Retrieve the DTCs from all vehicle modules Yes Go to the appropriate DTC inspection.
using the M-MDS. No Replace the audio unit.
x Is there the CAN related DTC displayed? (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 x Inspect for open or short circuit in wiring Yes Repair or replace for open or short circuit.
between the car-navigation unit (24-pin) No Replace the car-navigation unit.
terminal 1I and instrument cluster terminal (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
2O. INSTALLATION.)
x Is the open or short circuit detected?
End Of Sie
NO.8 AudioPilot®2 FUNCTION IS INOPERATIVE [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
8 AudioPilot®2 function is inoperative

With M-MDS U0155:00
Audio unit
Possible DTC x —
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Audio amplifier malfunction
x Open or short circuit in AudioPilot®2 signal wiring harness
x Open or short circuit in AudioPilot®2 microphone signal wiring harness
POSSIBLECAUSE x Open or short circuit in vehicle speed signal wiring harness (e. g., instrument cluster)
Note
x Inspect the AudioPilot®2 function while driving the vehicle and playing a CD.
1 x Turn the AudioPilot®2 function on. Yes The system is normal.
x Inspect the AudioPilot®2 function operation Explain the AudioPilot®2 function to the customer.
while driving the vehicle. No Go to the next step.
x Does the AudioPilot®2 system operation
properly?
2 x Inspect the connection of the audio amplifier Yes Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector.
connector (AudioPilot®2 microphone signal). No Go to the next step.
x Inspect both the audio amplifier wiring
harness-side connector terminal 1O, 1P and
1B for a poor connection (such as damaged/
pulled-out pins, corrosion).
x Are all the pins normal?
3 x Inspect the connection of the AudioPilot®2 Yes Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector.
microphone connector (2-pin). No Go to the next step.
x Inspect the AudioPilot®2 microphone wiring
harness-side connector terminal A and B (2-
pin) for poor connection (such as damaged/
pulled-out pins, corrosion).
x Are all pins normal?
4 x Inspect continuity between the following Yes Repair or replace the wiring harness for a possible short to
terminals of the audio amplifier connector ground.
and body ground. No Go to the next step.
— Terminal 1O (AudioPilot®2 microphone+)
— Terminal 1P (AudioPilot®2 microphone-)
— Terminal 1B (vehicle speed signal)
5 x Inspect continuity between the following Yes Go to the next step.
terminals of the audio amplifier connector No Repair or replace for open circuit.
and AudioPilot®2 microphone/instrument
cluster connector.
— Terminal 1O—AudioPilot®2 microphone
terminal B (+)
— Terminal 1P—AudioPilot®2 microphone
terminal A (-)
— Terminal 1B—Instrument cluster terminal
2O (vehicle speed signal)
6 x Retrieve the DTCs from all vehicle modules Yes Go to the appropriate DTC inspection.
using the M-MDS. No Replace the audio amplifier.
x Is there the following DTC displayed? (See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
— Vehicle speed signal INSTALLATION.)
— CAN communication
End Of Sie
NO.9 NO AUDIO SYSTEM ILLUMINATION [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
9 Audio system illumination does not illuminate at all

With M-MDS U3003:16
Audio unit
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Poor connection of audio unit/car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
POSSIBLECAUSE
x Burnt fuse (TNS signal)
x Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness
x Audio panel malfunction
1 x Are all illumination on the audio unit turned Yes Go to the next step.
OFF? No Replace the audio panel.
2 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Go to Step 4.
x Inspect the fuse (ILLUMI). No Go to the next step.
x Is the fuse normal?
3 x Disconnect the audio unit connector (24-pin) Yes Repair or replace the short circuit in the suspect wiring
and inspect the continuity between the audio harness. After repair the harness, replace with the
unit/car-navigation unit wiring harness-side appropriate standard fuse.
connector terminal 1E (TNS) and the ground. No Go to the next step.
4 x Inspect the connection of the audio unit/car- Yes Go to the next step.
navigation unit connector (24-pin). No If poor connection of audio unit/car-navigation
x Inspect both the audio unit/car-navigation
unit and wiring harness-side connector unit connector:
terminal 1E for poor connection (such as x Securely connect the audio unit/car-navigation unit
damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion). connector.
x Are all the pins normal? If the audio unit/car-navigation unit side
connector is wrong:
system).
INSTALLATION.)
5 x Connect the audio unit/car-navigation unit Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
connector (24-pin). (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Switch the ignition to ACC. Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation system)
x Inspect the voltage at the audio unit (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
connector terminal 1E (TNS). INSTALLATION.)
x Is the voltage B+ when the light switch is No Repair or replace the suspect wiring harness (TNS signal).
turned to the TNS position?
End Of Sie
NO.10 LCD DOES NOT DISPLAY AT ALL [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM]
10 LCD does not display at all

With M-MDS U3003:16, U0010:88
Audio unit
x 09:Er20
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
POSSIBLECAUSE x Car-navigation unit malfunction (with car-navigation system)
x Information display malfunction
1 x Inspect the information display. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-22-12 INFORMATION DISPLAY No Replace the information display.
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE.)
x Does the LCD display properly?
2 x Press either CLC or SET/INFO button on the Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
information display. (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Does the beep sound? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Replace both audio unit and information display.
(CAN communication malfunction)
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO]
09-03K SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [RADIO]

FOREWORD [RADIO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–1 NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY)
Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–1 [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–7
Quick Diagnostic Chart (Radio) . . . . . . 09-03K–2 NO.4 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION STOP) [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–8
CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) NO.5 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET
[RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–2 FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE)
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–9
SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) NO.6 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF
[RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–2 RADIO SLIPS [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–10
CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA REFERENCE [RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–10
SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION 1. Multipath Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–10
[RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–3 2. Flutter/Skip Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–11
NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/ 3. Stereo and Monaural Receptions . . . 09-03K–11
NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO] . . . . . . 09-03K–3 Measures in Audio System . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–11
NO.2 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY) Effect Setting of Separation Control and
[RADIO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–5 High Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03K–11
End of Toc
WM: AUDIO UNIT
EndFOREWORD
Of Sie [RADIO]
id0903e3803900
Note
x If the case location, time, and broadcasting station etc. can be specified through interview with the
customer, there is the possibility that the signal reception environment is the cause of the problem.
x Perform confirmation of symptom and evaluation under conditions that customer reported (location, time,
broadcasting station etc.). If not possible, perform it under equivalent conditions.
x Before inspection or repair, record the broadcasting stations that customer preset and reset them
accordingly after the inspection or repair. Adjust the clock too.
Possible DTC
No. Symptom Without M-MDS (On-board
With M-MDS
diagnostic test mode)
1 09-03K-3 NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO U3003:16 Audio unit
OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO] x 09:Er20
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 09/Error
code 20
2 09-03K-5 NO.2 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY)
— —
[RADIO]
3 09-03K-7 NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY)
— —
[RADIO]
4 09-03K-8 NO.4 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT U3003:16 Audio unit
STOP) [RADIO] x 09:Er20
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 09/Error
code 20 09
5 09-03K-9 NO.5 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET FUNCTION
— —
DOES NOT OPERATE) [RADIO]
6 09-03K-10 NO.6 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF RADIO
— —
SLIPS [RADIO]
Quick Diagnostic Chart (Radio)
X: Applicable
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cannot preset (preset function does not operate)

No radio reception (AM/FM)/No or low volume
Cannot tune (SEEK does not stop)
Reception frequency of radio slips

Possible factor
Noise from radio (AM only)
Noise from radio (FM only)

Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc) X X X
Audio unit/car-navigation unit X X X X X X
Antenna plug poor connection X X X X
Antenna feeder X X X X
Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave X X X X X
Antenna rod not installed X X X X
Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump) X X
Battery X X
Charging system X X
Antenna installation loosened X X
Audio panel X X
End Of Sie
CONFIRMATION STEP 1: RECEPTION CONDITION SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
Symptom Antenna signal condition Source

Only a buzzing sound from x There is no broadcasting wave. x Electric noise caused by the operation of
the speakers x Signals from antenna to audio unit are not internal circuit from audio unit itself
transmitted. x Atmosphere noise
A buzzing or crunching sound x Though signals are transmitted from x Electrical noise caused by operation of
and normal sound produced antenna to audio unit, electric noise from electrical component on vehicle
at the same time from the other sources is larger. x Electrical noise from high tension wire,
speakers transformer substation (factory), electrical
feeder line (street car), or motorcycle.
A thumping sound and x Noise occurs due to radio wave x Interference between direct and reflected
normal sound produced at the environment at specific places (e.g. in waves of FM signals causes noise
same time from the speakers valleys between buildings). Noise varies (Multipath noise).
(FM only) when own vehicle or surrounding vehicles
moves. (FM only)
End Of Sie
CONFIRMATION STEP 2: ANTENNA SYSTEM SYMPTOM (EXAMPLE) [RADIO]
Possible cause AM reception condition FM reception condition

x Antenna feeder axis, open circuit NG: No reception YES: Reception possible.
x Antenna feeder plug not attached (Sensitivity decreases, but reception is
possible under strong electric field.)
x Antenna feeder axis (+) to ground (-), open circuit NG: No reception NG: No reception
Possible cause AM reception condition FM reception condition
x Antenna feeder and antenna, poor ground YES: Reception possible YES: Reception possible
(Noise may occur) (Sensitivity decreases, but reception is
possible under strong electric field.)
x Antenna feeder, jack and plug poor connection NG: No reception YES: Reception possible
(Depending on connection (Depending on connection conditions)
conditions)
End Of Sie
CONFIRMATION STEP 3: ANTENNA SYSTEM SIMPLE INSPECTION [RADIO]
x Because the antenna system is equipped with a capacitor, the continuity cannot be checked. Therefore
proceed with the following simple inspection.
1. Turn the AM radio on.
2. Tune to the frequency that there is no broadcast and you will hear a buzzing sound.
3. Turn a fluorescent light on and shake it around the antenna (around10—20 mm {0.40—0.78 in})
Note
x Use a fluorescent light type for the
inspection. Accurate diagnostic cannot be
done with a different type of light.
4. If a whirring sound from the speaker

synchronized to the work light movement is
confirmed, the antenna system is normal.
End Of Sie
NO.1 NO RADIO RECEPTION (AM/FM)/NO OR LOW VOLUME [RADIO]
1 No radio reception (AM/FM)/no or low volume

With M-MDS U3003:16
Audio unit
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Jamming from aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way radio, navigation system, mobile phone,
etc.)
x Electronic jamming from outside, or inferior condition of broadcasting station radio wave
POSSIBLECAUSE x Antenna plug poor connection
x Antenna feeder malfunction
1 x Turn the audio unit ON. Yes Go to Step 3.
x Is the LCD indicated correctly? No Go to the next step.
2 x Measure voltage at B+ and ACC terminals. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is voltage okay? No Follow diagnostic procedure for symptom No. 2 (Entire
Specification audio system).
Switch the ignition to ON.: 11.5 V or more (See 09-03J-8 NO.2 NO POWER TO THE ENTIRE AUDIO
At idling: 12.5 V or more SYSTEM [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)
3 x Set volume to 20 to 30. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is buzzing sound or voice confirmed? No Follow diagnostic procedure for symptom No. 3 (Entire
audio system) or No. 4 (Entire audio system).
(See 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)
(See 09-03J-11 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM SOME
4 x Tune to local broadcasting station and check Yes Go to the next step.
reception condition. No Go to Step 6.
x Is reception okay?
5 x Push preset switches and check preset Yes The system is normal.
conditions. No Preset broadcasting stations.
x Has preset been stored?
6 x Is aftermarket electronic equipment (two-way Yes Go to the next step.
radio, navigation system, mobile phone, etc.) No Go to Step 8.
installed?
Note
x TV antenna located closely to audio
antenna can be cause of noise. Relocate
TV antenna.
7 x Remove aftermarket electronic equipment. Yes The system is normal.
x Turn audio unit ON and check reception (Explain to customers that aftermarket electronic equipment
condition. is cause of noise)
x Is reception improved? No Go to the next step.
8 x Refer to confirmation step 3, and inspect Yes Replace audio unit.
antenna system. No Go to the next step.
x Is a whirring sound present?
9 x Inspect antenna plug connection condition. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is connection okay? No Insert antenna plug securely.
10 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Replace antenna feeder.
x Measure continuity between antenna feeder No 4SD
axis and ground.
x Is there any continuity?
5HB/WGN
x Replace the antenna amplifier, than go to the next step.
11 x Compare reception with other audio unit on Yes The system is normal.
same model (model/unit) under same (It is caused by electronic jamming from outside, or inferior
problem conditions. broadcasting station signal condition.)
x Is reception equivalent between customer’s No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
unit and compared unit? (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Note system).
x Due to following differences, you may feel (See: 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
difference in reception efficiency. INSTALLATION.)
(Vehicle side factor)
— Antenna installation location, height,
feeder wiring routing, optional electrical
equipment
(Audio unit/car-navigation unit
factor)
— Volume concern type: It decreases
change of volume when signals
become weak. (Noise is conspicuous)
— Noise decrease type: It decreases
volume when signals become weak, so
that noise is not conspicuous.
NO.2 NOISE FROM RADIO (AM ONLY) [RADIO]
2 Noise from radio (AM only)

Possible DTC —
etc.)
x Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump)
POSSIBLECAUSE
x Charging system malfunction
x Antenna plug poor connection
1 x Tune to local broadcasting station and check Yes Tune to correct frequency of broadcasting station.
reception condition. If not preset, preset it.
x Is reception okay? No Go to the next step.
2 x Inspect the glass antenna. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-20-24 GLASS ANTENNA No Repair the glass antenna.
INSPECTION.) (See 09-12-50 FILAMENT REPAIR.)
x Is the glass antenna normal?
installed?
Note
x TV antenna located closely to audio
antenna can be cause of noise. Relocate
TV antenna.
4 x Remove aftermarket electronic equipment. Yes The system is normal. (Explain to customers that
x Turn the audio unit power to on and check aftermarket electronic equipment is cause of noise)
reception condition. No Go to the next step.
x Is reception improved?
5 x Measure battery voltage. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is battery voltage okay? No Charge battery. Inspect charging system, and repair or
Standard replace if necessary.
Switch the ignition to ON: 11.5 V or more
At idling: 12.5 V or more
Note
x Inspect that battery cables are connected
to terminals securely.
6 x Is noise occurring only when vehicle Yes Go to the next step.
electrical system (e.g. fuel pump) operates? No Go to Step 8.
Note
x Identify subject electrical component by
disconnecting fuse, turning switch ON &
OFF, or disconnecting & connecting
connector.
x It will be easy when simulation function on
M-MDS is used.
7 x Inspect power supply, ground condition, and Yes Go to the next step.
noise prevention capacitor for electrical No Troubleshooting completed.
component.
x Is noise present after inspection? Note
x The audio unit supplies 12 V battery power to the
Note antenna amplifier for the AM radio reception in the
x Inspect following: radio mode. The audio unit cannot receive the AM
— Power supply to electrical component signals without the 12 V battery power to the antenna
for voltage drop (compare with battery amplifier. If the AM signals become strong, the audio
voltage) unit may receive the signal with noises.
— Resistance between ground of
electrical component and body.
(Should be close to 0 ohm)
— Installation condition of noise
prevention capacitor for fuel pump etc.
x Measure continuity between antenna feeder No Go to the next step.
axis and ground.
10 x Compare reception with other audio unit on Yes The system is normal (It is caused by electronic jamming
same model (model/unit) under same from outside, or inferior broadcasting station signal
problem conditions. condition).
x Is reception equivalent between customer’s No Go to the next step.
unit and compared unit?
Note
x Due to following differences, you may
detect a difference in reception efficiency.
(Vehicle side factor)
— Antenna installation location, height,
feeder wiring routing, optional electrical
equipment
(Audio unit factor)
— Volume concern type: It decreases
change of volume when signals
become weak. (Noise is conspicuous)
— Noise decrease type: It decreases
volume when signals become weak, so
that noise is not conspicuous.
11 x Retighten ground fixation for antenna Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
installation part and antenna amplifier. (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is noise present, after retightening? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
(See: 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
End Of Sie
NO.3 NOISE FROM RADIO (FM ONLY) [RADIO]
3 Noise from radio (FM only)

Possible DTC —
etc.)
x Noise from electrical system on vehicle (e.g. fuel pump)
x Charging system malfunction
POSSIBLECAUSE x Antenna feeder malfunction
Note
x FM broadcast has feature “sound quality is good” and “resistant to noise”, but FM broadcast has
particular noises. Though audio unit is designed to reduce noise, there are times noise occurs
due to conditions.
1 x Tune to local broadcasting station and check Yes Tune to correct frequency of broadcasting station.
reception condition. If not preset, preset it.
x Is reception okay? No Go to the next step.
2 x Inspect the glass antenna. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-20-24 GLASS ANTENNA No Repair the glass antenna.
INSPECTION.)
x Is the glass antenna normal?
installed?
4 x Remove aftermarket electronic equipment. Yes The system is normal. (Explain to customers that
x Turn the audio unit power to on and check aftermarket electronic equipment is cause of noise)
reception condition. No Go to the next step.
x Is reception improved?
5 x Measure battery voltage. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is battery voltage okay? No Charge battery. Inspect charging system, and repair or
Standard replace if necessary.
Switch the ignition ON: 11.5 V or more
At idling: 12.5 V or more
Note
x Inspect that battery cables are connected
to terminals securely.
6 x Is noise occurring only when vehicle Yes Go to the next step.
electrical system (e.g. fuel pump) operates? No Go to Step 8.
Note
x Identify subject electrical component by
disconnecting fuse, turning switch ON &
OFF, or disconnecting & connecting
connector.
x It will be easy when simulation function on
M-MDS is used.
7 x Inspect power supply, ground condition, and Yes Go to the next step.
noise prevention capacitor for electrical No Troubleshooting completed.
component.
x Is noise present after inspection?
Note
x Inspect following:
— Power supply to electrical component
for voltage drop (compare with battery
voltage)
— Resistance between ground of
electrical component and body.
(Should be close to 0 ohm)
— Installation condition of noise
prevention capacitor for fuel pump etc.
axis and ground.
10 x Compare reception with other audio unit on Yes The system is normal (It is caused by electronic jamming
same model (model/unit) under same from outside, or inferior broadcasting station signal
problem conditions. condition).
x Is reception equivalent between customer’s No Go to the next step.
unit and compared unit?
11 x Retighten ground fixation for antenna Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
installation part and antenna amplifier. (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is noise present, after retightening? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
Note (See: 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
x When antenna is not grounded perfectly, INSTALLATION.)
FM particular noise is likely to be No Troubleshooting completed.
conspicuous.
End Of Sie
NO.4 CANNOT TUNE (SEEK DOES NOT STOP) [RADIO]
4 Cannot tune (SEEK does not stop)

With M-MDS U3003:16
Audio unit
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
POSSIBLECAUSE
1 x Inspect if feel of SEEK switch is normal when Yes Go to the next step.
switch is pushed and released. No Perform confirmation step 1: audio panel switch
x Is it okay? confirmation.
(See 09-03J-4 CONFIRMATION STEP 1: AUDIO PANEL
SWITCH CONFIRMATION [ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)
Replace audio panel if necessary.
2 x Inspect indication of LCD. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is frequency indication increased or No Perform confirmation step 1: audio panel switch
decreased when SEEK switch is pushed confirmation.
Replace audio panel if necessary.
3 x Manually tune to local broadcasting station Yes Go to Step 6.
and check reception condition. No Go to the next step.
x Is reception okay?
axis and ground.
6 x Check if number of broadcasting stations Yes The system is normal. (Explain to customer that SEEK
changes depending on time and place. sometimes does not stop depending on signal reception
x Does it change? condition.)
Note
x Signals tend to reach longer distances at night. It is
conspicuous in AM signals, several audio functions
may stop due to foreign broadcasting station or noise.
Though the audio system restrains sensitivity of
SEEK and SCAN functions at night, the audio system
may select other than desired broadcasting station
when signals are considerably strong. This function is
linked to the parking light. When the parking light or
headlight is turned on, SEEK and SCAN may not
function for weak signals.
No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
(See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.5 CANNOT PRESET (PRESET FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE) [RADIO]
5 Cannot preset (preset function does not operate)

Possible DTC —
POSSIBLECAUSE x Audio unit malfunction (with audio system)
1 x Tune to desired station and push channel Yes Go to the next step.
preset button 1 for about 2 s to store it. No Go to Step 3 (with audio system).
x Repeat above for other stations using Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
channel preset buttons 2 to 5. system).
x Push channel preset button 1 to 6 one by (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
one. INSTALLATION.)
x Are stored stations present?
2 x Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Yes The system is normal. (Explain preset procedure to
x Check if preset stations are stored by customer using Owner’s Manual)
pushing preset switch. No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Are stations stored? (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Remove the audio unit, and reinstall the (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
audio unit. No The system is normal.
x Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
x Turn the audio unit power to on.
x While pressing the POWER/VOLUME
switch, simultaneously press the PRESET 3
switch for 0.2 s or more.
x Push all buttons and check if buzzer sounds.
x Are all buttons okay?
End Of Sie
NO.6 RECEPTION FREQUENCY OF RADIO SLIPS [RADIO]
6 Reception frequency of radio slip

Possible DTC —
POSSIBLECAUSE x Car-navigation unit malfunction (with car-navigation system)
1 x Push SEEK switch and check if desired Yes Go to Step 3.
broadcasting station is tuned. No Go to the next step.
x Is it okay?
2 x Check if other broadcasting station is Yes Go to the next step.
received at certain place when indication of No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
reception frequency stays. (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is other station received? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
Note (See: 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
x When you receive weak signal from one INSTALLATION.)
broadcasting station and come close to
broadcasting antenna which emits strong
signal, broadcasting with strong signal is
sometimes received.
3 x Compare reception with other audio unit on Yes Troubleshooting completed (Audio unit/car-navigation unit is
same model (model/unit) under same normal).
problem conditions. No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Is reception equivalent between customer’s (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
unit and compared unit? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
REFERENCE [RADIO]
1. Multipath Noise
x Signals from an FM transmitter are a high frequency and similar to beams of light because they do not bend
around corners, but they do reflect. Since FM signals can be reflected by obstructions, it is possible to receive
both the direct signal and the reflected signal at the same time. This causes a slight delay in reception and may
be heard as a broken sound or a distortion.
2. Flutter/Skip Noise
x Signals become weak in valleys between mountains, tall building, and other obstacles. When the vehicle
passes through such an area, the reception conditions may change suddenly, resulting in annoying noise.
3. Stereo and Monaural Receptions

x As signals become weak, noise may appear more in stereo reception. Comparing to stereo reception, noise in
monaural receptions is relatively less striking.
Measures in Audio System

Separation control
x Utilizing the characteristic of monaural reception that noise is relatively less striking than stereo reception, the
audio system automatically changes the reception from stereo to monaural and lessens annoying noise when
signals become weak or a multipath phenomenon occurs.
High tone control

x When signals become weak or a multipath phenomenon occurs, the audio system restrains volume level in
high frequency band and lessens annoying noise.
Effect Setting of Separation Control and High Tone Control

x The separation and high tone controls influence sound quality, Therefore they are specifically tuned for
individual model. (Comparison of characteristic must be done on the same models)
High tone setting Less effective range Noise is conspicuous
Noise restraint setting Wider effective range Noise is less conspicuous
Remarks
x Signals tend to reach longer distances at night. It is conspicuous in AM signals, several audio functions may
stop due to foreign broadcasting station or noise. Though the audio system restrains sensitivity of SEEK and
SCAN functions at night, the audio system may select other than desired broadcasting station when signals are
considerably strong. This function is linked to the parking light. When the parking light or headlight is turned on,
SEEK and SCAN may not function for weak signals.
Daytime
A: The level that AUTO-M, SEEK, SCAN function.
AUTO-M, SEEK, and SCAN tune to 4 broadcasting stations (C, E, H, and J)
Signal strength
A
530 A st. B st. C st. D st. E st. F st. G st. H st. I st. J st. 1710
Frequency (kHz)
Night
When the TNS is turned on: 4 broadcasting
stations are tuned, just like daytime.
Signal strength
B
A
530 A st. B st. C st. D st. E st. F st. G st. H st. I st. J st. 1710
Frequency (kHz)
When the TNS is turned off: As signal strength is higher at night, AUTO-M, SEEK, and
SCAN tune to 10 broadcasting stations (A to J st.).
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
09-03L SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CD PLAYER/

CHANGER]
FOREWORD NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–1 THE MP3/WMA-FORMATTED FILE
Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–1 [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–8
NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT NO.8 MP3/WMA-FORMATTED FILE
LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS FOLDER SELECTION IS
THE CD IMMEDIATELY INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–4 IS INOPERATIVE
NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–9
NOT EJECT THE CD NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–5 THE MP3/WMA TITLE TEXT
NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–10
NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–6 THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA)
NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–11
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–6 NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE
NO.5 CD PLAYER/CHANGER [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–12
SCRATCHES ON THE CD REFERENCE
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–7 [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–13
NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE MP3/WMA-Formatted File. . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–13
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03L–8
End of Toc
FOREWORD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
Possible DTC
No. Items Symptom With M-MDS Without M-MDS (On-
board diagnostic test
mode)
1 CD player/changer 09-03L-4 NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER Audio unit
DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS x 10:Er01
THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD PLAYER/ x 22:Er01
CHANGER] B1D19:79
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 01
2 09-03L-5 NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER Audio unit
DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD PLAYER/ x 10:Er01
CHANGER] x 22:Er01
B1D19:79
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 01
DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD x 10:Er01
PLAYER/CHANGER] x 22:Er01
B1D19:79
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
09
Error code 01
4 09-03L-6 NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD
— —
PLAYER/CHANGER]
SCRATCHES ON THE CD [CD PLAYER/ x 10:Er07
CHANGER] x 22:Er07
B1188:64
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 07
Possible DTC
No. Items Symptom With M-MDS Without M-MDS (On-
board diagnostic test
mode)
6 CD changer 09-03L-8 NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS Audio unit
INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] x 10:Er07
x 22:Er07
B1188:64
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 07
7 CD player/changer 09-03L-8 NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT Audio unit
(MP3 /WMA PLAY THE MP3/WMA-FORMATTED FILE x 10:Er07
(Windows media [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] x 22:Er07
audio) formatted file B1188:64
Car-navigation unit
payback function) x Device code 22/
Error code 07
8 09-03L-9 NO.8 MP3/WMA-FORMATTED Audio unit
FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS x 10:Er02
INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH IS x 22:Er02
INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] B1D19:71
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 02
9 09-03L-10 NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT Audio unit
INDICATE THE MP3/WMA TITLE TEXT x 10:Er02, 07
[CD PLAYER/CHANGER] x 22:Er02, 07
B1188:64, B1D19:71
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 02, 07
10 09-03L-11 NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT Audio unit
PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD x 10:Er02, 07
PLAYER/CHANGER] x 22:Er02, 07
B1188:64, B1D19:71
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 02, 07
11 CD player/changer 09-03L-12 NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS Audio unit
INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER] x 10:Er02
x 22:Er02
B1D19:71
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/
Error code 02
X: Applicable
CD player/changer
CD player/changer
CD changer
(MP3/WMA
CD player/changer (Windows media audio)
formatted file
payback function)
Troubleshooting Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CD player dose not play the MP3/WMA-formatted file
CD player dose not indicate the MP3/WMA title text

CD player/changer dose not play the CD/No sound
CD player/changer dose not load the CD or ejects
CD player dose not play the audio data (CODA)

MP3/WMA-formatted file folder selection is
CD player/changer dose not eject the CD
CD player/changer scratches on the CD
inoperative/ Track search is inoperative
Track change is inoperative

Disc change is inoperative
Possible factor
the CD immediately
Sound jumps
CD is inserted upside down X X
Audio unit/car-navigation unit malfunction X X X X X X X
Defective CD (egg., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty
X X X X X
CD, condensation)
Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter,
X X X X
heart-shaped disc, octagonal disc)
Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged,
X X
bent, pull-out pin, corrosion)
Improper audio panel installation X X
Improper CD cover installation X
Improper audio unit installation (e.g., rattle, loose) X
Inadequate tire pressure X
Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness),
X X X
bent disc)
Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time X X
Audio panel malfunction X X
CD-R/RW written format is out of specification X X
MP3/WMA and other format data are in the CD-R/RW X
File extension for MP3-formatted file is incorrect (Correct: ".mp3 h/ h.wma ",
X
Incorrect: e.g., RIFF)
Defective CD-R/RW (e.g., dirty, scratch) X X X X
CD-R/RW (MP3/WMA files are all written to RIFF format) X
Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW X X
Improper folder and/or music title in CD-R/RW X
The number of characters of folder/music file name in CD-R/RW
X X
exceeds the maximum number of characters
Improper encode in CD-R/RW X X
MP3/WMA applicable CD player malfunction X X X X X 09
No title input in CD-R/RW X
Input title text by 2-bytes characters X
Data other than the audio data is in CD-R/RW X
End Of Sie
NO.1 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD THE CD OR EJECTS THE CD IMMEDIATELY [CD PLAYER/
CHANGER]
1 CD player/changer does not load the CD or ejects the CD immediately

With M-MDS B1D19:79
Audio unit
Without M-MDS x 22:Er01
Car-navigation unit
x Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation)
POSSIBLECAUSE
x Non-conventional discs (e.g., 8 cm (3 in) CD, 8 cm (3 in) disc adapter, heart-shaped disc, octagonal
disc)
x Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-out pin, corrosion)
x Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)
1 x Is CD inserted properly, label-side up? Yes Go to the next step.
No Explain to the customer that CD should be inserted into the
slot, label-side up.
2 x Replace with a CD known to be good. Yes Go to the next step.
x Does the CD player/changer load the CD? No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
system).
INSTALLATION.)
3 x Visually inspect the CD. Yes Explain to the customer that the defective CD or non-
— Is there any dirt, scratch or deformation conventional disc cannot be use.
on the CD? No Go to the next step.
— Is the CD a non-conventional disc?
x Inspect the connection of the audio unit/car- (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
navigation unit connector (24-pin). Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
x Inspect both audio unit/car-navigation unit system).
connector and wiring harness-side connector (See: 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
for poor connection. (such as damaged/bent/ INSTALLATION.)
pulled-out pins, corrosion) No If the audio unit/car-navigation unit connector/ pin
x All the pins and connector normal?
is wrong:
system).
INSTALLATION.)
If the wiring harness-side connector/pin is wrong:
End Of Sie
NO.2 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT EJECT THE CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
2 CD player/changer does not eject the CD

With M-MDS B1D19:79
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
x Defective CD. (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough edges, scratch, dirty CD, condensation)
disc)
x Poor connection of audio unit connector or terminal (e.g., damaged, bent, pulled-out pin, corrosion)
x Improper audio panel installation
x Improper CD cover installation
x Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc).
POSSIBLECAUSE x Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time
Note
x The CD may be malfunctioning if the CD player/changer does not eject the certain CD only.
Inspect the CD player/changer operation using the CD known to be good.
1 x Inspect the operation of the audio system Yes Go to Step 3.
other than CD player/changer (e.g. Radio). No Go to the next step.
x Does other audio system operate?
x Inspect the connection of the audio unit/car- No If the audio unit/car-navigation unit connector/pin
navigation unit connector (24-pin).
x Inspect both audio unit/car-navigation unit is wrong:
connector and wiring harness-side connector x Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
for poor connection. (such as damaged/bent/ (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
pulled-out pins, corrosion) x Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
x All the pins and connector normal? system).
INSTALLATION.)
If the wiring harness-side connector/pin is wrong:
3 x Eject the CD. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the CD ejected from the CD player/ No Inspect the audio panel and CD cover installation. Securely
changer? install the audio panel and/or CD cover as necessary.
4 x Insert the CD into the CD player/changer. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Does the CD insert into the CD player/ (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
changer smoothly? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Install the audio panel and/or CD cover properly, then go to
the next step. 09
5 x Is the CD ejected from the CD player/ Yes Troubleshooting completed.
changer? Explain repairs to the customers.
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
3 CD player/changer does not play the CD/No sound

With M-MDS B1D19:79
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
POSSIBLECAUSE
disc)
1 x Turn the radio ON and inspect that there is Yes Go to the next step.
sound. No Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.3 (Audio system).
x Is there sound? (See 09-03J-9 NO.3 NO SOUND FROM ALL SPEAKERS
[ENTIRE AUDIO SYSTEM].)
Note
x Check for the volume dial position.
2 x Was CD inserted properly, label-side up? Yes Go to the next step.
No Explain to the customer that CD should be inserted into the
slot, label-side up.
3 x Replace the CD known to be good. Yes Go to the next step.
x Does the CD player/changer load the CD? No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
system).
INSTALLATION.)
4 x Visually inspect the CD. Yes Explain to the customer that the defective CD or non-
— Is there any dirt, scratch or deformation conventional disc cannot be use.
on the CD? No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
— Is the CD a non-conventional disc? (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— Is there a CD in MP3/WMA recording? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.4 SOUND JUMPS [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
4 Sound jumps
Possible DTC —
x Improper audio unit installation (e.g., rattle, loose)
POSSIBLECAUSE x Inadequate tire pressure
Note
x The CD may be malfunctioning if the sound jumps on the certain CD only. Inspect the CD player/
changer operation using the CD known to be good.
1 x Does the sound jump when the vehicle is Yes Go to Step 6.
stopped? No Go to the next step.
2 x Drive the vehicle. Yes Go to the next step.
x Does the sound jump when driving over No Go to Step 6.
uneven surfaces?
3 x Is the audio unit installed securely? Yes Go to the next step.
No Install the audio unit securely.
4 x Inspect the tire pressure. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Is the tire pressure normal? (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
system).
INSTALLATION.)
5 x Adjust the tire pressure within specification. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Does the sound jump when driving the (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
vehicle? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Audio system is normal. Explain repairs to the customers.
6 x Replace the CD known to be good. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Does the sound jump when driving the (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
vehicle? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD
is malfunctioning.
End Of Sie
NO.5 CD PLAYER/CHANGER SCRATCHES ON THE CD [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
5 CD player/changer scratches on the CD

With M-MDS B1188:64
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
x Deformed disc is used (e.g., out of specification (thickness), bent disc)
x Multiple CDs are inserted into the CD player at the same time
POSSIBLECAUSE
1 x Were the multiple CDs inserted into the CD Yes Explain to the customer to insert a CD one by one. 09
player at the same time? No Go to the next step.
2 x Visually inspect the CD. Yes Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the CD
x Is the CD a deformed disc (e.g., out of is malfunctioning.
specification (thickness), bent disc)? No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.6 DISC CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
6 Disc change is inoperative

With M-MDS B1188:64
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
POSSIBLECAUSE
x Improper audio panel installation
1 x Inspect the CD changer operation. Yes Go to the next step.
x Does the CD changer operate properly? No Go to the symptom troubleshooting “No.3 CD player/
changer does not play the CD/No sound”.
(See 09-03L-6 NO.3 CD PLAYER/CHANGER DOES NOT
PLAY THE CD/NO SOUND [CD PLAYER/CHANGER].)
2 x Inspect the followings: Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
— Is the display shown properly when (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
operating the disc change button? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
— Does the radio band selection operate system).
properly? (See: 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3 x Inspect the audio panel installation. Yes Install the audio panel securely and properly.
x Does the CD changer change the disc No Go to the “No.1 Audio panel switch inspection” in this
properly after re-installing the audio panel? section. Replace the audio panel as necessary.
End Of Sie
NO.7 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE MP3/WMA-FORMATTED FILE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
7 CD player does not play the MP3/WMA-formatted file

With M-MDS B1188:64
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
x CD-R/RW written format is out of specification
x MP3/WMA and other format data are in the CD-R/RW
x File extension for MP3/WMA-formatted file is incorrect (Correct. “.mp3“,“.wma”, incorrect: e.g.,
RIFF)
x Defective CD-R/RW (e.g. dirty CD, scratch)
x MP3/WMA applicable CD player malfunction
Note
POSSIBLECAUSE
x The free-software for the MP3/WMA-formatted file in the field may cause the deterioration of
sound quality, noise, or defective play, so that the CD player won’t play the customer made MP3/
WMA-formatted file.
x The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition.
x If there are MP3/WMA-formatted file and other file in the same disc, the CD player may not play
the disc.
x If there are MP3/WMA-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD player loads and
plays the first session of the data only.
1 x Inspect the written format of the recorded Yes Go to the next step.
data on the CD-R/RW. No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct specification.
x Is the written format correct?
2 x Inspect the recorded data in the CD-R/RW. Yes Replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (MP3/WMA-
x Is there MP3/WMA and other format data in formatted file data only), then inspect the CD player
the CD-R/RW. operation.
If the CD player plays the MP3/WMA-formatted file:
x Audio system is normal. Explain to the customer that the
CD player does not operate properly if the MP3/WMA
and other format data are in the CD-R/RW.
If the CD player does not play the MP3/WMA-
formatted file:
system).
INSTALLATION.)
3 x Inspect the CD-R/RW written format. Yes Replace with the CD-R/RW using the “.mp3”,”.wma” file
x Is the written format within the specification extension, then inspect the CD player operation.
(“.mp3”,”.wma” is the correct file extension)? If the CD player plays the MP3/WMA-formatted file:
CD player does not operate properly if the correct file
extension is not used.
If the CD player does not play the MP3/WMA-
formatted file:
x Replace the audio unit.
4 x Visually inspect the CD-R/RW. Yes Clean the disc or replace with the CD-R/RW known to be
x Is there any dirt or scratch on the CD-R/RW? good.
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.8 MP3/WMA-FORMATTED FILE FOLDER SELECTION IS INOPERATIVE/TRACK SEARCH IS
INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
8 MP3/WMA-formatted file folder selection is inoperative/track search is inoperative

With M-MDS B1D19:71
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/Error code 02 09
x Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW (MP3)
x Improper folder and/or music title in CD-R/RW
POSSIBLECAUSE x The number of characters of folder/audio file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum number of
characters
x Improper encode in CD-R/RW
Note
x ID3 is a tagging format for MP3-formatted file. ID3 allows metadata (e.g., title, artist, track number, etc.) to
be added to the MP3-formatted file.
x There are two versions in the ID tag.
— ID3v1: This is the most widespread standard tag formats and most software is compatible with this
version. There is a limitation on the maximum number of characters for the text data.
— ID3v2: There are a variety of version in V2, but there is no interchangeability among the versions.
Limitation on the maximum number of characters for the text data (ID3v1)
Item Maximum number of characters Description
Title 30 Music title
Artist 30 Artist name
Album 30 Album title
Year 4 Album produced year/CD wholesale year
Genre — Music category selection
Comment 30 Free comment
Track 3 Track number
x In a WMA file, the track name, artist name and album name are recorded with data called “WMA-Tag”, and
the information can be displayed.
x WMA files which do not comply with the specific standard may not be played correctly or its file and folder
name may not be displayed correctly.
x The file extension may not be provided depending on the computer operating system, version, software,
or settings.
In this case, add the file extension “.wma” to the end of the file name, and then write the disc.
x Is there any dirt or scratch on the CD/R/RW? good.
No Go to the next step.(MP3)
Go to step 3.(WMA)
2 x Inspect the ID tag version. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is ID tag correct? No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag version.
3 x Inspect folder and audio file name. Yes Go to the next step.
x Are all file name input correctly? No Use the CD-R/RW that a folder and audio file name is input
correctly.
4 x Inspect the encode for the folder and audio Yes Go to the next step.
file name in the CD-R/RW. No Use the correct encode.
x Is the encode correct?
Note
x Unreadable characters may be displayed
if incorrect encode is used.
5 x Inspect the number of characters for the Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
folder and audio file name. (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is the number of characters within the Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
maximum number of characters? system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Input the folder and audio file name within the maximum
number of characters.
End Of Sie
NO.9 CD PLAYER DOES NOT INDICATE THE MP3/WMA TITLE TEXT [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
9 CD player does not indicate the MP3/WMA title text

With M-MDS B1188:64, B1D19:71
Audio unit
Possible DTC x 10:Er02, 07
Without M-MDS x 22:Er02, 07
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 22/Error code 02, 07
x Conflict of ID tag version for CD-R/RW
x The number of characters of folder/audio file name in CD-R/RW exceeds the maximum number of
characters
POSSIBLECAUSE
x Improper encode in CD-R/RW
x No title input in CD-R/RW
x Input title text by 2-bytes characters
x Is there any dirt or scratches on the CD/R/ good.
RW? No Go to the next step.
2 x Inspect the display the LCD. Yes Go to the next step.(MP3)
x Is the CD (other than MP3/WMA compatible) Go to step 4.(WMA)
displayed on the LCD? No Go to the symptom troubleshooting No.9 (Entire audio
system).
3 x Inspect the ID tag version. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the ID tag correct? No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct ID tag version.
4 x Is the title text input into the CD-R/RW? Yes Go to the next step.
No Input the title text.
Note
x Do not input the title text by two-bytes character.
5 x Inspect the encode for the folder and audio Yes Go to the next step.
file name in the CD-R/RW. No Use the correct encode.
x Is the encode correct?
6 x Inspect the number of characters for the Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
folder and audio file name. (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is the number of characters within the Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
maximum number of characters? system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Input the folder and audio file name within the maximum
number of characters.
End Of Sie
NO.10 CD PLAYER DOES NOT PLAY THE AUDIO DATA (CDDA) [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
10 CD player does not play the audio data (CDDA)

With M-MDS B1188:64, B1D19:71
Audio unit
Without M-MDS x 22:Er02, 07
Car-navigation unit
x CD-R/RW written format is out of specification
x Defective CD-R/RW (e.g., dirty CD, scratch)
x Data other than the audio data is in CD-R/RW
POSSIBLECAUSE
Note
x The CD player may not play the CD-R/RW properly due to the disc condition.
x If there are MP3/WMA-formatted file and audio data in the same disc, the CD player loads and
plays the first session of the data only.
STEP INSPECTION ACTION 09
1 x Replace with the audio-CD known to be Yes Go to the next step.
good. No Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Does the CD player play the audio-CD (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
properly? Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
system).
INSTALLATION.)
2 x Inspect the written format of the recorded Yes Go to the next step.
data on the CD-R/RW. No Write the CD-R/RW with the correct specification.
x Is the written format correct?
3 x Inspect the recorded data in the CD-R/RW. Yes Replace with the CD-R/RW known to be good (record audio
x Is any data other than the audio data data only), then inspect the CD player operation.
recorded in the CD-R/RW? If the CD-R/RW plays:
CD player does not operate properly if the audio data
and other data are recorded in the CD-R/RW.
If the CD-R/RW does not play:
system).
INSTALLATION.)
x Is there any dirt or scratch on the CD-R/RW? good.
system).
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.11 TRACK CHANGE IS INOPERATIVE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
11 Track change is inoperative

With M-MDS B1D19:71
Audio unit
Car-navigation unit
disc)
POSSIBLECAUSE
1 x Replace the CD known to be good. Yes Explain to the customer that the defective CD or non-
x Does the CD player change the track? conventional disc cannot be used.
2 x Inspect the audio panel installation. Yes Replace the audio unit (with audio system).
x Does the CD player change the track number (See: 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
on the display when pressing the track up or Replace the car-navigation unit (with car-navigation
down button? system).
INSTALLATION.)
No Go to the “No.1 Audio panel switch inspection” in this
section. Replace the audio panel as necessary.
End Of Sie
REFERENCE [CD PLAYER/CHANGER]
x The CD player/changer has been designed to
play CDs bearing the identification logo,
COMPACT DISC DIGITAL AUDIO, as shown. No
other discs can be played on the CD player/
changer other than MP3/WMA applicable one.
x The CD player/changer may not play the following
CD:
— Defective CD (e.g., cracked, badly bent, rough
edges, scratch, dirty CD condensation)
— 8 cm (3 in) CDs accessories (e.g., 8 cm (3 in)
disc adapter, sticker, label)
— Nonstandard CD (e.g., Diameter/thickness is
out of specification)
Specification:
119.7—120.3 mm (4.668—4.692 in) of diameter, 1.2+0.3 or -0.1 mm (0.047+0.012 or 0.004 in) of thickness
x Do not use non-conventional discs. The CD player/changer could be damaged.
Examples:
x Although the same physical size as the compact
disc, SACD uses a different kind of digital audio NO GOOD
signal, Direct Stream Digital.
x The CD player/changer may not play the CD-R/
RW properly due to the disc condition (excluding
the MP3/WMA).
MP3/WMA-Formatted File
Outline of CD-R and CD-RW
x Definition
— CD-R: The CD-R is a non-rewritable version. Once a section of a CD-R is written, it cannot be erased or
rewritten.
— CD-RW: The CD-RW is a rewritable version of CD-ROM and can be written the data an unlimited number
of times.
— Since a reflected laser beam amount of the CD-R/RW is less than the reflected laser beam amount of the
conventional CD media, the CD player/changer may not play the CD-R/RW or have the sound jumped.
— Since the recording quality of the CD-R/RW vary widely, some CD-R/RW may not be played.
Recording method
x There are two methods for recording. 09
x Classification by recorder
— Record the audio data in the audio-CD by audio recorder
x The price of the audio recorder and original audio-CD includes the copyright fee.
— Recorded the audio data in the conventional data-CD by the personal computer
x The data-CD is cheaper than the audio-CD. But, there is a CD with the low quality.
x Classification by audio data uncompression/compression
— Uncompressed audio data
x The CD-R/RW player can play the uncompressed audio data.
— Compressed audio data
x It is possible to record the large quantity of music in a disc. The sound quality varies depends on the
audio data compression format. The compressed audio data can be played on the applicable player
only.
— Type of compression format:
x MP3: MPEG Audio Layer 3 — Mazda genie MP3 applicable CD player is available.
x WMA: Windows Media Audio — Mazda genie MP3 applicable CD player is available.
x ATRAG: Adaptive Transform Acoustic Coding
MP3
x The following condition should be met in order to record the MP3-formatted data on the MP3 applicable CD
player:
Media Applicable to the CD-R/RW
Logical format ISO 9660 level 1&2 /Joliet /Romeo
Number of directly 8 directly
Number of files Maximum 255 as a total number of file and folder
Maximum 155 for folder
ID3 TAG Applicable to Ver1.1, 2.3 and 2.4
File extension MP3
Packet writing Not applicable
Bit rate 8kbps—320kbps/VBR
Sampling rate 11.025kHz—48kHz
WMA
x CD-R and CD-R W including WMA files can be played with this unit. Discs which conform to the following
formats can be played.
Playable WMA files are as follows:
Item Content
Specification Windows Media Audio Version 7.0, 8.0, 9.0
32kHz. . . . . . . 32, 40, 48 kbps
Sampling
Bit rate 44.1kHz . . . . . 32, 48,64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 kbps
frequency
48kHz. . . . . . . 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 kbps
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) Supported
Channel mode Stereo/Monaural
WMA tag Title, artist name, album name
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
09-03M SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [CAR-

NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
FOREWORD NO.5 VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-03M–1 FROM THE ROUTE MAP
Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03M–1 [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03M–8
Quick diagnostic chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03M–2 NO.6 NO VOICE NAVIGATION
NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03M–10
NOT START OPERATION (DISPLAY NO.7 DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT
CHANGES TO BACK.) CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-03M–3 (FRONT AND REAR COMBINATION
NO.2 SYSTEM DOES NOT CONTROL LIGHTS OPERATE NORMALLY.)
AUDIO BY STEERING SWITCH [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03M–12
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-03M–3 NO.8 SPEECH RECOGNITION
NO.3 SYSTEM DOES NOT DOES NOT START
LOAD MAP DISC. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03M–12
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-03M–4 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
NO.4 NO SOUND FROM AUDIO SYSTEM [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-03M–14
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM] . . . . . . . 09-03M–5 Starting Procedure For Diagnostic
Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03M–5 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03M–14
If inspect microphone related
signals: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03M–15
If inspect gyro sensor signals: . . . . . . . . 09-03M–15
End of Toc
FOREWORD [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
TEM
No. Malfunction symptom
09-03M-3 NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT START OPERATION (DISPLAY CHANGES TO BACK.)
1
[CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
2 09-03M-3 NO.2 SYSTEM DOES NOT CONTROL AUDIO BY STEERING SWITCH [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
3 09-03M-4 NO.3 SYSTEM DOES NOT LOAD MAP DISC. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
4 09-03M-5 NO.4 NO SOUND FROM AUDIO SYSTEM [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
5 09-03M-8 NO.5 VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES FROM THE ROUTE MAP [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
6 09-03M-10 NO.6 NO VOICE NAVIGATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
09-03M-12 NO.7 DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE (FRONT AND REAR
7
COMBINATION LIGHTS OPERATE NORMALLY.) [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
8 09-03M-12 NO.8 SPEECH RECOGNITION DOES NOT START [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
09
Quick diagnostic chart
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Speech recognition does not start.

System does not control audio by
Display screen does not change

System does not load map disc.
Car-navigation system does not
Vehicle position deviates from

No sound from audio system
No voice navigation.
to the night mode.

steering switch.
start operation.
the route map.

Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (power supply (B+ and/or ACC))wiring harness x
Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (GND) wiring harness x
Melt or damaged power supply (B+, ACC) related fuse. x
Car-navigation unit malfunction x x x x x x x x
Poor connection of car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage x x x x x x
Steering switch malfunction. x x
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between steering switch and car-navigation unit x
Map disc malfunction x
Moisture inside of car-navigation unit x
Non-designated disc inserted x
Open circuit wiring harness between car-navigation unit and each speak. (without Bose R ) x
Speaker or tweeter malfunction x
Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose R ) x x
Poor connection of audio amplifier connector, terminal damage (with Bose R ) x x
Open circuit wiring harness between car-navigation unit and amplifier (with Bose R ) x x
Open circuit wiring harness between audio amplifier and each speaker/tweeter (with Bose R ) x x
Microphone unit malfunction x x
Poor connection of microphone unit connector, terminal damage x
Open circuit, poor or loose connector, of connector in wiring harness between microphone
unit and car-navigation unit through the Bluetooth unit.
x x
Jammed radio signals from after market equipment (radar, remote engine starter, anti-theft
device etc.) x
Open or short circuit in harness (vehicle speed signal related). x
Poor connection of GPS antenna connector, terminal damage x
GPS antenna malfunction x
Open or short circuit in feeder line between GPS antenna feeder and car-navigation unit. x
Improper adjustment of the navigation guidance volume x
Poor connection of driver-side front door speaker connector, terminal damage x
Driver-side front door speaker malfunction x
Open or short circuit in driver-side front door speaker wiring harness x
Improper setting of NAVI map indication x
Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness (TNS signal related) x
End Of Sie
NO.1 CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM DOES NOT START OPERATION (DISPLAY CHANGES TO BACK.) [CAR-
NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
1 Car-navigation system does not start operation. (Display screen changes to black.)
x Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (power supply (B+)) wiring harness
x Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (power supply (ACC)) wiring harness
x Open or short circuit in car-navigation unit (GND) wiring harness
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Melt or damaged power supply (B+, ACC) related fuse.
x Poor connection of car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
1 x Switch the ignition to ACC. Yes Go to Step 6.
x Does the car-navigation system start and No Go to the next step.
display map on screen?
x Inspect following fuses. No If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for short to
— MIRROR 5 A ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness, then replace
— ROOM 15 A the fuse.
x Are fuses normal? Replace with the appropriate standard fuse.
3 x Inspect the connection of the car-navigation Yes Go to the next step.
unit connectors (24-pin). No Securely connect the car-navigation unit.
x Are the car-navigation unit connectors
connected securely?
4 x Disconnect the car-navigation unit Yes Go to the next step.
connectors (24-pin). No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
x Map screen is displayed.
x Replace the car-navigation unit.
INSTALLATION.)
5 x Switch the ignition to ACC. Yes Go to the next step.
x Measure the following car-navigation unit No Repair or replace malfunctioning wiring harness.
connector (24-pin) terminals.
— Terminal 1B (+B): B+
— Terminal 1R (ACC): B+
— Terminal 1W (GND): below 1.0V
x Are voltages normally?
6 x Switch the ignition to ON. Yes The system is normal.
x Does the car-navigation system start and No Replace the car-navigation unit.
display map on screen? (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.2 SYSTEM DOES NOT CONTROL AUDIO BY STEERING SWITCH [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
2 System does not control audio by steering switch.

x Poor connection of ca-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Steering switch malfunction.
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between steering switch and car-navigation unit.
1 x Switch the ignition to ACC. Yes The system is normal.
x Start audio system using the steering switch. No Go to the next step.
x Control the audio using the steering switch.
x Is the audio system controlled normally?
2 x Inspect the connection of the car-navigation Yes Go to the next step.
unit connectors (24-pin). No Securely connect the car-navigation unit connector.
x Is the car-navigation unit connector
connected securely?
3 x Disconnect the car-navigation unit connector Yes Go to the next step.
(24-pin). No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
x Inspect both car-navigation unit connector
and wiring harness-side connector terminals
1N and 1P for poor connection (such as
INSTALLATION.)
damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion).
4 x Car-navigation unit connector (24-pin) Yes Troubleshooting completed. (The system is normal.)
disconnected. No Inspect and repair the following:
x Measure the resistance between terminal 1N
x Steering switch.
and 1P at car-navigation unit harness-side
(See 09-20-56 STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION.)
connector (24-pin) while the steering switch
x Wiring harness between car-navigation unit and steering
(VOL+, VOL-, SEEK+, SEEK-,MODE,
switch for open or short circuit).
MUTE) is selected.
x Is the resistance within the specified?
Specification
50 ohms — 5 kilo-ohms (Resistance is
changing according to steering switch
pressed position.)
End Of Sie
NO.3 SYSTEM DOES NOT LOAD MAP DISC. [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
3 System does not load map disc.

x Map disc malfunction
x Moisture inside of car-navigation unit
x Non-designate disc is installed
Note
x If dewdrops are formed inside of the car-navigation unit, the display screen shows the “The disc
POSSIBLE CAUSE installed is not map DVD” message. Remove the map disc, ventilate or remove moisture from the
passenger compartment, and then leave it for approx. 1h. The dewdrops will be removed and the
car-navigation unit will operate normally.
x In case of a dirty/damaged map disc or car-navigation unit malfunction, the display screen will
show the “Please insert a map DVD” message after the ignition switch to turned to the ACC
position.
x If a non-designated disc inserted, the display screen shows the “The disc installed is not a map
DVD” message.
1 x Eject the map disc. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the map okay? No Insert a designated disc, then go to the next step.
2 x Eject the map disc then insert the map disc Yes Troubleshooting completed.
again. No Go to the next step.
x Does the system load the map disc?
3 x Eject the map disc and clean the surface of Yes Troubleshooting completed.
map disc with a soft cloth. No Replace the car-navigation unit and map disc at the same
x Insert the map disc again. time. (consult distributor)
x Does the “MAP DVD-Read Error.” error (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
message show up on the screen? INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.4 NO SOUND FROM AUDIO SYSTEM [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
4 No sound from audio system

x Open circuit in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and each speaker (without Bose®)
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose®)
x Poor connection of audio amplifier connector, terminal damage (with Bose®)
x Open circuit in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and audio amplifier (with Bose®)
x Open circuit in wiring harness between audio amplifier and each speaker (with Bose®)
Without Bose®
x Start audio system sing the steering switch. No Go to the next step.
x Adjust volume 30 using the steering switch.
x Is there sound from all speaker?
x Disconnect the car-navigation unit connector No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
(24-pin).
and wiring harness-side connector for poor
INSTALLATION.)
connection (such as damaged/pulled out
pins, corrosion). If the wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
x Are all the pins normal? x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector.
3 x Inspect the connection of each speaker Yes Go to the next step.
connector (4-pin). No Securely connect the speaker.
x Are the connectors securely connected?
4 x Disconnect the all speaker and tweeter Yes Go to the next step.
connectors. No If the speaker connector is wrong:
x Inspect both each speaker/tweeter and
x Replace the suspect part.
wiring harness-side connector for poor
INSTALLATION.)
pins, corrosion.)
INSTALLATION.)
5 x Switch the ignition to off. Yes Repair or replace suspected wiring harness.
x Disconnect the all speaker/tweeter No Go to the next step.
connectors.
x Inspect the following wiring harness between
car-navigation unit connector (24-pin) and
each speaker (4-pin) terminals.
— Terminal 1S (LH+) — terminal C
— Terminal 1U (LH-) — terminal B
— Terminal 1V (RH+) — terminal C
— Terminal 1X (RH-) — terminal B
For tweeter
x Is there open or short circuit?
6 x Inspect each speaker. Yes Replace the car-navigation unit.
(See 09-20-10 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-12 REAR DOOR SPEAKER No Replace the malfunctioning speaker/
INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-16 TWEETER INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION.)
x Are all speakers normal? (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
With Bose®
x Start audio system using the steering switch No Go to the next step.
x Adjust volume 30 using the steering switch.
x Is there sound from all speaker/tweeter?
x Inspect the connection of audio amplifier No Securely connect the audio amplifier.
connector.
x Is the connector securely connected?
3 x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector. Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect both audio amplifier connector and No If the audio amplifier connector is wrong:
pins, corrosion).
INSTALLATION.)
4 x Inspect the connection of car-navigation unit Yes Go to the next step.
connector (24-pin). No Securely connect the car-navigation unit.
INSTALLATION.)
pins, corrosion).
x Are all the pins normal? If the wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
6 x Car-navigation unit and audio amplifier Yes Repair or replace suspected wiring harness.
connectors disconnected. No Go to the next step.
the car-navigation unit (24-pin) and audio
amplifier.
— Terminal 1A (LH+)—Terminal 1D (L.H.D.)/
1F (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1C (LH-)—Terminal 1C(L.H.D.)/
1E (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1D (RH+)—Terminal 1F(L.H.D.)/
1D (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1F (RH-)—Terminal 1E(L.H.D.)/
1C (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1S (RL+)— Terminal 1H(L.H.D.)/
1J (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1U (RL-)— Terminal 1G(L.H.D.)/
1I (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1V (RR+)— Terminal 1J(L.H.D.)/
1H (R.H.D.)
— Terminal 1X (RR-)— Terminal 1I(L.H.D.)/
1G (R.H.D.)
7 x Disconnect the all speaker and tweeter Yes Go to the next step.
connectors. No If the speaker connector is wrong:
x Inspect both each speaker/tweeter and
x Replace the suspect part.
INSTALLATION.)
pins, corrosion.)
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.) (4SD)
(See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5HB/WGN)
8 x Audio amplifier and all speaker and tweeter Yes Repair or replace suspected wiring harness.
connectors disconnected. No Go to the next step.
the audio amplifier and each speaker/
tweeter.
For tweeter
For center speaker
— Terminal 3H (+)—Terminal B
— Terminal 3G (-)—Terminal D
9 x Inspect the suspect speaker. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-20-10 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER No Replace the speaker.
(See 09-20-12 REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-13 CENTER SPEAKER INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-13 CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-16 TWEETER INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-15 REAR SPEAKER (See 09-20-15 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) (4SD) (See 09-20-14 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-18 BASS-BOX INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION.) (4SD)
(5HB/WGN) (See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Are all speakers normal? (5HB/WGN)
10 x Replace the audio amplifier. Yes Troubleshooting completed.
(See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER (Audio amplifier malfunction.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) No Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Does the sound from audio system? (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.5 VEHICLE POSITION DEVIATES FROM THE ROUTE MAP [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
5 Vehicle position deviates from the route map.

x Jammed radio signals from after market equipment (radar, remote engine starter, anti-theft device
etc.)
x Open or short circuit in harness (vehicle speed signal related).
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Car-navigation unit malfunction
x Poor connection of GPS antenna connector, terminal damage
x GPS antenna malfunction
x Open or short circuit in feeder line between GPS antenna feeder and car-navigation unit.
1 x Is any of the following after-market Yes Go to the next step.
equipment installed? (Inspect especially near No Go to Step 3.
the GPS antenna.)
— Radar
— Anti-theft device
— Other
2 x Remove the after-market equipment. Yes System is normal.
Caution The after-market electrical device might be interrupting to
x The procedure requires an GPS reception.
assistant. No Go to the next step.
x Drive the vehicle without any obstacles.

x Does the vehicle indicator follow the steering
wheel direction?
3 x Position the vehicle without any obstacles Yes Go to the next step.
and receive GPS for 5 min. at idle. No Go to Step 8.
x Does “GPS” show up on interruption of the
left-side of the display screen?
4 Caution Yes Go to the next step.
x The procedure requires an assistant. No Go to Step 5.
x Start diagnostic function and indicate

“Vehicle Signal” check screen.
(See 09-02G-3 DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CAR-
x Drive the vehicle.
x Check the “SPEED” on the diagnosis screen.
x Does the “SPEED” change according to the
vehicle speed?
Note
x If the engine started after diagnostic
function activated, the diagnostic function
is reset.
5 Caution Yes The system is normal.
x The procedure requires an assistant.
Note
x Drive the vehicle and turn the steering wheel x The vehicle indicator might be out of position in the
to the left or right. following areas:
x Does the vehicle indicator follow the steering — Parallel road, high-level road, loop road, tower type
direction? parking, high-rise building s lot.
No Replace the car-navigation unit.
INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the connection of car-navigation unit No Securely connect the car-navigation unit connector.
connector (24-pin).
7 x Disconnect the car-navigation unit connector Yes Inspect for vehicle speed signal circuit (between instrument
(24-pin). cluster and car-navigation unit).
x Inspect both car-navigation unit connector Repair or replace if necessary.
and wiring harness-side connector terminal I No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
for poor connection (such as damaged/pulled
out pins, corrosion).
x Is the pin normal?
INSTALLATION.)
8 x Start diagnostic function and indicate Yes Go to Step 5.
“Vehicle Signal” check screen. No Go to the next step.
x Drive the vehicle.
x Check the “GPS Antenna” on the diagnosis
screen.
x Is the “OK” indicated?
Note
x If the engine started after diagnostic
function activated, the diagnostic function
is reset.
x Inspect the connection of the car-navigation No Securely connect the suspect connector.
unit connector (3-pin) and GPS antenna
connector.
10 x Disconnect the GPS antenna and car- Yes Go to the next step.
navigation unit connector for poor connection No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
(such as damaged/pulled out pins,
corrosion).
x Are all pins normal?
INSTALLATION.)
If the GPS antenna connector is wrong:
x Replace the GPS antenna.
(See 09-20-48 GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
11 x Replace the GPS antenna. Yes Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Does the vehicle position deviate from route (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
map continuously? INSTALLATION.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
(GPS antenna malfunction)
End Of Sie
NO.6 NO VOICE NAVIGATION [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
6 No voice navigation
x Improper adjustment of the navigation guidance volume
x Poor connection of driver-side front door speaker connector, terminal damage
x Front door speaker malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE x Poor connection of car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and driver-side front door speaker
through audio amplifier.
x Audio amplifier malfunction (with Bose®)
x Poor connection of audio amplifier connector, terminal damage
1 x Is the voice navigation mute? Yes Turn on the voice navigation.
2 x Turn the audio power switch (CD, radio) to Yes Go to Step 6.
ON. No Go to the next step.
x Does front door speaker work?
x Remove the front door speaker. No Securely connect the front door speaker connector.
(See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
4 x Disconnect the front door speaker connector Yes Go to the next step.
(4-pin). No If the front door speaker connector is wrong:
x Inspect both the front door speaker and
x Replace the front door speaker.
INSTALLATION.)
pins, corrosion).
5 x Inspect the front door speakers. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-20-10 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER No Replace the front door speaker.
x Are they normal? INSTALLATION.)
6 x Inspect the connection of car-navigation unit Yes Go to the next step.
connector (24-pin). No Securely connect the car-navigation unit connector.
7 x Disconnect the car-navigation unit connector Yes With Bose®
(24-pin).
x Go to Step 9.
x Inspect both the car-navigation unit and
wiring harness-side connector terminal for Without Bose®
poor connection (such as damaged/pulled x Go to the next step.
out pins, corrosion). No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
x Are all pins normal? x Replace the car-navigation unit.
INSTALLATION.)
8 x Inspect there continuity between following Yes Inspect for short circuit in wiring harness.
car-navigation unit and front door speaker at x If there is a short circuit, repair or replace the suspect
harness-side connector. wiring harness.
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1A (24-pin, x If the wiring harness is okay, replace the car-navigation
LH+) and front door speaker terminal C unit.
(+) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1C (24-pin, INSTALLATION.)
LH-) and front door speaker terminal B (-) No Repair or replace wiring harness.
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1D (24-pin,
RH+) and front door speaker terminal C
(+)
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1F (24-pin,
RH-) and front door speaker terminal B (-)
9 x Inspect the connection of audio amplifier Yes Go to the next step.
connector. No Securely connect the audio amplifier connector.
10 x Disconnect the audio amplifier connector. Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect both the audio amplifier and wiring No If the audio amplifier connector is wrong:
harness-side connector terminal 1C, 1D, 1E,
1F, 3C, 3D, 3E, and 3F for poor connection
(such as damaged/pulled out pins,
INSTALLATION.)
corrosion).
x Are all pins normal? If the wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
car-navigation unit and audio amplifier at x If there is a short circuit, repair or replace the suspect
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1A (24-pin, x If the wiring harness is okay, go to Step 13.
LH+)—audio amplifier terminal 1D No Repair or replace wiring harness.
(L.H.D.)/1F (R.H.D.)
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1C (24-pin,
LH-)—audio amplifier terminal 1C
(L.H.D.)/1E (R.H.D.)
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1D (24-pin,
RH+)—audio amplifier terminal 1F
(L.H.D.)/1D (R.H.D.)
— Car-navigation unit terminal 1F (24-pin,
RH-)—audio amplifier terminal 1E
(L.H.D.)/1C (R.H.D.)
audio amplifier and front door speaker at x If there is a short circuit, repair or replace the suspect
— Audio amplifier terminal 3D (LH+, L.H.D.)/ x If the wiring harness is okay, go to the next step.
3F (LH+, R.H.D.)—front door speaker C No Repair or replace wiring harness.
— Audio amplifier terminal 3C (LH-, L.H.D.)/
3E (LH-, R.H.D.)—front door speaker B
— Audio amplifier terminal 3F (RH+, L.H.D.)/
3D (RH+, R.H.D.)—front door speaker C
— Audio amplifier terminal 3E (RH-, L.H.D.)/
3C (RH-, R.H.D.)—front door speaker B
13 x Replace the audio amplifier. Yes Troubleshooting is completed.
(See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER No Replace the car-navigation unit.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
x Does the voice navigation operation INSTALLATION.)
properly?
End Of Sie
NO.7 DISPLAY SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO THE NIGHT MODE (FRONT AND REAR COMBINATION
LIGHTS OPERATE NORMALLY.) [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Display screen does not change to the night mode (Front and rear combination lights operate
7
normally.)
x Improper setting of NAVI map indication
x Open or short circuit in TNS signal wiring harness (TNS signal related)
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Poor connection of the car-navigation unit connector, terminal damage
1 x Switch the ignition to ON. Yes The system is normal.
x Does the display screen change to the night No Go to the next step.
mode when the light switch is turned to the
TNS position, and the dimmer cancel switch
is turned to OFF?
2 x Press the “MENU” switch. Yes Go to the next step.
x Select “Navigation Set Up”. No System is normal.
x Select “User Setting”. Set the “MAP Mode” to “Auto”.
x Inspect “MAP Mode”.
x Is the “MAP mode” set to “Auto”?
3 x Start diagnostic function and indicate Yes Replace the car-navigation unit.
“Vehicle Signal” check screen. (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
(See 09-02G-3 DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CAR- INSTALLATION.)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
x Turn the light switch to TNS position.
x Inspect the “TNS” on the diagnosis check
screen.
x Dose the “TNS” indicate ON?
x Disconnect the car-navigation unit connector No If the car-navigation unit connector is wrong:
(24-pin).
x Inspect both the car-navigation unit and
wiring harness-side connector terminal 1E
INSTALLATION.)
for poor connection (such as damaged/
pulled-out pins, corrosion). If the wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
x Are all the pins normal? x Repair or replace the pins and/or the connector.
5 x Car-navigation unit connector (24-pin) Yes Replace the car-navigation unit, then go to the next step.
disconnected. (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
x Measure the voltage of car-navigation unit INSTALLATION.)
harness-side connector (24-pin) terminal 1E No Inspect the TNS signal circuit.
(TNS signal). Repair or replace if necessary.
x Is voltage B+ when the light switch is turned Then go to the next step.
to the TNS position?
6 x Does system work properly? Yes Troubleshooting is completed.
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO.8 SPEECH RECOGNITION DOES NOT START [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
8 Speech recognition does not start

x Microphone unit malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between microphone and car-navigation unit.
1 x Switch the ignition to ACC. Yes Go to the next step.
x Start the car-navigation. No Go to Step 4.
x Display the map screen.
x Press the talk switch (at steering switch)
x Is the speech recognition icon displayed on
the screen upper left?
2 x Start diagnostic function and indicate Yes The system is normal.
“Microphone Check” screen. Caution
(See 09-02G-3 DIAGNOSTIC CHECK [CAR- x Sound may not be recognized by the influence of
NAVIGATION SYSTEM].) the following.
x Speak greatly toward a microphone. — Speaker’s utterance method
x Inspect the “Microphone input level judging”. — Road noise
x Is a judging “OK” (green display)? — Other noises
No Replace the microphone, then go to the next step.
3 x Does the fault phenomenon improve? Yes Troubleshooting is completed.
INSTALLATION.)
4 x Start diagnostic function and indicate Yes Go to the next step.
“Vehicle Signal” check screen. No Go to Step 6.
x Inspect the display of “Microphone” in vehicle
signal screen.
x Is it display “OK”?
5 x Turn on the audio function (RADIO or CD). Yes Replace the car-navigation unit.
x Press the talk switch (at steering switch). (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
x Does it mute? INSTALLATION.)
No Steering switch related part malfunction.
Go to the audio system troubleshooting.
x Remove the microphone. No Securely connect the microphone connector.
x Inspect the connection of the microphone
connector (6-pin).
7 x Disconnect the microphone connector (6- Yes Go to the next step.
pin). No If the microphone connector is wrong:
x Inspect both microphone connector and
x Replace the microphone.
(See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
pins, corrosion).
8 x Remove the car-navigation unit. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT No Securely connect the car-navigation unit connector.
x Inspect the connection of the car-navigation
unit connector (6-pin).
INSTALLATION.)
pins, corrosion).
x Are all pins normal? If the wiring harness-side connector is wrong:
10 x Inspect the following wiring harness between Yes Repair or replace suspected wiring harness.
the microphone and Bluetooth unit. No Go to the next step.
— Terminal A (6-pin, MIC+) — Terminal A
(28-pin, MIC IN+)
— Terminal B (6-pin, MIC-) — Terminal B
(28-pin, MIC IN-)
— Terminal C (6-pin, MIC B+) — Terminal C
(28-pin, MIC B+)
— Terminal D (6-pin, GND) — shield GND
— Terminal E (L.H.D.)/F (R.H.D.) (6-pin, MIC
SENSE) — Terminal E (28-pin, MIC
SENSE)
11 x Inspect the following wiring harness between Yes Repair or replace suspected wiring harness.
the Bluetooth unit and car-navigation unit. No Replace the microphone.
— Terminal G (28-pin, MIC +) — Terminal A (See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6-pin, MIC+) Then go to the next step.
— Terminal H (28-pin, MIC -) — Terminal B
(6-pin, MIC-)
— Terminal E (28-pin, MIC SENSE) —
Terminal E (6-pin, MIC SENSE)
12 x Does the fault phenomenon improve? Yes Troubleshooting is completed.
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC [CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM]
Starting Procedure For Diagnostic Function
3. Press “Menu” button of “Diagnosis Check” screen.
4. Perform following procedures according to the purpose of the check item.
If inspect vehicle condition signals:
1. Select “Vehicle Signal”.
Menu
5
1 PKB ON TNS ON
6
2 REV OFF GPS Antenna OK
7
3 Microphone NCON Traffic System TMC
4 SPEED Kph 150

mph 100
No. Display item Description

PKB Indicate parking brake signal.
1 x ON: Parking brake applied.
x OFF: Parking brake released.
REV Indicate Reverse signal state.
2 x ON: Reverse
x OFF: Others
Microphone* Indicate the connection state of a microphone.
3 x OK: Connect
x NCON: Disconnect
4 SPEED* Indicate the present vehicle speed by kph/mph (a maximum of 3 digits)
TNS * Indicate TNS signal state.
5 x ON: Turn TNS ON
x OFF: Turn TNS OFF
GPS Antenna* Indicate the connection state of a GPS antenna.
6 x OK: Connect
x NCON: Disconnect
Traffic System Indicate the RDS-TMC system availability on the vehicle.
7 x TMC: Equip
x NONE: Not equip
* : It is used for symptom troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting index No.4, No.5, No.7 and No.8)
If inspect microphone related signals:

1. Select “Navigation Check Menu”.
2. Select “Microphone Check”.
Navi Menu
1 PTT switch status : <Please Push switch>

Please Speak at a Normal Level into the Microphone
2 Microphoneinput level judging
3 Microphone level :

PPT switch status indicate the state of a talk switch.
1 <OK>: Press the button (Keep the state of until the screen is changed.)
<Please Push switch>: Other than above condition.
Microphone input level Indicate the test result.
2 judging* Green indicator: The sound is inputted from the microphone property.
Gray indicator: The sound is inputted from the microphone improperly.
3 Microphone level Indicate the input level of microphone by bar graph.
* : It is used for symptom troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting index No.8)
If inspect gyro sensor signals:

1. Select “Navigation Check Menu”.
2. Select “Vehicle Sensors”.
Navi Menu
Sensor Signal
Gyro Voltage : 2.500 V

1
Relative bearing : 359.9°
Reset

GYRO Indicate following gyro sensor signal.
1 x Gyro sensor signal voltage
x Relative bearing value
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
09-03N SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [Bluetooth

SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [Bluetooth SYSTEM No.2 CALLER'S VOICE VOLUME
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–1 CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM
Troubleshooting Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–1 (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
No.1 Bluetooth SYSTEM DOES NOT SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–4
RECEIVE/TRANSMIT CALLS, DOES Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–4
NOT CONNECT [Bluetooth SYSTEM No.3 ADDRESSEE'S VOICE VOLUME
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–2 CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM
Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–2 (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL)
SYSTEM)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–5
Diagnostic procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03N–5
End of Toc
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
FOREWORD [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
Possible DTC
No. Items Without M-MDS (On-
With M-MDS board diagnostic test
mode)
1 09-03N-2 No.1 Bluetooth SYSTEM DOES NOT RECEIVE/ Audio unit
TRANSMIT CALLS, DOES NOT CONNECT [Bluetooth SYSTEM x 26:Er81, 82, 83, 84,
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] B1134:23, B116A:12, 85, 86
B116A:13, B116A:16, Car-navigation unit
B116A:44, U0498:68 x Device code 26/
Error code 81, 82,
83, 84, 85, 86
2 09-03N-4 No.2 CALLER'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE Audio unit
INTERRUPTS CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE x 26:Er81, 82, 83, 84,
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] B1134:23, B116A:12, 85, 86
B116A:13, B116A:16, Car-navigation unit
B116A:44, U0498:68 x Device code 26/
Error code 81, 82,
83, 84, 85, 86
3 09-03N-5 No.3 ADDRESSEE'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR Audio unit
NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE x 26:Er81, 86
TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)] B116A:44, U0498:68 Car-navigation unit
x Device code 26/
Error code 81, 86
End Of Sie
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
No.1 Bluetooth SYSTEM DOES NOT RECEIVE/TRANSMIT CALLS, DOES NOT CONNECT [Bluetooth
SYSTEM (HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
1 Bluetooth system does not receive/transmit calls, does not connect

With M-MDS B1134:23, B116A:12, B116A:13, B116A:16, B116A:44, U0498:68
Audio unit
Possible DTC x 26:Er81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 26/Error code 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
x Malfunction in HF/TEL switch related parts
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL switch and Bluetooth unit
— CAN communication error between the car-navigation unit and Bluetooth unit (with car-
navigation system)
— HF/TEL switch malfunction
— Poor connection in the connector
x Malfunction in microphone related parts
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the microphone and Bluetooth unit
— Microphone malfunction
x Malfunction in audio system
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the Bluetooth unit and the speaker through
the audio unit/car-navigation unit and audio amplifier. (with Bose®)
POSSIBLECAUSE
the audio unit/car-navigation unit (without Bose®)
x Bluetooth unit does not respond
— Bluetooth unit malfunction
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the Bluetooth unit and the audio unit/car-
navigation
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness of the Bluetooth unit power supply or ground circuit
x Problem in cellular phone
— Cellular phone does not set up to Bluetooth system
— Cellular phone does not operate (low battery voltage, power off)
— Cellular phone is outside of the signal transmission area
— Bluetooth does not operate
— A cellular phone other than a Bluetooth system-enabled models is used.
intermittent malfunction. If there is a problem, verify that the connectors, terminals and wiring harness are
1 x Inspect the cellular phone condition while the Yes Enter a cellular phone signal transmission area and
hands free phone does not operate. reinspect the Bluetooth system operation.
x Can the following conditions be verified? No Go to the next step.
— Low battery voltage
— Power is off
— Out of signal transmission area
2 x Does the cellular phone set up to the Yes Set up the cellular phone to the Bluetooth unit.
Bluetooth unit? No Go to the next step.
3 x Is the audio system sound output normal? Yes Go to the next step.
No Perform the audio system troubleshooting procedure.
4 x Perform the Bluetooth system on-board Yes Go to the next step.
diagnostic. No Go to Step 6.
x Are the following DTC displayed?
— B116A:12, 26:Er82, device code 26/error
code 82
code 83
code 84
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
5* x Inspect for open or short circuits in the Yes Replace the microphone.
following wiring harnesses and connectors, (See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
and inspect the connector connections. No Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
— Between microphone terminal A and
Bluetooth unit terminal A
— Between microphone terminal B and
Bluetooth unit terminal B
— Between microphone terminal C and
Bluetooth unit terminal C
— Between microphone terminal E (L.H.D.)/
F (R.H.D.) and Bluetooth unit terminal E
x Are the harnesses and connector
connections normal?
diagnostic. No Go to Step 10.
x Is U0498:68, 26:Er81, device code 26/error
code 81 displayed?
diagnostic. No Replace the steering switch.
x Is B1134:23, 26:Er85, device code 26/error (See 09-20-52 STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/
code 85 displayed? INSTALLATION.)
8 x Inspect the HF/TEL switch. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the HF/TEL switch normal? No Replace the steering switch.
(See 09-20-56 STEERING SWITCH (See 09-20-52 STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/
9* x Inspect for open or short circuits in the Yes Go to the next step.
following wiring harnesses and connectors, No Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
and inspect the connector connections.
— Between steering switch terminal L and
Bluetooth unit (28-pin) terminal F
connections normal?
10 x Perform the Bluetooth system on-board Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit.
diagnostic. (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is B116A:44, 26:Er86, device code 26/error No Go to the next step.
code 86 displayed?
11 x Call the hands free cell phone using another Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit.
cellular phone. (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Do the same symptoms appear? No The cellular phone Bluetooth system is malfunctioning.
End Of Sie
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
No.2 CALLER'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM (HANDS-
FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
2 Caller’s voice volume too low, or noise interrupts call

With M-MDS B1134:23, B116A:12, B116A:13, B116A:16, B116A:44, U0498:68
Audio unit
Possible DTC x 26:Er81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Device code 26/Error code 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86
x Malfunction in the microphone related parts
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the microphone and the Bluetooth unit
— Microphone malfunction
x Malfunction in the Voice switch (with audio system)
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL switch and the audio unit car-
navigation unit
x Malfunction in the HF/TEL switch (with car-navigation system)
— Open or short circuit in the wiring harness between the HF/TEL switch and the audio unit car-
POSSIBLECAUSE
navigation unit
x Malfunction in the audio system
— Steering switch (+) and/or related circuit malfunction
x Influence due to vehicle driving conditions
— Noise while driving is loud (engine, tire noise, blower fan noise)
— Windows and/or sunroof are open
x Problem in the cellular phone
— Vehicle is in a place where signal transmission is weak
— A cellular phone other than a Hands-free telephone system-enabled models is used.
1* x Can the audio volume be controlled using Yes Go to the next step.
steering switch? No Inspect and repair the steering switch and related wiring
harness.
2 x Does the symptom appear under following Yes The system is normal.
conditions? (Influence due to vehicle driving conditions)
— Windows and/or sunroof are open No Go to the next step.
— Noise while driving is loud (engine, tire
noise, blower fan noise)
3 x Perform the Bluetooth system on-board Yes Inspect and repair the audio system CAN communication.
diagnostic. No Go to the next step.
code 81displayed?
— Between microphone terminal A and
Bluetooth unit terminal A
— Between microphone terminal B and
Bluetooth unit terminal B
— Between microphone terminal C and
Bluetooth unit terminal C
— Between microphone terminal E (L.H.D.)/
F (R.H.D.) and Bluetooth unit terminal E
connections normal?
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
5 x Inspect the following switches. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-20-56 STEERING SWITCH No Replace the steering switch.
INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-52 STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/
— HF/TEL switch INSTALLATION.)
x Are the switches normal?
— Between Bluetooth unit (28-pin) terminal
F and steering switch terminal L
connections normal?
7 x Make a call with the cellular phone without Yes Cellular phone related problem.
using Bluetooth unit system. No Go to the next step.
x Does the same symptom appear?
8 x Call the hands-free cell phone using another Yes Go to the next step.
cellular phone. No The cellular phone Bluetooth system is malfunctioning.
9 x Replace the microphone. Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit.
(See 09-20-59 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/ (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.) No Troubleshooting is completed.
x Does the same symptom appear? (The microphone is malfunctioning.)
End Of Sie
No.3 ADDRESSEE'S VOICE VOLUME TOO LOW, OR NOISE INTERRUPTS CALL [Bluetooth SYSTEM
(HANDS-FREE TELEPHONE (HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
3 Addressee’s voice volume too low, or noise interrupts call

With M-MDS B116A:44, U0498:68
Audio unit
Without M-MDS
Car-navigation unit
x Malfunction in the audio system
the audio unit/car-navigation unit and the audio amplifier (with Bose®)
the audio unit/car-navigation unit (without Bose®)
POSSIBLECAUSE — steering switch (+) and/or related circuit malfunction
x Problem in the cellular phone
— Vehicle is in a place where signal transmission is weak
— A cellular phone other than a Bluetooth system-enabled models is used.
1 x Is the audio system sound output normal? Yes Go to the next step.
No Perform the audio system troubleshooting procedure.
2 x Can the audio volume be controlled using Yes Go to the next step.
steering switch? No Inspect and repair the steering switch and related wiring
harness.
3 x Perform the Bluetooth system on-board Yes Inspect and repair the audio system CAN communication.
diagnostic. No Go to the next step.
code 81 displayed?
(HF/TEL) SYSTEM)]
— Between Bluetooth unit terminal I and
audio unit/car-navigation unit (16-pin)
terminal 2B
— Between Bluetooth unit terminal J and
audio unit/car-navigation unit (16-pin)
terminal 2J
connections normal?
5 x Make a call with the cellular phone without Yes Cellular phone related problem.
using Bluetooth system. No Go to the next step.
6 x Call the hands-free cell phone using another Yes Replace the Bluetooth unit.
cellular phone. (See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Does the same symptom appear? No The cellular phone Bluetooth system is malfunctioning.
End Of Sie
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
09-03O SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [INSTRUMENT

CLUSTER]
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–1 ILLUMINATES
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–6
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–2 NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE NEEDLE POSITION ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–7
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–2 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO DEFECTIVE
NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–8
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–3 NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS
NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT DEFECTIVE
ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–9
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–4 NO. 9 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–5 [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER] . . . . . . . . . . 09-03O–10
End of Toc

1 (See 09-03O-2 NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE NEEDLE POSITION
Fuel gauge needle position incorrect
INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
2 (See 09-03O-3 NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT
All meters and gauges do not operate
OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
3 (See 09-03O-4 NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
ABS warning light illuminates
4 (See 09-03O-5 NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT
MIL illuminates
CLUSTER].)
5 (See 09-03O-6 NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
Brake system warning light illuminates
ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
6 (See 09-03O-7 NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER].)
7 (See 09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
Speedometer indication is defective
8 (See 09-03O-9 NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS
Tachometer indication is defective
9 (See 09-03O-10 NO. 9 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Water temperature gauge indication is defective
INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
End Of Sie
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
No.
1
End Of Sie
CAUSE
POSSIBLE
09-03O–2
MIL illuminates
ABS warning light illuminates
Tachometer indication is defective

Speedometer indication is defective
All meters and gauges do not operate
Brake system warning light illuminates

Possible factor
Water temperature gauge indication is defective

Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate
X
Poor connection of fuel gauge sender unit connector, terminal damage
x Connector or pin malfunction

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Poor connection of instrument cluster connector, terminal damage

X
Fuel gauge sender unit malfunction
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x Fuel gauge sender unit malfunction

Instrument cluster malfunction

X
Fuel gauge sender unit is improperly installed
X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and GND
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and fuel gauge sender unit
x Fuel gauge sender unit is improperly installed

X
Fuse malfunction (METER IG 15A)
X
Open or short circuit in power supply (IG1) wiring harness
X
Open or short circuit in GND wiring harness
X
X
X
DSC HU/CM malfunction
X
X
X
X
X
X
Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and GND
X
X
X
X
X
X
Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H)
X
X
X
CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other
X X
X X
X X
ABS HU/CM malfunction
NO. 1 FUEL GAUGE NEEDLE POSITION INCORRECT [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]

X
X
X
X
PCM malfunction
X
Poor connection of brake fluid level sensor connector, terminal damage
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and GND
X
Brake fluid level sensor malfunction
X
Poor connection of parking brake switch connector, terminal damage
Parking brake switch malfunction
X X
Barake fluid level is low
X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between brake fluid level sensor and BCM
X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between parking brake switch and BCM
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and fuel gauge sender unit
X
BCM malfunction
X
X: Applicable
TNS related parts malfunction (relay, switch, wiring harnesses)

1 x Switch the ignition to ON. Yes Troubleshooting completed.
x Verify that the fuel gauge needle does not No Go to the next step.
move after ignition switch is turned off, or the
display does not indicate F even though fuel
tank is full.
x Is the fuel gauge normal?
2 x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster Yes Perform the recorded DTC’s troubleshooting.
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
x Is there any DTCs been recorded in No Go to the next step.
memory?
3 x Verify that the fuel gauge needle moves Yes Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS instrument cluster No Replace the instrument cluster.
simulation function FUEL_INPT. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the fuel gauge needle move according INSTALLATION.)
to simulation function?
4 x Verify that the instrument cluster PID Yes Go to Step 6.
FUEL_INPT using the M-MDS. No Go to the next step.
x Does the FUEL_INPT PID indicate 10—180
ohms?
5 x Inspect following wiring harness for open or Yes Repair or replace suspect wiring harness.
short circuit. No Go to the next step.
— Instrument cluster terminal 2M—fuel
gauge sender unit
— Instrument cluster terminal 2D—fuel
gauge sender unit
x Is there any open or short circuit?
x Is the fuel gauge sender unit installed No Reinstall the fuel gauge sender unit.
properly?
7 x Inspect the fuel gauge sender unit. Yes Replace the instrument cluster.
(See 09-22-10 FUEL GAUGE SENDER (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
UNIT INSPECTION [MZR-CD 2.2]) INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-22-10 FUEL GAUGE SENDER No Replace the fuel gauge sender unit.
UNIT INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, (See 09-22-9 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/
MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI]) INSTALLATION [MZR-CD 2.2].)
x Is the fuel gauge sender unit normal? (See 09-22-10 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0
DISI].)
End Of Sie
NO. 2 ALL METERS AND GAUGES DO NOT OPERATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
2 All meters and gauges do not operate

POSSIBLE
x Fuse malfunction
CAUSE
x Open or short circuit in power supply (IG1) wiring harness
x Open or short circuit in GND wiring harness
09-03O–3
1 x Switch the ignition to ON. Yes Troubleshooting completed.
x Inspect the following: No Go to the next step.
— Does the odometer/tripmeter illuminate?
— Does the fuel gauge operate?
— Does the MIL turn on?
2 x Inspect the METER IG 15A fuse. Yes Go to the next step.
x Is the fuse normal? No Replace the fuse.
x If the fuse is melted, inspect the wiring harness for a
short to ground. Repair or replace the wiring harness,
then replace the fuse.
3 x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster Yes Perform the recorded DTC’s troubleshooting.
x Have any DTCs been recorded in memory? No Go to the next step.
x Remove the instrument cluster.
x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector.
x Inspect the voltage between instrument
cluster wiring harness-side connector
terminal 2V.
No Repair or replace for open circuit between ignition switch or
2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A relay block and instrument cluster.
2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
5 x Instrument cluster connector is Yes Go to the next step.

disconnected.
x Verify continuity between instrument cluster
wiring harness-side connector terminal 2F
and ground.
No Repair or replace the terminal.
2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B

x Inspect the instrument cluster connector (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
terminals for poor connection (such as INSTALLATION.)
damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). No Repair or replace the terminal.
x Are the terminals normal?
End Of Sie
NO. 3 ABS WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
3 ABS warning light illuminates

x ABS HU/CM malfunction
x DSC HU/CM malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and GND
x Open circuit in CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H)
x CAN wiring harness (CAN-L, CAN-H) short each other
09-03O–4
1 x Start the engine. Yes Troubleshooting completed.
x Does the ABS warning light turn off? No Go to the next step.
2 x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster Yes Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster.
x Have DTCs U0415:68 or U0415:92 been No Go to the next step.
recorded in memory?
3 x Disconnect the negative battery cable. Yes Go to the next step.
x Measure the resistance between the DLC-2 No Go to Step 5.
terminals F and E.
x Is the resistance below 60 ohms?
4 x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for Yes Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module.
short to power supply or GND. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
x Is there any malfunction? No Replace the instrument cluster.
x Inspect the instrument cluster connector No Repair or replace the terminal.
terminals for poor connection (such as
damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion).
6 x Disconnect the negative battery cable. Yes Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module.
x Measure the resistance between the Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
instrument cluster connector terminals 2X
and 2W.
2W 2U 2S 2Q 2O 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
2X 2V 2T 2R 2P 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
NO. 4 MIL ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
4 MIL illuminates
x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE x Connector or pin malfunction
CAUSE x Short circuit in wiring harness between CAN-L, CAN-H and GND
09-03O–5
x Does the MIL turn off? No Go to the next step.
2 x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster Yes Inspect the DTC for the PCM.
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. (See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST [MZR 1.8,
x Have DTCs U0401:68 or U0401:92 been MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
recorded in memory?

terminals F and E.
4 x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for Yes Inspect the wiring harness and CAN system-related module.
short to power supply or GND. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
x Is there any malfunction? No Replace the instrument cluster.
INSTALLATION.)
and 2W.
End Of Sie
NO. 5 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
5 Brake system warning light illuminates

x Brake fluid level sensor malfunction
x Brake fluid level is low
x Parking brake switch malfunction
x BCM malfunction
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between brake fluid level sensor and BCM.
x Open or short circuit in wiring harness between parking brake switch and BCM
09-03O–6
x Release the parking brake. No Go to the next step.
x Does the brake system warning light turn
off?
2 x Does the brake fluid need replenishment? Yes Add brake fluid.
x Have DTCs U0415:68 or U0415:92 been No Go to the next step.
recorded in memory?
x Have DTCs U0140:00 been recorded in No Go to the next step.
memory?
5 x Inspect the followings: Yes Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
— Brake fluid level sensor No Go to the next step.
— Parking brake switch
— Wiring harness between brake fluid level
sensor and BCM
— Wiring harness between parking brake
switch and BCM
terminals F and E.
x Inspect the DLC-2 terminals F and E for Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
short to power supply or GND. No Replace the instrument cluster.
x Is there any malfunction? (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
and 2W.
End Of Sie
NO. 6 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
6 Instrument cluster illumination does not illuminate

POSSIBLE
CAUSE
x TNS related parts malfunction (relay, switch, wiring harnesses)
09-03O–7
1 x Turn the light switch to the TNS position. Yes Troubleshooting completed.
x Does the instrument cluster illumination turn No Go to the next step.
on?
2 x Turn the light switch to the TNS position. Yes Go to the next step.
x Does the TNS turn on? No Inspect and repair the following TNS related parts and
wiring harness.
x Light switch
x Tail lights
x Wiring harness between BCM and tail lights
x Wiring harness between light switch and BCM
x Remove the instrument cluster. No Repair wiring harness for open between BCM and
x Disconnect the instrument cluster connector. instrument cluster terminal 2K.
x Turn the light switch to the TNS position.
x Inspect the voltage instrument cluster wiring
harness-side connector terminal 2K.
x Inspect the instrument cluster connector (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
terminals for poor connection (such as INSTALLATION.)
damaged/pulled-out pins, and corrosion). No Repair or replace the terminal.
End Of Sie
NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
7 Speedometer indication is defective

x PCM malfunction
POSSIBLE x Instrument cluster malfunction
CAUSE x Connector or pin malfunction
09-03O–8
1 x Start the engine, and drive the vehicle. Yes Troubleshooting completed.
— Does the speedometer needle move No Go to the next step.
smoothly?
— Does the speedometer needle indicate
correct speed?
x Have DTCs U2005:86 been recorded in No Go to the next step.
memory?
x Has DTC U0415:68 been recorded in No Go to the next step.
memory?
4 x Verify that the speedometer needle moves Yes Go to the next step.
using the M-MDS instrument cluster No Replace the instrument cluster.
simulation function SPDMTR. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the speedometer needle move INSTALLATION.)
according to simulation function?
5 x Verify following ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM Yes Go to the next step.
PIDs using the M-MDS. No Inspect for ABS wheel-speed sensors, related wiring
— WSPD_LF harnesses, and installation.
— WSPD_LR (See 04-15-8 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
— WSPD_RR (See 04-13-10 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
x Dose ABS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM PIDs INSPECTION.)
indicate vehicle speed properly?
terminals F and E.
INSTALLATION.)
and 2W.
End Of Sie
NO. 8 TACHOMETER INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
8 Tachometer indication is defective

x PCM malfunction
09-03O–9
— Does the tachometer needle move No Go to the next step.
smoothly?
— Does the tachometer needle indicate
correct engine speed?
2 x Inspect the DTC for the instrument cluster Yes Inspect the DTC for the PCM.
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
x Has DTC U0401:68 been recorded in 2.5].)
memory?

3 x Verify that the speedometer needle moves Yes Go to the next step.
using M-MDS instrument cluster simulation No Replace the instrument cluster.
function TACHOMTR. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the tachometer needle move according INSTALLATION.)
to simulation function?
4 x Verify that the PCM PID RPM using the M- Yes Go to the next step.
MDS. No Inspect for CKP sensor, related wiring harness, installation,
x Does the RPM PID indicate engine speed and pulse wheel condition.
properly? (See 01-40A-33 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)

terminals F and E.
INSTALLATION.)
and 2W.
End Of Sie
NO. 9 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE INDICATION IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]
9 Water temperature gauge indication is defective

x PCM malfunction
09-03O–10
x Does the water temperature gauge needle No Go to the next step.
move to medium range gradually and stay
there?
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER])
x Has DTC U0401:68 been recorded in No Go to the next step.
memory?
3 x Inspect the water temperature gauge. Yes Go to the next step.
(See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER No Repair or replace malfunctioning part according to
INSPECTION.) inspection result.
x Is the water temperature gauge normal?
4 x Verify that the PCM PID ECT using the M- Yes Go to the next step.
MDS. No Inspect for ECT sensor and related wiring harness.
x Does the ECT PID indicate engine coolant (See 01-40A-24 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
temperature properly? (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
2.5].)

terminals F and E.
INSTALLATION.)
and 2W.
End Of Sie
09-03O–11
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
09-03P SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [REAR VEHICLE

MONITORING SYSTEM]
FOREWORD [REAR VEHICLE Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–13
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–1 No.5 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–3 DOES NOT ILLUMINATE UNDER
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [REAR ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [REAR
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . 09-03P–4 VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . 09-03P–15
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [REAR Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–15
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . 09-03P–4 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–15
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [REAR Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–16
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . 09-03P–6 No.6 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
No.1 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN)/ FLASHES WHILE NOT UNDER FLASHING
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT CONDITIONS [REAR VEHICLE
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN IGNITION MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–19
IS SWITCHED ON [REAR VEHICLE Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–19
MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–8 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–19
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–8 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–19
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–8 No.7 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–8 DOES NOT FLASH WHILE UNDER
No.2 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) FLASHING CONDITIONS [REAR
DOES NOT TURN OFF WHEN REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . 09-03P–20
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM IS OFF Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–20
[REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–20
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–10 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–21
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–10 No.8 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–10 WARNING CHIME DOES NOT SOUND
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–10 WHILE RVM WARNING INDICATOR
No.3 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) LIGHT IS FLASHING [REAR VEHICLE
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [REAR MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–22
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . 09-03P–11 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–22
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–11 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–22
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–11 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–22
Diagnostic Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–12 No.9 BRIGHTNESS LEVEL OF RVM
No.4 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS IS TOO
ILLUMINATES WHILE NOT UNDER HIGH OR LOW [REAR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [REAR MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–23
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] . . . 09-03P–13 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–23
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–13 Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–23
Possible Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–13 Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03P–23
End of Toc
FOREWORD
WM:RVM
[REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]

x When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, first verify the damage and connection status of
the connectors and terminals, then perform the inspection while shaking the wiring harness to discover whether
poor contact points are the cause of an intermittent malfunction. If there is a malfunction in the connectors or
terminals, securely connect, repair, or perform replacement.
x When the system component parts are replaced/removed/installed, the rear vehicle monitoring configuration
and rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming for the radar sensor must be performed. Perform the relevant initial
setting servicing referring to the corresponding removal/installation procedure.
x The rear vehicle monitoring system is a control device which monitors the vehicle's rear for approaching
vehicles using radio waves emitted from the radar sensor which reflect off the detected vehicle and return to the
radio sensor part of the control module. The rear vehicle monitoring system may not operate normally under
the following conditions:
Effects of weather condition
— Vehicle is driven in rain, snow, or fog.
Effects of driving conditions
— Vehicle non-approaching even though a vehicle enters detection area from the rear of the detecting vehicle
— Target vehicles which are traveling at nearly the same speed for long periods
— Vehicles on the adjacent lane on a road with a wider lane width (detection area for radar sensor is set for
highway width)
Effects of vehicle servicing conditions
— Rear bumper around radar sensor is deformed.
09-03P–1
— Ice, snow or dirt is adhering to the rear bumper radar sensor.
Effects of the vehicle condition approaching from the rear
— Small motorcycle
— Vehicles with body shapes that may not reflect radar (unloaded trailers with low vehicle height, sports cars)
Effects of road conditions
Guardrails and concrete Width of guardrails and

walls are parallel. sidewalls is narrow.
Tunnel inlet and outlet, sidewall

and shelter of tunne
09-03P–2
Vehicle in repair shop
Verify repair order form

and symptom
Perform DTC inspection*1
Does DTC has

YES NO
Are any DTCs displayed? present
malfunction?
NO YES Is displayed DTC NO

U3000:4B or
U3000:97?
Perform DTC Perform DTC
troubleshooting YES troubleshooting
Is malfunction symptom
effected by weather,
driving, vehicle servicing, YES
and road conditions, or
vehicle condition
approaching from rear? System is normal.
Explain to the customer
that the system may not System is normal.
NO operate under these Explain to the customer that the
conditions system stops and the RVM
warning light (amber) illuminates
Perform the rear vehicle under bad weather conditions or
monitoring radar aiming when temperature temporarily
procedure *2 increases
Has the malfunction NO

symptom been
eliminated?
YES
Replace the rear vehicle monitoring
control module and perform the
radar aiming *2 *3
Complete
End Of Sie
09-03P–3
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
RVM
IG1 SWITCH
METER IG 15A
SHORT
SHORT CORD
CORD
IG1 D J D
G H F
INNER IG1 F H F
GARNISH (LH)
RVM WARNING REAR VEHICLE CAN2_H REAR VEHICLE
INDICTOR LIGHT L B J J I C
MONITORING MONITORING
(LH) A A K
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE (LH) CAN2_L
I C L L G A MODULE (RH)
B E G
C J D
M
RVM CAN_H
WARNING D I C N B L
INDICTOR
LIGHT (RH)
INNER O
GARNISH (RH) CAN_L
P C I
H F H
GND GND
H F H
PCM
DLC-2
TCM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DSC HU/CM
RVM INDICTOR
LIGHT (GREEN)
RVM WARNING
BCM LIGHT (AMBER)
REAR VEHICLE WARNING
:REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR (LH) CHIME
:REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR (RH)
End Of Sie
No Troubleshooting item Description

1 09-03P-8 No.1 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN)/RVM x The RVM indicator light (green) does not
WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN illuminate when the ignition is switched ON.
IGNITION IS SWITCHED ON [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING x The RVM warning indicator light does not
SYSTEM] illuminate when the ignition is switched ON.
x No communication with the M-MDS (diagnostic
tester).
2 09-03P-10 No.2 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) DOES NOT x The RVM indicator light (green) does not turn off
TURN OFF WHEN REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM IS even though the RVM switch turns off after the
OFF [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] ignition is switched ON.
3 09-03P-11 No.3 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) DOES NOT x The RVM indicator light (green) does not
ILLUMINATE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] illuminate even though the RVM switch turns on
after the ignition is switched ON.
09-03P–4
No Troubleshooting item Description
4 09-03P-13 No.4 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT x The RVM warning indicator light illuminates
ILLUMINATES WHILE NOT UNDER ILLUMINATION while not under the illumination conditions
CONDITIONS [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] (Vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37 mph}, turn-
signals off, and vehicle in detection area).
5 09-03P-15 No.5 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT DOES x The RVM warning indicator light flashes/does
NOT ILLUMINATE UNDER ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS not illuminate while under the illumination
[REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] conditions (Vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37
mph}, turn-signals off, and vehicle in detection
area).
6 09-03P-19 No.6 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES x The RVM warning indicator light flashes while
WHILE NOT UNDER FLASHING CONDITIONS [REAR not under the flash conditions (Vehicle speed
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] above 60 km/h {37 mph}, turn-signals on, and
vehicle in detection area).
x The RVM warning indicator light flashes while
the turn signals are off.
7 09-03P-20 No.7 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT DOES x The RVM warning indicator light does not flash/
NOT FLASH WHILE UNDER FLASHING CONDITIONS [REAR remains illuminated while under the flash
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM] conditions (Vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37
mph}, turn-signals on, and vehicle in detection
area).
x The RVM warning indicator light does not flash/
remains illuminated while the turn signals are
on.
8 09-03P-22 No.8 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING WARNING x The rear vehicle monitoring warning chime does
CHIME DOES NOT SOUND WHILE RVM WARNING not sound when the vehicle is in the detection
INDICATOR LIGHT IS FLASHING [REAR VEHICLE area on the side in which the turn signals are
MONITORING SYSTEM] operated, and the RVM warning indicator light is
flashing.
9 09-03P-23 No.9 BRIGHTNESS LEVEL OF RVM WARNING x The brightness level of the RVM warning
INDICATOR LIGHTS IS TOO HIGH OR LOW [REAR VEHICLE indicator light is low in the daytime (headlights
MONITORING SYSTEM] off) (correct level at night).
x The brightness level of the RVM warning
indicator light is high at night (headlights on)
(correct level in the daytime).
indicator light is low during dimmer cancel
function operation (Correct level while dimmer
cancel function not operating).
indicator light is high while dimmer cancel
function is not operating (correct level during
dimmer cancel function operation).
End Of Sie
09-03P–5
9
8
7
5
4
2
1
high or low
09-03P–6
6 illumination conditions
illumination conditions
vehicle monitoring system is off
(turn signals off, or no vehicle in alert area)
while RVM warning indicator light is flashing

3 RVM indicator light (green) does not illuminate
does not illuminate when ignition is switched on
RVM warning indicator light flashes while not under
flashing conditions (turn signal is being operated)

Possible factor
RVM warning indicator light does not illuminate under
Brightness level of RVM warning indicator lights is too

RVM warning indicator light does not flash while under
RVM indicator light (green) does not turn off when rear
RVM warning indicator light illuminates while not under

RVM indicator light (green)/RVM warning indicator light
Rear vehicle monitoring warning chime does not sound

X
*1㧤Vehicles with advanced keyless entry and push button start system
Open circuit in wiring harness between IG relay and rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal F*1
*2㧤Vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system
Open circuit in wiring harness between IG relay and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal F*1
Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch and rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal F*2
Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal F*2
X X X X
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal H and ground
X
Open circuit in wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal H and ground
X
X
X
X
X
Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH)
X
X
X
X
Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) and instrument cluster
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction (internal malfunction)
X
X
X X
X
X X
X X
X
X
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction
X X X X
Rear vehicle monitoring control module poor ground (looseness, disengagement)
METER IG 15A fuse damage or burn-out
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
Instrument cluster malfunction
X
ABS wheel-speed sensor malfunction
X X
X X
Communication error between BCM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
X X
X X X
BCM malfunction
Communication error between DSC HU/CM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
X X
X
X
Communication error between PCM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
Communication error between BCM and PCM (MTX)
Communication error between TCM and PCM (ATX)
Back-up light switch malfunction (MTX)
X X X X X X
X: Applicable
Transaxle range (TR) switch malfunction (ATX)

9
8
7
4
2
End Of Sie
high or low
rear vehicle monitoring system is off
(turn signals off, or no vehicle in alert area)
while RVM warning indicator light is flashing

3 RVM indicator light (green) does not illuminate
does not illuminate when ignition is switched on
Possible factor
flashing conditions (turn signal is being operated)

RVM indicator light (green) does not turn off when
RVM warning indicator light flashes while not under

RVM warning indicator light does not illuminate under
Brightness level of RVM warning indicator lights is too

RVM warning indicator light does not flash while under
RVM warning indicator light illuminates while not under
1 RVM indicator light (green)/RVM warning indicator light
Rear vehicle monitoring warning chime does not sound

X
X
Rear vehicle monitoring control module radar does not receive echo-back correctly
Rear vehicle monitoring control module radar is not emitted inside of detection
X
X
X
X
area (deviates from blind-spot area or adjacent lanes)
X
Open circuit in wiring harness between light switch and ground
X
X
Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
X
X
Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal K and ground
X
X
RVM switch ground point looseness/disengagement
X
X
X
RVM switch malfunction (stuck switch, internal malfunction)
RVM warning indicator light malfunction
X X
X X
X X
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between RVM warning indicator light and rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
X
Light switch malfunction (stuck)
X
X
Open circuit in wiring harness between light switch and BCM
X
X
Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between light switch and BCM
X
Light switch malfunction (open circuit)
X
X
X
SAS control module (Yaw rate sensor) malfunction
Incorrect installation of rear bumper, soiling to radar emitting/receiving area, application of
X
X
X
X
stickers (including transparent types), repairs using putty application
X
X
X
X
Damage, deformity or looseness to installation bracket or vehicle frame (including moderate impacts)
X
X
X
X
Effect of non-genuine, after-market electronic device installation
X: Applicable
09-03P–7
No.1 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN)/RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN
IGNITION IS SWITCHED ON [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Description
x RVM indicator light (green) does not illuminate when ignition is switched ON.
x RVM warning indicator light does not illuminate when ignition is switched ON.
x No communication with the M-MDS (diagnostic tester).
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) does not initiate.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block (IG1 relay) terminal 1B and rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH) terminal F*1
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch terminal D and rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH) terminal F*2
— METER IG 15A fuse damage or burn-out
— Open circuit in wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) terminal H and ground
— Poor ground (looseness, disengagement)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction (internal malfunction)
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) does not initiate. (DTC U0028:87 is output)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block (IG1 relay) terminal 1B and rear vehicle monitoring
control module (LH) terminal F*1
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch and rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
terminal F*2
— METER IG 15A fuse damage or burn-out
— Open circuit in wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) terminal H and ground
— Poor ground (looseness, disengagement)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction (internal malfunction)
x Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH). (DTC 0028:87 is output)
x Instrument cluster does not receive RVM indicator light (green) illumination request signal from rear vehicle
monitoring control module (RH).
— Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) and instrument cluster
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) internal malfunction (illumination request signal is not output)
— Instrument cluster internal malfunction (illumination request signal is not received)
x RVM warning indicator light illumination circuit disabled.
— RVM warning indicator light malfunction
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) and RVM
warning indicator light
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) internal malfunction (RVM warning indicator light illumination
circuit disabled)
x Instrument cluster does not illuminate RVM indicator light (green).
— Instrument cluster internal malfunction (RVM indicator light (green) illumination circuit disabled)
*1
*2 : Vehicles without advanced keyless entry and push button start system
x Retrieve DTCs from the rear vehicle monitoring (See 09-02J-3 DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE
system and instrument cluster using the M-MDS. MONITORING SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].) No Go to the next step.
(See 09-02I-4 DTC INSPECTION If a communication error occurs when retrieving the rear
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) vehicle monitoring system DTCs, go to Step 5.
x Are any DTCs displayed?
2 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Go to Step 4.
RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) OR No Go to the next step.
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
x Inspect RVM indicator light (green) condition.
x Does the RVM indicator light (green) illuminate?
09-03P–8
3 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL (RH).
MODULE OR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
RELATED
x Illuminate all the indicator lights and warning
lights in the instrument cluster using the
INSTALLATION.)
simulation function WL+IL of the M-MDS
instrument cluster.
(See 09-02I-25 ACTIVE COMMAND MODES
INSPECTION [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
4* DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
MODULE OR RVM WARNING INDICATOR (LH).
LIGHT RELATED (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Inspect the following:
RVM warning indicator light (RH) related:
— RVM warning indicator light (RH)
— Wiring harness between RVM warning
indicator light (RH) terminal A and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal D
indicator light (RH) terminal B and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal C
RVM warning indicator light (LH) related:
— RVM warning indicator light (LH)
indicator light (LH) terminal A and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal K
indicator light (LH) terminal B and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal G
x Is a malfunction detected?
5* INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Go to the next step.
CONTROL MODULE (RH) POWER No Inspect the METER IG 15A fuse.
SUPPLY SYSTEM If the fuse is damaged:
x Switch the ignition to ON. x Replace the METER IG 15A fuse.
x Measure the voltage at rear vehicle monitoring If the fuse is burned out:
control module (RH) terminal F. x Inspect and repair the wiring harness between the
x Is the voltage B+? METER IG 15A fuse and rear vehicle monitoring
control modules (RH/LH) terminal F for a short
circuit to the ground system.
If the fuse is not damaged or burned out:
x Inspect and repair the following wiring harness for
an open circuit:
— Between relay block (IG1 relay) terminal 1B and
rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH/LH)
terminal F*1
— Between ignition switch terminal D and rear
vehicle monitoring control modules (RH/LH)
terminal F*2
6* INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
CONTROL MODULE (RH) GROUND (RH).
SYSTEM
x Switch the ignition to off (LOCK).
x Disconnect the rear vehicle monitoring control No Inspect and repair the ground point for looseness,
module (RH) connector. disengagement, lifting.
x Verify the continuity between the rear vehicle Inspect and repair the wiring harness for an open
monitoring control module (RH) vehicle wiring circuit.
harness-side connector terminal H and ground.
*1
*2
End Of Sie
09-03P–9
No.2 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) DOES NOT TURN OFF WHEN REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
SYSTEM IS OFF [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Description
x RVM indicator light (green) does not turn off even though RVM switch turns off after ignition is switched ON.
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) does not recognize the RVM switch on/off status.
— RVM switch malfunction (stuck switch, internal malfunction)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal I and rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal D (L.H.D.)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal C and rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH) terminal D (R.H.D.)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal K and ground
— RVM switch ground point looseness/disengagement
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction
x Instrument cluster does not receive RVM indicator light (green) off-request signal from rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH).
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) internal malfunction (off-request signal is not output)
— Instrument cluster internal malfunction (off-request signal is not received)
x Instrument cluster does not turn off RVM indicator light (green).
2* DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Go to Step 6.
RVM SWITCH OR RVM INDICATOR No Go to the next step.
LIGHT (GREEN) RELATED
x Monitor the rear vehicle monitoring system PID
MAIN_SW using the M-MDS.
(See 09-02J-30 PID/DATA MONITOR
INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
SYSTEM].)
x Turn the RVM switch on and off.
x Does the PID MAIN_SW monitoring value turn
on and off according to the RVM switch
operation?
3 INSPECT RVM SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the RVM switch. No Replace the RVM switch.
(See 09-22-39 RVM SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-38 RVM SWITCH REMOVAL/
x Is the RVM switch normal? INSTALLATION.)
09-03P–10
4* VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT IN RVM SWITCH SIGNAL- No Repair or replace the wiring harness for an open circuit.
RELATED WIRING HARNESS
x Disconnect the rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH) and RVM switch connectors.
x Verify the continuity between the rear vehicle
monitoring control module (RH) terminal D and
RVM switch terminal I by checking the continuity
at the vehicle wiring harness-side connector.
(L.H.D.)
x Verify the continuity between the rear vehicle
RVM switch terminal C by checking the
continuity at the vehicle wiring harness-side
connector. (R.H.D.)
5* DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
OPEN CIRCUIT IN RVM SWITCH (RH).
GROUND SYSTEM WIRING HARNESS
OR REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
No Inspect and repair the ground point for looseness,
CONTROL MODULE (RH) disengagement, or lifting.
x Leave the RVM switch connector disconnected. Inspect and repair the wiring harness for an open
x Verify the continuity between RVM switch circuit.
terminal K and ground.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OR REAR (RH).
VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
MODULE (RH)
x Turn off all the indicator lights and warning lights
in the instrument cluster using the simulation
INSTALLATION.)
function WL+IL of the M-MDS instrument cluster.
x Does the RVM indicator light (green) turn off?
End Of Sie
No.3 RVM INDICATOR LIGHT (GREEN) DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Description
x RVM indicator light (green) does not illuminate even though RVM switch turns on after ignition is switched ON.
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) does not recognize RVM switch on/off status.
— RVM switch malfunction (stuck switch, internal malfunction)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal I and rear vehicle monitoring control module
terminal D (L.H.D.)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal C and rear vehicle monitoring control module
terminal D (R.H.D.)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between RVM switch terminal K and ground
— RVM switch ground point looseness/disengagement
x Instrument cluster does not receive RVM indicator light (green) illumination request signal from rear vehicle
monitoring control module (RH).
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) internal malfunction (Illumination request signal is not output)
— Instrument cluster internal malfunction (Illumination request signal is not received)
x Instrument cluster does not illuminate RVM indicator light (green).
09-03P–11
RVM SWITCH OR RVM INDICATOR No Go to the next step.
LIGHT (GREEN) ILLUMINATION
RELATED
x Monitor the rear vehicle monitoring system PID
MAIN_SW using the M-MDS.
x Turn the RVM switch on and off.
x Does the PID MAIN_SW monitoring value turn
on and off according to the RVM switch
operation?
3 INSPECT RVM SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the RVM switch. No Replace the RVM switch.
(See 09-22-39 RVM SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-38 RVM SWITCH REMOVAL/
x Is the RVM switch normal? INSTALLATION.)
4* VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT IN RVM SWITCH SIGNAL- No Repair or replace the wiring harness for an open circuit.
x Disconnect the rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH) and RVM switch connectors.
x Verify the continuity between rear vehicle
RVM switch terminal I by checking the continuity
at the vehicle wiring harness-side connector.
(L.H.D.)
x Verify the continuity between rear vehicle
RVM switch terminal C by checking the
continuity at the vehicle wiring harness-side
connector. (R.H.D.)
5* DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
OPEN CIRCUIT IN RVM SWITCH (RH).
GROUND SYSTEM WIRING HARNESS
OR REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
No Inspect and repair the ground point for looseness,
CONTROL MODULE (RH) disengagement, or lifting.
x Leave the RVM switch connector disconnected. Inspect and repair the wiring harness for an open
x Verify the continuity between RVM switch circuit.
terminal K and ground.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER OR REAR (RH).
VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
MODULE (RH)
x Illuminate all the indicator lights and warning
lights in the instrument cluster using the
INSTALLATION.)
simulation function WL+IL in the M-MDS
instrument cluster.
End Of Sie
09-03P–12
No.4 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHILE NOT UNDER ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS
Description
x RVM warning indicator light illuminates although illumination conditions (vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37
mph}, turn signals off, and vehicle in detection area) are not satisfied.
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect that a vehicle is inside detection area when it is actually
outside of it, or cannot determine that a vehicle is entering blind-spot area.
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module radar is not emitted inside of detection area (deviates from blind-
spot area or adjacent lanes)
x Damage, deformity or looseness to rear vehicle monitoring bracket or vehicle frame (including
moderate impacts)
x Yaw rate signal error (communication error between DSC HU/CM and rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH), communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH), or
SAS control module malfunction)
x Incorrect installation of rear bumper, soiling to radar emitting/receiving area, application of stickers
(including transparent types), repairs using putty application
— Effect of non-genuine, after-market electronic device installation
Note
x The radar sensor cannot receive echo-back correctly if there is a thick moisture film (such as
condensation) or excessive soiling covering the rear bumper radar emitting/receiving areas.
x Non-genuine rear bumper or paint, or installation of after-market parts may negatively affect radar echo-
back ability.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules do not detect vehicle speed correctly (false detection of vehicle speed
as being above 60 km/h {37 mph} constantly).
— Communication error between PCM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
x RVM warning indicator light illumination circuit disabled.
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) internal malfunction (RVM warning indicator light illumination
circuit disabled)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction (outputs incorrect illumination request)
Warning
x When performing a road test, always verify the safety of the surrounding area before performing
the test.
x To assure safety, perform a road test using two people when the vehicle is being driven. (One
drives the vehicle and the other operates the M-MDS.)
x Do not perform a road test at a speed which exceeds the legal speed limit.

system, PCM, DSC HU/CM, SAS control MONITORING SYSTEM].)
module, and instrument cluster using the M- (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
MDS.
(See 09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].) 2.5].)
(See 09-02I-4 DTC INSPECTION (See 08-02-6 DTC TABLE.)
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS No Go to the next step.
09-03P–13
INPUT SIGNAL OR REAR VEHICLE No x If VSPD monitor value is not normal, go to the next
MONITORING CONTROL MODULE step.
RELATED x If the YAW_RATE monitor value is not normal, go to
Step 4.
x Monitor the following rear vehicle monitoring
system PIDs using the M-MDS:
SYSTEM].)
— VSPD
— YAW_RATE
3 INSPECT VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Monitor the PID VSS for the PCM using the M- (RH).
MDS. No Inspect the ABS wheel-speed sensor related parts.
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST (See 04-15-8 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].) INSPECTION.)
x Are the monitoring values normal? (See 04-15-8 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
4* INSPECT YAW RATE SIGNAL Yes Inspect the DTC for the SAS control module.
x Inspect the DTC for the SAS control module ON- (See 08-02-6 DTC TABLE.)
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Have DTCs C0063:29, U0001:88 been recorded (RH).
in memory? (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
5 VERIFY REAR BUMPER CONDITION Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the rear bumper at the rear vehicle No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, or replace
monitoring control module installation area for the rear bumper.
the following: (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/
— Installation condition INSTALLATION.)
— Application of stickers (including transparent
types)
— Excessive soiling
— Repairs using putty
x Is the rear bumper condition normal?
6 VERIFY INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Yes Go to the next step.
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
MODULES
x Remove the rear bumper.
(See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the installation condition of the rear
vehicle monitoring control modules for the
following:
— Looseness
— Damage or deformity to the bracket
— Distortion at vehicle installation surface
x Is the rear vehicle monitoring control modules
installation condition normal?
7 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Go to the next step.
AFTER-MARKET ELECTRONIC DEVICE No Explain to the customer that the malfunction occurred
INSTALLATION due to after-market electronic device installation.
x Disconnect the non-genuine, after-market
electronic device connectors.
x Verify that the malfunction symptom recurs as
stated by the customer.
x Does the malfunction recur?
09-03P–14
8 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS RVM Yes Go to the next step.
WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT RELATED (LH).
x Monitor the following rear vehicle monitoring (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
system PIDs using the M-MDS: CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
SYSTEM].)
— WRN_IND_R
— WRN_IND_L
x Drive the vehicle under the condition stated by
the customer. (not under RVM warning indicator
light-illumination conditions)
x Does the monitored value turn on?
9 INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Temporary malfunction with the radar echo-back.
CONTROL MODULES If the same symptom recurs repeatedly, replace the rear
x Inspect the malfunctioning rear vehicle vehicle monitoring control module.
monitoring control module. (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Is the rear vehicle monitoring control module CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
normal? No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
(RH).
End Of Sie
No.5 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE UNDER ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS
Description
x RVM warning indicator light flashes/does not illuminate despite satisfying the conditions to illuminate RVM
warning indicator light (vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37 mph}, turn signals off, and vehicle in detection area).
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect that a vehicle is outside detection area when it is actually
inside of it, or cannot determine that no vehicle is entering blind-spot area.
x Damage, deformity or looseness to installation bracket or vehicle frame (including moderate impacts)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module radar does not receive echo-back correctly
Note
back ability.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules do not detect vehicle speed correctly (false-detects vehicle speed as
being within 55 km/h {34 mph} constantly).
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect that vehicle is traveling on gentle curve (small curvature).
— Yaw rate signal malfunction
x Communication error between DSC HU/CM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
x Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH)
x SAS control module (Yaw rate sensor) malfunction
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules do not detect selector lever position correctly (selector lever is in
reverse (MTX)/R position (ATX)).
— Communication error between PCM and BCM (MTX)
09-03P–15
— Communication error between PCM and TCM (ATX)
— TR switch malfunction (ATX)
— Back-up light switch malfunction (MTX)
x RVM warning indicator light illumination related malfunction.
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction (warning light illumination circuit disabled)
— Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH) (Rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) does not receive illumination request from rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH))
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect that turn signals are on.
— Communication error between BCM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
Warning
the test.

system, PCM, DSC HU/CM, SAS control MONITORING SYSTEM].)
module, and instrument cluster using the M- (See 09-02I-4 DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
MDS.
(See 09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR (See 01-02A-16 DTC TABLE [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].) 2.5].)
(See 09-02I-4 DTC INSPECTION (See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS [DYNAMIC
[INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].) STABILITY CONTROL (DSC)].)
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST (See 08-02-6 DTC TABLE.)
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 04-02B-2 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS No Go to the next step.

RVM WARNING LIGHT (AMBER) OR RVM No Go to the next step.
WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
SYSTEM].)
— WRN_IND_R
— WRN_IND_L
x Drive the vehicle under the RVM warning
indicator light-illumination conditions.
x Does the monitored value turn on?
09-03P–16
3 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
MODULES OR RVM WARNING (LH).
INDICATOR LIGHTS (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Inspect the following:
RVM warning indicator light (RH) related:
— RVM warning indicator light (RH)
indicator light (RH) terminal A and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal D
indicator light (RH) terminal B and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal C
RVM warning indicator light (LH) related:
— RVM warning indicator light (LH)
indicator light (LH) terminal A and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal K
indicator light (LH) terminal B and rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) terminal G
x Is any malfunction verified?
INPUT SIGNAL OR ELSEWHERE No x If the VSPD monitoring value is not normal, go to
x Monitor the following rear vehicle monitoring the next step.
system and BCM (MTX)/TCM (ATX) PIDs using x If the YAW_RATE monitoring value is not normal, go
the M-MDS: to Step 6.
(See 09-02J-30 PID/DATA MONITOR x If the R_GEAR_SW monitoring value is not normal,
INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING go to Step 7.
SYSTEM].) x If the TR monitoring value is not normal, go to Step
(See 09-02K-93 PID/DATA MONITOR 8.
INSPECTION [BCM].)
(See 05-02-5 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION
[FS5A-EL].)
Rear vehicle monitoring system PIDs:
— VSPD
— YAW_RATE
BCM PIDs (MTX):
— R_GEAR_SW
TCM PIDs (ATX):
— TR
5 INSPECT VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Monitor the PID VSS for the PCM using the M- (RH).
MDS. (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
(See 01-02A-8 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST
No Inspect the ABS wheel-speed sensor related parts.
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
(See 04-15-8 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
(See 04-15-8 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
6 INSPECT YAW RATE SIGNAL Yes Inspect the DTC for the SAS control module.
x Inspect the DTC for the SAS control module ON- (See 08-02-6 DTC TABLE.)
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Have DTCs C0063:29, U0001:88 been recorded (RH).
in memory? (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
09-03P–17
7 INSPECT BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH Yes Inspect the back-up light switch related wiring harness.
x Inspect the back-up light switch. If normal, replace the rear vehicle monitoring control
(See 09-18-59 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH module (RH).
INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Is the back-up light switch normal? CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Replace the back-up light switch.
(See 05-15A-2 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 05-15B-2 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 05-15C-2 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
8 INSPECT TR SWITCH Yes Inspect the back-up light switch related wiring harness.
x Inspect the TR switch. If normal, replace the rear vehicle monitoring control
(See 05-17-19 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) module (RH).
SWITCH INSPECTION [FS5A-EL].) (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Is the TR switch normal? CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Replace the TR switch.
(See 05-17-22 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
REMOVAL [FS5A-EL].)
(See 05-17-20 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSTALLATION [FS5A-EL].)
9 VERIFY REAR BUMPER CONDITION Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the rear bumper at the rear vehicle No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part, or replace
monitoring control modules installation areas for the rear bumper.
the following: (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/
— Installation condition INSTALLATION.)
— Application of stickers (including transparent
types)
— Excessive soiling
— Repairs using putty
x Is the rear bumper condition normal?
10 VERIFY INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Yes Go to the next step.
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
MODULES
x Remove the rear bumper.
INSTALLATION.)
x Inspect the installation condition of the rear
vehicle monitoring control modules for the
following:
— Looseness
— Damage or deformity to the bracket
— Distortion at vehicle installation surface
x Is the rear vehicle monitoring control modules
installation condition normal?
AFTER-MARKET ELECTRONIC DEVICE No Explain to the customer that the malfunction occurred
INSTALLATION due to the after-market electronic device installation.
x Disconnect the non-genuine, after-market
electronic device connectors.
x Verify if the malfunction symptom recurs as
stated by the customer.
x Does the malfunction recur?
12 INSPECT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Temporary malfunction with the radar echo-back.
CONTROL MODULES If the same symptom recurs repeatedly, replace the rear
x Inspect the malfunctioning rear vehicle vehicle monitoring control module.
monitoring control module. (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Is the rear vehicle monitoring control module CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
normal? No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module.
End Of Sie
09-03P–18
No.6 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT FLASHES WHILE NOT UNDER FLASHING CONDITIONS [REAR
Description
x RVM warning indicator light flashes although the RVM warning indicator light illumination conditions (vehicle
speed above 60 km/h {37 mph}, turn signals on, and vehicle in detection area) are not satisfied.
x RVM warning indicator light flashes but turn signals are not operated.
Note
x This malfunction symptom is basically the same as symptom “No.4 RVM warning indicator light
illuminates while not under illumination conditions”.
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect a vehicle as being inside detection area when it is actually
outside of it, or cannot determine that a vehicle is entering blind-spot area.
moderate impacts)
Note
back ability.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules do not detect the vehicle speed correctly (false detection of vehicle
speed as being above 60 km/h {37 mph} constantly).
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect that turn signals are on.
— BCM malfunction
— Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between light switch and BCM
1 VERIFY MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Go to the symptom troubleshooting procedure, “No.4
x Do the RVM warning indicator light and RVM RVM warning indicator light illuminates while not under
warning light (amber) illuminate when the illumination conditions”.
illumination conditions are not satisfied? (See 09-03P-13 No.4 RVM WARNING INDICATOR
LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHILE NOT UNDER
ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [REAR VEHICLE
system and BCM using the M-MDS. MONITORING SYSTEM].)
(See 09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR (See 09-02K-3 DTC TABLE [BCM].)
09-03P–19
INPUT SIGNAL OR REAR VEHICLE (RH).
RELATED
SYSTEM].)
— TURN_SW_R
— TURN_SW_L
x Does the monitoring value turn on and off
according to the turn signal switch operation?
4 INSPECT TURN SIGNAL SWITCH SIGNAL Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Monitor the following BCM PIDs using the M- (RH).
MDS: (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
(See 09-02K-93 PID/DATA MONITOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION [BCM].) No Inspect the following. If a malfunction is detected, repair
— TURN_SW_R or replace the malfunctioning part.
— TURN_SW_L x Light switch
x Does the monitoring value turn on and off (See 09-18-63 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
according to the turn signal switch operation? x Wiring harness between light switch (LH) terminal E
and BCM terminal 3E*1
x Wiring harness between light switch (RH) terminal
G and BCM terminal 3H*1
x Wiring harness between light switch terminal I and
ground*1
x Wiring harness between light switch (LH) terminal I
x Wiring harness between light switch terminal E and
ground*2
If a malfunction is not detected, replace the BCM.
*1 : Vehicles with light switch on left side

*2 : Vehicles with light switch on right side
End Of Sie
No.7 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT FLASH WHILE UNDER FLASHING CONDITIONS [REAR
Description
x RVM warning indicator light does not flash/remains illuminated despite satisfying conditions to flash RVM
warning indicator light (vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37 mph}, turn signals on, and vehicle in detection area).
x RVM warning indicator light does not flash or remains illuminated, but turn signals are on.
Note
x This malfunction symptom is considered the same symptom as “No.5 RVM warning indicator light does
not illuminate while under illumination conditions”.
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect a vehicle as being outside blind-spot area when it is
actually inside of it, or cannot determine that no vehicle is entering blind-spot area.
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module radar is not emitted inside detection area (deviates from blind-spot
area or adjacent lanes)
moderate impacts)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module radar does not receive echo-back correctly
09-03P–20
Note
back ability.
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules do not detect vehicle speed correctly (false-detection of vehicle speed
as being within 55 km/h {34 mph} constantly).
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules false-detect vehicle is traveling on gentle curve (small curvature).
— Yaw rate signal malfunction
x Communication error between DSC HU/CM and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
x Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH)
x SAS control module (Yaw rate sensor) malfunction
x RVM warning indicator light illumination related malfunction.
— Open or short circuit in wiring harness between RVM warning indicator light and rear vehicle monitoring
control module (LH)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) malfunction (warning light illumination circuit disabled)
— Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH) (Rear vehicle
monitoring control module (LH) does not receive illumination request from rear vehicle monitoring control
module (RH))
x Rear vehicle monitoring control modules do not detect turn signal operation.
— Light switch malfunction (open circuit)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between light switch and BCM
— Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH) (turn signal is not
transmitted to LH side)
1 VERIFY MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Go to the next step.
x Does the RVM warning indicator light illuminate No Go to the symptom troubleshooting procedure,“No.5
when the illumination conditions are satisfied? RVM warning indicator light does not illuminate while
under illumination conditions”.
(See 09-03P-15 No.5 RVM WARNING INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE UNDER
ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [REAR VEHICLE
INPUT SIGNAL OR REAR VEHICLE (RH).
RELATED
SYSTEM].)
— TURN_SW_R
— TURN_SW_L
x Does the monitoring value turn on and off
according to the turn signal switch operation?
09-03P–21
4 INSPECT TURN SIGNAL SWITCH SIGNAL Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Monitor the following BCM PIDs using the M- (RH).
MDS: (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
(See 09-02K-93 PID/DATA MONITOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION [BCM].) No Inspect the following. If a malfunction is detected, repair
— TURN_SW_R or replace the malfunctioning part.
— TURN_SW_L x Light switch
x Does the monitoring value turn on and off (See 09-18-63 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
according to the turn signal switch operation? x Wiring harness between light switch (LH) terminal E
x Wiring harness between light switch terminal I and
ground*1
x Wiring harness between light switch (LH) terminal I
x Wiring harness between light switch terminal E and
ground*2
If a malfunction is not detected, replace the BCM.

End Of Sie
No.8 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING WARNING CHIME DOES NOT SOUND WHILE RVM WARNING
INDICATOR LIGHT IS FLASHING [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM]
Description
x Rear vehicle monitoring warning chime does not sound even though rear vehicle monitoring system recognizes
a vehicle in detection area on side in which turn signal is operated or one entering blind-spot area from rear,
and RVM warning indicator light is flashing.
Possible Causes
x Instrument cluster receives incorrect beeper sound request signal.
— Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH) (Detected results are
not transmitted from LH to RH side)
2 x Sound all the warning alarms in the instrument Yes Go to the next step.
cluster using the simulation function ALARM in No Replace the instrument cluster.
the M-MDS instrument cluster. (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
x Does the rear vehicle monitoring warning chime INSTALLATION.)
sound?
09-03P–22
3 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Go to the next step.
BUZZER SOUND RELATED CIRCUIT No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Turn the rear vehicle monitoring system PID (RH).
BUZZER (rear vehicle monitoring warning (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
chime) on and off using the M-MDS simulation CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
function.
x Does the chime sound?
4 VERIFY RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
ILLUMINATION CONDITION (RH).
x Verify the illumination of the RVM warning (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
indicator lights when the illumination conditions CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(vehicle speed above 60 km/h {37 mph}, turn No Go to the symptom troubleshooting procedure,“No.5
signals off, and vehicle detected in blind-spot RVM warning indicator light does not illuminate while
area or entering blind-spot area from rear) are under illumination conditions”.
satisfied. (See 09-03P-15 No.5 RVM WARNING INDICATOR
x Is the RVM warning indicator lights illumination LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE UNDER
normal? ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS [REAR VEHICLE
End Of Sie
No.9 BRIGHTNESS LEVEL OF RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS IS TOO HIGH OR LOW [REAR VEHICLE
MONITORING SYSTEM]
Description
x RVM warning indicator lights brightness level is low in the daytime (headlights off) (correct level is retained at
night).
x RVM warning indicator lights brightness level is high at night (headlights on) (correct level is retained in the
daytime).
x RVM warning indicator lights brightness level is low during dimmer cancel function operation (correct level is
retained while dimmer cancel function is not operating).
x RVM warning indicator lights brightness level is high while dimmer cancel function is not operating (correct level
is retained during dimmer cancel function operation).
Possible Causes
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) does not receive correct TNS signal from BCM.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between light switch and ground
— Open circuit in wiring harness between light switch and BCM
— Short circuit to ground in wiring harness between light switch and BCM
— Light switch malfunction (stuck)
— BCM malfunction
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) does not receive dimmer cancel signal correctly from instrument
cluster.
— Communication error between instrument cluster and rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
— Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH) malfunction (Dimmer cancel signal is not received)
— Instrument cluster malfunction (Dimmer cancel signal is not output)
x Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH) does not receive TNS signal and dimmer cancel signal from rear
vehicle monitoring control module (RH).
— Communication error between rear vehicle monitoring control modules (RH and LH)
Warning
the test.
09-03P–23

x Retrieve DTCs from rear vehicle monitoring (See 09-02J-3 DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE
INPUT SIGNAL OR RVM WARNING (LH).
INDICATOR LIGHTS ILLUMINATION
CIRCUIT RELATED
SYSTEM].)
— OP_BRT_R
— OP_BRT_L
x Perform the ON/OFF operation of the light switch
and the instrument cluster dimmer cancel
function.
Note
x While the dimmer function is canceled, the
PID monitoring value increases (brighter)
with the headlights on.
x Does the monitoring value change according to

light switch and dimmer cancel operation?
3 VERIFY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIMMER Yes Go to the next step.
CANCEL FUNCTION OPERATION No Replace the instrument cluster.
x Verify that the dimmer cancel function of the (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
instrument cluster is operating correctly. INSTALLATION.)
x Is the dimmer release function operating
correctly?
4 VERIFY TNS SIGNAL Yes Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control module
x Turn on the light switch. (RH).
x Measure the terminal voltage at BCM terminal (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
3O. CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE No Go to the next step.
(BCM) INSPECTION.)
5 INSPECT TNS SIGNAL WIRING HARNESS Yes Go to the next step.
x Switch the ignition to off (LOCK). No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
x Inspect the wiring harness between the following
terminals for an open or short circuit.
— Between light switch (TNS) terminal D and
BCM terminal 3O*1
— Light switch terminal B and ground*1
— Between light switch (TNS) terminal L and
BCM terminal 3O*2
— Light switch terminal N and ground*2
6 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH Yes Replace the BCM.
x Inspect the light switch. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
(See 09-18-63 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is the light switch normal? No Replace the light switch.
(See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie
09-03P–24
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [PARKING SENSOR]
09-03Q SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING [PARKING

SENSOR]
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX No.3 NO DETECTION SOUND/LOW
[PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03Q–1 VOLUME [PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . . 09-03Q–10
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM WIRING No.4 INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
DIAGRAM [PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . 09-03Q–2 ILLUMINATE [PARKING SENSOR] . . . . 09-03Q–11
No.1 SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE No.5 CANNOT DETECT OBSTRUCTION
[PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03Q–3 [PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03Q–13
No.2 MALFUNCTION DETECTION No.6 DETECTS VEHICLE SPEED OF
SOUND ACTIVATED 10 km/h {6.2 mph} OR MORE
[PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03Q–4 [PARKING SENSOR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-03Q–15
End of Toc
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX [PARKING SENSOR]
Warning
x The parking sensor is a device to assist the driver in confirming safety. It is not a substitute for the
driver and cannot guarantee 100% safety. Do not rely completely on the parking sensor and drive
slowly confirming the safety of the surrounding area visually.
x The following circumstances may obstruct the ultrasonic waves resulting in an accident:
— Ice, snow, or dirt is adhering to the ultrasonic sensor
— The ultrasonic sensor is blocked with foreign material (such as bumper stickers)
— A shock is applied to the bumper in an accident and the ultrasonic sensor installation angle is deviated
— The ultrasonic sensor is exposed to heavy rain or water-spray from the road
— There is another device emitting ultrasonic waves (such as a parking sensor of another vehicle) near the
ultrasonic sensor
x The parking sensor may not operate correctly under the following conditions:
— Ice, snow, or dirt is adhering to the ultrasonic sensor surface
— The sensor is frozen
— The vehicle is in a tilted position
— The vehicle is parked on a steep incline or there is a difference in height between lines
— Obstructions have approached too close to the ultrasonic sensor
x The parking sensor may not detect the following items:
— Thin objects such as wire or rope
— Items which absorb ultrasonic waves easily, such as cotton or snow
— Angular-shaped objects
— Tall objects with protruding at the top
— Short objects
— Objects located immediately below the bumper, such as wheel stoppers
x The warning alert may activate while driving near parked vehicles/guardrails/walls on a narrow road, or while
driving on a slope, gravel road, or grass field. This is a normal effect caused by the system's response to
ultrasonic waves, and does not indicate a malfunction.
1 09-03Q-3 No.1 SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE [PARKING x Buzzer does not sound and indicator light does not
SENSOR] illuminate after parking sensor switch is on.
2 09-03Q-4 No.2 MALFUNCTION DETECTION SOUND x Malfunction detection sound activates (5 times
ACTIVATED [PARKING SENSOR] consecutively) after parking sensor switch is turned on.
3 x Buzzer does not sound (indicator light illuminates
09-03Q-10 No.3 NO DETECTION SOUND/LOW VOLUME normally) after parking sensor switch is turned on.
[PARKING SENSOR] x Detection sound from front parking buzzer or rear
parking sensor buzzer is weak.
4 x Indicator light does not illuminate (buzzer activation
09-03Q-11 No.4 INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT normal) with the parking sensor on (initialize mode).
ILLUMINATE [PARKING SENSOR] x Indicator light does not illuminate even though
detection conditions have been met.
5 09-03Q-13 No.5 CANNOT DETECT OBSTRUCTION x Does not detect even though obstruction is within the
[PARKING SENSOR] detection area with the detections conditions satisfied.
6 x Front parking sensor (vehicle front) detects obstruction
09-03Q-15 No.6 DETECTS VEHICLE SPEED OF 10 km/h
while in position other than R position and at a speed
{6.2 mph} OR MORE [PARKING SENSOR]
other than 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more.
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM [PARKING SENSOR]
ULTRASONIC SENSOR PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE

IG1
REAR
CORNER PARKING
B G
SENSOR SENSOR
A H 15A
(RH) SWITCH
REAR
CORNER B E U
SENSOR A
(LH)
BACK B C
SENSOR
(RH)
A
BACK AB
B A
SENSOR
(LH) A
IG1
FRONT
CORNER B O
SENSOR
A P
(RH)
A
FRONT PARKING
CORNER B I
SENSOR
SENSOR A J Z B BUZZER
(LH)
(REAR)
FRONT B M
SENSOR
(RH) A N
PARKING SENSOR BUZZER (FRONT)
FRONT (BUILT-IN PARKING SENSOR
B K
SENSOR
A L B CONTROL MODULE)
(LH)
TWIST PAIR
5V
Q
IG1
AE
5V HEADLIGHT
AUDIO LIGHT
BCM SWITCH
IG1 (INSTRUMENT
AA CLUSTER)
PARKING
5V
BRAKE
SWITCH 5V BCM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
AC
HEADLIGHT
Y WIPER AND M CLEANER
SPEED SIGNAL WASHER SW
MOTOR
5V
OPTION
IG1
AF A TOW BAR
(KIT ACCESSORY)
BACK-UP 5V
LIGHT SW
5V
BCM
W CPU
AD B
BACK-UP
LIGHT
TO TRAILER
End Of Sie
No.1 SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE [PARKING SENSOR]
1 System does not operate

DESCRIPTION Buzzer does not sound and indicator light does not illuminate after parking sensor switch is on
x Parking sensor control module power supply related malfunction.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between relay block terminals 1B and parking sensor switch terminal
F (with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between ignition switch terminals D and parking sensor switch
terminal F (without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Short to ground in the wiring harness between relay block terminals 1B and parking sensor switch
terminal F (with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
POSSIBLE — Short to ground in the wiring harness between ignition switch terminals D and parking sensor switch
CAUSES terminal F (without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Parking sensor switch malfunction (stuck open)
— Open circuit in wiring harness between parking sensor switch terminal H and parking sensor control
module terminal U
x Ground related malfunction in parking sensor control module.
— Short circuit between parking sensor control module terminal Q and body ground
— Ground point lifting, looseness
x Parking sensor control module malfunction.
1 VERIFY MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Activate both the front and rear parking sensor
x Set up the vehicle according to the following buzzers:
conditions: x System is normal
— Switch the ignition to ON Activate the front parking sensor buzzer:
— R position (ATX) x Inspect the reverse switch (MTX).
— Reverse gear (MTX) x Inspect the inhibitor switch (ATX).
x Turn on the parking sensor switch.
Activate only the rear parking sensor buzzer:
x Do the parking sensor buzzers for the front
and rear emit sound? x Replace the parking sensor control module (malfunction
with front parking sensor buzzer, front parking sensor
buzzer activation circuit).
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY WIRING No x Inspect and repair for the following short circuits:
HARNESS — Between relay block terminals 1B and parking sensor
x Verify the condition of the METER IG 15A switch terminal F (with advanced keyless entry and
fuse. push button start system)
x Is the fuse normal? — Between ignition switch terminals D and parking
sensor switch terminal F (without advanced keyless
entry and push button start system)
— Between parking sensor switch terminal F and
parking sensor control module terminal U
— Between METER IG 15A and each part receiving
power supply
x After repair, replace the fuse.
3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Go to Step 6.
OPEN CIRCUIT TO POWER SUPPLY No Go to the next step.
x Disconnect the parking sensor control
module connector.
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal U
on the parking sensor control module vehicle
wiring harness side.
4 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
INSPECTION No Replace the parking sensor switch.
x Inspect the parking sensor switch. (See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH REMOVAL/
(See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.)
x Is the parking sensor switch normal?
5 SPECIFY LOCATION OF POWER Yes x Repair the open circuit in the wiring harness between
SUPPLY RELATED OPEN CIRCUIT relay block terminals 1B and parking sensor switch
x Leave the parking sensor control module and terminal F. (with advanced keyless entry and push button
parking sensor switch connectors start system)
disconnected. x Repair the open circuit in the wiring harness between
x Verify the continuity of the wiring harnesses ignition switch terminals D and parking sensor switch
between the parking sensor control module terminal F. (without advanced keyless entry and push
vehicle side wiring harness terminal U and button start system)
the parking sensor switch vehicle side wiring No Repair the short circuit in the wiring harness between
harness connector terminal H. parking sensor control module terminal U and parking
x Is there continuity? sensor switch terminal H.
6 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Replace the parking sensor control module.
OPEN CIRCUIT IN PARKING SENSOR (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
CONTROL MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT No Repair the open circuit in the wiring harness.
Verify the connection condition of the ground point, and
x Leave the parking sensor control module
repair.
connector disconnected.
x Verify if there is continuity between the
parking sensor control module vehicle side
connector terminal Q and body ground.
End Of Sie
No.2 MALFUNCTION DETECTION SOUND ACTIVATED [PARKING SENSOR]
2 Malfunction detection sound activated

DESCRIPTION Malfunction detection sound activates (5 times consecutively) after parking sensor switch is turned on.
x Ultrasonic sensor (Front) malfunction.
— Ultrasonic sensor soiled, damaged (scratches, deformation), frozen (iced)
— Ultrasonic sensor (Front) malfunction
x Ultrasonic sensor (Rear/Back) malfunction.
— Ultrasonic sensor soiled, damaged (scratches, deformation), frozen (iced)
— Ultrasonic sensor (Rear/Back) malfunction
x Wiring harness malfunction.
— Ultrasonic sensor (Front) sensor signal malfunction
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal O and front corner sensor (RH)
terminal B
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal I and front corner sensor (LH)
terminal B
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal M and front sensor (RH) terminal
B
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal K and front sensor (LH) terminal B
— Ultrasonic sensor (Front) sensor ground malfunction
POSSIBLE x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal P and front corner sensor (RH)
CAUSES terminal A
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal J and front corner sensor (LH)
terminal A
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal N and front sensor (RH) terminal
A
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal L and front sensor (LH) terminal A
— Ultrasonic sensor (Rear/Back) signal malfunction
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal G and rear corner sensor (RH)
terminal B
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal E and rear corner sensor (LH)
terminal B
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal C and back sensor (RH) terminal
B
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal A and back sensor (LH) terminal B
— Ultrasonic sensor (Rear/Back) ground malfunction
x Open or short circuit in parking sensor control module terminal H and back sensor terminal A
1 VERIFY CONDITION OF EACH SENSOR Yes After removing any soiling, inspect the ultrasonic sensor and
x Visually inspect the condition of each if there is a malfunction, replace it.
ultrasonic sensor. (See 09-22-15 ULTRASONIC SENSOR REMOVAL/
x Is a sensor soiled, damaged (scratches, INSTALLATION.)
deformation), or frozen (iced)? No Go to the next step.
2 SPECIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM Yes Replace the parking sensor control module.
x Inspect the terminal voltage of the parking (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
sensor control module. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-22-18 PARKING SENSOR No Go to the next step.
3 CONNECTOR CONNECTION CONDITION Yes Go to the next step.
INSPECTION FOR MALFUNCTIONING No Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
SYSTEM
x Verify the pin connection condition of the
wiring harness between the parking sensor
control module and short wiring harness
connector related to the system
malfunctioning in Step 2.
Front corner sensor (RH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal O
and short connector (8-pin) terminal A
— Parking sensor control module terminal P
and short connector (8-pin) terminal B
Front corner sensor (LH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal I
and short connector (8-pin) terminal G
— Parking sensor control module terminal J
and short connector (8-pin) terminal H
Front sensor (RH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal M
and short connector (8-pin) terminal C
— Parking sensor control module terminal N
and short connector (8-pin) terminal D
Front sensor (LH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal K
and short connector (8-pin) terminal E
— Parking sensor control module terminal L
and short connector (8-pin) terminal F
Rear corner sensor (RH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal G
— Parking sensor control module terminal H
Rear corner sensor (LH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal E
Back sensor (RH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal C
Back sensor (LH)
— Parking sensor control module terminal A
x Are the connections normal?
OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING HARNESS No Repair for an open circuit in the wiring harness.
BETWEEN PARKING SENSOR
CONTROL MODULE AND SHORT
CONNECTOR
vehicle side wiring harness connectors
related to the system malfunctioning in Step
2.
and short connector (8-pin) terminal A
and short connector (8-pin) terminal B
and short connector (8-pin) terminal H
Front sensor (RH)
Front sensor (LH)
Back sensor (RH)
Back sensor (LH)
5 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness ground.
SHORT TO GROUND IN WIRING No Go to the next step.
HARNESS BETWEEN PARKING
SENSOR CONTROL MODULE AND
SHORT CONNECTOR
vehicle side wiring harness connectors and
body ground related to the system
Front sensor (RH)
Front sensor (LH)
Back sensor (RH)
Back sensor (LH)
6 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness power supply.
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY IN No Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL
MODULE AND SHORT CONNECTOR
x Measure the terminal voltage between the
following vehicle side wiring harness
connectors related to the system
Front sensor (RH)
Front sensor (LH)
Back sensor (RH)
Back sensor (LH)
x Is the voltage 2 V or more?
7 MALFUNCTIONING SENSOR TERMINAL Yes Go to the next step.
CONNECTION CONDITION No Repair or replace the malfunction location.
INSPECTION
x Verify the pin connection condition related to
the ultrasonic sensor of the system
x Are the connections normal?
OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING HARNESS No Repair for an open circuit in the wiring harness.
BETWEEN SHORT CONNECTOR AND
ULTRASONIC SENSOR
2.
— Front corner sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal A
— Front corner sensor terminal A and short
connector (8-pin) terminal B
— Front corner sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal G
— Front corner sensor terminal A and short
connector (8-pin) terminal H
Front sensor (RH)
— Front sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal C
— Front sensor terminal A and short
connector (8-pin) terminal D
Front sensor (LH)
— Front sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal E
— Front sensor terminal A and short
connector (8-pin) terminal F
— Rear corner sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal C
— Rear corner sensor terminal A and short
— Rear corner sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal E
— Rear corner sensor terminal A and short
Back sensor (RH)
— Back sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal F
— Back sensor terminal A and short
Back sensor (LH)
— Back sensor terminal B and short
connector (8-pin) terminal G
— Back sensor terminal A and short
9 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness ground.
SHORT TO GROUND IN WIRING No Go to the next step.
HARNESS BETWEEN SHORT
CONNECTOR AND ULTRASONIC
SENSOR
vehicle side wiring harness connectors and
body ground related to the system
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal A
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal G
Front sensor (RH)
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal C
Front sensor (LH)
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal E
Back sensor (RH)
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal F
Back sensor (LH)
10 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness power supply.
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY IN No Go to the next step.
WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SHORT
CONNECTOR AND ULTRASONIC
SENSOR
x Measure the voltage between the following
2.
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal A
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal B
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal H
Front sensor (RH)
— Short connector (8-pin) terminal D
Front sensor (LH)
Back sensor (RH)
Back sensor (LH)
11 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE Yes Troubleshooting completed. Ultrasonic sensor malfunction.
IS ULTRASONIC SENSOR OR Replace the ultrasonic sensor.
(See 09-22-15 ULTRASONIC SENSOR REMOVAL/
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL
INSTALLATION.)
MODULE
No Replace the parking sensor control module.
x Replace the ultrasonic sensor in the system
(See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
in which the malfunction occurred in Step 2.
(See 09-22-15 ULTRASONIC SENSOR
x Verify the malfunction symptom.
x Has the malfunction symptom been
eliminated?
End Of Sie
No.3 NO DETECTION SOUND/LOW VOLUME [PARKING SENSOR]
3 No detection sound/low volume

x Buzzer does not sound (indicator light illuminates normally) after parking sensor switch is turned on.
DESCRIPTION
x Detection sound from front parking sensor buzzer or rear parking sensor buzzer is weak.
x Vehicle speed signal malfunction buzzer activation circuit malfunction.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between rear parking sensor buzzer terminal B and parking sensor
control module terminal Z
— Short to power supply in wiring harness between rear parking sensor buzzer terminal B and parking
sensor control module terminal Z
— Open circuit in wiring harness between rear parking sensor buzzer terminal A and relay block
POSSIBLE terminals 1B. (with advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
CAUSES — Open circuit in wiring harness between rear parking sensor buzzer terminal A and ignition switch
terminals D. (without advanced keyless entry and push button start system)
— Rear parking sensor buzzer malfunction
— Front parking sensor buzzer malfunction
— Poor contact of connectors and terminals, or bad connections
x Buzzer volume adjustment at minimum volume.
1 BUZZER VOLUME ADJUSTMENT Yes Troubleshooting is completed (Incorrect buzzer volume
x Adjust the volume of the malfunctioning adjustment).
buzzer. No Go to the next step.
x Is the malfunction resolved?
2 VERIFY MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes Go to the next step.
x Switch the ignition to ON. No Go to the parking sensor symptom troubleshooting
x Turn on the parking sensor switch. procedure “09-03Q-3 No.1 SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
x Does the indicator light turn off after [PARKING SENSOR]”.
illuminating?
3 VERIFY FRONT BUZZER Yes Replace the parking sensor control module.
x Is the malfunction occurring on the front (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
side? REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
REAR PARKING SENSOR BUZZER POWER No x Open circuit in wiring harness between rear parking
SUPPLY sensor buzzer terminal A and relay block terminals 1B.
x Switch the ignition to off. (with advanced keyless entry and push button start
x Disconnect the rear parking buzzer sensor system)
connector. x Open circuit in wiring harness between rear parking
x Switch the ignition to ON. sensor buzzer terminal A and ignition switch terminals
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal A D.(without advanced keyless entry and push button start
on the rear parking sensor buzzer vehicle system)
side wiring harness.
5 REAR PARKING SENSOR BUZZER Yes Go to the next step.
INSPECTION No Replace the rear parking sensor buzzer.
x Inspect the rear parking sensor buzzer. (See 09-22-22 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER REMOVAL/
(See 09-22-25 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.)
x Is the rear parking sensor buzzer normal?
6 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness power supply.
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY IN REAR No Go to the next step.
PARKING SENSOR BUZZER DRIVE CIRCUIT
module and parking sensor buzzer
connectors.
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal B
on the rear parking sensor buzzer vehicle
side wiring harness.
7 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS OPEN Yes Replace the parking sensor control module.
CIRCUIT IN REAR PARKING SENSOR (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
BUZZER DRIVE CIRCUIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Leave the parking sensor control module and No Repair for an open circuit in the wiring harness.
rear parking sensor buzzer connectors
disconnected.
x Verify the continuity of the wiring harnesses
between the parking sensor control module
vehicle side wiring harness terminal Z and
the rear parking sensor buzzer vehicle side
wiring harness connector terminal B.
End Of Sie
No.4 INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE [PARKING SENSOR]
4 Indicator light does not illuminate

x Indicator light does not illuminate (buzzer activation normal) with the parking sensor on (initialize
DESCRIPTION mode).
x Indicator light does not illuminate even though detection conditions have been met.
x Indicator light malfunction.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between parking sensor switch terminal J and parking sensor control
module terminal AB
POSSIBLE
— Short circuit in power supply wiring harness between parking sensor switch terminal J and parking
CAUSES
sensor control module terminal AB
— Indicator light malfunction
INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT No Go to the next step.
NOT MEETING ILLUMINATION CONDITIONS
x Set up the vehicle according to the following
conditions:
— Switch the ignition to ON
— Turn the parking sensor on
— Release the parking brake
x Does the indicator light turn off after
illuminating?
2 INDICATOR LIGHT INSPECTION Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the indicator light. No Replace the parking sensor switch.
(See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH (See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH REMOVAL/
x Is the indicator light normal?
3 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT IN INDICATOR LIGHT No Repair for an open circuit in the wiring harness.
ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT WIRING HARNESS
module and parking sensor switch
connectors.
x Verify the continuity of the wiring harnesses
between the parking sensor control module
vehicle side wiring harness terminal AB and
the parking sensor switch vehicle side wiring
harness connector terminal J.
4 INSPECT IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness power supply.
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY WIRING No Replace the parking sensor control module.
HARNESS (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
x Leave the parking sensor control module and REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
parking sensor switch connectors
disconnected.
x Measure the voltage of connector terminal J
on the parking sensor switch vehicle wiring
harness side.
PARKING BRAKE SIGNAL OR VEHICLE No x If continuously 2 V or less, inspect and repair the
SPEED SIGNAL RELATED following:
x Switch the ignition to ON. — Parking brake switch (stuck on)
x Turn on the parking sensor switch. — Wiring harness between parking brake switch and
x Measure the voltage of parking sensor parking sensor control module terminal AA wiring
control module terminal AA. harness (short to ground)
x Are the voltages normal? x If continuously 5 V or more, inspect and repair the
(See 09-22-18 PARKING SENSOR following:
CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.) — Parking brake switch (stuck off)
— Parking brake switch ground circuit (open circuit)
— Wiring harness between parking brake switch and
parking sensor control module terminal AA wiring
harness (open circuit, short to power supply)
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT WIRING (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Switch the ignition to ON. No Go to the next step.
x Measure the voltage of parking sensor
control module terminal Y.
x Are the voltages normal?
(See 09-22-18 PARKING SENSOR
7 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for an open or short circuit to the wiring harness
SPEEDOMETER RELATED between parking sensor control module terminal Y and
x Verify the speedometer display. instrument cluster terminal 2O.
x Does the speedometer indicate the actual No Go to the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
vehicle speed? procedure “09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION
IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]”.
End Of Sie
No.5 CANNOT DETECT OBSTRUCTION [PARKING SENSOR]
5 Cannot detect obstruction

x Does not detect even though obstruction is within the detection area with the detections conditions
DESCRIPTION
satisfied.
x R position (ATX), reverse (MTX) signal malfunction.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between parking sensor control module terminal W and BCM terminal
7A
— Short to ground in wiring harness between parking sensor control module terminal W and BCM
terminal 7A
— Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM terminal 2H and inhibitor switch (ATX)/reverse switch
(MTX)
— Inhibitor switch malfunction (ATX)
— Reverse switch malfunction (MTX)
x Vehicle speed signal malfunction.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2O and parking sensor control
POSSIBLE module terminal Y
CAUSES — Short to power supply or ground in wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2O and
parking sensor control module terminal Y
— Vehicle speed signal output to instrument cluster malfunction
x Parking brake signal malfunction.
— Short to ground in wiring harness between parking sensor control module terminal AA and parking
brake switch
— Parking brake switch malfunction (stuck on)
x Tow bar and trailer signal malfunction.
— Short circuit (tow bar) to ground in parking sensor control module terminal AF
— Short circuit (trailer) to ground in parking sensor control module terminal AD
1 VERIFY MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Yes System is normal.
x Set up the vehicle according to the following (Explain the effects of noise using the troubleshooting
conditions: section of the owner's manual)
— Switch the ignition to ON No Go to the next step.
— Release the parking brake
— R position (ATX)
— Reverse gear (MTX)
— Vehicle is stopped
— Turn the parking sensor switch on
x Put an object (obstruction) close to each
sensor.
x Does the buzzer for each sensor activate
(detects obstruction)?
2 VERIFY IF AFTER-MARKET ELECTRONIC Yes Go to the next step.
DEVICES ARE INSTALLED No Go to Step 4.
x Has an after-market electronic device been
installed?
3 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Explain to the customer that the installation of after-market
INSTALLATION OF AFTER-MARKET electronic devices can cause noise.
ELECTRONIC DEVICE No Go to the next step.
x Remove the after-market electrical product.
x Repeat the inspection from Step 1.
x Does the buzzer for each sensor activate
(detects obstruction)?
4 VERIFY MALFUNCTION CONDITION Front sensors detect all obstructions correctly,
x Verify the malfunction conditions in Step 1. but rear sensors do not sense all obstructions
correctly:
Rear/back sensors detects all obstructions
correctly, but front sensors do not sense all
obstructions correctly:
x Go to Step 10.
All front, rear/back sensors do not sense
x Go to Step 12.
One sensor or a few sensors do not detect
x Inspect the wiring harness of the applicable sensor and
repair or replace the malfunctioning location.
5 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS R Yes Go to Step 8.
POSITION (ATX), REVERSE (MTX) SIGNAL No Go to the next step.
control module terminal W.
6 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN No Repair the open circuit in the wiring harness.
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
TERMINAL W AND BCM TERMINAL 7A
module and BCM connectors.
x Verify if there is continuity between parking
sensor control module terminal W and BCM
terminal 7A
7 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS SHORT Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness ground.
CIRCUIT IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN No Inspect and repair the following:
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE x Open circuit in wiring harness between BCM terminal 2H
TERMINAL W AND BCM TERMINAL 7A and inhibitor switch (ATX)/reverse switch (MTX)
x Verify if there is continuity between parking x Inhibitor switch (ATX)
sensor control module terminal W and x Reverse switch (MTX)
ground.
PARKING BRAKE SIGNAL No Inspect and repair the following:
x Switch the ignition to ON. x Parking brake switch (stuck on)
x Turn on the parking sensor switch. x Wiring harness between parking brake switch and
x Release the parking brake. parking sensor control module terminal AA wiring
x Measure the voltage of parking sensor harness (short to ground)
control module terminal AA.
9 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS SHORT Yes Repair for a short to ground in the wiring harness of parking
TO GROUND IN TOW BAR AND TRAILER sensor control module terminal AF and terminal AD.
SIGNAL (TOW BAR AND TRAILER NOT No Replace the parking sensor control module.
INSTALLED) (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
x Switch the ignition to ON. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
control module terminal AF and terminal AD.
x Is the voltage 1.0 V or less?
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT WIRING (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
HARNESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Switch the ignition to ON. No Go to the next step.
control module terminal Y.
11 DETERMINE IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS Yes Repair for an open circuit, short to the wiring harness
SPEEDOMETER RELATED between parking sensor control module terminal Y and
x Verify the speedometer display. instrument cluster terminal 2O.
x Does the speedometer indicate the actual No Go to the instrument cluster symptom troubleshooting
vehicle speed? procedure “09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION
IS DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]”.
PARKING BRAKE SIGNAL (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
x Switch the ignition to ON. REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Turn on the parking sensor switch. No Inspect and repair the following:
x Release the parking brake. x Parking brake switch (stuck on)
x Measure the voltage of parking sensor x Wiring harness between parking brake switch and
control module terminal AA. parking sensor control module terminal AA wiring
x Is the voltage 5 V or more? harness (short to ground)
End Of Sie
No.6 DETECTS VEHICLE SPEED OF 10 km/h {6.2 mph} OR MORE [PARKING SENSOR]
6 Detects vehicle speed of 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more

x Front parking sensor (vehicle front) detects obstruction while in position other than R position and at a
DESCRIPTION
speed other than 10 km/h {6.2 mph} or more.
x Vehicle speed signal malfunction.
— Open circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2O and parking sensor control
module terminal Y
POSSIBLE — Short to power supply or ground in wiring harness between instrument cluster terminal 2O and
CAUSES parking sensor control module terminal Y
— Vehicle speed signal output to instrument cluster malfunction
SPEEDOMETER VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL No For instrument cluster malfunctions, perform the procedure
INPUT RELATED in “09-03O-8 NO. 7 SPEEDOMETER INDICATION IS
x Verify the speedometer display. DEFECTIVE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER]”.
x Does the speedometer indicate the actual
vehicle speed?
2 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE Yes Go to the next step.
TERMINAL INSPECTION No Repair or replace the malfunction location.
x Verify the connection condition of parking
sensor control module connector terminal Y
(bad contact, bad connection).
x Is the connection normal?
3 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS OPEN Yes Go to the next step.
CIRCUIT IN WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN No Repair the open circuit in the wiring harness.
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE AND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
module and instrument cluster connectors.
x Verify if there is continuity between parking
sensor control module Y terminal and
instrument cluster terminal 2O.
4 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS SHORT Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness ground.
TO GROUND IN WIRING HARNESS No Go to the next step.
BETWEEN PARKING SENSOR CONTROL
MODULE AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
x Leave the parking sensor control module and
instrument cluster connectors disconnected.
x Verify if there is continuity between the
parking sensor control module terminal Y
and body ground.
5 VERIFY IF MALFUNCTION CAUSE IS SHORT Yes Repair for a short to the wiring harness power supply.
TO POWER SUPPLY IN WIRING HARNESS No Replace the parking sensor control module.
BETWEEN PARKING SENSOR CONTROL (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
MODULE AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Leave the parking sensor control module and
instrument cluster connectors disconnected.
x Measure the voltage between the parking
sensor control module terminal Y and body
ground.
End Of Sie
BODY PANELS
09-10 BODY PANELS

BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX . . . . 09-10–2 ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM
BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–19
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-10–3 BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER
BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–19
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-10–4 SEAL PLATE
BONNET ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–5 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–21
Gap Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–5 Right-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–21
Height Difference Adjustment . . . . . . . 09-10–6 Left-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–21
TRUNK LID FRONT FENDER PANEL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-10–7 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–22
TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–9 SHROUD PANEL
Gap Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–9 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–23
Hight Difference Adjustment . . . . . . . . 09-10–10 Upper Mount Rubber Bracket
TRUNK LID STAY DAMPER Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–26
DISPOSAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–10 COWL PANEL
FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–26
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-10–10 REAR BUMPER
FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT . . . . . 09-10–10 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–28
FRONT BUMPER 4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–28
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-10–11 Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–32
Front Bumper Installation Note . . . . . . 09-10–14 Rear Bumper Installation Note . . . . . . . 09-10–36
FRONT BUMPER Guide E Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–36
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-10–14 REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-10–37
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-10–15
BODY PANELS
BODY PANELS LOCATION INDEX
1 2 5 6 7
4 3
9 8
4SD 5HB
10
11 11
12
WAGON
11
Shroud panel Energy-absorbing form

1 (See 09-10-23 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/ 4 (See 09-10-19 ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM
INSTALLATION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Front bumper reinforcement 5 Bonnet
2 (See 09-10-15 FRONT BUMPER (See 09-10-3 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-4 BONNET DISASSEMBLY/
Bumper stiffener lower ASSEMBLY.)
3 (See 09-10-19 BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER (See 09-10-5 BONNET ADJUSTMENT.)
BODY PANELS
6 Cowl panel
(See 09-10-26 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
7 Fuel-filler lid
(See 09-10-10 FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-10-10 FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT.)
8 Front fender panel
(See 09-10-22 FRONT FENDER PANEL
Front bumper
(See 09-10-11 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/
9 INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-10-14 FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY.)
10 Trunk lid
(See 09-10-7 TRUNK LID REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-10-9 TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT.)
(See 09-10-10 TRUNK LID STAY DAMPER
DISPOSAL.)
11 Rear bumper
INSTALLATION.)
12 Rear bumper reinforcement
(See 09-10-37 REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
Sie
BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Removing the bonnet without supporting it could cause the bonnet to fall and cause serious
injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the bonnet from
falling.
1. After loosening bolt A and removing bolt B, remove the bonnet in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
BONNET
BONNET
BOLT A
BOLT B
BOLT A,B:19—25 N·m

BONNET HINGE {1.9—2.6 kgf·m,14—18 ft·lbf}
BODY PANELS
2. Remove bolt C, and remove the bonnet hinge in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
BONNET HINGE
BOLT C
19—25 N·m {1.9—2.6 kgf·m,14—18 ft·lbf}
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

4. When installing the bonnet, adjust the bonnet by moving the bonnet hinge. (See 09-10-5 BONNET
ADJUSTMENT)
End Of Sie
BONNET DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
BODY PANELS
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
6 6
1 Shroud seaming welt 4 Bonnet component

2 Fastener 5 Parting seal seaming welt
3 Bonnet insulator 6 Stop rubber
End Of Sie
BONNET ADJUSTMENT
i
Gap Adjustment
1. Measure the gap between the bonnet and body.
a
SEC. A—A
B B
A
b A
SEC. B—B
Standard clearance
a:-0.1 2.9 mm {-0.03 0.11 in}
b:2.5 4.5 mm {0.10 0.17 in}
2. Remove the front fender molding. (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
3. Loosen the bonnet hinge installation bolts and adjust the gap by moving the bonnet hinge back and forth, left
and right.
4. Tighten the bolts. (See 09-10-3 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

5. Install the front fender molding. (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Height Difference Adjustment

1. Measure the height difference between the bonnet and body.
SEC. A—A
b C C
B
DITAIL B A
c A
SEC. C—C
Standard clearance
a:3.0 6.0mm {0.12 0.23 in}
b:-0.7 1.7mm {-0.02 0.06 in}
c:-1.2 1.2mm {-0.047 0.047 in}
BODY PANELS
2. Turn the stop rubber to adjust.
STOP RUBBER
DOWN UP
TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Removing the stay damper without supporting the trunk lid can be dangerous. The trunk lid may
fall and injure you. Open the trunk lid fully and support it before removing the stay damper.

2. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Disconnect the trunk lid wiring harness connector, then take the trunk lid harness out from the vehicle.
TRUNK LID WIRING

HARNESS CONNECTOR
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the trunk grommet in the direction of arrow shown in the figure.
TRUNK GROMMET
5. Pry off the stay damper band using a flathead screwdriver.
STAY
DAMPER
BAND
STAY DAMPER
BODY PANELS
6. Remove the nuts, then remove the trunk lid.
NUT
16—23 {1.7—2.3, 12—17}
TRUNK LID TRUNK LID HINGE BOLT

16—23 {1.7—2.3, 12—17}
N·m {kgf·m, ft·lbf}
7. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid hinge.

9. Adjust the trunk lid. (See 09-10-9 TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT
Gap Adjustment
1. Measure the gap difference between the trunk lid and the body.
2. If not as specified, loosen the trunk lid hinge installation bolts or the trunk lid lock striker installation bolts, and
reposition the trunk lid.
a
SEC. A—A SEC. B—B

C C
A A
d BD
D
B
c
SEC. C—C SEC. D—D
Standard Clearance
a: 2.5—4.5 mm {0.10—0.18 in}
b: 4.0—8.0 mm {0.16—0.31 in}
c: 1.9—5.3 mm {-0.08—0.20 in}
d: 0.1—2.3 mm {0.004—0.090 in}
3. Tighten the bolts or nuts. (See 09-10-7 TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (See 09-14-68 TRUNK LID
LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
Hight Difference Adjustment
1. Measure the height difference between the trunk lid and the body.
a
SEC. A—A
B B
A A
SEC. B—B
Standard Clearance
a: -1.5—0.5 mm {-0.05—0.02 in}
b: -2.1—1.9 mm {-0.082—0.074 in}
2. Turn the stop rubber to adjust.

End Of Sie
TRUNK LID STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL
Note
x The gas in the trunk lid stay damper is colorless, odorless, and non-toxic.
1. Wear protective eye wear.

2. Lay the stay damper flat.
3. Saw through the trunk lid stay damper body using
a hacksaw.
4. Allow the gas to escape from the trunk lid stay
damper. HACK
5. Discard the trunk lid stay damper. SAW TRUNK LID
End Of Sie STAY DAMPER
FUEL-FILLER LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove the bolts. FUEL-FILLER LID
2. Remove the fuel filler lid in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure.
4. Adjust the fuel-filler lid. (See 09-10-10 FUEL-
FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT)
End Of Sie
BOLT
3.9—5.9 N·m
{40—60 kgf·cm,
35—52 in·lbf}
FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT

1. Measure the gap and height difference between the fuel-filler lid and the body.
BODY PANELS
2. Loosen the fuel-filler lid installation bolts and
A
adjust the fuel-filler lid.
b
Standard clearance
a: 1.7 3.7 mm {0.07 0.14 in} a
b: -0.5 1.5 mm {-0.01 0.05 in}
3. Tighten the bolts. (See 09-10-10 FUEL-FILLER

LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
A
SEC. A—A
FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the radiator grille. (See 09-16-7 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove screws A, fasteners B, screws C and screws D, and set the front mudguard out of the way in the
direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
SCREW A
FRONT MUDGUARD FASTENER B
SCREW D
SCREW C
BODY PANELS
4. Remove screws E and fastener F.
SCREW E FASTENER F SCREW E
5. Remove the fasteners G.
FASTENER G
FASTENER G
BODY PANELS
6. Remove the front bumper in the direction of the arrow (2) while keeping it open in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure.
FRONT BUMPER
SILDER
(1) (1) FRONT BUMPER

(2)
(2) FRONT BUMPER
TAB
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER SLIDER
Note
x When remove the front bumper, push up the position of the arrow shown in the figure.
FRONT BUMPER
TAB
FRONT BUMPER
SLIDER
PUSH UP PUSH UP
Caution
x The front bumper and front bumper slider are engaged firmly. If they are disengaged forcibly the
bumper could fall and be damaged. Perform the servicing carefully when disengaging the front
bumper from the front bumper slider.
x When disengaging the front bumper from the front bumper slider, the front bumper could fall and
be damaged. Support the front bumper so that it does not fall.
7. Disconnect the front fog light connector. (Vehicles with front fog lights)
8. Disconnect the ultrasonic sensor connector. (Vehicles with parking sensor)
10. Adjust the front fog light aiming for vehicles with front fog lights. (See 09-18-35 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING)
BODY PANELS
Front Bumper Installation Note
1. Spread the front bumper ends apart.
2. Assemble the front bumper to the body.
3. Press the front bumper connecting area in the
direction of the arrow shown in the figure to
engage with the front bumper slider. FRONT BUMPER
End Of Sie SILDER
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. Remove the headlight cleaner actuator. (See 09-19-34 HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
10 9 11
12
B
5
B
7 6 3 4
A
10 9 1 10 13
1 Screw A 8 Front fog light hole cover (Vehicles without front fog
light)
2 Front fog light hole cover (Vehicles with front fog
light) 9 Clip (Vehicles with parking sensor)
3 Screw B (Vehicles with front fog light) 10 Ultrasonic sensor (Vehicles with parking sensor)
4 Front fog light cover (Vehicles with front fog light) 11 Ultrasonic sensor wiring harness (Vehicles with
parking sensor)
5 Screw C (Vehicles with front fog light)
12 Front bumper mesh
6 Front bumper guard (Vehicles with front fog light)
13 Front bumper face
7 Front fog light bezel (Vehicles with front fog light)
End Of Sie
FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WM: BUMPER
Caution
x Because the shroud panel is installed to the front bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel
using a jack before removing the front bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to
the shroud panel.
BODY PANELS
(1) Front bumper (See 09-10-11 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Energy-absorbing form (See 09-10-19 ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Seal plate (See 09-10-21 SEAL PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front combination light (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Aerodynamic under cover No.1 (See 09-16-40 AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER NO.1 REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(6) Bumper stiffener lower (See 09-10-19 BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Ambient temperature sensor (See 07-40A-24 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO AIR CONDITIONER].) (See 07-40B-21 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER].)
3. Rotate the bonnet stay in the direction of the arrow (1),(2), then remove the bonnet stay in the direction of the
arrow (3).
(1) BONNET STAY
SHROUD PANEL
(2)
(3)
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the bonnet stay from the shroud panel,
wrap the bonnet stay with protective tape, and
install it to the shroud side member to support the BONNET STAY PROTECTIVE TAPE
bonnet.
5. Remove the bolts A.
SHROUD SIDE MEMBER
BOLT A:
8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm,71—97 in·lbf}
BOLT A BOLT A
BODY PANELS
6. Remove the bolt B.
BOLT B
WASHER TANK
BOLT B:4.9—6.8 N·m

{50—69 kgf·cm,44—60 in·lbf}
7. Remove the bolts C and bolts D.

BOLT D
TORQUE:37—53 N·m
{3.8—5.4 kgf·m,27—39 ft·lbf}
FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
BOLT C BOLT D
TORQUE:8—10 N·m TORQUE:37—53 N·m
{81—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf} {3.8—5.4 kgf·m,27—39 ft·lbf}
8. Remove the front bumper reinforcement.

End Of Sie
BODY PANELS
ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-11 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the fasteners and remove the energy-absorbing form in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
FASTENER ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM FASTENER

End Of Sie
BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the front crossmember extension. (See 02-13-14 FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the bolts.
BOLT
8—10 N·m {80—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf}
5. Move the bumper stiffener lower in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, while remove the tabs.
SHROUD PANEL
TAB
BUMPER STIFFENER
LOWER
BUMPER STIFFENER
LOWER TAB

BODY PANELS
SEAL PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Right-side
3. Remove the energy-absorbing form. (See 09-10-19 ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION)
5. Remove the fastener.
SEAL PLATE
FASTENER
TAB
SHROUD PANEL
FRATHEAD SCREW DRIVER
6. Move the tab in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach it from
the shroud panel.
7. Remove the seal plate in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
8. Install in the reverse order of remove.
Left-side
3. Remove the energy-absorbing form. (See 09-10-19 ENERGY-ABSORBING FORM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
SEAL PLATE
FASTENER
SHROUD PANEL
FRATHEAD TAB
SCREW DRIVER
6. Move the tab in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach it from
the shroud panel.
7. Remove the seal plate in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
8. Install in the reverse order of remove.
ie
FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(1) Front side turn lights (See 09-18-38 SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Radiator grille (See 09-16-7 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front combination lights. (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Side step molding (See 09-16-11 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-15 SIDE STEP
MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
(6) Front fender molding (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Front mudguard (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
BODY PANELS
3. Remove bolts, then remove the front fender panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
BOLT BOLT:8—10 N·m

{80—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf}
BOLT
BOLT
BOLT
FRONT FENDER PANEL BOLT

5. Adjust the headlight aiming. (See 09-18-13 HEADLIGHT AIMING)
ie
SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x Because the shroud panel is installed to the bumper reinforcement, support the shroud panel
using a jack before removing the bumper reinforcement so as not to apply excessive force to the
shroud panel.

BODY PANELS
2. Rotate the bonnet stay in the direction of the arrow (1),(2), then remove the bonnet stay in the direction of the
arrow (3).
(1) BONNET STAY
SHROUD PANEL
(2)
(3)
3. Remove the bonnet stay from the shroud panel,

wrap the bonnet stay with protective tape, and
install it to the shroud side member to support the BONNET STAY
bonnet.
(1) Front bumper (See 09-10-11 FRONT
BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) PROTECTIVE TAPE
(2) Front combination lights (See 09-18-8
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(3) Front crossmember extension (See 02-13-14
FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(4) Seal plate (See 09-10-21 SEAL PLATE
(5) Front bumper reinforcement (See 09-10-15 SHROUD SIDE MEMBER
FRONT BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
(6) Bumper stiffener lower (See. 09-10-19
BUMPER STIFFENER LOWER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(7) Bonnet latch (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
BOLT
BOLT
6. Remove the upper mount rubber bracket in the direction of the arrow (4), then remove the upper mount rubber
in the direction of the arrow (5) (See 09-10-26 Upper Mount Rubber Bracket Removal Note).
UPPER MOUNT RUBBER
(5)
(4)
UPPER MOUNT RUBBER BRACKET

BODY PANELS
7. Pull the shroud panel in the direction of arrow (6) in the figure, and remove it in the direction of arrow (7).
(6)
(7)
SHROUD PANEL
SHROUD PANEL RADIATOR
Caution
x Support the lower surface of the radiator with a floor jack to prevent the radiator from falling off
after the shroud panel is removed.
Upper Mount Rubber Bracket Removal Note

1. Remove the upper mount rubber bracket while
pressing down the upper mount rubber bracket A
SHROUD PANEL
tab in the direction of the arrow in the figure.
End Of Sie TAB
UPPER MOUNT
BRACKET COVER
FRONT ENGINE
ROOM SIDE
A SEC.A-A
COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(1) Windshield wiper arm (See 09-19-4 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(2) Front fender molding (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(3) Cowl grille (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(4) Windshield wiper motor (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the washer hose grommet from the cowl panel and disconnect the front washer hose.
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the stay.
BOLT:22—30 N·m
{2.3—3.0 kgf·m,17—22 ft·lbf}
STAY
BOLT
5. Remove bolts.
BOLT BOLT:22—30 N·m

{2.3—3.0 kgf·m,17—22 ft·lbf}
BODY PANELS
6. Remove the cowl panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
COWL PANEL

ie
REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD, 5HB
2. Peel off the seaming welt.
3. Remove the follwing parts:
(1) Trunk mat (4SD)
(2) Trunk board (4SD)
(3) Trunk end trim (4SD) (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Trunk side trim (4SD) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Service hole cover (5HB)
(6) Splash shield (See 09-16-43 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(7) Rear combination light (See 09-18-40 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the screws A.
SCREW A
5. Remove the fasteners B and screws C.
SCREW C FASTENER B SCREW C

BODY PANELS
6. Remove the screws D.
SCREW D SCREW D
7. Remove the hanger rubber.
HANGER RUBBER
BODY PANELS
8. Lower the main silencer to the position shown in the figure.
250 mm
{9.84 in}
MAIN SILENSER
9. Affix the protective tape to the position shown in the figure.

PROTECTIVE TAPE PROTECTIVE TAPE
REAR BUMPER
LICENSE PLATE
PROTECTIVE TAPE
BODY PANELS
10. Pull the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to disengage the bumper from the rear
bumper slider, then remove the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (2) while detach the guide E.
GUIDE E
(1) (1)
(2)
REAR BUMPER REAR END PANEL
GUIDE E
Caution
x When disengaging the rear bumper from the rear bumper slider, the rear bumper could fall and be
damaged. Support the rear bumper so that it does not fall.
11. Disconnect the rear fog light connector. (Vehicles with rear fog light)
12. Disconnect the license plate light connector.
14. Remove the guide E form the rear bumper.
15. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See 09-10-36 Rear Bumper Installation Note) (See 09-10-36 Guide E
Installation Note)
Wagon
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
(3) Sub-trunk
(4) Trunk end trim (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Tire house trim (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Trunk side upper trim (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Trunk side trim (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(9) Rear combination light (See 09-18-40 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Splash shield (See 09-16-43 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the screws A.
SCREW A
5. Remove the fasteners B and screws C.
SCREW C FASTENER B SCREW C

BODY PANELS
6. Use the tape-wrapped flathead screw driver, detaching hook D in the direction of the arrow(1) shown in the
figure.
REAR BUMPER HOOK D
TAB E
CAP HOOK D (1)
CAP
FLATHEAD
SCREW DRIVER
TAB E
(2)
7. Pull the cap in the direction of the arrow(2) shown in the figure and remove it while remove the tab E.
Caution
x When removing the cap, be careful not to damage the tab E.
8. Remove the screws F.
SCREW F SCREW F
BODY PANELS
9. Affix the protective tape to the position shown in the figure.
PROTECTIVE TAPE PROTECTIVE TAPE
REAR BUMPER
10. Pull the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure to disengage the bumper from the rear
bumper slider, then remove the rear bumper in the direction of arrow (4) while detach the guide E.
GUIDE E
(3)
(3)
(4)
REAR BUMPER REAR END PANEL
GUIDE E
Caution
x When disengaging the rear bumper from the rear bumper slider, the rear bumper could fall and be
damaged. Support the rear bumper so that it does not fall.
11. Disconnect the rear fog light connector. (Vehicles with rear fog light)
13. Install in the reverse order of removal. (See 09-10-36 Rear Bumper Installation Note) (See 09-10-36 Guide E
Installation Note)
BODY PANELS
Rear Bumper Installation Note
1. Spread the rear bumper ends apart.
2. Assemble the rear bumper to the body.
3. Press the rear bumper connecting area in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to engage with the
bumper slider.
REAR BUMPER SLIDER
REAR BUMPER
Guide E Installation Note

1. Insert the license plate, and install the guide E indication in the arrow shown in the figure.
BODY PANELS
REAR BUMPER
GUIDE E
End Of Sie
REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(1) Trunk mat (4SD, Wagon)
(2) Trunk board (4SD, Wagon)
(3) Sub-trunk (Wagon)
(4) Trunk end trim (4SD, Wagon) (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Rear scuff plate (Wagon) (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Tire house trim (Wagon) (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Trunk side upper trim (Wagon) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Trunk side trim (4SD, Wagon) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Rear combination light (See 09-18-40 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(12)Rear bumper (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
BODY PANELS
3. Remove the hanger rubber in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
HANGER RUBBER
BODY PANELS
4. Remove the nuts and remove the rear bumper reinforcement.
NUT REAR BUMPER REINFORCEMENT NUT NUT:38—52 N·m

{3.9—5.3 kgf·m, 28—38 ft·lbf}

End Of Sie
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
09-11 DOORS AND LIFTGATE

DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION REAR DOOR CHECKER
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–10
FRONT DOOR REAR DOOR HINGE
Connector Removal Note. . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–4 LIFTGATE
FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–11
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-11–5 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–11
FRONT DOOR PAD WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–15
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-11–6 LIFTGATE HINGE
FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–17
FRONT DOOR HINGE WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–19
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-11–7 STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–21
REAR DOOR DOOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–21
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-11–8 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–22
Connector Removal Note. . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–8 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–22
REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-11–23
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
DOOR AND LIFTGATE LOCATION INDEX
4SD, 5HB
1 2 3 4 5
12 11 10 9 8 7 6
5 6
WGN
1 Front door module panel 3 Front door pad

(See 09-11-5 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL (See 09-11-6 FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) INSTALLATION.)
2 Front door 4 Stay damper
(See 09-11-3 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-11-21 STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL.)
INSTALLATION.) 5 Liftgate hinge
(See 09-11-21 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.) (See 09-11-17 LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
6 Liftgate
(See 09-11-11 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-11-22 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.)
(See 09-14-58 LIFTGATE LATCH MANUAL
RELEASE PROCEDURE.)
7 Rear door checker
(See 09-11-10 REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
8 Rear door hinge
(See 09-11-11 REAR DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
9 Front door checker
(See 09-11-6 FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
10 Front door hinge
(See 09-11-7 FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
11 Rear door module panel
(See 09-11-5 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL
12 Rear door
(See 09-11-8 REAR DOOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-11-21 DOOR ADJUSTMENT.)
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Removing the front door without supporting it could cause the front door to fall and cause serious
injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the front door from
falling.

2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
.
1 Bolt A
2 Connector
(See 09-11-4 Connector Removal Note.)
4
3 Bolt B
4 Front door 3
3. Install in the reverse order of removal. 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m,
14—22 ft·lbf}
4. Adjust the front door. (See 09-11-21 DOOR
ADJUSTMENT.)
2
1
20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6 kgf·m,
15—19 ft·lbf}
3
18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m,
14—22 ft·lbf}
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
Connector Removal Note
1. Pull the rubber boot outward.
RUBBER BOOT
2. Press the tab in the direction of arrow (1) shown

in the figure using a tape-wrapped flathead FLATHEAD
screwdriver, and remove the connector from the SCREWDRIVER
body in the direction of arrow (2) shown in the TAB
figure.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1) (1)
3. Lower the lever in the direction of arrow (1), and

disconnect the connector in the direction of arrow (2) TAB
(2).
End Of Sie (1)
LEVER
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. To access the glass installation bolt, position the
front door glass so that the distance from the top APPROX. 80 mm
of the front door glass to the upper part of the {3.1 in}
front beltline molding is approx. 80 mm {3.1 in}.
(1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-75 INNER
GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front door trim (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Front door speaker (See 09-20-8 FRONT
DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front door glass (See 09-12-6 FRONT DOOR
GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the clips securing the front door wiring
harness from the front door module panel.
FRONT DOOR FRONT DOOR
HARNESS MODULE PANEL
CLIP
CLIP
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
6. Remove the fastener. FRONT DOOR FASTENER
7. Remove the front door module panel. MODULE PANEL
8. Remove the front power window motor. (See 09-
12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-36
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
9. Remove the front power window regulator. (See
09-12-31 FRONT POWER WINDOW
REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
BOLT BOLT
2.0—3.0 N·m 2.0—3.0 N·m
{21—30 kgf·cm, {21—30 kgf·cm,
18—26 in·lbf} 18—26 in·lbf}
FRONT DOOR PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION.)
(5) Front door module panel (See 09-11-5 FRONT DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the fasteners.
5. Remove the front door pad.
End Of Sie
FRONT DOOR PAD
FASTENER
FRONT DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Fully close the front door glass.
3. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
4. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the bolt.
FRONT DOOR
CHECKER
BOLT
20—26 N·m
{2.1—2.6 kgf·m,
15—19 ft·lbf}
7. Remove the nuts.

8. Pull out the front door checker from the front
speaker installation hole.
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. FRONT DOOR CHECKER
End Of Sie
8—12 N·m
{82—122 kgf·cm,
71—106 in·lbf}
NUT
FRONT DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(1) Front side turn lights (See 09-18-38 SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Front combination lights. (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Side step molding (See 09-16-11 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-15 SIDE STEP
MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
(5) Front fender molding (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Front mudguard (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Front fender panel (See 09-10-22 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Front door (See 09-11-3 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
1 Bolt 2 1 18—29 N·m {1.9—2.9 kgf·m,
14—21 ft·lbf}
2 Front door hinge

End Of Sie
WM: DOORS AND LIFTGATE(REAR DOORS)
REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Removing the rear door without supporting it could cause the rear door to fall and cause serious
injury. Always perform the procedure with at least another person to prevent the rear door from
falling.

.
1 Bolt A
2 Connector 4
(See 09-11-8 Connector Removal Note.) 3
3 Bolt B 18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m,
4 Rear door 14—22 ft·lbf}

4. Adjust the rear door. (See 09-11-21 DOOR
ADJUSTMENT.)
2
1
20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6
kgf·m, 15—19 ft·lbf}
3
18—30 N·m {1.9—3.0 kgf·m,
14—22 ft·lbf}
Connector Removal Note

1. While pressing the tab in the direction of arrow (1), disconnect the connector in the direction of arrow (2).
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
End Of Sie
(1)
TAB
(2)
REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Fully open the rear door glass.
(1) Rear door trim (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rear door quarter glass (See 09-12-8 REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Rear door glass (See 09-12-6 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the clips securing the rear door wiring
harness from the rear door module panel. REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL
REAR DOOT HARNESS
CLIP
CLIP
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
6. Remove the fastener. REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL FASTENER
7. Remove the rear door module panel.
8. Remove the rear power window motor. (See 09-
12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-36
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
9. Remove the rear power window regulator. (See
09-12-32 REAR POWER WINDOW
End Of Sie
BOLT BOLT
2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm,
2.0—3.0 N·m {21—30 kgf·cm,
18—26 in·lbf}
18—26 in·lbf}
REAR DOOR CHECKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Fully close the rear door glass.
3. Remove the sail inner garnish. (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the bolt.
BOLT
20—26 N·m {2.1—2.6
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
7. Remove the nuts.
8. Pull out the rear door checker from the rear 8—10 N·m
{82—101 kgf·cm,
speaker installation hole. 71—88 in·lbf}
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR CHECKER NUT
End Of Sie
REAR DOOR HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(1) Rear door (See 09-11-8 REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 18—29 N·m {1.9—2.9 kgf·m,
14—21 ft·lbf} 18—29 N·m {1.9—2.9 kgf·m,
1 Bolt 14—21 ft·lbf}
2 Nut 2 1
3 Rear door hinge 3
1
18—29 N·m {1.9—2.9 kgf·m,
14—21 ft·lbf}
LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
Note
x If the liftgate cannot be locked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunctions in the electrical
system, open the liftgate using the liftgate manual open/close procedure. (See 09-14-58 LIFTGATE
LATCH MANUAL RELEASE PROCEDURE.)
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
Warning
x When removing the stay damper, serious injury may occur if the stay damper is removed without
supporting the liftgate. Always perform the procedure with at least another person.

2. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the antenna feeder No.1. (See 09-20-29 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the rear washer hose. (See 09-19-23 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the liftgate from the connector.
CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the liftgate connector.

CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
7. Remove the grommets from the liftgate.
(1)
(1) (1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
8. Remove the liftgate from the connector.
CONNECTOR
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
9. Remove the stay damper band using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver.
LH RH
BAND BAND
STUD BOLT STUD BOLT

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,
12—16 ft·lbf} 12—16 ft·lbf}
STAY DAMPAR STAY DAMPAR
BAND BAND
10. Remove the stay damper.

11. Remove the stud bolts.
LH RH
LIFTGATE LIFTGATE
BOLT BOLT
8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf} 71—88 in·lbf}
13. Remove the liftgate.

DOORS AND LIFTGATE
15. Remove the bracket.
17. Adjust the liftgate. (See 09-11-22 LIFTGATE
ADJUSTMENT.)
BOLT
8—10 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
BRACKET
WGN
Note
x If the liftgate cannot be locked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunctions in the electrical
system, open the liftgate using the liftgate manual open/close procedure. (See 09-14-58 LIFTGATE
LATCH MANUAL RELEASE PROCEDURE.)
Warning
x When removing the stay damper, serious injury may occur if the stay damper is removed without
supporting the liftgate. Always perform the procedure with at least another person.

(1) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-30 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.)(See 09-16-34 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.)
(2) High-mount brake light (See 09-18-46 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Liftgate upper trim (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the liftgate connector.
4. Disconnect the rear washer hose from rear
washer nozzle. CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
5. Disconnect the antenna feeder No.3.
6. Remove the stay damper band using a tape-
wrapped flathead screwdriver. ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3
REAR WASHER HOSE
LH RH
BAND BAND
STUD BOLT STUD BOLT

16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m, 16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,
12—16 ft·lbf} 12—16 ft·lbf}
STAY DAMPAR STAY DAMPAR
BAND BAND
7. Remove the stay damper.

8. Remove the stud bolts.
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
LH RH
BOLT LIFTGATE LIFTGATE BOLT

8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf} 71—88 in·lbf}
10. Remove the liftgate.

12. Remove the bracket.
14. Adjust the liftgate. (See 09-11-22 LIFTGATE
ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie
BOLT
8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf}
BRACKET
LIFTGATE HINGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

5HB
(1) Liftgate (See 09-11-11 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) C-pillar trim (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Assist handle (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
3. Peel back the seaming welt to the point indicated by the arrow in the figure.
LH RH
FRONT B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM FRONT
SEAMING WELT SEAMING WELT
4. Remove the fasteners. HEADLINER
FASTENER
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
5. Remove the rubber.
6. Remove the nut while partially peeling back the
headliner.
Note
x Be careful not to leave a fold-seam.
HEADLINER
RUBBER
HEADLINER
LH RH
LIFTGATE LIFTGATE
HINGE HINGE
NUT NUT
16—23 N·m {1.7—2.3 kgf·m, 16—23 N·m {1.7—2.3 kgf·m,
12—16 ft·lbf} 12—16 ft·lbf}
HEADLINER HEADLINER
7. Remove the liftgate hinge.

WGN
(1) Liftgate (See 09-11-11 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) D-pillar trim (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Center seat belt cover (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(9) Cargo net hook (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
3. Peel back the seaming welt to the point indicated by the arrow in the figure.
LH RH
FRONT SEAMING WELT SEAMING WELT FRONT
B-PILLAR UPPER B-PILLAR UPPER

TRIM TRIM

5. Remove the nut while partially peeling back the
headliner.
Note FASTENER
x Be careful not to leave a fold-seam.
HEADLINER FASTENER
LH RH
LIFTGATE LIFTGATE
HINGE HINGE
NUT NUT
33—48 N·m {3.4—4.8 kgf·m, 33—48 N·m {3.4—4.8 kgf·m,
25—35 ft·lbf} 25—35 ft·lbf}
HEADLINER HEADLINER
6. Remove the liftgate hinge.

DOORS AND LIFTGATE
End Of Sie
STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL
WM: DOORS AND LIFTGATE(DOORS/LIFTGATE)
Note
x The stay damper contains colorless, odorless, nontoxic gas.
1. Wear protective eye wear.

2. Position the stay damper horizontally.
3. Drain gas and oil by cutting the position indicated
in the figure to a 2—3 mm {0.08—0.11 in} depth
using a metal saw.
Caution
x Be careful. The gas and oil may spray out
with force.
40—50mm {1.6—1.9 in}
4. Verify that the gas and oil is drained completely by

pulling and pushing the piston rod several times
with the cut position facing downward.
PISTON ROD
5. Cut off the bottom of the stay damper.

6. Dispose of the stay damper.
End Of Sie
STAY DAMPAR
DOOR ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the door hinge installation bolts.
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
2. Adjust the gap and height difference to the standard range by moving the door back and forth, left and right.
4SD, 5HB
C C A A
B B
REAR FENDER PANEL REAR DOOR REAR DOOR

c )+( FRONT DOOR FRONT DOOR FRONT FENDER PANEL
e )+( a
d
f )-(
b
)-(
SEC. C—C SEC. B—B SEC. A—A
WGN
C C A A
B B
REAR DOOR REAR DOOR

REAR FENDER PANEL
c )+( FRONT DOOR FRONT DOOR FRONT FENDER PANEL
e )+( a
d
f )-(
b
)-(
SEC. C—C SEC. B—B SEC. A—A
Standard range
a: 2.5—4.9 mm {0.10—0.19 in}
b: -1.2—1.2 mm {-0.047—0.047 in}
c: 2.5—4.5 mm {-0.10—0.17 in}
d: -1.0—1.0 mm {-0.039—0.039 in}
c: 2.5—4.5 mm {-0.10—0.17 in}
f: -1.0—1.0 mm {-0.039—0.039 in}
3. Tighten the bolts.

4. If the door does not open/close smoothly, adjust it by loosening the door lock striker installation screw.
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT
5HB
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the liftgate and the body.
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
2. Loosen the liftgate hinge installation bolts and adjust the gap by moving the liftgate.
a
ROOF PANEL LIFTGATE
b
A
B SEC. A—A
B
C
C
E
D E LIFTGATE
D d
SEC. B—B
LIFTGATE REAR BUMPER LIFTGATE LIFTGATE
e
f
i
h
REAR BUMPER g
SEC. E—E SEC. D—D SEC. C—C
Standard clearance
a: 5.0—7.0 mm {0.20—0.27 in}
b: -2.1—0.1 mm {0.082—0.003 in}
c: 3.4—7.4 mm {0.14—0.29 in}
d: 4.2—8.6 mm {0.17—0.33 in}
e: 2.8—5.2 mm {0.12—0.20 in}
f: -1.8—0.6 mm {-0.07—0.023 in}
g: 2.0—5.4 mm {0.078—0.21 in}
h: -2.1—1.9 mm {-0.082—0.074 in}
i: 8.0—12.0 mm {0.31—0.47 in}
WGN
1. Measure the gap and height difference between the liftgate and the body.
DOORS AND LIFTGATE
2. Loosen the liftgate hinge installation bolts and adjust the gap by moving the liftgate.
a
ROOF PANEL LIFTGATE
b
A
B SEC. A—A
B
C
C
D E
D LIFTGATE
E d
SEC. B—B
LIFTGATE REAR BUMPER LIFTGATE LIFTGATE
e
f
i
h
REAR BUMPER g
SEC. E—E SEC. D—D SEC. C—C
Standard clearance
a: 5.5—7.5 mm {0.21—0.29 in}
b: -2.0—0.0 mm {0.078—0.000 in}
c: 2.7—6.9 mm {0.106—0.271 in}
d: -5.4—-1.0 mm {0.212—0.039 in}
e: 2.8—5.2 mm {0.11—0.20 in}
f: -1.7—0.7 mm {-0.066—0.027 in}
g: 2.0—6.0 mm {0.078—0.236 in}
h: -2.0—2.0 mm {-0.078—0.078 in}
i: 4.0—8.0 mm {0.16—0.31 in}

End Of Sie
GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS
09-12 GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS
GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–2 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–38
FRONT DOOR GLASS Auto-open/close Function For
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–6 All Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–38
REAR DOOR GLASS Auto-open/close Function for
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–6 Driver-side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–39
REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
WINDSHIELD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9 Passenger's Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–41
Not Reusing Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–9 Rear Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–41
Reusing Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–10 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . 09-12–11 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–41
REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL . . . 09-12–14 Auto-open/close Function for
4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–14 All Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–41
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–16 Auto-open/close Function for
REAR WINDOW GLASS Driver-side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–42
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–18 POWER OUTER MIRROR
4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–18 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–43
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–24 POWER OUTER MIRROR
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–43
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–26 Mirror Glass Adjustment,
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–26 Retract/Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–43
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–27 Heated Outer Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–44
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL . . . 09-12–44
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–27 OUTER MIRROR GLASS
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–28 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–45
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–30 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH
FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–45
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–31 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH
REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–46
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–32 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–46
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–35 R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–47
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR FILAMENT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–50
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–35 FILAMENT REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–50
Auto-open/close Function For AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR REMOVAL . . . 09-12–50
All Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–35 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
Auto-open/close Function for INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–51
Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–36 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–52
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–36 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-12–52
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL . . . . . . . 09-12–52
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–37 Vehicles With Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–52
Auto-open/close Function For Vehicles Without Rain Sensor . . . . . . . . 09-12–54
All Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–37 REARVIEW MIRROR
Auto-open/close Function for INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–55
Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–37 BASE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–55
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH BASE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-12–55
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-12–37 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . 09-12–56
09-12–1
GLASS/WINDOWS/MIRRORS LOCATION INDEX
R.H.D.
9 10
7 8
2
14 13 12 11
5HB
1
14 13 11
4SD
15
WAGON
14 13 12 11
1 Power window main switch 2 Power outer mirror switch

(See 09-12-37 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH (See 09-12-46 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-12-38 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH (See 09-12-46 POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH
INSPECTION.) INSPECTION.)
(See 09-12-56 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3 Front power window regulator
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.) (See 09-12-31 FRONT POWER WINDOW
09-12–4
4 Power window motor
(See 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
(See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
(See 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-12-37 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
5 Rear power window regulator
(See 09-12-32 REAR POWER WINDOW
6 Front door glass
(See 09-12-6 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
7 Power outer mirror
(See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-12-44 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.)
(See 09-12-45 OUTER MIRROR GLASS
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-12-45 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH
(See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR
INSPECTION.)
8 Windshield
(See 09-12-9 WINDSHIELD REMOVAL.)
(See 09-12-11 WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION.)
9 Rearview mirror
(See 09-12-52 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.)
(See 09-12-55 REARVIEW MIRROR
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-12-55 BASE REMOVAL.)
(See 09-12-55 BASE INSTALLATION.)
10 Auto-dimming mirror
(See 09-12-50 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
REMOVAL.)
INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.)
11 Rear window glass
(See 09-12-14 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL.)
(See 09-12-18 REAR WINDOW GLASS
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-12-50 FILAMENT INSPECTION.)
12 Quarter window glass
(See 09-12-26 QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL.)
(See 09-12-27 QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
INSTALLATION.)
13 Rear door quarter glass
(See 09-12-8 REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS
14 Rear door glass
(See 09-12-6 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
15 Power window subswitch
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-12-56 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
09-12–5
FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-75 INNER
4. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-88
FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-8
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the hole cover.
Caution
x If the bolts are removed without FRONT
supporting the front door glass, the front DOOR
door glass may fall off and be damaged. GLASS
Remove the bolts while inserting your
BOLT HOLE
hand into the front door speaker 4.5—6.5 N·m COVER
installation hole to support the front door {46—66 kgf·cm,
glass. 40— ·lbf}
8. Lift up the front door glass, tilt it in the direction of

(2)
arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove it in the
direction of arrow (2).
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. FRONT
(1) DOOR
Caution GLASS
x If the bolts are installed without
supporting the front door glass, the front
door glass may fall off and be damaged.
When installing the front door glass,
align the glass edge with the front door
glass guide by hand through the speaker
installation hole, and then install the
bolts.
End Of Sie
REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
rear door glass so that the distance from the top
of the rear door glass to the upper part of the rear
beltline molding is approx. 144 mm {5.67 in}.
APPROX.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 144 mm {5.67 in}
3. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-102
REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-10
REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the rear door quarter glass. (See 09-12-
8 REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
09-12–6
6. Remove the hole cover.
4SD 5HB, WAGON
BOLT
4.5—6.5 N·m
{46—66 kgf·cm,
40—57 in·lbf}
BOLT
HOLE 4.5—6.5 N·m
COVER {46—66 kgf·cm,
40—57 in·lbf}
HOLE COVER
7. Remove the bolt.
Caution
x If the bolts are removed without supporting the rear door glass, the rear door glass may fall off
and be damaged. Remove the bolts while inserting your hand into the rear door speaker
installation hole to support the rear door glass.
8. Lift up the rear door glass, tilt it in the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then remove it in the direction of
arrow (2).
(2)
4SD (2) 5HB, WAGON
(1)
(1)
REAR
DOOR REAR
GLASS DOOR
GLASS
Caution
x If the bolts are installed without supporting the rear door glass, the rear door glass may fall off and
be damaged. When installing the rear door glass, align the glass edge with the rear door glass
guide by hand through the speaker installation hole, and then install the bolts.
End Of Sie
09-12–7
REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
APPROX.
3. Remove the rear door trim. (See 09-17-102
REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the screw.
SCREW SCREW
4SD 1.3—1.9 N·m {14—19 kgf·cm, 12—16 in·lbf} 5HB, WAGON 1.3—1.9 N·m {14—19 kgf·cm, 12—16 in·lbf}
FASTENER FASTENER
BOLT B
6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
BOLT B
62—86 in·lbf} 6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
62—86 in·lbf}
BOLT A
6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
HOLE 62—86 in·lbf}
PLUG BOLT A
6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
HOLE 62—86 in·lbf}
PLUG
5. Remove the hole plug.

6. Remove the bolt A.
9. Remove the rear door quater glass guide.
10. Slide the rear door quarter glass in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
4SD 5HB, WAGON
REAR DOOR REAR DOOR QUARTER REAR DOOR REAR DOOR QUARTER
QUARTER GLASS GUIDE (2) QUARTER GLASS GUIDE (2)
GLASS GLASS
(1) (1)
11. Remove the rear door quarter glass and weatherstrip as a single unit in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in
the figure.
09-12–8
12. Remove the rear door quarter glass from the weatherstrip.
4SD 5HB, WAGON
WEATHERSTRIP
WEATHERSTRIP
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR QUARTER GLASS
QUARTER GLASS
W NDSHIELD REMOVAL
(1) Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-4 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(2) Cowl grille (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rain sensor (Vehicles with rain sensor)(See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Auto-dimming mirror (Vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)(See 09-12-50 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
REMOVAL.)
(5) Rear view mirror (Vehicles without auto-dimming mirror)(See 09-12-52 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.)
(6) A-pillar trim (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Sunvisor (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Set the headliner out of the way.
4. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body. BODY SIDE PROTECTIVE TAPE
Note A
x Overlap and adhere the protective tape to
the corners to prevent damage.
5. Remove the windshield molding by pulling it A

outward.
Note
x If the windshield molding is difficult to SEC. A—A
GLASS SIDE
remove, warm the windshield molding using
a hot air blower.
x The windshield molding is a replacement
part.
Not Reusing Windshield
Note
x If it is difficult to cut sealant, use piano wire and follow the procedure under “Reusing Windshield”.
Warning
x Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano wire.
09-12–9
1. Cut out the sealant all around the glass using a
sealant remover.
2. Remove the windshield.
SEALANT
REMOVER
49 G050 1A0
Reusing Windshield
Warning
x Using piano wire with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using piano wire.
Caution
x Because the lens for rainfall/illumination level detection is integrated with the windshield, the auto
wiper/auto light systems may not operate correctly if the lens is damaged. When removing the
windshield, be careful not to damage the lens. If the lens is damaged, replace the windshield.
Note
x Before removing the windshield from the body, mark the position of the windshield by affixing tape to the
windshield and body panel.
1. Avoiding the pin on the inside of the vehicle, insert

piano wire which has been cut to sufficient length. B
A PIN
2. Wind each end of piano wire around a bar. PIN
B
Note
x Use a long sawing action to spread the work A
over the whole length of piano wire to
prevent it from breaking due to localized
heating.
PROTECTIVE TAPE
PIANO WIRE
SEALANT PIN
SEC. A-A SEC. B-B
09-12–10
3. Secure one end of piano wire, and while pulling
the other end, cut the sealant around the
windshield.
4. Pinch the pin from the inside of the vehicle and
detach it.
5. Remove the windshield.
6. If the pin is damaged, remove the pin.
Note
x Before removing the pin from the windshield PIANO WIRE
glass, place an alignment mark on the
windshield.
End Of Sie
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION
Warning
x Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility
knife.
Caution
x If a door is opened or closed when all the window glass is closed, the resulting change in air
pressure could cause the sealant to crack preventing the proper installation of the windshield.
Keep the door glass opened until the windshield installation is completed.
x If the rain sensor is replaced with a new one, the reflection rate when the switch the ignition to on
the first time is memorized as a condition that no rainfall is on the windshield. Therefore, remove
water and dirt from the windshield before switch the ignition to on. Perform the rain sensor
reinitial setting in the following cases: (See 09-19-41 RAIN SENSOR REINITIALIZATION SETTING.)
— The windshield is replaced and the rain sensor is reused.
— The auto wiper system does not operate correctly after the windshield is installed.
1. Remove the sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a utility knife. (When reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the windshield.
3. Inspect the glass for cracks. If it is cracked, chamfer it using sandpaper.
4. Align the alignment marks made before removal
HOLLOWED MARK IN THE A
and install the pin to the windshield referring to CERAMIC COATING
the figure. (Reusing glass, pin removed) A
PIN
PIN
SEC. A-A
5. Install the windshield molding.

6. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the WINDSHIELD MOLDING
figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
Caution
x To prevent weakening of the primer
adhesion, keep the bonding surface free A
A
of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not
touch the surface with your hand. SEC. A—A
Note
x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the
ceramic coating.
09-12–11
A HOLLOWED MAKE IN THE

CERAMIC COATING MAKE
SURE TO APPLY PRIMER 9.5*1 {0.37}
OVER ALL MARKS 9.5*1 {0.37} 9.5*1 {0.37}
B
B
PRIMER
C SEC. A—A SEC. B—B SEC. C—C

HOLLOWED MAKE IN THE
CERAMIC COATING MAKE *1:PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
SURE TO APPLY PRIMER mm {in}
OVER ALL MARKS
7. Cut away the old sealant using a utility knife so

that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of
sealant remains along the perimeter of the frame.
8. If the sealant has come off completely in any one
place, apply some primer after degreasing, and
allow it approx. 30 min to dry. Then apply 2 mm
{0.08 in} thickness of new sealant.
Caution
adhesion, keep the bonding surface free
touch the surface with your hand.
9. Clean and degrease along the perimeter of the bonding area on the body.
10. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
Caution
x To prevent weakening of the primer adhesion, keep the bonding surface free of dirt, moisture, and
grease. Do not touch the surface with your hand.
Note
x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the ceramic coating.
09-12–12
OVER END OF
RADIUS
A
*1
SEC. A—A
A 11*2 {0.43}
5.6*1 {0.22}
B
PRIMER B
HOLLOWED MARK IN THE
DOWEL SEC. B—B
C
MAKE SURE TO APPLY PRIMER *1 4.3*1 {0.17}
OVER ALL MARKS.
11*2 {0.43}
OVER END OF
C RADIUS
OVER END OF
RADIUS
SEC. C—C
4.2*1 {0.17}
11*2 {0.43}
3.5*1 {0.14}
HOLLOWED MARK IN THE HOLLOWED MARK IN THE *1:PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
DOWEL DOWEL
MAKE SURE TO APPLY PRIMER *2:POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
MAKE SURE TO APPLY PRIMER
OVER ALL MARKS. OVER ALL MARKS. mm {in}
11. Apply sealant to the area of the glass surface as

12. Insert the positioning pins to the body and install
the windshield.
11 {0.43}
13. Verify that the clearance between the A-pillar and
the roof is within the range shown in the figure,
and press along the perimeter of the glass.
APPLY SEALANT TO THIS AREA. 5 {0.2}
mm {in}
2.5—5.9
A {0.10—0.23}
1.6—5.8
{0.07—0.22}
A
B
B
SEC. B—B SEC. A—A
mm {in}
14. Install the headliner.

15. Install the following parts:
(2) Sunvisor (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Rear view mirror (Vehicles without auto-dimming mirror) (See 09-12-55 REARVIEW MIRROR
INSTALLATION.)
(5) Auto-dimming mirror (Vehicles with auto-dimming mirror) (See 09-12-51 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
INSTALLATION.)
(6) Rain sensor (Vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-12–13
(7) Cowl grille (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Windshield wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-4 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
16. Allow the sealant to harden completely.
Sealant hardening time: 24 h
17. Connect the negative battery cable.

End Of Sie
REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL
4SD, 5HB
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof only)
(2) Rear wiper arm and blade (5HB)(See 09-19-16 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(3) A-pillar trims (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Upper anchor of the front seat belt (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) B-pillar lower trims (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) B-pillar upper trims (See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(9) Rear side seat back (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Tire house trims (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)C-pillar trims (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4SD 5HB
FASTENER
FASTENER
HEADLINER HEADLINER
VEICLE FRONT VEICLE FRONT
4. Set the headliner out of the way.
09-12–14
5. Disconnect the filament connector.
4SD 5HB
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
FILAMENT CONNECTOR FILAMENT CONNECTOR
6. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body.

PROTECTIVE TAPE
4SD
GLASS SIDE SEC. A—A
5HB
PROTECTIVE TAPE
BODY SIDE
SEC. A—A
GLASS SIDE
Note
x Overlap and adhere the protective tape to the corners to prevent damage.
09-12–15
piano wire which has been cut to sufficient length.
PIANO WIRE
Warning
x Using piano wire with bare hands can
cause injury. Always wear gloves when PROTECTIVE
using piano wire. TAPE
Note
x Before removing the rear window glass from
the body, mark the position of the glass by SEALANT
affixing tape to the glass and body panel.
8. Wind each end of piano wire around a bar.
Note
x Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of piano wire to prevent it from
breaking due to localized heating.
9. Secure one end of piano wire, and while pulling

the other end, cut the sealant around the rear
window glass.
10. Pinch the pin from the inside of the vehicle and
detach it.
PIANO WIRE
4SD 5HB
PIN PIN
PIN PIN
11. Remove the rear window glass.
Wagon
(1) Rear wiper arm and blade (See 09-19-16 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Liftgate side trim (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(4) Liftgate lower trim (See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Rear wiper motor (See 09-19-19 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Rear spoiler (See 09-16-30 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.)(See 09-16-34 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the filament connector.
09-12–16
4. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body.
BODY SIDE PROTECTIVE TAPE
Note
x Overlap and adhere the protective tape to A
the corners to prevent damage.
A
5. Insert the piano wire, which has been cut to

sufficient length from inside the vehicle.
PIANO WIRE
Warning
x Using the piano wire with bare hands can
cause injury. Always wear gloves when PROTECTIVE TAPE
using the piano wire.
Note
x Before removing the rear window glass from
the body, mark the position of the glass by SEALANT
affixing tape to the glass and body panel.
6. Wind each end of the piano wire around a bar.
Note
x Use a long sawing action to spread the work over the whole length of the piano wire to prevent it from
breaking due to localized heating.
7. Secure one end of the piano wire, and while

pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the
rear window glass.
PIANO WIRE
09-12–17
8. Pinch the pin from the inside of the vehicle and detach it.
PIN
PIN
PIN
9. Remove the rear window glass.

End Of Sie
REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION
Warning
x Using a utility knife with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility
knife.
Caution
x Proper installation of the glass may be difficult if sealant is cracked or the glass is pushed out by
air pressure when a door is opened/closed with all the window glass closed. Keep the door glass
open until the rear window glass installation is completed.
4SD, 5HB
1. Remove sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a utility knife or scraper. (When reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {2.0 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the glass.
4. Install the spacers, fasteners, and pins to the glass as shown in the figure.
When reusing the glass, align it with the alignment mark placed before the glass was removed.
4SD 5HB
SPACER
SPACER REMOVE
MARK
SPACER REMOVE MARK
SPACER
5. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the figure then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
Caution
09-12–18
Note
4SD
PRIMER 9.5*1 {0.37}
A SEC. A—A
A
9.5*1 {0.37}
B HOLLOWED MARK IN THE

B
SEC. B—B
SURE TO APPLY PRIMER
OVER ALL MARKS.
C 9.5*1 {0.37} SEC. C—C
C *1:POSSIBLE PRIMER
APPLICATION AREA
mm {in}
5HB
21.0 {0.83}
9.5*1 {0.37}
A
SEC. A—A
A
9.5*1 {0.37}
B HOLLOWED MARK IN THE
B
SEC. B—B
SURE TO APPLY PRIMER
OVER ALL MARKS.
9.5*1 {0.37}
OVER EBD OF RADIUS
C SEC. C—C
*1:POSSIBLE PRIMER
C APPLICATION AREA
mm {in}
09-12–19
6. Cut away the old sealant using a utility knife or
scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in}
thickness of sealant remains along the perimeter
of the frame.
7. Clean and degrease along the perimeter of the
bonding area on the body.
8. If the sealant has come off completely in any one
place, apply some primer, and allow it to dry for
approx. 30 min.
Caution
Caution
Note
09-12–20
4SD
OVER EBD OF RADIUS
A
OVER EBD OF
RADIUS
B
B *1 1.4*1 {0.055}
A
*1
11*2 {0.43} 11*2 {0.43}
3.8*1 {0.15}
SEC. A—A SEC. C—C

PRIMER
C
*1
C 4.1*1 {0.16} *1:PRIMER

APPLICATION AREA
11*2 {0.43}
*2:POSSIBLE PRIMER
APPLICATION AREA
OVER EBD OF SEC. B—B
RADIUS mm {in}
5HB
A OVER EBD OF RADIUS
B
B *1 6.7*1 {0.26}
11*2 {0.43} *1
A
11*2 {0.43}
OVER EBD OF
RADIUS
SEC. A—A
SEC. C—C
PRIMER
OVER EBD OF
RADIUS
C
*1
*1
11*2 {0.43} *1:PRIMER
APPLICATION AREA
*2:POSSIBLE PRIMER
APPLICATION AREA
SEC. B—B
C mm {in}

11. Install the rear window glass.
11
{0.43}
APPLY SEALANT TO 5 {0.2}

THIS AREA
mm {in}
09-12–21
12. Verify that the gap at the upper and lower parts of the glass is within the specification shown in the figure, then
press along the perimeter of the glass.
4SD
B
B
A
2.3—5.7 {0.10—0.22}
1.8—6.2 {0.08—0.24}
0.2—3.8 {0.01—0.14}
mm {in}
5HB
A
B
B
A
1.3—4.7 {0.06—0.18}
2.4—6.6 {0.10—0.25}
mm {in}
09-12–22
13. Connect the filament connector.
4SD 5HB
FILAMENT FILAMENT
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
14. Install the fasteners.

4SD 5HB
FASTENER
FASTENER
HEADLINER HEADLINER
VEICLE FRONT VEICLE FRONT

(8) Rear wiper arm and blade (5HB)(See 09-19-16 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
09-12–23
Wagon
Warning
x Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
Caution
pressure could cause the sealant to crack preventing the proper installation of the glass. Keep the
door glass open until the rear window glass installation is completed.
1. Remove the sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a razor or scraper. (when reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease an approx. 50 mm {1.97 in} wide strip along the perimeter of the glass.
4. Install the spacers, pin and fastener to the glass as shown in the figure.
When reusing the glass, align with the alignment
PIN SPACER PIN
mark marked before removing.
5. Apply glass primer on the glass as shown in the
figure then allow it to dry for approx. 30 min.
Caution
FASTENER PIN FASTENER
Note
x Apply primer to the hollowed marks in the
ceramic coating.
9.5 {0.37}*
12.6 {0.496}
48.4 {1.91}
9.5 {0.37}*
SEC. A—A
HOLLOWED MARK IN THE CERAMIC A SEC. C—C
COATING
MAKE SURE TO APPLY PRIMER A
OVER ALL MARKS. PRIMER
B 9.5 {0.37}* 15.7 {0.618}
B 32.3 {1.27}
D C
SEC. B—B 9.5 {0.37}*
D C SEC. D—D
*: PRIMER APPLICATION AREA mm {in}
6. Cut away the old sealant using a razor or scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant
remains along the perimeter of the frame.
7. Clean and degrease the bonding area along the perimeter of the body.
8. When reusing the liftgate, apply primer to the area where the sealant has come off completely and allow it to
dry for approx. 30 min.
Caution
9. Apply body primer on the body as shown in the figure, then allow it to dry for 30 min.
Caution
09-12–24
Note
OVER END OF
RADIUS
A
11 {0.43}
B A 4.9 {0.19}*
B
SEC. A—A
PRIMER 11 {0.43 } 21.6 {0.85 }*
12 {0.47}* SEC. B—B
BEAD
C 11 {0.43}
SEC. C—C
BEAD
C *: POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA

mm {in}

11. Install the rear window glass.
12. Verify that the gap at the upper and lower parts of 11 {0.43}
the glass is within the standard value shown in the
figure, then press along the perimeter of the
glass. 5 {0.2}
APPLY SEALANT TO THIS AREA.
mm {in}
A 2.5—6.5
1.2—5.2 {0.010—0.25}
{0.05—0.20}
B A
B
1.2—4.8
{0.05—0.18}
C SEC. C—C
mm {in}
13. Connect the filament connector.

14. Install the high-mount brake light. (See 09-18-46 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
15. Install the rear spoiler. (See 09-16-30 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.)(See 09-16-34 REAR SPOILER
INSTALLATION.)
16. Install the rear wiper motor. (See 09-19-19 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .)
17. Install the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
18. Install the liftgate side trim. (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
19. Install the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
20. Install the rear wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-16 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION .)
09-12–25

End Of Sie
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL
5HB
2. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body
and the quarter window glass. BODY SIDE PROTECTIVE TAPE
Note
A
x For the areas of the sealant that are difficult
to cut, use the piano wire and follow the
procedure under “Reusing Windshield”. A
Warning
x Using the piano wire with bare hands can
cause injury. Always wear gloves when

PIN
the piano wire which has been cut to sufficient
length.
PRIMER
4. Wind each end of the piano wire around a bar. PRIMER

QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
Note
x Use a long sawing action to spread the work
over the whole length of the piano wire to B
A
B
prevent it from breaking due to localized A
heating.
CLIP CLIP
09-12–26
5. Secure one end of the piano wire, and while
pulling the other end, cut the sealant around the
quarter window glass.
6. Pull the quarter window glass outward and detach
the pins from the body.
7. If a pin or spacer is damaged, remove it.
Note
x Before removing the pins or spacers from
the quarter window glass, place alignment PIANO WIRE
marks on the quarter window glass.
Wagon
1. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body to protect it from damage.
2. Disconnect the glass antenna terminal connector. (See 09-20-39 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3 REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Make a hole through the sealant, avoiding pins, PIN QUARTER
from the inside of the vehicle using an awl. WINDOW GLASS
FASTENER PIN
4. Pass the piano wire through the hole. PIANO WIRE
Warning PROTECTIVE
x Using a piano wire with bare hands can TAPE
using a piano wire.
5. Wind each end of the piano wire around a bar.
Note
x Use a long sawing action to spread the work SEALANT
over the whole length of the piano wire to
prevent it from breaking due to localized
heating.
6. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling

the other end, cut the sealant around the quarter
window glass.
7. Remove the quarter window glass.
End Of Sie
PIANO WIRE
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION
Warning
09-12–27
Caution
pressure could cause the sealant to crack preventing the proper installation of the glass. Keep the
door glass open until the quarter window glass installation is completed.
5HB
1. Remove sealant along the perimeter of the glass using a razor or scraper. (when reusing the glass)
2. Clean and degrease the ceramic part along the perimeter of the glass.
4. If the glass is reused, attach the pins to the glass as shown in the figure.
Align with the alignment marks marked before
removing the glass. PIN
5. Apply glass primer along the hollowed marks in
the ceramic coating on the new glass, along the
sealant tracks on the reused glass, then allow it to
dry for approx. 30 min.
Caution
of dirt, moisture, and grease. Do not PRIMER FASTENER
Note
9.5*2 {0.37} 9.5*2 {0.37}

PRIMER *1
B SEC. A—A
A
B SEC. B—B
C 9.5*1 {0.37}
C A
D 9.5*2 {0.37}
SEC. D—D
D SEC. C—C
*1:PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
*2:POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
mm {in}
6. Cut away the old sealant using a razor or scraper so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.079 in} thickness of sealant
remains along the perimeter of the frame.
7. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it
approx. 30 min to dry. Then apply 2 mm {0.079 in} thickness of new sealant.
8. Clean and degrease the bonding surface along the perimeter of the body.
Caution
09-12–28
14.5*2 {0.571}
PRIMER
B 14.5*2 {0.571}
SEC. A—A
A SEC. B—B
C B
C A
D
14.5*2 {0.571}
14.5*1 {0.571} SEC. D—D
D
SEC. C—C
*1:PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
*2:POSSIBLE PRIMER APPLICATION AREA
mm {in}
10. Install the fastener to the bead on the body side.

11. After the primer has dried, apply 11 mm {0.43 in}
in thickness, 5 mm {0.20 in} in width of sealant
using a sealant gun. Where it is not applied
properly, correctly apply it using a spatula.
BEAD
FASTENER
4.75 {0.187}
4.75 {0.187}
A
B B
A SEC. C—C
SEC. A—A
C
4.75 {0.187}
C 11 {0.43}
5 {0.2}
SEC. B—B
mm {in}
12. Insert the positioning pins to the body and install the quarter window glass.

09-12–29
Wagon
1. Cut away the old sealant using a razor so that 1—2 mm {0.04—0.07 in} thickness of sealant remains around
the circumference of the frame.
Warning
2. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it
approx. 30 min to dry. Then put on new sealant to create a 2 mm {0.08 in} layer.
3. Clean and degrease an approx. 50.0 mm {1.97 in} wide strip around the circumference of the glass and the
bonding area on the body.
4. Insert the spacer into the body.
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
5. Use only glass primer on the glass. Allow it to dry
for approx. 30 min.
Caution
x Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and
do not touch the surface or the primer FASTENER
may not properly bond to the surface of
the glass and body, which may cause
leaks to occur.
A
B
B
4.75 {0.187}
4.75 {0.187}
4.75
{0.187}
11 {0.43}
90
5 {0.2}
SEC. A—A SEC. B—B SEC. C—C mm {in}
09-12–30
6. Set the quarter window glass in place and insert PIN QUARTER
the pins and fastener into the body. Install the WINDOW GLASS
quarter window glass.
Sealant hardening time: 24 hours
FASTENER PIN
FRONT POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION.)
(5) Front power window motor (See 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the nuts.
NUT
8—10 N·m
{80—100 kgf·cm,
70—95 in·lbf}
09-12–31
5. Insert a hand through the front door speaker installation hole and rotate the drum housing in the direction of the
arrow shown in the figure to detach the tabs from the front door module panel.
FRONT DOOR
DRUM HOUSING MODULE PANEL
FRONT DOOR
OUTER PANEL
FRONT POWER WINDOW

REGULATOR
TAB
6. Remove the front power window regulator from

the speaker installation hole.
Caution
x When installing, do not allow the cable to
come out from the drum housing.
FRONT POWER
WINDOW
End Of Sie REGULATOR
REAR POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

APPROX.
(1) Rear door trim (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR
(2) Rear door speaker (See 09-20-10 REAR
INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rear door quarter glass (See 09-12-8 REAR
DOOR QUARTER GLASS REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(5) Rear power window motor (See 09-12-35 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-12-36 REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-12–32
4. Remove the nuts.
4SD 5HB, WAGON
NUT NUT
8—10 N·m 8—10 N·m
{80—100 kgf·cm, {80—100 kgf·cm,
70—95 in·lbf} 70—95 in·lbf}
09-12–33
5. Insert a hand through the speaker installation hole, rotate the drum housing in the direction shown in the figure
to detach the tabs from the rear door module panel.
4SD
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
OUTER PANEL
REAR POWER WINDOW

REGULATOR
TAB
5HB, WAGON
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
OUTER PANEL
REAR POWER WINDOW

REGULATOR
TAB
09-12–34
6. Remove the rear power window regulator through the speaker installation hole.
4SD 5HB, WAGON
REAR POWER REAR POWER

WINDOW WINDOW
REGULATOR REGULATOR
Caution
x Make sure the cable does not unspool from the drum housing when installing.
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

)
1. Fully lower the front door glass.

5. Disconnect the front power window motor
connector, remove the bolt, then remove the front
power window motor from the front power window FRONT POWER
regulator drum in the direction of the arrow shown WINDOW MOTOR
in the figure. CONNECTOR
Note
x When installing the front power window BOLT
5.2—7.2 N·m
motor to the front power window regulator FRONT POWER {54—73 kgf·cm,
drum, the drum housing hooks may detach WINDOW MOTOR 47—63 in·lbf}
from the door module panel. If this happens,
remove the front door speaker, insert your
hand in the speaker installation hole,
connect the drum housing hooks, and while supporting the drum housing, install the front power window
motor to the drum.
End Of Sie
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION
Auto-open/close Function For All Windows
4. Disconnect the power window motor connector. 09
5. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the
ground to power window motor terminals E and F,
and then inspect the power window motor
operation.
x If the power window motor does not operate CLOSE E C A
as indicated in the table, replace it. F D B
M
Terminal OPEN
Operation
F E
Open B+ Ground
Close Ground B+ F E A B D C
09-12–35
6. Connect the battery positive voltage to power window motor terminal D and connect terminal C to ground.
7. Operate the power window motor and measure the voltage at terminals A and B.
x If there is any malfunction, replace the power window motor.
Voltage
Pulse: max. 5 V/min. 0 V
Auto-open/close Function for Driver-side

Front driver side
4. Disconnect the power window motor connector.
operation.
M
Terminal OPEN
Operation
F E
Open B+ Ground
6. Connect the battery positive voltage to power

window motor terminal D and connect terminal C
to ground.
Voltage
Front passenger side

operation.
x If the power window motor does not operate
CLOSE E C A
as indicated in the table, replace it. M F D B
OPEN
Terminal
Operation
F E
Open B+ Ground
F E
Close Ground B+
End Of Sie
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Fully lower the rear door glass.
09-12–36
4. Disconnect the rear power window motor REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
connector, remove the bolt, then remove the
power window motor from the power window REAR POWER
regulator drum in the direction of the arrow shown WINDOW MOTOR
in the figure. CONNECTOR
Note
BOLT
x When installing the rear power window
5.2—7.2 N·m
motor to the rear power window regulator {54—73 kgf·cm,
drum, the drum housing hooks may detach 47—63 in·lbf}
from the rear door module panel. If this
happens, remove the door speaker, insert
your hand in the speaker installation hole,
connect the drum housing hooks, and while supporting the drum housing, install the rear power window
motor to the drum.
End Of Sie
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION
operation.
M
Terminal OPEN
Operation
F E
Open B+ Ground
5. Connect the battery positive voltage to power

window motor terminal D and connect terminal C
to ground.
Voltage

ground to power window motor terminals E and F, 09
operation.
x If the power window motor does not operate
CLOSE E C A
as indicated in the table, replace it. M F D B
OPEN
Terminal
Operation
F E
Open B+ Ground
F E
Close Ground B+
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the inner garnish. (driver's side)(See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-12–37
3. Remove the front door trim. (driver's side)(See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the power window main switch. (See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION
2. Verify that the door glass (driver’s side) can be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition is switched off.
x If the door glass (driver’s side) cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition is switched off, or if the
door glass (driver’s side) can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power window main switch.
4. Remove the inner garnish. (driver's side)(See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the front door trim. (driver's side)(See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the power window main switch. (driver's side)(See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY.)
7. Connect the power window main switch connector.
9. Measure the voltage at each terminal.
x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under Inspection item (s) and
related wiring harnesses.
— If the system does not work normally even
though the inspection items or related POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
wiring harnesses do not have any HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
malfunction, replace the power window
main switch.
M K I * E * A
N L J H F D B
09-12–38
Terminal voltage table (reference)
Terminal Signal name Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
Driver’s side Power window Door glass (driver’s side) x Power window motor
B+
A window close motor (driver’s closing (driver’s side)
signal side) Other 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
B GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
C — — — — —
Power window x Power window motor
D Sensor ground motor (driver’s Under any condition 1.0 or less (driver’s side)
side) x Related wiring harness
Power window Switch the ignition to ON approx. 10.0 x Power window motor
Sensor power
E motor (driver’s (driver’s side)
supply Switch the ignition to OFF 1.0 or less
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x P/W 15 A fuse
F IG1 P/W 15 A fuse
Switch the ignition to OFF 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
G — — — — —
Power window Alternates x Power window motor
Door glass (driver’s side)
H Pulse 1 motor (driver’s between 1.0 (driver’s side)
operating
side) or less and 5 x Related wiring harness
Because this terminal is for communication,
Communicatio Power window x Power window subswitch
I good/no good judgment by terminal voltage
n subswitch x Related wiring harness
is not possible
J Pulse 2 motor (driver’s between 1.0 (driver’s side)
operating
Because this terminal is for communication, x Power window motor
Door open/
K BCM good/no good judgment by terminal voltage (driver’s side)
close signal
is not possible x Related wiring harness
Switch the ignition to ON and
1.0 or less
Power-cut Power window power-cut switch at LOCK x Power window subswitch
L
signal subswitch Switch the ignition to ON and x Related wiring harness
approx. 7.0
power-cut switch at UNLOCK
B+
M window open motor (driver’s opening (driver’s side)
x P/W 30 A fuse
N Power supply P/W 30 A fuse Under any condition B+
x Related wiring harness

2. Verify that the door glass (driver’s side) can be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition is switched off.
x If the door glass (driver’s side) cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition is switched off, or if the
door glass (driver’s side) can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power window main switch.
4. Remove the inner garnish. (driver's side) (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the front door trim. (driver's side) (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the power window main switch. (driver's side) (See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY.)
7. Connect the power window main switch connector. 09
x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under Inspection item (s) and
09-12–39
— If the system does not work normally even POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
though the inspection items or related HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
wiring harnesses do not have any
main switch. 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A
1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B
L.H.D. R.H.D.
2K * * * * * * * * * * *
2L * * * * * * * * * 2D 2B

Power window x Power window motor
1A Sensor ground motor (driver’s Under any condition 1.0 or less (driver’s side)
1B GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
Rear right side Power window Door glass (rear right side) x Power window motor (rear
B+
1C window close motor (rear right closing right side)
1D Pulse 1 motor (driver’s between 1.0 (driver’s side)
operating
Rear right side Power window Door glass (rear right side) x Power window motor (rear
B+
1E window open motor (rear right opening right side)
Power window Switch the ignition to ON approx. 10.0 x Power window motor
Sensor power
1F motor (driver’s (driver’s side)
supply Switch the ignition to OFF 1.0 or less
Rear left side Power window Door glass (rear left side) x Power window motor (rear
B+
1G window open motor (rear left opening left side)
1H Pulse 2 motor (driver’s between 1.0 (driver’s side)
operating
Rear left side Power window Door glass (rear left side) x Power window motor (rear
B+
1I window close motor (rear left closing left side)
B+
1J window close motor (driver’s closing (driver’s side)
Because this terminal is for communication, x Power window motor
Door open/
1K BCM good/no good judgment by terminal voltage (driver’s side)
close signal
is not possible x Related wiring harness
B+
1L window open motor (driver’s opening (driver’s side)
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x P/W IG 30 A fuse
1M IG1 P/W IG 30 A fuse
Switch the ignition to OFF 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
x P/W 30 A fuse
1N Power supply P/W 30 A fuse Under any condition B+
09-12–40
R.H.D.
Passenger’s Power window Door glass (passenger’s side) x Power window motor
B+
2B side window motor closing (passenger’s side)
close signal (passenger’s side) Other 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
Passenger’s Power window Door glass (passenger’s side) x Power window motor
B+
2D side window motor opening (passenger’s side)
open signal (passenger’s side) Other 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Passenger's Side
4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
Rear Side
3. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-77 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
End Of Sie
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION
Auto-open/close Function for All Windows
2. Remove the inner garnish. (front passenger’s side) (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the front door trim. (front passenger’s side) (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the rear door trim. (rear side) (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-12-41 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “ Inspection item(s)”
and related wiring harnesses.
— If the system does not work properly even
though the inspection items or related
09
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
wiring harnesses do not have any HARNESS-SIDE CONNECTOR
subswitch.
K I * * C A
L J H F D B
09-12–41
Terminal Signal name Connected to Measured condition Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
Because this terminal is for communication, x Power window main
Communicati Power window main
A good/no good judgment by terminal voltage is switch
on switch
not possible x Related wiring harness
x Power window main
Power-cut Power window main Switch the ignition to ON and
B B+ switch
signal switch power-cut switch at UNLOCK
x P/W 30 A fuse
C Power supply P/W 30 A fuse Switch the ignition to ON B+
Alternates
x Power window motor
between 1.0
D Pulse 2 Power window motor Door glass operating x Related wiring
or less and
harnesses
B+
Alternates
Power window motor between 1.0
F Pulse 1 Door glass operating (driver’s side)
(driver’s side) or less and
B+
Other 1.0 or less x Power window motor
H Close output Power window motor x Related wiring
While door glass is closing B+ harnesses
Other 1.0 or less x Power window motor
I Open output Power window motor x Related wiring
While door glass is opening B+ harnesses
Power window motor
J Power supply Switch the ignition to ON B+ (driver’s side)
(driver’s side)
K GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less x GND
Sensor
L Power window motor Under any condition 1.0 or less x Related wiring
ground
harnesses

Passenger's side
4. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the
table using a tester.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the B D J
power window subswitch.
* * * * * *
L J * F D B
CLOSE OPEN
F L
: Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
B D F J L
CLOSE
OFF
OPEN
09-12–42
Rear
3. Remove the power window subswitch. (See 09-17-77 REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
table using a tester.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the B D J
power window subswitch.
* * * * * *
L J * F D B
CLOSE OPEN
F L
: Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
B D F J L
CLOSE
OFF
OPEN
POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4. Disconnect the power outer mirror connector.
TAB
6. Push the power outer mirror against the vehicle
and detach the tab while lifting the mirror up to
remove.
End Of Sie
BOLT
3.5—5.0 N·m
{36—50 kgf·cm,
POWER OUTER 31—44 in·lbf}
MIRROR CONNECTOR
POWER OUTER MIRROR INSPECTION

Mirror Glass Adjustment, Retract/Return
09-12–43
ground to the power outer mirror terminals and H I G F
inspect the power outer mirror operation. A D G
x If the power outer mirror does not operate as E H
indicated in the table, replace it. M C F I
LEFT/RIGHT
Mirror operation Terminal ADJUSMENT M
direction RETURACT/RETURN
B+ Ground MOTER
MOTOR
Up G H M
Down H G UP/DOWN
ADJUSMENT MOTER
Left I H D
Right H I
Fold F D
Unfold D F
Heated Outer Mirror

4. Apply battery voltage to power outer mirror
connector terminal A, and connect terminal C to
ground. A
x If not as indicated in the table, or if the A D G
resistance is not within the specification, E H
replace the power outer mirror. C F I
End Of Sie
Resistance
Terminal
Mirror operation
A C
Heater
Resistance : 9—15 Ω
OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL

2. Press area B of the mirror glass so that area A
moves outward. OUTER MIRROR GLASS
09-12–44
3. Detach pin A while lifting up the inside of the
mirror glass holder.
4. Pull the mirror glass holder and remove pins B.
5. Disconnect the connectors. (vehicles with heated PIN B PIN A OUTER MIRROR
outer mirrors) GLASS
6. Remove the mirror glass holder and the outer MIRROR GLASS
mirror glass as a single unit. HOLDER
End Of Sie
A
B
PIN B
B
CONNECTOR
(VEHICLES WITH HEATED
OUTER MIRROR)
OUTER MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION

1. Connect the connectors. (vehicles with heated outer mirrors)
2. Press part A on the outer mirror glass and install
pin A.
3. Press part B on the outer mirror glass and install
pins B. PIN B PIN A OUTER MIRROR
GLASS
End Of Sie MIRROR GLASS
HOLDER
A
B
PIN B
CONNECTOR B
(VEHICLES WITH HEATED
OUTER MIRROR)
OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove the outer mirror glass from the outer mirror. (See 09-12-44 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.)
2. Grasp the upper side of the outer mirror garnish and remove it by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.
OUTER MIRROR
GARNISH
CLIP
CLIP
(1) 09
CLIP
(2)
OUTER MIRROR
CLIP
GARNISH
MIRROR BODY MIRROR BODY
09-12–45
POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Note
x The power outer mirror switch is integrated with the power window main switch.

3. Remove the driver-side front door trim. (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the power outer mirror switch. (See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
End Of Sie
POWER OUTER MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION
R.H.D.
1. Switch the ignition to on.
2. Verify that the power outer mirror switch can be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition is switched off.
x If the power outer mirror cannot be operated for approx. 43 s after the ignition is switched off, or if the
power outer mirror can still be operated after approx. 43 s, replace the power outer mirror switch.
6. Remove the switch panel. (See 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
7. Using a tester, verify that the continuity between the power outer mirror switch terminals is as indicated in the
table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the power outer mirror switch. 09
VEHICLE WITH RETRACT SWITCH
: Continuity
OPERATION 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 2G 2H 2I
UP
DOWN
LH
LEFT
RIGHT
UP
DOWN
RH
LEFT
RIGHT
RETRACT RETRACT
SWITCH
RETURN
09-12–46
B+ AC C
* * * * * * * * 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
1N * * * * * * * * 2H 2F 2D 2B
1N 2F 2C 2B 2H 2D 2A 2I 2G
LH RH LH RH
RETURN RETRACT RETURN RETRACT
RIGHT LEFT DOWN
UP RIGHT LEFT DOWN
2E
09-12–48
Auto-open/close Function For Driver-side
: Continuity
OPERATION 2A 2C 2E 2F 2G 2I 2J 2K 2L
UP
DOWN
LH
LEFT
RIGHT
UP
DOWN
RH
LEFT
RIGHT
RETRACT RETRACT
SWITCH
RETURN
Auto-open/close Function For Driver-side

B+ AC C
* * * * * * * 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A
1N * * * * * * 2L 2J * 2F * *
1N 2A 2F 2K 2C 2I 2E 2J 2L
LH RH LH RH
RETURN RETRACT RETURN RETRACT
RIGHT LEFT DOWN
09
UP RIGHT LEFT DOWN
2G
09-12–49
FILAMENT INSPECTION
2. Turn the rear window defroster switch on.
LEAD OF VOLTMETER
Caution
x Directly touching the rear window PUSH
defroster filament with the lead of the
tester could damage it. Wrap aluminum
foil around the end of the lead and
inspect the filament by touching it with FILAMENT
the foil.
ALUMINUM FOIL
3. Connect the positive lead of the tester to the
positive side of each filament and the negative
lead to ground.
4. Gradually slide the positive lead from the positive
side to the negative side and verify that the
voltage decreases accordingly.
x If the voltage changes rapidly, the filament
has a malfunction. Repair the filament.
Measured part Voltage (Reference) (2) (1)
NEGATIVE POSITIVE
(1) to (2) Approx. 11 V to 0 V SIDE SIDE
End Of Sie
FILAMENT REPAIR
1. Clean the filament using isopropyl alcohol.
2. Attach tape to both sides of the filament.
3. Using a small brush or marking pen, apply silver BROKEN FILAMENT TAPE
paint.
4. After 2—3 min, carefully remove the tape without
damaging the applied area.
Caution
x Do not operate the rear window defroster
until the paint is completely dry. It may
cause other malfunctions if it is used SECTION TO BE REPAIRED
before the paint is dry.
5. Dry the repaired part according to the following

procedure.
x When the room temperature is 25 qC {77 qF} , leave it as it is for 24 h.
x When a hot air blower is used, dry with the 150 qC {302 qF} air for 30 min.
e
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR REMOVAL
2. Remove the rain sensor. (vehicles with rain sensor)(See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector.
AUTO-DIMMING
MIRROR CONNECTOR
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
09-12–50
4. Make a tool as shown in the figure using wire.
APPROX. 2.6mm {0.10in}
Caution
x Using the tool with bare hands can cause
injury. Always wear gloves when using
the tool. APPROX. 30mm {1.2in}
x To prevent damage to the lens, do not
use a flathead screwdriver.
MORE THAN 50mm {2.0in}
5. Insert the tool to the position shown in the figure

and press the center part of the spring.
Caution
x Perform the procedure while being
careful not to damage the lens.
AUTO-DIMMING
MIRROR
TOOL
BASE
TOOL
A A
SEC.A—A SPRING
TOOL
6. Pull out the rearview mirror toward the vehicle

rear.
Caution
x When removing the rearview mirror, it
may hit the headliner and cause a
damage. Hold the rearview mirror with
hands and be careful not to contact it AUTO-DIMMING
with the headliner. MIRROR
TOOL
End Of Sie
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR INSTALLATION

09
1. Install the auto-dimming mirror onto the base.
2. Connect the auto-dimming mirror connector. AUTO-DIMMING
3. Install the rain sensor. (vehicles with rain MIRROR CONNECTOR
sensor)(See09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
AUTO-DIMMING
MIRROR
BASE
09-12–51
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR INSPECTION
1. Remove the rain sensor. (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Measure the voltage at each terminal. (other than terminal A)
x If the voltage is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table (Reference), inspect the parts under
“Inspection item (s)” and related wiring harnesses.
3. Inspect the auto-dimming mirror connector for continuity at terminal A.
4. If the system does not work properly even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have
any malfunction, replace the auto-dimming mirror.
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)
AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
D * B A
Connected
Terminal Signal name Measured condition Voltage (V) Inspection item(s)
to
x BCM
A Power supply BCM Switch the ignition to ON B+
x Related wiring harnesses
Back-up light R range B+ x Back-up light switch/TR
B R range signal switch/TR switch
switch Other than R range 1.0 or less x Related wiring harnesses
x GND
D GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less
End Of Sie
REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL
Vehicles With Rain Sensor
2. Remove the rain sensor. (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Make a tool as shown in the figure using wire.
APPROX. 2.6mm {0.10in}
Caution
x Using the tool with bare hands can cause
injury. Always wear gloves when using
the tool. APPROX. 30mm {1.2in}
x To prevent damage to the lens, do not
use a flathead screwdriver.
MORE THAN 50mm {2.0in}
09-12–52
4. Insert the tool to the position shown in the figure and press the center part of the spring in the direction of
arrows (1), and then pull out the rearview mirror toward in the direction of arrows (2) shown in the figure.
BASE
SPRING
TOOL
SPRING
TOOL
(1)
(2)
09
REAR VIEW TOOL
Caution
x Perform the procedure while being careful not to damage the lens.
x When removing the rearview mirror, it may hit the headliner and cause a damage. Hold the
rearview mirror with hands and be careful not to contact it with the headliner.
09-12–53
Vehicles Without Rain Sensor
1. Push the wire in the direction of the arrow shown
in the figure. REARVIEW MIRROR
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver between the
rearview mirror and base.
WIRE
3. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver to the A

position shown in the figure and press the center REARVIEW MIRROR
part of the spring.
A BASE
SCREW
DRIVER
TAB
SEC. A—A
4. Pull out the rearview mirror toward the vehicle

rear.
End Of Sie
REARVIEW
MIRROR BASE
09-12–54
REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION
1. Install the rearview mirror onto the base.
VEHICLES WITH RAIN SENSOR VEHICLES WITHOUT RAIN SENSOR
REARVIEW REARVIEW
MIRROR BASE MIRROR BASE
2. Install the rain sensor. (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
BASE REMOVAL
(1) Rain sensor (vehicles with rain sensor) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Auto-dimming mirror (vehicles with auto-dimming mirror) (See 09-12-50 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
REMOVAL.)
(3) Rearview mirror (vehicles without auto-dimming mirror) (See 09-12-52 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL.)
3. Wind each end of a wire around a bar.
Warning
x Using the piano wire with bare hands can PIANO WIRE
Note
x Use a long sawing action to spread the work
over the whole length of the piano wire to
prevent it from breaking.
4. Fix one end of the piano wire, and while pulling

the other end, cut the sealant to remove the base.
End Of Sie
BASE INSTALLATION
1. Cut away all of the original sealant using a razor.
Warning
2. Clean and degrease the ceramic coating on the glass and the base.
09
Caution
x Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface. Otherwise, the primer may not
properly bond to the surface of the glass.
3. Apply primer to the bonding area of the glass and the base.
4. Use only glass primer on the glass, and body primer on the base. Allow the primer to dry for approx. 30 min.
09-12–55
5. Apply 3.0 mm {0.12 in} layer of sealant to the
BASE
base.
NOZZLE
3.0 mm
{0.12 in}
SEALANT
6. Center the base in the ceramic coating and press

it onto the glass. 5 mm
{0.2 in} CERAMIC COATING
7. Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any excess
repair sealant.
Hardening time of sealant BASE
Time required
Surface
Temperature until car can be
hardening time
put into service
5 qC {41 qF} Approx. 1.5 h Approx. 12 h
20 qC {68 qF} Approx. 1 h Approx. 4 h
35 qC {95 qF} Approx. 10 min Approx. 2 h

(1) Rearview mirror (vehicles without auto-
dimming mirror)(See 09-12-55 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION.)
(2) Auto-dimming mirror (vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)(See 09-12-51 AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR
INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rain sensor (vehicles with rain sensor)(See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Caution
x Perform the power window initialization procedure at each seat whether the power window main
switch or the power window subswitch is used.
Note
x The power window main switch initialization can be performed only using the power window main switch.
The power window subswitch initialization can be performed using the power window main switch or the
power window switch.
— Negative battery cable disconnected or power window system power supply fuse removed. (perform
initial setting for the switches of all seats.)
— Power window switch connector disconnected. (Perform initial setting for the switch connected with the
connector.)
— Prolonged open/close operation of the power window main or sub switches causes the circuit breaker
to activate and automatic operation is disabled.

2. Press the switch of each window and fully open the door glass.
3. Pull the switch of each window to the manual-up position to fully close the door glass, and keep holding the
switch up at the position for approx. 2 s.
End Of Sie
09-12–56
SEATS
09-13 SEATS
SEATS LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–2 REAR SEAT BACK FRAME
FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–36
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-13–4 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–36
R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–6 5HB, Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–38
FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT REAR SEAT CUSHION
[VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . . 09-13–43
SYSTEM] REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . 09-13–7 REAR SEAT CUSHION TRIM
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–7 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–43
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–8 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK
FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–43
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-13–9 FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION. . . . . 09-13–44
R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–16 REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION. . . . . . 09-13–44
FRONT SEAT BACK INNER FRAME SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . 09-13–45
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-13–22 RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION. . . . . . 09-13–45
FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–45
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-13–24 Passenger-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–45
FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER POWER SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-13–25 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–45
FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER POSITION MEMORY SWITCH
Vehicles With Power Seat System . . . . 09-13–26 POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE
Vehicles Without Power Seat INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–50
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–27 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-13–50
OCCUPANCY SENSOR POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–30 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–52
ACTIVE HEADREST INSPECTION . . . . 09-13–31 POSITION MEMORY SWITCH
REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–52
[5HB/WAGON]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–31 SEAT WARMER SWITCH
REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–53
[5HB/WAGON]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–34 SEAT WARMER SWITCH
REAR SEAT BACK INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–54
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD] . . . . 09-13–34 SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION . . . . 09-13–54
Seat Cushion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–54
Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-13–55
09
09-13–1
SEATS
SEATS LOCATION INDEX
R.H.D.
FRONT SEAT
POWER SEAT MANUAL SEAT
DRIVER-SIDE
1 1
8
3
10 5
6 10
11 7 7 14
12
13 13
PASSENGER-SIDE
POWER SEAT MANUAL SEAT
1 1
8
3
9
9
10
10
7 11 7
13 13
REAR SEAT
16 15
09
17
09-13–2
SEATS
.
1 Front seat 11 Power seat switch

(See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/ (See 09-13-45 POWER SEAT SWITCH
INSTALLATION.) INSPECTION.)
(See 09-13-7 FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT 12 Position memory switch
[VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER SEAT SYSTEM] (See 09-13-49 POSITION MEMORY SWITCH
(See 09-13-9 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM (See 09-13-52 POSITION MEMORY SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) INSPECTION.)
(See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT BACK INNER FRAME
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 13 Front seat slide adjuster
(See 09-13-31 ACTIVE HEADREST INSPECTION.) (See 09-13-25 FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER
2 Seat warmer unit
(See 09-13-54 SEAT WARMER UNIT 14 Seat warmer switch
INSPECTION.) (See 09-13-53 SEAT WARMER SWITCH
3 Slide motor (See 09-13-54 SEAT WARMER SWITCH
(See 09-13-45 SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION.) INSPECTION.)
4 Rear tilt motor 15 Rear seat back
(See 09-13-44 REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION.) (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/
5 Position memory control module INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(See 09-13-52 POSITION MEMORY CONTROL (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
(See 09-13-50 POSITION MEMORY CONTROL (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/
MODULE INSPECTION.) ASSEMBLY [5HB/WAGON].)
6 Front tilt motor (See 09-13-36 REAR SEAT BACK FRAME
(See 09-13-44 FRONT TILT MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) 16 Rear side seat back
7 Front seat cushion trim (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/
(See 09-13-24 FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM INSTALLATION.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 17 Rear seat cushion
8 Recliner motor (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/
(See 09-13-45 RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/
9 Occupancy sensor INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
(See 09-13-30 OCCUPANCY SENSOR (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/
INSPECTION.) ASSEMBLY [5HB/WAGON].)
(See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION TRIM
10 Front seat side cover REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-13-26 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER
ie
FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Handling a front seat (with built-in side air bag) improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the
air bag, which may seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat
(with built-in side air bag). (See 08-10-3 AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
09-13–3
SEATS
Caution
x After removing a front seat, do not operate the slider lever. If the slider lever is operated, the left
and right slide positions will deviate, and the slide adjuster may be damaged after the front seat is
installed.
x Verify that there are no malfunctions in the sliding mechanism after installing a front seat.
x When performing the procedure with a front seat removed from the vehicle, perform the procedure
on a clean rag so as not to damage or soil the seat.
Note
x When removing the front seat out of the vehicle or putting it back in, it can be performed smoothly by
removing the headrest.
R.H.D.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more.
3. Using a fastener remover, widen the cover in the
direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure to
release the tabs, then raise the cover in the
(1)
COVER
(1) (1)
(2)
(1)
TAB TAB
4. Using a fastener remover, widen the cover in the

direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure to
release the tabs, then pull the cover in the (3)
(4)
COVER
(3)
(3) (3)
TAB TAB
09-13–5
SEATS
5. Push the cover in the direction of arrow (5), widen
the cover in the direction of arrow (6) shown in the COVER
(5) (6)
figure to release the tabs.
(5) (6)
6. Remove the cover in the direction of arrow (7).
(6)
TAB
(6)
(7)
7. Disconnect the connector.

8. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat.
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. BOLT
End Of Sie
CONNECTOR
BOLT
BOLT
BOLT
BOLT : 37—54 N·m
{3.8—5.5 kgf·m,
28—39 ft·lbf}
FRONT SEAT BACK COMPONENT [VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER SEAT SYSTEM] REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Warning
x Handling a front seat improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may
seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat. (See 08-10-3 AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Caution
installed.
Removal
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1 min or more. 09
3. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the headrest.
5. Remove the front seat side cover. (See 09-13-26 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-13–7
SEATS
6. Cut the band securing the wiring harness.
BAND
7. Remove the clip.
R
CLIP
R
8. Cut the band securing the side air bag wiring AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS
harness.
BAND R
9. Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat FRONT

back component. SEAT BACK
COMPONENT
BOLT BOLT
Installation
1. Install the bolts, then install the front seat back FRONT
component. SEAT BACK
COMPONENT
BOLT
BOLT : 37—54 N·m
{3.8—5.5 kgf·m, 28—39 ft·lbf} BOLT
09-13–8
SEATS
2. Install the band, while tighten the side air bag AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS
wiring harness.
BAND R
3. Install the band with the end pointed to the front.

4. Cut off the end of the band at the position shown
CUT
in the figure. 5 mm {0.2 in}
OR MORE
R BAND
5. Install the clip.

BAND
6. Install the band, while tighten the wiring harness.
R
End Of Sie
CLIP
R
FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Handling a front seat improperly can accidentally operate (deploy) the air bag, which may
seriously injure you. Read the service warnings before handling a front seat. (See 08-10-3 AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Caution
installed.
09
09-13–9
SEATS
R.H.D.
Removal
4. Remove the headrest.
5. Cut the band A securing the wiring harness.
BAND A
6. Remove the clip B.
R
CLIP B
R
7. Cut the band securing the side air bag wiring SIDE AIR BAG
harness. WIRING HARNESS
BAND R
8. Remove the clip C then remove the lumber

support lever.
LUMBER
SUPPORT LEVER
CLIP C
9. Slide hook A in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in

the figure to detach it from hook B.
HOOK B
HOOK A
(1) (3)
(2)
09-13–16
SEATS
10. Open the fastener.
11. Pull out the side air bag wiring harness from the
POLE GUIDE
hole of the seat back trim and seat back pad by
pulling it in the direction of arrow (4) shown in the
figure. (6)
12. Partially peal back the front seat back trim, FASTENER
release the pole guide tabs in the direction of
arrow (5) shown in the figure, then pull the pole
(5) (5) NUT
guide out in the direction of arrow (6). 8—12 N·m
13. Remove the nut. TAB {82—122 kgf·cm,
71—106 in·lbf}
(4)
SIDE AIR BAG

WIRING HARNESS
HOLE
14. Press in the holder bracket to the seat back pad

being careful not to catch the frame spring.
HOLDER BRACKET
FRAME SPRING
15. Pull out part A shown in the figure to the front.
16. Remove the seat back trim and the seat back pad
as a single unit from the seat frame by pulling
them in the direction of the arrow.
SEAT BACK PAD
SEAT BACK TRIM 09

SEAT FRAM
09-13–17
SEATS
17. Partially peal back the seat back trim from the
seat back pad, remove rings C in the order of (7),
(8), (9) shown in the figure, then remove the seat
back trim.
(8) (9)
(7)
SEAT BACK PAD
RINGS C SEAT BACK TRIM
Installation
1. Install the seat back trim to the seat back pad,
install the rings C in the order of (1), (2), (3)
shown in the figure, then install the seat back trim.
(2) (1)
(3)
SEAT BACK PAD
RINGS C SEAT BACK TRIM
2. Install the seat back trim and the seat back pad as
a single unit from the seat frame by pushing them
in the direction of the arrow SEAT BACK PAD
SEAT BACK TRIM
SEAT FRAM
09-13–18
SEATS
3. Pass holder bracket A through slit A of the seat
back pad.
FRONT
SLIT A SEAT BACK PAD
SEAT BACK TRIM

SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
HOLDER BRACKET A
Caution
x Set the holder bracket A with the sleeve
HOLDER BRACKET A HOLDER BRACKET A
not caught in the seat frame spring.
GOOD NO GOOD
4. Push the part A shown in the figure to the rear.
09
09-13–19
SEATS
5. Pass holder bracket B through slit B of the seat
back pad.
Caution
x Install it without twisting the sleeve.
FRONT
SEAT BACK PAD
SEAT BACK TRIM

SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
FRAM
HOLDER BRACKET B SLIT B
6. Assemble the holder bracket A to the frame in the HOLDER BRACKET A HOLDER BRACKET B
order of (4), (5) shown in the figure.
7. Install the nut.
(4) (5)
NUT
8—12 N·m
{82—122 kgf·cm,
71—106 in·lbf}
8. Install the pole guide in the direction of arrow

9. Shut the fastener.
POLE GUIDE
FASTENER
NUT
8—12 N·m
{82—122 kgf·cm,
71—106 in·lbf}
HOLE
SIDE AIR BAG

MODULE HARNESS
09-13–20
SEATS
10. Slide hook A in the order of (6), (7), (8) shown in
the figure to install it to hook B
HOOK B
HOOK A
(8) (7) (6)
11. Install the clip C to the lumber support lever, then

install the lumber support lever.
LUMBER
SUPPORT LEVER
CLIP C
12. Install the band, while tighten the side air bag SIDE AIR BAG
wiring harness. WIRING HARNESS
BAND R
13. Install the band with the end pointed to the front.
14. Cut the band end so that the length of the band
end is 5 mm {0.2 in} or less from the securing CUT
point. 5 mm {0.2 in}
OR LESS
BAND
R
09
15. Install the clip B.
BAND A
16. Install the band A, while tighten the wiring
R
harness.
End Of Sie
CLIP B
R
09-13–21
SEATS
FRONT SEAT BACK INNER FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
Caution
installed.

3. Remove the front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Remove the front seat back trim. (See 09-13-9 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
5. Remove the nuts and screw then lumber unit.
6. Remove the springs. NUT
SCREW LUMBER UNIT
NUT NUT:8—10 N·m

{82—101 kgf·cm,71—88 in·lbf}
SPRING
09-13–22
SEATS
RIGHT-SIDE LEFT-SIDE
BOLT BOLT
BOLT:8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm,71—88 in·lbf}

RIGHT-SIDE LEFT-SIDE
BOLT BOLT
BOLT:8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm,71—88 in·lbf}
09
09-13–23
SEATS
9. Remove the front seat back inner frame in the direction of arrow shown in the figure.
FRONT SEAT BACK

INNER FRAME

End Of Sie
FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
Caution
installed.

4. Remove the side cover. (See 09-13-26 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-13–24
SEATS
5. Detach hook A by sliding it in the order of (1), (2),
and (3) as shown in the figure.
6. Detach hook B and C in the direction of the arrow
HOOK A
(3)
(2)
(1)
HOOK B
HOOK B
HOOK C
7. Remove the front seat cushion trim and the front

seat cushion pad from the front seat frame as a
single unit. FRONT SEAT CUSHION
8. Remove rings C in the order of (4), (5), (6) and (7) (4) (7) (5) (6) FRONT SEAT
as shown in the figure, then remove the front seat CUSHION TRIM
cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad in the RINGS C
direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
End Of Sie
FRONT SEAT CUSHION PAD
FRONT SEAT SLIDE ADJUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
(with built-in side air bag). (See 08-10-3 AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) 09
Caution
installed.
1. Switch the igniting to off.

(1) Front seat (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front seat side cover (See 09-13-26 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-13–25
SEATS
(3) Front seat cushion (See 09-13-24 FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front seat back component (Vehicles without power seat system) (See 09-13-7 FRONT SEAT BACK
COMPONENT [VEHICLES WITHOUT POWER SEAT SYSTEM] REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Front seat back trim (Vehicles with power seat system) (See 09-13-9 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM
(6) Front seat back inner frame (Vehicles with power seat system) (See 09-13-22 FRONT SEAT BACK INNER
FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Position memory control module (Vehicles with power seat system) (See 09-13-52 POSITION MEMORY
4. Remove the front seat slide adjuster.
End Of Sie
FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Vehicles With Power Seat System
2. Pull the power seat switch knobs in the direction of arrow, while remove the hooks.
POWER SEAT SWITCH KNOB HOOK

HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
POWER SEAT SWITCH KNOB
09-13–26
SEATS
3. Pull the front seat side cover in the order of (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure to disengage the hooks and tab.
REVERSE
COVER
(3)
FRONT SEAT TAB
SIDE COVER
FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT

SIDE COVER SIDE COVER
(1)
(2)
HOOK
HOOK
4. Remove the front seat side cover.

5. Disconnect the seat position memory switch connector.
Vehicles Without Power Seat System

Vehicles with dial type recliner knob
1. Operate the lift lever in the direction of arrow (1) (1)
shown in the figure. (Driver's seat) (Vehicles with
seat lifter) LIFT LEVER
2. Insert a fastener remover from the position of
arrow (2) shown in the figure, and remove the lift
(2)
lever cover by disengaging the tab. (Driver's seat) LIFT LEVER COVER
(Vehicles with seat lifter)
TAB
3. Remove the screws, then remove the lift lever in

the direction of the arrow. (Driver's side) (Vehicles
with seat lifter)
LIFT LEVER
09
SCREW
09-13–27
SEATS
4. Remove the clip then remove the recliner knob. RECLINER KNOB
CLIP

6. Pull the front seat side cover in the order of (1),
(2), (3) shown in the figure to disengage the
hooks and tab.
SCREW
REVERSE
COVER
(3)
FRONT SEAT TAB

SIDE COVER
FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT

SIDE COVER
SIDE COVER
(1)
(2)
HOOK
HOOK

09-13–28
SEATS
Vehicles with lever type recliner knob
1. Operate the lift lever in the direction of arrow (1) (1)
shown in the figure. (Driver's seat) (Vehicles with
seat lifter) LIFT LEVER
2. Insert a fastener remover from the position of
arrow (2) shown in the figure, and remove the lift
(2)
lever cover by disengaging the tab. (Driver's seat) LIFT LEVER COVER
(Vehicles with seat lifter)
TAB
3. Remove the screws, then remove the lift lever in

the direction of the arrow. (Driver's side) (Vehicles
with seat lifter)
LIFT LEVER
SCREW
4. After operating the recliner knob in the upward

direction (3), cut the area indicated in the figure, (3)
then remove the recliner knob in the direction of
arrow (4). RECLINER (4)
KNOB R
CUT
SCREW 09
09-13–29
SEATS
6. Pull the front seat side cover in the order of (5), (6), (7) shown in the figure to disengage the hooks and tab.
REVERSE
COVER
(7)
FRONT SEAT TAB

SIDE COVER
FRONT SEAT
FRONT SEAT
SIDE COVER
SIDE COVER
(5)
(6)
HOOK
HOOK

End Of Sie
OCCUPANCY SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the occupancy sensor connector.
2. Verify that the continuity between the occupancy
sensor terminals is as indicated in the table. A B
B A
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the

passenger side front seat cushion pad. (See 09-
13-24 FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/ : Continuity
INSTALLATION.)
Terminal
End Of Sie Condition
A B
Seat one person in the
front passenger seat
Seat no person in the
front passenger seat
09-13–30
SEATS
ACTIVE HEADREST INSPECTION
1. Push the bottom of front seat back in the direction of arrow shown in the figure.
FRONT SEAT BACK
PUSH THE DIRECTION OF ARROW: 98 N·m {10 kgf·m,72 ft·lbf}
2. While inspecting for move the front seat back.

Sie
REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON]
1. Remove the adjust cover and bolts A.
BOLT A
22—30 N·m
{2.3—3.0 kgf·m, 16—22 ft·lbf}
09
ADJUST COVER
09-13–31
SEATS
2. Disconnect the remote wire.
3. Lift the rear seat cushion, then remove the rear CASE
hinge installation bolts.
REMOTE WIRE
REAR SEAT
CUSHION
REAR HINGE
INSTALLATION
BOLT
40—51 N·m
{4.0—5.2 kgf·m, 29—38 ft·lbf}
09-13–32
SEATS
BOLT B
40—51 N·m {4.0—5.2 kgf·m, 29—38 ft·lbf}
5. Remove the bolts C and nuts D.
NUT D
BOLT C BOLT C
NUT D BOLT C BOLT C BOLT C, NUT D: 40—51 N·m {4.0—5.2 kgf·cm, 29—38 in·lbf}
6. Remove the rear seat.
09-13–33
SEATS
End Of Sie
REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [5HB/WAGON]
3
C
D
C B 2
A 1
D
B
1 Hinge cover 3 Seat back

2 Bolt 4 Rear seat cushion
End Of Sie
REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
2. Remove the rear buckle installation bolt. (See 08-11-8 REAR BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Fold the rear seat back.
09-13–34
SEATS
4. Remove bolts and nuts.
NUT
BOLT BOLT BOLT
BOLT BOLT,NUT: 40—51 N·m {4.0—5.2 kgf·m, 29—38 ft·lbf}

NUT
5. Remove the rear seat back.
09-13–35
SEATS
REAR SEAT BACK BRACKET BOLT
BOLT,NUT: 40—51 N·m {4.0—5.2 kgf·m, 29—38 ft·lbf}
7. Remove the rear seat back bracket from the rear seat back by pulling the rear seat back bracket in the direction
of the arrow shown in the figure.
End Of Sie
REAR SEAT BACK FRAME REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
3. Remove the rear seat back. (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
4. Remove the bolt, then remove the washer, bushing, hinge, and the cover.
WASHER BUSHING
BOLT
HINGE
HINGE BUSHING
COVER
WASHER
COVER BOLT
BOLT: 37—54 N·m {3.8—5.5 kgf·m, 27—39 ft·lbf}
09-13–36
SEATS
5. Remove the child-restraint seat anchor covers while remove the hooks.
HOOK
HOOK
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT
ANCHOR COVER
HOOK
6. Peel the rear seat back mat and remove the fasteners.
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER REAR SEAT BACK MAT
7. Remove the rear seat back mat.
09-13–37
SEATS
8. Remove the nuts then remove the rear seat
center armrest.
NUT
8—10 N·m
{80—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf}
REAR SEAT CENTER ARMREST
9. Peal back the seat back trim, release the pole

POLE SEAT BACK
guide tabs in the direction of arrow (1) shown in (2)
GUIDE TRIM
the figure, then pull out the pole guides in the
(1) (1)
TAB TAB
POLE
GUIDE
SEAT BACK FRAM
SEAT BACK FRAM

SEAT BACK
TRIM
10. Remove the seat back frame from the seat back
pad by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.
SEAT BACK FRAME
SEAT BACK PAD
5HB, Wagon
1. Remove the rear seat. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
3. Remove the rear seat back. (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [5HB/WAGON].)
09-13–38
SEATS
4. Remove the child-restraint seat anchor covers while remove the hooks.
CHILD-RESTRAINT SEAT
ANCHOR COVER
HOOK
HOOK
5. Remove the striker cover while remove the hook A, B.
HOOK A HOOK B
HOOK B
HOOK A
STRIKER COVER
09-13–39
SEATS
6. Remove the rear seat back mat, while remove the fasteners.
REAR SEAT BACK MAT
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
7. Remove the nut then remove the rear seat

armrest.
NUT
8—10 N·m
{80—110 kgf·cm,70—95 in·lbf}
REAR SEAT CENTER ARMREST
09-13–40
SEATS
8. Peal back the seat back trim, release the pole
guide tabs in the direction of arrow (1) shown in (2) POLE SEAT BACK
GUIDE TRIM
the figure, then pull out the pole guides in the
(1) (1)
TAB TAB
POLE
GUIDE
SEAT BACK FRAM
SEAT BACK SEAT BACK FRAM

TRIM
9. Release the tabs of the rod by pulling it in the

direction of arrow (3) shown in the figure.
LOD
(3)
TAB
LOD LOD
TAB TAB
LOD
(3)
TAB
09-13–41
SEATS
10. While releasing the hooks C, D of the belt cover in the direction of arrow (4), (5) shown in the figure.
BELT COVER HOOK C
(5)
HOOK C
(4)
HOOK D
HOOK D
11. Remove the seat back frame from the seat back
pad by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.
SEAT BACK FRAME
SEAT BACK PAD
12. Remove the nut, then remove the rear seat belt.
13. Install in the reverse order of removal. NUT
39—78 N·m
End Of Sie {4.0—7.9 kgf·m,29—57 ft·lbf}
REAR SEAT BELT
09-13–42
SEATS
REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD]
1. Detach the hooks from the grommets by pulling
the rear seat cushion in the direction of the arrow
HOOK
GROMMETS
2. From the backside of the seat, detach the hook in

the direction of arrow (1) shown in the figure, then
remove the rear seat cushion by pulling it in the
direction of arrow (2). (2)
End Of Sie
HOOK
(1)
REAR SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove rings C, then remove the seat cushion
trim from the seat cushion pad.
End Of Sie
RINGS C
REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD])
09-13–43
SEATS
2. Remove the bolt.
TAB
REAR SIDE SEAT BACK
BOLT
BOLT :40—51 N·m {4.1—5.2 kgf·m, 30—37 ft·lbf}
3. Remove the rear side seat back, while remove the tab in the indicated of arrow shown in the figure.
ie
FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the front tilt motor connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the front tilt motor
terminals and inspect the front tilt motor
operation.
D B
x If not as specified, replace the front tilt motor.
G *
Connection
Motor operation M H F D B
B+ GND
Up B D
DOWN UP
Down D B
End Of Sie
REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION

1. Disconnect the rear tilt motor connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the rear tilt motor
terminals and inspect the rear tilt motor operation.
x If not as specified, replace the rear tilt motor.
D B
Connection
Motor operation G *
B+ GND
M H F D B
Up B D
Down D B DOWN UP
End Of Sie
09-13–44
SEATS
SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the slide motor connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the slide motor
terminals and inspect the slide motor operation.
x If not as specified, replace the seat cushion
D B
frame.
G *
Connection
Motor operation M H F D B
B+ GND
Forward D B
FORWARD BACKWARD
Backward B D
End Of Sie
RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION

Driver-side
1. Disconnect the recliner motor connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the recliner
motor terminals and inspect the recliner motor
operation.
A E
x If not as specified, replace the recliner motor. B
E * A
Connection B
Motor operation F D B
M
B+ GND
Forward A E
FORWARD BACKWARD
Backward E A
Passenger-side
1. Disconnect the recliner motor connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the recliner
motor terminals and inspect the recliner motor
operation.
B A
x If not as specified, replace the recliner motor.
Connection A
Motor operation M B
B+ GND
Forward B A
FORWARD BACKWARD
Backward A B
End Of Sie
POWER SEAT SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Disconnect the power seat switch connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the power seat switch connector terminals using an ohmmeter.
x If not as specified, replace the power seat switch.
09-13–45
SEATS
R.H.D.
8WAY POWER SEAT
: Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
A B C D E G H J L
Forward
Recliner
Backward
Forward
Slide
Backward
Up
Front tilt
Down
Up
Rear tilt
Down
DOWN DOWN * * G E C A
UP L J H * D B
UP
FORWARD FORWARD
E C G D H J L B
FRONT TILT SLIDE REAR TILT RECLINER

BACKWARD BACKWARD
09-13–48
SEATS
4WAY POWER SEAT

: Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
A B D G L K
Forward
Recliner Off
Backward
Forward
Slide Off
Backward
A
K
K * G * * A
FORWARD FORWARD BACKWARD L * * * D B
BACKWARD
D G B L
RECLINER SLIDE
End Of Sie
POSITION MEMORY SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
(with built-in side air bag). (See 08-10-3 AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See 08-10-5 AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
Caution
installed.

4. Remove the front seat side cover. (See 09-13-26 FRONT SEAT SIDE COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-13–49
SEATS
5. Remove the connector and the screws, then
remove the position memory switch.
End Of Sie POSITION MEMORY SWITCH
SCREW
SCREW CONNECTOR
POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION

1. Measure the voltage at each terminal is as indicated in the Terminal Voltage Tables.
“Inspection item (s)” and related wiring harnesses.
2. If the system does not work properly even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do not have
any malfunction, replace the position memory control module.
POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE

1O 1M * * 1G * * 1A * 2M 2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 3O 3M 3K 3I 3G 3E 3C 3A
* * * 1J 1H 1F 1D * * 2N 2L 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B 3P 3N 3L 3J 3H 3F 3D 3B
Because this terminal is for communication,
Keyless entry x BCM
1A BCM good/no good judgment by terminal voltage
signal x Related wiring harness
is not possible.
High output:
Measure the waveform B+
Vehicle speed x Instrument cluster
1D Instrument cluster while driving using the
input Low output: x Related wiring harness
oscilloscope.
1.0 or less
Driver-side door open: Inspect for continuity
to ground.
Front door latch and B+ x Front door latch and lock
Door open/
1F lock actuator (Door actuator (Door close on)
closed Driver-side door closed: Inspect for
close on) x Related wiring harness
continuity to ground.
1.0 or less
Switch the ignition to ON B+
x BCM
1G IG1 BCM Switch the ignition to off or
1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
ACC
1H Signal GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Related wiring harness
1J Power GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Related wiring harness
x ROOM 15 A fuse
1M Power supply ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition B+
x P. SEAT 30 A fuse
1O Power supply P. SEAT 30 A fuse Under any condition B+
Press the slide switch to
Slide switch 1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2A Power seat switch forward
input (forward) x Related wiring harness
Other 5.0
Slide switch Press the slide switch to
1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2B input Power seat switch backward
(backward) Other 5.0
09-13–50
SEATS
Press the front tilt switch to
Front tilt switch 1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2C Power seat switch up
input (up) x Related wiring harness
Other 5.0
Press the front tilt switch to
Front tilt switch 1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2D Power seat switch down
input (down) x Related wiring harness
Other 5.0
Press the rear tilt switch to
Rear tilt switch 1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2E Power seat switch up
input (up) x Related wiring harness
Other 5.0
Press the rear tilt switch to
Rear tilt switch 1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2F Power seat switch down
input (down) x Related wiring harness
Other 5.0
Press the recliner switch to
Recliner switch 1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2G Power seat switch forward
input (forward) x Related wiring harness
Other 5.0
Recliner switch Press the recliner switch to
1.0 or less x Power seat switch
2H input Power seat switch backward
(backward) Other 5.0
Signal GND x Power seat switch
2I Power seat switch Under any condition 1.0 or less
input x Related wiring harness
Signal GND Position memory x Position memory switch
2J Under any condition 1.0 or less
input switch x Related wiring harness
Set switch Position memory Press the set switch 1.0 or less x Position memory switch
2K
input switch Other 5.0 x Related wiring harness
Memory switch Position memory Press the memory switch 1 1.0 or less x Position memory switch
2L
1 input switch Other 5.0 x Related wiring harness
2M
2N
Slide motor While slide motor is
B+ x Slide motor
3A output Slide motor moving to forward
(forward) Other 1.0 or less
Slide motor While slide motor is
B+ x Slide motor
3B output Slide motor moving to backward
(backward) Other 1.0 or less
While front tilt motor is
Front tilt motor B+ x Front tilt motor
3C Front tilt motor moving to up
output (up) x Related wiring harness
Other 1.0 or less
While front tilt motor is
Front tilt motor B+ x Front tilt motor
3D Front tilt motor moving to down
output (down) x Related wiring harness
Other 1.0 or less
While rear tilt motor is
Rear tilt motor B+ x Rear tilt motor
3E Rear tilt motor moving to up
output (up) x Related wiring harness
Other 1.0 or less
While rear tilt motor is
Rear tilt motor B+ x Rear tilt motor
3F Rear tilt motor moving to down
output (down) x Related wiring harness
Other 1.0 or less
Recliner motor While recliner motor is
B+ x Recliner motor
3G output Recliner motor moving to forward
(forward) Other 1.0 or less
Recliner motor While recliner motor is
B+ x Recliner motor
3H output Recliner motor moving to backward
(backward) Other 1.0 or less
Because this terminal is for signal, good/no
Position x Position sensor (slide)
3I Position sensor (slide) good judgment by terminal voltage is not
sensor (slide)+ x Related wiring harnesses
possible.
09-13–51
SEATS
Position x Position sensor (slide)
3J Position sensor (slide) good judgment by terminal voltage is not
sensor (slide)- x Related wiring harnesses
possible.
Position x Position sensor (tilt)
3K Position sensor (tilt) good judgment by terminal voltage is not
sensor (tilt)+ x Related wiring harnesses
possible.
Position x Position sensor (tilt)
3L Position sensor (tilt) good judgment by terminal voltage is not
sensor (tilt)- x Related wiring harnesses
possible.
Position x Position sensor (lift)
3M Position sensor (lift) good judgment by terminal voltage is not
sensor (lift)+ x Related wiring harnesses
possible.
Position x Position sensor (lift)
3N Position sensor (lift) good judgment by terminal voltage is not
sensor (lift)- x Related wiring harnesses
possible.
Position Because this terminal is for signal, good/no x Position sensor
Position sensor
3O sensor good judgment by terminal voltage is not (reclining)
(reclining)
(reclining)+ possible. x Related wiring harnesses
Position Because this terminal is for signal, good/no x Position sensor
Position sensor
3P sensor good judgment by terminal voltage is not (reclining)
(reclining)
(reclining)- possible. x Related wiring harnesses
End Of Sie
POSITION MEMORY CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Operate the power seat switch and move the seat cushion forward and upward.
4. Remove the driver-side front seat. (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Connector 1
2 Screw
3 Position memory control module

End Of Sie
3 2
POSITION MEMORY SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Disconnect the position memory switch connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the position
memory switch connector terminals.
x If not as specified, replace the position A
SET
memory switch. (See 09-13-49 POSITION B
MEMORY SWITCH REMOVAL/ MEMORY 1
INSTALLATION.) C
E D C B A
MEMORY 2
D
MEMORY 3
E
09-13–52
SEATS
: Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
A B C D E
Set switch on
Memory switch 1 on
Memory switch 2 on
Memory switch 3 on
Off
SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the upper panel. (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the decoration panel. (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the center panel lower. (See 09-17-33 CENTER PANEL LOWER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
5. Squeeze the tabs of seat warmer switch and pull it outward to remove it.
TAB
TAB
SEAT WARMER SWITCH
TAB
6. Remove the seat warmer switch.

End Of Sie
09-13–53
SEATS
SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer
J F
switch terminal J, and connect terminal H using
an ohmmeter.
x If not as specified, replace the seat warmer
switch. (See 09-13-53 SEAT WARMER R1 R2
* * * * *
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) LO
HI J H F D B
B
LO
HI
H B D
2. Apply battery voltage to seat warmer switch

terminal J, and connect terminal B to ground. : Continuity
3. Seat warmer switch to Lo or Hi position. : Resistance
4. Verify that the LED illuminates.
x If there is any malfunction, replace the seat Terminal
Switch position
warmer switch. (See 09-13-53 SEAT H J
R1
WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/ LO
INSTALLATION.) R2
HI
5. Apply battery voltage to seat warmer switch
terminal F, and connect terminal D to ground. OFF
6. Verify that the LED illuminates. R1: 681 ǡ R2: 182 ǡ
x If there is any malfunction, replace the seat
warmer switch. (See 09-13-53 SEAT
WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION
Seat Cushion
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait 1min or more.
3. Remove the seat cushion trim. (See 09-13-24 FRONT SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the seat warmer connector and seat
cushion warmer to seat back warmer connector.
SEAT WARMER
CONNECTOR
SEAT CUSHION WARMER

TO SEAT BACK WARMER
CONNECTOR
09-13–54
SEATS
5. Connect a jumper wire to the connector for the
seat cushion warmer to seat back warmer
connector.
6. While inspecting for continuity between the
connector terminals A and B, use a dryer to warm
HOT AIR
the thermostat of the seat warmer unit on seat
cushion.
THERMOSTAT
A SEAT CUSHION WARMER

TO SEAT BACK WARMER
B CONNECTOR
7. When the ohmmeter indicates that there is no

continuity, turn off the dryer, then use a
thermometer to measure the temperature of the
thermostat.
8. Verify that the temperature is approx. 37 qC {99
qF}.
THERMOMETER
THERMOSTAT
9. Using an ohmmeter, verify that there is continuity

between the seat warmer unit connector
A B
terminals when temperature drops to approx. 28
qC {82 qF}.
D C B A
D C

seat cushion pad. (See 09-13-24 FRONT : Continuity
SEAT CUSHION TRIM REMOVAL/ Terminal
Thermostat
INSTALLATION.)
temperature A D
More than approx. 37 ˚C
{99 ˚F}
Less than approx. 28 ˚C
{82 ˚F}
Seat Back
09-13–55
SEATS
3. Remove the seat back trim. (See 09-13-9 FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between terminals A and
B is as indicated in the table.
A
A
B

seat back pad. (See 09-13-9 FRONT SEAT : Continuity
BACK TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) Terminal
End Of Sie Test condition
A B
Under any condition
09-13–56
SECURITY AND LOCKS
09-14 SECURITY AND LOCKS

PAGE 1 OF 3
REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
SECURITY AND LOCKS ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–47
LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–4 LH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–48
Locks and Openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–4 RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–49
Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH
System [Advanced Keyless Entry And INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–49
Push Button Start System]. . . . . . . . . 09-14–6 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–50
System [Keyless Entry System] . . . . . 09-14–8 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK
Theft-deterrent System . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–9 ACTUATOR
FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–52
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–10 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK
Outer handle bracket ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–53
Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–12 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR
REAR OUTER HANDLE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–53
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–13 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH
Outer handle bracket INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–54
Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–17 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–54
INNER HANDLE WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–55
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–18 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK MOTOR
Front Inner Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–18 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–56
Rear Inner Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–18 LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE
BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER CONTROL MODULE
Bonnet Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–18 LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL
Bonnet Release Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–20 MODULE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–57
BONNET RELEASE CABLE Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–58
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–21 LIFTGATE LATCH MANUAL RELEASE
R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–22 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–58
BONNET LATCH SWITCH 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–58
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–23 WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–59
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE LIFTGATE LATCH POSITION SWITCH
R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–25 RETURN SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . 09-14–61
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK MOTOR
Fuel-filler Lid Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–27 LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER
Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever . . . . . . . . . 09-14–30 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–63
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–63
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–31 WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–63
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LIFTGATE LOCK MOTOR
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–34 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–64
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK TRUNK LID LATCH MANUAL RELEASE
ACTUATOR PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–65
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–35 TRUNK LID LATCH AND
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK LOCK ACTUATOR
ACTUATOR INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–37 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–65
R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–40 TRUNK LID LATCH AND LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ACTUATOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–66
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–41 TRUNK LID LOCK ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–66
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–43 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–67
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–44 TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER
Font Door Lock-link Inspection . . . . . . 09-14–44 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–68
Rear Door Lock-link Inspection . . . . . . 09-14–45 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–47 KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
REAR DOOR LATCH AND START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–68
LOCK ACTUATOR KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–47 INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–69
09-14–1
SECURITY AND LOCKS
PAGE 2 OF 3
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–69 Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer
Generated pulse (reference) . . . . . . . . 09-14–73 System-Related Parts
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–91
CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED M-MDS Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . 09-14–92
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON No.1 Additional Key Programming
START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–73 Procedure (Using the M-MDS) . . . . . . 09-14–92
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM READING No.2 Programming Procedure Due to
FREEZE FRAME DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–74 PCM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–94
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM CLEARING No.3 Programming Procedure Due to
FREEZE FRAME DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–74 Steering Lock Unit Replacement. . . . . 09-14–95
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND No.4 Programming Procedure Due to
TILT SENSOR Keyless Control Module
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–74 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–97
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–74 No.5 Programming Procedure Due to
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–75 Simultaneous Replacement of
WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–75 Immobilizer System-related Parts (PCM,
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND TILT Keyless Control Module, and Steering
SENSOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–76 Lock Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–100
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–76 No.6 Programming/Clearing Procedure
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–76 of Auxiliary Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–103
WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–77 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–78 REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
Continuity Inspection Of Short ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
Wiring Harness Connector. . . . . . . . . 09-14–78 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–105
KEYLESS RECEIVER KEYLESS ANTENNA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–78 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14–79 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–106
Terminal voltage table (reference) . . . . 09-14–79 Vehicle Interior, Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–106
KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION Vehicle Interior, Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–106
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND Vehicle Interior, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–107
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14–80 Vehicle Exterior, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–107
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–80 Vehicle Exterior, Driver's Door/
TRANSMITTER BATTERY Passenger's Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–108
REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY KEYLESS BEEPER
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–80 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED
TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . 09-14–81 START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–109
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION
PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–83 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–109
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–83 REQUEST SWITCH
Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED
System-Related Parts KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–83 START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–110
M-MDS Connecting Procedure . . . . . . 09-14–83 WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–110
No.1 Additional Key Programming TOUCH SENSOR
Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys) . . . 09-14–84 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED
No. 2 Additional Key Programming KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
Procedure (Using the M-MDS). . . . . . 09-14–85 START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–111
No.3 Additional Key Programming REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION
Procedure Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–86 [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . . 09-14–111
PCM Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–87 WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–112
No.5 Programming Procedure Due to CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING
Instrument Cluster Replacement . . . . 09-14–88 PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS
No.6 Programming Procedure Due to ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
Simultaneous Replacement of SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–113
Immobilizer System-related Parts COIL ANTENNA
(PCM and Instrument Cluster) . . . . . . 09-14–89 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED ENTRY SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–114
PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED ADVANCED KEY BATTERY
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS
START SYSTEM]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–91 ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–91 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–114
09-14–2
SECURITY AND LOCKS
PAGE 3 OF 3
COIL ANTENNA Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED Harness Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–118
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
START SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–115 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–118
CLEARING ADVANCED KEY 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–118
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–118
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-14–116 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
ADVANCED KEY ID CODE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–119
REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–119
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–119
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–116 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–120
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-14–117 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION . . . . 09-14–117 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-14–120
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-14–117
09-14–3
SECURITY AND LOCKS
SECURITY AND LOCKS LOCATION INDEX
Locks and Openers
1 3 4 5
5HB
6
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
10 10
4SD WGN
09-14–4
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Inner handle Fuel-filler lid opener

1 (See 09-14-18 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/ 11 (See 09-14-27 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER
INSTALLATION.) AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Bonnet release lever Rear door latch and lock actuator
(See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND (See 09-14-47 REAR DOOR LATCH AND
2 LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-47 REAR DOOR LATCH AND
Front door key cylinder 12
LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
3 (See 09-14-31 FRONT DOOR KEY
(See 09-14-50 REAR DOOR LOCK
CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
Front outer handle (See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH
4 (See 09-14-10 FRONT OUTER HANDLE SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Rear outer handle
Bonnet release cable 13 (See 09-14-13 REAR OUTER HANDLE
5 (See 09-14-21 BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Door lock striker
Bonnet latch 14 (See 09-14-47 DOOR LOCK STRIKER
(See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6
RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/
Front door latch and lock actuator
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND
Fuel-filler lid opener lever LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
7 (See 09-14-27 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER INSTALLATION.)
AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-37 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND
Fuel-filler lid opener cable LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
8 (See 09-14-23 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER (See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH
15
CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Trunk lid lock striker (4SD) (See 09-14-41 FRONT DOOR LOCK
(See 09-14-68 TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-14-44 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH
9 INSPECTION.)
Liftgate lock striker (5HB, WGN)
(See 09-14-63 LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER (See 09-14-34 FRONT DOOR KEY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Trunk lid latch and lock actuator (4SD)
(See 09-14-65 TRUNK LID LATCH AND
LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-66 TRUNK LID LATCH AND
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-66 TRUNK LID LOCK
ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-65 TRUNK LID LATCH MANUAL
RELEASE PROCEDURE.)
Liftgate latch and lock motor (5HB)
(See 09-14-56 LIFTGATE LATCH AND
LOCK MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LOCK MOTOR INSPECTION.)
10 INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-64 LIFTGATE LOCK MOTOR
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-61 RETURN SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-60 LIFTGATE LATCH POSITION
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-58 LIFTGATE LATCH MANUAL
RELEASE PROCEDURE.)
Liftgate latch and lock actuator (WGN)
LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-53 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
09-14–5
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Advanced Keyless Entry And Push Button Start System]
5HB
1 2 3 4 2 5
4SD 4 2 WGN 4 3 2
2 2 2 8 7 6
09-14–6
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Keyless beeper Coil antenna

(See 09-14-109 KEYLESS BEEPER (See 09-14-115 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED 6 INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
1 START SYSTEM].) SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-109 KEYLESS BEEPER Keyless control module
INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SYSTEM].) [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
Keyless antenna BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-106 KEYLESS ANTENNA (See 09-14-69 KEYLESS CONTROL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM].) START SYSTEM].)
2 (See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID
Touch sensor
(See 09-14-111 TOUCH SENSOR CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON 7 START SYSTEM].)
START SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-73 KEYLESS CONTROL
MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED
Request switch
(See 09-14-110 REQUEST SWITCH
START SYSTEM].)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED
(See 09-14-113 CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION
SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED
3 START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-111 REQUEST SWITCH
START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-
RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING
SYSTEM].)
Trunk lid opener switch (4SD) BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
Keyless receiver
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-14-78 KEYLESS RECEIVER
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
4 8 (See 09-14-80 KEYLESS RECEIVER
Liftgate opener switch (5HB, WGN)
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
SYSTEM].)
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Advanced key
(See 09-14-116 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE
REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-116 CLEARING ADVANCED
5
KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
(See 09-14-114 ADVANCED KEY BATTERY
REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM].)
09-14–7
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Keyless Entry System and Immobilizer System [Keyless Entry System]
1 2 3
Coil antenna Keyless receiver

(See 09-14-114 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/ (See 09-14-78 KEYLESS RECEIVER
1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY 3
SYSTEM].) (See 09-14-79 KEYLESS RECEIVER
INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY
Transmitter
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-80 TRANSMITTER BATTERY
REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY
2 SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-81 TRANSMITTER ID CODE
REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
09-14–8
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Theft-deterrent System
1
5HB
1
4SD
1 2
WGN
Theft-deterrent siren Intruder sensor

Tilt sensor (See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR
(See 09-14-74 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN 2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 AND TILT SENSOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR
(See 09-14-76 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN
AND TILT SENSOR INSPECTION.)
End Of Sie
WM: OPEN HANDLE
09-14–9
SECURITY AND LOCKS
FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION.)
(6) Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-31 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the keyless antenna connector (With
advanced keyless entry and push button start
system). FRONT OUTER HANDLE
BRACKET
CONNECTOR
09-14–10
SECURITY AND LOCKS
5. Press the hook on the front outer handle bracket
in the directional the arrow. HOOK
FRONT OUTER
HANDLE BRACKET
6. Maintaining the condition in procedure 5, remove

the front outer handle.
FRONT OUTER HANDLE
7. Remove the handle seat.
HANDLE SEAT
8. Remove the service hole cover.

9. Remove the screw from the service hole.
SERVICE HOLE COVER
Note
x The screw cannot be removed because of
the stopper.
09-14–11
SECURITY AND LOCKS
SERVICE HOLE
SCREW
10. Press down the rod holder in the direction of

arrow (1) and remove the front outer handle
bracket in the direction of arrow (2).(See 09-14-12
Outer handle bracket Installation Note.)
FRONT OUTER
HANDLE BRACKET
(1)
(2)
ROD HOLDER
Outer handle bracket Installation Note

1. Hook the outer handle bracket tabs as shown in the figure.
09-14–12
SECURITY AND LOCKS
End Of Sie
TAB
TAB
OUTER HANDLE
BRACKET
REAR OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Fully close the rear door glass.
4. Remove the rubber.
RUBBER
09-14–13
SECURITY AND LOCKS
SERVICE HOLE
COVER
Note
the stopper.
SCREW
09-14–14
SECURITY AND LOCKS
7. Press the tab on the rear outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow.
REAR OUTER HANDLE BRACKET
TAB

the outer handle garnish.
OUTER HANDLE GARNISH
09-14–15
SECURITY AND LOCKS
9. Press the hook on the rear outer handle bracket in
the direction of the arrow. HOOK
REAR OUTER HANDLE

BRACKET

the rear outer handle.
REAR OUTER HANDLE
11. Remove the handle seat.
HANDLE SEAT
09-14–16
SECURITY AND LOCKS
12. Loosen the screw.
REAR OUTER HANDLE

BRACKET
SCREW
13. Press down the rod holder in the direction of

arrow (1) and remove the rear outer handle
bracket in the direction of arrow (2).(See 09-14-17
Outer handle bracket Installation Note.)
14. Install in the reverse order of removal. REAR OUTER HANDLE
BRACKET

ROD HOLDER
Outer handle bracket Installation Note

1. Hook the outer handle bracket tabs as shown in the figure.
09-14–17
SECURITY AND LOCKS
TAB
TAB
OUTER HANDLE
BRACKET
INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Front Inner Handle
4. Disconnect each cable and remove the front inner
handle.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. DOOR LOCK KNOB CABLE
INNER HANDLE CABLE FRONT INNER HANDLE
Rear Inner Handle

3. Disconnect each cable and remove the rear inner
handle.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. DOOR LOCK KNOB CABLE
End Of Sie
INNER HANDLE CABLE REAR INNER HANDLE
BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Bonnet Latch
1. Open the bonnet.
09-14–18
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Disconnect the bonnet latch switch connector.
(vehicles with theft-deterrent system)
CONNECTOR
4. Pull up the bonnet latch cover in the direction of

the arrow (1), avoid the tabs, and remove the BONNNET LATCH COVER
bonnet latch cover.
(1) BONNNET LATCH COVER
TAB
09-14–19
SECURITY AND LOCKS
6. Remove the bonnet latch.
Vehicles with theft-deterrent system
L.H.D. R.H.D.
BONNET LATCH BONNET LATCH
BOLT 8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm, 71—97 in·lbf} BOLT 8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm, 71—97 in·lbf}
Vehicles without theft-deterrent system
BONNET LATCH
BOLT 8—11 N·m {82—112 kgf·cm, 71—97 in·lbf}

8. Adjust the bonnet. (See 09-10-5 BONNET ADJUSTMENT.)
Bonnet Release Lever

1. Pull the bonnet release lever.
BONNET RELEASE LEVER
09-14–20
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2. While maintaining the condition in procedure 1, insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver as shown in the
figure, press the ends of the tabs with the screwdriver in the direction of the arrows (1), pull the bonnet release
lever in the direction of arrow (2), and then disconnect the lower panel.
LOWER PANEL TAB BONNET RELEASE

LEVER
LOWER PANEL
(1)
TAB
FLATHEAD BONNET RELEASE (2)
SCREWDRI VER LEVER
CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW
Caution
x Remove the bonnet release lever while being careful not to damage the bonnet release cable with
the flathead screwdriver.
3. Pull the latch release lever outward, remove it

from the lower panel, and then disconnect the
bonnet release cable.
End Of Sie
BONNET RELEASE
LOWER PANEL CABLE
BONNET RELEASE
LEVER
BONNET RELEASE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

R.H.D.
1. Remove the front mudguard. (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the bonnet release cable from clips A.
3. Remove the bonnet release cable from clips B.
4. Remove the bonnet release cable from clips C.
5. Disconnect the bonnet latch from the bonnet release cable.
6. Remove the grommet.
7. Remove the bonnet release cable from outside of the vehicle.
09-14–21
SECURITY AND LOCKS
BONNET RELEASE
CABLE
GROMMET
GROMMET
CLIP A
CLIP A
CLIP B

End Of Sie
BONNET LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
2. Remove the bonnet latch. (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Press the latch in using a flathead screwdriver to inspect the latch lever condition.
BONNET LATCH SCREWDRIVER
LATCH LEVER LATCH LEVER
OPEN CLOSE

table.
A
B A
09-14–22
SECURITY AND LOCKS
bonnet latch.
End Of Sie
CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
BONNET LATCH
SWITCH A B
OPEN
CLOSE
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD
CLIP D CLIP E
CLIP F
CLIP A CLIP B CLIP C
CLIP A CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D CLIP E CLIP F
09-14–23
SECURITY AND LOCKS
5HB
CLIP D CLIP E
CLIP F
WGN
CLIP D CLIP E CLIP G
CLIP F
CLIP A CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D CLIP E CLIP F CLIP G
09-14–24
SECURITY AND LOCKS
R.H.D.
(1) Front seat (driver's seat) (See 09-13-4 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front scuff plate (driver's side) (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rear scuff plate (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Rear seat cushion(4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(5) Rear seat back(4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Trunk side upper trim(5HB, WGN) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(9) Trunk side trim (passenger’s seat) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Fuel-filler lid opener (See 09-14-27 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Fuel-filler lid opener lever (See 09-14-27 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the fuel-filler lid opener cable.
4SD
CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D CLIP E
CLIP A
CLIP F
CLIP B
09-14–25
SECURITY AND LOCKS
5HB
CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D CLIP E
CLIP A
CLIP F
CLIP B
WGN
CLIP B CLIP D CLIP E CLIP G
CLIP A
CLIP F
CLIP C
CLIP B
CLIP A CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D CLIP E CLIP F CLIP G
09-14–26
SECURITY AND LOCKS
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER AND LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Fuel-filler Lid Opener
R.H.D.
1. Open the fuel-filler lid.
(1) Rear scuff plate (passenger’s seat) (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Rear seat cushion(4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(3) Rear seat back(4SD) (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(5) Trunk side upper trim(5HB, WGN)(See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Trunk side trim (passenger’s side) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the nut..
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER
NUT
3.6—5.4 N·m
{37—55 kgf·cm, 32—47 in·lbf}
4. Pull out the fuel-filler lid opener in the direction of

the arrow (1).
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER
(1)
5. Disconnect the fuel-filler lid opener from the fuel-

filler lid opener cable.
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE
09-14–27
SECURITY AND LOCKS
6. Remove the stopper bracket in the direction of the TAB TAB
arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the
stopper bracket tabs in the direction of the arrow
(1). Remove the stopper bracket.
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
TAB
STOPPER BRACKET
(2)
Fuel-filler Lid Opener Lever

1. Remove the fuel-filler lid opener bezel. (See 09-17-77 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER BEZEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the cable and fuel-filler lid opener
lever.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER CABLE
VEHICLE
FRONT
BOLT
5.0 N·m {51 kgf·cm,
44 in·lbf}
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER LEVER
09-14–30
SECURITY AND LOCKS
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION.)
SERVICE HOLE COVER
5. Remove the tab, then remove the door lock-link

bracket. (Driver’s door). BRACKET
7.0—9.0 N·m {72—91 kgf·cm,

NUT
62—79 in·lbf}
09-14–31
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Note
the stopper. SERVICE HOLE COVER
SCREW
8. Lift the clip in the direction of the arrow (1), and

pull out the key rod in the direction of the arrow
(2).
CLIP
KEY ROD
09-14–32
SECURITY AND LOCKS
9. Press the tab on the front outer handle bracket in the direction of the arrow.
FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET
TAB
10. Maintaining the condition in Step 9, remove the

front key cylinder.
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER
09-14–33
SECURITY AND LOCKS
11. Using a tape-wrapped fastener remover, press up
the collar cap in the direction of the arrow shown TAB
in the arrow, press aside the front door key
cylinder tabs (1), and remove the collar cover (1) FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER
from the front door key cylinder.
End Of Sie
TAB
FRONT DOOR KEY COLLAR CAP

CYLINDER
(1)
TAB
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION

INSTALLATION)
(6) Front door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-35 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
4. If the door lock condition is to be inspected, pull the door lock-link switch cable, or press it in.
Note
x The door lock-link switch cable locks or unlocks only when the latch lever is locked.
LOCK
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH CABLE
UNLOCK
09-14–34
SECURITY AND LOCKS
5. Verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table.
R.H.D.
UNLOCK
F D
LOCK
D F

front door latch and lock actuator.
End Of Sie : Resistance : Continuity
Key cylinder Terminal
position L.H.D. : J L.H.D. : H
R.H.D. : D R.H.D. : F
Unlock
R
Lock
R: 1 kilohm
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(3) Front inner handle (See 09-14-18 INNER
HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
(5) Front door glass (See 09-12-6 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–35
SECURITY AND LOCKS
SERVICE HOLE COVER
5. Remove the tab, then remove the door lock-link

bracket. (Driver’s door). BRACKET
7.0—9.0 N·m {72—91 kgf·cm,

NUT
62—79 in·lbf}
6. Disconnect the key rod from the front outer

handle bracket.
FRONT OUTER HANDLE BRACKET
7. Lift the clip in the direction of the arrow (1), and
pull out the key rod in the direction of the arrow
(2).
CLIP
(1)
(2)
KEY ROD
09-14–36
SECURITY AND LOCKS
8. Remove the screw
9. Detach the clips. CLIP
SCREW
4.2—6.2 N·m {43—63 kgf·cm,
38—54 in·lbf}
10. Press down the rod holder of the front door latch
and lock actuator in the direction of the arrow.
FRONT DOOR LATCH

AND LOOK ACTUATOR
ROD HOLDER
11. Maintaining the condition in Step 9, remove the

front door latch and lock actuator.
End Of Sie
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK

ACTUATOR
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

1. The following actuators and switches are integrated with the front door latch and lock actuator. Inspect the front
door latch and lock actuator according to each inspection procedure for the following items.
09-14–37
SECURITY AND LOCKS
x Front door lock actuator (See 09-14-41 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
x Door lock-link switch (Vehicles with theft-deterrent system) (See 09-14-44 DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
x Door latch switch (See 09-14-43 FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
x Front door key cylinder (See 09-14-34 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.)
R.H.D.
LH
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
FRONT DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK
LOCK
M
LOCK
UNLOCK
G A C B D J L
G C A
L J D B
RH
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK KEY CYLINDER

SWITCH SWITCH
FRONT DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK UNLOCK
LOCK
M
LOCK LOCK
UNLOCK
E K I L J D F B
K I E
L J F D B
End Of Sie
09-14–38
SECURITY AND LOCKS
FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
INSTALLATION.)
09-14–41
SECURITY AND LOCKS
4. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal, and then verify the operation.
DOUBLE LOCKING SYSTEM
LH RH
FRONT DOOR LOCK FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
LOCK LOCK
M M
UNLOCK UNLOCK
G A C E K I
G C A K I E
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
LH RH
FRONT DOOR LOCK FRONT DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
LOCK LOCK
M M
UNLOCK UNLOCK
G A E K
G A K E
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front door latch and lock actuator.
09-14–42
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Double Locking System
Terminal
Operation
B+ Ground
RH I E
LOCK
LH C G
DOUBLE RH K E
LOCK LH A G
RH E K, I
UNLOCK
LH G A, C
Power Door Lock System

Terminal
Operation
B+ Ground
RH K E
LOCK
LH A G
RH E K
UNLOCK
LH G A
End Of Sie
FRONT DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
INSTALLATION.)
LATCH FLATHEAD FLATHEAD LATCH

LEVER SCREWDRIVER SCREWDRIVER LEVER
LATCH LEVER
OPEN CLOSE
09-14–43
SECURITY AND LOCKS
LH RH
DOOR LATCH SWITCH DOOR LATCH SWITCH

L J D B
J L D B
End Of Sie
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH LH:L LH:J
RH:B RH:D
OPEN
CLOSE
DOOR LOCK-LINK SWITCH INSPECTION

Font Door Lock-link Inspection
INSTALLATION.)
Note
09-14–44
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table. LOCK
UNLOCK
RH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
UNLOCK
L J D
LOCK
L J D
LH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
UNLOCK
J D B
LOCK
B D J
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
LOCK KNOB
POSITION RH:J RH:D RH:L
LH:D LH:J LH:B
LOCK
UNLOCK
Rear Door Lock-link Inspection

(1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rear inner handle (See 09-14-18 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–45
SECURITY AND LOCKS
(7) Rear door module panel (See 09-11-9 REAR DOOR MODULE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Rear door latch and lock actuator (See 09-14-47 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Note

table. LOCK
UNLOCK
RH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
UNLOCK
L J D
LOCK
L J D
LH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
UNLOCK
J D B
LOCK
B D J
09-14–46
SECURITY AND LOCKS
End Of Sie
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
LOCK KNOB
POSITION RH:J RH:D RH:L
LH:D LH:J LH:B
LOCK
UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove the screws, then remove the door lock
striker. DOOR LOCK STRIKER
2. Install in the reverse order of removal. 18—26 N·m {1.9—2.6 kgf·m,
3. Adjust the door lock striker. (See 09-11-21 DOOR 14—19 ft·lbf}
ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie SCREW
REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(2) Rear inner handle (See 09-14-18 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the rear door latch and lock actuator. REAR DOOR LATCH AND
LOCK ACTUATOR
End Of Sie
09
SCREW
4.2—6.2 N·m {43—63 kgf·cm,
38—54 in·lbf}
REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the rear door latch and lock actuator. Inspect the rear door
latch and lock actuator according to each inspection procedure for the following items.
x Rear door lock actuator (See 09-14-50 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
x Rear door latch switch (See 09-14-49 REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
x Rear door lock-link switch(Vehicles with theft-deterrent system) (See 09-14-44 DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH INSPECTION.)
09-14–47
SECURITY AND LOCKS
LH
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK
LOCK
M
LOCK
UNLOCK
G A C B D J L
G C A
L J D B
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK
LOCK
M
LOCK
UNLOCK
G A B D J L
G A
L J D B
09-14–48
SECURITY AND LOCKS
RH
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK
LOCK
M
LOCK
UNLOCK
E K I L J D B
K I E
L J D B
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH
DOOR LOCK-LINK
SWITCH
REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK
LOCK
M
LOCK
UNLOCK
E K L J D B
K E
L J D B
End Of Sie
REAR DOOR LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION
INSTALLATION.)
09-14–49
SECURITY AND LOCKS
LATCH FATHEAD SCREW LATCH

LEVER FATHEAD SCREW LEVER
DRIVER DRIVER
LATCH LEVER
OPEN CLOSE

RH LH
DOOR LATCH DOOR LATCH

SWITCH SWITCH
D B L J
D B J L
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.
End Of Sie
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
DOOR LATCH
SWITCH RH:B RH:D
LH:L LH:J
OPEN
CLOSE
REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

INSTALLATION.)
09-14–50
SECURITY AND LOCKS
LH RH
REAR DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
LOCK LOCK
M M
UNLOCK UNLOCK
G A C E K I
G C A K I E
LH RH
REAR DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK

ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
LOCK LOCK
M M
UNLOCK UNLOCK
G A E K 09
G A K E
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the rear door latch and lock actuator.
09-14–51
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Double Locking System
Terminal
Operation
B+ Ground
RH I E
LOCK
LH C G
DOUBLE RH K E
LOCK LH A G
RH E K, I
UNLOCK
LH G A, C
Power Door Lock System

Terminal
Operation
B+ Ground
RH K E
LOCK
LH A G
RH E K
UNLOCK
LH G A
ie
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim.(See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the liftgate side trim.(See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Remove the liftgate lower trim.(See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
CONNECTOR LIFT GATE LATCH AND

LOCK ACTUATOR
6. Remove the bolts. 8— · —101 kgf·cm, 8—10 N· —101 kgf·cm,

7. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator. 71— ·lbf} 71— ·
8. Install in the reverse order of removal. BOLT BOLT
09-14–52
SECURITY AND LOCKS
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the liftgate latch and lock actuator. Inspect the liftgate
x Liftgate latch switch (See 09-14-54 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
x Liftgate lock actuator (See 09-14-53 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LATCH LIFTGATE LOCK

SWITCH ACTUATOR
UNLATCH
A C B D
C A
D B
LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

3. Remove the liftgate side trim. (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator. (See 09-14-52 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
FATHEAD SCREW
DRIVER
UNLATCH LATCH
LATCH LEVER
09-14–53
SECURITY AND LOCKS
ground to each terminal, and then verify the
operation.
liftgate latch and lock actuator.
Terminal
Lock actuator operation
B+ Ground
UNLATCH D B
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LOCK
ACTUATOR
UNLATCH
D B
M
B D
LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION

5HB
(2) Liftgate side trim (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Liftgate latch and lock motor (See 09-14-56 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
FATHEAD SCREW
DRIVER
HALF LATCH FULL LATCH
LATCH LEVER
09-14–54
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table.
C A
A C

liftgate latch and lock motor.
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
LATCH CONDITION
A C
LATCH (LIFTGATE CLOSE)
UNLATCH (LIFTGATE OPEN)
WGN
5. Remove the liftgate latch and lock actuator. (See 09-14-52 LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
FATHEAD SCREW
UNLATCH
DRIVER
LATCH
09
LATCH LEVER
09-14–55
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table.
liftgate latch and lock actuator.
C A
A C
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
LATCH CONDITION
A C
LATCH (LIFTGATE CLOSE)
UNLATCH (LIFTGATE OPEN)
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(3) Recess (See 09-17-117 RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
09-14–56
SECURITY AND LOCKS
5. Remove the liftgate latch and lock motor. LIFTGATE LATCH AND
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. LOCK MOTOR
End Of Sie
BOLT
8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf}
LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

3. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the tire house trim. (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the trunk side upper trim. (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Bolt 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,
2 1 80—106 in·lbf}
2 Connector 9—12 N·m
3 Liftgate auto closure control {92—122
kgf·cm, 80—106
in·lbf}
End Of Sie
1
2
3
LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION

3. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the tire house trim. (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the trunk side upper trim. (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Installation the cargo compartment light connector. (See 09-18-76 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
8. Measure the voltage according to the terminal voltage table.
x If the voltages cannot be verified as indicated in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under
“Inspection item (s)”.
— If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do
not have any malfunction, replace the liftgate auto closure control module.
09-14–57
SECURITY AND LOCKS
LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE

CONTROL MODULE
1E 1C 1A 2G * 2C 2A
1F 1D * 2H * 2D 2B
Ter
min Signal name Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
al
Perform OPEN operation from a 1.0 or less
BCM
1A BCM liftgate fully closed condition oB+o1.0 or BCM
communication
less
Under any condition CLOSER 25 A fuse
1C Power supply CLOSER 25 A fuse B+
Battery
Under any condition Related wiring
1D Power ground Body ground 1.0 or less
harnesses
Open the liftgate, then activate 1.0 or less
Liftgate latch and lock Liftgate latch and lock
1E Normal rotation closure motor from the ajar position. oB+o1.0 or
motor motor
less
Open the liftgate using the liftgate 1.0 or less
Motor reverse Liftgate latch and lock Liftgate latch and lock
1F opener switch with the liftgate fully oB+o1.0 or
rotation motor motor
closed. less
Return switch Open the liftgate, then activate the B+o1.0 or Liftgate latch and lock
2A Return switch
signal closure motor at the ajar position. lessoB+ motor
Liftgate is open. (Liftgate latch
1.0 or less
Liftgate latch Liftgate latch and lock switch on) Liftgate latch and lock
2B
switch signal motor Liftgate is closed. (Liftgate latch motor
B+
switch off)
Open the liftgate, then activate the 1.0 or less
Full-latch Liftgate latch and lock Liftgate latch and lock
2C closure motor at the ajar position. oB+o1.0 or
switch signal motor motor
less
Half latch Open the liftgate, then activate the
Liftgate latch and lock 1.0 or Liftgate latch and lock
2D detection closure motor at the ajar position.
motor lesso5 motor
switch
Open the liftgate using the liftgate
BCM 5o1.0 or
2G BCM opener switch with the liftgate fully BCM
communication lesso5
closed.
Under any condition Related wiring
2H Signal ground Body ground 1.0 or less
harnesses
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LATCH MANUAL RELEASE PROCEDURE
5HB
Note
x If the liftgate cannot be unlocked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunction in the electrical
system, it can be opened using the following procedure.
Opening the liftgate

1. Fold down the rear seat back.
09-14–58
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2. Open the cap.
CAP
Caution
x Wear gloves when performing the
procedure. The body edge can injure
bare hands.
3. Move the lever shown in the figure to the right to

unlock the liftgate. LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER
WGN
Note
x If the liftgate cannot be unlocked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunction in the electrical
Opening the liftgate

1. Open the cap.
CAP
Caution
bare hands.
09-14–59
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2. Move the lever shown in the figure to the right to
unlock the liftgate.
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER
LIFTGATE LATCH POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION

INSTALLATION.)
FATHEAD SCREW
DRIVER
HALF LATCH FULL LATCH
LATCH LEVER
09-14–60
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table.
FULL-LATCH
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the SWITCH
C
D B
HALF-LATCH
SWITCH
D B C
HALF-LATCH FULL-LATCH OVER-STROKE
NO DETECTED
BETWEEN
B AND C CONTINUITY DETECTED
NO DETECTED
BETWEEN
D AND C CONTINUITY DETECTED
Sie
RETURN SWITCH INSPECTION
INSTALLATION.)
3. Press the return switch and verify that the continuity is as indicated in the table.
09
09-14–61
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table.
RETURN SWITCH
E C
E C

End Of Sie
CONTINUITY
RETURN TERMINAL
SWITCH C E
PUSH (ON)
NOT PUSH (OFF)
LIFTGATE LATCH AND LOCK MOTOR INSPECTION

1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the liftgate latch and lock motor. Inspect the liftgate latch
and lock motor according to each inspection procedure for the following items.
x Liftgate latch switch (See 09-14-54 LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
x Liftgate lock motor (See 09-14-64 LIFTGATE LOCK MOTOR INSPECTION.)
x Return switch (see 09-14-61 RETURN SWITCH INSPECTION.)
x Liftgate latch position switch (See 09-14-60 LIFTGATE LATCH POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION.)
09-14–62
SECURITY AND LOCKS
RETURN SWITCH
LIFTGATE LATCH
LIFTGATE LOCK POSITION SWITCH
LIFTGATE LATCH
MOTOR FULL-LATCH
SWITCH
SWITCH
UNLOCK
M
HALF-LATCH
LOCK SWITCH
B A E D B C A
E C A
B A
D B
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
1. Remove the trunk end trim. (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the liftgate lock
19—25 N·m {2.5—2.5 kgf·m, 15—18 ft·lbf}
striker. BOLT
4. Adjust the liftgate lock striker. (See 09-11-22
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.)
LIFTGATE LOCK STRIKER

09
WGN
09-14–63
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the liftgate lock
LIFTGATE LOCK
striker. STRIKER
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie
BOLT
19—25 N·m {2.5—2.5
LIFTGATE LOCK MOTOR INSPECTION

1. Verify that the full-latch switch, half-latch switch, and return switch are normal.
(See 09-14-60 LIFTGATE LATCH POSITION SWITCH INSPECTION.)
(See 09-14-61 RETURN SWITCH INSPECTION.)
2. Verify that the liftgate auto closure control module terminal 1A, terminal 2G power supply are normal.
(See 09-14-57 LIFTGATE AUTO CLOSURE CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
x If it cannot be verified, perform the following inspection or repairs:
— Open or short circuit between the liftgate auto closure control module terminal 1A and BCM terminal 7C
— Open or short circuit between the liftgate auto closure control module terminal 2G and BCM terminal
7B
Note
x If performed continuously, the motor protection circuit will stop the liftgate lock motor operation
temporarily.
3. Perform the following operation and verify the terminal voltage of the liftgate lock motor.
Lock operation; (pull-in operation;):
x Move the liftgate latch to the half-latch position using a flathead screwdriver.
Unlock operation (unlatch operation):
x Press the open switch.
— If the liftgate latch and lock motor cannot operate according to the table during the lock operation,
replace it.
— If the liftgate latch and lock motor cannot operate according to the table during the unlock operation,
and after it has been verified that the open switch is operating normally, replace the liftgate and lock
motor.
Terminal
Lock motor operation
A B
LOCK Ground B+
UNLOCK B+ Ground
LIFTGATE LOCK
MOTOR
UNLOCK
B A
M
LOCK
B A
09-14–64
SECURITY AND LOCKS
TRUNK LID LATCH MANUAL RELEASE PROCEDURE
Note
x If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked or opened due to a discharged battery or malfunction in the electrical
1. Open the cover.

2. Remove the cap and pull the lever in the direction
of the arrow. CAP
3. Fold down the rear seat back.
COVER
Caution
bare hands.
LEVER
4. Move the lever to the left using a screwdriver or

other tool to unlock the trunk lid.
End Of Sie
LEVER
TRUNK LID LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the recess. (See 09-17-117 RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
CONNECTOR
09-14–65
SECURITY AND LOCKS
6. Remove the trunk lid latch and lock actuator.
BOLT
8—10 N·m {82—101
kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf}
TRUNK LID
LATCH AND
LOCK ACTUATOR
TRUNK LID LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION

1. The following actuator and switch are integrated with the liftgate latch and lock actuator. Inspect the trunk lid
x Trunk lid latch switch (See 09-14-67 TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
x Trunk lid lock actuator (See 09-14-66 TRUNK LID LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION.)
TRUNK LID LATCH

SWITCH
C B A
TRUNK LID LOCK
ACTUATIR
M
UNLOCK
C B A
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
4. Remove the trunk lid latch and lock actuator. (See 09-14-65 TRUNK LID LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
09-14–66
SECURITY AND LOCKS
TRUNK LID LOCK

ACTUATOR
B A
UNLOCK
B A
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the trunk lid latch and lock actuator.
Terminal
Lock actuator operation
B+ Ground
UNLOCK A B
TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH INSPECTION

4. Remove the trunk lid latch and lock actuator. (See 09-14-65 TRUNK LID LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR
09
FATHEAD SCREW
UNLATCH DRIVER LATCH
LATCH LEVER
09-14–67
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table.
C B
B C

trunk lid latch and lock actuator.
End Of Sie : CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
LATCH CONDITION
B C
LATCH (TRUNK LID CLOSE)
UNLATCH (TRUNK LID OPEN)
TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid lock
8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf}
striker.
BOLT
TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT.)
TRUNK LID LOCK STRIKER
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH

1. If the keyless control module is replaced, always perform the following procedure.
x Vehicles with immobilizer system
— Keyless Control Module Configuration (See 09-14-73 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— Immobilizer System-related Parts Programming [No.4 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control
Module Replacement] (See 09-14-91 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
x Vehicles without immobilizer system
— Keyless Control Module Configuration (See 09-14-73 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— Advanced Key Id Code Registration (See 09-14-116 ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION
[ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
— Steering Lock Unit Id Code Registration (See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE
REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
09-14–68
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the front side trim. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Nut
2 Bolt
3 Connector
4 Keyless control module
1
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
End Of Sie
4 3 2
9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
2. Remove the front side trim. (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
— If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items or related wiring harnesses do
not have any malfunction, replace the keyless control module.

2K 2I 2G 2E 2C 2A 3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
1E 1C 1A
1F 1D 1B
3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C
4Y 4V 4S 4P 4M 4J 4G 4D 4A
4Z 4W 4T 4Q 4N 4K 4H 4E 4B
4AA 4X 4U 4R 4O 4L 4I 4F 4C
09
Ter
al
Steering lock During steering lock unit operation 1.0 or less
1A Steering lock unit Steering lock unit
unit ground Other Approx. 3.0
Under any condition STEERING LOCK 10 A
STEERING LOCK 10
1B Power supply B+ fuse
A fuse
Battery
09-14–69
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Ter
al
Steering lock unit During lock/unlock
B+
1C Power supply Steering lock unit control Steering lock unit
Other 1.0 or less
Under any condition ROOM 15 A fuse
1D Power supply BCM B+ Battery
BCM
Under any condition EGI 5 A fuse
1E Power supply EGI 5 A fuse B+
Battery
1F GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Body ground
Switch the ignition to ACC B+ ACC relay
2A Power supply MIRROR 5 A fuse Switch the ignition to off MIRROR 5 A fuse
1.0 or less Battery
Communication lines, cannot be
2B Rx-PATS Coil antenna determined by voltage only (B+ B+ Coil antenna
when not communicating)
Switch the ignition to ON B+ IG1 relay
2C Power supply ENGINE IG 15 A fuse Switch the ignition to ACC or off ENGINE IG 15 A fuse
1.0 or less Battery
2D Tx-PATS Coil antenna determined by voltage only (B+ B+ Coil antenna
BCM
2F BCM determined by voltage only (B+ B+ BCM
communication
Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
2G HS-CAN+ -
voltage inspection not possible.
Keyless entry Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
2H Keyless receiver
communication voltage inspection not possible.
2I HS-CAN- -
Push button Push button start is pushed 1.0 or less
2J Push button start Push button start
start Push button start is not pushed B+
Push button Push button start is pushed 1.0 or less
2K Push button start Push button start
start Push button start is not pushed B+
Steering lock
2L unit Steering lock unit
communication
3B* Clutch pedal Clutch pedal position Clutch pedal is depressed 1.0 or less Clutch pedal position
1 position switch switch switch
Clutch pedal is not depressed B+
Keyless
Keyless antenna Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
3C antenna
(exterior, rear) voltage inspection not possible.
(exterior, rear)
Request switch Liftgate request switch is pressed 1.0 or less Request switch (Liftgate)
3D Liftgate (WGN)
(Liftgate) (WGN) Liftgate request switch is released B+ (WGN)
Brake pedal is depressed Wave pattern
(See 09-14-
3E Brake switch Brake switch 73 Pattern 1.) Brake switch
Brake pedal is not depressed 1.0 or less
Keyless Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
3F Keyless antenna (LF)
antenna (LF) voltage inspection not possible.
Trunk lid Trunk lid/liftgate opener switch is
Trunk lid opener 3.0
unlatch input pressed Trunk lid opener switch
switch (4SD)Liftgate
3G (4SD)Liftgate Trunk lid/liftgate opener switch is (4SD)Liftgate opener
opener switch (5HB,
unlatch input released 4.7 switch (5HB, WGN)
WGN)
(5HB, WGN)
3H Unlock input Touch sensor (RF)
Keyless
3I antenna
(interior, rear) voltage inspection not possible.
(interior, rear)
09-14–70
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Ter
al
Keyless beeper Exterior keyless beeper sounds 5.0 or more
3K Keyless beeper Keyless beeper
power supply Other 1.0 or less
Keyless
antenna Keyless antenna Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
3L
(interior, (interior, center) voltage inspection not possible.
center)
3M* Transaxle range Shift position is P B+
2 P position Transaxle range switch
switch Other 1.0 or less
3N GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Body ground
3O Keyless antenna (RF)
antenna (RF) voltage inspection not possible.
Driver's side door lock switch at
1.0 or less
LOCK
Door lock-link switch
3P Lock input Driver's side door lock switch at Wave pattern Door lock-link switch
(driver's door)
UNLOCK (See 09-14-
73 Pattern 2.)
3Q Unlock input Touch sensor (LF)
Keyless
3R antenna
(interior, front) voltage inspection not possible.
(interior, front)
Brake pedal is depressed B+
3S Brake switch Brake switch Brake switch
Brake pedal is not depressed 1.0 or less
Shift lever is in neutral position 1.0 or less
Shift lever is not in neutral position Wave pattern
3T*1 Neutral switch Neutral switch Neutral switch
(See 09-14-
73 Pattern 1.)
Request switch Request switch is pressed 1.0 or less
3U Request switch (RF) Front outer handle (RF)
(RF) Request switch is released B+
Request switch Request switch is pressed 1.0 or less
3X Request switch (LF) Front outer handle (LF)
(LF) Request switch is released B+
Keyless
antenna Keyless antenna Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
3Y
(interior, (interior, center) voltage inspection not possible.
center)
Keyless
3Z antenna
(interior, rear) voltage inspection not possible.
(interior, rear)
Keyless
3AA antenna
(interior, front) voltage inspection not possible.
(interior, front)
3AB Keyless antenna (LF)
antenna (LF) voltage inspection not possible.
Keyless
3AC antenna
(exterior, rear)
(exterior, rear) voltage inspection not possible. 09
3AD Keyless antenna (RF)
antenna (RF) voltage inspection not possible.
Steering lock unit Unlocked
1.0 or less
condition
Steering lock
4A Steering lock unit Steering lock unit Locked condition Wave pattern Steering lock unit
unit unlock
(See 09-14-
73 Pattern 2.)
Cranking B+
4B Starter relay Starter relay Starter relay
Other (Remove the starter relay) 1.0 or less
IG 1 relay Switch the ignition to ON B+
4E IG 1 Relay IG 1 Relay
control Switch the ignition to off or ACC 1.0 or less
ACC relay Switch the ignition to ACC B+
4F ACC Relay ACC Relay
control Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less
09-14–71
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Ter
al
IG 2 relay Switch the ignition to ON B+
4H IG 2 Relay IG 2 Relay
control Switch the ignition to off or ACC 1.0 or less
Push button In the case of ACC 1.0 or less
4J illumination Push button start Case except the ACC Push button start
(ACC) B+
Clutch pedal is not
Starter 1.0 or less
depressed
interlock switch Starter interlock switch Starter interlock switch
(MTX) Clutch pedal is
Switch the 4.0 or more
depressed
4K ignition to
off Shift position is not P or
Transaxle 1.0 or less
Transaxle range N range
range switch Transaxle range switch
switch Shift position is P or N
(ATX) 4.0 or more
range
4L GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Body ground
Coil antenna
4Q Power supply Coil antenna determined by voltage only (B+ B+
Push button start
Ring Terminal used for communication therefore
illumination determination based on terminal voltage inspection
4R Coil antenna Coil antenna
(immobilizer not possible.
system)
Until steering lock unit locks after
B+ Combined sensor
switch the ignition to off
4S Power supply Combined sensor BCM
Steering lock unit locks after switch ABS/DCS HU/CM
1.0 or less
the ignition to off
Push button System is malfunctioning 1.0 or less
4T illumination Push button start Other Push button start
(Umber) B+
Auto light/wiper control TNS ON B+ Auto light/wiper control
4U TNS
module TNS OFF 1.0 or less module
Push button In the case of ON 1.0 or less
4W illumination Push button start Case except the ON Push button start
(ON) B+
Switch the ignition to ON B+ IG 2 Relay
4X Power supply WIPER 20 A fuse Switch the ignition to off or ACC WIPER 20 A fuse
1.0 or less Battery
Push button Engine start is available 1.0 or less
4Y illumination Push button start Other Push button start
(green) B+
Clutch pedal is not
depressed (MTX)
Shift position is not 1.0 or less
P or N range
Switch the (ATX)
4AA Starter monitor Starter relay Starter relay
ignition to off
Clutch pedal is
depressed (MTX)
4.0 or more
Shift position is P
or N range (ATX)
*1 : MTX
*2 : ATX
09-14–72
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Generated pulse (reference)
Pattern 1
0V
x Terminal:
— Brake switch: 3E (+) body ground (-)
— Neutral switch: 3T (+) body ground (-)
x Oscilloscope setting: 2 V/DIV (Y), 1 ms/DIV (X), DC range
Pattern 2
0V
x Terminal:
— Lock input: 3P (+) body ground (-)
— Steering lock unit unlock: 4A (+) body ground (-)
End Of Sie
KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM]
1. Connect the M-MDS(IDS) to DLC-2.
items from the initial screen of the IDS.
(1) Select the “Module Programming”.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the
following order.
(1) Select “Programmable Module Installation”.
4. Perform the configuration according to the
directions on the screen.
5. Verify that no DTCs are displayed. DLC-2
corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02A-
6 DTC TABLE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
09-14–73
SECURITY AND LOCKS
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM READING FREEZE FRAME DATA
(1) Select “Body”.
(2) Select “Burglar Service Functions”.
3. Then, select the following item from the screen
menu.
(1) Select “Read FFD”.
4. Read the record according to the directions on
the screen.
End Of Sie DLC-2
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM CLEARING FREEZE FRAME DATA

(2) Select “Burglar Service Functions”.
3. Then, select the following item from the screen
menu.
(1) Select “Clear FFD”.
4. Clear the record according to the directions on
the screen.
End Of Sie DLC-2
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND TILT SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Note
x The tilt sensor are built into the theft-deterrent siren.
Caution
x The clearance between the angle sensor and bracket is set at the initial position. If the angle
sensor is removed from the bracket or servicing is performed which changes the initial position,
the angle sensor will not operate correctly.
4SD
(2) Trunk side trim (RH) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–74
SECURITY AND LOCKS
1 Connector FRONT
2 Bolt
3 1
3 Theft-deterrent siren
2 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,

80—106 in·lbf}
5HB
(2) Rear scuff plate (RH) (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Tire house trim (RH) (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Trunk side upper trim (RH) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Connector FRONT
2 Bolt 3 1
2 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,

80—106 in·lbf}
WGN
09-14–75
SECURITY AND LOCKS
1 Connector
FRONT 3 1
2 Bolt

End Of Sie
2 9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,

80—106 in·lbf}
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN AND TILT SENSOR INSPECTION
Note
x The tilt sensor are built into the theft-deterrent siren.
4SD
3. Measure the tilt sensor terminal voltage using the
short wiring harness connector in the position
shown in the figure. SHORT WIRING
HANESS
CONNECTOR
FRONT
am6zzw0000282
5HB
09-14–76
SECURITY AND LOCKS
HANESS
CONNECTOR
FRONT
WGN
HANESS
FRONT CONNECTOR
Note
x The tilt sensor cannot be connected to a
tester due to its water-resistance
processing, therefore the short wiring
harness connector is used for measuring the
terminal voltage.
x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in
the table, inspect the short wiring harness
connector for continuity. (See 09-14-78
Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring
Harness Connector.)If the short wiring
harness connector is normal, inspect the
parts under “Inspection items”.
— If the system does not work properly
even though the parts or related wiring
harnesses do not have any malfunction,
replace the tilt sensor (theft-deterrent
siren).
09-14–77
SECURITY AND LOCKS
TILT SENSOR
SHORT WIRING
HANESS CONNECTOR
A
B D
Measurement
Terminal Signal name Connected to Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
condition
Under any x ROOM 15 A fuse
A Power supply BCM B+
condition x BCM
Terminal used for communication therefore determination
B DATA BCM
based on terminal voltage inspection not possible.
Under any
D Ground Body ground 1.0 or less Ground
condition
Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector

1. Verify that the continuity between the short wiring harness connector terminals is as indicated in the table.
x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the short wiring harness connector.
TILT SENSOR TILT SENSOR

WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR SHORT WIRING
HANESS CONNECTOR
C B A
A
B D
: Continuity
Test TILT SENSOR

SHORT HARNESS
condition CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR SIDE
SIDE
C B A A B D
Under any
condition
e
KEYLESS RECEIVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the glove compartment. (See 09-17-38 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–78
SECURITY AND LOCKS
1 Connector
2 Screw
3 Keyless receiver 2 1

End Of Sie 3
KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

“Inspection item(s)”.
— If the system does not work normally even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the keyless receiver.
KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING

E D B A
Ter
min Signal name Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V) Inspection item(s)
al
x ROOM 15 A fuse
A Power supply BCM Under any condition B+ x BCM
x Battery
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x METER IG 15 A fuse
B*1 IG1 METER IG 15 A fuse
x Battery
Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less
Terminal used for communication therefore
D DATA BCM determination based on terminal voltage BCM
inspection not possible.
E GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Ground
*1 : With TPMS
End Of Sie
09-14–79
SECURITY AND LOCKS
KEYLESS RECEIVER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
— If the system does not work normally even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the keyless receiver.

KEYLESS RECEIVER WIRING
D C B
Ter
al
B GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Ground
Terminal used for communication therefore
C DATA Keyless control module determination based on terminal voltage Keyless control module
inspection not possible.
x ROOM 15 A fuse
D Power supply BCM Under any condition B+ x Battery
x BCM
ie
TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the transmitter
notch and remove the key from the transmitter by
TAB
pressing the tab.
TRANSMITTER
KEY
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the transmitter

notch and open the transmitter.
09-14–80
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Remove the battery by pressing it in the direction
of the arrow shown in the figure.
BATTERY
4. Install the new battery (CR1620) with the plus

pole facing down.
5. Align the upper and lower covers and close the
transmitter.
Battery type
Lithium battery CR1620
Battery life
Approx. 2 years (when used approx. 10
times/day)
6. Install the key to the transmitter.
Note
x When connecting the key to the transmitter, grip the key and the transmitter as shown in the figure and
connect until a click sound is heard.
x If the key is not completely connected to the transmitter, they may come apart.
End Of Sie
TRANSMITTER ID CODE REGISTRATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
Note
x Verify that the other transmitter is not being operated around the servicing area while updating the ID
code.
09
09-14–81
SECURITY AND LOCKS
x After completing the work, remove the key from the steering lock and verify that all the door lock/unlock
operation using the transmitter is correct.
START
Remove the key from the steering lock.

Close all doors and trunk lid/liftgate.
Open the driver-side door.
Insert the key into the steering lock.
Repeat the following three times.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position,
Perform these then back to the LOCK position.
procedures
Note
within 24 s. Do not remove the key from the steering lock.
Open and close the driver-side door three times.

Note
Then leave the door open
NO
Verify that the door lock actuators
lock, then unlock.
YES
Push any button on any single transmitter
twice.
NO
lock, then unlock.
YES
If you have only one transmitter, push any
button twice.
If you have two or three transmitters, push any
button on any of the other transmitters twice.
NO
lock, then unlock.
YES
If you have one or two transmitters, push any
button on either transmitter twice.
If you have three transmitters, push any button
on the last transmitter twice.
NO YES
Verify that the door lock actuators END
lock, then unlock.
09-14–82
SECURITY AND LOCKS
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
Foreword
x When replacing immobilizer system-related parts or programming an additional key, program the immobilizer
system-related parts so that the system operates normally. For immobilizer system-related parts programming,
select the programming procedures according to the service. (See 09-14-83 Selection of Procedure for
Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming.)
Caution
x The engine cannot be started if any step or procedure for each service operation is skipped.
Perform all procedures in the order of the steps.
x If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle
may be obstructed, resulting in a failure to program the immobilizer system-related parts. Remove
any metallic or magnetic objects, such as key holders, from the key when programming
immobilizer system-related parts.
x If any of the following devices are inside the vehicle, programming of immobilizer system-related
parts may fail. Do not bring any of the following devices or similar products inside the vehicle
when programming immobilizer system-related parts.
— M-MDS
— Personal computer
— Devices that can send/receive radio waves
x If the engine is started during immobilizer system-related parts programming, the programming
mode cancels. Therefore, do not start the engine unless indicated in the procedure. Repeat the
procedure from the beginning if the engine is started during the immobilizer system-related parts
programming.
Note
x The “Valid key” referred to in this manual indicates the key that can start the engine.
x Two or more key ID numbers must be programmed for the engine to start.
x A maximum of eight key ID numbers can be programmed for one vehicle.
x The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified using the M-MDS.
x Do not select any screen menu other than the ones indicated in the procedure during M-MDS operation.
Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming

1. Verify that the room fuse is equipped.
2. Select the applicable programming procedure from the service content of the immobilizer system-related parts.
Immobilizer System-Related Parts Service and Programming Procedure Table
No. Service Programming procedure
(See 09-14-84 No.1 Additional Key
1 Have two or more valid keys Programming Procedure (Using Two
Valid Keys).)
Additional key programming
(See 09-14-85 No. 2 Additional Key
2 Have one valid key or none Programming Procedure (Using the M-
MDS).)
Additional key programming Disable programming using valid keys (See 09-14-86 No.3 Additional Key
3
procedure setting Enable programming using valid keys Programming Procedure Changing.)
(See 09-14-87 No.4 Programming
4 Programming due to PCM replacement
Procedure Due to PCM Replacement.)
5 Programming due to instrument cluster replacement Procedure Due to Instrument Cluster
Replacement.)
Programming due to simultaneous replacement of immobilizer system-related
Procedure Due to Simultaneous
parts
6 Replacement of Immobilizer System-
x PCM
related Parts (PCM and Instrument
Cluster).)
Programming of immobilizer system-
7 Programming due to coil antenna replacement
related parts is not necessary
M-MDS Connecting Procedure
Note
x Do not place the M-MDS in the vehicle while programming the immobilizer system.
1. Fully lower the door glass.
09-14–83
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Place the IDS outside the vehicle.
Caution
x Cover the vehicle body with a clean rag
so as not to damage the vehicle body
with the cable.
DLC-2
No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two Valid Keys)
Caution
x The engine cannot be started if any step or procedure is skipped. Perform all procedures in the
order of the steps.
Conditions
x Have two or more valid keys.
Note
x If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of
programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS.
x If eight keys have already been programmed and it is necessary to program other keys, the previously
programmed key ID numbers must first be cleared.
x If “Customer spare key programming disable” is selected, perform additional key programming using the
M-MDS. (See 09-14-85 No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS).)
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1 KEY 2
KEY FOR
RESISTRATION
KEY 3
Step Procedure Action after procedure

1 LAUNCH PROGRAMMING MODE
1. Switch the ignition to ON using key 1.
2. After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off,
switch the ignition off within approx. 4 s using key 1.
3. Remove key 1. Go to the next step.
5. After verifying that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s and turns off,
switch the ignition off within approx. 4 s using key 2.
6. Remove key 2.
2 PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING Yes Go back to Step 1.
2. Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
3. Remove key 3. No Go to the next step.
4. Are there other keys to be programmed?
09-14–84
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3 VERIFY THAT ANY KEY IS PROGRAMMED
x Verify that the engine can start and run for approx. 5 s or more using all the
programmed keys.
Procedure is completed
Note
x When verifying that the engine starts, wait at least approx. 5 s or more before
starting the engine using the next key.
No. 2 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS)
Caution
order of the steps.
Conditions
x There is only one valid key, or none.
Note
x If a key ID number cannot be programmed and DTC 15 is displayed, the maximum number of
programmed keys may have been reached. Verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS.
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1
KEY FOR
RESISTRATION
KEY 1
09-14–85
SECURITY AND LOCKS

1 PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING Change the key and
1. Connect the M-MDS(IDS) to the DLC-2. repeat Step 1.
(See 09-14-83 M-MDS Connecting Procedure)
2. Switch the ignition to ON using key 1. Note
x Additional key
Note programming
x Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after can be
approx. 1 min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to Yes performed
perform the procedure as indicated. using the
procedure in
3. After the vehicle is identified, select “Body”, then “Security”, then “PATS No.1 Additional
Functions” from the initial screen of the IDS. Key
4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. Programming
item Procedure
x Program Additional Ignition Key (Using Two
5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the IDS screen. Valid Keys).
Note
x After executing the above menu, “This operation is successful” is
displayed. This indicates that the programming of the key that currently
has the ignition switched on is completed. No Go to the next step.
6. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen,
switch the ignition off.
7. Remove key 1.
2 CLOSE THE M-MDS
1. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen, Go to the next step.
select “Finish (this menu)”.
Verify that the engine can be started with the programmed key.
Note
No.3 Additional Key Programming Procedure Changing
Note
x This procedure is performed for disabling the No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using Two
Valid Keys).
x The setting is “Customer spare key programming enable” when the vehicle is new or the keyless control
module is replaced with a new one.
09-14–86
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Procedure
1 CHANGE CUSTOMER SPARE KEY PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
(See 09-14-83 M-MDS Connecting Procedure.)
2. Switch the ignition ON using a key (the key can be either the valid key or an
unprogrammed key).
Note
x If an unprogrammed key is used, the security light starts flashing and DTC
15 is displayed after approx. 1 min. However, this does not indicate an
improper procedure. Continue to perform the procedure as indicated.
3. After the vehicle is identified, select “Body”, then “Security”, then “PATS Procedure is completed
Functions” from the initial screen of the IDS.
4. Select either of the following from the IDS menu to change the additional key
programming procedure.
— When “Customer Spare Key Programming Enable” is selected: The additional
key programming procedure using valid keys is enabled.
— When “Customer Spare Key Programming Disable” is selected: The additional
key programming procedure using valid keys is disabled.
5. Perform the security access according to the directions on the IDS screen.
No.4 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement
Caution
order of the steps.
Conditions
x Have two or more valid keys.
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY
1 REPLACE PCM 09
Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and Go to the next step.
configuration.
(See 01-40A-7 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
09-14–87
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2 PERFORM PARAMETER RESET
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a key (The key can be either the
valid key)
Note
x Although the security light remains illuminated and DTC 23 is displayed
after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure as indicated.
3. After the vehicle is identified, select “Body”, then “Security”, then “PATS
4. Then, select an item from the screen menu.
item
x Parameter Reset
6. Select the replaced parts “PCM” according to the directions on the IDS screen.
Caution
x At this time, do not select the other parts from the IDS menu.
10.Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
11.Switch the ignition to off.
3 VERIFY THAT THE KEY IS PROGRAMMED TO THE PCM Procedure is
Yes
1. Verify that the engine can be started with all the keys. completed
2. Can the engine be started? Perform the
corresponding DTC
No inspection to repair
the malfunctioning
part.
No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Instrument Cluster Replacement
Caution
order of the steps.
Note
x Since two or more keys need to be programmed to start the engine, program two or more keys after the
replacement.
Conditions
x Have two or more keys to be programmed after the replacement.
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1 KEY 2

1 REPLACE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform instrument
cluster replacement and configuration. Go to the next step.
(See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.)
09-14–88
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position using a key (The key can be either the
valid key)
Note
3. After the vehicle is identified, select “Body”, then “Security”, then “PATS Go to the next step.
item
x Parameter Reset
6. Select the replaced parts “IC” according to the directions on the IDS screen.
Caution
7. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen.
3 CLEAR IGNITION KEY ID NUMBERS
1. Select “Ignition Key Code Erase and Program” from the IDS screen menu. Go to the next step.
2. Clear the ignition key code according to the directions on the IDS.
4 PERFORM IGNITION KEY ID NUMBER PROGRAMMING
1. Program two keys according to the directions on the IDS.
3. Switch the ignition to off. Go to the next step.
7. Disconnect the IDS from the DLC-2.
5 VERIFY THAT ANY KEY IS PROGRAMMED Procedure is
Yes
corresponding DTC
the malfunctioning
part.
No.6 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts

(PCM and Instrument Cluster)
Caution
order of the steps.
Note
replacement.
Conditions
09-14–89
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1 KEY 2

1 REPLACE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Refer to INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform instrument
cluster replacement and configuration. Go to the next step.
(See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.)
2 REPLACE PCM
Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and
configuration. Go to the next step.

2. Switch the ignition to ON using a valid key.
Note
4. Then, select an item from the screen menu. Go to the next step.
item
x Parameter Reset
6. Select the replaced parts according to the directions on the IDS screen.
— If the instrument cluster is replaced: Select “IC”.
— If the PCM is replaced: Select “PCM”.
Caution
3. Switch the ignition to off. Go to the next step.
6 VERIFY THAT ANY KEY IS PROGRAMMED Procedure is
Yes
corresponding DTC
the malfunctioning
part.
End Of Sie
09-14–90
SECURITY AND LOCKS
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
Note
x For a key that can start the engine, or no advanced key, the M-MDS can be used to force the ignition to
switch to IG ON.
Foreword
x When replacing immobilizer system-related parts or programming an additional key, program the immobilizer
system-related parts so that the system operates normally. For immobilizer system-related parts programming,
select the programming procedures according to the service. (See 09-14-91 Selection of Procedure for
Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming.)
Caution
x The engine cannot be started if any step or procedure for each service operation is skipped.
Perform all procedures in the order of the steps.
x If any metallic or magnetic object is near the key, communication between the key and the vehicle
may be obstructed, resulting in a failure to program the immobilizer system-related parts. Remove
any metallic or magnetic objects, such as key holders, from the key when programming
immobilizer system-related parts.
x If any of the following devices are inside the vehicle, programming of immobilizer system-related
parts may fail. Do not bring any of the following devices or similar products inside the vehicle
when programming immobilizer system-related parts.
— Advanced key
— M-MDS
x If the engine is started during immobilizer system-related parts programming, the programming
mode cancels. Therefore, do not start the engine unless indicated in the procedure. Repeat the
procedure from the beginning if the engine is started during the immobilizer system-related parts
programming.
x If an advanced key is near the vehicle during immobilizer system-related parts programming, it
may be programmed mistakenly. Keep advanced keys 1 m away from the vehicle unless indicated
in the procedure.
Note
x The “Valid key” or “Valid advanced key” referred to in this manual indicates the key that can start the
engine.
x Two or more key ID numbers must be programmed for the engine to start.
x A maximum of eight key ID numbers can be programmed for one vehicle.
x The number of programmed key ID numbers can be verified using the M-MDS.
x Do not select any screen menu other than the ones indicated in the procedure during M-MDS operation.
Selection of Procedure for Immobilizer System-Related Parts Programming

1. Verify that the ROOM fuse, EGI fuse, STEERING LOCK fuse are equipped.
2. Select the applicable programming procedure from the service content of the immobilizer system-related parts.
09
09-14–91
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Immobilizer System-Related Parts Service and Programming Procedure Table
No. Service Programming procedure
(See 09-14-92 No.1 Additional Key
1 Additional key programming Have one valid key or valid advanced key Programming Procedure (Using the M-
MDS).)
2 Programming due to PCM replacement
Procedure Due to PCM Replacement.)
3 Programming due to steering lock unit replacement Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit
Replacement.)
4 Programming due to keyless control module replacement Procedure Due to Keyless Control
Module Replacement.)
Programming due to simultaneous replacement of immobilizer system-related (See 09-14-100 No.5 Programming
parts Procedure Due to Simultaneous
5 x PCM Replacement of Immobilizer System-
x Keyless control module related Parts (PCM, Keyless Control
x Steering lock unit Module, and Steering Lock Unit).)
(See 09-14-103 No.6 Programming/
6 Key replacement
Clearing Procedure of Auxiliary Key.)
7 Programming due to coil antenna replacement
8 Programming after keyless receiver replacement
M-MDS Connecting Procedure
Note
x Do not place the M-MDS in the vehicle while programming the immobilizer system.
1. Fully lower the door glass.

3. Place the IDS outside the vehicle.
Caution
with the cable.
DLC-2
No.1 Additional Key Programming Procedure (Using the M-MDS)
Caution
order of the steps.
Conditions
x There is only one valid key.
Note
x If a key ID number cannot be programmed, verify the number of programmed keys using the M-MDS.
09-14–92
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1
KEY FOR
RESISTRATION
KEY 2

1 VERIFY THAT KEY 1 ARE VALID
1. Start the engine using key 1.
Caution
x Do not place the advanced key in the vehicle when starting the Go to the next step.
engine with key 1.
3. Switch the ignition off.
2 PERFORM ADDITIONAL KEY PROGRAMMING Change the key and
Yes
1. Connect the M-MDS(IDS) to the DLC-2. repeat Step 2.
(See 09-14-92 M-MDS Connecting Procedure)
2. Insert key 1 into the key slot and depress the clutch.
Note
x The keyless indicator light (green) illuminates for approx. 5 s, then turns
off.
3. After verifying that the keyless indicator light (green) has illuminated, release the
clutch within approx. 5 s and switch the ignition from offoACCoON.
4. Pull out key 1 from the key slot and insert key 2 into the slot.
Note
x When key 1 is pulled out of the key slot, the advanced key system warning
alarm sounds and the keyless indicator light (red) begins flashing, however
continue with the procedure.
item 09
x Program Additional Ignition Key
Note
x After executing the above menu, “This operation is successful” is
displayed. This indicates that the programming of the key that currently
has the ignition switched on is completed.
x If an additional key is to be programmed, continue to perform the
procedure according to the directions on the IDS screen. To finish the key
programming, go to the next step.
3 CLOSE THE M-MDS
1. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen, Go to the next step.
2. Switch the ignition off
09-14–93
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Verify that the engine can be started with the programmed key.
Note
No.2 Programming Procedure Due to PCM Replacement
Caution
order of the steps.
Conditions
x Prepare a valid key or an advanced key that can start the engine.
Procedure
VALID KEY
OR OR
ADVANCED KEY
KEY 1 ADVANCED KEY

1 REPLACE PCM
Refer to PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to perform PCM replacement and
configuration. Go to the next step.

2. Insert a valid key into the key slot and depress the clutch pedal. Or, bring the
valid advanced key into the vehicle and depress the clutch pedal.
3. After verifying that the keyless indicator light (green) has illuminated, release the
clutch within approx. 5 s and switch the ignition from offoACCoON.
Note
item
x Parameter Reset
7. Select the replaced parts “PCM” according to the directions on the IDS screen.
Caution
10.Switch the ignition on.
11.Verify that the security light illuminates for approx. 3 s, and then turns off.
12.Switch the ignition off.
09-14–94
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3 VERIFY THAT THE KEY IS PROGRAMMED TO THE PCM Procedure is
Yes
corresponding DTC
the malfunctioning
part.
No.3 Programming Procedure Due to Steering Lock Unit Replacement
Caution
order of the steps.
Note
replacement.
Conditions
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1 KEY 2
Action after
Step Procedure procedure
1 REPLACE THE STEERING LOCK UNIT
Replace the steering lock unit. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN Go to the next step.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM].)
2 CONNECT THE M-MDS
2. Remove the valid keys or valid advanced keys from the vehicle (keep them 1 m or more
from the vehicle), and switch the ignition on according to the directions on the IDS
screen. Select, “There is no programmed ignition key and programmed advanced key”
from the IDS screen.
Caution
x Because the ignition is switched on using “Special Service Mode”, the
engine cannot be started during this IG cycle.
x Although the security light or the keyless warning light (red) illuminates or 09
flashes, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform
the procedure as indicated.
3 PERFORM STEERING LOCK UNIT PROGRAMMING
1. Select “Steering lock unit programming” from the IDS screen.
2. Bring the programmed advanced key into the vehicle.
3. Complete the security access procedure and the steering lock unit programming
according to the directions on the IDS screen.
(See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED Go to the next step.
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM])
4. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen, select
“Finish (this menu)”.
7. Remove the programmed card key from the vehicle.
09-14–95
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
4 ESTABLISH THE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM WITH KEY 1
Note
x By starting the engine, the immobilizer system is established and key programming
is finished.

2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following
figure.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove key 1.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
IGNITION START) PROGRAMMED
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
off a Go to the next step.
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
LIGHT b
OFF
a
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
5 VERIFY THAT ANY KEY IS PROGRAMMED. Repeat Step 5
1. Start the engine using key 2. using each
Yes
2. Verify that the security light and keyless warning light operate as shown in the following programmed
figure. key.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
off a
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
LIGHT b Go to the next
OFF No
a step.
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
09-14–96
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
6 VERIFY THAT ANY ADVANCED KEY IS PROGRAMMED.
2. Close all doors.
3. Remove the key from the key slot and place it on the front passenger's seat.
4. Start the engine using the advanced key.
figure.
6. After verifying that the keyless warning light turns off, switch the ignition off.
START
(ENGINE
START) Procedure is
IGNITION ON completed
SWITCH
off
Approx.
ON
SECURITY 3s
LIGHT
OFF
KEYLESS ON
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s
No.4 Programming Procedure Due to Keyless Control Module Replacement
Caution
order of the steps.
Note
x Before beginning the procedure, verify that the customer has turned in all of the advanced keys and keys
for the vehicle.
x The engine cannot be started unless an advanced key and two or more keys are programmed after the
replacement.
Conditions
x Have one or more advanced keys to be programmed after the replacement.
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1 KEY 2
09
KEY FOR
RESISTRATION
ADVANCED KEY
09-14–97
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
1 REPLACE KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
Refer to KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION for the keyless control
module replacement and configuration. (See 09-14-68 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START Go to the next step.
SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-73 KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
from the vehicle), and switch the ignition on according to the directions on the IDS
screen. Select, “There is no programmed ignition key and programmed advanced key”
from the IDS screen.
Caution
engine cannot be started during this IG cycle.
x The security light or the keyless warning light (red) illuminates or flashes,
this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the
procedure as indicated.
Note Go to the next step.

x Although the security light starts flashing and DTC 15 is displayed after approx. 1
min, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the
procedure as indicated.
3. After the vehicle is identified, select “Body”, then “Security”, then “PATS Functions” from
the initial screen of the IDS.
item
x Parameter Reset
6. Select the replaced parts “RKE” according to the directions on the IDS screen.
Caution
1. Program two keys according to the directions on the IDS. Go to the next step.
5 PERFORM ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING
1. Select “Program Additional Ignition Key” from the IDS screen menu.
2. Program the advanced key according to the directions on the IDS.
1. Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming” from the IDS screen menu.
2. Complete the steering lock unit programming according to the directions on the IDS.
(See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
09-14–98
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
Note
x By starting the engine, the immobilizer system is established and key programming is
finished.

figure.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
LIGHT b
OFF
a
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
Yes
figure. key.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
off a
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
OFF No
a step.
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s
a
b 09
DISPLAY
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
09-14–99
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
2. Close all doors.
figure.
START
(ENGINE
START) Procedure is
SWITCH
off
Approx.
ON
SECURITY 3s
LIGHT
OFF
KEYLESS ON
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s
No.5 Programming Procedure Due to Simultaneous Replacement of Immobilizer System-related Parts

(PCM, Keyless Control Module, and Steering Lock Unit)
Caution
order of the steps.
Note
x If the keyless control module is replaced, complete the configuration before performing the following
procedure.
x When replacing the keyless control module or the steering lock, remove the valid keys or valid advanced
keys from the vehicle (keep them 1 m or more from the vehicle) and switch the ignition on according to the
directions on the M-MDS screen. Select, “There is no programmed ignition key and programmed
advanced key” from the M-MDS screen.
Caution
x Because the ignition is switched on using “Special Service Mode”, the engine cannot be started
during this IG cycle.
x Although the security light or the keyless warning light (red) illuminates or flashes, this does not
indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform the procedure as indicated.
Caution
M-MDS menu
(1): Parameter Reset
(2): Ignition Key Code Erase and Program
(3): Program Additional Advanced Key
(4): Steering Lock Unit Programming
M-MDS execution menu/

Replacement part Conditions
sequence
Keyless control module and PCM x Have two or more keys to be
Keyless control module and steering lock unit programmed after the
replacement.
1o2o3o4
x Have one or more advanced
Keyless control module, PCM, and steering lock unit keys to be programmed after
the replacement.
Have two or more keys to be
PCM and steering lock unit 1o4 programmed after the
replacement.
09-14–100
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Procedure
VALID KEY
KEY 1 KEY 2
KEY FOR
RESISTRATION
ADVANCED KEY
Action after
1 REPLACE UNITS OR PARTS
Replace the unit or parts.
2. Switch the ignition off using key 1.
Note
x Although the security light flashes or illuminates and DTC 15 or 23 is displayed
after approx. 1 min, continue to perform the procedure.
items
x Parameter Reset
6. Select the replaced parts according to the directions on the IDS screen.
— If the PCM is replaced: Select ”PCM”.
— If the keyless control module is replaced: Select“ RKE”.
Caution
1. Program two keys according to the directions on the IDS. Go to the next step.
2. Verify that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen. 09
5 PERFORM ADVANCED KEY PROGRAMMING
1. Select “Program Additional Advanced Key” from the IDS screen menu. Go to the next step.
2. Program the advanced key according to the directions on the IDS.
1. Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming” from the IDS screen menu.
2. Complete the steering lock unit programming according to the directions on the IDS.
(See 09-14-105 STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) Go to the next step.
09-14–101
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
Note
finished.

figure.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
LIGHT b
OFF
a
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
Yes
figure. key.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
off a
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
OFF No
a step.
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
09-14–102
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
2. Close all doors.
figure.
START
(ENGINE
START) Procedure is
SWITCH
off
Approx.
ON
SECURITY 3s
LIGHT
OFF
KEYLESS ON
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s
No.6 Programming/Clearing Procedure of Auxiliary Key
Caution
order of the steps.
Action after
1 Replace the key. Go to the next step.
2 PROGRAM/CLEAR THE AUXILIARY KEY
from the vehicle) and switch the ignition on according to the directions on the M-
MDS(IDS) screen. Select, “There is no programmed ignition key and programmed
advanced key” from the IDS screen.
Caution
engine cannot be started during this IG cycle. Go to the next step.
x Although the security light or the keyless warning light (red) illuminates or
flashes, this does not indicate an improper procedure. Continue to perform
the procedure as indicated.
2. After verifying that the PATS function menu is displayed again on the IDS screen, select Go to the next step.
09-14–103
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
Note
finished.

figure.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
LIGHT b
OFF
a
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
Yes
figure. key.
START EXAMPLE
(ENGINE NUMBER OF
DISPLAY
METHOD
SWITCH ON KEYS
off a
Approx. 1
SECURITY ON 3s
OFF No
a step.
ON
KEYLESS 2
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s b
DISPLAY a
METHOD
3
b
a : Approx. 0.3 s
b : Approx. 0.9 s
09-14–104
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Action after
2. Close all doors.
figure.
6. After verifying that the keyless warning light turns off, switch the ignition to off.
START
(ENGINE
START) Procedure is
SWITCH
off
Approx.
ON
SECURITY 3s
LIGHT
OFF
KEYLESS ON
WARNING
LIGHT OFF
Approx. 1 s
ie
STEERING LOCK UNIT ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM]
Caution
x Do not place the following devices in the vehicle while programming, otherwise programming
cannot be performed:
— M-MDS
Note
x The steering lock unit and steering lock component are a single unit. Therefore, replace the steering lock
component when replacing steering lock unit. (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM])(See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM])
x For this procedure, a programmed card key is necessary. If there is no programmed card key, perform the
steering lock unit programming after the card key programming.

2. Fully lower the driver-side door glass.
4. Set the IDS outside the vehicle with its cable
passing through the door glass opening.
Caution
with the cable.

items from the initialization screen of the IDS. DLC-2
(2) Select “Security”.
(3) Select “PATS Functions”.
6. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
(1) Select “Steering Lock Unit Programming”.
09-14–105
SECURITY AND LOCKS
KEYLESS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
Vehicle Interior, Front
(1) Upper panel (See. 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [G35M-R].) (See 05-16B-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [G66M-R].) (See 05-16C-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
(6) Climate control unit (See 07-40B-25 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MANUAL AIR
CONDITIONER].)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
4. Remove the keyless antenna.
SCREW
Vehicle Interior, Center

(1) Upper panel (See. 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(3) Shift lever knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [G35M-R].) (See 05-16B-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
(6) Rear console (See 09-17-46 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–106
SECURITY AND LOCKS
CONNENTOR
SCREW
REAR CONSOLE
KEYLESS ANTENNA
Vehicle Interior, Rear

2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (4SD)(See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[4SD].)
3. Remove the rear seat. (5HB, WGN) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
KEYLESS ANTENNA
5. Remove the nut.
CONNECTOR
NUT 2.0—8.0 N·m

{21—81 kgf·cm, 18—70 in·lbf}
Vehicle Exterior, Rear

09-14–107
SECURITY AND LOCKS
2. Remove the nut.
4SD, 5HB WGN
NUT 2.0—8.0 N·m NUT 2.0—8.0 N·m

{21—81 kgf·cm, 18—70 in·lbf} {21—81 kgf·cm, 18—70 in·lbf}
CONNENTOR KEYLESS CONNENTOR KEYLESS

ANTENNA ANTENNA

Vehicle Exterior, Driver's Door/Passenger's Door
Note
x The keyless antenna (vehicle exterior, driver's door/passenger's door) is built into the front outer handle.
(See 09-14-10 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
KEYLESS ANTENNA
09-14–108
SECURITY AND LOCKS
KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
2. Slightly bend back the front mudguard. (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the blot.
CONNECTOR
KEYLESS
BEEPER
BOLT
9—12 N·m {92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
5. Press the keyless beeper tab aside using a tape-

wrapped flathead screwdriver. BRACKET
6. Remove the keyless beeper from the bracket.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal. B
End Of Sie A
A
KEYLESS BEEPER
BRACKET
TAB
FLATHEAD
SCREW BRACKET
DRIVER
KEYLESS BEEPER
KEYLESS BEEPER INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
2. Remove the keyless beeper. (See 09-14-109 KEYLESS BEEPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED
3. Apply battery positive voltage and connect the ground to each terminal and verify the keyless beeper sound
operation.
x If the beep sound cannot be verified, replace the keyless beeper.
09-14–109
SECURITY AND LOCKS
B A
End Of Sie
REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
Note
x The request switches are built into the front
outer handles. (See 09-14-10 FRONT REQUEST SWITCH
OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
WGN
(5) Liftgate garnish (See 09-16-28 LIFTGATE GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–110
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Remove the request switch in the direction of the
arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the (2)
request warning switch tabs in the direction of the
arrow (1).
End Of Sie (1) (1)
REQUEST SWITCH
TOUCH SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
Note
x The touch sensor are built into the front
outer handles. (See 09-14-10 FRONT TOUCH SENSOR
OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
REQUEST SWITCH INSPECTION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION.)
(6) Front door key cylinder (Driver’s side) (See 09-14-31 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(7) Front outer handle (See 09-14-10 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–111
SECURITY AND LOCKS
4. Verify the continuity of request switch terminals A and D.
A D A

table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the front
CONTINUITY
outer handle.
REQUEST TERMINAL
SWITCH A D
PUSH (ON)
NOT PUSH (OFF)
WGN
(6) Request switch (See 09-14-110 REQUEST SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS
3. Verify the continuity of request switch terminals A and B.
A B
09-14–112
SECURITY AND LOCKS
table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the request
: CONTINUITY
switch.
TERMINAL
SWITCH
POSITION A B
ON (PUSH)
OFF (RELEASE)
CUSTOMIZED FUNCTION SETTING PROCEDURE [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM]
items from the initial screen of the IDS.
(1) Select “Module Programming”.
3. Then, select items from the screen menu in the
following order.
(1) Select “Programmable Parameters”.
4. Select an item name, then select option.
DLC-2
Setting
M-MDS display Function Initial setting Control unit
content
Advanced keyless entry and
push button start system Disabled/ Keyless control
Advanced keyless function Enabled
function can be set to Enabled module
inoperable.
Prevention function of key Key-left-in-trunk prevention Disabled/ Keyless control
Disabled
Containment in Trunk or Liftgate function can be set. Enabled module
The function to automatically
switch off the ignition after one
hour has elapsed since the Disabled/ Keyless control
ACC auto off Enabled
ignition was switched to ACC Enabled module
can be set to operable or
inoperable.
The transition pattern in which
the ignition position is switched Keyless control
Power off mode Direct Direct/Stepwise
by pressing the push button module
start can be selected.
Advanced key remaining
Disabled/ Keyless control
Advanced key battery low warning battery level/battery dead Enabled
Enabled module
warning can be set.
European
(L.H.D. U.K.)
Volume adjustment of the specs. Keyless control
Answer back buzzer volume Disabled/ 4-10
answer back buzzer can be set. x Disabled module
Except above
x 5*1
Volume adjustment of the Keyless control
Warning buzzer volume
warning buzzer can be set. 8*2 5-10
module
Disabled/ Keyless control
Auto lock Auto lock function can be set. Disabled
Enabled module
*1
: Depending on the vehicle, the initial value of the answer back buzzer volume may be 4. if the answer back
buzzer volume is reset to the initial value, set the value according to the table.
*2
: Depending on the vehicle, the initial value of the warning buzzer volume may be 10. if the warning buzzer
09-14–113
SECURITY AND LOCKS
volume is reset to the initial value, set the value according to the table.
ie
COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
EM

2. Remove the column cover. (See 09-17-27 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the coil antenna connector.
4. Remove the screw. STEERING LOCK COIL ANTENNA
5. Detach the coil antenna hooks and remove the
coil antenna from the steering lock.
COIL ANTENNA
CONNECTOR
SCREW
TAB
ADVANCED KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
1. Pull out the auxiliary key.
AUXILIARY KEY
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver into the notch in the

transmitter and rotate it in the direction shown in
the figure to open the transmitter.
TRANSMITTER
09-14–114
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Remove the battery.
BATTERY
4. Install the new battery (CR2025) with the positive

pole facing down.
5. Align the upper and lower covers and close the
transmitter.
BATTERY
6. Insert the auxiliary key.
AUXILIARY KEY
COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
09-14–115
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Disconnect the coil antenna connector.
4. Remove the screw. TAB
5. Detach the coil antenna hooks and remove the
coil antenna from the steering lock.
COIL ANTENNA
STEERING LOCK
COIL ANTENNA
SCREW CONNECTOR
CLEARING ADVANCED KEY [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
Caution
x Protect the cable and body contact area
with a clean rag, otherwise they could be
damaged.

(1) Select the “Body”.
(2) Select the “Security”.
(3) Select the “PATS Functions”.
5. Then, select items from the screen menu in the following order.
(1) Select “Advanced Key Code Erase and Program”.
End Of Sie
ADVANCED KEY ID CODE REGISTRATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
Note
x For a key that can start the engine, or no advanced key, the M-MDS can be used to force the ignition to
switch is IG ON. (See 09-21-10 FORCED IGNITION ON [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
09-14–116
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Caution
with the cable.

(1) Select the “Body”.
(2) Select the “Security”.
(3) Select the “PATS Functions”.
5. Select the following from the screen menu.
(1) Select the “Program Additional Advanced Key”.
Sie
INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the intruder sensor cover. (See 09-17-120 INTRUDER SENSOR COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
INTRUDER SENSOR INSPECTION
2. Remove the intruder sensor cover. (See 09-17-120 INTRUDER SENSOR COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Measure the intruder sensor terminal voltage
SHORT WIRING
using the short wiring harness connector in the HANESS CONNECTOR
position shown in the figure.
Note
x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in
the table, inspect the short wiring harness
connector for continuity. (See 09-14-118
Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring
Harness Connector.) If the short wiring
harness connector is normal, inspect the
parts under “Inspection items”.
— If the system does not work properly
even though the parts or related wiring
harnesses do not have any malfunction, replace the intruder sensor.
INTRUDER SENSOR
D C B
Measurement
Terminal Signal name Connected to Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
condition
Under any
B GND Body ground 1.0 or less Ground
condition
Terminal used for communication therefore determination based
C DATA BCM
on terminal voltage inspection not possible.
Under any
D Power supply ROOM 15 A fuse B+ ROOM 15 A fuse
condition
09-14–117
SECURITY AND LOCKS
Continuity Inspection Of Short Wiring Harness Connector
1. Verify that the continuity between the short wiring harness connector terminals is as indicated in the table.
x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, replace the short wiring harness connector.
INTRUDER SENSOR
INTRUDER SENSOR SHORT WIRING
WIRING HARNESS SIDE CONNECTOR HANESS CONNECTOR
D C B
E I
L
: Continuity
Test THEFT-DETERRENT
SHORT HARNESS
condition SIREN CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR SIDE
SIDE
D C B E I L
Under any
condition
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

5HB
4. Remove the liftgate opener switch.
SCREW LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
WGN
09-14–118
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Remove the request switch in the direction of the
request warning switch tabs in the direction of the
arrow (1). (1) (1)
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH
LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION

5HB
(5) Liftgate opener switch (See 09-14-118 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the continuity of liftgate opener switch terminals A and B.
A B

table.
: CONTINUITY
liftgate opener switch.
TERMINAL
SWITCH
POSITION A B
ON (PUSH)
OFF (RELEASE)
WGN
09-14–119
SECURITY AND LOCKS
(6) Liftgate opener switch (See 09-14-118 LIFTGATE OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the continuity of liftgate opener switch terminals A and B.
A B

table.
: CONTINUITY
liftgate opener switch.
TERMINAL
SWITCH
POSITION A B
ON (PUSH)
OFF (RELEASE)
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(2) Trunk lid trim (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the trunk lid opener switch.
SCREW TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH
End Of Sie
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH INSPECTION

(2) Trunk lid trim (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) High-mount brake light (4SD)(See 09-18-46 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Trunk lid opener switch (See 09-14-120 TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-14–120
SECURITY AND LOCKS
3. Verify the continuity of trunk lid opener switch terminals A and B.
A B

table.
: CONTINUITY
trunk lid opener switch.
End Of Sie SWITCH
TERMINAL
POSITION A B
ON (PUSH)
OFF (RELEASE)
09-14–121
SUNROOF
09-15 SUNROOF
SUNROOF LOCATION INDEX . . . . . . . . 09-15–1 FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL . . . . . . 09-15–7
DEFLECTOR FRONT DRAIN HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-15–2 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-15–8
GLASS PANEL REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL . . . . . . . 09-15–9
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-15–2 REAR DRAIN HOSE
GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . 09-15–2 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-15–13
SUNROOF UNIT SUNROOF MOTOR
SUNROOF UNIT SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . 09-15–14
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 09-15–4 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-15–14
Sunroof Motor Assembly Note . . . . . . . 09-15–5 SUNROOF SWITCH
Guide Disassembly Note . . . . . . . . . . . 09-15–6 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-15–15
Guide Assembly Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-15–6 SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . 09-15–15
Decoration Link Assembly Note . . . . . . 09-15–7
SUNROOF
d of Toc
SUNROOF LOCATION INDEX
I
4
5
1 Glass panel 5 Rear drain hose

(See 09-15-2 GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/ (See 09-15-9 REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL.)
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-15-13 REAR DRAIN HOSE
(See 09-15-2 GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT.) INSTALLATION.)
2 Deflector 6 Sunroof switch
(See 09-15-2 DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-15-15 SUNROOF SWITCH REMOVAL/
3 Sunroof unit (See 09-15-15 SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION.)
(See 09-15-3 SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/ 7 Sunroof motor
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-15-13 SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL/
(See 09-15-4 SUNROOF UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ INSTALLATION.)
ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-15-14 SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION.)
4 Front drain hose
(See 09-15-7 FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL.)
(See 09-15-8 FRONT DRAIN HOSE
INSTALLATION.)
SUNROOF
DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Fully open the glass panel.
2. Press the spring in the direction shown by the
arrow and remove it from the hook. DEFLECTOR
3. Remove the deflector.
End Of Sie
DEFLECTOR
HOOK
SPRING
GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Fully close the glass panel.
2. Fully open the sunshade.
3. Remove the screws, and then remove the glass
panel. SCREW
GLASS PANEL
4. Peel the weatherstrip off the glass panel.

5. Install in the reverse order of removal. GLASS PANEL
6. Adjust the glass panel. (See 09-15-2 GLASS
PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie
WEATHERSTRIP
GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT

1. Fully close the glass panel.
2. Measure the gap and height between the glass panel and body.
3. If not as specified, loosen the glass panel installation screws and reposition the glass panel.
Clearance
a: 0.3—2.3 mm {0.02—0.09 in}
b: 0 mm {0 in}
SUNROOF
4. Tighten the installation screws.
5. Insert a plastic card between the weatherstrip and A
the body of the vehicle. Verify that the sunroof is A
shut tightly (there is resistance when the plastic A A
A
card is moved). A
x If the sunroof is not shut tightly, readjust by
performing Steps 3 and 4.
b a
(+)
(-)
Sec. A—A
End Of Sie
PLASTIC CARD
WEATHERSTRIP
SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x If the sunshade is forced close while the sunroof is open, the sunshade could be damaged.

2. Remove the sunroof seaming welt.
3. Remove the following parts: HEADLINER
(1) A-pillar trims (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM SUNROOF SEAMING WELT
(2) Upper anchor of the front seat belt (See 08-
11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(3) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-72 FRONT
SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF
PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) B-pillar lower trims (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR
LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) B-pillar upper trims (See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR
UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) FRONT
(7) Rear side seat back (4SD) (See 09-13-43 B-PILLAR
REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/ UPPER TRIM
INSTALLATION.)
(8) Tire house trims (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE
(9) Trunk side upper trims (5HB) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolts (5HB) (LH) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [4SD].)(See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB, WGN].)
4. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with auto-dimming mirror only)
5. Remove the sunvisors. (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
6. Remove the front map light. (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
7. Remove the assist handle. (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
8. Disconnect the roof harness connector, remove the clip, and remove the connector.
9. Disconnect the rear washer hose.
10. Disconnect the front and rear drain hose from the sunroof frame.
SUNROOF
SUNROOF UNIT
NUT
BOLT
NUT
BOLT, NUT:
8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf}
12. Remove the nuts, and then remove the sunroof unit.
14. Adjust the glass panel. (See 09-15-2 GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie
SUNROOF UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Note
x If the guide or sunroof motor is removed, the glass panel will not be positioned properly after the re-
installation. To ensure proper positioning of the glass panel, place alignment marks on the guide pin and
frame before removing the guide or sunroof motor.

SUNROOF
2 1
16
6 15
4
13
12
11 3 16
9
10
4 15
3
14 11 13 17
10
12
9
1 Screw A 11 Screw D
2 Drip rail 12 Set plate
3 Sunshade stopper 13 Screw E
4 Screw B 14 Cushion
5 Sunshade Guide
15 (See 09-15-6 Guide Disassembly Note.)
6 Deflector
(See 09-15-6 Guide Assembly Note.)
7 Screw C
Decoration link
Sunroof motor 16
8 (See 09-15-7 Decoration Link Assembly Note.)
(See 09-15-5 Sunroof Motor Assembly Note.)
17 Frame
9 Bracket
10 Front stopper
Sunroof Motor Assembly Note
Note
x If the guide is removed, the sunroof motor initial position setting has to be performed. After installing the
sunroof unit, perform the initial position setting using the following procedure.
SUNROOF
1. The initialization mode starts after approx. 12.7 s from when the tilt up switch has been pressed and held. The
glass stops after it has moved approx. 30 mm {1.2 in} towards the closed position.
Note
x Only the tilt up switch is available during the initialization mode.
x The initialization may finish at the first inching operation depending on the glass position when the motor
is installed.
x If the glass position is between the closed and semi-tilt positions when the motor is removed, the glass
moves in the tilt up direction (to the full tilt position stored in the motor). However, if the tilt up switch is
pressed and held, the initialization mode starts.
2. When the tilt up switch is pressed again, the glass continues to move approx. 30 mm {1.2 in} and stops.
3. Repeat this procedure several times so that the glass moves to the fully closed, full tilt (normal operation
position), and full tilt (mechanical stopper position) positions.
4. After the glass is moved to the full tilt position (mechanical stopper position), it returns to the tilt down direction
slightly and the initialization is completed.
Guide Disassembly Note

1. Place an alignment mark on the guide pin and FRONT GUIDE
flame. PIN
MARK
FRAME
ampccw0000058
2. Slide the guide to the rear of the sunroof frame,

and remove the guide and decoration link as a
single unit.
GUIDE
am8rrw00000908
Guide Assembly Note

1. Move the pin to the position shown in the figure. FRONT
PIN GUIDE
MARK
FRAME
am8rrw00000909
SUNROOF
Decoration Link Assembly Note
1. Set the guide pin to the decoration link.
Sie
DECORATION LINK
GUIDE
PIN
FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL

2. Partially peel back the seaming welt.
3. Remove the rain sensor cover. (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR
4. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system)
(1) Glove compartment (See 09-17-38 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-42 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Side panel (See 09-17-36 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front scuff plates (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Front side trims (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Shift knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX [G35M-
R].) (See 05-16B-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX [G66M-R].) (See 05-
16C-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX [A26M-R].)
(10)Center panel lower (See 09-17-33 CENTER PANEL LOWER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Climate control unit (See 07-40A-29 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [FULL-AUTO
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(12)Rear console (See 09-17-46 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(13)Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(14)Lower panel (See 09-17-34 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(15)Driver-side air bag module (See 08-10-6 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(16)Steering wheel (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) (See 06-13-10 STEERING
WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
(17)Column cover (See 09-17-27 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(18)Combination switch (See 09-18-60 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(19)Meter hood (See 09-17-36 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(20)Instrument cluster (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(21)Center panel upper (See 09-17-31 CENTER PANEL UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(22)Audio unit (Vehicles with audio system) (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09
(23)Car-navigation unit (Vehicles with car-navigation system) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
(24)Cowl grille (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(25)Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)(See 06-13-10
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
(26)Steering shaft (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)(See 06-13-10 STEERING
(27)Passenger-side air bag module (See 08-10-7 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(28)A-pillar trims (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
SUNROOF
(29)Dashboard (See 09-17-10 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(30)Sunroof seaming welt
(31)Upper anchor of the front seat belt (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(32)Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(33)B-pillar lower trims (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(34)B-pillar upper trims (See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(35)Lower anchor of the front seat belt installation bolts (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(36)Rear seat cushion (4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(37)Rear side seat back (4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(38)Tire house trim (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(40)Headliner (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)
7. Remove the sunvisors. (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Remove the front map light. (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Remove the assist handle. (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Disconnect the front drain hose from the sunroof frame.
12. Remove the front drain hose from the clips.
13. Pull the front drain hose into the room side. A
B
14. Remove the front drain hose. B
B
End Of Sie C A
B
B
B Sec. A—A Sec. B—B
C
BODY
Sec. C—C
GROMMET
FRONT DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION
Caution
x If the front drain hose is pinched or bent anywhere, the water in the hose may not discharge and
enter the inside of the vehicle. During and after installation of the trims and the headliner, always
make sure there is no interference with the front drain hose. Fix any problem if found.
1. Apply soapy water to the front drain hose inserting area.

2. Insert one end (the wider end) of the front drain hose into the sunroof frame.
3. Install the front drain hose to the clips, parallel to the pillar and free of slack.
4. Insert the front drain hose joint into the hinge pillar inner hole.
5. Install the assist handle. (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Install the front map light. (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Install the sunvisors. (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Connect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)
(1) Headliner (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(3) C-pillar trims (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Rear side seat back (4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Rear seat cushion (4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(7) Lower anchor of the front seat belt installation bolts (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(10)Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Upper anchor of the front seat belt (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
SUNROOF
INSTALLATION.)
(20)Car-navigation unit (Vehicles with car-navigation system) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
INSTALLATION.)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(33)Shift panel (See 09-17-44 SHIFT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(34)Shift knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX [G35M-
R].) (See 05-16B-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX [G66M-R].) (See 05-
16C-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM LOCATION INDEX [A26M-R].)
(35)Decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(36)Upper panel (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(37)Front side trims (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(38)Front scuff plates (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(39)Side panel (See 09-17-36 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(40)Dashboard under cover (See 09-17-42 DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(41)Glove compartment (See 09-17-38 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10. Connect the rain sensor connector. (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system)
11. Install the rain sensor cover. (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-41 RAIN SENSOR
REINITIALIZATION SETTING.)
12. Install the seaming welt.
End Of Sie
REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL
(1) Sunroof seaming welt
(10)D-pillar trims (wagon) (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Trunk side upper trim (5HB, wagon) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
SUNROOF
4. Disconnect the dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with dimming mirror)
5. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. (Vehicles with rain sensor)
8. Remove the headliner. (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10. Remove the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
11. Disconnect the rear drain hose from the sunroof frame.
12. Remove the rear drain hose from the clips.
4SD
A
Sec. A—A B
C
A
B C
Sec. B—B B
D
Sec. C—C
(LEFT-SIDE) E
E
B B
Sec. D—D
(RIGHT-SIDE)
Sec. E—E
SUNROOF
5HB
A Sec. A—A Sec. B—B
A A
A
A
A
B B
SUNROOF
Wagon
Sec. A—A Sec. B—B Sec. C—C
Sec. D—D Sec. E—E Sec. F—F

(LEFT-SIDE)
A
C
B
A
C C LH ONLY
C D E E
D
D
D
E
E
F
F
RH ONLY
13. Pull the rear drain hose into the room side.
14. Remove the rear drain hose.
End Of Sie
SUNROOF
REAR DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION
Caution
x If the rear drain hose is pinched or bent anywhere, the water in the hose may not discharge and
enter the inside of the vehicle. During and after installation of the trims and the headliner, always
make sure there is no interference with the rear drain hose. Fix any problem if found.
1. Apply soapy water to the rear drain hose inserting area.

2. Insert one end (the wider side) of the rear drain hose into the sunroof frame.
3. Install the rear drain hose to the clips parallel to the pillar and free of slack.
4. Insert the rear drain hose joint into the rear pillar inner hole.
5. Install the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Install the trunk end trim. (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Install the headliner. (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Install the assist handle. (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Install the sunvisors. (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
10. Connect the rain sensor connector. (Vehicles with rain sensor)
11. Connect the dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with dimming mirror)
(1) Trunk side upper trim (5HB, wagon) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(2) D-pillar trims (wagon) (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
13. Install the seaming welt.
Sie
SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(1) Sunroof seaming welt
(8) Lower anchor of the front seat belt installation bolts (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(9) Rear side seat (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(12)Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolts (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [4SD].)(See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB, WGN].)
(13)Rain sensor cover (Vehicles with auto light / wiper system) (See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)
SUNROOF
6. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector.
7. Remove the screws, and then remove the sunroof
motor. SUNROOF SCREW
8. Install in the reverse order of removal. MOTOR
Note
x If the glass panel or the sunroof motor is
moved with the sunroof motor removed,
initial position setting of the sunroof motor SUNROOF MOTOR
will be required. Perform initial position CONNECTOR
setting referring to the Sunroof Motor
Assembly Note. (See 09-15-4 SUNROOF
UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
End Of Sie
SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Measure the voltage at each terminal (other than terminal G).
x If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under “Inspection item” and the related wiring harnesses.
3. If the parts and wiring harnesses are normal but the system still does not work properly, replace the sunroof
motor.
SUNROOF MOTOR WIRING

* G E C A
J H F * B
Termi
Signal Connected to Test condition Voltage (V) Inspection item
nal
Sunroof is fully opening. B+ x Sunroof switch
A Slide open Sunroof switch x Related wiring
Other 1.0 or less harnesses
Sunroof is closing/tilting down. B+ x Sunroof switch
Slide close/tilt
B Sunroof switch x Related wiring
down Other 1.0 or less harnesses
Sunroof is tilting up. B+ x Sunroof switch
C Tilt up Sunroof switch x Related wiring
Turn the ignition switch to the
B+ x A/C 10A fuse
E IG2 A/C 10A fuse ON position. x Related wiring
F Vehicle speed Instrument cluster Pulse signal — x Related wiring
harnesses
G GND GND Under any condition 1.0 or less Related wiring harnesses
Because this terminal is for
x BCM
communication, good/no good
H Communication BCM — x Related wiring
judgment by terminal voltage is
harnesses
not possible.
x SUNROOF 15A fuse
J Power supply SUNROOF 15A fuse Under any condition B+ x Related wiring
harnesses
SUNROOF
SUNROOF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Note
x The sunroof switch is together with the front map light.

2. Remove the map light from the headliner. (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the sunroof switch
G
terminals using an ohmmeter. SLIDE
OPEN
F
F EB DB C B *
D
SLIDE
CLOSE
H
TILT
UP
B
TILT
DOWN
x If not as specified, replace the sunroof switch.

End Of Sie
: Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
B D F H G
Slide open
Slide closed
Tilt up
Tilt down
Off
EXTERIOR TRIM
09-16 EXTERIOR TRIM

EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX . . . 09-16–2 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–32
COWL GRILLE Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–32
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-16–4 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . 09-16–34
RADIATOR GRILLE 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–34
Standard Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–7 Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–37
Sport Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–9 REAR PILLAR GARNISH
SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL . . . . . 09-16–11 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–38
SIDE STEP MOLDING AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER NO.1
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–15 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–40
EXTRACTOR CHAMBER AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER NO.2
FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING FLOOR UNDER COVER
REAR BELTLINE MOLDING SPLASH SHIELD
ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . 09-16–20 ROOF RAIL
ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION . . . . . 09-16–21 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–43
FRONT MUDGUARD ROOF RAIL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-16–22 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-16–45
REAR MUDGUARD Cover Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–46
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-16–24 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . 09-16–46
ROOF CARRIER BRACKET DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION . . . . 09-16–47
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-16–26 FRONT SASH MOLDING REMOVAL . . . 09-16–48
4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–26 FRONT SASH MOLDING
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–27 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–49
LIFTGATE GARNISH REAR SASH MOLDING REMOVAL. . . . . 09-16–49
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-16–28 REAR SASH MOLDING
REAR SPOILER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–30 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–50
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-16–30
EXTERIOR TRIM
EXTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
4SD 5HB
14 12 11 10 9 14 11 10 9
16 17 18 16 17 18
WAGON 14 13 11 10 9
15 16 17 18
1 Radiator grille 2 Cowl grille

(See 09-16-7 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/ (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/
EXTERIOR TRIM
3 Roof molding
(See 09-16-20 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL.)
(See 09-16-21 ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
4 Roof carrier bracket
(See 09-16-26 ROOF CARRIER BRACKET
5 Rear beltline molding
(See 09-16-19 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING
6 Front beltline molding
(See 09-16-18 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
7 Side step molding
(See 09-16-11 SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL.)
(See 09-16-15 SIDE STEP MOLDING
INSTALLATION.)
8 Front mudguard
(See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
9 Front sash molding
(See 09-16-48 FRONT SASH MOLDING
REMOVAL.)
(See 09-16-49 FRONT SASH MOLDING
INSTALLATION.)
10 Door sash film
(See 09-16-46 DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL.)
(See 09-16-47 DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION.)
11 Rear sash molding
(See 09-16-49 REAR SASH MOLDING REMOVAL.)
(See 09-16-50 REAR SASH MOLDING
INSTALLATION.)
12 Rear pillar garnish
(See 09-16-38 REAR PILLAR GARNISH
13 Roof rail
(See 09-16-43 ROOF RAIL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
14 Rear spoiler
(See 09-16-30 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.)
(See 09-16-34 REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION.)
15 Liftgate garnish
(See 09-16-28 LIFTGATE GARNISH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
16 Extractor chamber
(See 09-16-17 EXTRACTOR CHAMBER
17 Splash shield
(See 09-16-43 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
18 Rear mudguard
(See 09-16-24 REAR MUDGUARD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
EXTERIOR TRIM
1 2 3
FRONT
1 Aerodynamic under cover NO.1 3 Floor under cover

(See 09-16-40 AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER (See 09-16-41 FLOOR UNDER COVER REMOVAL/
NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) INSTALLATION.)
2 Aerodynamic under cover NO.2
(See 09-16-40 AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER
ie
COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-4 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Remove the fastener A.
EXTERIOR TRIM
FRONT FENDER
FASTENER A
TAB C
TAB C
FRONT FENDER MOLDING
TAB B
TAB B
3. Pull the front fender molding in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while remove the
tabs B and tab C.
4. Disconnect the windshield washer hose from the joint pipe A. (See 09-19-14 WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
EXTERIOR TRIM
5. Remove the fasteners D and E.
FASTENER D
WEATHERSTRIP COWL GRILLE
FASTENER E
Note
x Set aside the weatherstrip shown in the figure, and remove the fastener E.
EXTERIOR TRIM
6. Pull the cowl grille in the direction of arrow (1) so that it is free from the pins F, pull tabs G in the direction of
arrow (2), and then remove the windshield.
(1)
COWL
GRILLE
G
G b PIN F
G G GG G SEC. a—a
F G G G
b
a COWL GRILLE WINDSHIELD
F
a
(2)
TAB G
SEC. b—b
7. Remove the cowl grille.

End Of Sie
RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Standard Type
1. Remove the bolts A and fasteners B and C.
FASTENER C BOLT A FASTENER B FASTENER B BOLT A FASTENER C
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Align the radiator grille with the tab D insertion angles, pull in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect tabs D.
TAB D
RADIATOR GRILLE
TAB D
FRONT BUMPER
Caution
x When removing the radiator grille, be careful not to damage the tabs D.

EXTERIOR TRIM
Sport Type
1. Remove the bolts A and fasteners B and C.
FASTENER C BOLT A FASTENER B FASTENER B BOLT A FASTENER C
2. Align the radiator grille with the tab D insertion angles, pull in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect tabs D.
TAB D
RADIATOR GRILLE
TAB D
FRONT BUMPER
Caution
x When removing the radiator grille, be careful not to damage the tabs D.
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Detach the hooks E and F then remove the ornament in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
HOOK E ORNAMENT
HOOK E HOOK F
HOOK F
HOOK E HOOK F
4. Remove the screws G.
RADIATOR GRILLE SCREW G

REINFORCEMENT
RADIATOR GRILLE
EXTERIOR TRIM
5. Detach the hooks H and I then remove the radiator grille in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
HOOK H HOOK I
RADIATOR GRILLE
REINFORCEMENT
HOOK H HOOK I HOOK H RADIATOR GRILLE

Sie
SIDE STEP MOLDING REMOVAL
1. Remove the fasteners A
FASTENER A
FRONT
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the fasteners B
FASTENER B
REAR
3. Using the removal tool, disengage clip C in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CLIP C
CLIP C FRONT
Note
x Leave the disengaged clip C in place in consideration of the servicing.
EXTERIOR TRIM
4. Using the removal tool, disengage clips C in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CLIP C
REAR
CLIP C
Note
x Leave the disengaged clips C in place in consideration of the servicing.
EXTERIOR TRIM
5. Slide the side step molding in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove the side step molding
from clips C and D.
SIDE STEP MOLDING
CLIP C
FRONT REAR
CLIP D
CLIP C CLIP D
SIDE STEP SIDE STEP

MOLDING MOLDING
6. After removing the side step molding, remove clips C and D from the body using a fastener remover.
EXTERIOR TRIM
7. Using the removal tool, disengage clips E in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
CLIP E
CLIP E
SIDE STEP MOLDING

FRONT
FRONT
8. Remove the side step molding front.

End Of Sie
SIDE STEP MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Install the side step molding front while pushing the clips E installation area shown in the figure.
CLIP E
CLIP E
SIDE STEP MOLDING

FRONT
FRONT
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Install new clips C and D to the side step molding.
CLIP C
CLIP D
3. Install the side step molding while pushing the clips C, D installation area shown in the figure.
CLIP C
FRONT
REAR
CLIP D SIDE STEP MOLDING
EXTERIOR TRIM
4. Install the fasteners B.
FASTENER B
REAR
5. Install the fasteners A.
FASTENER A
FRONT
ie
EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(1) Trunk mat (4SD, Wagon)
(2) Trunk board (4SD, Wagon)
(3) Sub-trunk (Wagon)
EXTERIOR TRIM
(4) Trunk end trim (4SD, Wagon) (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Rear scuff plate (Wagon) (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Tire house trim (Wagon) (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Trunk side upper trim (Wagon) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Trunk side trim (4SD, Wagon) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Rear combination light (See 09-18-40 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Insert a removal tool in the position indicated by the arrow in the figure and detach tabs.
TAB
SIDE FRAME
EXTRACTOR OUTER PANE
CHAMBER
TAB
REMOVAL
TOOL
TAB
TAB
EXTRACTOR CHAMBER
TAB
4. Remove the extractor chamber in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
EXTRACTOR CHAMBER

ie
FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Fully open the front door glass.
3. Remove the inner garnish. (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
EXTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
5. Remove the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
6. Remove clip A using a removal tool and pull the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in
the figure.
FRONT FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
(2)
(3)
C
B
B
B (1)
B
B
A
CLIP C TAB B CLIP A
7. Remove clip C using a removal tool and pull the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in
the figure.
8. Rotate the front beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it while
detaching tabs B.
End Of Sie
REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Fully lower the rear door glass.
2. Remove the rear door trim (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Remove clip A using a removal tool and pull up the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (1) shown
in the figure.
REAR BELTLINE MOLDING

FRONT
(2)
(3)
C
B
B
B (1)
B
CLIP C TAB B CLIP A
4. Remove clip C using a removal tool and pull up the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown
in the figure.
5. Rotate the rear beltline molding in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure and remove it while
detaching tabs B.
ie
ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL
1. Insert a flathead screwdriver in the position shown in the figure.
2. Rotate the flathead screwdriver in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove the roof molding
from the T-stud (figure A).
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Rotate the roof molding in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, pull up the roof molding in the
direction of the arrow (3) while detaching it from the clip (figure B), and then remove the roof molding.
R ROOF MOLDING
CLIP
FRONT
T-STUD
T-STUD
TOP VIEW
(3)
CLEAN RAG
(2)
(2)
(1) R ROOF MOLDING B
(1) A
CLIP
FLATHEAD R ROOF MOLDING
SCREWDRIVER (2)
T-STUD
CLIP
End Of Sie
ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Install the roof molding to the front T-stud.
FRONT R ROOF MOLDING
b
c
a
T-STUD
T-STUD
b CLIP PROTECTOR
c
a PROTECTOR
TOP VIEW
T-STUD CLIP PROTECTOR
SEC. a—a SEC. b—b SEC. c—c
2. Hook the roof molding to the clip and attach the roof molding while pressing it in the direction of the arrow
3. Install the roof molding to the rear T-stud.
4. Press in the protector installation positions shown in the figure and firmly adhere them to the body.
EXTERIOR TRIM
FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove bolt A, screws B and fastener C, and set the front mudguard out of the way in the direction of the arrow
FRONT
BOLT A
FASTENER C SCREW B
2. Remove fasteners D.
FRONT
FRONT
BUMPER
FASTENER D
FRONT
MUDGUARD
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Remove fasteners E.
FASTENER E
FRONT
4. Remove fastener F and G.
FRONT FRONT
MUDGUARD FENDER
FASTENER F PANEL
F G
FRONT FRONT FRONT

MUDGUARD FENDER
FASTENER G PANEL
EXTERIOR TRIM
5. Remove fasteners H, I, J and K, then remove the mudguard in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
FASTENER H
FASTENER I
FASTENER J
FRONT
FASTENER K

End Of Sie
REAR MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the splash shield. (See 09-16-43 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the cap nut A, B and C.
REAR
MUDGUARD SIDE
FRAME
CAP NUT A OUTER
PANEL
B
A
REAR
MUDGUARD
SIDE
CAP NUT B FRAME
OUTER
PANEL
REAR
FRONT REAR MUDGUARD
SIDE
CAP NUT C FRAME
OUTER
PANEL
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Remove the cap nuts D, E and F, then remove the rear mudguard in the direction of the arrow shown in the
figure.
CAP NUT E CAP NUT F
CAP
NUT D
FRONT REAR
4. Install in the reverse of removal.

End Of Sie
ROOF CARRIER BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD, 5HB
2. Remove the roof molding. (See 09-16-20 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL) (See 09-16-21 ROOF MOLDING
INSTALLATION.)
5. Disconnect the rain sensor connector. (Vehicles auto light / wiper system)
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof system) (See 09-15-3 SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(9) Rear side seat backs (4SD) (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Trunk side upper trims (5HB) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(12)Rear seat (5HB) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
(13)Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolt (LH) (5HB) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [5HB, WGN].)
EXTERIOR TRIM
7. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)
11. Remove the headliner. (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
12. Remove the nuts.
ROOF CARRIER
BRACKET
FRONT
NUT
B-PILLER NUT 8—10 N·m
8—10 N·m {82—101 kgf·cm,
{82—101 kgf·cm, 71—88 in·lbf} B-PILLER
71—88 in·lbf}
13. Remove the roof carrier bracket.

Note
x Install the roof carrier bracket so that the arrow on it faces inward.
Wagon
2. Remove the roof molding. (See 09-16-20 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL) (See 09-16-21 ROOF MOLDING
INSTALLATION.)
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof system) (See 09-15-3 SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(8) Tire house trims (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
EXTERIOR TRIM
(9) Trunk side upper trims (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Rear seat (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
(11)Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolt (LH) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
(13)D-pillar trims (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (vehicles with auto-dimming mirror)
12. Remove the nuts.
ROOF CARRIER
BRACKET B
ROOF CARRIER
BRACKET A
NUT
8—10 N·m
FRONT {82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf}
NUT
8—10 N·m
{82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf}
NUT
8—10 N·m
{82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf}
13. Remove the roof carrier bracket A and B.

Note
x Install the roof carrier bracket A so that the arrow on it faces inward.
ie
LIFTGATE GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the liftgate side trims. (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
EXTERIOR TRIM
5. Remove the nuts.
NUT
NUT :4.0—5.8 N·m

{41—59 kgf·cm,35—52 in·lbf}
6. Disconnect the liftgate opener switch connector and request switch connector (vehicles with advanced key
system).
EXTERIOR TRIM
7. Push the clips A in the direction of the arrow (1), (2) and clips B in the direction of the arrow (3), (4).
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(1) (3)
CLIP A CLIP B
CLIP A
CLIP B
LIFTGATE GARNISH
8. Remove the liftgate garnish while remove the clips A and B.

ie
REAR SPOILER REMOVAL
4SD
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the nuts.
NUT NUT
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Peel off double-sided adhesive tape from the position shown in the figure using a utility knife.
DOUBLE-SIDED ADHESIVE TAPE
Warning
x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility
knife.
4. Pull up the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the guide
pins.
STUD BOLT GUIDE PIN STUD BOLT
REAR
SPOILER
GUIDE PIN
Caution
x When the rear spoiler is removed, be careful not to damage the trunk lid with the stud bolt.
EXTERIOR TRIM
5HB
1. Open the liftgate.
BOLT
BOLT
3. Pull up the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the guide
pins.
GUIDE PIN
GUIDE PIN
REAR
SPOILER
GUIDE PIN
4. Remove the rear spoiler.
Wagon
EXTERIOR TRIM
LEFT-SIDE RIGHT-SIDE
4. Remove the nuts.
BOLT BOLT
NUT
EXTERIOR TRIM
5. Pull up the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips.
CLIP REAR SPOILER
CLIP
6. Remove the rear spoiler.

End Of Sie
REAR SPOILER INSTALLATION
4SD
Warning
x Using a utility knife with bare hands could cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a utility
knife.
Note
x Double-sided adhesive tape has already been adhered to a new rear spoiler for installation.
1. When installing a new rear spoiler, perform the following procedure:

1. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape on the trunk lid.
2. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the trunk lid.
2. If the rear spoiler is to be reused, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the rear spoiler and trunk lid after removal.
2. Remove any grease and dirt from the double-sided adhesive tape affixing area.
EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the position shown in the figure.
Note
x Use the 3M GT-7112-type of double-sided adhesive tape, or the equivalent.
3. Peel off the backing from the double-sided adhesive tape approx. 3 cm {1 in} from the end, and fold it back to
the surface of the rear spoiler.
4. Install the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while inserting the guide pins in the
vehicle side.
STUD BOLT GUIDE PIN STUD BOLT
REAR
SPOILER
GUIDE PIN
Caution
x When the rear spoiler is installed, be careful not to damage the trunk lid with the stud bolt.
5. Peel off the backing from the double-sided adhesive tape and attach it by applying pressure.
EXTERIOR TRIM
6. Tighten the nuts.
NUT NUT
3.9—6.8 N·m 3.9—6.8 N·m
{40—69 kgf·cm, {40—69 kgf·cm,
35—60 in·lbf} 35—60 in·lbf}
5HB
1. Install the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while inserting the guide pins in the
vehicle side.
GUIDE PIN
GUIDE PIN
REAR
SPOILER
GUIDE PIN
EXTERIOR TRIM
BOLT
7.8—9.8 N·m {80—99
BOLT
7.8—9.8 N·m {80—99
Wagon
1. Push the rear spoiler in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and installe the clips.
CLIP REAR SPOILER
CLIP

EXTERIOR TRIM
3. Tighten the nuts.
NUT
NUT :7—11 N·m
{71—120 kgf·cm, 62—104 in·lbf}
4. Install the liftgate upper trim. (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LEFT-SIDE RIGHT-SIDE
BOLT :7—11 N·m

BOLT {71—120 kgf·cm, 62—104 in·lbf} BOLT
REAR PILLAR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Open the rear door.
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Pull the rear pillar garnish in the direction shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips.
REAR PILLAR GARNISH
CLIP
CLIP

End Of Sie
EXTERIOR TRIM
AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the bolts and fasteners A.
FRONT CROSSMEMBER
AERODYNAMIC
UNDER COVER No.1
AERODYNAMIC
FASTENER B UNDER COVER No.2
SEC. a—a AERODYNAMIC
UNDER COVER No.2
BOLT
BOLT
FASTENER A
BOLT
a
FASTENER B
BOLT BOLT
a
BOLT BOLT
AERODYNAMIC
UNDER COVER No.1
FRONT FASTENER A
BOLT: 6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm, 62—86 in·lbf}
FRONT CROSSMEMBER
FRONT
BUMPER
FRONT
2. Set aside the aerodynamic undercover No.2 shown in the figure, and remove the fastener B.
3. Set aside the aerodynamic under cover No.1 from the front bumper, then remove the aerodynamic under cover
No.1 shown in the figure.
Caution
x Be careful not to damage the aerodynamic under cover No.1 during removal.

End Of Sie
AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER NO.2 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Lift up the vehicle.
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the bolts and fastener.
FRONT CROSSMEMBER
(1)
AERODYNAMIC
UNDER COVER No.2 (2)
FRONT
BOLT:6.9—9.8
N·m {71—99
kgf·cm, 62—86
BOLT BOLT
AERODYNAMIC
UNDER COVER No.2
BOLT
FASTENER FRONT
3. Move the aerodynamic under cover No.2 in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure.
4. Remove the aerodynamic under cover No.2 in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
Caution
x Be careful not to damage the aerodynamic under cover No.2 during removal.

End Of Sie
FLOOR UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
EXTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the bolts, cap nuts and fasteners.
BOLT:6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
62—86 in·lbf}
CAP NUT
BOLT BOLT
CAP NUT CAP NUT
FASTENER FASTENER
BOLT
BOLT BOLT
TAB TAB
FASTENER FASTENER
CAP NUT BOLT AND

WASHER
FRONT
3. Remove the floor under cover and remove it while detaching the tabs.
Caution
x Be careful not to damage the floor under cover during removal.

End Of Sie
EXTERIOR TRIM
SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the bolt, screws and cap nut then remove the splash shield in the direction of the arrow shown in the
figure.
SPLASH SHIELD
CAP NUT
REAR
SCREW
BOLT

Sie
ROOF RAIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof only) (See 09-15-3 SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(11)Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolts (LH) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
5. Remove the assist handles. (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
EXTERIOR TRIM
7. Remove the nuts.
NUT
NUT:6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,62—86 in·lbf}
NUT NUT:6.9—9.8 N·m

{71—99 kgf·cm,62—86 in·lbf}
EXTERIOR TRIM
8. Pull up the roof rail in the indication of the arrow.
ROOF RAIL
9. Remove the roof rail.

End Of Sie
ROOF RAIL DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order shown in the figure.
8
7
4 5
2
1 1
1 Screw Front cover (See 09-16-46 Cover Installation

4
Note)
2 Front protector
5 Rear protector
3 Front stay
6 Rear stay
EXTERIOR TRIM
Rear cover (See 09-16-46 Cover Installation
7
Note)
8 Center roof rail
Cover Installation Note

1. Move the hook A in the direction of arrows (1) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver.
2. Move the hook B in the direction of arrows (2) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and remove the
cover from the stay.
HOOK B
(2)
(2)
HOOK A
FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER
HOOK A
HOOK B
(1) (1)
(1) (1)
FLATHEAD SCREWDRIVER
ie
DOOR SASH FILM REMOVAL
1. Partially peel back the glass run channel.
2. Partially peel back the door weatherstrip.
(1) Inner garnish (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front door trim (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Rear sash molding (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Front sash molding (See 09-16-48 FRONT SASH MOLDING REMOVAL.)
(9) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-18 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Rear beltline molding (See 09-16-19 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
EXTERIOR TRIM
4. Peel off the door sash film by pulling it outward
from one end.
Note
x Slowly remove the door sash film since it
may tear easily.
End Of Sie
DOOR SASH FILM
DOOR SASH FILM INSTALLATION

1. Remove any grease or dirt from the affixing surface of the door.
2. Cut away the unused portion along the dotted
lines.
3. Peel off the backing paper and attach the door
sash film onto the door as shown in the figure.
UNUSED
PERFORATION PORTION
c
c
c c
a
a
b b b
OVER END OVER END OVER END

OF RADIUS OVER END OVER END
OF RADIUS OF RADIUS OF RADIUS OF RADIUS
SEC. A—A SEC. B—B SEC. C—C SEC. D—D
EXTERIOR TRIM
Standard clearance
a: 3.0—5.0 mm {0.12—0.19 in}
b: 3.0 mm or more {0.12 in or more}
c: 4.0—6.0 mm {0.16—0.23 in}
4. Peel off the transparent protective film on the door sash film.
(1) Rear beltline molding (See 09-16-19 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front beltline molding (See 09-16-18 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rear sash molding (See 09-16-50 REAR SASH MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front sash molding (See 09-16-49 FRONT SASH MOLDING INSTALLATION.)
(8) Power outer mirror (See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(9) Front door trim (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Inner garnish (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
FRONT SASH MOLDING REMOVAL
2. Remove the front door trim. (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Press tab A in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
FRONT DOOR TAB B

SASH
TAB B
TAB C
a (1)
FRONT
b
(2) TAB
TAB A
b
FRONT SASH MOLDING SEC.a—a
TAB C
TAB B
SEC.b—b
5. Press tab C in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

6. Rotate the front sash molding 90° in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, disconnect tab B, and pull
out the front sash molding in the direction of the arrow (2).
7. Remove the front sash molding.
End Of Sie
EXTERIOR TRIM
FRONT SASH MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Hook tab A to the body in the position where tabs B align with the sash holes.
TAB B
a
b
FRONT TAB A
TAB B
b SASH
a HOLE
FRONT SASH MOLDING SEC.a—a
TAB A
TAB C
SEC.b—b
2. Press the front sash molding in the direction of the arrow and install tabs B to the body.
Caution
x Do not press the front sash molding in any place other than the rubber areas.
3. Press the front sash molding from the vehicle rear in the direction shown in the arrow and install tab C.
Note
x After installing the front sash molding, verify that tabs A and B are connected properly to the body.
4. Install the power outer mirror. (See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
5. Install the front door trim. (See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
6. Install the inner garnish. (See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
End Of Sie
REAR SASH MOLDING REMOVAL
Warning
EXTERIOR TRIM
1. Press tab C in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
REAR DOOR TAB A

SASH
TAB A
REAR SASH
(1) MOLDING DOUBLE-SIDED
ADHESIVE TAPE TAB B
FRONT
a
b
a TAB C
b (2)
SEC.a—a
TAB A
SEC.b—b
2. While cutting the double-sided adhesive tape using a flathead screwdriver or a razor, separate the rear sash
molding from the body.
3. Press tab B in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
4. Rotate the rear sash molding 90° in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, disconnect tab A, and pull
out the rear sash molding in the direction of the arrow (2).
5. Remove the rear sash molding.
End Of Sie
REAR SASH MOLDING INSTALLATION
Note
x Double-sided adhesive tape has already been attached to the new rear sash molding.
Warning
1. When installing a new rear sash molding, follow the procedure below:
(1) Remove the adhesive remaining on the body using razor.
(2) Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the body.
2. When reusing the rear sash molding, follow the procedure below:
(1) Remove the adhesive remaining on the rear sash molding and the body using a razor.
(2) Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the rear sash molding and the body.
(3) Apply primer to the bonding area of the rear sash molding.
EXTERIOR TRIM
(4) Affix double-sided adhesive tape to the rear sash molding as shown in the figure.
REAR SASH
MOLDING
FRONT
DOUBLE-SIDED
ADHESIVE TAPE
Note
x As for the double-sided adhesive tape, use 3M GT7120 or equivalent.
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided adhesive tape.

4. Hook tab B to the body in the position where tab A align with the sash holes.
TAB A REAR SASH DOUBLE-SIDED TAB B

MOLDING ADHESIVE TAPE
FRONT TAB A
a b
SASH
HOLE
a b
SEC.a—a
TAB B
TAB C
SEC.b—b
5. Press the rear sash molding in the direction of the arrow and install tabs A to the body.
Caution
x Do not press the rear sash molding in any place other than the rubber areas.
6. Press the rear sash molding from the vehicle front in the direction of the arrow and install tab C.
Note
x After installing the rear sash molding, verify that tabs B and C are connected properly to the body.
INTERIOR TRIM
09-17 INTERIOR TRIM

PAGE 1 OF 2
INTERIOR TRIM LOCATION INDEX. . . . 09-17–2 C-PILLAR TRIM
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–4 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–64
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–6 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–64
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–8 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–66
DASHBOARD Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–68
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–10 D-PILLAR TRIM
DASHBOARD UPPER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–69
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–19 FRONT SCUFF PLATE
SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–72
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–21 REAR SCUFF PLATE
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–22 INNER GARNISH
Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–24 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–75
DASHBOARD FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER BEZEL
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–25 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–77
COLUMN COVER REAR DOOR TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–27 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–77
CENTER PANEL UPPER TRUNK END TRIM
CENTER PANEL LOWER 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–78
LOWER PANEL Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–80
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–34 TRUNK SIDE TRIM
SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–81
METER HOOD 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–82
GLOVE COMPARTMENT TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
VENTILATOR GRILLE 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–85
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–40 FRONT DOOR TRIM
Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–41 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–88
Passenger-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–41 Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–88
DASHBOARD UNDER COVER Passenger-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–93
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–42 FRONT DOOR TRIM
UPPER PANEL DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–98
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–43 Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–98
SHIFT PANEL Passenger-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–100
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–44 REAR DOOR TRIM
REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–102
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–46 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM
REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–107
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-17–50 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–107
DECORATION PANEL Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–108
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–51 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM
Driver-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–51 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–108
Passenger-side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–53 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–108
A-PILLAR TRIM Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–110
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–55 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM
FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–111
TIRE HOUSE TRIM Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–114
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–57 TRUNK LID TRIM
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–58 RECESS
REAR PACKAGE TRIM ASSIST HANDLE
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–118
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-17–61 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–119
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM SUNVISOR
INTERIOR TRIM
PAGE 2 OF 2
INTRUDER SENSOR COVER 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–124
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–120 Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–125
Intruder Sensor Installation Note . . . . . 09-17–121 FLOOR COVERING
HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–127
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–122 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–127
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–122 5HB, Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-17–129
INTERIOR TRIM
End
EndOf
of Sie
Toc TRIM LOCATION INDEX
INTERIOR
R.H.D.
6 5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
MTX
1 Inner garnish 7 Grove compartment

(See 09-17-75 INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-38 GLOVE COMPARTMENT
2 Center panel upper 8 Decoration panel
(See 09-17-31 CENTER PANEL UPPER (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/
3 Center ventilator grille 9 Shift panel
(See 09-17-40 VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-44 SHIFT PANEL REMOVAL/
4 Dashboard 10 Center panel lower
(See 09-17-10 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-33 CENTER PANEL LOWER
(See 09-17-25 DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ 11 Lower panel
ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-17-34 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/
5 Dashboard upper garnish INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-17-19 DASHBOARD UPPER GARNISH 12 Front side trim
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
6 Ventilator grille INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-17-40 VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
INTERIOR TRIM
4SD
R.H.D.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19
20
21
09-17–4
INTERIOR TRIM
.
1 Sunvisor 12 C-pillar trim

(See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/
2 Meter hood 13 Rear package trim
(See 09-17-36 METER HOOD REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-60 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/
3 Column cover 14 Headliner
(See 09-17-27 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/
4 A-pillar trim 15 Trunk side trim
(See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
5 Shock absorbing pad 16 Side panel
(See 09-17-21 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD (See 09-17-36 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/
6 Front door trim 17 Rear console
(See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-46 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/
(see 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM (See 09-17-50 REAR CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) ASSEMBLY.)
7 B-pillar lower trim 18 Upper panel
(See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/
8 B-pillar upper trim 19 Floor covering
(See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-127 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/
9 Assist handle 20 Trunk lid trim
(See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/
10 Rear door trim 21 Trunk end trim
(See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/
11 Tire house trim
(See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
5HB
R.H.D.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19
09-17–5
INTERIOR TRIM
.
1 Sunvisor 10 Rear door trim

(See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/
2 Meter hood 11 Tire house trim
(See 09-17-36 METER HOOD REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/
3 Column cover 12 C-pillar trim
(See 09-17-27 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/
4 A-pillar trim 13 Trunk side upper trim
(See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
5 Shock absorbing pad 14 Headliner
(See 09-17-21 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/
6 Front door trim 15 Trunk side trim
(See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
(see 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM 16 Side panel
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-17-36 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/
7 B-pillar lower trim INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/ 17 Rear console
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-46 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/
8 B-pillar upper trim INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-50 REAR CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/
INSTALLATION.) ASSEMBLY.)
9 Assist handle 18 Upper panel
(See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/
19 Floor covering
(See 09-17-127 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
09-17–6
INTERIOR TRIM
.
1 Liftgate lower trim 3 Liftgate upper trim

(See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM
2 Liftgate side trim 4 Trunk end trim
(See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/
Wagon
R.H.D.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
09-17–8
INTERIOR TRIM
.
1 Sunvisor 11 Tire house trim

(See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/
2 Meter hood 12 C-pillar trim
(See 09-17-36 METER HOOD REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/
3 Column cover 13 Trunk side upper trim
(See 09-17-27 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
4 A-pillar trim 14 Headliner
(See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-122 HEADLINER REMOVAL/
5 Shock absorbing pad 15 Trunk side trim
(See 09-17-21 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
6 Front door trim 16 D-pillar trim
(See 09-17-88 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/
(see 09-17-98 FRONT DOOR TRIM 17 Side panel
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) (See 09-17-36 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/
7 B-pillar lower trim INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/ 18 Rear console
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-17-46 REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/
8 B-pillar upper trim INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-50 REAR CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/
INSTALLATION.) ASSEMBLY.)
9 Assist handle 19 Upper panel
(See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/
10 Rear door trim 20 Floor covering
(See 09-17-102 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-127 FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/
09-17–9
INTERIOR TRIM
.
1 Liftgate lower trim 3 Liftgate upper trim

(See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM
2 Liftgate side trim 4 Trunk end trim
(See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/ (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/
DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(3) Front scuff plates (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Front side trims (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(12)Bonnet release lever knob (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(21)Audio unit (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(22)Dashboard upper garnish (See 09-17-19 DASHBOARD UPPER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(25)Side panel (See 09-17-36 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect antenna feeder No.1 clip from the A-pillar inner panel.
4. Disconnect the washer hose (See 09-19-14 WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Disconnect the dashboard wiring harness connectors.
6. Remove nuts A and bolts B then remove the dashboard bracket.
09-17–10
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
DASHBOARD BRACKET BOLT B NUT A
7. Remove nuts C shown in the figure.

R.H.D.
NUT C NUT C
PASSENGER-SIDE DRIVER-SIDE
8. Remove the caps, remove the bolt D, E and nut F.

09-17–12
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
BOLT D,E:16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,12—16 ft·lbf}
BOLT D
BOLT E
BOLT E CAP
CAP
CAP
BOLT E
BOLT E CAP
BOLT E
NUT F
9. Remove the bolts G.
09-17–15
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
BOLT G
BOLT G
PASSENGER-SIDE DRIVER-SIDE
BOLT G:16—22 N·m {1.7—2.2 kgf·m,12—16 ft·lbf}
10. Raise the back side of the dashboard in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and rotate it in the
direction of the arrow (2).
09-17–17
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
11. Take the dashboard out through the opened driver’s door.
End Of Sie
DASHBOARD UPPER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which may
seriously injure you. Read the air bag system service warnings and cautions before handling the
air bag module. (See 08-10-3 AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See 08-10-5 AIR BAG
SYSTEM SERVICE CAUTIONS.)
Note
x When replacing the passenger-side air bag module after the deployment, replace it together with the mid-
wiring harness.
x When installing the mid-wiring harness, install it along the vehicle wiring harness using bands or tape.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for 1 min or more.
(5) Passenger-side front scuff plate (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Passenger-side front side trim (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
[A26M-R].)
09-17–19
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
BOLT
7—9 N·m {72—91 kgf·cm,
62—79 in·lbf}
AIR BAG MODULE BOLT

LOCKING DEVICE CONNECTOR 7—9 N·m {72—91 kgf·cm,
62—79 in·lbf}
5. Using a flathead screwdriver, lift the locking device carefully, however do not remove it.
6. Disconnect the air bag module connector.
7. Remove the screws.
R.H.D.
CLIP SCREW
CLIP
CLIP
CLIP
09
DASHBOARD UPPER GARNISH SCREW
09-17–20
INTERIOR TRIM
8. Pull the dashboard upper garnish in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching
the clips.
ie
SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (Vehicles with sunroof only) (See 09-15-3 SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(7) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(8) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(11)C-pillar trim (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (Vehicles with auto-dimming only)
4. Remove the sunvisor. (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
8. Pinch the tab B using pincers, remove clips A.
09-17–21
INTERIOR TRIM
TAB B
TAB C
TAB B CLIP A
TAB C CLIP A TAB C CLIP A
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
REAR SHOCK ABSORBING

PAD
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBING

PAD
9. Remove the shock-absorbing pad in the direction of the arrow (1) and (2) while remove the tab C.
5HB
INSTALLATION.)
09-17–22
INTERIOR TRIM
TAB B
TAB C
TAB B CLIP A
CLIP A CLIP A
TAB C
TAB C
(2)
(2)
(1) (1)

PAD

PAD
11. Remove the shock-absorbing pad in the direction of the arrow (1) and (2) while remove the tab C. 09
Wagon
INSTALLATION.)
09-17–23
INTERIOR TRIM
(13)D-pillar trim (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
TAB B
TAB C
TAB B CLIP A
TAB C CLIP A TAB C CLIP A
(2)
(1)
(1) (2)

PAD

PAD
9. Remove the shock-absorbing pad in the direction of the arrow (1) and (2) while remove the tab C.
10. Install in the reverse order of removal. 09
09-17–24
INTERIOR TRIM
Sie
DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Remove the ventilator grilles (See 09-17-40 VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
R.H.D.
7 3
1 2
1 Screw A 5 Center duct

2 Dashboard 6 Defroster duct
3 Dashboard member 7 Dashboard frame
4 Screw B
End Of Sie
COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull down the steering wheel.
2. Pull the upper column cover in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove the upper
column cover while detaching the tabs and pins.
09-17–25
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
UPPER COLUMN COVER
(2)
(1)
PIN
TAB
TAB PIN PIN
3. Rotate the steering wheel to the left and right until it reaches the positions shown in the figure and remove
screws.
09-17–29
R.H.D.
SCREW PROTECTIVE TAPE PROTECTIVE TAPE SCREW
4. Pull up the steering wheel.

5. Remove the lower column cover in the direction of the arrow (4) while keeping it open in the direction of the
arrow (3) shown in the figure.
09-17–30
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
(3)
(3)
(4)
LOWER COLMUN COVER
GUIDE
GUIDE
Caution
x Be careful not to damage the guide during removal.

End Of Sie
CENTER PANEL UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x When using a fastener remover, always make sure that it does not interfere with the car navigation
or audio units. Affix protective tape along the shaded area shown in the figure to prevent
scratches and damage. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the car navigation or audio units.
09-17–31
INTERIOR TRIM
PROTECTIVE TAPE

2. Insert a tape-wrapped fastener remover into the position indicated by the arrow in the figure, slide it to remove
the clips and hook, and raise the front side of the center panel upper.
HOOK
CLIP CLIP
CLIP
HOOK
09-17–32
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Pull the center panel upper in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clips.
CLIP
CLIP CLIP
CENTER PANEL UPPER
CLIP
4. Disconnect the hazard warning switch connector.

5. Disconnect the passenger-side seat belt waning connector.
End Of Sie
CENTER PANEL LOWER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A26M-R].)
09-17–33
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Pull the center panel lower in the direction of the arrow(1) shown in the figure while detaching clips.
HOOK CLIP CLIP HOOK
CLIP
(2)
HOOK
(1)
CLIP
CLIP
CENTER PANEL LOWER
4. Pull the center panel lower in the direction of the arrow(2) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching
clips and hooks.
5. Disconnect the seat warmer switch connector. (Vehicles with seat warmer)
6. Disconnect the cigarette lighter socket connector.
7. Remove the ash tray illumination bulb.
End Of Sie
LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
i
(2) Front side trim (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Driver-side decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Bonnet release lever knob (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the screw A, pull the lower panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) (2), (3) and remove the
lower panel while detaching the hooks B and clips C.
09-17–34
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
CLIP C
HOOK B
CLIP C
HOOK B
(2)
(3)
HOOK B
CLIP C
(1)
LOWER PANEL
SCREW A
4. Disconnect the switch connector.

End Of Sie
SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(2) Passenger-side decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Grove compartment (See 09-17-38 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Passenger-side front scuff plate (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Passenger-side front side trim (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Pull the side panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching the
clips.
09-17–35
INTERIOR TRIM
CLIP CLIP
CLIP
(2)
(1)
SIDE PANEL

End Of Sie
METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(4) Driver-side decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
(6) Lower panel (See 09-17-34 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Pull the meter hood in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips and
pin.
09-17–36
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
CLIP
METER HOOD
PIN
CLIP
PIN
CLIP CLIP

End Of Sie
GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x If the glove compartment is closed without being joined to the stay damper, the stay damper may
be damaged. Verify that the stay damper is joined to the glove compartment before closing the
glove compartment.
09-17–38
INTERIOR TRIM
1. Pull the stay damper in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and detach the connecting part between
the glove compartment and the stay damper.
STAY DAMPER
STAY DAMPER
2. Push both ends of the inner-side glove compartment in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
09
09-17–39
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Lower the glove compartment.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
HOOK
4. Detach the hook from the dashboard and remove the glove compartment.
End Of Sie
VENTILATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Center
2. Remove the center panel upper. (See 09-17-31 CENTER PANEL UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
CENTER PANEL UPPER
SCREW
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE
4. Remove the center ventilator grille from the center panel upper.
09-17–40
INTERIOR TRIM
Driver-side
2. Remove the following part:
(4) Drive-side decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
(7) Meter hood (See 09-17-36 METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Rotate the ventilator grille to the notch in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and pull it in the
direction of the arrow (2) to remove it.
NOTCH
VENTILATOR GRILLE

NOTCH

VENTILATOR GRILLE
Passenger-side
(2) Passenger-side decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Grove compartment (See 09-17-38 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Audio unit (Vehicles with audio system) (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(7) Car-navigation unit (Vehicles with car-navigation system) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
(8) Dashboard upper garnish (See 09-17-19 DASHBOARD UPPER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-17–41
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Rotate the ventilator grille to the notch in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and pull it in the
direction of the arrow (2) to remove it.
NOTCH
VENTILATOR GRILLE

NOTCH

VENTILATOR GRILLE

End Of Sie
DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Detach clips A, pins B and guide C by pulling them in the direction of the arrow.
R.H.D.
PIN B
PIN B CLIP A
GUIDE C
DASHBOARD UNDER COVER GUIDE C CLIP A
09-17–42
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the dashboard under cover.
Sie
UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Open the cover.
2. Pull the upper panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching the
clip A, B and C.
%.+2B
%.+2A
(2) %.+2A
(1)
%.+2C
(2)
%18'4
%.+2B
%.+2B
%.+2C
Caution
x When removing clip C, press the connecting part of the center lower panel with a hand to prevent
damage to clip C.
3. Move the upper panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (3) while set the parking brake lever out of the
way.
09-17–43
INTERIOR TRIM
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
(3)
UPPER PANEL
4. Remove the upper panel.

End Of Sie
SHIFT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the shift knob. (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [G35M-R]) (See 05-16B-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
2. Pull the shift panel in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the hooks.
09-17–44
INTERIOR TRIM
ATX
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
09-17–45
INTERIOR TRIM
MTX
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK HOOK
HOOK

End Of Sie
REAR CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A26M-R].)
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the wiring harness clip.
09-17–46
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the screws A, B and screw C.
SCREW A
SCREW B
SCREW C
09-17–47
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Open the console lid and remove the screws D.
SCREW D
09-17–48
INTERIOR TRIM
6. Pull the rear console in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1), then detaching clips E and guide F.
)7+&'(
%.+2'
GUIDE F
CLIP E (1)
CLIP E
GUIDE F
09-17–49
INTERIOR TRIM
7. Pull up the rear console in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, move the rear console in the
direction of the arrow (3), and remove it avoiding the parking brake lever.
(3)
(2)

End Of Sie
REAR CONSOLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
09-17–50
INTERIOR TRIM
3 2
1 Screw 3 Rear console

2 Rear console cover
End Of Sie
DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Driver-side
1. Remove the upper panel. (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Pull the decoration panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching
the hooks A and clips B.
09-17–51
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
CLIP B
CLIP B
(2)
CLIP B
HOOK A
(1)
HOOK A
Passenger-side
1. Remove the upper panel. (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Pull the decoration panel in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching
the hooks A clips B.
09-17–53
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
CLIP B
CLIP B
(2)
CLIP B
(1)
HOOK A
HOOK A

Sie
A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Pull the upper end of the A-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clips A and B.
R GROMMET
R CLIP B
R CLIP B
A-PILLAR TRIM 09
CLIP A
CLIP A
am6zzw0000166
09-17–55
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Cut the lead wire connecting clip B and grommet using a nipper and pull out the A-pillar trim in the direction of
the arrow shown in the figure.
R GROMMET
R CLIP B
LEAD WIRE
R CLIP B
A-PILLAR TRIM
TAB
Caution
x When pulling out the A-pillar trim, be careful not to damage the tabs.
4. Move the hook in the direction of arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach
it from the A-pillar inner panel.
A-PILLAR INNER PANEL
HOOK R GROMMET
(1)
FLATHEAD
SCREWDRIVER
R GROMMET
(3)
(2)
HOOK
A-PILLAR INNER PANEL FRATHEAD SCREWDRIVER
5. Remove the grommet in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
6. When installing the A-pillar, install the new clip B and grommet to the A-pillar trim in advance.
ie
FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09-17–56
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Remove the cap nut.
CAP NUT
CLIP
CLIP
4. Pull the front side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clip.
TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD
1. Remove the rear scuff plate. (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Remove the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD])
3. Remove the rear side seat back. (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09-17–57
INTERIOR TRIM
CLIP
CLIP
TIRE HOUSE TRIM
(2)
FASTENER
CLIP
(1)
5. Pull the tire house trim in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the
clips, remove the tire house trim in the direction of the arrow (2).
5HB
09-17–58
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Pull the tire house trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips
and hooks.
CLIP
CLIP
TAB
HOOK
TRUNK SIDE TRIM
HOOK TAB
CLIP
4. Remove the tire house trim.

Wagon
09
09-17–59
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Pull the tire house trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips
and hooks.
CLIP
TAB
CLIP
HOOK
HOOK
TIRE HOUSE TRIM
TRUNK SIDE TRIM

CLIP
TAB
4. Remove the tire house trim.

End Of Sie
REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(4) Rear seat cushion (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD])
09-17–60
INTERIOR TRIM
CLIP
GUIDE
GUIDE REAR PACKAGE TRIM

GUIDE
FASTENER
(2)
(1)
CLIP
4. Pull up the rear package trim in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure to remove the clips, pull the
rear package trim in the direction of the arrow (2), and remove it while pulling out the guides.
Sie
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front scuff plate. (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09
09-17–61
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Pull the B-pillar lower trim in the direction of the arrow (1), (2), (3) shown in the figure, detach pin A, tab B, pin
C, clip D, then remove the B-pillar lower trim.
PIN A
PIN A PIN A
TAB B TAB B
(1) (1)
TAB B
(2)
PIN C
PIN C
(3)
PIN C
CLIP D
CLIP D
CLIP D
PIN C
CLIP D

End Of Sie
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(1) Adjuster anchor cover (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Upper anchor installation bolts on the front seat belt (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim. (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09-17–62
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Grasp the lower end of the B-pillar upper trim, pull it in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and
remove hook A, guide pin B, and clip C.
CLIP C
CLIP C
PIN B
HOOK A
HOOK A HOOK A
PIN B
5. Remove the B-pillar upper trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
TAB
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM

09
09-17–63
INTERIOR TRIM
Caution
x When removing the B-pillar upper trim, be careful not to damage the tabs.

End Of Sie
C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
3. Pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, then detaching clip A and B.
R GROMMET
CLIP A
R CLIP A
CLIP B
CLIP B
CLIP B
09-17–64
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Cut the lead wire connecting clip A and grommet using a nipper and pull out the C-pillar trim in the direction of
GROMMET R
LEAD WIRE
R CLIP A
C-PILLAR TRIM
TAB
Caution
x When removing the C-pillar trim, be careful not to damage the tabs.
09
09-17–65
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Move the hook in the direction of arrows (1) and (2) shown in the figure using a flathead screwdriver and detach
it from the rear pillar inner panel.
REAR PILLAR INNER PANEL
HOOK R GROMMET
(1)
FLATHEAD
SCREWDRIVER
R GROMMET
(3)
(2)
HOOK
FRATHEAD SCREWDRIVER
REAR PILLAR INNER PANEL
6. Remove the grommet in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure.
7. When installing the C-pillar trim, install the new clip A and grommet to the C-pillar trim in advance.
5HB
(6) Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolts (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
09-17–66
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Remove the cap using a fastener remove in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
HOOK
HOOK
CAP TAB
TAB
09-17–67
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the bolt and fasteners.
CLIP
BOLT
CLIP
(2)
(1)
CLIP FASTENER
5. Pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the order of (1) and (2), then detaching clips.
6. Remove the rear center seat belt tongue from the C-pillar trim. (LH only)
7. Remove the C-pillar trim.
Wagon
09-17–68
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Pull the C-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then detaching clip A, C and pin B.
TAB CLIP C
CLIP C
C-PILLAR TRIM
(1)
PIN B
PIN B
CLIP A
CLIP A
(2)
Caution
x When removing the C-pillar trim, be careful not to damage the tab.
4. Remove the C-pillar trim.

End Of Sie
D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the tire house trim. (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the trunk side upper trim. (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09-17–69
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the cap using a fastener remove in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
HOOK
FOOK
CAP
TAB
TAB
09-17–70
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Remove the bolts and fastener.
GUIDE PIN
GUIDE PIN
CLIP
D-PILLAR TRIM
CLIP
BOLT
GUIDE PIN
BOLT
FASTENER
6. Pull the D-pillar trim in the direction of the arrow then detaching clips and guide pins.
09
09-17–71
INTERIOR TRIM
FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then detach
tab B, pins C, and clips D while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).
TAB B
TAB B
(2)
TAB A
(1)
TAB A
PIN C
CLIP D
PIN C CLIP D
09-17–72
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Detach tab A while pulling the front scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull the front
scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (4), and remove it while detaching tab B, pin C, clip D and pin E.
TAB B
(4)
TAB B
TAB A
(3)
PIN E
TAB A
CLIP D PIN C CLIP D
PIN C
PIN E

End Of Sie
09
09-17–73
INTERIOR TRIM
REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Detach tab A while pulling the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then detach
tab B, pin C, D and clip E while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).
(1)
(2)
TAB A
TAB B
TAB B
PIN C
TAB A PIN D
CLIP E
PIN C
PIN D CLIP E
09-17–74
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Detach tab A while pulling the rear scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (3) shown in the figure, pull the rear
scuff plate in the direction of the arrow (4), and remove it while detaching tab B, pin C, D and clip E.
(3)
(4)
TAB B
TAB A
TAB B
PIN C
TAB A
PIN D
CLIP E
PIN C
PIN D CLIP E

ie
INNER GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09
09-17–75
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Pull the inner garnish in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clips.
CLIP
INNER GARNISH
CLIP
3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector. (Vehicles with tweeter)

End Of Sie
09-17–76
INTERIOR TRIM
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER BEZEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SCREW
2. Pull the fuel-filler lid opener bezel in the direction of the arrow (1) then remove the tab.
3. Move the fuel-filler lid opener bezel in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure.
FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER BEZEL
FUEL-FILLER LID
OPENER BEZEL
FUEL-FILLER LID
TAB OPENER LEVER
(2)
(1)
TAB

Sie
REAR DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
09-17–77
INTERIOR TRIM
2
1
A
9
3 A 8
4
1 Rear assist handle 6 Rear door lower trim

2 Screw A 7 Switch panel
3 Center frame 8 Screw B
4 Front armrest 9 Power window subswitch
5 Rear door upper trim
ie
TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the trunk mat.
3. Remove the trunk board.
09-17–78
INTERIOR TRIM
PIN PIN 6470-'0&64+/
FASTENER FASTENER
CLIP CLIP
PIN CLIP
5. Pull the trunk end trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips
and pins.
5HB
09-17–79
INTERIOR TRIM
PIN PIN 6470-'0&64+/
FASTENER FASTENER
CLIP CLIP
PIN CLIP
6. Pull the trunk end trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the clips
and pins.
Wagon
3. Remove the sub-trunk.
4. Peel the seaming welt.
5. Pull the trunk end trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching the guide
pin, clips, and pins.
09-17–80
INTERIOR TRIM
PIN CLIP
CLIP CLIP
PIN GUIDE PIN TRUNK END TRIM PIN
6. Remove the trunk end trim.

End Of Sie
TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
09
09-17–81
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the fasteners, then remove the trunk side trim.
FASTENER
TRUNK SIDE TRIM
FASTENER
FASTENER
5HB
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
09-17–82
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the fasteners then remove the trunk side trim.
TRUNK SIDE TRIM
FASTENER
FASTENER
(LEFT-SIDE ONLY)
FASTENER
FASTENER
Wagon
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Sub-trunk
09-17–83
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the bolt then remove the cargo net hook.
CARGO NET HOOK BOLT
BOLT :0.9—1.3 N·m {9.2—13 kgf·cm,8.0—11 in·lbf}

Left-side
CLIP
TRUNK SIDE
TRIM
CLIP
FASTENER
FASTENER
09-17–84
INTERIOR TRIM
Right-side
CLIP
TRUNK SIDE
TRIM
CLIP
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
4. Pull the trunk side trim while detaching clips.

5. Disconnect the Accessory Sockets connector. (right-side only)
End Of Sie
TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. (LH only)
09-17–85
INTERIOR TRIM
CLIP A
CLIP B CLIP B CLIP A
SCREW
SCREW
6. Remove the rear seat remote lever.

7. Pull the trunk side upper trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove it while detaching clip
A and B.
8. Remove the cargo compartment light connector. (LH only)
Wagon
09-17–86
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the screws then remove the cargo net holder.
SCREW
CARGO NET HOLDER
09
09-17–87
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Remove the bolts then remove the cargo net hook.
CLIP CARGO NET HOOK
TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
CLIP
(2)
(1)
CLIP CLIP
BOLT SCREW BOLT
BOLT :0.9—1.3 N·m {9.2—13 kgf·cm,8.0—11 in·lbf}

7. Pull the trunk side upper trim in the direction of the arrow (1) and (2) then detaching clip.
FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Driver-side
09-17–88
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Pull the cover of inner handle and remove it while detaching tabs.
SCREW COVER
TAB
09-17–89
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Pull in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure and remove clips from the door inner panel using a fastener
remover.
CLIP
CLIP
CLIP
09-17–90
INTERIOR TRIM
6. Remove the front door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
09-17–91
INTERIOR TRIM
7. Remove the inner handle and move the front door trim shown in the figure.
TAB 㧬
TAB 㧫 TAB 㧫
TAB $
09-17–92
INTERIOR TRIM
8. Turn the inner handle 90q in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the front door trim.
9. Disconnect the driver-side power outer mirror switch connector and power window main switch connector.
10. Remove the door courtesy illumination bulb socket.
Passenger-side
09-17–93
INTERIOR TRIM
COVER SCREW
TAB
SCREW
FRONT DOOR
HANDLE COVER
4. Remove the front door handle cover.

09-17–94
INTERIOR TRIM
remover.
CLIP
CLIP
CLIP
09-17–95
INTERIOR TRIM
7. Remove the front door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
09-17–96
INTERIOR TRIM
8. Remove the inner handle and move the front door trim shown in the figure.
TAB 㧬
TAB 㧫 TAB 㧫
TAB $
09-17–97
INTERIOR TRIM
9. Turn the inner handle 90q in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the front door trim.
10. Disconnect the power window subswitch connector.

11. Remove the door courtesy illumination bulb socket.
End Of Sie
FRONT DOOR TRIM DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Driver-side
09-17–98
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
6
1 8
7
A
5
1 Insulator 6 Main switch panel

2 Screw A 7 Screw B
3 Front door upper trim 8 Power window main switch
4 Front armrest 9 Front door lower trim
5 Center frame
Passenger-side
09-17–100
INTERIOR TRIM
R.H.D.
3 3
A
2
4
7
A
9 1
8
B
6
10
1 Insulator 6 Center frame

2 Front assist handle 7 Subswitch panel
3 Screw A 8 Screw B
4 Front door upper trim 9 Power window subswitch
5 Front armrest 10 Front door lower trim
End Of Sie
REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09-17–102
INTERIOR TRIM
SCREW
TAB
COVER
SCREW
REAR DOOR
HANDL COVER
3. Remove the rear door handle cover.

09-17–103
INTERIOR TRIM
remover.
CLIP
CLIP
CLIP
09-17–104
INTERIOR TRIM
6. Remove the rear door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
7. Remove the inner handle and move the rear door trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
TAB 㧬
TAB 㧬
TAB 㧫
TAB 㧫
09-17–105
INTERIOR TRIM
8. Turn the inner handle 90q in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the rear door trim.
INNER HANDLE
9. Disconnect the power window subswitch connector.

09-17–106
INTERIOR TRIM
LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
1. Pull the liftgate upper trim in the direction of the arrow (1) while detaching tab.
TAB CLIP PIN
LIFTGATE
SIDE TRIM
TAB CLIP TAB

(1) (1)
(2)
CLIP PIN CLIP
2. Pull the liftgate upper trim in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure, detach pin and clips
3. Remove the liftgate upper trim.
09-17–107
INTERIOR TRIM
Wagon
1. Pull the liftgate upper trim in the direction of the arrow while detaching clips A, B, pin and hooks.
CLIP A CLIP B PIN HOOK
HOOK
CLIP A CLIP B PIN CLIP B CLIP A
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim.

End Of Sie
LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
09-17–108
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the tonneau cover hook.
CLIP
CLIP
TONNEAU COVER
HOOK
CLIP
LIFTGATE SIDE
TRIM
3. Pull the liftgate side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, detach the clips.
09-17–109
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Detach tab while pulling the liftgate side trim in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the figure, then detach
hook while pulling in the direction of the arrow (2).
(1)
TAB
TAB
(2)
HOOK
HOOK
LIFTGATE SIDE
TRIM
5. Remove the liftgate side trim.

Wagon
2. Remove the tonneau cover hook.
09-17–110
INTERIOR TRIM
HOOK CLIP
CLIP
TONNEAU COVER HOOK

HOOK
LIFT GATE SIDE TRIM
FASTENER

4. Pull the liftgate side trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, detach the clip and hook.
5. Remove the liftgate side trim.
End Of Sie
LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
2. Remove the liftgate side trim. (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09-17–111
INTERIOR TRIM
FASTENER
09-17–112
INTERIOR TRIM
SCREW
09-17–113
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Pull the liftgate lower trim in the direction of the arrow in the order of (1) and (2), then remove it while detaching
the clips A and B.
CLIP B CLIP B CLIP A
CLIP B
CLIP A
(2)
(1)
CLIP A CLIP B
LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM CLIP B
Wagon
3. Remove the liftgate side trim. (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Remove the recess. (See 09-17-117 RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09-17–114
INTERIOR TRIM
FASTENER
6. Pull the liftgate lower trim in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, detach the clips.
09-17–115
INTERIOR TRIM
CLIP
LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM
CLIP
CLIP
GUIDE PIN
7. Remove the liftgate lower trim while remove the guide pins.
8. Disconnect the cargo room lamp connector.
ie
TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the recess. (See 09-17-117 RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
09-17–116
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the trunk lid trim.
TRUNK LID TRIM FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER
FASTENER

End Of Sie
RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Insert a fastener remover in the position indicated by the arrow in the figure and detach tabs A.
TAB A TAB A
TAB A
09-17–117
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Remove the recess in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure avoiding tabs B.
RECESS
TAB B
TAB B

ie
ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Insert a fastener remover into the assist handle SERVICE HOLE
service hole and remove the assist handle cover.
ASSIST HANDLE
COVER
ASSIST HANDLE
09-17–118
INTERIOR TRIM
2. Insert the fastener remover in the position
indicated by the arrow in the figure, push down
the clip by moving the fastener remover in the
direction of the arrow, and remove the assist
handle from the assist handle bracket while
shaking the assist handle up and down.
Caution
x When inserting a fastener remover, be
careful not to damage the tabs. ASSIST HANDLE
TAB
CLIP
TAB
HEADLINER
ASSIST HANDLE BRACKET
Installation
1. Insert the assist handle in the assist handle bracket.
2. Push the assist handle cover in the direction of
the arrow shown in the figure to install the assist
handle.
End Of Sie
ASSIST HANDLE
SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the screw. VANITY MIRROR
3. Rotate the sunvisor in the direction of the arrow. ILLUMINATION
4. Unhook and remove the sunvisor. CONNECTOR
5. Disconnect the vanity mirror illumination
HOOK
connector.
SUNVISOR
SCREW
09-17–119
INTERIOR TRIM
6. Press the center adaptor tabs as shown in the
figure using two tape-wrapped flathead
screwdrivers, and remove the center adaptor.
End Of Sie
CENTER ADAPTER
INTRUDER SENSOR COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Using a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver, press
the tabs in the direction of the arrows (1) shown in
the figure, and remove the intruder sensor cover
in the direction of the arrow (2).
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
INTRUDER
SENSOR COVER
TAB
FLATHEAD
SCREWDRIVER
INTRUDER (2)
SENSOR COVER
(1)
2. Disconnect the intruder connector.
INTRUDER CONNECTOR
09-17–120
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the intruder sensor component. (See 09-
17-121 Intruder Sensor Installation Note.) SCREW INTRUDER SENSOR
COMPONENT
5. Remove the screw, then remove the rear seatbelt SCREW

reminder indicator. 1.2—1.6 N·m
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. {13—16 kgf·cm,
11—14 in·lbf}
REAR SEATBELT
REMINDER INDICATOR
COVER
Intruder Sensor Installation Note

1. Fit the intruder sensor from the intruder sensor
cover bearing surface.
2. Push the intruder sensor in the indication of the

arrow, while lightly tighten the screw. SCREW INTRUDER SENSOR SCREW
09-17–121
INTERIOR TRIM
3. Use the spark plug gauge, adjust the intruder
sensor clearance from the intruder sensor cover
1.2 mm {0.047 in} or less.
Caution
x If the space between the intruder sensor
and intruder sensor cover exceeds 1.2
mm {0.047 in}, the detection function of
the intruder sensor may be reduced or
operate incorrectly.
1.2mm
{0.047 in}
4. Tighten the screw.

SCREW SCREW
1.4 N·m {14 kgf·cm, 12 in·lbf} 1.4 N·m {14 kgf·cm, 12 in·lbf}
5. Connect the connector.

End Of Sie CONNECTOR
HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
INSTALLATION.)
09-17–122
INTERIOR TRIM
6. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (vehicles with auto-dimming mirror only)
FASTENER
HEADLINER
ROOF WIRING HARNESS
RAIN SENSOR CONNECTER
12. Remove the retainer holding the roof panel and remove the headliner.
09-17–123
INTERIOR TRIM
13. Take the headliner off from the passenger-side
door opening.
5HB
INSTALLATION.)
09-17–124
INTERIOR TRIM
FASTENER
ROOF WIRING HARNESS
HEADLINER
RAIN SENSOR CONNECTER
14. Take the headliner off from the liftgate opening.
Wagon
INSTALLATION.)
09-17–125
INTERIOR TRIM
10. Remove the clip then remove the center seat belt cover.
CLIP
CENTER SEAT BELT

COVER
11. Insert a phillips screwdriver with no wear securely into each screw groove and remove the screws.
CARGO NET HOOK
SCREW
09-17–126
INTERIOR TRIM
Caution
x The screws are engaged firmly because thread-locking compound has been applied to them.
When removing the screws, be careful not to deform the screw groove.
12. Remove the cargo net hook.

HEADLINER
FASTENER
FASTENER
17. Take the headliner off from the liftgate opening.
Sie
FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
(3) Audio amplifier (Vehicles with Bose® system) (See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(7) Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(10)Upper panel (See 09-17-43 UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(11)Decoration panel (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(12)Shift knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09-17–127
INTERIOR TRIM
[A26M-R].)
(16)B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(17)Fuel-filler lid opener bezel (See 09-17-77 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER BEZEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(18)Lower anchor of the front seat belt installation bolt (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the fasteners A and B.
FASTENER A FASTENER A FASTENER A FASTENER B FASTENER A
(R.H.D. ONLY) (L.H.D. ONLY)
FASTENER A
FASTENER A
09-17–128
INTERIOR TRIM
4. Remove the cap nuts C.
CUP NUT C
5. Take the floor covering off from the front passenger-side door opening.
5HB, Wagon
2. Lift the rear seat cushion. (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON])
(2) Audio amplifier (Vehicles with Bose® system) (See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(6) Steering shaft cover (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(10)Shift knob (MTX) (See 05-16A-1 MANUAL TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A26M-R].)
09-17–129
INTERIOR TRIM
(14)B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(15)Fuel-filler lid opener bezel (See 09-17-77 FUEL-FILLER LID OPENER BEZEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(16)Lower anchor of the front seat belt installation bolt (See 08-11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the fasteners. A and B
FASTENER A FASTENER A FASTENER A FASTENER B FASTENER A
(R.H.D. ONLY) (L.H.D. ONLY)
FASTENER A
FASTENER A
09-17–130
INTERIOR TRIM
5. Remove the cap nuts C.
CUP NUT C
6. Take the floor covering off from the front passenger-side door opening.
End Of Sie
09-17–131
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
09-18 LIGHTING SYSTEMS

PAGE 1 OF 2
LIGHTING SYSTEMS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–32
LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–3 FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–34
WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–6 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–35
Discharge Headlight Service SIDE TURN LIGHT
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–6 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–38
Discharge Headlight Control Module Front Fender Panel Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–38
Service Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–6 Power Outer Mirror Type . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–38
Discharge Headlight Control Module SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . 09-18–39
Reuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–7 Side Turn Light (power outer mirror
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–39
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-18–8 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
With AFS (Adaptive front lighting REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–40
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–8 4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–40
Without AFS (Adaptive front lighting WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–40
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–9 REAR TURN LIGHT BULB
HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–41
Halogen Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–10 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–41
Discharge Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–11 WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–42
HEADLIGHT AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 BRAKE/TAILLIGHT BULB
With AFS (Adaptive front lighting REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–43
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–13 INBOARD LIGHT
Without AFS (Adaptive front lighting REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–44
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–18 Inboard Light Installation Note . . . . . . . 09-18–45
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM INBOARD LIGHT BULB
Discharge headlight inoperative. . . . . . 09-18–23 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–45
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT 5HB, WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–46
CONTROL MODULE HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
With AFS (Adaptive front lighting 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–46
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–25 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–47
Without AFS (Adaptive front lighting WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–47
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–25 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-18–48
SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH 4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–48
AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB
SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–50
INSPE1TION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–28 4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–50
AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–50
SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 4SD, 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–50
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–51
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE. . . . . . . 09-18–30 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–52
PARKING LIGHT BULB AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
With AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–31 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–54
Without AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–31 INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–54
FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB With AFS (Adaptive front lighting
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-18–31 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–54
With AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting Without AFS (Adaptive front lighting
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–31 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–57
Without AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–32 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–59
FRONT FOG LIGHT COMBINATION SWITCH
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
PAGE 2 OF 2
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–60 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–74
Combination Switch WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–74
Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–61 INTERIOR LIGHT BULB
COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–75
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-18–61 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–76
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–62 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–76
LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . 09-18–63 WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–76
Vehicles Without Auto Light CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–63 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–76
Vehicles With Auto Light System . . . . . 09-18–65 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–76
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–77
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–67 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–77
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–68 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–77
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–78
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–69 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–78
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–69 COURTESY LIGHT BULB
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–79
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–70 Lens Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–79
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION
AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–71 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–79
MAP LIGHT VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–71 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–79
Lens Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–72 VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION BULB
MAP LIGHT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–72 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–80
INTERIOR LIGHT Lens Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–80
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-18–73 INDIRECT ILLUMINATION
End of Toc
WM: LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LIGHTING SYSTEMS LOCATION INDEX
1 2
3 4 5 6
4SD 5HB
14
9 9
10 11 12 6 13 10 11 12 6 13
WGN
14 9
10 11 12 6 13
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
VEHICLES WITH LIGHT

SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE
22
21
23
15 16 17 18
VEHICLES WITH LIGHT
SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE
22
21
20
23
24
19
25 26 27 28
1 Auto light sensor (with auto light/wiper system) 6 Auto leveling sensor (with headlight auto leveling
(See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ system)
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
2 Side turn light REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-38 SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/ (See 09-18-53 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
(See 09-18-39 SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION.) 7 Back-up light switch (MTX)
3 Front combination light (See 09-18-59 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
(See 09-18-6 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE INSPECTION.)
WARNINGS.) 8 Trunk compartment light
(See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT (See 09-18-78 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-13 HEADLIGHT AIMING.) 9 High-mount brake light
(See 09-18-10 HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ (See 09-18-46 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
(See 09-18-31 PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ (See 09-18-48 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
INSTALLATION.) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(See 09-18-31 FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 10 License plate light
(See 09-18-50 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/
4 Discharge headlight control module INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-6 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE (See 09-18-50 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB
WARNINGS.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-25 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT
CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 11 Inboard light
(See 09-18-23 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM (See 09-18-44 INBOARD LIGHT REMOVAL/
(See 09-18-45 INBOARD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/
5 Front fog light INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-32 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-35 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
(See 09-18-34 FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
12 Rear combination light 25 Headlight leveling switch
(See 09-18-40 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT (See 09-18-70 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
(See 09-18-41 REAR TURN LIGHT BULB (See 09-18-70 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
(See 09-18-43 BRAKE/TAILLIGHT BULB 26 AFS OFF switch (with AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) System))
13 Courtesy light (See 09-18-27 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
(See 09-18-79 COURTESY LIGHT BULB SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
14 Cargo compartment light (See 09-18-28 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
(See 09-18-76 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 27 AFS control module (with AFS (Adaptive Front
(See 09-18-76 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT Lighting System))
BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-18-29 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
(See 09-18-77 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
INSPECTION.) INSTALLATION)
15 Interior light 28 Auto leveling control module (without AFS (Adaptive
(See 09-18-73 INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/ Front Lighting System)) (with headlight auto leveling
INSTALLATION.) system)
(See 09-18-75 INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL
INSTALLATION.) MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
16 Indirect illumination (See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
(See 09-18-80 INDIRECT ILLUMINATION INITIALIZATION.)
17 Map light
(See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-72 MAP LIGHT INSPECTION.)
18 Vanity mirror illumination
(See 09-18-80 VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION
BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-79 VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION
INSPECTION.)
19 Glove compartment light
(See 09-18-79 GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
20 Ignition key illumination
(See 09-18-79 IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION
21 Light switch
(See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-18-63 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.)
(See 09-18-67 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-18-68 REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
(See 09-18-71 AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL
SETTING.)
22 Combination switch
(See 09-18-60 COMBINATION SWITCH
(See 09-18-61 COMBINATION SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
23 Steering angle sensor
(See 09-18-29 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
24 Hazard warning switch
(See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
(See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
End Of Sie
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS
Discharge Headlight Service Warnings
x To prevent electrical shock when replacing the discharge headlight, dry hands thoroughly, and carry
out work in an area out of rain.
x When the light switch is on, approx. 25,000 V of high voltage passes through the discharge headlight
socket. Because of the danger of electrical shock, do not insert fingers or a tester.
With AFS (Adaptive front lighting system)
NO GOOD
Without AFS (Adaptive front lighting system)

x When the headlights are on, high voltage
flows around the socket and bulb. When
turning on the discharge headlights while
working, always leave the headlights in the
vehicle-installed condition to prevent
electrical shock.
NO GOOD
Discharge Headlight Control Module Service Warnings

x Because of the danger of electrical shock, when inspecting with a tester, do not inspect the discharge
headlight control module as a single unit or disassemble it.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
NO GOOD
NO GOOD
09
Discharge Headlight Control Module Reuse
x If the discharge headlight control module is dented or damaged in any way, replace the module with a
new one to prevent electrical shock and improper operation.
x Although the control module may temporarily operate normally even though it has received an impact,
it is possible that the interior may have been damaged. When reusing the control module, inspect the
following items regarding discharge headlight illumination to verify that there are no malfunctions.
— Verify that the discharge headlights illuminate normally by testing them several times under cold
illumination (headlights off for approx. 10 min or more and then turned on) and hot illumination
(headlights on for approx. 15 min or more, turned off for approx. 1 min, and then turned on again)
conditions.
— Inspect the headlight illumination in the period from directly after cold illumination until they are
uniformly illuminated (approx. 5 min) and verify that there is no flickering or inconsistent
brightness.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
— Turn on the headlights for approx. 30 min with normal condition bulbs and verify that there is no
brightness difference between the right and left, and that illumination is consistent.
ie
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning
x Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing
the discharge headlights, always refer to the discharge headlight service warnings. (See 09-18-6
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS.)

2. Remove the front bumper. (See 09-10-11 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the bolt A and fastener shown in the FASTNER BOLT A
figure. FRONT
COMBINATION
BOLT A
LIGHT
BOLT A
6.9—9.8 N·m
BOLT A
{71—99 kgf·cm,
62—86 in·lbf} FASTNER
4. Disconnect the connector shown in the figure. CONNECTOR

5. Pull the front combination light in the direction of
the arrow shown in the figure and remove the pin FRONT
COMBINATION
from the body. LIGHT
6. Remove the front combination light.
PIN
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
7. Remove the bolt B and screws shown in the
figure. FRONT
8. Remove the bracket from the front combination COMBINATION
light. LIGHT
10. Adjust the headlight aiming. (See 09-18-13
BRACKET
HEADLIGHT AIMING.)
BRACKET
BOLT B
3.0—6.0 N·m
{31—61 kgf·cm,
27—53 in·lbf}
SCREW
Warning

3. Remove the bolt A and fastener shown in the FASTNER BOLT A
figure. FRONT
COMBINATION
BOLT A
LIGHT
BOLT A
6.9—9.8 N·m
BOLT A
{71—99 kgf·cm,
62—86 in·lbf} FASTNER
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Disconnect the connector shown in the figure. CONNECTOR
5. Pull the front combination light in the direction of
the arrow shown in the figure and remove the pin FRONT
COMBINATION
from the body. LIGHT
6. Remove the front combination light.
PIN
7. Remove the screws shown in the figure.

8. Remove the bracket from the front combination FRONT
light. COMBINATION
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. LIGHT
HEADLIGHT AIMING.)
BRACKET
BRACKET
SCREW SCREW
HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Halogen Type
Low-beam
2. Remove the fasteners and slightly bend back the mudguard.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Rotate the headlight bulb in the direction of the CONNECTOR
arrow shown in the figure. HEADLIGHT BULB
5. Remove the headlight bulb.
Caution
x A halogen bulb generates extremely high
heat when it is illuminated. If the surface
of the bulb is soiled, excessive heat will
build up and the life of the bulb will be
shortened. When replacing the bulb, hold
the metal flange, not the glass.
High-beam
Caution HEADLIGHT BULB

heat when it is illuminated. If the surface CONNECTOR
Discharge Type
Warning
Note
x The headlight HI/LO switching device has been adopted to vehicles with the AFS (adaptable front lighting 09
system). To remove the bulb, perform the low-beam bulb removal procedure.
Low-beam
3. Remove the front combination light. (See 09-18-8 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Rotate the cover in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to remove it.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
COVER

COVER
5. Rotate the connector in the direction of the arrow CONNECTOR

shown in the figure to remove it.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
6. Press sections A to release the bulb retaining wire
and remove the discharge headlight.
7. Remove the discharge headlight.
DISCHARGE
Caution HEADLIGHT
x The discharge headlight generates
extremely high heat when it is
illuminated. If the surface of the
discharge headlight is soiled, excessive
heat will build up and the life of the
discharge headlight will be shortened.
When replacing the discharge headlight,
hold the metal flange, not the glass.

HEADLIGHT AIMING.) A
High-beam
Caution HEADLIGHT BULB

heat when it is illuminated. If the surface CONNECTOR

End Of Sie
HEADLIGHT AIMING
Note
x The reflectors for the low and high beams are integrated. Therefore, perform the headlight aiming
adjustment on either the low or high beam.
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Low-beam adjustment
1. Point the headlight beams to a wall and verify that
the headlight beams are as shown in the figure. L.H.D.
LH RH
BRIGHTNESS BORDERLINE
R.H.D.
LH RH
2. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in L.H.D.

the figure using double-weight, white paper.
3. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT
4. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level 15q
surface. ELBOW POINT
5. Sit on the driver-side seat alone.
30 mm {1.2 in}
BRIGHTNESS
BORDER LINE
R.H.D.
CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT
15q
ELBOW POINT
30 mm {1.2 in}
BRIGHTNESS
BORDER LINE
6. Line up the headlights with the wall at a distance

of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart. WALL
ACTUAL CENTER
7. Measure the height at the center of the headlight. OF THE HEADLIGHT
Note
x Since the height of the vehicle varies 3 m {9.8 ft}
depending on the vehicle situation, measure
the height of the center of the headlight
using the actual vehicle.
MEASURED
HEIGHT
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8. Align the center of the headlight with the center of
the screen.
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
90q
90q
WALL WALL
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT SCREEN
696 mm
{27.4 in}
CENTER OF
HEADLIGHT VEHICLE ACTUAL VEHICLE
CENTER CENTER OF CENTER
THE
HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT 696 mm
{27.4 in}
9. Block the light of the headlight which is not adjusted.

10. Start the engine and charge the battery.
11. Turn on the headlight low beams.
12. Verify that the elbow point of the headlight is in the position indicated on the screen.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
x If the elbow point is not at the position
indicated by the adjustment screen, turn the INWARD
adjustment screw as shown in the figure to
adjust the elbow point to the position UPWARD OUTWARD
indicated by the adjustment screen.
DOWNWARD
High-beam adjustment
1. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in
3. Park the vehicle on level ground, in an unloaded
condition.
5. Put the wall in front of the vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER
Note
MEASURED
HEIGHT
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the
position indicated in the figure, then affix the
screen to the wall. ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
90q
90q
WALL WALL
696 mm
{27.4 in}
CENTER OF
THE
HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT 696 mm
{27.4 in}

10. Turn on the headlight high beams.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
12. Verify that the center of the hot zone (the bright
part of high beam) is at the center of the headlight
on the adjustment screen.
CENTER OF HEADLIGHT
(CENTER OF HOT ZONE)
HOT ZONE
x If the center of the hot zone is not at the

center of the headlight on the adjustment INWARD
screen, turn the adjustment screw to adjust
the center of the hot zone. UPWARD OUTWARD
DOWNWARD

Low-beam adjustment
1. Point the headlight beams to a wall and verify that
the headlight beams are as shown in the figure. L.H.D.
LH RH
R.H.D.
LH RH
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in L.H.D.
4. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level 15q
surface. ELBOW POINT
30 mm {1.2 in}
BRIGHTNESS
BORDER LINE
R.H.D.
CENTER OF HEAD LIGHT
15q
ELBOW POINT
30 mm {1.2 in}
BRIGHTNESS
BORDER LINE

ACTUAL CENTER
Note
MEASURED
HEIGHT
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT
09
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
90q
90q
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8. Align the center of the headlight with the center of the screen.
WALL WALL
704 mm
{27.7in}
CENTER OF
THE
HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT 704 mm
{27.7in}

11. Turn on the headlight low beams.
12. Set the headlight leveling switch to the 0 position. (vehicles with headlight leveling switch)
13. Verify that the elbow point of the headlight is in the position indicated on the screen.
x If the elbow point is not at the position
indicated by the adjustment screen, turn the DOWNWARD
adjustment screw as shown in the figure to
adjust the elbow point to the position UPWARD
indicated by the adjustment screen.
INWARD
OUTWARD
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
High-beam adjustment
1. Make a headlight adjustment screen as shown in
3. Park the vehicle on level ground, in an unloaded
condition.
5. Put the wall in front of the vehicle.

ACTUAL CENTER
Note
MEASURED
HEIGHT
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE HEADLIGHT
90q
90q
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the position indicated in the figure, then affix the screen to the
wall.
WALL WALL
584 mm
{23.0 in}
CENTER OF
THE
HEADLIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT 584 mm
{23.0 in}

10. Turn on the headlight high beams.
12. Verify that the center of the hot zone (the bright
part of high beam) is at the center of the headlight
on the adjustment screen.
CENTER OF HEADLIGHT
(CENTER OF HOT ZONE)
HOT ZONE
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
x If the center of the hot zone is not at the
center of the headlight on the adjustment
screen, turn the adjustment screw to adjust
the center of the hot zone.
INWARD
DOWNWARD
UPWARD OUTWARD
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SYSTEM INSPECTION

Discharge headlight inoperative
Warning
Terminal layout
MAIN FUSE BLOCK HEADLIGHT
LOW RELAY
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT
CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR
B A
FRONT
HEAD HEAD
LOW R LOW L
15A FUSE 15A FUSE
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Inspection procedure
1 INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF Yes Go to Step 6.
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL No Go to the next step.
MODULE
x Disconnect the discharge headlight control
module connector.
x Turn the light switch to the HEADLIGHT (LO)
position.
x Measure the voltage at discharge headlight
control module connector (harness-side)
terminal A.
2 INSPECT FUSE Yes Go to the next step.
x Turn the light switch to the OFF position. No Replace the fuse.
x Remove the HEAD LOW R 15 A fuse (RH) or
HEAD LOW L 15 A fuse (LH).
x Inspect the fuses.
x Are the fuses normal?
3 INSPECT HEADLIGHT RELAY Yes Go to the next step.
x Remove the headlight low relay. (See 09-21- No Replace the headlight low relay. (See 09-21-12 RELAY
12 RELAY LOCATION.) LOCATION.)
x Inspect the headlight low relay. (See 09-21-
13 RELAY INSPECTION.)
x Is the headlight low relay normal?
4 INSPECT LIGHT SWITCH Yes Go to the next step.
x Inspect the light switch. (See 09-18-63 No Replace the light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH
LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
x Is the light switch normal?
BATTERY AND DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT No Replace the related wiring harness.
CONTROL MODULE
terminals:
— Positive battery—headlight low relay
terminal D
— H/L LO 15 A fuse (RH)—discharge
headlight control module terminal A
— H/L LO 15 A fuse (LH)—discharge
headlight control module terminal A
x Are the wiring harnesses normal?
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL No Replace the related wiring harness.
MODULE AND GROUND
x Inspect wiring harness between discharge
headlight control module terminal B and
ground for following:
— Open circuit
7 VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN Yes Replace the discharge headlight. (See 09-18-10
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT OR DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL MODULE No Replace the discharge headlight control module. (See 09-
x Install any other discharge headlight. (See 18-25 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL MODULE
09-18-10 HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/ REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
x Connect the discharge headlight control
module connector.
x Turn the headlight switch to the HEADLIGHT
(LO) position.
x Does the headlight (low-beam) illuminate?
End Of Sie
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlight control module could result in electrical shock.
Before servicing the discharge headlight control module, always refer to the “Discharge headlight
service warnings.” (See 09-18-6 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS.)

4. Remove the screw A. DISCHARGE
5. Disconnect the connector A. HEADLIGHT
CONTROL
MODULE
CONNECTOR A
SCREW A
6. Remove the screw B.

7. Disconnect the connector B.
8. Remove the discharge headlight control module.
SCREW B
DISCHARGE
HEADLIGHT
CONTROL
MODULE
CONNECTOR B

09
Caution
x Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlight control module could result in electrical shock.
Before servicing the discharge headlight control module, always refer to the “Discharge headlight
service warnings.” (See 09-18-6 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS.)

LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Remove the screw A shown in the figure, then COVER A
remove the cover A.
SCREW A SCREW A
5. Remove the screw B shown in the figure.

DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL MODULE
SCREW B
6. Disconnect the connector A. DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL MODULE
CONNECTOR A
7. Remove the cover B.

COVER B
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
8. Disconnect the connector B.
CONNECTOR B
9. Pull out the wiring harness and remove the

discharge headlight control module.
End Of Sie
HARNESS
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT
CONTROL MODULE
AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(1) Front scuff plate (driver-side) (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front side trim (driver-side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Decoration panel (driver-side) (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Bonnet release lever (See 09-14-18 BONNET LATCH AND RELEASE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) Lower panel (driver-side) (See 09-17-34 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Remove the tabs.
4. Remove the AFS OFF switch.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. TAB TAB
End Of Sie
LOWER TAB TAB

PANEL
AFS OFF SWITCH
AFS OFF
SWITCH
LOWER
PANEL
AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION

(7) AFS OFF switch (See 09-18-27 AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the AFS OFF
switch terminals is as indicated in the table. L.H.D.
x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table,
replace the AFS OFF switch. H E
K I G E C A
L J H F D B
K A
R.H.D.
B E
K I G E C A
L J H F D B
K A
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Apply battery positive voltage to AFS OFF switch L.H.D.
terminal E, and connect terminal A to ground. : Continuity
x If there is any malfunction, replace the AFS Terminal
OFF switch. Switch position
H K
End Of Sie
Off
On
R.H.D. : Continuity
Terminal
Switch position
B K
Off
On
AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Note
x The AFS (adaptive front lighting system) control module controls the AFS and the auto leveling system.

4. Remove the nut.
6. Perform the auto leveling system initialization.
(See 09-18-54 AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION.)
End Of Sie
AFS CONTROL CONNECTOR NUT

9—12 N·m
MODULE {92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning

(1) Driver-side air bag module (See 08-10-6 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Steering wheel (See 06-13-5 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT
(3) Clock spring (See 08-10-16 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Remove the screw and release the tab. SCREW
5. Remove the pin.
6. Remove the steering angle sensor.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal. STEERING
8. Perform the steering angle sensor initialization ANGLE
procedure. (See 09-18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)
End Of Sie
CLOCK SPRING TAB PIN PIN
STEERING
TAB ANGLE
SENSOR
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION

2. Turn the steering wheel to the right and left, and verify that the voltage and pulses at the terminals are as
x If not as specified, replace the steering angle sensor.
0.5—1.5˚
4.00 V—4.75 V
TERMINAL B
0.25 V—0.75 V
4.00 V—4.75 V
TERMINAL C
0.25 V—0.75 V
F E D C B A 4.00 V—4.75 V
TERMINAL D
0.25 V—0.75 V
2.5—3.5˚
4.00 V—4.75 V
TERMINAL E
0.25 V—0.75 V
3.0—5.0˚
End Of Sie
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Warning
x If the steering angle sensor initialization is not completed, it could result in an unexpected
accident due to the related systems being inoperative. Therefore, if any of the following items have
been performed, always perform the steering angle sensor initialization and verify that the related
systems are operational.
— The negative battery cable is disconnected
— A fuse (ROOM) is removed
— The BCM connector is disconnected
— The steering angle sensor connector is disconnected
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
— BCM is replaced.
— Steering angle sensor is replaced.
1. Inspect the wheel alignment, inflation pressure, and the installation condition of the steering wheel.
x If there is any malfunction, adjust the applicable part.
3. Switch the ignition to On.
4. Confirm that the DSC indicator light illuminates and that the DSC OFF light flashes.
5. Turn the steering wheel to full right lock, then turn it to full left lock.
6. Confirm that the DSC OFF light and DSC indicator light goes out.
x If the DSC indicator light does not go out, disconnect the negative battery cable, and perform the procedure
again starting from Step 2 shown above.
7. Drive the vehicle for approx. 10 min, and confirm that the DSC indicator lights do not illuminate.
End Of Sie
PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
With AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting System)
3. Rotate the socket in the direction of the arrow
PARKING
shown in the figure to remove it LIGHT
4. Remove the parking light bulb. BULB
CONNECTOR
SOCKET
Without AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting System)

shown in the figure to remove it
3. Remove the parking light bulb.
End Of Sie
SOCKET
PARKING LIGHT
BULB
FRONT TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

With AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting System)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Remove the front turn light bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. SOCKET
FRONT TURN LIGHT

BULB
Without AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting System)

3. Remove the front turn light bulb.
SOCKET
FRONT TURN LIGHT

BULB
FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2. Remove the screw A.
3. Pull the front fog light cover in the direction of the
arrow while detaching tab A and tab B.
TAB A
TAB B TAB A
TAB B TAB A
TAB A
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT FOG SCREW A

LIGHT COVER
TAB A TAB B
4. Remove the screw B.
FRONT FOG LIGHT
FRONT BUMPER SCREW B
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
6. Remove the clip. BRACKET
CLIP FRONT FOG LIGHT
CLIP
CONNECTOR
7. Remove the adjustment bolt.

8. Remove the screw C.
FRONT
9. Remove the front fog light in the direction of the FOG LIGHT
arrow shown in the figure.
10. Remove the front fog light.
12. Adjust the front fog light aiming. (See 09-18-35
FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING.)
End Of Sie
SCREW C
BRACKET
ADJUSTMENT BOLT
2.0—2.5 N·m
{21—25 kgf·cm, 18—22 in·lbf}
FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the front fog light. (See 09-18-32 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Rotate the front fog light bulb in the direction of FRONT FOG LIGHT
Caution
heat when it is used. If the surface of the
bulb is soiled, excessive heat will build
up and the light’s life will be shortened.
When replacing the bulb, hold the metal
flange, not the glass.
4. Remove the front fog light bulb.

End Of Sie
FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB
FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING

1. Make a front fog light adjustment screen as
shown in the figure using double-weight, white SAME FOR BOTH
paper. RIGHT AND LEFT CENTER OF
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification. FRONT FOG LIGHT
3. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level
surface.
4. Seat one person in the driver’s seat. 88 mm {3.5 in}
BRIGHTNESS
BORDERLINE
5. Line up the front fog lights with the white screen at ACTUAL CENTER
a distance of 3 m {9.8 ft} apart. WALL OF THE FRONT
6. Measure the height at the center of the front fog FOG LIGHT
light.
Note 3 m {9.8 ft}

x Since the height of the vehicle varies
the height of the center of the front fog light
MEASURED
HEIGHT
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
7. Align the center of the adjustment screen with the
position indicated in the figure, then affix the ACTUAL CENTER
screen to the wall. OF THE FRONT FOG LIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT
ACTUAL CENTER
OF THE FRONT
FOG LIGHT
90q
90q
WALL WALL
FRONT FOG LIGHT

701 mm 701 mm
ADJUSTMENT SCREEN
{27.6 in} {27.6 in}
ACTUAL
VEHICLE CENTER OF VEHICLE
CENTER THE FRONT CENTER
CENTER OF FOG LIGHT
FRONT FOG
LIGHT
MEASURED
HEIGHT
8. Place an object in front of the fog light not being adjusted to block its light beam.
9. Start the engine so that the battery remains charged.
10. Turn the front fog lights on.
11. Verify that the brightness border line of the front fog light is at the position indicated on the adjustment screen.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
x If the brightness border line is not at the position indicated on the adjustment screen, perform the following
adjustment.
1. Remove the front fog light. (See 09-18-32 FRONT FOG LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the adjustment bolt and cut the
front fog light hole cover at the position
BRACKET
3. Temporarily tighten the adjustment bolt.
CUT LOCATION
ADJUSTMENT BOLT
2.0—2.5 N·m FRONT FOG LIGHT
{21—25 kgf·cm, 18—22 in·lbf} HOLE COVER
4. Install the screw A.
FRONT FOG LIGHT
SCREW A
5. Move the front fog light in the direction of

the arrow shown in the figure to adjust the DOWN WARD
brightness border line to the position
indicated on the adjustment screen.
09
UP WARD
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
6. Tighten the adjustment bolt.
ADJUSTMENT BOLT
7. Install the front fog light cover. 2.0—2.5 N·m
8. Install the screw B. {21—25 kgf·cm, 18—22 in·lbf}
FRONT FOG
LIGHT COVER
SCREW B
SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Front Fender Panel Type
2. Move the side turn light in the direction of the SIDE TURN
arrow (1) and detach the tab. SIDE TURN LIGHT LIGHT
3. Pull area A of the side turn light in the direction of CONNECTOR
the arrow (2) and remove the side turn light.
4. Disconnect the side turn light connector. TAB
A
(2) (1)
VEHICLE FRONT
Power Outer Mirror Type

2. Remove the outer mirror glass. (See 09-12-44 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-45 OUTER
MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the outer mirror garnish. (See 09-12-45 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
POWER TAB
5. Disconnect the connector. OUTER
6. Remove the side turn light while detaching tab. MIRROR TAB
End Of Sie
SIDE
TURN
LIGHT
CONNECTOR SCREW
SIDE TURN LIGHT INSPECTION

Side Turn Light (power outer mirror type)
2. Remove the outer mirror glass. (See 09-12-44 OUTER MIRROR GLASS REMOVAL.) (See 09-12-45 OUTER
MIRROR GLASS INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the outer mirror garnish. (See 09-12-45 OUTER MIRROR GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the side turn light. (See 09-18-38 SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Apply battery positive voltage to side turn light
terminal J, and connect terminal K to ground.
x If the side turn light does illuminate, replace it.
x If the side turn light illuminate, inspect the
short-code.
SIDE TURN LIGHT K J
09
Short-code
3. Disconnect the power outer mirror connector. (See 09-12-43 POWER OUTER MIRROR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Verify that the continuity between side turn light
terminals is as indicated in the table.
A D G
E H
C F I
J K
5. If not as indicated in the table, replace the power

outer mirror.
: Continuity
Terminal
Test condition
C E J K
Under any
condition
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD, 5HB
2. Remove the trunk end trim. (4SD) (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the trunk side trim. (4SD) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the service hole cover. (5HB)
1 Nut
2 Connector
3 Rear combination light 4 5 3
4 Rear turn light bulb socket
5 Rear turn light bulb
6 Brake/taillight bulb socket (bulb type only)
7 Brake/taillight bulb (bulb type only)

1
4.1—6.1 N·m
{42—62 kgf·cm,
37—53 in·lbf}
2 6 7
WGN
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
1 Nut
2 Connector
3 Rear combination light
4 Rear turn light bulb socket 4 5 3

End Of Sie
1
4.1—6.1 N·m
{42—62 kgf·cm,
37—53 in·lbf} 2
REAR TURN LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD
3. Partially peel back the trunk side trim. (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Connector
2 Socket 3 2 1
09
5HB
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
SERVICE
HOLE
COVER

1 Connector 3 2 1
2 Socket
WGN
2. Remove the service hole cover A.
SERVICE HOLE COVER A
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Remove the service hole cover B.
SERVICE HOLE COVER B

3 2 1
1 Connector
2 Socket

End Of Sie
BRAKE/TAILLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the trunk end trim. (4SD) (See 09-17-78 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Partially peel back the trunk side trim. (4SD) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the service hole cover. (5HB)
SERVICE
HOLE
COVER
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4SD 5HB
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 Connector 3 Brake/taillight bulb

2 Socket

ie
INBOARD LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
T

(1) Recess (4SD) (See 09-17-117 RECESS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Trunk lid trim (4SD) (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Liftgate upper trim (5HB, WGN) (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Liftgate side trim (5HB, WGN) (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Liftgate lower trim (5HB, WGN) (See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4SD, 5HB
2
2.0—3.9 1
{20—39,
18—34}
5 6 4
N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf}
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
WGN
1 Nut
2 Bracket
2.0—3.9 2
3 Connector {20—39, 1
4 Inboard light 18—34}
(See 09-18-45 Inboard Light Installation Note.)
5 Socket
6 Rear fog light bulb (driver-side) (with rear fog light),
back-up light bulb (driver-side) (without rear fog
light)/back-up light bulb (passenger-side)
3
5 6 4
Inboard Light Installation Note

1. Insert the inboard light into the trunk lid (liftgate)
as shown in the figure, then pivot it inward and fix
in place.
TRUNK LID (4SD)

LIFTGATE (5HB, WGN)
INBOARD
LIGHT
2. Push the bracket onto the trunk lid (liftgate) as

shown in the figure and install. INBOARD TRUNK LID (4SD)
End Of Sie LIGHT LIFTGATE (5HB, WGN)
BRACKET
A A
SEC. A—A
A
CORRECT POSITION WRONG POSITION
BRACKET BRACKET BRACKET
TRUNK LID (4SD) TRUNK LID (4SD)

LIFTGATE (5HB, WGN) LIFTGATE (5HB, WGN)
INBOARD LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD
2. Partially peel back the trunk lid trim. (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
1 2
1 Rear fog light bulb connector (driver-side) (with rear
fog light), back-up light bulb connector (driver-side)
(without rear fog light)/back-up light bulb connector
(passenger-side)
2 Socket
5HB, WGN
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 1 4
1 Service hole cover
2 Rear fog light bulb connector (driver-side) (with rear
fog light), back-up light bulb connector (driver-side)
(without rear fog light)/back-up light bulb connector
(passenger-side)
3 Socket
2 3
ie
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener switch connector HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE HIGH-MOUNT
and high-mount brake light connector, then LIGHT CONNECTOR BRAKE LIGHT
remove the nuts shown in the figure.
NUT NUT
2.9—6.9 N·m 2.9—6.9 N·m
{30—70 kgf·cm, {30—70 kgf·cm,
26—61 in·lbf} 26—61 in·lbf}
TRUNK LID OPENER

CONNECTOR
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. While pressing the tabs shown in the figure, pull TAB
the high-mount brake light outward and remove it. HIGH-MOUNT
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. BRAKE LIGHT
5HB
5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener switch connector LIFTGATE OPENER HIGH-MOUNT
and high-mount brake light connector, then SWITCH CONNECTOR BRAKE LIGHT
remove the nuts shown in the figure.
2.9—6.9 N·m
{30—70 kgf·cm,
26—61 in·lbf}
NUT
NUT
2.9—6.9 N·m
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE {30—70 kgf·cm,
LIGHT CONNECTOR 26—61 in·lbf}
6. While pressing the tabs shown in the figure, pull HIGH-MOUNT

the high-mount brake light outward and remove it. BRAKE LIGHT
TAB
WGN
3. Remove the rear spoiler. (See 09-16-30 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-34 REAR SPOILER
INSTALLATION.) 09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Release all the tabs shown in the figure.
LIFTGATE TAB
TAB
5. Push up the high-mount brake light and remove it.

7. Remove the high-mount brake light.
CONNECTOR
End Of Sie
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

4SD, 5HB
(1) Trunk lid trim (4SD) (See 09-17-116 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Liftgate upper trim (5HB) (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Liftgate side trim (5HB) (See 09-17-108 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Liftgate lower trim (5HB) (See 09-17-111 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Remove the tabs A.
4. Remove the high-mount brake light outer lens.
HIGH-MOUNT
TAB A BRAKE LIGHT
A A
A A
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE
LIGHT OUTER LENS
5. Remove the tabs B.

6. Remove the high-mount brake light inner lens.
TAB B HIGH-MOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
B
B
B
B
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE
LIGHT INNER LENS
WGN
3. Remove the rear spoiler. (See 09-16-30 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL.) (See 09-16-34 REAR SPOILER
INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the high-mount brake light. (See 09-18-46 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the tabs A.
6. Remove the high-mount brake light lens.
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT A
A
A
A A
A
A A
A A
A
A
A
A
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT LENS

LIGHTING SYSTEMS
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD, 5HB
2. Insert a tape-wrapped fastener remover to the LENS
position shown in the figure, release the tabs, and
remove the lens. A
A
A
A
TAB A TAB A
LENS
FASTENER
REMOVER
3. Pull the bulb outward and remove it. LICENSE

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. PLATE
LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE
LIGHT BULB
LENS
WGN
2. Expand the ends of the license plate light in the LENS
direction of the arrow shown in the figure, release
the tabs, and remove the lens.
TAB TAB
LENS LICENSE
PLATE
LIGHT
TAB
LICENSE PLATE
LIGHT
3. Pull the bulb outward and remove it.

4. Install in the reverse order of removal. LICENSE
End Of Sie PLATE
LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE
LIGHT BULB
LENS
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD, 5HB
(1) Splash shield (See 09-16-43 SPLASH SHIELD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
(3) Rear bumper (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) License plate light bulb (See 09-18-50 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove tab shown in the figure and detach the
license plate light from the rear bumper.
4. Disconnect the license plate light connector and
remove the license plate light.
REAR
BUMPER
LICENSE PLATE
LIGHT
TAB
WGN
2. Remove the liftgate garnish. (See 09-16-28 LIFTGATE GARNISH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the tabs. TAB
4. Remove the license plate light.
TAB TAB
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

CONNECTOR
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Front
3. Turn the steering wheel to the right.
4. Slightly bend back the mudguard.
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
FRONT AUTO CONNECTOR CLIP
6. Disconnect the connector. LEVELING SENSOR
7. Remove the clip.
8. Remove the front auto leveling sensor.
10. Perform the auto leveling system initialization. CLIP
INITIALIZATION.)
BOLT BOLT
9—12 N·m 9—12 N·m
{90—129 kgf·cm, {90—129 kgf·cm,
78—112 in·lbf} 78—112 in·lbf}
Rear
3. Remove the nuts shown in the figure.
2WD
CONNECTOR REAR AUTO

LEVELING SENSOR
REAR AUTO
LEVELING
SENSOR
NUT
9—12 N·m
{90—129 kgf·cm,
78—112 in·lbf}
NUT
9—12 N·m
{90—129 kgf·cm,
78—112 in·lbf}
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4WD
4. Disconnect the connector. NUT
5. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor. 9—12 N·m {90—129 kgf·cm,
78—112 in·lbf}
INITIALIZATION.)
End Of Sie REAR AUTO
LEVELING
SENSOR
CONNECTOR
NUT
9—12 N·m {90—129 kgf·cm,
78—112 in·lbf}
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR INSPECTION

2. Remove the auto leveling sensor. (See 09-18-51 AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Connect the three dry cell batteries (1.5 V) in a
series.
4. Connect auto leveling sensor terminal A to the
battery’s minus terminal, and terminal C to the
B A
battery’s plus terminal, and apply 4.5 V of voltage C
between terminals A and C.
5. Connect the tester as shown in the figure.
6. When slowly moving the link up and down, verify
that the shift is linear while the voltage is 0.5 to
4.5 V.
x If the voltage cannot be verified as indicated
in the graph, replace the auto leveling sensor. FRONT REAR
LOW
LOW
-45q
-45q
HIGH
STANDARD
STANDARD
45q 45q
HIGH 09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
End Of Sie
V
4.5
2.5
0.5
LINK ANGLE
LOW 0 HIGH
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4. Remove the nut.
INITIALIZATION.)
End Of Sie
AUTO LEVELING CONNECTOR NUT

9—12 N·m
CONTROL MODULE {92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Caution
x Perform with the vehicle in an unloaded condition (no occupants; spare tire, jack and tools are in
designated positions.)

Without M-MDS
Note
x If the following servicing is to be done, perform the procedure for the case where system initialization has
never been done. (See 09-18-54 Initialization has never been performed.)
— AFS control module is newly replaced.
x If the following servicing is done, perform the procedure for the case where the system is reset after
initialization has already been completed. (See 09-18-55 Initialization operation implemented and
resetting to be performed.)
— Auto leveling sensor is removed/installed.
— Auto leveling sensor is replaced.
— Procedure for changing vehicle height is performed such as changing suspension.
— Initialized AFS control module is installed
Initialization has never been performed
Caution
x Perform the procedures in Steps 2 to 5 within 30 s.

LIGHTING SYSTEMS
DLC-2
* * * * * * * *
B * * * * * * *
4. Verify that the AFS OFF light flashes every 0.5 s.

AFS OFF LIGHT
5. Ground the DLC-2 B terminal 3 times or more at 1
s intervals using the jumper wire.
6. After the AFS OFF light flashes three times at 0.5
s intervals, verify that it turns off.
x If the AFS OFF light continues to flash at 0.5 s
intervals,perform a DTC inspection, as there
could be a malfunction in the auto leveling
system. (See 09-02D-2 DTC INSPECTION
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING
SYSTEM)].) Repair or replace the
malfunctioning area, then repeat the
procedure from Step 1.
7. Verify that the motor inside the headlight leveling
actuator operates and the headlight optical axis lowers from its current position and returns to its original
position.
x If the motor inside the headlight leveling actuator does not operate, the headlight optical axis may be at the
bottommost position, or the procedure may have been performed incorrectly. Therefore, park the vehicle on
level ground and resume the procedure from Step 1.
8. Disconnect the jumper wire from DLC-2.
9. Verify that the AFS OFF light is not illuminated.
Initialization operation implemented and resetting to be performed
Caution

2. Turn on the headlights TNS position.
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
DLC-2
* * * * * * * *
B * * * * * * *
5. Verify that the AFS OFF light flashes.

AFS OFF LIGHT

jumper wire.
7. The light switch switches in the following order:
TNSoONoOFFoONoOFFoONoOFF
8. After the AFS OFF light flashes three times at 0.5
s intervals, verify that it turns off.
x If the AFS OFF light continues to flash at 0.5 s
intervals,perform a DTC inspection, as there
could be a malfunction in the auto leveling
system. (See 09-02D-2 DTC INSPECTION
[AFS (ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTING DLC-2
SYSTEM)].) Repair or replace the
procedure from Step 1. * * * * * * * *
original position.
x If the motor inside the headlight leveling
actuator does not operate, the headlight
optical axis may be at the bottommost position, or the procedure may have been performed incorrectly.
Therefore, park the vehicle on level ground and resume the procedure from Step 1.
10. Pull out the jumper wire from DLC-2.
11. Verify that the AFS OFF light is not illuminated.
With M-MDS
Caution
designated positions).
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2. After the vehicle is identified, select "Electrical",
then "Exterior Lighting", then “Headlamp“, then
“Auto Leveling Sensor Re-zero Procedure“ from
3. Perform the procedure according to the directions
on the screen.
DLC-2

Without M-MDS
Note
x If the following servicing is to be done, perform the procedure for the case where system initialization has
never been done. (See 09-18-57 Initialization has never been performed.)
— Auto leveling control module is newly replaced.
x If the following servicing is done, perform the procedure for the case where the system is reset after
initialization has already been completed. (See 09-18-58 Initialization operation implemented and
resetting to be performed.)
— Auto leveling sensor is removed/installed.
— Auto leveling sensor is replaced.
— Procedure for changing vehicle height is performed such as changing suspension.
— Initialized auto leveling control module is installed
Initialization has never been performed
Caution

DLC-2
* * * * * * * *
B * * * * * * *
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Verify that the headlight auto leveling warning
light flashes every 0.5 s.
5. Ground the DLC-2 B terminal 3 times or more at 1
s intervals using the jumper wire.
6. After the headlight auto leveling warning light
flashes three times at 0.5 s intervals, verify that it
turns off.
x If the auto leveling warning light continues to
flash at 0.5 s intervals,perform a DTC
inspection, as there could be a malfunction in
the auto leveling system. (See 09-02F-1 DTC
INSPECTION [HEADLIGHT AUTO
LEVELING SYSTEM].) Repair or replace the
7. Verify that the motor inside the headlight leveling actuator operates and the headlight optical axis lowers from
its current position and returns to its original position.
x If the motor inside the headlight leveling actuator does not operate, the headlight optical axis may be at the
bottommost position, or the procedure may have been performed incorrectly. Therefore, park the vehicle on
level ground and resume the procedure from Step 1.
8. Disconnect the jumper wire from DLC-2.
9. Verify that the headlight auto leveling warning light is not illuminated.
Initialization operation implemented and resetting to be performed
Caution

2. Turn on the headlights TNS position.
DLC-2
* * * * * * * *
B * * * * * * *
5. Verify that the headlight auto leveling warning

light flashes.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
jumper wire.
7. The light switch switches in the following order:
TNSoONoOFFoONoOFFoONoOFF
8. After the headlight auto leveling warning light
flashes three times at 0.5 s intervals, verify that it
turns off.
x If the auto leveling warning light continues to
flash at 0.5 s intervals,perform a DTC
inspection, as there could be a malfunction in
the auto leveling system. (See 09-02F-1 DTC DLC-2
INSPECTION [HEADLIGHT AUTO
LEVELING SYSTEM].) Repair or replace the
malfunctioning area, then repeat the * * * * * * * *
procedure from Step 1. B * * * * * * *
9. Verify that the motor inside the headlight leveling
original position.
x If the motor inside the headlight leveling
actuator does not operate, the headlight optical axis may be at the bottommost position, or the procedure
may have been performed incorrectly. Therefore, park the vehicle on level ground and resume the
10. Pull out the jumper wire from DLC-2.
11. Verify that the headlight auto leveling warning light is not illuminated.
With M-MDS
Caution
designated positions).

2. After the vehicle is identified, select "Electrical",
then "Exterior Lighting", then “Headlamp“, then
“Auto Leveling Sensor Re-zero Procedure“ from
on the screen.
DLC-2
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION

2. Remove the battery and battery tray. (G35M-R,G66M-R) (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
3. Remove the aerodynamic under cover No.2. (A26M-R) (See 09-16-40 AERODYNAMIC UNDER COVER NO.2
09
4. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
5. Verify that the continuity between the back-up
light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the back- B
up light switch.
B A
: Continuity
Terminal
Shift lever position
A B
Reverse
Other
COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Warning

4. Disconnect the connectors.
COMBINATION
SWITCH
CONNECTOR
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
5. Remove the bolt.
6. Detach the tab. COMBINATION
7. Remove the combination switch. SWITCH
(See 09-18-61 Combination Switch Installation
Note.)
TAB
BOLT
4—12 N·m
{41—129 kgf·cm,
36—112 in·lbf}
TAB
STEERING
SHAFT
Combination Switch Installation Note

1. Align the combination switch rib with the steering
shaft guide and press the combination switch until
it contacts.
End Of Sie GUIDE
COMBINATION
SWITCH
RIB
STEERING SHAFT
COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Warning

3. Remove the following parts: 09
(4) Combination switch (See 09-18-60 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Press the tabs in the direction of the arrow (1) VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE
shown in the figure, then remove the light switch,
and the wiper and washer switch WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH LIGHT SWITCH
(2)
(2)
(1) (1)
VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE
WIPER AND
LIGHT SWITCH WASHER SWITCH
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Vehicles with light switch on left side
(2) TAB
(1)
LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Vehicles with light switch on right side
4. Release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure and remove the light switch in
TAB (2)
the direction of the arrow (2).
End Of Sie
(1)
LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR
LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION

Vehicles Without Auto Light System
3. Remove the light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the light switch.
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Light Switch
VEHICLES WITH LIGHT SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE
: Continuity
D F H
Switch position Terminal
Flash-to-
TNS FLASH-TO-PASS HI Light Dimmer pass B D F H
OFF
OFF HEAD LIGHT LO OFF -
ON
OFF
TNS -
ON
B
OFF
Head- LO
ON
light
* * * * * * HI -
* * H F D B

: Continuity
L J H
Flash-to-
TNS FLASH-TO-PASS HI Light Dimmer pass H J L N
OFF
OFF LO OFF -
HEAD LIGHT
ON
OFF
TNS -
ON
N
OFF
Head- LO
ON
light
* * * * * * * * HI -
* N L J H * * *
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Turn Switch
LEFT RIGHT : Continuity

Terminal
Switch position
E G E G I
Left
OFF
* I G E * * Right
* * * * * *

Terminal
Switch position
I G G I E
Left
OFF
* * * I G E * * Right
* * * * * * * *
Vehicles With Auto Light System

1. Verify that the continuity between the light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
09
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Light Switch
: Continuity
Flash-to-
K D F H Light Dimmer pass B D F H K
AUTO TNS
FLASH-TO-PASS HI OFF
LO OFF -
ON
OFF
OFF
HEAD LIGHT TNS -
ON
OFF
Head- LO
B ON
light
HI -
OFF
K * * * * *
H F D B LO
* * ON
Auto
HI -
: Continuity
C L J H Flash-to-
Light Dimmer pass C H J L N
AUTO TNS
FLASH-TO-PASS HI
OFF
LO OFF -
ON
OFF
HEAD LIGHT OFF
TNS -
ON
OFF
N Head- LO
ON
light
HI -
* * * * * * C *
OFF
* N L J H * * * LO
ON
Auto
HI -
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Turn Switch

Terminal
Switch position
E G E G I
Left
OFF
* I G E * * Right
* * * * * *

Terminal
Switch position
G E E G I
Left
OFF
* * * I G E * * Right
* * * * * * * *
Sie
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
3. Remove the light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 09
4. Verify that the continuity between the front fog light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS

: Continuity
A
Terminal
Switch position
FRONT A B
OFF FOG
LIGHT OFF
FRONT FOG LIGHT
* * * * * A
* * * * * B

: Continuity
M
Terminal
Switch position
FRONT M N
OFF FOG
LIGHT
OFF
FRONT FOG LIGHT
* M * * * * * *
* N * * * * * *
End Of Sie
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
3. Remove the light switch. (See 09-18-62 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the rear fog light switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
REAR
OFF FOG
LIGHT
: Continuity
Terminal
B Switch position
C B
OFF
C REAR FOG LIGHT

* * * * *
* * * * * B
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the center panel upper. (See 09-17-31 CENTER PANEL UPPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Squeeze the tabs of hazard warning switch and TAB
pull it outward to remove it.
End Of Sie
TAB
HAZARD
WARNING
SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION

3. Remove the hazard warning switch. (See 09-18-69 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the hazard
switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
B D
D C B A
A C
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
hazard warning switch.
5. Apply battery voltage to hazard switch terminal D, : Continuity
and connect terminal C to ground.
6. Verify that the LED illuminates. Terminal
x If there is any malfunction, replace the hazard Switch position
B A
warning switch.
OFF
ON
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

3. Remove the tabs.
4. Remove the headlight leveling switch.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. HEADLIGHT
LEVELING
End Of Sie SWITCH
TAB TAB
LOWER TAB TAB

PANEL
LOWER
PANEL
HEADLIGHT
LEVELING
SWITCH
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH INSPECTION

(7) Headlight leveling switch (See 09-18-70 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2. Verify that the resistance and continuity between
the headlight leveling switch terminals is as
indicated in the table. E D
x If not as indicated in the table, or if the 0 E A
* * * *
resistance is not within the specification, L J D
1 * * *
replace the headlight leveling switch. L
2
A J
3. Apply battery voltage to headlight leveling switch

terminal E, and connect terminal A to ground. : Resistance
4. Verify that the LED illuminates. Switch Terminal
x If there is any malfunction, replace the position D L J
headlight leveling switch.
0
R1 R2
1
R3 R4
2 R5 R6
3 R7 R8
R1: 1792 ohms R2: 200 ohms R3: 1400 ohms R4: 592 ohms
R5: 1200 ohms R6: 792 ohms R7: 1000 ohms R8: 992 ohms
AUTO LIGHT ILLUMINATION LEVEL SETTING

2. After the vehicle is identified, select "Module
Programming" from the initial screen of the IDS.
3. Select "Programmable Module Installation", then
select "BCM/GEM" from the screen menu.
4. Select the item name, and then select option.
Item
x “Rain Light sensor Illuminance setting” (“Low
(All Others)”/“Standard (All Others)”)
Note DLC-2
x When the M-MDS is set to "Low (All
Others)", the auto-light sensor sensitivity
decreases, and the TNS and headlight
illumination timing is slower.
Sie
MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the intruder sensor. (with theft-deterrent system) (See 09-14-117 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Open the overhead console. (without theft-deterrent system)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. .
WITH SUNROOF WITH MICROPHONE
1 Lens (See 09-18-72 Lens Removal Note.)
2 Screw
3 Map light bulb
4 Map light
5 Connector
3 4
1 1
Lens Removal Note

1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into
the service hole and pry with the screwdriver in SERVICE HOLE
the direction shown by the arrow to remove the
lens.
End Of Sie
MAP LIGHT INSPECTION

1. Verify that the continuity between the map light
FRONT MAP C
terminals is as indicated in the table. LIGHT
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the SWITCH (LH)
map light.
INTERIOR ON
LIGHT SWITCH OFF
DOOR FRONT MAP
F H LIGHT SWITCH
(RH)
H * F * * C B A
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
End Of Sie
: Bulb
Front map Interior
light light C F H
switch switch
ON -
DOOR
-
OFF
INTERIOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD
6. Disconnect the auto-dimming mirror connector. (vehicles with auto-dimming mirror only)
11. Detach the tab and remove the bulb housing.
TAB BULB HOUSING
Note
x The valve housing and the wiring harness
have been integrated and attached to the
headliner. When replacing the valve
housing, remove the wiring harness which
passes under the urethane by cutting the
urethane.
INTERIOR LIGHT
12. Pull in the direction of the arrows and detach the

tabs.
13. Remove the interior light.
TAB
Note
x After installing the wiring harness, reinforce
the urethane that was cut when removing
the valve housing with vinyl tape.
INTERIOR LIGHT
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
5HB
TAB BULB HOUSING
Note
urethane.
INTERIOR LIGHT

tabs.
TAB
Note
INTERIOR LIGHT
WGN
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
9. Remove the assist handles. (See 09-17-118 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
TAB BULB HOUSING
Note
urethane.
INTERIOR LIGHT

tabs.
TAB
Note
INTERIOR LIGHT
End Of Sie
INTERIOR LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

SERVICE HOLE
the service hole and pry with the screwdriver in
lens.
FASTENER
REMOVER
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Remove the rear interior light bulb.
INTERIOR LIGHT INTERIOR LIGHT

BULB
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

5HB
2. Insert hand through the service hole, release the
TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
tab in the direction of the arrow (1) shown in the
figure, and pull area A in the direction of the arrow
(2) to remove the cargo compartment light.
3. Disconnect the cargo compartment light
connector. (2)
A
(1)
TAB CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
WGN
5. Detach the tab and remove the cargo
compartment light. TAB A TAB A
End Of Sie
HEADLINER TAB A
TAB A
TAB A
TAB A
CARGO
COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

5HB
2. Remove the cargo compartment light. (See 09-18-76 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
3. Remove the cargo compartment light bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
WGN
SERVICE HOLE
lens.
3. Remove the cargo compartment light bulb.

End Of Sie
CARGO COMPARTMENT
CARGO COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
LIGHT BULB
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT INSPECTION

5HB
INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the cargo A
compartment light terminals is as indicated in the
table.
cargo compartment light.
A B
OFF
ON
B
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
: Bulb
Terminal
Switch position
A B
ON
OFF
WGN
INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the cargo D
compartment light terminals is as indicated in the
table.
cargo compartment light. D BR
C * *
OFF
DOOR
: Bulb
Terminal
Switch position
C D
DOOR
OFF
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Disengage the tabs by pressing both ends of the
lens in the directions indicated by the arrows and TRUNK
COMPARTMENT
remove the lens. LIGHT BULB
End Of Sie
REAR PACKAGE TRAY
LENS
TAB TAB
LENS
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1 Lens
(See 09-18-79 Lens Removal Note.)
2 Courtesy light bulb
2
1
Lens Removal Note

SERVICE HOLE
lens.
End Of Sie
IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Note
x The ignition key illumination is integrated with the coil antenna.
(See 09-14-114 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM].)
(See 09-14-115 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
ie
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1 Socket
2 Glove compartment light bulb 2
VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION INSPECTION

1. Remove the sunvisor. (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2. Verify that the continuity between the vanity mirror
illumination terminals is as indicated in the table. A
x If not as indicated in the table, inspect the
bulb. If there is no malfunction, replace the
sunvisor. B A
End Of Sie
: Bulb
Vanity mirror Terminal
cover codition A B
OPEN
CLOSED
VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1 Lens
(See 09-18-80 Lens Removal Note.)
2 Vanity mirror illumination bulb
Lens Removal Note

the service hole, and pry it in the direction
indicated by the arrow to remove the lens.
SERVICE HOLE
INDIRECT ILLUMINATION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Remove the map light. (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
LIGHTING SYSTEMS
1 Connector
2 Console indirect illumination

End Of Sie
CONSOLE INDIRECT ILLUMINATION
TAB TAB
09
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
09-19 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM

WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM REAR WASHER MOTOR
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REAR WASHER NOZZLE
Windshield Wiper Arm REAR WASHER NOZZLE
Installation Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–5 ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–23
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REAR WASHER HOSE
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–6 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–23
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–23
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-19–8 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–29
Ball Joint Assembly Note . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–10 Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch
Windshield Wiper Motor on Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–29
Assembly Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–10 Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR on Right Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–30
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–10 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
R.H.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–11 SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–30
WASHER TANK REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
With Headlight Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–11 HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
Without Headlight Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–12 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–33
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE Headlight Cleaner Hose
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–13 Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–35
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE Headlight Cleaner Nozzle Cover
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR Headlight Cleaner Actuator
Wiring Harness Removal Note. . . . . . . 09-19–16 HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–36
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–16 HEADLIGHT CLEANER
Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note . . . . 09-19–17 CONTROL MODULE
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–37
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17 HEADLIGHT CLEANER CONTROL
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE MODULE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–37
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17 Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-19–38
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–17 RAIN SENSOR
REAR WIPER MOTOR RAIN SENSOR REINITIALIZATION
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–19 SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–41
REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION . . . 09-19–20 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
REAR WASHER MOTOR PERSONALIZATION FEATURES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-19–21 SETTING PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-19–41
09
End of Toc
WM: WIPER/WASHER SYSTEMS
09-19–1
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
R.H.D.
1
VEHICLES WITH
WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
ON LEFT SIDE
1
VEHICLES WITH
WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
ON RIGHT SIDE
3 4 5 6
4
5
18 19 7
17
14
16 15 8
9
13 12 11 10 5HB WAGON
13 12 11 10
09-19–3
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
1 Wiper and washer switch 10 Rear washer hose
(See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH (See 09-19-23 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/
(See 09-19-30 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND 11 Rear washer nozzle
WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-19-21 REAR WASHER NOZZLE
(See 09-19-32 REAR WIPER AND WASHER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
SWITCH INSPECTION.) (See 09-19-23 REAR WASHER NOZZLE
2 BCM ADJUSTMENT.)
(See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) 12 Rear wiper arm and blade
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-19-16 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
(See 09-40-4 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
(See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) ADJUSTMENT.)
CONFIGURATION.)
(See 09-19-41 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM 13 Rear wiper motor
PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING (See 09-19-19 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/
PROCEDURE.) INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-19-20 REAR WIPER MOTOR
3 Windshield washer hose INSPECTION.)
(See 09-19-14 WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 14 Washer fluid-level sensor
(See 09-19-15 WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR
4 Windshield wiper arm and blade REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-19-4 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND (See 09-19-17 WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR
BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) INSPECTION.)
(See 09-19-6 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND
BLADE ADJUSTMENT.) 15 Windshield washer motor
(See 09-19-13 WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
5 Windshield washer nozzle REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-19-13 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE (See 09-19-13 WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
6 Rain sensor 16 Headlight cleaner motor
(See 09-19-38 RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/ (See 09-19-33 HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
(See 09-19-41 RAIN SENSOR REINITIALIZATION (See 09-19-34 HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
SETTING.) INSPECTION.)
7 Windshield wiper motor 17 Rear washer motor
(See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR (See 09-19-21 REAR WASHER MOTOR
(See 09-19-8 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR (See 09-19-21 REAR WASHER MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) INSPECTION.)
(See 09-19-10 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
INSPECTION.) 18 Headlight cleaner control module
(See 09-19-37 HEADLIGHT CLEANER CONTROL
8 Headlight cleaner hose MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-19-36 HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE (See 09-19-37 HEADLIGHT CLEANER CONTROL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) MODULE INSPECTION.)
9 Headlight cleaner actuator 19 Washer tank
(See 09-19-34 HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR (See 09-19-11 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/
ie
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09-19–4
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-6 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT.)
R.H.D.
2 1 3 4 2 1 3 4
6
5
6
5
6 6
NUT : 24—27 N·m {2.5—2.7 kgf·m, 18—19 ft·lbf}
1 Cap 4 Windshield wiper blade

2 Nut 5 Rubber brush
3 Windshield wiper arm 6 Backing plate
(See 09-19-5 Windshield Wiper Arm Installation
Note.)
Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note

1. Clean the windshield wiper arm connector shafts using a wire brush before installing the windshield wiper
arms.
09-19–5
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
End Of Sie
WINDSHIELD
WIPER ARM
CONNECTOR
SHAFT
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT

1. Operate the windshield wipers, and then turn off the windshield wiper motor to set the wipers in the park
position.
2. Slide the serrated connecting part and adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade so that its end is aligned with
the hollowed mark in the ceramic coating.
Note
x If the hollowed mark in the ceramic coating cannot be located, measure the distance from the cowl grille
end line, and adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade.
09-19–6
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
R.H.D.
HOLLOWED MARK
IN THE CERAMIC
COATING
MOLDING
END LINE
40—44 36—40
272 {10.7}
{1.6—1.7} {1.42—1.57}
681 {26.8}
COWL GRILLE
COWL GRILLE END LINE
END LINE
mm {in}
ie
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the cowl grille. (See 09-16-4 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-19–7
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
4. Remove the cover, and remove the bolt.
R.H.D.
BOLT
4—11 N·m
i
{41—112 kgf·cm, 36—97 in·lbf}
CONNECTOR
COVER
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
5. Remove the windshield wiper motor.

End Of Sie
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
09-19–8
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
R.H.D.
4 5
1
2
1
GREASE
8
GREASE
3
GREASE
GREASE
7
GREASE
7 Wiper link No. 2

09
1 Washer
(See 09-19-10 Ball Joint Assembly Note.)
2 Cover
8 Main link
3 Bolt
4 Windshield wiper motor
5 Nut
6 Wiper link No. 1
09-19–9
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Ball Joint Assembly Note
1. Use a clean cloth to protect the link, and squeeze BALL JOINT
using pliers. CLEAN CLOTH
LINK
Windshield Wiper Motor Assembly Note

1. Connect the windshield wiper motor to the vehicle wiring harness connector, operate the windshield wipers,
and then stop them at the auto-stop position.
2. Adjust the motor crank and wiper link No.1 so that they are parallel as shown in the figure.
R.H.D.
PARALLEL
WIPER LINK NO.2

MOTOR CRANK
WIPER LINK NO.1
PARALLEL
09-19–10
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION
R.H.D.
4. Remove the cover. (See 09-19-7 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Connect battery positive voltage to windshield
CIRCUIT BREAKER
wiper motor terminal D or E, and ground to LO
terminal B, then verify that the windshield wipers M E C A
operate as shown in the table. HI D B
x If the windshield wipers do not operate as AUTOSTOP
SWITCH
indicated in the table, replace the windshield
wiper motor.
Terminal connected to
Operation condition
battery positive voltage
D LO B A C E D
E HI
6. Disconnect battery positive voltage from the

motor terminal D while the wipers are operating.
7. Verify that the wipers do not stop in the park position.
8. Short between the motor terminals D and C, and connect battery positive voltage to the motor terminal A.
9. Verify that the wipers operate at low speed again, then stop in the park position.
x If there is any malfunction, replace the windshield wiper motor.
Sie
WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
With Headlight Cleaner
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 09
8
CLIP A
7 10
CLIP B
6
9
4.9—6.8 N·m
{50—69 kgf·cm,
44—60 in·lbf}
5
2 3 4 1 FRONT
09-19–11
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
1 Windshield washer motor connector 7 Windshield washer hose

2 Rear washer motor connector (Vehicles with rear 8 Rear washer hose (Vehicles with rear washer
washer system) system)
3 Washer fluid-level sensor connector 9 Bolt
4 Vehicles connector 10 Washer tank
5 Clip A 11 Headlight cleaner motor connector
6 Clip B
Without Headlight Cleaner

7 CLIP A
6 9
CLIP B
5
8
4.9—6.8 N·m
{50—69 kgf·cm,
44—60 in·lbf}
4
2 1 3 FRONT
1 Windshield washer motor connector

2 Rear washer motor connector (Vehicles with rear
washer system)
3 Vehicles connector
4 Clip A
5 Clip B
6 Windshield washer hose
7 Rear washer hose (Vehicles with rear washer
system)
8 Bolt
9 Washer tank
End Of Sie
09-19–12
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

TOR

2. Remove the front mudguard (RH). (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Windshield washer hose
2 Windshield washer motor connector
3 Windshield washer motor
4 Grommet

End Of Sie
2
1
FRONT
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION

3. Disconnect the windshield washer motor connector.
4. After connecting washer motor terminal A to the
positive battery terminal, and terminal B to the A
negative battery terminal, verify that washer fluid
flows to the windshield washer hose.
x If there is any malfunction, replace the B A 09
windshield washer motor.
M
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

3. Remove the windshield washer hose from the windshield washer nozzle.
4. Squeeze the tabs of the windshield washer nozzle.
09-19–13
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
5. Pull the windshield washer nozzle out to remove
it.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. FRONT
End Of Sie WINDSHIELD
WASHER NOZZLE
TAB TAB
COWL GRILLE
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Disconnect the windshield washer hose A from
the windshield washer motor.
3. Remove the windshield washer hose A from the
clip A, B.
4. Disconnect the windshield washer hose from the CLIP A CLIP B
joint pipe A.
5. Remove the windshield washer hose A. JOINT PIPE A
6. Remove the joint pipe A. WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE A
7. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. FRONT FENDER STAY
(See 09-19-4 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND CLIP B
BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) CLIP A
8. Remove the cowl grille. (See 09-16-4 COWL
GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Remove the windshield washer hose B from the
hook.
FRONT
10. Disconnect the windshield washer hose B from
HOOK
the check valve.
11. Remove the windshield washer hose B.
12. Remove the check valve.
13. Disconnect windshield washer hose C from the
joint pipe B.
14. Remove the windshield washer hose C.
15. Disconnect the windshield washer hose D from
the windshield washer nozzle (RH).
16. Remove the windshield washer hose D.
17. Remove the joint pipe B.
18. Remove the windshield washer hose E from the hook.
19. Disconnect the windshield washer hose E from the joint pipe C.
20. Remove the windshield washer hose E.
21. Remove the joint pipe C.
22. Remove the windshield washer hose F from the hook.
23. Disconnect the windshield washer hose F from the joint pipe D.
24. Remove the windshield washer hose F.
25. Remove the joint pipe D.
26. Disconnect the windshield washer hose G from the joint pipe E.
27. Remove the windshield washer hose G.
28. Remove the joint pipe E.
29. Disconnect the windshield washer hose H from the windshield washer nozzle (LH).
30. Remove the windshield washer hose H.
09-19–14
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE G FRONT
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE F
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE E
COWL GRILLE
JOINT PIPE D
HOOK
HOOK
HOOK
JOINT PIPE C
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE B

WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE C
FRONT
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE D
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE H
COWL GRILLE
HOOK
CHECK VALVE
JOINT PIPE B
WINDSHIELD
WASHER NOZZLE (RH)
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE (LH)

JOINT PIPE E
Sie
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
R

3. Remove the washer tank. (See 09-19-11 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Connector
2 Wiring harness (See 09-19-16 Wiring Harness
Removal Note.)
09
1
3 Washer fluid-level sensor 2
4 Grommet 1

1
3
09-19–15
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Wiring Harness Removal Note
1. Remove the connector B in the indicated of the
arrow (2), while push the tab in the indicated of
the arrow (1).
(1)
TAB
(2)
CONNECTOR B
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

3. Adjust the rear wiper arm and blade. (See 09-19-17 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT.)
5HB WAGON
6
5
4 6
3 3 4 6
1
2
5.9—9.8 N·m
{61—99 kgf·cm,
53—86 in·lbf} 5
2 1
5.9—9.8 N·m
{61—99 kgf·cm,
53—86 in·lbf}
1 Cap
2 Nut
3 Rear wiper arm
(See 09-19-17 Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note.)
4 Rear wiper blade
5 Rubber brush
09-19–16
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
6 Backing plate
Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note

1. Clean the rear wiper arm connector shaft using a
wire brush before installing the rear wiper arm.
REAR WIPER ARM

CONNECTOR
SHAFT
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION

3. Disconnect the connector. (See 09-19-15 WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that continuity between the washer fluid-
level sensor terminals is as indicated in the table.
x If not as specified, replace the washer fluid- E
level sensor. A C E
B D F
: Continuity
Terminal
Fluid level
E F
Above low
Below low
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT

5HB
1. Turn off the rear wiper switch while operating the rear wiper motor, and then stop the rear wiper at the auto-stop
position.
09-19–17
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
2. Set the rear wiper arm onto the ceramic end line.
61 mm
{2.4 in}
32 mm
{1.3 in}
CERAMIC END LINE
Wagon
1. Turn off the rear wiper switch while operating the rear wiper motor, and then stop the rear wiper at the auto-stop
position.
09-19–18
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
2. Set the rear wiper arm onto the ceramic end line.
CERAMIC END LINE
0—30 mm {0—1.1 in}
CERAMIC END LINE
ie
REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09
09-19–19
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
4
5HB
3 4.0—6.8 N·m
2 {41—69 kgf·cm,
36—60in·lbf}
WAGON
4
2
3 4.0—6.8 N·m
{41—69 kgf·cm,
36—60in·lbf}
1 Outer bush 3 Bolt

2 Connector 4 Rear wiper motor
End Of Sie
REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION
3. Disconnect the rear wiper motor connector.
4. Apply battery positive voltage to rear wiper motor connector terminal B, and connect terminals A and C to the
09-19–20
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
ground.
5. Verify that the rear wiper motor operates.
x If there is any malfunction, replace the rear CIRCUIT
wiper motor. BREAKER
6. Disconnect the ground to the terminal A while the M C A
rear wiper is operating. * B
7. Verify that the rear wiper stops in the park AUTO STOP
position. SWITCH
x If there is any malfunction, replace the rear
wiper motor.
End Of Sie A C B
REAR WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1 Rear washer hose
2 Rear washer motor connector
3 Rear washer motor
4 Grommet

End Of Sie
1 2
4
FRONT
REAR WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION

3. Disconnect the rear washer motor connector
4. After connecting washer motor terminal A to the
positive battery terminal, and terminal B to the A
negative battery terminal, verify that washer fluid
flows to the rear washer hose 09
x If there is any malfunction, replace the rear B A
washer motor.
M
REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

09-19–21
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
4. Press the tabs and remove the rear washer
nozzle.
6. Adjust the rear washer nozzle. (See 09-19-23
REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.)
End Of Sie
TAB
09-19–22
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Rear washer nozzle adjust the nozzle direction as shown.
5HB
21 {0.83} GLASS
63 {2.5} END LINE
58 {2.3}
126 {4.96}
mm {in}
WAGON 68 {2.7}
32 {1.3} GLASS
END LINE
43 {1.7}
1 {0.04}
12 {0.47}
mm {in}
Sie
REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
09-19–23
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. Disconnect rear washer hose A from the washer
tank.
4. Remove the rear washer hose A from clip A.
5. Disconnect joint pipe A and remove rear washer
CLIP A CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D
hose A.
6. Remove the rear washer hose B from clip B. JOINT PIPE B
8. Remove the rear washer hose B from clip C, D. REAR WASHER HOSE C
9. Disconnect joint pipe B and remove rear washer
hose B. CLIP D CLIP B
10. Partially peel back the seaming welt. CLIP C
JOINT PIPE A
11. Remove the following parts: REAR WASHER
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof REAR WASHER HOSE A
HOSE B
only) GROMMET
(2) A-pillar trims (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM CLIP A
(3) Upper anchor of the front seat belt (See 08- FRONT FENDER
STAY
11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ FRONT
INSTALLATION.)
HOOK
(6) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR
(7) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR
UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Trunk side trim (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(12)Sunvisor (See 09-17-119 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
12. Peel off the tape and remove rear washer hose C.
09-19–24
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
13. Remove the rear washer hose C.
ANTENNA FEEDER No.2 HEADLINER
FRONT
TAPE
REAR WASHER
HOSE C
TAPE
15. Partially peel back the grommet.
09
GROMMET
09-19–25
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
16. Remove the bracket in the direction of the arrow
(2) shown in the figure while pressing the bracket
tabs in the direction of the arrow (1). TAB
(1) (1)
(2)
BRACKET
BRACKET (2)
(1) (1)
TAB
17. Remove the joint pipe D from rear washer hose E.

18. Disconnect joint pipe C and remove rear washer REAR WASHER HOSE D
hose D. JOINT PIPE C
19. Disconnect check valve and remove rear washer GROMMET
hose E. CHECK CLIP E
20. Remove rear washer hose E from the rear washer VALVE
nozzle. REAR WASHER
21. Install in the reverse order of removal. NOZZLE
CLIP F
REAR WASHER HOSE E
REAR WASHER HOSE D
CLIP F
CLIP E
CLIP F
REAR WASHER
NOZZLE
JOINT PIPE C
Wagon
09-19–26
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. Disconnect rear washer hose A from the washer
tank.
4. Remove the rear washer hose A from clip A.
5. Disconnect joint pipe A and remove rear washer
CLIP A CLIP B CLIP C CLIP D
hose A.
6. Remove the rear washer hose B from clip B. JOINT PIPE B
8. Remove the rear washer hose B from clip C, D. REAR WASHER HOSE C
9. Disconnect joint pipe B and remove rear washer
hose B. CLIP D CLIP B
10. Partially peel back the seaming welt. CLIP C
JOINT PIPE A
11. Remove the following parts: REAR WASHER
(1) Sunroof seaming welt (vehicles with sunroof REAR WASHER HOSE A
HOSE B
only) GROMMET
(2) A-pillar trims (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM CLIP A
(3) Upper anchor of the front seat belt (See 08- FRONT FENDER
STAY
11-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/ FRONT
INSTALLATION.)
HOOK
(6) B-pillar lower trim (See 09-17-61 B-PILLAR
(7) B-pillar upper trim (See 09-17-62 B-PILLAR
UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(10)Trunk side trim (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
12. Peel off the tape and remove rear washer hose C.
09
09-19–27
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
13. Remove the rear washer hose C.
ANTENNA FEEDER No.2 HEADLINER
FRONT
TAPE
REAR WASHER
HOSE C
TAPE
GROMMET
09-19–28
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
(1) (1)
(2)
BRACKET
BRACKET (2)
(1) (1)
TAB
17. Remove the joint pipe D from rear washer hose E.

18. Disconnect joint pipe C and remove rear washer
hose D.
19. Disconnect check valve and remove rear washer
REAR WASHER GROMMET
hose E. HOSE E
20. Remove rear washer hose E from the rear washer CHECK
nozzle. VALVE JOINT PIPE C
21. Install in the reverse order of removal. JOINT PIPE D
End Of Sie REAR WASHER
REAR WASHER HOSE D
NOZZLE
REAR WASHER HOSE D
REAR WASHER CLIP F

NOZZLE
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Left Side
09-19–29
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
3. Disconnect the connector. WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
4. Release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) (1)
shown in the figure, pull up the wiper and washer
(2) TAB
switch in the direction of the arrow (2), and
remove it.
WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH
CONNECTOR
Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Right Side

3. Disconnect the connector. WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
4. Release the tab in the direction of the arrow (1) (1)
shown in the figure, pull up the wiper and washer
TAB (2)
switch in the direction of the arrow (2), and
remove it.
End Of Sie
WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH
CONNECTOR
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION

3. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the resistance and continuity between the windshield wiper and washer switch terminals as indicated
in the table.
x If the continuity is not as indicated in the table, or if the resistance is not within the specification, replace the
windshield wiper and washer switch.
09-19–30
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Left Side
D K E F
1 * OFF WINDSHIELD
2 WASHER SWITCH
MIST
3 4
2
5
1
6
J H C
* : VEHICLES WITH AUTO LIGHT/WIPER SYSTEM: AUTO K * * E C *

: VEHICLES WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT/WIPER SYSTEM: INT J H F D
* *
:CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
SWITCH POSITION
C D E F K
OFF
MIST
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AUTO/INT
SWITCH
1
2
WINDSHIELD
WASHER ON
SWITCH
: RESISTANCE
TERMINAL
SWITCH POSITION
J H
1 R1
2 R2
3 R3
4 R4
5 R5
6
09
R1: 4010 ǡ R4: 300 ǡ
R2: 1310 ǡ R5: 120 ǡ
R3: 630 ǡ
09-19–31
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Vehicles With Wiper and Washer Switch on Right Side
L C I J
1 * OFF WINDSHIELD
2 WASHER SWITCH
MIST
3 4
2
5
1
6
F H K
* : VEHICLES WITH AUTO LIGHT/WIPER SYSTEM: AUTO K I C

* * * * *
: VEHICLES WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT/WIPER SYSTEM: INT
* * L J H F * *
:CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
SWITCH POSITION
C I J K L
OFF
MIST
WINDSHIELD
WIPER AUTO/INT
SWITCH
1
2
WINDSHIELD
WASHER ON
SWITCH
End Of Sie
: RESISTANCE
TERMINAL
SWITCH POSITION
F H
1 R1
2 R2
3 R3
4 R4
5 R5
6
R1: 4010 ǡ R4: 300 ǡ

R2: 1310 ǡ R5: 120 ǡ
R3: 630 ǡ
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION

3. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See 09-19-29 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify that the continuity between the rear wiper and washer switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the wiper and washer switch.
09-19–32
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON LEFT SIDE

: CONTINUITY
G I
TERMINAL
SWITCH POSITION
C G I
REAR WIPER OFF

ON REAR SWITCH
WASHER ON
OFF
REAR WIPER AND ON
WASHER SWITCH
REAR
WASHER
C
* I G * C *
* * * * * *
VEHICLES WITH WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ON RIGHT SIDE

: CONTINUITY
G E
TERMINAL
SWITCH POSITION
E G K
OFF
ON REAR REAR WIPER
SWITCH ON
WASHER
OFF
REAR WIPER AND ON
WASHER SWITCH
REAR
WASHER
K
* * K * G E * *
* * * * * * * *
Sie
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Peal the front mudguard (RH). (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09
09-19–33
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
1 Connector
2 Screw
3 Bracket
4 Clip
5 Headlight cleaner motor
6 Grommet
2
End Of Sie
1 3 5 6
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR INSPECTION

2. Peal the front mudguard (RH). (See 09-16-22 FRONT MUDGUARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the headlight cleaner motor connector.
4. Connect battery positive voltage to headlight
cleaner motor terminal A and terminal B to A
ground.
5. Verify that the headlight cleaner motor operates
normally. B A
x If there is any malfunction, replace the
M
headlight cleaner motor.
End Of Sie
HEADLIGHT CLEANER ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

09-19–34
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
1 Headlight cleaner nozzle cover FRONT BUMPER
(See 09-19-35 Headlight Cleaner Nozzle Cover
Removal Note.)
2 Clamp
3 Headlight cleaner actuator 1
(See 09-19-36 Headlight Cleaner Actuator Removal 2
Note.)
4 Headlight cleaner hose
(See 09-19-35 Headlight Cleaner Hose Removal
Note.) 3
FRONT
Headlight Cleaner Hose Removal Note

1. Disconnect the clip, while push in the direction of
HOSE
HOSE
CLIP
Headlight Cleaner Nozzle Cover Removal Note

1. Pull out the headlight cleaner nozzle, remove the
headlight cleaner nozzle cover in the direction of HEADLIGHT
the arrow shown in the figure. CLEANER
NOZZLE COVER
HEADLIGHT
CLEANER
NOZZLE
09
09-19–35
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
Headlight Cleaner Actuator Removal Note
1. Remove the headlight cleaner in the direction of
the arrow (2) while keeping it push in the direction TAB
of the arrow (1) shown in the figure. FRONT BUMPER
End Of Sie
(1)
HEADLIGHT CLEANER
ACTUATOR
(2) FRONT
HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

3. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose A from the joint pipe.
HEADLIGHT CLEANER HEADLIGHT CLEANER
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR JOINT PIPE
FRONT BUMPER HEADLIGHT

CLEANER HOSE B
CLIP CLIP
HOOK HEADLIGHT HOOK HEADLIGHT
CLEANER HOSE C CLEANER HOSE A
4. Remove the headlight cleaner hose A from the hook.

5. Remove the headlight cleaner hose A.
6. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose B from the headlight cleaner actuator.
7. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose B from the joint pipe.
8. Remove the headlight cleaner hose B.
9. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose C from the headlight cleaner actuator.
10. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose C from the joint pipe.
11. Remove the headlight cleaner hose C from the clips.
12. Remove the headlight cleaner hose C from the hooks.
13. Remove the headlight cleaner hose C.
End Of Sie
09-19–36
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT CLEANER CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the connector B in the indicated of the
arrow (2), while push the tab in the indicated of
the arrow (1).
(1)
TAB
(2)
CONNECTOR B

1 Connector
2 Nut
3 Headlight cleaner control module

End Of Sie 3
2
4.9—6.8 N·m
{50—69 kgf·cm,
44—60 in·lbf}
09
HEADLIGHT CLEANER CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
x If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the headlight cleaner control module.
Note
x Terminals E and F are used as the washer fluid-level sensor circuit, not as the headlight cleaner control
module circuit.
09-19–37
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
A C E
B D F
CONNECTOR B
Alternates x Headlight relay
Headlight cleaner activated
between 1.0 (See 09-21-13 RELAY
(auto-operation or manual
or less and INSPECTION.)
operation activated)
B+ x Windshield wiper and
washer switch (See 09-
Headlight 19-30 WINDSHIELD
Headlight
A cleaner motor WIPER AND WASHER
cleaner motor
output SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Except above B+ x Headlight cleaner motor
(See 09-19-34
HEADLIGHT CLEANER
MOTOR INSPECTION.)
Turn the washer x Headlight relay
switch to the 1.0 or less (See 09-21-13 RELAY
OFF position. INSPECTION.)
Windshield Turn the ignition x Windshield wiper and
Wiper and
B washer motor switch to the washer switch (See 09-
washer switch Turn the washer
output ON position. 19-30 WINDSHIELD
switch to the B+ WIPER AND WASHER
ON position. SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Light switch at ON position. B+ x Headlight relay
(See 09-21-13 RELAY
C Headlight Headlight relay
Except above 1.0 or less INSPECTION.)
D GND Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Related wiring harnesses
ie
RAIN SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x The reflection rate at the moment the ignition switch is first turned to the ON position after
replacing the rain sensor with a new one is stored as the condition indicating no precipitation on
the windshield. Therefore, remove water and dirt from the windshield before turning on the
ignition switch.
x Perform the rain sensor initialization in the following cases: (See 09-19-41 RAIN SENSOR
REINITIALIZATION SETTING.)
— The windshield is replaced and the rain sensor is reused
— The auto wiper system operates incorrectly
09-19–38
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
the notch on the rain sensor cover, turn it in the NOTCH
direction of the arrow shown in the figure, and
REARVIEW
detach the tab A. MIRROR A
A
A
A
TAB A
3. Remove the rain sensor cover in the direction

4. Disconnect the rain sensor connector.
FRONT
RAIN SENSOR
COVER
(1)
HOOK FLATHEAD
SCREWDRIVER
HOOK
FLATHEAD
SCREWDRIVER
09
CONNECTOR
FRONT
(2)
RAIN SENSOR
09-19–39
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
5. Slide the tab B in the direction of the arrow and remove the rain sensor while supporting it with the hand.
RIGHT-SIDE
TAB B TAB B
LEFT-SIDE
TAB B TAB B
09-19–40
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
6. Remove the rain sensor in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
FRONT
RAIN SENSOR

Sie
RAIN SENSOR REINITIALIZATION SETTING
Caution
x If the initialization is performed again with water or dirt on the windshield, the rain sensor may not
operate normally. Before performing the rain sensor initialization again, remove water and dirt
from the windshield
Note
x When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after replacing the rain sensor with a new one, the
windshield condition is verified and the initial setting is stored.
x Perform the initial setting again in the following cases:
— The windshield is replaced and the rain sensor is reused.
— The auto wiper system operates incorrectly.
1. Remove water and dirt from the windshield surface.

3. Turn the windshield wiper switch to the AUTO position.
4. Within 10 s after turning the ignition switch to the ON position, turn the windshield wiper switch from the AUTO
to the OFF position for five times and return it to the AUTO position.The windshield wiper will operate once at
low speed when the reinitialization setting is performed correctly. 09
Caution
x If the operation is too fast, the windshield wiper switch position cannot be detected and the initial
setting may not be performed. Operate the windshield wiper switch for one cycle
(AUTOoOFFoAUTO) per 1 s.
ie
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE
i
1. Refer to the control system personalization features setting.
End Of Sie
09-19–41
ENTERTAINMENT
09-20 ENTERTAINMENT
ENTERTAINMENT LOCATION ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–2 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–32
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–2 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–32
Car-navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–4 5HB/WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–33
AUDIO UNIT ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
AUDIO AMPLIFIER 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–36
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–38
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–8 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3
Front Door Speaker Removal Note . . . 09-20–9 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–39
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–39
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–10 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–40
REAR DOOR SPEAKER WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–42
Rear Door Speaker Removal Note . . . 09-20–11 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–43
REAR DOOR SPEAKER 4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–43
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–12 5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–44
CENTER SPEAKER WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–45
CENTER SPEAKER INSPECTION . . . . . 09-20–13 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–46
REAR SPEAKER ANTENNA FEEDER NO.4
REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION . . . . . . . 09-20–15 GPS ANTENNA
TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–48
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–15 GPS ANTENNA FEEDER
TWEETER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–16 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–49
BASS-BOX GPS ANTENNA FEEDER
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–16 STEERING SWITCH
WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–17 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–52
BASS-BOX INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–18 Push Nuts Installation Note. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–55
NOISE FILTER STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . 09-20–56
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–18 Without Bluetooth System. . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–56
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–18 With Bluetooth System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–57
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–19 MICROPHONE
NOISE FILTER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . 09-20–19 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–59
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–19 Bluetooth UNIT
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–20 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–59
AudioPilot®2 MICROPHONE ACCESSORY SOCKET
CONDENSER Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–60
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–22 Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–60
4SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–22 Rear (WGN only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–61
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–22 Accessory Socket Removal Note . . . . . 09-20–62
GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION . . . . . . 09-20–24 Ring Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–62
ANTENNA AMPLIFIER Cap Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–62
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-20–26 ACCESSORY SOCKET
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–26 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–63
Connector B Removal Note . . . . . . . . . 09-20–26 AUXILIARY JACK
WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–26 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–63
ANTENNA AMPLIFIER AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION . . . . . . . 09-20–63
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 CIGARETTE LIGHTER
5HB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–64
WGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–27 Socket Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–65
ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION . . . . . . 09-20–28 Ring Removal Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-20–65
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 CIGARETTE LIGHTER
ENTERTAINMENT
ENTERTAINMENT LOCATION INDEX
Audio system
1 2 3 4 5
4SD
8 7
5HB 5 WGN 5
3
8
9
4 10 3 6 3 10 4
11 12 13 14 15
24
23
22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1 Antenna feeder No.2 2 Antenna feeder No.1

(See 09-20-28 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.) (See 09-20-28 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.)
(See 09-20-35 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 (See 09-20-29 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
(See 09-20-36 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2 (See 09-20-32 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
INSPECTION.) INSPECTION.)
3 Condenser
(See 09-20-22 CONDENSER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
4 Glass antenna 19 Front door speaker
(See 09-20-24 GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
5 Antenna feeder No.3 INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-28 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.) (See 09-20-10 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
(See 09-20-39 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3 INSPECTION.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 20 Audio amplifier (with Bose®)
(See 09-20-43 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3 (See 09-20-6 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
6 Noise filter 21 Auxiliary jack
(See 09-20-18 NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/ (See 09-20-63 AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-19 NOISE FILTER INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-63 AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION.)
7 Antenna feeder No.4 22 Accessory socket (center)
(See 09-20-28 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.) (See 09-20-60 ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-46 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.4 INSTALLATION.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-63 ACCESSORY SOCKET
(See 09-20-47 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.4 INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
23 Rear door speaker
8 Antenna amplifier (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-26 ANTENNA AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-12 REAR DOOR SPEAKER
(See 09-20-27 ANTENNA AMPLIFIER INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.)
24 Rear speaker (4SD with Bose®)
9 Accessory socket (rear)
(See 09-20-60 ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-15 REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION.)
(See 09-20-63 ACCESSORY SOCKET
INSPECTION.)
10 Bass-box (5HB/WGN with Bose®)
(See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-18 BASS-BOX INSPECTION.)
11 Steering switch
(See 09-20-52 STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-56 STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION.)
12 Tweeter
(See 09-20-15 TWEETER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-16 TWEETER INSPECTION.)
13 Microphone
INSTALLATION.)
14 Audio unit
INSTALLATION.)
15 Center speaker (with Bose®)
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-13 CENTER SPEAKER INSPECTION.)
16 Bluetooth unit
(See 09-20-59 Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
17 Accessory socket (front)
(See 09-20-60 ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-63 ACCESSORY SOCKET
INSPECTION.)
Cigarette lighter
(See 09-20-64 CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-65 CIGARETTE LIGHTER
INSPECTION.)
18 AudioPilot® 2 microphone (with Bose®)
(See 09-20-21 AudioPilot®2 MICROPHONE
ENTERTAINMENT
Car-navigation system
1 2 3 4
6 5
1 Steering switch 4 GPS antenna

(See 09-20-52 STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/ (See 09-20-48 GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-56 STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION.) 5 Car-navigation unit
2 GPS antenna feeder (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-28 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION.) INSTALLATION.)
(See 09-20-49 GPS ANTENNA FEEDER 6 Front door speaker
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
(See 09-20-51 GPS ANTENNA FEEDER INSTALLATION.)
INSPECTION.) (See 09-20-10 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
3 Microphone INSPECTION.)
INSTALLATION.)
ie
AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
ENTERTAINMENT
Caution
x When installing the audio unit, make sure that the wiring harness and antenna feeder are not
caught between the unit and dashboard. If the wiring harness or the antenna feeder is caught
between the unit and dashboard, it may cause malfunctions.
3 2 3 4 2 3
CLIP
2 1
6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
62—86 in·lbf}
1 Bolt 4 Audio unit

2 Screw 5 Connector
3 Clip
ie
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09
[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
ENTERTAINMENT
Caution
x When installing the car-navigation unit, make sure that the wiring harness and antenna feeder are
not caught between the unit and dashboard. If the wiring harness or the antenna feeder is caught
between the unit and dashboard, it may cause malfunctions.
3 2 3 4 2 3
CLIP
2 1
6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm,
62—86 in·lbf}
6 5
1 Bolt 4 Car-navigation unit

2 Screw 5 Connector
3 Clip 6 Antenna feeder
ie
AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Slide the passenger seat rearward.
ENTERTAINMENT
2. Remove the bolt A.
3. Slide the passenger seat forward.
BOLT A
6.8—9.8 N·m
{70—99 kgf·cm,
61—86 in·lbf}
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
5. Remove the cover.
COVER
TAB HOOK
HOOK
COVER
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
TAB
ENTERTAINMENT
6. Remove the bolts B.
8. Remove the audio amplifier.
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. BOLT B
6.9—9.8 N·m
{71—99 kgf·cm, 62—86 in·lbf}
CONECTTOR
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

With Bose®
3
1
ENTERTAINMENT
Without Bose®
1 Screw 3
2 Front door speaker
(See 09-20-9 Front Door Speaker Removal Note.)
3 Connector
Front Door Speaker Removal Note

1. Remove the front door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
With Bose®
HOOK HOOK
(1)
TAB
FRONT
DOOR
SPEAKER
(2)
09
ENTERTAINMENT
Without Bose®
End Of Sie
HOOK
(1)
TAB
FRONT
DOOR
SPEAKER
(2)
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION

4. Remove the front door speaker. (See 09-20-8 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Verify the resistance between the front door
VEHICLES WITH TWEETER
speaker terminals.
A
B D C B A
C
D
VEHICLES WITH TWEETER
x If not within the specification, replace the front

door speaker.
:Resistance
Resistance Terminal
Test
Without Bose®: 3.4—4.6 ohms condition A B C D
With Bose®: 1.83—2.47 ohms
Under any *
condition
End Of Sie
*:VIEHICLES WITH TEETER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

ENTERTAINMENT
With Bose®
2
Without Bose®
1 Screw 2
2 Connector
3 Rear door speaker
(See 09-20-11 Rear Door Speaker Removal Note.)

3
Rear Door Speaker Removal Note

1. Remove the rear door speaker in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure.
ENTERTAINMENT
With Bose®
HOOK HOOK
(1)
TAB
REAR
DOOR
SPEAKER
(2)
Without Bose®
End Of Sie
HOOK
(1)
TAB
REAR
DOOR
SPEAKER
(2)
REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION

3. Remove the rear door speaker. (See 09-20-10 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Verify the resistance between the rear door
speaker terminals.
B C B
* *
x If not within the specification, replace the rear

door speaker.
Resistance
: Resistance
Without Bose®: 3.4—4.6 ohms
Taeminal
With Bose®: 2.89—3.91 ohms Test condition
B C
End Of Sie Under any condition
CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1 Screw 1
2 Center speaker
1

End Of Sie
CENTER PANEL
UPPER
CENTER SPEAKER INSPECTION

3. Remove the center speaker. (See 09-20-13 CENTER SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Verify the resistance between the center speaker
terminals.
A
B A
x If not within the specification, replace the

center speaker.
Resistance
: Resistance
3.24—3.96 ohms
Taeminal
Test condition
End Of Sie A B
Under any condition
REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(6) Rear package trim (See 09-17-60 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the clip.
4. Remove the screws. SCREW
CLIP
CLIP
FRONT
REAR SPEAKER
ENTERTAINMENT
5. Remove the rear speaker.
End Of Sie REAR SPEAKER
CONNECTOR FRONT
REAR SPEAKER INSPECTION

(7) Rear speaker (See 09-20-14 REAR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the resistance between the rear speaker
terminals.
B * *
B D
x If not within the specification, replace the rear

speaker.
09
Resistance
: Resistance
0.9—1.1 ohms
Taeminal
Test condition
End Of Sie B D
Under any condition
TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ENTERTAINMENT
3. Remove the tweeter in the direction of the arrow
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. (2)
End Of Sie
INNER GARNISH
(1) TWEETER
TAB
TWEETER INSPECTION
3. Remove the tweeter. (See 09-20-15 TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Verify the resistance between tweeter terminals.
tweeter.
A B A
Resistance
Without Bose®: 3.4—4.6 ohms
With Bose®: 3.06—3.74 ohms : Resistance
Terminal
Test condition
A B
Under any condition
BASS-BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
ENTERTAINMENT
CONNECTOR TRUNK BOARD
FRONT
4. Remove the clip.

5. Disconnect the short-cord connector.
6. Remove the short-cord. BOLT CLIP
7. Remove the bolt. 0.98—2.5 N·m
8. Remove the bracket. (with temporary spare tire/ {10—25 kgf·cm,
without spare tire) 8.7—22 in·lbf}
9. Remove the bass-box.
BRACKET
CLIP
BASS-BOX
SHORT-CORD
CONNECTOR
FRONT
:WITH TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE/WITHOUT SPARE TIRE
WGN
ENTERTAINMENT
2. Remove the clip.
3. Disconnect the short-cord connector.
4. Slightly bend back the short-cord. CLIP
5. Remove the bolt.
BOLT
6. Remove the bracket. (with temporary spare tire/
0.98—2.5 N·m
without spare tire) {10—25 kgf·cm,
7. Remove the bass-box. 8.7—22 in·lbf}
End Of Sie
BRACKET
CLIP
BASS-BOX
SHORT-CORD
FRONT
CONNECTOR
:WITH TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE/WITHOUT SPARE TIRE
BASS-BOX INSPECTION
2. Disconnect the short-cord connector. (See 09-20-16 BASS-BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the resistance between bass-box terminals.
D C
* *
B F D B
C
F

bass-box.
Resistance : Resistance
0.9—1.1 ohms Taeminal
Test condition
B C D F
Under any condition
NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4SD
ENTERTAINMENT
1 Connector
2 6.9—9.8
2 Bolt 6.9—9.8 2 {71—99, 62—86}
3 Noise filter {71—99,
62—86} 1
FRONT
3
1
5HB
1 Connector
2 Screw
3 Bolt 6.9—9.8
{71—99, 62—86}
4 Noise filter
1 3
En
2
1
4
09
NOISE FILTER INSPECTION

4SD
ENTERTAINMENT
(7) Noise filter (See 09-20-18 NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify the resistance and continuity between the
noise filter terminals.
BODY GROUND
2B 2A
1B *
2A 2B
1B
x If the resistance is not as indicated in the

table, replace the noise filter.
:Continuity
Terminal
Test condition
GND 1B 2A 2B
Under any R
condition
R
R: 0.1 ohm
5HB
(4) Noise filter (See 09-20-18 NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
3. Verify the resistance and continuity between the
noise filter terminals.
BODY GROUND
2B 2A
1B *
2A 2B
1B
x If the resistance is not as indicated in the

table, replace the noise filter.
:Continuity
Terminal
Test condition
GND 1B 2A 2B
Under any R
condition
R
R: 0.1 ohm
AudioPilot®2 MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Note
x AudioPilot® 2 is a registered trademark of Bose® Corporation.

ENTERTAINMENT
1 Connector
2 Screw
3 AudioPilot® 2 microphone
FRONT
LOWER PANEL
3 2
CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table. 6.9—9.8
1 Connector {71—99, 62—86}
FRONT
2 Bolt 2
3 Condenser
3 1 N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf}
5HB
C-pillar inner (LH)
ENTERTAINMENT
(2) Rear scuff plate (LH) (See 09-17-74 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Tire house trim (LH) (See 09-17-57 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Trunk side upper trim (LH) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(5) Trunk side trim (LH) (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Connector
2 Bolt FRONT
1 3
3 Condenser
2 6.9—9.8 {71—99, 62—86} N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf}
Liftgate
3 1 3
09
2
6.9—9.8
{71—99, 62—86}
1 N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf}

1 3
1 Connector
2 Bolt
ENTERTAINMENT
3 Condenser
ie
GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION
1. Inspect the glass antenna for damage visually.
2. Inspect for continuity between the glass antenna terminals using an ohmmeter.
4SD
FRONT
5HB
FRONT
B
ENTERTAINMENT
WGN
FRONT
FRONT
x If not as specified, repair the glass antenna.

End Of Sie
: Continuity
Test Terminal
condition A B
Under any condition
ENTERTAINMENT
ANTENNA AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table..
1 Clip
2 Bolt
3 Antenna amplifier 3
5 CLIP
4 Connector A
5 Connector B (See 09-20-26 Connector B Removal
Note.)
4 1 2
9—12 N·m
{92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
Connector B Removal Note

1. Remove the connector B in the direction of the
GLASS ANTENNA TERMINAL
glass antenna terminal in the direction of the
arrow (1).
(2)
(1)
ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
WGN
(4) D-pillar trim (RH) (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table..
1 Antenna feeder No.2

2 Antenna feeder No.3 FRONT
3 Bolt
4 Antenna amplifier
1
End Of Sie 2
4
3
9—12 N·m
{92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
ANTENNA AMPLIFIER INSPECTION

5HB
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim (See 09-17-107 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Turn the radio power to ON.
5. Verify that voltage is B+ at the antenna amplifier ANTENNA AMPLIFIER
terminal A.
x If not as replace antenna amplifier.
A
B
WGN
4. Turn the radio power to ON.
09
ENTERTAINMENT
5. Verify that voltage is B+ at the antenna amplifier
terminal A.
x If not as replace antenna amplifier.
FRONT
ANNTENA FEEDER NO.2
ANNTENA
AMPLIFIER
ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION
Note
x GPS antenna feeder is integrated in the dashboard wiring harness.
ENTERTAINMENT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
4SD,5HB WGN
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.2
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.2
ANTENNA ANTENNA ANTENNA

FEEDER NO.3 FEEDER NO.4 FEEDER NO.3
GPS ANTENNA FEEDER
End Of Sie
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[A26M-R].)
ENTERTAINMENT
AIR CONDITIONER].)
INSTALLATION.)
(22)Audio unit (With audio system) (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(23)Car-navigation unit (With car-navigation system) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
(27)A-pillar trim (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove clips A and B.
4. Remove clip C (with car-navigation system).
5. Disconnect the Connector (with car-navigation system).
6. Remove antenna feeder No.1.
ENTERTAINMENT
R.H.D.
FRONT
A
A
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
DASHBOARD WITH AUDIO

FRONT SYSTEM
CLIP A
B A
CLIP B
A
B
A B
CONNECTOR
CLIP C
WITH CAR-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
End Of Sie
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1 INSPECTION
4SD
[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(8) Audio unit (With audio system) (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(9) Car-navigation unit (With car-navigation system) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(10)A-pillar trim (RH) (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
3. Disconnect antenna feeder No.2.
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
4. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder
No.1 terminals is as indicated in the table.
With audio system
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
* *
A B C D
With car-navigation system

x If not as indicated in the table, replace
antenna feeder No.1. A B
㧖㧖
C
D
: Continuity
Terminal
Test condition
A B C D
Under any condition
5HB/WGN
ENTERTAINMENT
[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
INSTALLATION.)
(22)Audio unit (With audio system) (See 09-20-4 AUDIO UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(23)Car-navigation unit (With car-navigation system) (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between antenna feeder No.1 terminals is as indicated in the table.
With audio system
A D
B E
C F
ENTERTAINMENT
antenna feeder No.1. A B
C D
E
F
With audio system
: Continuity
Test Terminal
condition A B C D E F
Under any
condition

End Of Sie
: Continuity
Test Terminal
Under any
condition

(4) Front scuff plate (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 09
(9) Rear side seat back (4SD) (See 09-13-34 REAR SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(11)Trunk side upper trim (5HB) (See 09-17-85 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(12)Rear seat (5HB/WGN) (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/WAGON].)
(13)Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolts (LH) (5HB/WGN) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB, WGN].)
(15)D-pillar trim (WGN) (See 09-17-69 D-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(17)Map light (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Remove the antenna feeder No.2.
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
HEADLINER
FRONT
TAPE
REAR WASHER
HOSE C (5HB, WGN)
TAPE
End Of Sie
4SD
(1) A-pillar trim (RH) (See 09-17-55 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(3) Rear seat cushion (RH) (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [4SD].)
(4) Rear side seat back (RH) (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(6) C-pillar trim (RH) (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1

ENTERTAINMENT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
FRONT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3

antenna feeder No.2.
* *
A C
B D
: Continuity
Terminal
Test condition
A B C D
Under any condition
5HB
(6) Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolt (RH) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
(7) C-pillar trim (RH) (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) 09
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1

ENTERTAINMENT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2

FRONT
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.3

A D
B E
C F
: Continuity
Test Terminal
Under any
condition
WGN
ENTERTAINMENT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.1
FRONT
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.2

A D
B E
C F
End Of Sie
: Continuity
Test Terminal
condition A B C D E F 09
Under any
condition

4SD
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Remove the connector in the direction of the arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the glass antenna
terminal in the direction of the arrow (1).
5. Remove the clips A and B.
6. Remove the bolt.
7. Remove the antenna feeder No.3. GLASS ANTENNA TERMINAL
FRONT
(2)
(1)
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.3 CLIP A
B
CONNECTOR CLIP B
B
BOLT 9—12 N·m

{92—122 kgf·cm,
A
80—106 in·lbf}
5HB
4. Disconnect the antenna amplifier connector. (See 09-20-26 ANTENNA AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
GROMMET

(1) (1)
(2)
BRACKET
BRACKET (2)
(1) (1)
TAB
09
ENTERTAINMENT
8. Remove antenna feeder No.3.
9. Install in the reverse order of removal. FRONT ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3
B
B
A
CLIP A
B CLIP B
B
WGN
4. Disconnect the antenna feeder No.4 connector. (See 09-20-46 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.4 REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
GROMMET

tabs in the direction of the arrow (1).
BRACKET (2)
(1) (1)
TAB
7. Disconnect the connector A.

8. Remove the connector B in the direction of the
glass antenna terminal in the direction of the FRONT
arrow (1). A
10. Remove antenna feeder No.3. B
End Of Sie B CLIP A
ANTENNA
B FEEDER NO.3
CONNECTOR B
A 09
CLIP B
CONNECTOR A
(2)
(1)

4SD
ENTERTAINMENT
(3) Rear side seat back (RH) (See 09-13-43 REAR SIDE SEAT BACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the connector in the direction of the
arrow (2) shown in the figure while pressing the GLASS ANTENNA TERMINAL
arrow (1).
(2)
(1)
FRONT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
CONNECTOR

*
A
B
C D
: Continuity
Test Terminal
condition A B C D
Under any
condition
5HB
ENTERTAINMENT
(5) Lower anchor of the rear seat belt installation bolt (RH) (See 08-11-4 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
3. Disconnect the antenna amplifier connector. (See 09-20-26 ANTENNA AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
FRONT
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.2
ANTENNA
FEEDER NO.3

A D
B E
C F
: Continuity
Test Terminal
Under any
condition
WGN
(4) D-pillar trim (RH) (See 09-17-64 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the antenna feeder No.4. (See 09-20-46 ANTENNA FEEDER NO.4 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Disconnect the connector A.
5. Disconnect the connector B in the direction of the
glass antenna terminal in the direction of the FRONT
arrow (1). ANTENNA
CONNECTOR B FEEDER NO.3
CONNECTOR A
(2)
(1)

A *
B E
C F
D
End Of Sie
: Continuity
Test Terminal
Under any
condition

ENTERTAINMENT
4. Remove the connector in the direction of the
glass antenna terminal in the direction of the (2)
arrow (1). (1)
5. Remove the clip.
6. Remove the bolt. ANTENNA CONNECTOR
7. Remove antenna feeder No.4. FEEDER NO.4
CLIP
End Of Sie
CLIP
BOLT ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3

9—12 N·m
{92—122 kgf·cm, 80—106 in·lbf}

4. Disconnect the connector in the direction of the GLASS ANTENNA TERMINAL
(2)
arrow (1).
(1)
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
FEEDER NO.4
ANTENNA FEEDER NO.3 09

ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C D
: Continuity
Test Terminal
condition A B C D
Under any
condition
GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

(1) Front scuff plate (driver side) (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front side trim (driver side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Decoration panel (diver side) (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
R.H.D.
.
1 Connector
2 Clip
3 Screw 4 3 2 1 CLIP
4 GPS antenna
End Of Sie
ENTERTAINMENT
GPS ANTENNA FEEDER INSTALLATION
Caution
x If the GPS antenna feeder is installed with tension on the cable and wiring harness it could result
in loosening of the connection areas and poor contact. When installing and connecting the GPS
antenna feeder, always make sure there is slack on the cable and wiring harness.
Note
x The GPS antenna feeder is integrated with the dashboard wiring harness.
x When installing a new GPS antenna feeder, secure it to the dashboard wiring harness along the
installation route of the old GPS antenna feeder.

[A26M-R].)
AIR CONDITIONER].)
INSTALLATION.)
(22)Car-navigation unit (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
R.H.D.
GPS ANTENNA FEEDER

FRONT
GPS ANTENNA FEEDER DASHBOARD

FRONT
End Of Sie
GPS ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION
(1) Front scuff plate (driver side) (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front side trim (driver side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
[A26M-R].)
ENTERTAINMENT
AIR CONDITIONER].)
(10)Car-navigation unit (See 09-20-5 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.)
table.
GPS antenna feeder.
B
A
D
:Continuity
Test condition A B C D
Under any
condition
STEERING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x A removed steering cover cannot be reused as it can no longer be secured after the push nuts are
removed due to the possibility of the steering cover pins being damaged. Do not remove the push
nuts except when replacing the steering switch and the steering wheel.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See 08-10-6 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the steering wheel. (See 06-13-10 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) (See 06-13-5 STEERING
WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Remove the wiring harness from the hook.
WIRING HARNESS
HOOK R
STEERING WHEEL (STEERING COVER)
5. Remove the push nuts. (See 09-20-55 Push Nuts

PUSH NUT R
Installation Note.)
6. Remove the steering cover tabs from the steering
wheel.
TAB R TAB R
(STEERING COVER) (STEERING COVER)

8. Remove the steering cover. SCREW
09
STEERING WHEEL STEERING COVER R

ENTERTAINMENT
9. Disconnect the connector. (with steering shift
switch)
STEERING SHIFT
10. Remove the screw. (with steering shift switch) SWITCH STEERING WHEEL
11. Remove the steering shift switch. (with steering CONNECTOR
shift switch)
SCREW STEERING SHIFT

SWITCH

STEERING SWITCH STEERING WHEEL
13. Disconnect the connector. (with Bluetooth
system)
SCREW CONNECTOR
14. Remove the screw. (With Bluetooth system)
SCREW STEERING SWITCH

(HF/TEL SWITCH)
ENTERTAINMENT
15. Remove the steering switch pins from the steering
wheel.
16. Remove the steering switch component. STEERING
WHEEL
STEERING SWITCH
COMPONENT
PIN
PIN
17. Remove the steering panel.

18. Remove the steering switch. (HF/TEL switch)
STEERING
WHEEL
STEERING SWITCH STEERING

(HF/TEL SWITCH) PANEL
Push Nuts Installation Note

1. Install the push nut positioned in the direction
2. When installing the push nut, install it using the
tool shown in the figure. UPPER
Caution
x If a push nut is twisted when it is
inserted, the steering cover pin can be PUSH NUT R
damaged and the steering cover cannot
be secured. When inserting the push
nuts, insert the nuts at a straight angle
using the tool shown in the figure.
10 mm
{0.39 in}
13 mm OR MORE
{0.51 in OR MORE}
ENTERTAINMENT
3. After tightening the push nuts, verify that the steering cover pin and tab are as shown in the figure.
TOOL
PUSH NUT R
PIN R
(STEERING COVER)
TAB R
(STEERING COVER)
STEERING
WHEEL
PIN R
(STEERING COVER)
11 mm
PUSH NUT R OR MORE
{0.43 in
OR MORE}
TAB R
(STEERING COVER)
STEERING
WHEEL
End Of Sie
STEERING SWITCH INSPECTION
Without Bluetooth System
INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the steering switch connector.
4. Verify the resistance between the steering switch terminals.
STEERING SWITCH CONNECTOR
D
E
VOLUME SWITCH (-)
G
VOLUME SWITCH (+)
SEEK SWITCH (+)
SEEK SWITCH (-)
MODE SWITCH
O M K I G E C A
MUTE SWITCH P N L J H F D B
I
*
INFO SWITCH
N
CLOCK SWITCH
*:PART WIRING HARNESS SIDE
: WITH DRIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM (DIS)

ENTERTAINMENT
steering switch.
: Resistance
Terminal
Switch Position Resistance (ohm)
G I
Volume Switch (-) ON 53.064—54.136
Volume Switch (+) ON 145.233—148.167
Seek Switch (+) ON 297.693—303.707
Seek Switch (-) ON 556.083—567.317
Mode Switch ON 1,026.333—1,047.067
Mute Switch ON 2,016.333—2,057.067
OFF 4,986.333—5,087.067
With drive information system (DIS)
: Resistance
Terminal
N C
INFO Switch ON 990—1.010
CLOCK Switch ON 2.178—2.222
5. Apply battery positive voltage to steering switch

D
terminal D, and connect terminal E to ground.
x If the LED does not illuminate, replace the
steering switch.
E
O M K I G E C A
P N L J H F D B
With Bluetooth System

INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the steering switch connector.
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Verify the resistance between the steering switch terminals.
STEERING SWITCH CONNECTOR
D
E
VOLUME SWITCH (-)
G
VOLUME SWITCH (+)
SEEK SWITCH (+)
SEEK SWITCH (-)
MODE SWITCH
I
HANG-UP SWITCH
O M K I G E C A
PICK-UP SWITCH P N L J H F D B
TALK SWITCH
L *
INFO SWITCH
N
CLOCK SWITCH
x If not within the specification, replace the : Resistance

steering switch.
Terminal
G I
Volume Switch (-) ON 53.064—54.136
Volume Switch (+) ON 145.223—148.167
Seek Switch (+) ON 297.693—303.707
Seek Switch (-) ON 556.083—567.317
Mode Switch ON 1,026.333—1,047.067
OFF 4,986.333—5,087.067
: Resistance
Terminal
L I
Talk Switch ON 103.95—106.05
Pick-up Switch ON 271.26—276.74
Hang-up Switch ON 657.36—670.64
OFF 3,330.36—3,397.64
ENTERTAINMENT
: Resistance
Terminal
N C
INFO Switch ON 990—1.010
CLOCK Switch ON 2.178—2.222
5. Apply battery positive voltage to steering switch

D
terminal D, and connect terminal E to ground.
x If the LED does not illuminate, replace the
steering switch.
E
O M K I G E C A
P N L J H F D B
MICROPHONE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the map light. (See 09-18-71 MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the microphone in the direction of the
map light and microphone tabs in the direction of
the arrow (1). TAB TAB MAP LIGHT
(1)
(1)
TAB
MICROPHONE
TAB
Bluetooth UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

ENTERTAINMENT
1 Nut
2 Connector
3 Bluetooth unit
FRONT 3 1 7.8—11
{80—112,
70—97}
ACCESSORY SOCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Front
[A26M-R].)
1 Accessory socket cap CENTER
2 Accessory socket PANEL
(See 09-20-62 Accessory Socket Removal Note.) LOWER
3 Ring
(See 09-20-62 Ring Removal Note.)
1 2 3
Center
ENTERTAINMENT
1 Accessory socket
(See 09-20-62 Accessory Socket Removal Note.)
1
2 Cap
(See 09-20-62 Cap Removal Note.)
REAR CONSOLE
Rear (WGN only)

1 Accessory socket
(See 09-20-62 Accessory Socket Removal Note.) TRUNK SIDE TRIM (RH)
2 Cap
(See 09-20-62 Cap Removal Note.)
1 2
ENTERTAINMENT
Accessory Socket Removal Note
1. Remove the socket in the direction of the arrow
(2) shown in the figure while opening the caps in
the direction of the arrow (1) using a tape- (2)
wrapped fastener remover.
SOCKET
CAP
(1) (1)
PROJECTION PROJECTION
Ring Removal Note

1. Remove the ring in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure while pressing the ring tabs in (2)
RING
(1) (1)
TAB TAB
Cap Removal Note

1. Remove the cap in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure while pressing the cap tabs in
(2)
End Of Sie
CAP
(1) (1)
TAB TAB
ENTERTAINMENT
ACCESSORY SOCKET INSPECTION
1. Connect a tester as shown in the figure and verify
that there is continuity.
x If the continuity cannot be verified, replace the
TERMINAL C
accessory socket.
TERMINAL C
TERMINAL B TERMINAL B
C *
B
B C
AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

4. Remove the auxiliary jack in the direction of the
auxiliary jack tabs in the direction of the arrow (1). AUXILIARY JACK
End Of Sie
TAB (2)
(1) (1)
TAB
REAR CONSOLE
AUXILIARY JACK INSPECTION

3. Remove the auxiliary jack. (See 09-20-63 AUXILIARY JACK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ENTERTAINMENT
4. Connect a commercially-available nonresistant
PLUG
plug to the auxiliary jack.
AUXILIARY JACK F E D C B A
5. Verify that the continuity between the auxiliary

jack terminals is as indicated in the table.
auxiliary jack. : Continuity
Terminal
Test condition
B C D E F
Plug is connected
Plug is not connected
CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

[A26M-R].)
1 Cigarette lighter plug CENTER
2 Socket PANEL
(See 09-20-65 Socket Removal Note.) LOWER
3 Ring
(See 09-20-65 Ring Removal Note.)
1 3 2
ENTERTAINMENT
Socket Removal Note
1. Remove the socket in the direction of the arrow
(2) shown in the figure while opening the rings in (2)
the direction of the arrow (1) using a tape-
wrapped fastener remover. SOCKET
RING
(1) (1)
PROJECTION PROJECTION
Ring Removal Note

1. Remove the ring in the direction of the arrow (2)
shown in the figure while pressing the ring tabs in (2)
End Of Sie
RING
(1) (1)
TAB TAB
CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION

1. Switch the ignition to ACC.
2. Press the cigarette lighter into the socket and
verify that it returns to its original position in 10—
20 s.
x If the cigarette lighter does not operate
normally, replace the cigarette lighter and the
socket.
End Of Sie
POWER SYSTEMS
09-21 POWER SYSTEMS

POWER SYSTEM Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-21–8
LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–2 PUSH BUTTON START
FUSE SERVICE CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–3 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH
MAIN FUSE ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-21–3 PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]. . . . . 09-21–8
IGNITION SWITCH PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND AND PUSH BUTTON START
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-21–4 SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–9
IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION FORCED IGNITION ON [WITH
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]. . . . . 09-21–10
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–5 RELAY BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
KEY REMINDER SWITCH [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT AND PUSH BUTTON START
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–10
PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM] . . . . 09-21–6 RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION [WITH
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]. . . . . 09-21–11
AND PUSH BUTTON START RELAY LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–12
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–6 RELAY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–13
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION Relay Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–13
[WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–13
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–14
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–7 Type C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–14
STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION Type D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–15
[WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY
AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-21–8
09
POWER SYSTEMS
POWER SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
R.H.D.
5 2 3 4
1 Main fuse 4 Ignition switch (without advanced keyless entry and

(See 09-21-3 MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/ push button start system)
INSTALLATION.) (See 09-21-4 IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/
2 Steering lock unit (with advanced keyless entry and INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS
push button start system) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-21-8 STEERING LOCK UNIT (See 09-21-5 IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
3 Key reminder switch 5 Push button start (with advanced keyless entry and
(See 09-21-6 KEY REMINDER SWITCH push button start system)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED (See 09-21-8 PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/
KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
SYSTEM].) ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-21-7 KEY REMINDER SWITCH (See 09-21-9 PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION
INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) BUTTON START SYSTEM].)
(See 09-21-6 KEY REMINDER SWITCH 6 Relay block (with advanced keyless entry and push
INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS button start system)
ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM].) (See 09-21-10 RELAY BLOCK REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS
(See 09-21-11 RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION [WITH
ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
POWER SYSTEMS
FUSE SERVICE CAUTIONS
Caution
x If a fuse is burnt out, inspect the cause and repair the malfunctioning part, then replace the fuse
with the specified value. If the fuse is replaced before doing this, it could burn again.
End Of Sie
MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the battery. (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].
2. Remove the battery tray. (See 01-17A-1 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
3. Remove the air cleaner. (See 01-13A-6 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
MZR 2.5].)
CONNECTOR
MAIN FUSE
5. Remove the nuts.
NUT
8—11 N·m
{82—112 kgf·cm,
71—97 in·lbf}
MAIN FUSE
6. Remove the bolts and nut.
BOLT
9—12 N·m
{92—122 kgf·cm,
80—106 in·lbf}
NUT
8—10 N·m
{82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf}
POWER SYSTEMS
7. Remove clips A and B from the main fuse block
cover.
Caution
x Perform the work carefully so as not to
damage the wiring harness.
8. Pull the main fuse block outward. CLIP B
CLIP A
9. Cut the band.
BAND R
10. Release the tabs and remove the main fuse block
TAB
cover from the main fuse block. TAB
TAB
TAB
TAB
TAB
11. Turn over the main fuse block without putting a

load on the wiring harness, and remove the nuts. 3.0—3.4 N·m
{31—34 kgf·cm,
12. Remove the main fuse from the main fuse block.
27—30 in·lbf}
13. Install in the reverse order of removal. NUT
MAIN FUSE
NUT
3.0—3.4 N·m
{31—34 kgf·cm,
27—30 in·lbf}
IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH

POWER SYSTEMS
3. Press tabs A in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure and pull the ignition switch in IGNITION SWITCH
TAB A
(1)
(2)
TAB A TAB A
(1) (1)
(1)
TAB A
4. Pull the pin in the direction of the arrow shown in

the figure and release the lock.
PIN
CONNECTOR
IGNITION
SWITCH
5. Pull the connector in the direction of the arrow (4) TAB B CONNECTOR
(3)
shown in the figure and remove it while pressing (4)
tab B in the direction of the arrow (3). IGNITION
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. SWITCH
End Of Sie
IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
3. Remove the ignition switch (Without advanced keyless entry and push button start system). (See 09-21-4
IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
4. Verify that the continuity between the ignition
switch terminals is as indicated in the table.
F E
ignition switch. E C A 09
START D B
F
START
LOCK LOCK
ON ACC ON ACC
(IG1) (IG2)
D B C A
POWER SYSTEMS
End Of Sie
: CONTINUITY
IGNITION KEY TERMINAL
POSITION
F E D C B A
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH
3. Remove the coil antenna. (See 09-14-114 COIL ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
4. Insert the key into the key cylinder and turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.
5. Disconnect the key reminder switch connector.
KEY
REMINDER
SWITCH
KEY
REMINDER
SWITCH
CONNECTOR
6. Detach the key reminder switch tab.

7. Install the key reminder switch in the direction of
the arrow.
End Of Sie
TAB
KEY
REMINDER
SWITCH
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER
SWITCH
CONNECTOR
POWER SYSTEMS
4. Verify that the continuity between the key
reminder switch terminals is as indicated in the
table. A
D * * A
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the key

reminder switch.
End Of Sie
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
KEY POSITION
A D
KEY INSERTED
KEY REMOVED
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION [WITHOUT ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM]
KEY
REMINDER
SWITCH
KEY
REMINDER
SWITCH
CONNECTOR
4. Verify that the continuity between the key

reminder switch terminals is as indicated in the
table. A
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the key
reminder switch. B A
B
POWER SYSTEMS
End Of Sie
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
KEY POSITION
A B
KEY INSERTED
KEY REMOVED
STEERING LOCK UNIT INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
2. Measure each terminal voltage under the measurement condition.
x If the voltage is not as specified in the terminal voltage table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item(s)”.
— If the system does not work normally even though the inspection items are normal, replace the steering
lock unit.
G E C A
B B
H F D B
Termi
Signal name Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V) Inspection item(s)
nal
A
During steering lock unit
Steering lock unit Keyless control operation
1.0 or less x Keyless control module
B
ground module x Related wiring harness
Except above Approx. 3.0
Serial Keyless control Terminal used for communication therefore determination based on terminal
C
communication module voltage inspection not possible.
D
Keyless control Steering wheel is locked B+ x Keyless control module
E UNLOCK output
module Steering wheel is unlocked 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
Keyless control Steering lock unit is operating B+ x Keyless control module
F Power supply
module Except above 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
G
H Ground Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less x Related wiring harness
End Of Sie
PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON
START SYSTEM]
(1) Front scuff plate (Driver side) (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front side trim (Driver side) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(4) Decoration panel (Driver side) (See 09-17-51 DECORATION PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
POWER SYSTEMS
3. Release the tabs and remove the push button
start from the meter hood.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. METER HOOD
End Of Sie
PUSH
BUTTON
START
TAB
TAB
PUSH BUTTON START INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
(8) Push button start (See 09-21-8 PUSH BUTTON START REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED
table. A B
push button start. G
K I E C A
L J H F D B
SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2

ground to the push button start terminals and
verify that the LED illuminates.
x If the LEDs does not illuminate, replace the : CONTINUITY
push button start.
CONDITION
TERMINAL 09
Terminal A B I
Illumination positions
B+ Ground BUTTON PRESSED
C E ACC indicator light BUTTON RELEASED
C G ON indicator light
C H Indicator (Green)
C F Indicator (Red)
D J START/STOP/ENGINE
POWER SYSTEMS
ACC INDICATOR LIGHT

E
ON INDICATOR LIGHT
G
INDICATOR (GREEN) K I G E C A
H L J H F D B
INDICATOR (RED)
F C
J D
START/STOP/ENGINE
End Of Sie
FORCED IGNITION ON [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
Note
x In order to perform a forced ignition ON, the M-MDS is necessary. If the servicing is being done outside of
an Authorized Mazda dealership, contact an Authorized Mazda dealership for instructions.
x The forced ignition ON procedure forces a power supply to each part when no power is available even
after the ignition switch has been operated. However, the engine cannot be started and the steering
cannot be unlocked.
x When performing a forced ignition ON procedure, remove all advanced keys from the vehicle. If an
advanced key is left in the vehicle, the forced ignition ON procedure cannot be done.
1. Verify that there are no advanced keys in the vehicle.

2. Get PCM part number from As-built site.
4. Manual vehicle identification.
(1) Select “Manual Vehicle Entry”.
5. Select the “All other” from Vehicle list.
DLC-2
6. Input the PCM part number on the following

screen.
7. After the vehicle is identified, select "Body", then
"Special Ignition ON" from the initial screen of the
IDS.
on the screen.
9. Delete session with keeping ignition ON.
10. Normal vehicle identification.
RELAY BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START
SYSTEM]
POWER SYSTEMS
R.H.D.
CONNECTOR
NUT
9—12 N·m {92—122
RELAY BLOCK
4. Remove the nut.

5. Remove the relay block.
End Of Sie
RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND PUSH BUTTON START SYSTEM]
(7) Relay block (See 09-21-11 RELAY BLOCK INSPECTION [WITH ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY AND
POWER SYSTEMS
ACC RELAY
1A 2B
2E
IG1 RELAY
1B
2G 2E 2C 2A
1E 1C 1A
POWER WINDOW
RELAY 1F 1D 1B 2H 2F 2D 2B
1D
2G
IG2 RELAY
1E 1F
1C
2C 2A
WINDSHIELD
WIPER RELAY
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the relay block.

: Continuity
TERMINAL
STEP
2A 2G 2E 2C 1A 1E 1C 1F 1D 1B 2B
1
2 B+ GND
3 B+ GND
4 B+ GND
End Of Sie
RELAY LOCATION
MAIN FUSE BLOCK
1 2
3
4 5 6
7
8 9 10
11 12 13 14
15 16 17
FRONT
1 A/C relay 8 Outlet relay

Main relay (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.0 9 Cooling fan relay No.1
2 DISI, MZR 2.5) Cooling fan relay No.2 (Vehicles equipped
Glow relay (MZR-CD 2.2) with two cooling fan relays)
10
3 Headlight low relay Cooling fan relay No.3 (Vehicles equipped
with three or four cooling fan relays)
4 Starter relay
11 Headlight high relay
5 Horn relay
Cooling fan relay No.2 (Vehicles equipped
6 Fuel injector relay (MZR 2.0 DISI) 12
with three or four cooling fan relays)
Fuel pump relay (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR
Cooling fan relay No.4 (Vehicles equipped
7 2.0 DISI, MZR 2.5) 13
with four cooling fan relays)
Main relay (MZR-CD 2.2)
14 Rear window defroster relay
POWER SYSTEMS
15 AT main relay (ATX)
16 Front fog light relay
17 Blower relay
End Of Sie
RELAY INSPECTION
Relay Type
Connector type Part name
x Front fog light relay
x Starter relay
x Main relay (MZR-CD 2.2)
x A/C relay
x AT main relay (ATX)
x Blower relay
x Horn relay
x Rear window defroster relay
Type A x Outlet relay
x Cooling fan relay No.1
x Cooling fan relay No.2
x Cooling fan relay No.3 (Vehicles equipped with four cooling fan relays)
x Cooling fan relay No.4 (Vehicles equipped with four cooling fan relays)
x Headlight low relay
x Headlight high relay
x Fuel injector relay (MZR 2.0 DISI)
x Fuel pump relay (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI)
Type B Cooling fan relay No.3 (Vehicles equipped with three cooling fan relays)
Type C Main relay (MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI)
Type D Glow relay (MZR-CD 2.2)
Type A
table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the C E
A E
relay.
C
D
D A
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
STEP
E A C D
1
2 B+ GROUND 09
POWER SYSTEMS
Type B
table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the C B E A B E
relay.
C
D
D A
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
STEP
E A B C D
1
2 B+ GROUND
Type C
table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the D A B
relay.
D C
C B
: CONTINUITY
TERMINAL
STEP
A B C D
1
2 B+ GROUND
POWER SYSTEMS
Type D
table.
x If not as indicated in the table, replace the A B
A
relay.
B D
E D
End Of Sie
:CONTINUITY
Terminal
STEP
B D A E
1
2 B+ GND
09
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.
09-22 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.

INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Generated Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–20
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-22–4 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . 09-22–5 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–21
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–5 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–5 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–6 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–22
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–24
Water temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–7 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–25
CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 BEEP SOUND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . 09-22–26
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
PERSONALIZATION FEATURES CONTROL MODULE
SETTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–26
Instrument cluster customized function REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–8 MODULE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–27
Rear vehicle monitoring system Rear vehicle monitoring control module
customized function setting procedure 09-22–9 (RH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–27
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-22–28
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, Rear vehicle monitoring control module
MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI]. . . . . 09-22–10 (LH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–29
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, CONTROL MODULE
MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI] . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–10 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–30
HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . 09-22–11 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING BRACKET
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–30
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–11 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING RADAR
INFORMATION DISPLAY AIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–32
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . 09-22–11 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–32
INFORMATION DISPLAY Radar aiming procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–33
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE . . . . . . 09-22–12 RVM SWITCH
Check Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–12 REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–38
Check Code Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–13 RVM SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–39
ULTRASONIC SENSOR RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15 INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–15
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-22–17
09
09-22–1
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. LOCATION INDEX
Interior
R.H.D.
2 1 3
6 7 5 4
R.H.D.
09-22–2
Exterior
10 9
12 13 11 12 13
4SD 5HB
7 7
11 12 13 11
WAGON
11
09-22–3
1 Instrument cluster 7 Parking sensor buzzer
(See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/ (See 09-22-22 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER
(See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (See 09-22-25 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.) INSPECTION.)
(See 09-22-5 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (See 09-22-26 BEEP SOUND ADJUSTMENT.)
INSPECTION.) 8 Fuel gauge sender unit
(See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (See 09-22-9 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
CONFIGURATION.) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR-CD 2.2].)
(See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. (See 09-22-10 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0,
PROCEDURE.) MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI].)
2 Information display (See 09-22-10 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
(See 09-22-11 INFORMATION DISPLAY INSPECTION [MZR-CD 2.2].)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-10 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
(See 09-22-12 INFORMATION DISPLAY INPUT/ INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR
OUTPUT CHECK MODE.) 2.0 DISI].)
3 RVM warning indicator light 9 Oil pressure switch
(See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT (See 09-22-11 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
(See 09-22-40 RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT 10 Horn
INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-11 HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4 RVM switch 11 Ultrasonic sensor
(See 09-22-38 RVM SWITCH REMOVAL/ (See 09-22-15 ULTRASONIC SENSOR REMOVAL/
(See 09-22-39 RVM SWITCH INSPECTION.)
12 Rear vehicle monitoring control module
5 Parking sensor switch (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
(See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-22-27 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
(See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION.)
INSPECTION.) (See 09-22-30 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
6 Parking sensor control module CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION.)
(See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL (See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) RADAR AIMING.)
(See 09-22-18 PARKING SENSOR CONTROL (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO.
MODULE INSPECTION.) PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING
PROCEDURE.)
13 Rear vehicle monitoring bracket
BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x When replacing the instrument cluster, the configuration procedure must be performed before
removing the instrument cluster. Replacing the instrument cluster without performing the
configuration procedure will result in system malfunction.
x The removed instrument cluster should DISPLAY FACING DOWNWARD
be placed with the display side up to
prevent grease from leaking from the
meters. NO GOOD
1. Perform the instrument cluster configuration when

replacing it. (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT DISPLAY FACING UPWARD
CLUSTER CONFIGURATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. GOOD
(1) Front scuff plate (Driver side) (See 09-17-72
FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(2) Front side trim (Driver side) (See 09-17-56
FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-22–4
6. Program the immobilizer system-related parts when replacing the instrument cluster. (With keyless entry
system) (See 09-14-83 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-RELATED PARTS PROGRAMMING [KEYLESS ENTRY
SYSTEM].)
2 3
1
2 4 2
1 Screw 3 Instrument cluster

2 Connector 4 Clip
End Of Sie
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution
x Do not drop the instrument cluster or damage the printed board. This will lead to a system
malfunction.
1. Perform the instrument cluster configuration when replacing it. (See 09-22-8 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION.)
(8) Instrument cluster (See 09-22-4 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
1 Lens 3
2 Cover
3 Instrument cluster unit 2
09
End Of Sie
1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION

Speedometer
Using a speedometer tester
1. Adjust the tire pressure to the specification.
2. Using a speedometer tester, verify that the tester reading is as indicated in the table below.
09-22–5
Type A
Speedometer tester
Allowable range (km/h)
indication (km/h)
20 20—25
40 40—45
60 60—65
80 80—86
100 100—107
120 120—128
140 141—148
Type B
Speedometer tester
Allowable range (mph)
indication (mph)
10 10—13
20 20—23
30 30—33
40 40—44
50 50—54
60 60—64
70 70—75
80 80—85
Except MZR-CD 2.2

x If the speedometer does not move or the indication is not within the allowable range, inspect the PCM and
— If the PCM and related wiring harnesses are normal, replace the instrument cluster.
Using the M-MDS

3. Verify that it is displayed according to the table
using “SPDMTR”.
x If the speedometer does not move or the
indication is not within the allowable range,
inspect the related wiring harnesses. DLC-2
— If the related wiring harnesses are
normal, replace the instrument cluster.
M-MDS
Instrument cluster display
display
Speedometer gauge needle moves to approx.
60 km/h
65 km/h {40 mph}
Speedometer gauge needle moves to approx.
120 km/h
128 km/h {79.5 mph}
Speedometer gauge needle moves to 0 km/h
Off
{0 mph}
Tachometer
Caution
x If the engine speed exceeds the allowable range, the engine could be damaged. Therefore, when
inspecting the tachometer, do not allow the engine speed to exceed the allowable range indication
on the tachometer.
09-22–6
using “TACHOMTR”.
x If the tachometer does not move or the
M-MDS
display
Tachometer gauge needle moves to approx.
3,000 RPM
3,100 rpm
Tachometer gauge needle moves to approx.
6,000 RPM
6,200 rpm
Off Tachometer gauge needle moves to 0 rpm
Fuel gauge
using “FUEL_GAUGE”.
x If the fuel gauge does not move or the
M-MDS
display
E Fuel gauge needle moves to E
1/2 Fuel gauge needle moves to 1/2
F Fuel gauge needle moves to F
Water temperature gauge

using “ECT_GAUGE”.
x If the water temperature gauge does not
move or the indication is not within the
allowable range, inspect the related wiring DLC-2
harnesses.
09-22–7
Except MZR-CD 2.2
M-MDS
display
C (50 Engine coolant temperature gauge needle
DegC) moves to C
H (128 Engine coolant temperature gauge needle
DegC) moves to H
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle
Off
moves to lower area
End Of Sie
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION
2. After the vehicle is identified, select “Module
Programming” from the initial screen of the IDS.
3. Select “Programmable Module Installation”, then
select “IC” from the screen menu.
corresponding DTC inspection. (See 09-02I-4 DLC-2
DTC TABLE [INSTRUMENT CLUSTER].)
End Of Sie
INSTRUMENTATION/DRIVER INFO. PERSONALIZATION FEATURES SETTING PROCEDURE
Instrument cluster customized function setting procedure
select “IC” from the screen menu.
4. Select an item name, then select option.
DLC-2
M-MDS display Function Initial setting Setting content Control unit

The driver seat beltminder can Australian, European
Driver beltminder
status
be set to operable or (L.H.D. U.K.) specs. Disabled / Enabled Instrument cluster
inoperable. x Enabled
The passenger seat beltminder Australian, European
Passenger
beltminder status
can be set to operable or (L.H.D. U.K.) specs. Disabled / Enabled Instrument cluster
inoperable. x Enabled
The outside temperature European (L.H.D. U.K.)
Outside temperature
warning
warning alarm can be set to specs. Disabled / Enabled Instrument cluster
operable or inoperable. x Enabled
09-22–8
Rear vehicle monitoring system customized function setting procedure
select “RVM” from the screen menu.
4. Select an item name, and then select option.
DLC-2
M-MDS display Function Initial setting Setting content Control unit

The rear vehicle monitoring warning alarm
RVM buzzer Enabled Enabled / Disabled Instrument cluster
can be set to operable or inoperable.
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI]
1. Remove the fuel gauge sender unit. (See 01-14A-15 FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY [MZR
1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
End Of Sie
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5, MZR 2.0 DISI]
2. Remove the rear seat cushion (4SD). (See 09-13-43 REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[4SD].)
3. Lift the rear seat cushion (5HB/Wagon). (See 09-13-31 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [5HB/
WAGON].)
4. Remove the fuel pump unit. (See 01-14A-14 FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION [MZR 1.8, MZR
2.0, MZR 2.5].)
5. Move the float to the topmost and bottommost positions, and verify that the resistance between terminals A and
C of the fuel gauge sender unit and the position of the float are as shown in the figure.
ARM FULCRUM
TOPMOST
POSITION
9—11 ohms
58.3—64.3 mm C A
{2.30—2.53 in} D B
10.9 mm
{0.429 in}
65.6—71.6 mm
{2.59—2.81 in}
177.5—182.5 ohms
BOTTOMMOST
POSITION
x If they are not as shown in the figure, replace the fuel gauge sender unit.
End Of Sie
09-22–9
HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the washer tank. (See 09-19-11 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the connectors. BOLT 22—31 N·m {2.3—3.1 kgf·m, 17—22 ft·lbf}
5. Remove the bolt.
6. Remove the horn.
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
HORN
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION

1. Verify that the oil pressure warning light illuminates when the ignition is switched ON.
2. Verify that the oil pressure warning light goes out when the engine is started.
x If the oil pressure warning light does not illuminate or remains illuminated, inspect the related wiring
harness.
— If the related wiring harness are normal, inspect the oil pressure.
(See 01-11A-5 OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION [MZR 1.8, MZR 2.0, MZR 2.5].)
x If the oil pressure is normal, replace the oil pressure switch.

Sie
INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
3. Remove the screws, then remove the information CENTER PANEL UPPER
display from the center panel upper.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. SCREW
End Of Sie
INFORMATION DISPLAY
SCREW
09-22–11
INFORMATION DISPLAY INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
Note
x In this mode, it is possible to verify the items in the following chart.
Check Code Table

Check code Check item Related items
CAN system
01 Information display x DTC U0010:88: CAN system communication
error
CAN system
x DTC U0184:00: Communication error to
x Audio unit audio unit
02 x Climate control unit x DTC U0164:00: Communication error to
x Instrument cluster climate control unit
x DTC U0155:00: Communication error to
instrument cluster
x Light switch
04 Light switch
x BCM
06 Ignition switch*1/Push button start*2 Ignition switch*1/Push button start*2
x INFO switch
10 Steering switch
x Clock switch
— LCD/Passenger seat belt reminder indicator LCD/Passenger seat belt reminder indicator
*1 : Without advanced keyless entry and push button start system

Note
x The check codes are displayed in numerical order. (While performing the inspection, if you want to inspect
a check code with a number smaller than the code number you are currently inspecting, terminate the
check mode then repeat the inspection from the beginning.)
Start
Perform the following procedure:

1. Press and hold the both the H and M switches, and turn the ignition switch*1/Push button start*2to the IG ON position.
2. Continuously press and hold the H and M switches for approx. 5s.
( is displayed on LCD audio display area.)
3. Release the H and M switches within 3s after is displayed.
Check code 01 displayed on LCD clook display area.
Press the H switch.
Perform the "Check Code Inspection".

Is there any malfunction?
No Yes
Repair or replace parts.
Switch the ignition OFF (LOCK).
End

09-22–12
Check Code Inspection
Check code 01
Check code 01 CAN system
INSPECTION CONDITION DISPLAY ACTION
Select the check code 01. CAN system of information display is normal.
CAN system communication error. (DTC U0010:88)
Check code 02
x Communication status to audio unit
Check code 02 x Communication status to climate control unit
x Communication status to instrument cluster
INSPECTION CONDITION DISPLAY ACTION
Select the check code 02. Communication to audio unit is normal.
(The diagnostic results will
be displayed once each in
the order of audio unit and Audio unit Communication error to audio unit.
climate control unit and (DTC U0184:00)
instrument cluster.)
Vehicle without audio unit.
Communication to climate control unit is normal.
Climate Communication error to climate control unit.

control unit (DTC U0164:00)
Vehicle without climate control unit.
Communication to instrument cluster is normal.

Instrument
cluster Communication error to instrument cluster.
(DTC U0155:00)
Check code 04
Check code 04 TNS ON/OFF signal
INSPECTION
STEP DISPLAY ACTION
CONDITION
1 Turn the light switch to the Go to the next step.
TNS position.
Verify that the voltage of information display terminal C is B+.

x If the voltage is as specified, replace the information display.
x If the voltage is not as specified, inspect the following parts:
— Light switch
— BCM
— Wiring harness (BCM—information display)
2 Turn the light switch off. Verify that the voltage of the information display terminal C is 1.0 V or less.
— Light switch
— BCM
— Wiring harness (BCM—information display)
Input signal to the information display is normal.
09-22–13
Check code 06
Check code 06 Ignition switch ON/OFF signal
INSPECTION
STEP DISPLAY ACTION
CONDITION
1 Switch the ignition to ON. Go to the next step.
Verify that the voltage of information display terminal E is B+.

— Ignition switch*1
— Push button start*2
— Relay block*2
— Wiring harness*1 (Battery—ignition switch—information display)
— Wiring harness*2 (Battery—relay block—push button start—
information display)
2 Switch the ignition to off. Verify that the voltage of the information display terminal E is 1.0 V or less.
— Ignition switch*1
— Push button start*2
— Relay block*2
— Wiring harness*1 (Battery—ignition switch—information display)
— Wiring harness*2 (Battery—relay block—push button start—
information display)
Input signal to the information display is normal.

Check code 10
Check code 10 INFO/clock switch ON/OFF signal
INSPECTION
STEP DISPLAY ACTION
CONDITION
1 While INFO switch is Go to the next step.
pressed.
x Inspect the following parts:

— INFO switch
— Clock spring
Except above
— Wiring harness (Clock spring—information display)
x If the INFO switch, clock spring and related wiring harnesses do not
have any malfunction, replace the information display.
2 While INFO switch is Go to the next step.
not pressed.

— INFO switch
— Clock spring
Except above
x If the INFO switch, clock spring and related wiring harnesses do not
09-22–14
Check code 10 INFO/clock switch ON/OFF signal
INSPECTION
STEP DISPLAY ACTION
CONDITION
3 While clock switch is Go to the next step.
pressed.

— Clock switch
— Clock spring
Except above
x If the clock switch, clock spring and related wiring harnesses do not
4 While clock switch is Input signal to the information display is normal.
not pressed.

— Clock switch
— Clock spring
Except above
x If the clock switch, clock spring and related wiring harnesses do not
LCD/Passenger seat belt reminder indicator

Check code — LCD/Passenger seat belt reminder indicator
DISPLAY ACTION
All segments and dots LCD/Passenger seat belt
illuminated. reminder indicator is normal.
Except above Replace the information display.
Sie
ULTRASONIC SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x Do not use a ultrasonic sensor that has fallen off.

2. Remove the front or rear bumper. (See 09-10-11 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See 09-10-
28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Pull the retainer as shown in the figure.
5. Remove the ultrasonic sensor from the bumper. ULTRASONIC
6. Install in the reverse order of removal. SENSOR RETAINER
End Of Sie
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Removal
2. Disconnect the parking sensor control module connector.
09-22–15
3. Remove the nut.
R.H.D.
4. Remove the parking sensor control module.
PARKING SENSOR
CONTROL MODULE
BRAKE PEDAL
BRACKET NUT
Installation
R.H.D.
1. Install the parking sensor control module to the
brake pedal bracket as shown in the figure.
PARKING
SENSOR
CONTROL
MODULE
BRAKE PEDAL BRACKET
PARKING SENSOR
CONTROL MODULE
09-22–16
2. Connect the parking sensor control module
bracket hook to the brake pedal bracket and
tighten the nut as shown in the figure.
3. Connect the parking sensor control module 8—10 N·m
NUT
connector. {82—101 kgf·cm,
71—88 in·lbf}
BRAKE PEDAL
End Of Sie BRACKET
HOOK
PARKING
SENSOR
CONTROL
MODULE
PARKING SENSOR CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION

1. Remove the parking sensor control module with the connector connected. (See 09-22-15 PARKING SENSOR
x If the voltage is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item (s)”.
— If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the parking sensor control module.
AE AC AA Y W U Q O M K I G E C A
AF AD AB Z P N L J H
Volta
Term Connect Measured
Signal name Test condition ge Inspection item
inal ed to item
(V)
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic Wave (back sensor (left))
A sensor (back (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse)
sensor profile x Related wiring
sensor (left))
harnesses
B — — — — — —
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic Wave (back sensor (right))
C sensor (back (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse)
sensor (right))
harnesses
D — — — — — —
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
(rear corner sensor
sensor (rear Ultrasonic Wave
E (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse) (left))
corner sensor sensor profile
x Related wiring
(left))
harnesses
F — — — — — —
09-22–18
Volta
inal ed to item
(V)
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
(rear corner sensor
sensor (rear Ultrasonic Wave
G (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse) (right))
x Related wiring
(right))
harnesses
x Ultrasonic sensor
GND (rear corner/
Ultrasonic
back sensor)
sensor GND Ultrasonic 1.0 or
H Voltage Under any condition x Related wiring
(rear corner/ sensor less
harnesses
back sensor)
x Parking sensor control
module terminal Q
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
(front corner sensor
sensor (front Ultrasonic Wave
I (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse) (left))
x Related wiring
(left))
harnesses
x Ultrasonic sensor
GND (front corner
Ultrasonic
sensor (left))
J Voltage Under any condition x Related wiring
(front corner sensor less
harnesses
sensor (left))
module terminal Q
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic Wave (front sensor (left))
K sensor (front (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse)
sensor (left))
harnesses
x Ultrasonic sensor
GND (front sensor
Ultrasonic
(left))
L Voltage Under any condition x Related wiring
(front sensor sensor less
harnesses
(left))
module terminal Q
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
Ultrasonic Wave (front sensor (right))
M sensor (front (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse)
sensor (right))
harnesses
x Ultrasonic sensor
GND (front sensor
Ultrasonic
(right))
N Voltage Under any condition x Related wiring
(front sensor sensor less
harnesses
(right))
module terminal Q
x Ultrasonic sensor
Ultrasonic
(front corner sensor
sensor (front Ultrasonic Wave
O (See 09-22-20 Generated Pulse) (right))
x Related wiring
(right))
harnesses
x Ultrasonic sensor
GND (front corner
Ultrasonic
sensor (right))
P Voltage Under any condition x Related wiring
(front corner sensor less
harnesses
sensor (right))
module terminal Q
Body 1.0 or
Q GND Voltage Under any condition Related wiring harnesses
ground less
R — — — — — —
S — — — — — —
T — — — — — —
09-22–19
Volta
inal ed to item
(V)
Parking Parking sensor switch ON B+ x Parking sensor switch
Switch the
U IG sensor Voltage 1.0 or x Related wiring
ignition to ON Parking sensor switch OFF
switch less harnesses
V — — — — — —
Switch the 6.0 or
Shift lever is in R position x Back-up light switch
Back-up ignition to ON more
x BCM
W R position light Voltage and parking
x Related wiring
switch sensor switch Shift lever is in position other 2.0 or
than R less harnesses
ON
X — — — — — —
2.0 or
Speed signal is input: ON
Rectangular less
Instrumen Wave wave pattern Open
Y Vehicle speed x Related wiring
t cluster profile is displayed Speed signal is not input: or 5.0 harnesses
while driving OFF or
more
Switch the Parking sensor switch ON
Parking B+ x Parking sensor buzzer
Parking ignition to ON and buzzer stopped
sensor (rear)
Z sensor buzzer Voltage and parking
buzzer x Related wiring
(rear) sensor switch Parking sensor switch ON 1.0 or
(rear) and buzzer sounding less harnesses
ON
Switch the 2.0 or
Parking brake is activated
Parking ignition to ON less x Parking brake switch
Parking brake
AA brake Voltage and parking x Related wiring
switch
switch sensor switch Parking brake is not activated 5.0 or harnesses
ON more
Parking sensor switch is ON
and parking sensor indicator B+
light is not illuminated
Parking x Parking sensor switch
Switch the Parking sensor switch is ON
AB Indicator sensor Voltage 1.0 or x Related wiring
ignition to ON and parking sensor indicator
switch less harnesses
light is illuminated
1.0 or
Parking sensor switch is OFF
less
Switch the Windshield washer switch is 5.0 or
x Windshield washer
Windshiel ignition to ON OFF more
Windshield switch
AC d washer Voltage and parking
washer switch x Related wiring
switch sensor switch Windshield washer switch is 2.0 or
ON less harnesses
ON
Switch the 2.0 or
Install the trailer accessory
ignition to ON less x Trailer accessory
Trailer
AD*1 Trailer accessory
Voltage and parking x Related wiring
sensor switch Remove the trailer accessory 5.0 or harnesses
ON more
Switch the 5.0 or
Light switch is OFF
ignition to ON more x Light switch
Light
AE Headlight Voltage and parking x Related wiring
switch 2.0 or
sensor switch Light switch is ON harnesses
ON less
Switch the 2.0 or
Install the tow bar
ignition to ON less x Tow bar
AF*1 Tow bar Tow bar Voltage and parking x Related wiring
sensor switch Remove the tow bar 5.0 or harnesses
ON more
*1 : Dealer option only
Generated Pulse
x Terminal:
— A—Q
— C—Q
— E—Q
— G—Q
09-22–20
— I—Q
— K—Q
— M—Q
— O—Q
x Oscilloscope setting:
— 2 V/DIV (Y), 20 ms/DIV (X), DC range
x Test condition
0V
—:Does not operate

Terminal
Parking Parking Shift Front Front Rear Rear
Vehicle Front Front Back Back
Ignition sensor brake lever corner corner corner corner
speed sensor sensor sensor sensor
switch lever position sensor sensor sensor sensor
(right) (left) (right) (left)
(right) (left) (right) (left)
Except R 0—15 km/h
O—Q I—Q M—Q K—Q — — — —
ON ON OFF position {0—9.3 mph}
R position or less O—Q I—Q — — G—Q E—Q C—Q A—Q
End Of Sie
PARKING SENSOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(6) Lower panel (Driver side) (See 09-17-34 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Release the tabs and remove the parking sensor
switch from the lower panel.
End Of Sie CONNECTOR
LOWER
PANEL
TAB
PARKING
SENSOR
SWITCH
TAB
PARKING SENSOR SWITCH INSPECTION

09-22–21
(7) Parking sensor switch (See 09-22-21 PARKING SENSOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the parking
sensor switch terminals is as indicated in the
table. B F
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
J H F D B
D H J

parking sensor switch.
4. Apply battery voltage to connect terminal H, and : CONTINUITY
connect terminal J to ground.
5. Verify that the LED illuminates. TERMINAL
x If there is any malfunction, replace the SWITCH POSITION
F H
6. Apply battery voltage to parking sensor switch OFF
terminal B, and connect terminal D to ground. ON
x If there is any malfunction, replace the
End Of Sie
PARKING SENSOR BUZZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Removal
4SD
2. Disconnect the parking sensor buzzer connector.
3. Squeeze the cover tabs as shown in the figure. TAB
COVER
TAB
4. Remove the cover and the parking sensor buzzer

from the rear package member as a single unit.
COVER AND
PARKING
SENSOR
BUZZER
09-22–22
5. Squeeze the parking sensor buzzer tabs as
shown in the figure. COVER
TAB
6. Remove the parking sensor buzzer from the

cover. PARKING
SENSOR
BUZZER
COVER
5HB
5. Disconnect the parking sensor buzzer connector.
6. Squeeze the parking sensor buzzer tabs as PARKING SENSOR
BUZZER CONNECTOR
liftgate inner panel.
TAB
LIFTGATE
INNER
PANEL
PARKING SENSOR BUZZER
Wagon
09-22–23
6. Disconnect the parking sensor buzzer connector. PARKING SENSOR BUZZER
7. Squeeze the parking sensor buzzer tabs as
liftgate inner panel.
TAB
LIFTGATE INNER PANEL
Installation
4SD
1. Install the parking sensor buzzer within a 45q to
the left and right from the center of the parking
sensor buzzer connector. REAR PACKAGE
COVER AND
PARKING SENSOR
TRAY BUZZER
FRONT 45°
CENTER
45°
2. Connect the parking sensor buzzer connector.

REAR PACKAGE TRAY
PARKING SENSOR COVER AND

BUZZER CONNECTOR PARKING SENSOR
BUZZER
09-22–24
3. Hook the two tabs positioned on the rear of the COVER AND
parking sensor buzzer to the rear package tray REAR PACKAGE TRAY PARKING SENSOR
and install the remaining tabs to the rear package BUZZER
tray in the direction of the arrow shown in the
figure.
5HB, Wagon
1. Connect the parking sensor buzzer to the parking
sensor buzzer connector, then install the parking PARKING SENSOR BUZZER CONNECTOR
sensor buzzer to the liftgate inner panel.
End Of Sie
PARKING SENSOR BUZZER LIFTGATE

INNER PANEL
PARKING SENSOR BUZZER INSPECTION

2. Remove the parking sensor buzzer. (See 09-22-22 PARKING SENSOR BUZZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Apply battery positive voltage to parking sensor
buzzer terminal A, and connect terminal B to
ground.
4. Verify that sound is output from the parking
B A
sensor buzzer.
x If sound is not output, replace the parking
sensor buzzer.
End Of Sie
09-22–25
BEEP SOUND ADJUSTMENT
1. Turn the volume adjustment knob using a flathead KNOB FOR FRONT BUZZER SOUND ADJUSTMENT
screwdriver.
x Left rotation: Volume decrease.
x Right rotation: Volume increases.
FLATHEAD
SCREWDRIVER
0.098 N·m
{1.0 kgf·cm, 0.87 in·lbf}
KNOB FOR REAR BUZZER SOUND ADJUSTMENT
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x When replacing the rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH), perform the rear vehicle
monitoring configuration. (See 09-22-30 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE
CONFIGURATION.)

3. Remove the following parts: (4SD)
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
4. Remove the following parts: (5HB)
(1) Service hole cover
5. Remove the following parts: (Wagon)
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
(3) Sub-trunk
(5) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
09-22–26
4SD, 5HB REAR VEHICLE REAR VEHICLE
WAGON
MONITORING CONTROL MONITORING CONTROL
MODULE MODULE
NUT
NUT
SHORT CORD
NUT
CONNECTOR NUT
NUT SHORT CORD

CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
NUT
NUT: 4.5—6.5 N·m CONNECTOR

{46—66 kgf·cm,
40—57 in·lbf}
7. Disconnect the short cord connector.

8. Remove the nuts.
9. Remove the rear vehicle monitoring control module.
11. When replacing the rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH), perform the rear vehicle monitoring
configuration. (See 09-22-30 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION.)
12. Perform radar aiming. (See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING RADAR AIMING.)
End Of Sie
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
Note
x The rear vehicle monitoring control module connector cannot be connected to a tester due to the module's
water-resistance processing, therefore the rear wiring harness connector is used for measuring the
terminal voltage.

(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
5. Remove the following parts: (Wagon)
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
(3) Sub-trunk
09-22–27
6. Measure the rear vehicle monitoring control module terminal voltage using the rear wiring harness connector in
the position shown in the figure.
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE (RH)
REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR
x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in the table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item (s)”.
— If the parts under “Inspection item (s)” are found to be normal, replace the rear vehicle monitoring
control module (RH).

Rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH)
REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR (RH) REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
CONTROL MODULE (RH) CONNECTOR
O M I C A
P N L J H F D L H F D
Rear vehicle
Rear wiring
monitoring Inspection
harness Signal Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V)
CM (RH) item(s)
terminal
terminal
A — — — — — —
B — — — — — —
C — — — — — —
RVM switch
1.0 or less x RVM switch
RVM switch Switch the pressed
D D RVM switch x Related wiring
signal ignition to ON RVM switch
+B harness
not pressed
E — — — — — —
Switch the ignition to ON +B x Fuse
Power
F F Fuse x Related wiring
supply Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less harness
G — — — — — —
x Related wiring
H H Ground Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less
harness
I — — — — — —
Rear vehicle
monitoring Terminal used for communication therefore determination
J C CAN2_H
control module based on terminal voltage is not possible.
(LH)
K — — — — — —
09-22–28
Rear vehicle
Rear wiring
monitoring Inspection
harness Signal Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V)
CM (RH) item(s)
terminal
terminal
Rear vehicle
monitoring Terminal used for communication therefore determination
L A CAN2_L
control module based on terminal voltage is not possible.
(LH)
CAN system Terminal used for communication therefore determination
M L CAN_H
related module based on terminal voltage is not possible.
N L CAN_H
O I CAN_L
P I CAN_L
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
Note
x The rear vehicle monitoring control module connector cannot be connected to a tester due to the module's
water-resistance processing, therefore the rear wiring harness connector is used for measuring the
terminal voltage.

4. Remove the sub-trunk. (Wagon)
6. Measure the rear vehicle monitoring control
module terminal voltage using the rear wiring
harness connector in the position shown in the REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE (LH)
figure.
x If the terminal voltage is not as indicated in REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR
the table, inspect the parts under “Inspection
item (s)”.
— If the parts under “Inspection item (s)” are
found to be normal, replace the rear
vehicle monitoring control module (LH).
Rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH)
REAR WIRING HARNESS CONNECTOR (LH) REAR VEHICLE MONITORING

CONTROL MODULE (LH) CONNECTOR
G C A K I G C
L J H D B L H F D
09-22–29
Rear vehicle
Rear wiring
monitoring Measurement
harness Signal Connected to Voltage (V) Inspection item(s)
CM (LH) condition
terminal
terminal
LED off 1.0 or less x RVM warning
RVM warning RVM warning indicator light LED
Switch the
A K indicator light indicator light (LH)
ignition to ON LED on 3.0—5.0
signal (LH) (LH) x Related wiring
harness
x RVM warning
RVM warning
RVM warning indicator light LED
indicator light
B G indicator light Under any condition 1.0 or less (LH)
ground signal
(LH) x Related wiring
(LH)
harness
LED off 1.0 or less x RVM warning
RVM warning RVM warning indicator light LED
Switch the
C D indicator light indicator light (RH)
ignition to ON LED on 3.0—5.0
signal (RH) (RH) x Related wiring
harness
x RVM warning
RVM warning
RVM warning indicator light LED
indicator light
D C indicator light Under any condition 1.0 or less (RH)
ground signal
(RH) x Related wiring
(RH)
harness
E — — — — — —
F — — — — — —
Switch the ignition to ON +B x Fuse
G F Power supply Fuse x Related wiring
Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less harness
x Related wiring
H H Ground Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less
harness
I — — — — — —
Rear vehicle
monitoring Terminal used for communication therefore determination based
J L CAN2_H
control module on terminal voltage is not possible.
(RH)
K — — — — — —
Rear vehicle
monitoring Terminal used for communication therefore determination based
L I CAN2_L
control module on terminal voltage is not possible.
(RH)
End Of Sie
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL MODULE CONFIGURATION
Note
x Configuration is necessary when replacing the rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH).Configuration
is not necessary when replacing the rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH).

select “RVM” from the screen menu.
4. Perform the configuration following the
instructions on the screen.
5. Verify that no DTCs are stored. (See 09-02J-3
DTC TABLE [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
SYSTEM].)
End Of Sie DLC-2
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

09-22–30
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
(8) Rear vehicle monitoring control module. (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(1) Service hole cover
(5) Rear vehicle monitoring control module. (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
5. Remove the following parts: (WAGON)
(1) Trunk mat
(2) Trunk board
(3) Sub-trunk
(5) Rear scuff plate (See 09-17-81 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(12)Rear vehicle monitoring control module. (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING CONTROL
6. Remove the nuts.
4SD, 5HB NUT
NUT
NUT
NUT:7—11 N·m
{72—112 kgf·cm, 62—97 in·lbf}
09-22–31
7. Remove the rear vehicle monitoring bracket.
9. Perform radar aiming. (See 09-22-32 REAR WAGON
VEHICLE MONITORING RADAR AIMING.)
End Of Sie
NUT
NUT
NUT:7—11 N·m
NUT {72—112 kgf·cm, 62—97 in·lbf}
REAR VEHICLE MONITORING RADAR AIMING

Introduction
x The procedure for the rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming involves forced emission of radar at a SST (Doppler
simulator) and performing aiming based on the induced tolerance with the radar as it is currently installed and
reflected from the SST (Doppler simulator).
x As there are two rear vehicle monitoring control modules, one each on the left and right, radar aiming is
performed for each side.
x Perform the radar aiming on a level surface. If the setting surface height and angle between the vehicle and the
SST (Doppler simulator) differs, correct radar aiming cannot be done.
SUITABLE PLACE
VEHICLE AND DOPPLER SIMULATOR ARE SET ON LEVEL GROUND
IMPROPER PLACE
HEIGHT DIFFERENCE BETWEEN DIFFERENT INCLINATION ANGLES OF SLOPE

VEHICLE AND DOPPLER SIMULATOR VEHICLE AND DOPPLER SIMULATOR
x Radar aiming cannot be performed correctly if obstructions which interfere with radar emission adhere to the
rear vehicle monitoring control modules or the rear bumper. Perform the following procedure before performing
the radar aiming.
— Verify that there is no water, mud, soiling, or sticker adhesion on the surface of the rear bumper, or repairs
done using putty application.
x Perform the DTC inspection for the rear vehicle monitoring system using the M-MDS and verify that no DTCs
are displayed.
— If any DTCs are displayed, perform troubleshooting according to the corresponding DTC inspection. (See
09-02J-2 DTC INSPECTION [REAR VEHICLE MONITORING SYSTEM].)
09-22–32
Radar aiming procedure
1. Remove any occupants and unload cargo from the cabin and trunk compartment so that the vehicle is in an
unloaded condition.
2. Adjust the air pressure of each tire to the specified value.
3. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
4. Verify that there are no obstructions or metal material in the radar emission area shown in the figure.
Caution
x If there are covered drain gutters in the floor or similar objects, they will obstruct the radar
emission and result in inaccurate radar aiming. If there are obstructions, move them outside of the
radar emission range.
x Personnel are not to be in this area as well.
3 m {9.8 ft}
RADAR EMISSION
AREA
3 m {9.8 ft}
RADAR EMISSION
AREA
2 m {7 ft}
6.6r0.15 m {22r0.49 ft} 1m

{3 ft}
5. Adjust the commercially available plumb-bob so

that it is aligned with the center of the brand
emblem, determine the center position at the front CENTER OF
BRAND
of the vehicle, and mark the center position on the EMBLEM
floor surface.
Note
x The center of the brand emblem indicates
the center position at the front of the vehicle.
LEVELING LINE
09
PLUMB-BOB FLOOR
MARK
09-22–33
6. Adjust the plumb-bob so that it is aligned with the center of the brand emblem, determine the center position at
the rear of the vehicle, and mark the center position on the floor surface.
WAGON
4SD, 5HB
CENTER CENTER
OF BRAND OF BRAND
EMBLEM EMBLEM
LEVELING LINE
LEVELING LINE
PLUMB-BOB
PLUMB-BOB
FLOOR MARK
FLOOR MARK
Note
x The center of the brand emblem indicates the center position at the rear of the vehicle.
7. Position the leveling line over the marked positions at the front and rear of the vehicle, and then mark the
position on the floor surface 6.6r0.15 m {22r0.49 ft} from the front end of the vehicle.
Caution
x If the center position at the rear of the vehicle is set first, the leveling line could be mis-aligned.
Determine the center position at the vehicle front first, then set the center position at the vehicle
rear.
Note
x Use a commercially-available leveling line.
FLOOR MARK(FRONT) FLOOR MARK(REAR) FLOOR MARK

(CENTER POINT FROM
VEHICLE REAR)
MARK THE POSITIONS WITHIN 6.6r0.15 m {22r0.49 ft}

FROM FRONT END OF VEHICLE
8. Mark the positions on the left and right which form right angles to the center position from the vehicle rear to a
distance of 672r 5 mm {26.5r0.2 in}.
Note
x When performing the radar aiming for the rear vehicle monitoring control module (RH), only mark the right
side at the position 672r5 mm {26.5r0.2 in} from the center position of the vehicle rear.
x When performing the radar aiming for the rear vehicle monitoring control module (LH), only mark the left
side at the position 672r5 mm {26.5r0.2 in} from the center position of the vehicle rear.
09-22–34
REFERENCE LINE FOR

SETTING DOPPLER
SIMULATOR COMPONENT
672r5 mm
{26.5r0.2 in} CENTER POINT
90q FROM VEHICLE
REAR
672r5 mm
{26.5r0.2 in}
REFERENCE LINE FOR

SETTING DOPPLER
SIMULATOR COMPONENT
9. Insert the SST (AC-DC converter) into the side of

the SST (Doppler simulator) and turn on the
power.
49 G067 0A0
AC-DC
CONVERTER
PLUG-IN AREA
10. Verify that the green lamp on the SST (Doppler

simulator) unit illuminates.
49 G067 0A0
LAMP(GREEN)
11. Adjust the SST (Doppler simulator) so that its

height from the top surface to the floor is 1000r10
mm {39.37r0.39 in}.
49 G067 0A0
Caution 1000±10 mm
x Support the Doppler simulator unit with {39.37±0.39 in}
one hand while loosening the fixing
knobs.
09-22–35
x The Doppler simulator height can be
adjusted by loosening the 2 fixing knobs on
the side of the unit.
FIXING KNOBS
12. Level the SST (Doppler simulator) installation

surface using the bubble level built into the SST
(Doppler simulator).
13. Adjust the adjustment knobs so that the air bubble TRIPOD
is centered between the reference lines.
14. Drop the plumb-bob to the floor along the
reference line printed on the SST (Doppler
simulator) unit.
49 G067 0A0
AIR BUBBLE BUBBLE

REFERENCE
LINE
ADJUSTMENT
KNOBS
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS
49 G067 0A0
CENTER POINT FROM
672r5 mm VEHICLE REAR REFERENCE
{26.5r0.2 in}
LINES
LEVELING LINE
672r5 mm
{26.5r0.2 in}
PLUMB-BOB
672r5 mm
{26.5r0.2 in}
09-22–36
15. Adjust the SST (Doppler simulator) position so that the end of the plumb-bob is aligned with the floor marking.
Set SST (Doppler simulator) as parallel as possible to the axle direction.
FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR MARK
MARK MARK (CENTER POINT FROM
(FRONT) (REAR) VEHICLE REAR)
49 G067 0A0
CENTER POINT FROM
VEHICLE REAR
LEVELING
LINE
PLUMB-BOB
672r5 mm
{26.5r0.2 in}
FLOOR MARK
Note
x Adjust the SST (Doppler simulator) stand so that it is parallel with the line drawn on the floor in Step 8.
EXAMPLE
(REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
CONTROL MODULE (RH))
DOPPLER
SIMULATOR
CENTER POINT LINE DRAWN

FROM VEHICLE IN STEP 8
REAR
16. After the end of the plumb-bob is aligned with the marking, remove the plumb-bob.
17. Use the M-MDS to perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming according to the instructions on the screen.
19. After the vehicle is identified, select “Electrical”,
then “RVM Aiming” from the initial screen of the
IDS.
on the screen.
21. Verify the M-MDS display.
x If “Procedure successful.” is displayed:
— Radar is normal.
x If “Procedure unsuccessful.” is displayed:
— Perform the inspection according to the DLC-2
following table.
09-22–37

1 DOPPLER SIMULATOR POSITION SET Yes Go to the next step.
VERIFICATION No Set the Doppler simulator in the correct position
x Verify if the Doppler simulator is set in the correct and perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar
position. aiming.
(See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING (See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
RADAR AIMING.) RADAR AIMING.)
x Is the Doppler simulator set in the correct position?
2 DO REAR MONITORING RADAR AIMING AGAIN Yes The rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming is
x Perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming. completed.
(See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING No Go to the next step.
RADAR AIMING.)
x M-MDS operations (Step 19-20) for the rear vehicle
monitoring radar aiming is repeated 2 or 3 times
before “Procedure successful.” is displayed.
x Is “Procedure successful.” displayed?
3 VERIFY EFFECT OF REAR BUMPER Yes Replace the rear bumper.
x Remove the rear bumper. (See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/
(See 09-10-28 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION.)
INSTALLATION.) No Go to the next step.
x Perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar aiming
procedure.
RADAR AIMING.)
x M-MDS operations (Step 19-20) for the rear vehicle
monitoring radar aiming is repeated 2 or 3 times
before “Procedure successful.” is displayed.
x Is “Procedure successful.” displayed?
4 VERIFICATION OF REAR VEHICLE MONITORING Yes Repair or replace the malfunctioning part and
CONTROL MODULE OR REAR VEHICLE perform the rear vehicle monitoring radar
MONITORING BRACKET MIS-INSTALLATION, OR aiming procedure.
DISTORTION ON INSTALLATION SURFACE (See 09-22-32 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
x Verify whether a rear vehicle monitoring control RADAR AIMING.)
module or rear vehicle monitoring bracket has been No Replace the rear vehicle monitoring control
mis-installed, or if there is distortion on the vehicle module and perform the rear vehicle monitoring
installation surface. radar aiming procedure.
x Is there a mis-installation or distortion to the (See 09-22-26 REAR VEHICLE MONITORING
installation surface? CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
End Of Sie
RVM SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
09-22–38
3. Detach the tabs.
4. Remove the RVM switch from the lower panel.
End Of Sie TAB TAB
LOWER TAB TAB

PANEL
RVM
SWITCH
RVM
SWITCH
LOWER PANEL
RVM SWITCH INSPECTION

(7) RVM switch (See 09-22-38 RVM SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Verify that the continuity between the RVM switch
terminals is as indicated in the table.
R.H.D.
C E
K 㧖㧖 E C A
㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖㧖
K A
09-22–39
RVM switch.
4. Apply battery positive voltage to RVM switch
terminal E, and connect terminal A to ground.
R.H.D.
x If there is any malfunction, replace the RVM : CONTINUITY
switch. TERMINAL
End Of Sie SWITCH POSITION
C K
OFF
ON
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

INNER GARNISH
RVM WARNING
INDICATOR LIGHT
SCREW
4. Lower the RVM warning indicator light in the

direction of the arrow and remove it outward. INNER GARNISH
End Of Sie
RVM WARNING
INDICATOR LIGHT
RVM WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT INSPECTION

Caution
x The voltage applied to the RVM warning indicator light is 6.5 V.
3. Apply battery positive voltage to terminal A of the

RVM warning indicator light, and connect terminal
B to ground.
x If there is a malfunction, replace the RVM
warning indicator light.
B A
6.5 V
09-22–40
CONTROL SYSTEM
09-40 CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL SYSTEM BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
LOCATION INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–1 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–16
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-40–4
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference) . . . 09-40–4
Generated pulse (reference) . . . . . . . . 09-40–14
CONTROL SYSTEM
End of Toc
CONTROL SYSTEM LOCATION INDEX
R.H.D.
1 BCM
INSPECTION.)
CONFIGURATION.)
End Of Sie
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Caution
x When replacing the BCM, the configuration procedure must be performed before removing the
BCM. Replacing the BCM without performing the configuration procedure will result in system
malfunction.
1. Perform the BCM configuration when replacing it. (See 09-40-16 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM)
CONFIGURATION.)
3. Remove the front scuff plate (LH). (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the front side trim (LH). (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Disconnect the connector at the position shown in
the figure.
6. Remove tab A as shown in the figure, pull the fuse BCM
block in the direction of the arrow (1), and remove
tab B.
FUSE BLOCK
CONNECTOR
CONTROL SYSTEM
TAB A TAB A
(1)
FUSE BLOCK
TAB B
7. Remove the fuse block.

the figure.
CONNECTOR
BCM
9. Remove the nut.
NUT
8—10 N · m
{82—101 kgf · cm,
71—88 in · lbf}
CONTROL SYSTEM
10. Press the BCM tab in the direction of the arrow (1)
shown in the figure while pulling it in the direction TAB
(1)
of the arrow (2), and then remove the tab from the TAB
body. (1)
(2)
BCM

the figure.
12. Detach the clips and remove the vehicle wiring
harness.
BCM
CONNECTOR
CLIP
CLIP
CLIP
13. Remove the BCM.

15. Perform the steering angle sensor initialization procedure. (See 09-18-30 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) INSPECTION
1. Remove the front scuff plate. (LH) (See 09-17-72 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the front side trim. (LH) (See 09-17-56 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the BCM with the connector connected. (See 09-40-2 BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
x If the voltage is not as specified in the Terminal Voltage Table, inspect the parts under “Inspection item (s)”.
— If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the BCM.
1
2
1W 1U 1S 1Q 1O 1M 1K 1I 1G 1E 1C 1A 2I 2G 2A
1X 1V 1T 1R 1P 1N 1L 1J 1H 1F 1D 1B 2J 2H 2F 2D 2B
2 3
5 4 5
3 1
4 3AB 3Y 3V 3S 3P 3M 3J 3G 3D 3A
7 4E 4C 4A
3AC 3Z 3W 3T 3Q 3N 3K 3H 3E 3B 5F 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A
8 3AD 3AA 3X 3U 3R 3O 3L 3I 3F 3C 4F 4D 4B
6
6 7
8O 8M 8K 8I 8G 8E 8C 8A
8P 8N 8L 8J 8H 8F 8D 8B
Termin
Signal Connected to Measurement condition Voltage (V) Inspection item (s)
al
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x Blower relay
1A IG2 Blower relay x Related wiring
Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less harnesses
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x A/C relay
1B IG2 A/C relay x Related wiring
1C — — — — —
1D — — — — —
x DSC HU/CM Switch the ignition to ON B+ x DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
(with DSC) x ABS HU/CM (with ABS)
1E IG1
x ABS HU/CM Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less x Related wiring
(with ABS) harnesses
1F — — — — —
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
Horn sounded 1.0 or less x Horn relay
1G Horn control Horn relay x Related wiring
Horn not sounded B+ harnesses
1H — — — — —
High beam illuminated B+ x Headlight high relay
High-beam Headlight high
1I x Related wiring
indicator light relay Other 1.0 or less harnesses
1J — — — — —
Light switch at OFF position B+ x Light switch
Headlight switch
1K Light switch x Related wiring
signal (Lo) Light switch at HEAD position 1.0 or less harnesses
1L — — — — —
Light switch at OFF position B+ x Headlight low relay
Headlight low Headlight low
1M x Related wiring
relay control relay Light switch at HEAD position 1.0 or less harnesses
1N — — — — —
Fog light switch
at ON position
1.0 or less x Front fog light relay
Front fog light Front fog light Light switch at
1O x Related wiring
relay control relay TNS position Fog light switch
B+ harnesses
at OFF position
x Front turn Turn switch (RH) Alternates x Front turn light (RH)
light (RH) ON Front turn light between 1.0 x Front side turn light
x Front side Hazard warning (RH) flashes or less and
Front turn light (RH) (Front fender
1P turn light switch ON B+
(RH) control panel type)
(RH) (Front
x Related wiring
fender panel Front turn light (RH) not illuminated 1.0 or less harnesses
type)
Brake fluid level
above MIN.
B+ x Brake fluid level sensor
Brake fluid level Brake fluid level Switch the
1Q x Related wiring
signal sensor ignition to ON Brake fluid level
1.0 or less harnesses
below MIN.
x Front turn Turn switch (LH) Alternates x Front turn light (LH)
light (LH) ON Front turn light between 1.0 x Front side turn light (LH)
x Front side Hazard warning (LH) flashes or less and
Front turn light (Front fender panel
1R turn light switch ON B+
(LH) control type)
(LH) (Front
x Related wiring
fender panel Front turn light (LH) not illuminated 1.0 or less harnesses
type)
Wave
Bonnet open pattern (See
(Bonnet latch switch off) 09-40-15 x Bonnet latch switch
Bonnet latch Bonnet latch
1S*1 Pattern 2.) x Related wiring
switch signal switch
harnesses
Bonnet closed
1.0 or less
(Bonnet latch switch ON)
1T — — — — —
1U — — — — —
1V Signal ground Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less Related wiring harness
1W — — — — —
TNS ON B+ x Parking light
x Parking light
TNS switch x Front fog light relay
1X x Front fog
signal TNS off 1.0 or less x Related wiring
light relay
harnesses
x Related wiring
2A Power ground Body ground Under any condition 1.0 or less
harnesses
2B — — — — —
2C — — — — —
x TAIL 15 A fuse
TNS power
2D TAIL 15 A fuse Under any condition B+ x Related wiring
supply
harnesses
2E — — — — —
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
Rear washer Rear washer
B+ x Rear washer motor
Rear washer Switch the
2F motor power motor operating x Related wiring
motor ignition to ON
supply Other 1.0 or less harnesses
x HO2S Switch the ignition to ON B+
x HO2S (except MZR-CD
(except
2.2)
MZR-CD 2.2)
x AT main relay (ATX)
x AT main relay
x Transaxle range switch
(ATX)
2G IG1 (ATX)
x Transaxle Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less x Back-up light switch
range switch
(MTX)
(ATX)
x Related wiring
x Back-up light
harnesses
switch (MTX)
The selector lever is in the R x Transaxle range switch
x Transaxle B+
position (ATX)
range switch
Back-up light x Back-up light switch
2H (ATX)
power supply (MTX)
x Back-up light Other 1.0 or less x Related wiring
switch (MTX)
harnesses
Windshield x Windshield washer
Windshield washer motor B+
Windshield Switch the motor
2I washer motor
washer motor ignition to ON operating x Related wiring
control
x HAZARD 10 A fuse
Hazard power HAZARD 10 A
2J Under any condition B+ x Related wiring
supply fuse
harnesses
Wiper switch in x Windshield wiper and
Windshield wiper HI, LO, or MIST 1.0 or less
Windshield wiper Switch the washer switch
3A and washer
switch input (LO) ignition to ON position x Related wiring
switch
Other B+ harnesses
Rear washer
1.0 or less x Rear wiper and washer
Rear washer Rear wiper and Switch the switch ON switch
3B
switch signal washer switch ignition to ON Rear washer x Related wiring
5 harnesses
switch off
Rear wiper x Rear wiper and washer
Rear wiper Rear wiper and Switch the switch at ON 1.0 or less switch
3C
switch signal washer switch ignition to ON position x Related wiring
Other B+ harnesses
Wiper switch in
position except B+ x Windshield wiper and
Windshield wiper
Windshield wiper Switch the HI washer switch
3D and washer
switch input (HI) ignition to ON x Related wiring
switch Wiper switch in
HI position
Turn switch in LH
1.0 or less x Turn switch
Turn switch input Switch the
3E Turn switch position x Related wiring
(LH) ignition to ON
Other B+ harnesses
Rear fog light
1.0 or less x Fog light switch
Rear fog light
3F Fog light switch Headlight ON switch ON x Related wiring
switch control
Other B+ harnesses
Windshield washer switch ON 1.0 or less x Windshield wiper and
Windshield Windshield wiper
washer switch
3G washer switch and washer
Other 5 x Related wiring
signal switch
harnesses
Turn switch in
1.0 or less x Turn switch
Turn switch input Switch the
3H Turn switch RH position x Related wiring
(RH) ignition to ON
Other B+ harnesses
Parking brake is
activated
1.0 or less x Car-navigation unit
Parking brake Car-navigation Switch the
3I*3 x Related wiring
switch signal unit ignition to ON Parking brake is
B+ harnesses
not activated
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
Wiper switch in x Windshield wiper and
Windshield wiper Auto or INT 1.0 or less
Windshield wiper Switch the washer switch
3J and washer
switch input ignition to ON position x Related wiring
switch
Other B+ harnesses
x Climate Light switch at TNS position B+
x Climate control unit
control unit
x Audio/car-navigation
x Audio/car-
Illumination light unit
3K navigation
control Light switch at OFF position 1.0 or less x Illumination light
unit
x Related wiring
x Illumination
harnesses
light
Light switch at TNS position B+ x ILLUMI 7.5 A fuse
Illumination light ILLUMI 7.5 A
3L x Related wiring
power supply fuse Light switch at OFF position 1.0 or less harnesses
x Windshield wiper and
Windshield wiper Windshield wiper
washer switch
3M speed volume and washer Under any condition 1.0 or less
x Related wiring
signal ground switch
harnesses
1.0 or less x Fog light switch
Front fog light
Front fog light
3N Fog light switch Headlight ON switch ON x Related wiring
switch control
Other B+ harnesses
Headlight switch
Switch the in TNS or HEAD 1.0 or less x Headlight switch
Headlight switch position x Related wiring
ignition to ON
harnesses
TNS switch Other B+
3O
signal Headlight switch
Headlight switch
Switch the in TNS or HEAD 1.0 or less x Headlight switch
(with running position x Related wiring
ignition to ON
light system) harnesses
Other 5
CAN system Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good judgment by terminal
3P CAN_L
related module voltage is not possible.
Light switch at HI
1.0 or less x Light switch
Headlight switch Light switch at or PASS position
3Q Light switch x Related wiring
signal (HI) HEAD position Light switch at
B+ harnesses
LO position
Switch position 1
0
position
Switch position 2
1.0
Voltage position
Sensitivity
decreases when Switch position 3 2.0
adjustment Windshield wiper position
speed control
volume (with and washer
volume is turned Switch position 4
auto wiper switch 2.9
from - position to position
system)
+ position Switch position 5
3.7
position
Switch position 6
4.5 x Windshield wiper and
position washer switch
3R
Switch position 1 x Related wiring
0 harnesses
position
Switch position 2
1.0
Voltage position
decreases when Switch position 3 2.0
INT volume Windshield wiper position
speed control
(without auto and washer
volume is turned Switch position 4
wiper system) switch 2.9
from - position to position
+ position Switch position 5
3.7
position
Switch position 6
4.5
position
3S CAN_H
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
Headlight switch
1.0 or less x Light switch
Auto light switch Switch the
3T Light switch in AUTO position x Related wiring
signal ignition to ON
Other B+ harnesses
x Steering lock Key inserted B+
unit
(With x Steering lock unit (With
advanced advanced keyless entry
keyless entry and push button start
and push system)
Key reminder
3U button start x Key reminder switch
switch Key removed 1.0 or less
system) (With keyless entry
x Key reminder system)
switch x Related wiring
(With keyless harnesses
entry
system)
Horn switch is pressed. 1.0 or less x Clock spring
x Clock spring x Horn switch
3V Horn control
x Horn switch Other B+ x Related wiring
harnesses
Hazard warning switch ON 1.0 or less x Hazard warning switch
Hazard warning Hazard warning
3W x Related wiring
switch signal switch Hazard warning switch off 5 harnesses
3X — — — — —
Switch the ignition to off and driver- x Push button start
Push button start 1.0 or less
side door opened or TNS ON. illumination (with
illumination (with
Ignition key advanced keyless entry
advanced
illumination and push button start
keyless entry 15 s or more after all doors closed
control B+ system)
and push button and TNS off.
3Y x Related wiring
start system)
harnesses
Switch the ignition to off and driver- x Coil antenna (with
Ignition key Coil antenna 1.0 or less
side door opened. keyless entry system)
illumination (with keyless
x Related wiring
control entry system) 15 s or more after all doors closed. B+ harnesses
3Z — — — — —
3AA — — — — —
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x SAS 5 A fuse
SAS
3AB SAS 5 A fuse x Related wiring
(IG1) Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less harnesses
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x A/C 10 A fuse
3AC IG2 A/C 10 A fuse x Related wiring
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON B+ x Instrument cluster
Instrument
3AD IG1 x Related wiring
cluster Switch the ignition to off 5 harnesses
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x METER IG 15 A fuse
METER IG 15 A
4A IG1 x Related wiring
fuse Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less harnesses
x ROOM 15 A fuse
Interior light
4B ROOM 15 A fuse Under any condition B+ x Related wiring
power supply
harnesses
x D.LOCK 30 A fuse
Door lock power D.LOCK 30 A
4C Under any condition B+ x Related wiring
supply fuse
harnesses
TNS ON B+ x ILLUMI 7.5 A fuse
TNS switch ILLUMI 7.5 A
4D x Related wiring
signal fuse TNS off 1.0 or less harnesses
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x WIPER 20 A fuse
WIPER 20 A
4E IG2 x Related wiring
fuse Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less harnesses
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x R.WIP 10 A fuse
4F IG2 R.WIP 10 A fuse x Related wiring
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
x Steering angle sensor
Steering angle Steering angle
5A Under any condition 1.0 or less x Related wiring
sensor GND sensor
harnesses
Steering wheel is in center position 0.25—0.75 x Steering angle sensor
Steering angle Steering angle
5B Steering wheel is not in center x Related wiring
sensor signal (Z) sensor 4.00—4.75
position harnesses
Alternates
between x Steering angle sensor
Steering angle Steering angle Turn the steering wheel to the left
5C 4.00—4.75 x Related wiring
sensor signal (C) sensor and right.
and 0.25— harnesses
0.75
Alternates
5D 4.00—4.75 x Related wiring
sensor signal (B) sensor and right.
0.75
Alternates
5E 4.00—4.75 x Related wiring
sensor signal (A) sensor and right.
0.75
Wave
Steering angle Specified time elapsed since key pattern (See x Steering angle sensor
Steering angle
5F sensor power removal and all doors closed 09-40-15 x Related wiring
sensor Pattern 3.)
supply harnesses
Other 5
x liftgate/trunk lid opener
liftgate/trunk lid
liftgate/trunk lid switch
6A opener switch Under any condition 1.0 or less
opener switch x Related wiring
GND
harnesses
6B CAN_L
x Liftgate is open. (5HB, WGN)
x Liftgate latch x Liftgate latch (Liftgate latch switch ON)
1.0 or less x Liftgate latch switch
switch signal switch (5HB, x Trunk lid is open. (4SD) (5HB, WGN)
(5HB, WGN) WGN) (Trunk lid latch switch ON) x Trunk lid latch
6C
x Trunk lid x Trunk lid x Liftgate is closed. (5HB, WGN) switch(4SD)
latch switch latch (Liftgate latch switch off) x Related wiring
B+
(4SD) switch(4SD) x Liftgate is closed. (4SD) harnesses
(Liftgate latch switch off)
6D CAN_H
liftgate/trunk lid liftgate/trunk lid opener switch x liftgate/trunk lid opener
3.1
opener switch pressed switch (Advanced
liftgate/trunk lid (Advanced keyless entry and push
opener switch keyless entry liftgate/trunk lid opener switch not button start system)
and push button pressed 4.6 x Related wiring
start system) harnesses
6E
liftgate/trunk lid opener switch x liftgate/trunk lid opener
2.2
liftgate/trunk lid pressed switch (Advanced
liftgate/trunk lid opener switch keyless entry and push
opener switch (keyless entry liftgate/trunk lid opener switch not button start system)
system) 4.6 x Related wiring
pressed
harnesses
Intruder sensor Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good judgment by terminal
6F*1 signal
Intruder sensor
voltage is not possible.
6G — — — — —
Theft-deterrent Theft-deterrent Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good judgment by terminal
6H*1 siren signal siren voltage is not possible.
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
x Sunroof Switch the ignition to ON B+
motor (with x Sunroof motor (with
sunroof sunroof system)
system) x Seat warmer (with seat
6I IG2
x Seat warmer Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less warmer system)
(with seat x Related wiring
warmer harnesses
system)
x Keyless
control
module (with
advanced
keyless entry
and push
button start
system)
Serial x Keyless Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good judgment by terminal
6J
communication receiver voltage is not possible.
(without
advanced
keyless entry
and push
button start
system)
x Instrument
cluster
Other B+ x Keyless control module
Keyless control
6K*4 SAS (IG1) x Related wiring
module Switch the ignition to ACC 1.0 or less harnesses
At the moment key cylinder is
1.0 or less x Driver-side door key
Driver-side door Driver-side door unlocked
cylinder switch
6L key cylinder key cylinder At the moment key cylinder is
2.2 x Related wiring
switch signal switch locked
harnesses
Other 4.5
Wave x Map light
Interior light on Interior light off
Interior light x Map light pattern (See x Interior light
6M by opening any by closing all
control x Interior light 09-40-15 x Related wiring
door doors
Pattern 4.) harnesses
x Power
window main
switch
x Position
Serial Because this terminal is for communication, good/no good judgment by terminal
6N memory
communication voltage is not possible.
control
module (with
seat
memory)
Wave
Courtesy light on Courtesy light off x Courtesy light
Courtesy light pattern (See
6O Courtesy light by opening any by closing all x Related wiring
control 09-40-15
door doors harnesses
Pattern 4.)
6P Sunroof motor
The selector
lever is in the R B+ x Back-up light
Back-up light Switch the
7A Back-up light position x Related wiring
control ignition to ON
harnesses
Other 1.0 or less
x Liftgate auto Liftgate opener switch pressed,
closure liftgate lock motor operation (5HB, 1.0 or less x Liftgate auto closure
Liftgate latch control WGN) control module (5HB)
and lock motor module x Liftgate lock actuator
7B
ground (5HB, (5HB) (WGN)
WGN) x Liftgate lock Not operating 5 x Related wiring
actuator harnesses
(WGN)
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
1.0 or less
Liftgate auto Liftgate opener switch pressed,
o B+ o 1.0
x Liftgate latch closure control liftgate lock motor operation
or less
and lock module (5HB) x Liftgate auto closure
motor power Not operating 1.0 or less control module (5HB)
supply (5HB, Liftgate opener switch pressed,
1.0 or less x Trunk lid latch and lock
WGN) Liftgate lock o B+ o 1.0 actuator (4SD)
7C liftgate lock motor operation
x Trunk lid actuator (WGN) or less x Liftgate lock actuator
latch and Not operating 4 (WGN)
lock actuator 1.0 or less x Related wiring
power supply Trunk lid latch Trunk lid opener switch pressed, harnesses
o B+ o 1.0
(4SD) and lock actuator trunk lid lock actuator operation
or less
(4SD)
Not operating 1.0 or less
Switch the ignition to ON B+ x Push button start
x Ignition switch
Rear wiper Rear wiper
x Rear wiper motor (5HB,
7D power supply motor (5HB,
Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less WGN)
(5HB, WGN) WGN)
x Related wiring
harnesses
Windshield wiper
B+ x Windshield wiper motor
Windshield wiper Windshield wiper Switch the
7E operating at low x Related wiring
signal motor ignition to ON
off 1.0 or less harnesses
1.0 or less x Rear wiper motor (5HB,

Rear wiper
Rear wiper Rear wiper moving
Switch the WGN)
7F control (5HB, motor (5HB,
ignition to ON Rear wiper x Related wiring
WGN) WGN) B+
stopped harnesses
Windshield wiper
7G operating at high x Related wiring
signal motor ignition to ON
off 1.0 or less harnesses
7H Rain sensor
1.0 or less
Door lock Door lock actuators locking o B+ o 1.0 x Door lock actuators
7I Door lock control or less x Related wiring
actuators
harnesses
Other 1.0 or less
Windshield wiper
operating
7J x Related wiring
auto stop signal motor ignition to ON Windshield not
operating
1.0 or less
Door unlock Door lock Door lock actuators unlocking o B+ o 1.0 x Door lock actuators
7K or less x Related wiring
control actuators
harnesses
Other 1.0 or less
7L — — — — —
1.0 or less x Driver-side door lock
Double locking o B+ o 1.0
Driver-side door Double-locking system is adopted actuator
7M*2 system door lock
lock actuator or less x Related wiring
control
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
x Theft-
deterrent
siren (with
theft-
deterrent
system) x Theft-deterrent siren
x Cargo (with theft-deterrent
compartment system)
light (5HB, x Cargo compartment
WGN) light (5HB, WGN)
x Vanity mirror x Vanity mirror
illumination illumination
x Keyless x Keyless control module
7N Power supply Under any condition B+
control (with advanced keyless
module (with entry and push button
advanced start system)
keyless entry x Courtesy light
and push x Keyless receiver
button start x Key reminder switch
system) x Related wiring
x Courtesy harnesses
light
x Keyless
receiver
x Key reminder
switch
x Power Switch the ignition to ON B+
window main
switch
x Auto x Power window main
dimming switch
mirror (with x Auto dimming mirror
auto dimming (with auto dimming
mirror) mirror)
7O IG1 x Rain sensor x Rain sensor (with rain
(with rain Switch the ignition to off 1.0 or less sensor)
sensor) x Rear seat belt reminder
x Position control module
memory x Related wiring
control harnesses
module (with
memory
power seat)
x Map light x Map light
x Trunk x Trunk compartment light
Courtesy light compartment (4SD)
7P Under any condition B+
power supply light (4SD) x Condenser (4SD)
x Condenser x Related wiring
(4SD) harnesses
Parking brake is
activated
1.0 or less x Parking brake switch
Parking brake Parking brake Switch the
8A x Related wiring
switch signal switch ignition to ON Parking brake is
B+ harnesses
not activated
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
Wave
Front door (driver side) open
pattern (See
(Front door latch switch (driver side)
09-40-15 x Front door latch switch
Front door latch off)
Pattern 2.) (driver side)
switch (driver
x Related wiring
side) Front door (driver side) closed harnesses
(Front door latch switch (driver side) 1.0 or less
ON)
Front door latch
8B switch (driver x Front door Front door (driver side) open
side) input signal latch switch (Front door latch switch (driver side) B+ x Front door latch switch
(driver side) off) (driver side)
x Position x Position memory control
memory module (with seat
control Front door (driver side) closed memory)
module (with (Front door latch switch (driver side) 1.0 or less x Related wiring
seat ON) harnesses
memory)
x Passenger- Wave
side door pattern (See x Passenger-side door
door locked
lock-link 09-40-15 lock-link switch
switch Pattern 2.) x Rear door lock-link
Lock/unlock x Rear door switch (LH)
8C*1 input lock-link x Rear door lock-link
switch (LH) switch (RH)
x Rear door door unlocked 1.0 or less x Related wiring
lock-link harnesses
switch (RH)
Wave
Front door (passenger side) open
pattern (See
Front door latch (Front door latch switch (passenger
09-40-15 x Front door latch switch
Front door latch side) off)
switch Pattern 2.) (passenger side)
8D switch
(passenger side) x Related wiring
(passenger side) Front door (passenger side) closed
signal harnesses
(Front door latch switch (passenger 1.0 or less
side) ON)
Wave
pattern (See x Driver-side door lock-
Unlock input
Driver-side door Driver-side door locked 09-40-15 link switch
8E (Driver-side door
lock-link switch Pattern 2.) x Related wiring
lock-link switch)
harnesses
Driver-side door unlocked 1.0 or less
Wave
Rear door (RH) open pattern (See x Rear door latch
Rear door latch
Rear door latch (Rear door latch switch off) 09-40-15 switches
8F switch (RH)
switch (RH) Pattern 2.) x Related wiring
signal
Rear door (RH) closed harnesses
1.0 or less
(Rear door latch switch ON)
Driver-side door locked 1.0 or less
Wave
pattern*4
(See 09-40-
x Driver-side door lock-
Lock input 14 Pattern
Driver-side door link switch
8G (Driver-side door 1.)
lock-link switch Driver-side door unlocked x Related wiring
lock-link switch) Wave harnesses
pattern*5
(See 09-40-
15 Pattern
2.)
Wave
Rear door (LH) open pattern (See x Rear door latch
Rear door latch
Rear door latch (Rear door latch switch off) 09-40-15 switches
8H switch (LH)
switch (LH) Pattern 2.) x Related wiring
signal
Rear door (LH) closed harnesses
1.0 or less
(Rear door latch switch ON)
CONTROL SYSTEM
Termin
al
Turn switch (RH) Alternates
ON Rear turn light between 1.0 x Rear turn light (RH)
Rear turn light Rear turn light
8I Hazard warning (RH) flashes or less and x Related wiring
(RH) control (RH) B+
switch ON harnesses
Rear turn light (RH) not illuminated 1.0 or less
Turn switch (RH) Alternates
ON Front turn light between 1.0 x Front side turn light
Front side turn
Front side turn (RH) (Outer mirror type)
8J*6 light (RH) (Outer Hazard warning (RH) flashes or less and
light (RH) control B+ x Related wiring
mirror type) switch ON
harnesses
Front turn light (RH) not illuminated 1.0 or less
Turn switch (LH) Alternates
ON Front turn light between 1.0 x Front side turn light (LH)
Front side turn
Front side turn (Outer mirror type)
8K*6 light (LH) (Outer Hazard warning (RH) flashes or less and
light (LH) control B+ x Related wiring
mirror type) switch ON
harnesses
Front turn light (LH) not illuminated 1.0 or less
Turn switch (LH) Alternates
ON Rear turn light between 1.0 x Rear turn light (LH)
Rear turn light Rear turn light
8L Hazard warning (LH) flashes or less and x Related wiring
(LH) control (LH) B+
switch ON harnesses
Rear turn light (LH) not illuminated 1.0 or less
x Sunroof Switch the ignition to ACC B+
motor x Sunroof motor
x Parking x Parking assist control
assist control module (with parking
8M*7 Speed signal
module (with Switch the ignition to off assist system)
1.0 or less
parking x Related wiring
assist harnesses
system)
Rear fog light illuminated B+ x Rear fog light
Rear fog light
8N Rear fog light x Related wiring
control Rear fog light not illuminated 1.0 or less harnesses
TNS ON B+ x Taillight
TNS switch
8O Taillight x Related wiring
signal TNS off 1.0 or less harnesses
TNS ON B+ x License plate light
TNS switch License plate
8P x Related wiring
signal light TNS off 1.0 or less harnesses
*1 : With theft-deterrent system

*2 : With double locking system
*3 : With car-navigation system
*6 : With side turn light (power outer mirror type)
*7 : With memory power seat
Generated pulse (reference)

Pattern 1
0V
x Terminal: 8G (+) body ground (-)

CONTROL SYSTEM
Pattern 2
0V
x Terminal:
— Bonnet latch switch signal: 1S (+) body ground (-)
— Front door latch switch (driver side) input signal: 8B (+) body ground (-)
— Lock/unlock input: 8C (+) body ground (-)
— Front door latch switch (passenger side) signal: 8D (+) body ground (-)
— Unlock input (Driver-side door lock-link switch): 8E (+) body ground (-)
— Rear door latch switch (RH) signal: 8F (+) body ground (-)
— Lock input (Driver-side door lock-link switch): 8G (+) body ground (-)
— Rear door latch switch (LH) signal: 8H (+) body ground (-)
Pattern 3
0V
x Terminal: 5F (+) body ground (-)

x Oscilloscope setting: 1 V/DIV (Y), 200Ps/DIV (X), DC range
Pattern 4
0V
x Terminal:
— Interior light control: 6M (+) body ground (-)
— Courtesy light control: 6O (+) body ground (-)
End Of Sie
CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) CONFIGURATION
2. After the vehicle is identified, select "Module
Programming" from the initial screen of the IDS.
3. Select "Programmable Module Installation", then
select "BCM/GEM" from the screen menu.
End Of Sie
TECHNICAL DATA
09-50 TECHNICAL DATA

BODY AND ACCESSORIES
TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09-50–1
End of Toc TECHNICAL DATA
BODY AND ACCESSORIES TECHNICAL DATA
Item Specifications (W) u

number
Headlight bulb (HI) 65 u 2
Halogen type
Headlight bulb (LO) 55 u 2
With AFS (adaptive 35 u 2
Discharge headlight (HI/LO)
front lighting system)
Discharge type Without AFS Headlight bulb (HI) 65 u 2
(adaptive front lighting 35 u 2
system) Discharge headlight (LO)
Front turn light bulb 21 u 2
Parking light bulb 5u2
Exterior light bulb Front fog light bulb 55 u 2
capacity Rear fog light bulb 21 u 1
Side turn light (Front fender panel type) 5u2
Side turn light (Power outer mirror type) (LED) 0.6 u 2
Brake/taillight bulb 21 / 5u 2
Brake/taillight (LED) 6.7 / 0.6u 2
Rear turn light bulb 21 u 2
Back-up light bulb 21 u 1
License plate light bulb 5u2
High-mount brake light (LED) 2.4 u 1
Front map light bulb 8u2
Interior light bulb 10 u 1
Cargo compartment light bulb (5HB) 5u1
Interior light bulb Cargo compartment light bulb (WGN) 10 u 1
capacity Trunk room light bulb (4SD) 3u1
Glove compartment light 1.7 u 1
Courtesy light bulb 5u2
Vanity mirror illumination bulb 2u2
End Of Sie
SERVICE TOOLS
09-60 SERVICE TOOLS

BODY AND ACCESSORIES SST . . . . . . 09-60–1
SERVICE TOOLS
BODY AND ACCESSORIES SST
49 G067 0A0 49 G067 001 49 G067 002
Doppler Doppler Stand

simulator set simulator (Component
(Component part of 49 G067
part of 49 G067 0A0)
0A0)
49 G067 003 49 F042 001
AC-DC Wrench
converter —
(Component
part of 49 G067
0A0)
End Of Sie

Mazda6 J61S PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mazda6 J61S PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAZDA

BODY & ACCESSORIES 09

B+ STEERING LOCK STEERING LOCK UNIT

x The OBD (on-board diagnostic) system has the following functions:

DTC No. Description Reference

U0001:88 CAN system communication error

(See 09-02A-129 DTC U0028:87

(See 09-02O-1 FOREWORD

(See 09-02A-131 DTC U0401:68

KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT (RED)

PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Short to ground in steering lock unit ground circuit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

DESCRIPTION Short to ground in steering lock unit power supply circuit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT (RED)

PUSH BUTTON START

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

DESCRIPTION Signal error from steering lock unit

DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit programming error

KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT (RED)

PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Error signal of steering lock unit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit malfunction

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

DESCRIPTION Communication error to steering lock unit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE STEERING LOCK UNIT

KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT (RED)

PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit malfunction

KEYLESS WARNING LIGHT (RED)

PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Steering lock unit internal malfunction

DESCRIPTION Programming error of advanced key

DESCRIPTION Short to ground in push button start 1 circuit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Error signal of push button start

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Short to ground in push button start 2 circuit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE PUSH BUTTON START

DESCRIPTION Open circuit or short to power supply in keyless beeper circuit

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS BEEPER

DESCRIPTION Short to ground in touch sensor (LF) circuit

TOUCH SENSOR (LF)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FRONT OUTER HANDLE (LH)

DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in touch sensor (LF) circuit

TOUCH SENSOR (LF)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FRONT OUTER HANDLE (LH)

DESCRIPTION Short to ground in touch sensor (RF) circuit

TOUCH SENSOR (RF)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FRONT OUTER HANDLE (RH)

DESCRIPTION Short to power supply in touch sensor (RF) circuit

TOUCH SENSOR (RF)

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE FRONT OUTER HANDLE (RH)

DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (exterior, rear) circuit malfunction

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (EXTERIOR, REAR)

DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, rear) circuit malfunction

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, REAR)

DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, center) circuit malfunction

KEYLESS CONTROL MODULE KEYLESS ANTENNA (INTERIOR, CENTER)

DESCRIPTION Keyless antenna (interior, front) circuit malfunction